This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http : //books . google . com/
UNiVERSiTY
OF VIRGINIA
CHARLOTTESVItLE
LIBRARY
<^^o
GRAMMAR AND DICTIONARY OF THE
BULUBA-LULUA LANGUAGE
GRAMMAR AND DICTIONARY
OF THB
BULUBA-LULUA LANGUAGE
AS SPOKEN IN THE UPPER KASAI AND
CONGO BASIN
PREPARED FOR THE AMERICAN PRESBYTERIAN
CONGO MISSION BY
W. M. MORRISON
MUtUnary of the Southern Presbyterian Church
in tht C^ngo Independent Stat*
AMERICAN TRACT SOCIETY
160 NASSAU STREET
NEW YORK
PL
Copyright, 1906
BY
AMERICAN TRACT SOCIETY
PREFACE.
The Baluba and Lulua people, in language and in race, belong to
the great Bantu family, which, though having many different subdivi-
sions, occupies, roughly speaking, all of Africa south of the fifth parallel
of north latitude, the Hottentot-Bushmen in the extreme south being
the only exception. These Bantu languages are radically diflFerent
from the distinctly negro dialects of the peoples bordering them on
the north. While the dififerent Bantu dialects have much in common
so far as some of the general characteristics are concerned, yet there
are many degrees of difference. Some -are perhaps as widely apart
as the English and the Greek, while others are so near akin that the
differences amount to nothing more than localisms or a brogue.
This latter fact is true of the language spoken by the Baluba and
the Lulua people, who together occupy a large area in Central Africa,
extending, roughly speaking, from the junction of the Lulua and Kasai
rivers in a general southeasterly direction into Garenganze, where the
language is called Ciluba. They thus occupy the high and compara-
tively healthy table-lands on the divide between the headwaters of
the Kasai and the Congo on one side and the Zambezi on the other.
Moreover, these peoples are remarkably docile, peaceable, industrious
and eager for civilization, and are in many respects far superior to
many African tribes. It has thus come about that the Baluba, espe-
cially, are eagerly sought after as slaves, with the result that many
thousands of them have been carried into captivity, often into foreign
tribes.
These facts, together with the wide area covered by these two peoples,
have made their tongue the lingua franca, or "trade" language, of the
greater part of the upper Kasai and Congo basin, thus enabling one
understanding it to go almost everywhere over this vast region and
be understood. It is gratifying to note that the Buluba-Lulua is very
near of kin to the Lunda and Tongo which are spoken over a large
area on the south. It would be useless to attempt to estimate the num-
ber of people speaking with more or less divergency the language whose
V
VI PREFACE.
laws this book attempts to put into tangible shape. All this is par-
ticularly fortunate in view of the fact that so many of the languages
of Africa are confined to very narrow geographical limits.
Since the establishment of the American Presbyterian Mission at
Luebo, which place is located on the north bank of the Lulua river
at its junction with the Luebo, several thousand Baluba and Lulua
people have come there and settled — the Lulua from the immediate
south and east, and the Baluba from the regions still farther to the
east. Through these numerous immigrants Luebo has become a cos-
mopolitan j^iace, with reflex influences going out in turn to the different
tribes and villages represented there.
While there are slight differences in some of the root words used by
the Baluba and the Lulua and some differences in the tones or manner
of pronunciation, the Baluba being smooth and rhythmic, the Lulua
more harsh and guttural, yet these diversities are so slight that we feel
warranted in grouping the language of these two peoples under the
one name Buluba-Lulua. It must, however, be borne in mind thiat
each of these tribes is still farther subdivided into clans or groups^
where there may and often does exist a still farther variation in the
words. It is a curious fact that the very names Baluba and Lulua
do not seem to have been originally used by the people in speaking
of themselves; these names have been given them by outsiders. Among
themselves they go by the clan names, such as Bakua Kaloshi, Bakua
Chimanga, Bakua Temba, etc.
In this book no effort has been made to separate the words of the
two peoples, for they are so intimately intermingled that this would
at present be hopeless, confusing and unprofitable. Nor has any effort
been made to find all the possible words used among the different clans;
only the commoner words used about Luebo are introduced. This
opens up. a wide field for future study and investigation, and of course
means th^t variations from the. words given. in this book will become
more numerous as the distance from Luebo increases. It is easy to
understand how. these almost infinite differentiations have sprung up.
There is no tribal unity, no literature, the villages and clans are more
or less. isolated from each other, with, the consequent jealousies. But
we believe that as communication is established between the different
clans, and especially as the written language which the missionaries
are sending out becomes more widely circulated, a unifying process
will set in.
On the other hand, the language, especially as spoken in the region
about Luebo and such other cosmopolitan centres, where the outside
world is touched, is constantly growing — and, strange to say, becoming
PREFACE. vii
more unified — by the accession of new and foreign words. For about
Luebc we not only have a commingling of other tribes, such as the
Bakete, the Bakuba, the Zappo Zapps, etc., but the native quickly
takes up words from the missionary, the white trader, the Government
official, or the West Coast English-speaking carpenter. These over-
sea foreigners, in passing through the Lower Congo region, pick up
native words as used there and bring them farther into the interior.
The Portuguese were the earliest European settlers on the coast about
the mouth of the Congo river, and a goodly number of their words have
found the way back into the interior languages; the name mputu,
which means the country of the foreign white man, is a corruption
of Portugal. Smce the native naturally lacks names for many articles
in common use by the foreigner, it is not surprising that the foreign
word is often introduced and the native is proud to use it. The word
is nativized and thus takes its place in the language. I say nativized,
for although these new words find their place in the language, yet
there is a strong tendency to preserve the native grammatical con-
structions, and, after all, the foreign words are comparatively few.
My observation is that the language is spoken with greater gram-
matical purity about Luebo to-day than it was some years ago.
And just here it is interesting to note that although there is a re-
markable richness of the language in some directions, there is a no
less remarkable paucity of terms in other directions. For example,
there is no word for the young of living creatures. The indefinite
muana, childj is used for all alike. There is no sitigle word for brother
or sister. The native recognizes only three distinct colors, red, white
and black ; there is nothing for green, the most common color in the tropics.
The verb dila is made to do service for cry, bawl, bleat, squeal, roar,
croak, bray, tick (as watch). There are no pronouns indicating sex.
There is no satisfactory word for love; the same word which the native
uses for God's love he must also use to express his liking for salt or
his preference for a certain kind of cloth. Sometimes one fairly cries
out in agony for a word to express some of the strong English words
like ought, duty, must, obligation, etc. And so the list might be easily
Increased. Perhaps as our knowledge of the language grows, we
may discover terms for some of these ideas. It is not surprising, there-
fore, to find a great dearth of words to express religious thought. In
some cases the missionaries have, by common consent, introduced a
word, generally from the Greek or Hebrew. We have thought it safer
and more satisfactory sometimes to introduce thus an entirely new
word rather than try to use a native word which would inaccurately
convey the idea intended. It is interesting here to recall that very
viu PREFACE.
many of the ecclesiastical words in the English language were brought
in at the time of the introduction of Christianity into England. I
have also taken the liberty, on my own responsibility, of introducing
into the Vocabulary a few words for some common household articles
for which the natives have no equivalent. Since English is the lan-
guage of those for whom this book is chiefly intended, the introduced
words are naturally taken from that language.
At the request of my colleagues on the Mission, the preparation of
this work was undertaken some months after my arrival in Africa in
1897. My first intention was to prepare a small book to contain only
the essentials of the language and the more common words, but as I
went farther into the work I found that I could not be certain of the
essentials without myself going quite into details. Having done this,
it seemed a waste of labor not to record the result of the investigations
in permanent form. It is now my purpose to prepare a short hand-
book embodying only the essentials and intended for beginners in the
language. The growth of the work as I have progressed, and the
fact that it was the first of the kind ever undertaken in this dialect,
combined with the many missionary duties, from which it was impossible
on account of the smallness of our force for me to be released so that
I could give my full time to the language study, have postponed the
completion of this task much longer than I had anticipated. Often
weeks at a time have intervened when it was impossible, either on
account of illness or on account of other, more pressing missionary
duties, to push the work on. Even after the greater part of the material
had been gotten into tangible shape before my return to America, I
have found the revising, correcting, copying and getting of the matter
ready for the press a much greater undertaking than I had anticipated.
For these reasons I ask the forbearance of my colleagues who have
waited so patiently for the work to appear. I must also express my
appreciation of the kindness shown by the Executive Committee of
Foreign Missions of the Presbyterian Church, who have patiently
allowed me to carry on this work, trusting only to my own word and
to that of my colleagues that my time and energy and the Church's
money were being rightly spent.
I must express my obligation for helpful suggestions gotten here
and there from works in other dialects of the Bantu family; especially
might be mentioned those of Torrend, Bentley, Whitehead, Stapleton»
Bishop Steere, Wilson, Pilkington, Nassau and Bleek. Declerq's
Grammaire de la Langue des Bena Ltdua, though only a pamphlet,
giving with more or less accuracy the merest outlines of the language,
was exceedingly helpful in the early stages of the work. I have appre-
PREFACE. IX
dated Stapleton's frankness in admitting difficulties, and his breadth
of view in dealing with the comparative language problems. I am
indebted to Dr. D. W. C. Snyder for the manuscript of his work in
the Bakete dialect. And I am under many obligations to my colleagues,
especially Mr. and Mrs. Sheppard and Mr. Hawkins, for giving me a
start in the early days.
I have sometimes ventured to differ from the majority of Bantu
grammars, but it has been done in order to secure greater simpUcity.
And here I must not fail to mention the names of native lads who
have helped me, generally most patiently, through the long weary
discussions and investigations which they could not understand. Among
these may be mentioned Kazadi, Kabata, Kamuidika and Kachunga.
The latter spent over a year with me in America. Some of the girls
were most helpful, especially Malendola. These were not all kept
in constant employ, but were called on as needed, for I soon found it
better to use several language-helpers than to rely on the judgment
of only one.
I most heartily express my personal gratitude and that of my col-
leagues and the Society which I represent to the American Tract Society
for so generously undertaking, partly at its own expense, the publication
of this work.
It is to be hoped that the book will prove helpful to Govern mefit
officials, traders or travelers, but the motive which has inspired the
writer through it all has been the belief that it would aid the missionary
more quickly and more accurately to learn the language of this great
people, hoping that in due time schools would be widely established
and the Word of Life given to the people in a language which they
could read and understand.
Many perplexing problems have arisen as to spelling, as to con-
struction, and as to the exact meaning of words, and the author is most
painfully conscious of the many inaccuracies which farther study and
investigation by himself or others will reveal in his work, which makes
no claim to being exhaustive or perfect; yet he will feel abundantly
compensated for all the labor it has taken if the book will aid in a wider
dissemination of the gospel. To this end he prays that it may be
used.
I feel that I cannot pass this book into the hands of my fellow mis-
sionaries without saying . a final word to them. The Government
official or the trader or the traveler can get along and accomplish
his work with only a superficial knowledge of the language. Not so
with the missionary: he is to deliver the gospel message, and a deep
and thorough acquaintance with the language which is his chief medium
PREFACE.
of communication should be his constant ambition, that the message
may be delivered accurately and intelligibly. I have noticed that
almost invariably the man who speaks the language with fluency is
the man who commands attention and whose influence will be the
most widely felt. May I utter a warning ? There is danger of reaching
a point where we make no farther progress in the language. This
should not be. Study and investigation on our part should never cease.
This book is by no means accurate or exhaustive — ^it is only intended
as a guide and a help to wider and deeper study of the language, which
I hope and pray will be inspired by the thought of Him who commanded
us to " preach the gospel to every creature."
W. M. Morrison.
Lbxington. Va., January, 1906.
GRAMMAR.
ORTHOGRAPHY.
I. THE ALPHABET.
1. The Buluba-Lulua alphabet consists of
thirty letters, each repre.
senting a
distinct sound. They are as follows
Letters.
Pronun-
ciation.
English
Equivalents.
Examples.
a
as a in father
malu, affairs.
a
as a in hat
kub&la, k) count.
a
as a in fall
buk&le, strength.
' b
bay
as b in bone
bantu, people.
chay
as ch in choose
muclma, liver.
day
as d in day
bldia, bread.
e
as e in they
kuteka, to put.
e
as e in met
dlk€la, egg.
fay
as f in fat
kuflka, to arrive.
gay
as g in king
kubanga, to begin.
hay
no equivalent (§ 6)
luhehelCf wind.
i
as i in machine
bibl, badly.
I
asi in hit
kuxiba, to kill.
1
as i in pine
ml, water.
jay
as j in French jeune.
kujula, to pull up.
kay
as k in king
kulua, to come.
lay
as 1 in long .
lubllu, hurry.
m
may
as m in man
muntu, person.
nay
as n in not
kunan^a, to love.
o
as o in note
dlboko, arm.
pay
as p in pay
mpuku, rat.
. say .
as s in'sit
kusaya, to cut up.
lay
as t in tone
tulu, sleep.
u
as u in rule
lufu, death..
tt
as u in but
mnktkxi, woman.
vay
as V in vine
kuvua, to wash.
way
as w in water
wewe, thou.
shay
as sh in shall
kux&la, to remain.
yay
as y in yonder
kuya, to go.
zay
as z in zone
koiakala, to quake.
THE ALPHABET.
Note i. It will be observed that the governing principle of the above
alphabet is that it shall be phonetic, letting each sound in the language
be represented by a distinct letter. The letters m and n in double-
consonant constructions furnish an apparent exception, having each
a sound difiFerent from that indicated above, but this will be treated
later. §§ 13-15.
According to the above principle, therefore, the letters a, &, and 11
are not to be regarded as different sounds of the same letter, but as
different, letters. The same is true of e and 6^ i and I and I, u and fl.
In the Vocabulary, however, in order to avoid confusion, the words
are arranged in the ordinary way, regardless of the order of the letters
as above given.
Note 2. In order to aid beginners in the pronunciation and to pre-
vent confusion it has seemed almost necessary to introduce in this
book the short sounds &, e, I, and tk, also the longer & and I. Perhaps
later, after the language has become more fixed in its orthography,
many of these diacritical markings can be omitted, especially in books
intended entirely for native use. At the same time the learner must
be warned that accurate pronunciation can only be gotten by carefully
listening to the words as they are spoken by the natives. Cultivate,
from the very beginning, the habit of careful listening. Having once
caught the sound, the pronunciation will not generally be difficult.
It will be observed that the diacritical marks, with the exception of
&, are those us d in Webster's Dictionary.
Note 3. Observe that the letters J, v and s are used mostly by the
Baluba, while the Lulua people generally use x, f and s respectively.
The sounds are so nearly alike that little confusion arises. In the
Vocabulary, the spelling adopted has been determined as far as possible
either by the dialect to which the word most probably belongs or by
the form most commonly heard about Luebo. At the same time it
must always be borne in mind that the native gives the sound peculiar
to his own dialect. These differences in pronunciation are often due
to the front teeth being filed or, in some cases, knocked out.
Note 4. Sometimes, in order to show where contraction has taken
place, the circumflex (*) is used over certain vowels, but, since it pro-
duces no marked difference in sound, these letters are not introduced
into the alphabet.
Note 5. In spelling, the natives are taught to give to each vowel
its exact sound, and to let each consonant be followed by the sound of
e in they. Unfortunately, custom has made exceptions of m and b,
which are pronounced as in English, but consistency would indicate
that they should also fall in line with the other consonants.
THE ALPHABET.
Vowels.
2« The -long vowels are a, e, i, I, o and u, with which may be classed
the broad &. The short vowels are ft, S, I and fl.
Rem. The vowels present no difficulties in pronunciation, but it
is often hard to distinguish between a and I, between a and A, between
o and (i, between I and the diphthong ai, between the long and short
sounds of the same letter. Shall we write muci winyi or muci wanyt
(my stick)? Shall it be mukaxi or mukikzi (woman)? kumtkna or
kumona (to see) ? ml or mai (water) ? Only time and farther light
can settle these questions definitely.
Consonants.
S» The consonants b, d, f, k, 1, p, s, t, ▼ and s have the common
English pronunciation and need no farther explanation.
4* C is arbitrarily used to represent the single sound of ch in church,
though it often has much the sound of ts in nuts.
5* G is always found in combination with n, and has the peculiar
sound of g in king. The g is thus never found alone and it seems im-
possible for the native, even in spelling, to give g the simple hard sound
of g in go — ^it always has the nasal preceding.
Rem. The distinct hard sound of ^ as in go is heard, however, in some
dialects, especially that of the Bakete. For example, the Baluba and
Bena Lulua say ku-nans-a, like English sing-er, while the Bakete
say ku-nan-ga, like English stronger (pronounced as stron-ger).
6* H is arbitrarily used to represent a peculiar breathing sound
which is not found in the English. It is near of kin to / and p, though
clearly distinct from each. It is important to distinguish it from these
two letters, since upon this depend certain laws of euphony which will
be considered later. To produce this sound, as in the word luhehele,
place the Ups as preparing to whistle, not protruding them too much,
and being careful not to press the lower lip up against the teeth, then
expel the breath, uttering the sound, allowing the lips to fall apart.
?• J has the softer French sound of ; in jeune.
8. M has always its usual English sound save in the double-con-
sonant forms at the beginning of words. § 14 (b).
9* N usually has the simple sharp nasal sound of n in not, save when
it is combined with other consonants. § 15.
10. W is used only in its force as a consonant; it is therefore not
employed in diphthongs or other vowel combinations. The close re-
lation of w to u is observed in certain euphonic changes. § 27.
11» X is used arbitrarily to represent the single sound of sh.
THE ALPHABET.
12* T is always a consonant ; it is therefore not employed in diphthongs
or other vowel combinations. Its close relation to the vowel 1 is seen
in certain euphonic changes. § 28.
Double Consonants.
13. Double consonants occur only when m and n are prefixed to
other consonants. M. is found before b and p, n before c, d, f, gy J,
k, s, t. ▼, X, y and s.
14. In the pronunciation of the double consonants with m we must
note:
(a) When the double consonants come in the body of the\word,
the division of the syllable occurs between the two consonants, and
m consequently has its common sound.
Wa-kum-pa, he has given to me.
(6) When, however, the double consonants come at the beginning
of the word a peculiar and unfamiliar sound is given to the combi-
nation. In the pronunciation of mpqku, rat, for example, close the
lips, let the initial sound pass out through the nose, then expel the
breath, uttering puku.
15. In the pronunciation of the double consonants with n we must
note:
(a) When n with another consonant comes at the beginning of a
word a peculiar sound is given to the combination. Note the pro-
• nunciation of nsubq, house. Throw the end of the tongue up against
the roof of the mouth as in the pronunciation of n, allow the initial
sound to pass out through the nose, then expel the breath, uttering
suba.
Note. G in such cases has the sound of g in kingy not the hard sound
of^in^o.
Ngoma, drum; ngombe, ox.
(b) When n, with another consonant, comes in the body of a word
we have the two following sounds: .
(i) When the n comes before c, d, t and y, the division of the syllable
occurs between the two consonants, and n consequently has its common
sound.
Wa-kun-da-ya, he promised me; wa-kun-ta«ma, he sent
me; ku-mtkn-ya, to know.
Rem. The pronunciation of ny is the same as the Spanish n in canon .
Some Bantu grammarians write this sound combination with a Spanish
character. Sometimes the y is very slightly sounded and this may
THE ALPHABET.
account for the fact that in certain constructions it loses its signifi-
cance, though not its sound, and is treated as if it were not present.
§ 329 (^)-
(2) When the n comes before f, g, J, k, s, v, x and s it has a peculiar
ringing sound like ng in kingy things etc. In such cases there is a
decided nasal tone just before the consonant, but be careful not to allow
the end of the tongue to touch the roof of the mouth in attempting to
pronounce the n. For division of the syllables in such cases, see § 21,
Rem.
Wakunva, he heard; wakunkuma, he flogged me; wakanxia,
he left me.
Note i. G in such cases carefully preserves the usual sound of g
in king.
Note 2. For n before b see § 32.
Diphthongs and Vowel Combinations.
16. There are several proper diphthongs in which both vowels are
sounded with the same expulsion of the breath. The more, common
are as follows:
(a) Ua, pronounced as wa in wash.*
Bualu, affair.
(b) Ue, pronounced as u^z in persuade.
Kuebi, at your house.
(c) Ui, pronounced as ue in desuetude.
Kuiba, to steal.
(d) UI, pronounced as ui in quiet.
Kolnyl, at my house.
(e) Uo, pronounced as uo in quote.
Baonso, entirety.
Rem. Often the u is very slightly 'sounded, as in muoyo, life; but
in order to preserve consistency the u is always written.
(f) la, pronounced as ea in idea.
Btdia, bread.
* Some of these may not improperly be called semi-consonant diphthongs
since w or y can be substituted for the u and the i respectively in many cases
so far as the sound is concerned. For example bualu might be spelled bwalu.
and would be so spelled in most Bantu grammars but since it seems expedient,
for the sake of symmetry in concord, to preserve as far as possible the original
form? of the language the regular u and i are retained m all such cases except
when they begin a word and are followed by a vowel in the same syllable, or
when they stand between two vowels. §§27. 28.
SYLLABLES.
(g) '«» pronounced very much as ea in create,
Biebi, your (things),
(h) II, pronounced something as ei in deity,
Dilnyi, fat.
{{) lo, pronounced as to in Ethiopia.
Bionso, all {things),
(j) lu, pronounced very much as eu in feud or ieu in adieu, "
Diulu, the heavens.
17. There are also the combinations au, al, ea, eu and el, which
perhaps may as well be called diphthongs, otherwise a separate syllable
would have to be made for the second vowel, thus causing confusion
in the spelling.
18. It will thus be noticed that all vowel combinations are treated
as diphthongs and hence are regarded as one syllable.
Bna-lu, kui-ba, kau-ku-lu-ke, kai-ku«lu«ke, nea-lue.
II. SYLLABLES.
19. The syllables are divided so as to represent in the most accu-
rate manner the pronunciation rather than the etymology.
30. Where there is not a double consonant to be considered, the
syllable begins with a consonant and ends with a vowel or diphthong.
Of course each diphthong with its consonant makes a syllable. See
§i8.
Ku-zi-ka-ma, to sit down\ mua-na, child.
Rem. I. In some words the final vowel is very slightly sounded, but
if the word is used emphatically or in construction, a vowel sound will
generally be detected. It is, however, sometimes difficult to deter-
mine just what sound it is.
Rem. 2. The initial letter of some words is a vowel.
Ebl, your eggs (makj^la understood); atanu, five eggs; onso,
aU the eggs; udi, he is; aba, these people; itaba, answer (imper-
ative mood); etc.
31. When double consonants occur the division takes place between
the consonants.
M un-tu, person; wa-kum-pa, he has given me* mu-lun-da,
friend.
Rem. I. When n comes before f, g, J, k, s. v, x and s [§ 15 (6) (2)],
the division is made regularly between the two consonants, but it must
EUPHONY.
be borne in mind that the n has only a slight nasal sound, especially
in ng. In fact the pronunciation might best be preserved in some
cases by making the division after the consonants as in the English
word sing-eTy but confusion may perhaps best be avoided by holding
to the rule above made.
Blu-ke-len-ge, chief; wa-kun-va, he heard.
Rem. 2. While there are good reasons for following most Bantu
grammars in making the syllable begin with a double consonant
(mu-ntu, wa-ku«mpa, etc.), yet we believe that simpHcity is gained
by letting the division come between the consonant as above suggested.
III. EUPHONY.
33. This is an important subject which meets us at every turn in
this highly inflected language and should be studied with great care.
Elison and Contraction of Vowels.
33. A vowel is elided when it comes before its like in the same
word, and a regularly elides before all other vowels in the same word.
Consequently
a+a becomes a; i+i becomes I; u+u becomes u;
a+e becomes e; a+i becomes i; a + I becomes I;
a+o becomes o; a+u becomes u.
Hence ba+ana becomes bana, children; bi+lmpe becomes bimpe,
good (bintu, thingSy understood); ku + umuka becomes kuinuka, to
go out; ka+ele becomes kele, small knife; ba+lbi becomes bibi,
thieves; ba+Inyi becomes blnyi, my (bantu, people^ understood);
ba+onso becomes bonso, all (bantu, people^ understood); bad!
ba+ula becomes bad! bula, they are buying.
Rem. I. After the elision the remaining vowel generally has a long
full sound. This is true to such an extent when a vowel is elided
before its like (or the two are contracted into one) that the remaining
vowel is often pronounced almost as a diaeresis. Generally this elision
is not represented in writing, but sometimes, in order to preserve the
form of the language and prevent confusion, the remaining vowel may
be marked with a circumflex {^_). Thus ka+a becomes ka, ku+
umuxa becomes kdmuxa, cl+i becomes ct, a+a becomes &, etc.
Rem. 2. Sometimes, in order to preserve the parts of the word dis-
tinct, the a is not elided; in such cases it forms a diphthong (§ i8).
Ka+ukuluke remains kaukuluke, that it rmuel, stick) may not fall-
Rem. 3. In verbal inflection, involving combinations of several vowels-
8 EUPHONY.
elision and contraction often take place; as, bia+ikftleye becomes
bik&leye, if he becomes'^ neaense becomes nense, he wiU do.
Rem. 4. In the inflection of some words a peculiar coalescence of a
and i into e takes place. Hence ma+ isu becomes mesu, eye5\ ha+ ihl
becomes hehi, near\ ba+tne becomes bene, they alone,
24. In construction, between words in sentences, elisions are of
comparatively rare occurrence. In such cases the elision is indicated
by an apostrophe ('), but no elision is thus indicated unless the pro-
nunciation is seriously affected, or unless the remaining form would
otherwise appear unfamiliar. The following are the most common
cases of elision in construction :
{a) Sometimes the final vowel of a word is elided when the follow-
ing word begins with a vowel; as, n'andi, with him, for ne andi; n'abo,
with them, for ne abo; n'eci, with it, for ne eci.
(6) In some cases the elision is made at the beginning of the second
word; as, tatu'etn, our father, for tatu wetu; mamu'etu, our mother,
for mamu wetu.
(c) Sometimes two elisions occur, one at the end of the preceding
and the other at the beginning of the following word; as, muan'andi,
his child, for muana wandi.
{d) Note the peculiar elision of a in the word ham'bldi, on the body,
for ha miubidi
Assimilation of Vowels.
25» Note the assimilation of e to a under the influence of a, and
of e to o under the influence of u; as, hanaha (§ 163, Note 2) from
baneha; aha (§ 149) from eha; ama (§ 149) from ema; munomu
from munemu; kunoku from kuneku. See § 34 (6).
Rem. Sometimes we hear munemu and kuneku without the assimi-
lation.
26. The principle of assimilation is also seen in certain verbal
suffixes where i is found after a, i and u (with the corresponding short
vowels), whereas e is found after e and o. See §§ 329 (a) {b).
Rem. Some forms take u after u. § 334 (c).
Change of U to W and I to Y.
37. In inflection, when u comes between two other vowels or when
it begins a word and is followed by a vowel in the same syllable it takes
the consonant form w. See foot-note on § 16 (a). Hence kauena
becomes kawena, it (mucl„ stick) is not; uakuya becomes wakuya,
he has gone; uaua becomes wawa, that man (mulumi understood).
38. In inflection, when i comes between two other vowels or when
it begins a word and is followed by a vowel in the same syllable it takes
EUPHONY.
the consonant form y. See foot-note on § i6 (a). Hence kalakadl
becomes kayakadi, they (nsolo, fowls) were not; lakadl becomes
yakadt, they (0SOIO, fowls) were.
Euphonic Change of Consonants.
29. Before 1 or under the influence of n, 1 becomes d; as, kalekeli
becomes kulekedi, do not let hose; ndl nlonda becomes ndt ndonda,
/ am following.
Note. D and 1 are often used interchangeably in some words, due
to differences in dialects. Hence we hear both daa and lua, come;
cilulu and ctdadu, cloth,
30. Before i, t becomes c, and s becomes x. Hence kukaati be-
comes kukaaci, donH hold; kuasi becomes kuaxi, don*t build.
31* When n comes before p or b it becomes m according to § 13.
Thus, npansa becomes mpansa, cups; nbombo becomes mbombo, pi.
of lubombo, ten thousand.
33. When n comes before h the latter changes to p and the n con-
sequently becomes m ({ 13); so nhemba becomes mpemba, a white
earth; wakanha becomes wakumpa, he gave to me; ndl nhana be-
comes ndl mpana, I am selling; wakunhidia becomes wakumpidia,
he has refused me.
Note. It is thus seen to be very important to distinguish clearly
between f and h and p, and this is often exceedingly difficult to do.
Before f, which always has a sharp distinct utterance, the n remains
unchanged; as, wakunfundlla, he has written for me; wakunfila,
he accompanied me,
33. In inflections n, coming before a form which begins with a vowel,
becomes ng. Hence n-ala becomes ngala, finger-nails; n-esu becomes
ngesu, pots; wakun-ambila becomes wakungambila, he told me;
ndl n-owa becomes ndt ngowa, / am washing myself; nen-ule be-
comes nengule, I shall buy.
Rem. I. In inflection of certain tenses where the tense sign begins
with a vowel, long custom in leaving out the g in preparation of the
native literature has induced the author to do so in this book, though
it is incorrect in fact. Nakadi should be written ngakadi, I luas;
nakadila should be ngakudila, / was crying; etc.
Rem. 2. N coming before m or n in inflected forms is omitted. Hence
ndi nmona becomes ndl mona, I am looking; ndl nnua becomes
ndl nal^ 7 am drinking; ndl nnumona becomes ndl numona, I am
looking at you,
34. Sometimes certain consonants serve to separate two vowels. *
(a) T is thus inserted in inflection between I and a following vowel;
lO ACCENT.
«o Bknnyl becomes nklyfnyt, / myself (§ io8); mMandl become^
mblyandi, her husband (§ 138, Rem. 3, Note); kayiyi ({ 159, Note 2).
Rem. T is inserted between n and i in certain inflections, in fact
it is doubtful if i is ever permitted to follow n directly.
Kusuni becomes kusunyi, don*t carry water; kucinyl, dan*t be
afraid; kusunyina, to carry water for one. See §§ 236 (a), Rem. 3,
and 329 (rf).
(b) N is thus used between u and e and between a and a in mnnemu,
kanel(u and hanaha (§ 163, Note 2).
IV. ACCENT.
35* As a general rule it may be said that the accent in simple words
falls on the penult with also a secondary accent on the fourth syllable
from the end in polysyllabic words. In inflected words the accent
is on the initial syllable of the root; when more than two syllabled
follow the accented syllable a secondary accent falls on the penult.
But it must be constantly borne in mind that Buluba-Lulua words ore,
for the most pant^ devoid of a strong accent on any yyllable. In this re-
spect this language resembles the French. The smoothness of pronun-
ciation and the lack of strong accent make it all the more difficult for
EngUsh-speaking persons to refrain from giving too much accent to
the words, since the English has such decided accent on all words of
more than one syllable. Great care in listening and much practice in
speaking furnish the only means by which to learn to pronounce with
that smoothness and musical flow so characteristic of the natives in
speaking their own language.
CiMkuMku, greens; bakufAndilangftna, they have written to each
other.
Rem. Diphthongs, of course, are regarded as single syllables.
KAAvLAjtocome; kAnvLW^, to drink; kAdia,/0 0a/; kfthla. ;$r<!; kubuiUi*
k&Ba, to commingle.
THE PARTS OF SPEECH.
NOUNS.
36* The inflection of nouns is made not by suffix terminations, as
in the Indo-European system of languages, but by the use of prefixes.
This is a remarkable characteristic of the Bantu languages and demands
careful attention, for it is confusing to have to look at the end of the
word for the root instead of at the beginning. But this subject will
be treated more fully later (| 59).
NOUNS. II
37. The only variation of the noun is that to express number, sin-
gular and plural. Fortunately there is no complicated Case system as
is found in many European languages. These case relations, much
as is the situation in English, are shown by the position of the word in
the sentence or by certain prepositional words.
38. There is likewise no complicated Gender system, which is
carried to such a perplexing extent in Latin, Greek, French and German.
For farther discussion of the question of gender see § 56.
Number.
39. In the Buluba-Lulua language there are two numbers, singular
and plural.
40. The variations for number are made by certain prefixes, and
according to these prefixes the nouns divide themselves into eight
classes. It is of the utmost importance to learn these perfectly, for the
whole principle of concord depends upon them.
These prefixes for the different classes are as follows: *
Singular. Plural.
Class
I.
mu-
ba-
II.
mu-
ml-
III.
■-
B-
IV:
In-
n-
V.
dl-
ma-
VI.
bu-
ma-
VII.
et-
M-
VIII.
ka-
tu-
Each of these classes is now taken up in order.
Class I.
41. In this class mu- is prefixed to the stem for the singular and
ba- for the plural.
Singular. Plural.
mu-ntu, a person ba-ntu, persons
mu-lumt, a man ba-lumi, men
mu-kelenge, a chief ba-kelenge, chiefs
mu-lunda, jriertd ba-lunda, friends
Rem. Observe the laws of euphony in such words as nm-ana, child,
which has the plural bana; mu-ena, person^ which has the plural
bena. { 23.
* The arrangement of these classes is arbitrary, but since the singular of the
first three classes has much in common, these are grouped together. The same
is true of the plural of classes II III and IV. and also of V and VI.
12 NOUNS.
43. Under this class must also be placed some words which are
defective in not having any singular prefix. The concord oi verbs,
adjectives, etc., however, is regular throughout, just as if the singular
prefix were present, save with the possessive adjective pronouns (§ 138).
These words nearly always express some family relationship. The
following is a list of the more common of these words:
Singular. Plural.
tatu, father batatu, fathers
mama, mother bamamu, mothers
baba, mother bababa, mothers
nyoku, mother banyoku, mothers
ny\n{a); mother ha,nyln{a.), mothers
nyinka, grandparent banylnka, grandparents
kaka, grandparent bakaku, grandparents
mbl, husband bambi, husbands
X*, father bax% fathers
nfumu, chief banfumu, chiefs
zakena, namesake baxakena, namesakes
mans^ba, uncle bamans^ba, uncles
songaluini, lad basongalumi, lads
songakCkxi, lass basongaktkxi, lasses
manktkxl, aunt bamanktkxi, aunts
nyaii(a), friend banyan(a), friends
bukonde, brother-in-law babukonde, brothers-in-law
Note i. Some of these words are rarely found alone, but are joined
with the possessive adjectives, the latter having the force of an enclitic.
The words most commonly having this construction are tatu, mama,
baba, nytn(a), nyinka, mbl, x*, xakena, mans^ba, manktixi, nyan(a).
This subject will be treated more fully under § 138.
Note 2. Under this head must also come the compound words x*-
(with proper possessive enclitic) -muenu, father-in laWy and mbl-
(with proper possessive enclitic and connecting consonant y) ^cina,
brother-in-law y sister-in-law. See § 138, Rem. 3, and Note.
In forming the plural only the first part of the compound word takes
the plural prefix. Hence bax*- (with proper possessive enclitic) -mueiiu,
f(Uhers-in-law, bambi- (with proper possessive enclitic and connecting
Consonant y) -clna, brothers-in-law, sisters-in-law.
Note 3. For father-in-law we also have tata-maenu, and for mother-
in-law baba-muenu, with the plurals formed as under Note 2 above.
There is also for mother-in-law the elided form ma*-muena, with
plural bama*«maena. ■
NOUNS. 13
Class II.
43. In this class ma- is prefixed to the stem for the singular and
mi- (nyi-) for the plural.
Singular. Plural.
mu-soko, village ml-soko, villages
mu-ci, stick ml-ci, sticks
mu-kuna, hill ml-kuna, hUls
mn-bidi, the body ml-bidl, bodies
Rem. The Bena-Lulua say nyi- [§ 34 (a), Rem.] for the pi. instead
of mi-. The mi- is used in this book because it is simpler and because
it is more extensively used about Luebo. Fortunately this little diflFer-
ence in the dialects does not affect the concord.
Class III.
44. In this class n- is prefixed for the singular and n- for the plural.
Note that this n is changed to m before b and p (§ 31).
Singular. Plural.
B-ffombe^ cow n-sombe, cows
n-xlla, path n-xlla, paths
D-soIo, fowl n-solo, fowls
n-subu, house B-subu, houses
n-yolca, snake n-yoka, snakes
n-yunyu, bird n-yunyu, birds
m-pnlni, rat m-pukn, rats
Rem. The archaic sing, prefix of this class was mu, the same as
class I, for we find this mu restored in the concord of adjectives,
numerals and verbs. In like manner we conclude that the pi. prefix
was originally mi, the same as class II. § 43.
Class IV.
45* In this class lu- is prefixed to the stem for the singular and n- for
the plural. Note the euphonic changes of n before p and b (§ 31), and
also before a stem beginning with a vowel (§ 33). Remember also
that n before h becomes m, and the h becomes p (§ 32).
Singular. Plural.
lu-lcflsu, hoe n-kfisu, hoes
lu-diml, tongue n-dlml, tongues
lu-kombo, broom n-kombo, brooms
lu-hansa, cup mpansa, cups
lu-hemba, whiU earth m-pemba, white earth (quantity)
lu-esu, pot ns-esu, pots
14 NOUNS.
Rem. The archaic pi. pre6x of this class was mi, the same as class
II, for we find this mi restored in the concord of adjectives, numerals
and verbs. § 43.
We see this archaic pi. restored in the word laoso, hair, pi. mloso,
hairs.
Class V.
46. In this class di- is prefixed for the singular and ma- for the plural.
Singular. Plural.
di-lcCisa, foot ma-kCisa, feet
di-bokb, arm ma-boko, arms
di-k£la, egg ma-k61a, eggs
di-tuka, day ma-tuku, days
47. Under this class must be placed a' small list of words which seem
to have me instead of ma for the pi. The most probable explanation
seems to be (§ 23, Rem. 4) that the original stem begins with an i
which coalesces with the final a of the prefix and forms e. Of course
the final i of the sing, prefix elides before the i of the stem. Hence
di«isu becomes disu, eye, and ma-isu becomes mesu, eyes. The
stem is seen in such forms as muitu, inio the forest; also in the
diminutive form kisa (kaisa), a small eye, with its pi. tnisu, smaU
eyes; etc.
The more common words belonging to this list are the following:
Singular. Plural.
disu, eye mesu, eyes
dlnu, tooth menu, teeth
diku, hearth meku, hearths
dina, name mena, names
dlba, clock meba, clocks
ditu, jorest metu, forests
di, word me, words
dlcl, day meet, days
diha, hole mena, holes
dixi, caterpillar mexi, caterpillars
The word mexi, intelligence, is used only in the pi.
Rem. a few words belonging to this list may drop the prefix di after
the locative prepositions mu, in, ha, on, and ku, at. Hence we may
have mu dItu or muitu, into the jorest; ku ditu or kuitu, at the forest;
mu disu or muisu, into the eye, ha diku or heku, on the hearth (§ 23,
Rem. 4). See § 423 (2) (a).
NOUNS. IS
Class VI.
48. In this class bu-> is prefixed for the singular and ma- for the
plural.
Singular. Plural.
bu-dimi, field ma-diml, fields
bu-lalu, bed ma-lalu, beds
bu-alu, affair malu, affairs (§ 23)
bu-ansa, medicine maiisa, medicines (§ 23)
bu-icl, honey
bu-lunda, friendship
bu-ngi, plenty
Class VII.
49. In this class ci- is prefixed for the singular and bi- for the plural.
Singular. Plural.
ci-ntu, thing bi-ntu, things
ci-lulu, cloth bi-lulu, clothes
ci-nunu, one thousand bi-nunu, thousands
Class VIII.
60. In this class ka- is prefixed for the singular and tu- for the
plural. This class is used almost exclusively in the formation of
diminutives, indicating either smallness in size or in amount. Ka- and
tu- are prefixed to the stem of the noun regardless of its class.*
Singular. Plural.
ka-ntu, small thing tu-ntu, small things^ from cinta, thing
kana (§ 23), small child tu-ana, small children, from muana, child
ka-subu, small house tu-subu, small houses, from nsubu, house
kele (§ 23), small knife tu-ele, smjll knives, from muele, knife
keho (§ 23), smiill amount of salt, from lueho, salt
Rem. I. Sometimes the n (or m) in class III is not elided upon pre-
fixing ka and tu. This is true especially of words beginning with ny.
Ka-ny&ma, small animal, from nydma, the pi. is ta-nyiima;
ka-nyunyu, small bird, from nyunyu, the pi. is tu-nyunyu;
ka-nyoka, small snake, from nyoka, the pi. is tu-nyoka.
Rem. 2. Some words used in the pi. to express bulk or quantity
employ the corresponding diminutive pi. when a small quantity is
* Properly speaking this is not a distinct class, since these diminutive prefixes
are \ised only with the stems of nouns which belong to classes I to VII. But it
is given a separate class because these forms are of frequent occurrence.
1 6 NOUNS.
meant. Hence we have tul, a lUUe water, from ml, water \ tuanva,
a little cortij from manva, corn; tuluvn, a little palm-wine^ from maluvu,
palm wine; tulnyi, a little oil, from minyi, oil; tutamba, a little greens,
from matamba; etc.
Rem. 3. Some words employ the diminutive prefixes without having
the diminutive idea; as, kahumbu, elephant, tuhumbu, elephants;
kabftlu, horse, tubftlu, horses; kahia, fire, tuhia, fires.
51. A few words have the sing, in one class and the pi. in another.
Luhia or dihia, a slap, has the pi. mahia, slaps. The word lute,
spittle, has the pi. mate.
53. Sometimes a word having the same root is found in different
classes, due to the difference in dialects. Hence we find dtna and
etna, a hole; lubanga and clbanga, chin; etc.
53. Sometimes there is a difference of meaning when words having
the same root are found in different classes; a^, citaku, bottom (of any
vessel), ditaku, buttock.
54. Some words belonging for the most part to class V and ex-
pressing the idea of quantity or bulk take the pi. form where in English
the sing, is used.
MaluTU, palm-wine; mazi, blood; minyi, oU (from dilnyi, the fat
of an animal); ml, water; mabele, milk (from dibele, breast); manva,
shelled corn (from dianva, an ear of corn); makanya, tobacco; ma-
tamba, greens; malobo, loose earth.
Rem. Some other words not having the idea of quantity or bulk are
regarded as pi.; as, ns&la, hunger; ngulu, strength, etc. It is often
difficult to determine the class to which these nouns belong.
55. To class I belong most names of persons or rational beings,
to class III most animals; to class VI, the abstract ideas of quality;
and to class VIII, the diminutives. But apart from this it does not
seem profitable even to attempt to state the laws, if any, which govern
the division of nouns among the several classes. Since this classifica-
tion is thus more or less arbitrary, too much stress cannot be laid upon
charging the memory with the class to which each noun belongs. A
noun given a prefix other than that which belongs to it only makes
nonsense. . Besides, as we shall see later, the whole system of agreement
is determined by this noun prefix.
Rem. I. It is interesting to note that the language of a people is
indicated by prefixing bn (VI) to the root-name; as, Buluba, the lan-
guage of the Baluba.
Rem. 2. Most introduced foreign words are relegated to class III.
Even though they may not always begin with n (or m), yet the agree-
CONCORD. 17
merit of adjectives, verbs, etc., is that of class III; as, mpena, pen;
mpesa, piece of cloth; nglas, glass; sukulu, school; vinyo, wine; etc.
' Note i. Sometimes the introduced foreign word has been given a
native form and put into a class other than the third; as, dilesona
lesson; dlhahl, papaw; etc.
Note 2. Some foreign words are thrown into that class whose prefix
approaches the initial sound of the word; as, cislkit (VII), from the
English biscuit; dincese (V), from the English match; etc.
Rem. 3. Not all nouns referring to persons belong to class I. We
note such exceptions as muadi (II), wife; muloho (II), ambassador;
cilembi (VII), fisherman; cihindi (VII), hunter; muxikankunde
(II), maid; cibanji (VII), intermediary; cibuabu (VII), a twin; etc.
56. As has already been said (§ 38), there is no Gender systeni.
When it is desired to make distinction of sex it may be done in the
following ways:
(d) By using entirely different words; just as in English we say
boy and girl, man and woman, horse and mare, hen and rooster, etc.
Citlla, rooster y and cikukue, hen; mpumba, male goaty and dixina,
female goat,
(ft) When the word is what may be called common gender, i.e. either
male or female, the distinction is made by using a qualifying word
or phrase: mulumi or muliimi wa for maUy and muktkxi or muktkxi wa
for female.
Muana mulumi, a male child; muana in\i\i(ixit a female child,
Muntu muktkxi, a female person; muntu mulumi, a male person,
Muiumi wa mbuxi, a male goat; muktkxi wa mbuxl, a female goat.
Rem. I. Note that elision of the w in wa often takes place; hence
we may also have muluml'a mbuxl, mukuxl*a mbuxl [§ 87 {i)\
Rem. 2. It may^ not be put of place here to call attention to the phrase
muan^a, the young of; as, muan'a mbuxl, a kid; muan^a mukoko, .
a lamh% muan*a ngombe, a calf. See § 87 (t), and Rem.
67- It is interesting to note that the pi. of such phrases as muan*a
bute, first-born childy and muan*a mukala, last-born child, is generally
formed by prefixing ba directly to the singular prefix; as, bamuan*a
bute^ first-born children; bamuan'a mukala, last-born children.
CONCORD.
58. Coiicord is that principle of language by which certain words
are regarded as depending upon r*^rtain other words, and this dependence
is- shown by wearing the livery of the words to which they are regarded
as subordinate.
59. V/e have already (§ 36) noted the fact that in the Bantu system
iS CONCORD.
of languages the nouns are in6ected not by means of suffixes but by means
of prefixes. And now the statement must be made that this principle
holds good not only for nouns but also for verbs, adjectives, pronouns
and other inflected forms. This use of prefixes instead of suffixes to
express the various relations of number, case, tense, mood, etc., is at
first most confusing to English-speaking persons, for it must con
tinually be borne in mind that that the end of the word is the root and
not the beginning.
60. It is of the utmost importance to note that the prefix of the
noun furnishes the basis of the concord for all words depending upon
that noun. The verb takes as its prefix that of the noun which stands
as its subject; the adjective takes as its prefix that of the noun modified;
the pronoun takes the prefix of the noun for which it stands. This
principle is called Alliterative Concord and is most important, for
upon it depends the accurate speaking of the language. It may be
said by way of encouragement to the beginner that though these numerous
forms may seem at first to be endless and most confusing, yet the diffi-
culty is more seeming than real, for after the principles of Concord as
given below have been thoroughly mastered, the key to the language
will be in hand, and it will be interesting to note the system and regu-
larity which prevail.
Perhaps the difference between the two language S3^tems can best
be illustrated by a comparison with the Latin.
Mensa mea, my table; mensae bona«, good tables; wires anxantf the
men love; yiies &raaverunt, the men have loved. On the other hand
in the Buluba-Lulua language we have muntvL m«hele, a poor person-,
hanivi frahele, poor people; bautu Z^ahele hakujB,^ the poor people have
gone.
Rem. I. Under pronouns we shall find that sometimes the prefix of
the noun is employed as a suffix and sometimes as an infix. §§ ii6, 120.
Rem. 2. We even find one preposition, -a, of, inflected as an adjective
and taking the prefix of the noun preceding it; as, cllula cla mukttzi,
the cloth of the woman.
61, The three locative prepositional words, mu, in, ku, to, ha, <m,
are of frequent occurrence and have some peculiarities which it is
important to note. They may stand alone or be compounded with other
words. They resemble the noun in that under certain circumstances
they furnish the basis of the concord. They are also like prepositions
in that they may govern a following word. The various uses and con-
structions of these locative words will be taken up as occasion requires.
Rem. The infinitive is often used as a noun, and its prefix ku- fur-
nishes the concord.
CONCORD. 19
General Rules of Concord.
62« The prefixes ba, lu, dl, bu, el, bi^ ka and tn are always pre-
fixed without change to the governing word or to the verb; the re-
maining prefixes, mu, mt, n and ma, are, under certain circumstances,
subject to change, i.e., the m and n are dropped. Prefixes are, for
convenience, said to be Primary or Secondary.
\
I. Primary Prefixes.
63. The Primary Prefixes are used before a word when that word
takes all of the ordinary prefixes without change.
Rem. It is important to note here that the archaic prefixes in class
III (mu for singular and ml for pi.) are restored (§§ 44, Rem.); also
the archaic pi. ml of class IV (§ 45, Rem.).
64. We have, therefore, the primary prefixes as follows:
Singular. Plural.
lass I.
dm-
ba-
II.
mn-
ml-
III.
mn-
ml-
" IV.
la-
ml-
V.
dl-
ma-
** VI.
bu-
ma-
'• VII.
cl-
bl-
'* VIII.
ka-
tn.
65* The primary prefixes are used as follows:
(a) Before an ordinary qualifying adjective; as, mnntu mubl, a
had person.
(b) Before the ordinal numerals 2d to 6th; as, musambu'multann,
the fifth hymn.
(c) Before past participles when used either as adjectives or in the
formation of certain auxiliary tenses; as, mnntu mnf ue, a dead person; .
udl mufue, he is dead'.
II. Secondary Prefixes.
66. The Secondary Prefixes are used before a word when that word
subjects some of the ordinary noun prefixes to change. These changes,
as has been noted above (§ 62), occur with the prefixes mu, mi, n and
ma, in which the. n and m are dropped.
Rem. I. The archaic prefixes are here also restored as in case of
the primary prefixes (§ 63, Rem.); of course only the vowel is retained.
20 CONCORD.
Rem. 2. The mu of classes I and II and the n of class III thus be-'
come u or w, the u or w being determined according to the principle
of euphony as mentioned in § 27.
Rem. 3. The mi of class II and the n pi. of classes III and IV thus
become i or y, the 1 or y being determined according to the principle
of euphony as mentioned in § 28.
Rem. 4. The m of the prefix ma of classes V and VI being dropped,
the remaining a is subjected to the usual euphonic laws as mentioned
in § 23.
67* The secondary prefixes are thus found to be as follows:
Singular. Plural.
Class
I.
u-
ba.
II.
u-
i-
III.
u-
i-
IV.
lu-
i-
V.
di-
a-
VI.
bu-
a-
VII.
ci-
bl-
VIII.
ka-
tu-
68, The secondary prefixes are used as follows:
(a) With the possessive adjective pronouns (§ 130).
Nklisu yinyi, my hoes; makeia ebi, your eggs.
(b) With the demonstrative adjective pronouns (§§ 149, 152, 156,
159)-
Eu muntu, this person; wawa muntu, that person,
(c) With verbs as
(i) Pronominal prefixes (§ 113).
MuaDa ndl ha mesa, the child is on the tabl^; wakuya,
he has gone.
(2) Pronominal infixes (§ 116). Exception will be noted later.
Wakaixlha, he has killed them (dsoIo, fowls).
(3) Pronominal suffixes (§ 120). Exceptions will be noted later.
HakuhoDaf, where they fell (nsolo, fowls),
(4) Relative pronouns (§§ 164, etc.).
Muntu UDakumona, the person whom I saw.
ADJECTIVES. 21
(d) With the disjunctive personal pronouns (§ 105, Rem. i).
Tol yakafua, they have died (nsolo, fowls),
(e) With certain cardinal numerals (§ 92, Rem. i).
Mlsambu itanu, five hymns.
(/) With the adjective onso, a//, entire.
Mubldi wonso, the entire body; mak^la onso, all the eggs,
(g) With the preposition -a, 0/ (§ 86).
Nsolo wa Kasongo, the fowl of Kasongo; nsolo ya Kasongo,
the fowls of Kasongo.
(h) With the present participles (§ 244).
Nsolo Idl ikuluka, the fowls are falling down,
(i) With the interrogative word nga? how many?
Mikanda Idl inga? how many books are there?
(j) With the adjective word -o-umne (§ 96).
69. It is important to bear in mind that the locative prepositions
mu, ku and ha (§ 61) furnish the agreement in a number of instances.
When thus used they are prefixed directly to the word and present no
difficulty apart from the ordinary rules of euphony, which of course
must be observed when the occasion arises.
ADJECTIVES.
70. Like all the languages of the Bantu family the Buluba-Lulua
is very poor in adjectives when compared with the Indo-European
languages. Not only does one word represent wholly distinct adjectives
in English, as impe, which means goodj handsome^ fine, etc., but many
are altogether wanting. This lack is supplied in many ways which we
shall consider later.
Note. In this book only the root of the adjective is given; as, Impe,
good; bi, bad; kise, small.
71. Adjectives take the primary prefixes corresponding to the number,
and class of the noun modified.
72. The adjective follows the noun modified.
Rem. I. Rarely may be heard nga, another^ kuabo, another^ also the
demonstrative adjective pronouns and the possessive adjective pronoun
preceding the noun.
Rem. 2. Sometimes one or more words in a closely connected phrase
may intervene between the adjective and the noun modified; as, bana
22 ADJECTIVES.
ba ngulube banine, the large pigs; muan'a nktksa munlDe, the
great toe.
73. Examples of nouns with adjectives:
Singular. Plural.
Class I. muntu muhele, poor person bantu babele, poor people
*' IL mucimule, long stick mlcl mile, long sticks
* * III. nsolo muklse, small fowl nsolo miklse, small fowls
** IV. lukfisu lunlne, large hoe nkOsu minliie, large hoes
** V. dik«la dimpe, good egg makeia mimpe, good eggs
(see note below)
'* VI. bulalu bulhi, short bed malalu mihi, short beds
(see note below)
" VII. cllulu ciflke, blue cloth bilulu blflke, blue clothes
'* VIII. kana kak&le, a strong child tuana tukale, strong chil-
dren.
Note. In the forms mimpe and mibl the roots are impe and ihl
respectively. For the elision of a see § 23.
74. In the case of contracted or elided forms the adjective takes
the regular unchanged prefix of that class and number.
Mesu manine, large eyes; menu mak^le, strong teeth. See § 47.
75. When the word modified is a pronoun, expressed or understood,
referring to persons, the adjective takes mu of class I when the pro-
noun is singular, and ba of class I when the pronoun is plural.
Tudi banlne, we are large (tuetu, wey understood); ndt mubf,
I am bad (meme, 7, understood); nud! bakale, you are strong (nuenn,
yoUy understood).
76. Two adjectives, hia-hia and nya-nya, double themselves,
taking the prefix before each part.
Ctfulu cihia-cihia, a new hat; bantu banya-banya, a jew peofte.
77. Some adjectives take the secondary prefixes; they are as follows:
(a) On so, all; as, nsolo yon so, aU the fowls. § 68 (/).
(&) Possessive adjective pronouns; as, nsolo yandl, his fowls. § 68 (a)^
(c) Demonstrative adjective pronouns; as, nsolo yaya, those fowls,
§ 68 (6).
(i) Certain cardinal numerals; as, nsolo itanu, "five fowls. § 68 {e).
{e) The peculiar form -o-umue, aJikey identical. Note here that the
prefix is used both before the o and the umue; as, nsolo yoyumue,
the fowls are alike.
Note. The locatives (mu, ku, ha) are prefixed to -o-umue in the
same way. See § 96 and Rems.
78. The word tente, full^ is indeclinable; as, mulondo udi tente,
the jar is full.
ADJECTIVES. 23
79. Certain adjectives, when preceded either by a simple locative
or by one of its compounded forms, may take the locative as prefix.
The adjectives most commonly having this construction are impe, good^
bi, badf tuhu, empty, onso, ally le, long, Ihi, short, mue, one, -o-umue,
the same, kuabo and nga, another, together with the possessive and
demonstrative adjective pronouns.
Mu mulondo mudi mutuhu, the jar is empty; kuenu kudi kule,
your town is far away.
Rem. The declinable preposition -a, of, also has this construction.
See § 87 (e).
80. The adjective ine, alone, only, by one's self, is always preceded
by ne.
Bantu babldl ne bene (§ 23, Rem. 4) bakuya, two people alone
went; nsolo ne mulne, the fowl by itself; makeia ne mene, the eggs
alone; muluml ne muine, the man by himself.
81. Although the subject will be more fully treated under § 445,
it seems necessary to state here that when any word is used as a com-
plement after the verb to be, the verb is omitted and in its place is found
an n-, which is prefixed directly to the complement word. The nega-
tive in such cases is kan-. Observe carefully the usual euphonic
changes with n.
Eel clfulu ncinyl, this hat is mine; bilulu blandl mbimpe, his
clothes are good; muhika eu ngrulnyi, this slave is mine; dina diaci
Dctnyl? what is the name of the thing?
82. Though the noun may be omitted, the adjective must agree with
it understood. An adjective can never stand uninflected.
Ndt nkCba mule (muci, stick, understood), / am looking for a long
one; ntumina mimpe (makfila. eggs, understood), send me good ones.
83. When two or more adjectives modify the same noun they are
placed after the noun without any connecting word. With regard to
the relative position of these modifying words the following rule holds
good with more or less regularity, viz.. the possessive and demonstrative
adjectives come next to the noun, then the simple adjective, and lastly
the numerals.
Ndi nk^ba bantu bale bakale, I am looking for tall strong men;
mbua wakukuata nsolo winy! muklse, the dog has caught my small
chicken; nsolo ylnyl mlklse Isfttu yakafua, my three small chickens
have died.
84. Owing to the paucity of simple adjectives some other construc-
tions are employed to express the idea:
(a) Sometimes we have the adjective phrase with -a and a noun.
Muntu wa lungenyl, a wise man, i.e., a man of wisdom; ml a kahta,
24 ADJECTIVES.
hot water, i.e., water of heat; clombe cla bululu, hitter manioc, i.e.,
manioc oj bitterness,
{b) We may also sometimes find maena (pi. bena), inhabitant of,
owner of, etc., followed by a noun, which noun comes to have a sort of
adjective force.
Muena biuma, a rich person, i.e., an owner oj riches; muena ngulu,
a strong person, i.e., a person of strength; benamlkanda, school children,
i.e., book people,
(c) The phrase -dl ne, to have (lit. to be with), followed by the sub-
stantive form of the adjective or some noun, is a very common method
of expressing the adjective when used as predicate complement.
Muntu udl ne lungenyi, the person is wise, i.e., has wisdom; mux^&te
udl ne bujita, the box is heavy, i.e., has heaviness.
(d) In a number of cases the adjective is contained in the verb as a
predicate complement.
Kutoka, to be white; knflka, to be black; kuteketa, to be weak;
kukunza, to be red; kukMla, to be strong; kulula, to be bitter; etc.
Rem. In such cases, when the simple qualifying adjective is needed,
the past active participle is used. See § 85 (<i).
(e) We may occasionally have a simple noun used in an adjective
sense. Compare mulmnl and mukl^xl when used to denote difference
of sex, as noted in § 56.
Rem. Certain cardinal numerals are thus treated as substantive
adjectives; as, bantu dlkumi, ten people; nsolo lukama, one hundred
fowls.
85* Participles have the adjective prefixes and are often, as in
English, used as simple adjectives. This is especially true of the two
past participles, one being active and the other passive. §§ ^49, 251.
(a) The Active Past Participle is formed by changing the final a of
the verb root to e. The resulting form is inflected by means of the
ordinary primary prefixes.
Muntu mufue, a d^ad person, from the verb root fna, to die.
Rem. Under this head falls the large class of participles [§ 84 (</)]
which have a simple adjective force; 2iS,to)s.e, white; n\Le, black; tekete,
weak; kttle, strong; etc. Cilulu cltoke, white cloth.
(b) The Passive Past Participle is the root of the verb. With this
are used the primary prefixes.
Cilulu clhanda (from handa, to tear), the torn cloth; muntu mut&ba
(from tftba, to wound), the wounded person.
Rem. .Note the differencfe between the participles derived from the
transitive and the intransitive verbs. Both lukfisu luclbuke and
lukfisu lucibula mean the broken hoe, but one means the hoe which
ADJECTIVES, 25
has become broken of its own accord, the other means a hoe which some
some one else has broken. § 341.
Adjective Phrases.
86. Adjective Phrases are introduced by the prepositional word
-a, o/, /or. to, which agrees in prefix with the noun preceding it. It
takes the secondary prefixes [§ 68 {g)]. This agreement shows that
the phrase is regarded as an adjective. In English we say that the
prepositions o/, /or, and /o govern the noun or pronoun following them;
in Buluba-Lulua the preposition -a may be said not only to govern the
succeeding word but also to modify the preceding word. It is, there-
fore, regarded not only as an adjective particle but also as a preposi-
tion.
87. This adjective phrase is used to express various relations, some
of which are here mentioned:
(a) The adjective phrase with -a is the common way of expressing
the English possessive case, or the preposition of when it indicates pos-
session,
Bana ba mukaxi, the children of the woman; cifulu cia mukelenge,
the hat of the chief; mici ya muana, the child's sticks; maboko a
muana, the chUd^s arm; nsolo wa muluml, the man's jowl; nsolo ya
balumi, the men's jowls; keho ka Kasongo, Kasongo's hit of sail;
nkOsu ya mukfkxi, the woman's hoes
Rem, I. If two or more nouns connected by the conjunction ne, and,
are used implying joint possession of the same thing, the preposition
-a is used only once, thus following the analogy of the English.
Cifulu cla Kasongo ne Kabeya, Kasongo and Kaheya's hat.
Rem. 2. If, however, separate possession is meant, or if the nouns are
connected by Inyl, or, the preposition -a is used before each noun.
Cifulu cla Kasongo ne cla Kabeya, the hat of Kasongo and that
oj Kabeya; wakulua ne cifulu cia Kasongo Inyl cia Kabeya? did
he come with the hat of Kasongo or with that oj Kaheyaf; lufu luabo ne
lua.bana babo, their death and that of their children.
(b) The adjective phrase, as has been seen in § 84 (a), is often used
for a simple adjective.
(c) The rioun making the concord of the -a may sometimes be omitted,
being understood. § 82.
Cia Kabata, Kabata's, with any noun in the sing, of class VII under-
stood.
{d) The -a is often combined with the locative prepositions (mu,
ku and ha), making a double prepositional form something like the
English from among, from above, etc.
26 ADJECTIVES.
Munyinyl wa mu ml, fsh, lit. meat from in the water; kanydma
ka mu ditu, a small animal from the woods, lit. from in the woods; cllalu
cla ha mesa, a table-cloth, lit. cloth for on the table.
Rem. I. We also have the combined forms mua, kua and ha pre-
ceding the name of the person; they then mean in or at the village of
or house of.
• Ta mua Malendolo, go to (the village) of Malendolo; udl kua muke-
lenge, he is at {the house) of the chief; muana wa kua Nsusu, the
child belongs to Nsusu^s village, lit. a child of at {the village) of Nsusu.
Rem. 2. By putting the pre6xes of class 1 before kua we have mukua,
meaning one from the village of.
{e) When an adjective phrase with -a modifies a noun which is
governed by one of the locative prepositions (mu, ku or ha), the -a
sometimes takes the concord of the preposition rather than that of the
noun. Hence we may have either ya mu nsubu mua mukelenge or
ya mu nsubu wa mukelenge, go into the chiefs house.
(/) The prepositional construction with -a is often used with the
infinitive mood to express purpose; this is to be translated by to or
for. § 239 (6).
Lua ne bintu bla kudia, bring the things to eat; ndi nsua ml a
kunua, / want some water to drink.
Rem. Note that these infinitive phrases have an adjective sense; as,
ml a kunua, which may be translated drinking-water.
{g) The adjective phrase with -a is also used to express direction.
Nxlla wa Kasenga, the path to Kasenga; we may also say nxila
wa ku Kasenga.
{h) The peculiar \phrase -a bende means of some one else, not one's
own, another's.
(i) Note that in the sing, of certain phrases the -a has the prefix
elided; it is then represented by an apostrophe (').
Muan'a, the young of; muluml'a, the male of; muktkxi'a, the female
f>i' § S6(&), Rems. i and 2.
Rem. So far as the pronunciation is concerned, the phrase muan'a
mbuxi, a kid, might be written muana mbuxi; but since the pi. is
bana ba mbuxi, there would seem to be good reason for believing
that the prepositional word ought to be written in the singular.
Comparison of Adjectives.
88. The adjective is not declined to express comparison as in English
and in other European languages. In fact the Buluba-Lulua does
not make any sharp distinction between the comparative and superlative
degrees, for the same construction is used for both degrees.
ADJECTIVES. 27
89, The verbs tamba and hfta, to surpass^ with the abstract sub-
stantive derivative of the adjective having the prefix bu- of class VI
(§ 354) » ^re used to express the idea of comparison.
Muci udl utamba muntu buie, the tree is taller than the man, lit.
the tree surpasses the man in height\ muktkxi udi uhita mulumi buk&le,
the woman is stronger than the man; Kasongo udl utamba bakuabo
bule, Kasongo is the tallest, lit. surpasses the others in height.
90. Certain other comparative expressions may be treated here:
(a) Sometimes the comparative idea is expressed by using with each
noun adjectives having opposite meaning.
Eu mud mulhl, wawa mule, this stick is shorter than that, lit. this
stick is short, that one is long.
(b) The English too, meaning excess of any quality, is also expressed
by tamba or hita, to surpass.
Mucl udl utamba bule, the stick is too long.
(c) The English very, modifying an adjective, may be expressed in
several ways:
(i) By using be after the adjective; as, mucl mule be. a very long
stick.
(2) By use of the verbs tamba and hlta with the abstract quality
of the adjective, as explained under § 89; as, mucl adl utamba bule,
the stick is very long.
(3) By elongating the last syllable of the adjective.
(4) By repeating one or more syllables of the adjective; as, toke to,
very white; kunze kunzu, very red.
{d) The English as ... as may be expressed by saying that the
quality of one thing is like the quality of another thing.
Kutoka (infinitive) kua mukandakudl bu kua mpemba, //^ paper
ts as white as chalk, lit. the whiteness (or the to be white) of the paper
is like that of chalk.
(e) The English not so , . . as is perhaps best expressed by sa3ang
that the quality as possessed by one thing is not the same as that pos-
sessed by another thing.
Muntu kena bule bua muci, a man is not tall like a tree, lit. is not
the tallness of a tree.
(/) The English less than may be rendered in two ways:
(i) In much the same way as not so ... as [^ 90 (e)]; as, yeye
kena bule buTnyt, he is less tall than T, lit. he ts.not my height.
(2) By turning the sentence around and using the simple compara-
tive form with tamba or hlta. § 88.
(g) Instead of the abstract noun derivative in bu- following tamba
or hlta we sometimes have the infinitive where such a form is possible.
28
NUMERALS.
Ctlulu ect cidi cltamba cfkuabo kukunza, this cloth is more red
than the other.
NUMERALS.
Cardinals.
91. The Cardinal Numerals, when they are used after nouns with
the force of adjectives, are as follows: ♦
1. -mue(-mo).
2. -bidi.
3. -s&tu.
4. -nl.
5. -tanu.
6. -sambombo.
7. IHuanda mutekete (muakun-
8. Muanda mukulu. [yl).
9. Citema.
10. DIkuml.
11. *' ne -mue (-mo).
12. ** *' -bidl.
17. " ** muanda mutekete.
18. '• ** '* mukulu.
19. ** '* citema.
20. Makuml abldi.
21. ** ** ne-mue(*mo)
22. Makuml abfdi ne -bldt.
as&tu.
** ne-mue(-mo).
ani.
atanu.
asambombo.
muanda mutekete.
'* mukulu.-
cltema.
30-
31-
40. '
SO. '
60.
70.
80.
90.
100. Lukama.
loi. ** ne -mue (-mo),
no. ** ** dikuml.
200 Nkama ibfdi.
201. ** ** ne-mue(-mo)
300. *' isfttu.
700. " muanda mutekete.
1.000. Cinunu.
1.001. Cinunu ne -mue (-mo).
1,257. Cinunu ne nkama ibldi ne makumi
atanu ne muanda mutekete.
2,000. Blnunu bibidi.
10,000. Lubombo.
20,000. Mbombo ibldi.
100,000. Clxikulu.
93. The cardinal numerals i to 6 are inflected and follow the rules
of ordinary adjectives. But the numerals 7 to 10 are regarded as
substantives, and the same is true of 100, 1000, 10,000, 100,000, with
all the multiples of 10, 100, 1000, 10,000 and 100,000.
Rem. i. The inflected numerals i to 6 take the secondary prefixes.
* Observe that a hyphen (-) is placed before the inflected forms.
NUMERALS. 29
Rem. 2. Dtkiimi, ten, lukama, one hundred, clnunu, one thousand,
lubombo, ten thousand, and cixikulu, one hundred thousand, are in-
flected according to classes V, IV, VII, IV, VII, respectively.
Rem. 3. In the numbers 7 and 8 the word muanda is a noun (class
II) and is followed by the adjectives mutekete, weaker, and mukulu,
older. Sometimes after muanda in 7 we hear muakunyi, younger,
instead of mutekete. For 9 we have citema (class VII).
Rem. 4. The numbers 11-16, 21-26, 31-36, etc., emplo)ring the
six inflected forms, cause these to agree with the noun expressed or
understood.
Rem. 5. For one we have both mue and mo.
Examples of numerals:
Muntu umue, one person; bantu babidl, tiuo people; mlci Is&tn,
three sticks; nsolo Inl, four fowls; mak£Ia atanu, five eggs; malaln
asambombo, six beds; bintu muanda mutekete, seven things; bantu
dikumi, ten people; bantu dikumi ne umue, eleven people; bantu
dikumi ne babidl, twelve people; makeia dikumi ne muanda mute-
kete, seventeen eggs; make la makumi abldl, twenty eggs; bantu
nkama Is&tu ne basambombo, three hundred and six people; bantu
binunu blbldl ne nkama tnl ne makumi atanu ne bas&tu, two thou-
sand four hundred and fifty-three people; bantu badi dikumi, there
are ten people.
93. Occasionally the substantive forms dikumi, lukama, etc., employ
the adjective phrase with -a.
Dikumi dia bantu, ten people, lit. ten of people,
94. By doubling the cardinal numerals we have the distributive idea
indicating how many each time, how many to each one^ etc.
Ta utuale blsOka blbldl blbldl, go and bring two baskets each time;
angati blsOka, muntu blbldl, muntu blbldl, bring the baskets, each
person two.
Rem. The idea of each may also be expressed under certain cir-
cumstances by ku -bldl, ku -s&tu, etc.
Ta wangate bistkka ku blbldl, ku blbldl, go and bring the baskets
two each time.
This very much resembles the phrase ku dituku ku dltnku, each
day, daily.
95. Substantives are made from the inflected numerals i to 6.
{a) The substantives formed according to class VI express the idea
of both, all three, all four^ etc., used in sense of totality, these forms
also sometimes express the idea of two and two, three and three, etc.
Bubldl buabo, both of them; bus&tu buabo, all three of them.
(6) The substantives formed according to class VTI express the
30 NUMERALS.
idea of how many times; as, ciakamue, once; ciakabldi, second time^
ciakas&tu, third time, etc.
The plurals blakabldl, biakas&tu, etc., mean two times {twice),
three times {thrice) ^ etc.
Rem. I. There are also heard diakamue, once; kabldl, second time;
kas&tn, third time.
Rem. 2. Ciahamue, clamumue and dlacimue mean at the same,
time, simultaneously. DIakamue is also used in this sense.
96. One withy like, the same as, identical with, etc., are expressed
by the form -o-umue. § 77 («).
Di diodiiimue, the identical word.
Rem. I. Sometimes the form seems to be -o-mue.
Rem. 2. We have the locatives mu and ku and ha, combined with
•o-umue (-o-mue).
Hobamue, on the same place; kuokumue, at the same place; muc-
in umue, into the same place. This latter word is often .used in an
adverbial sense without any apparent reference to place.
97. In abstract counting, one, two, three, etc., it is important to
note that -mue, one, becomes omue (or umue), and all the other in.
fleeted .forms up to six have an i prefixed to the stem. Hence we
say omue, ibidt, Is&tu, Inl, etc. The other numerals remain unchanged
in abstract counting.
Ordinal Numerals.
98. The Ordinal Numerals 2nd to 6th are inflected as regular ad-
jectives, taking the primary prefixes, while the substantive forms from
7th on have an adjective phrase with -a. The form for ist also has
this last construction.
Rem. I. In the forms 2nd to 6th the prefix is used with the abstract
form Ibidi, Isfttu, etc. (§ 97), while the inflected forms in the forma-
tion of nth to i6th, 21st to 26th, etc., remain uninflected just as in
abstract counting.
99. Examples of ordinal numerals:
ist. -a kumudllu; as, musambu wa kumudllu, the first hymn, lit c)
at the front.
2nd. -Ibldi; as, musambu muibldi, the second hymn.
3rd. -isfttu; as, musambu muis&tu, the third hymn.
6th. -Isambombo; as, musambu muisambombo, the sixth hymn.
7th. -a muanda mutekete; as, musambu wa muanda mutekete,
the seventh hymn.
xoth. -a dikumi; as, musambu wa dtkuml, the tenth hymn.
PRONOUNS. 31
iith. -a dlkumi ne omue; as, musambu wa dikumi ne omue, the
eleventh hymn.
1 2th. -a dikumi ne ibidi; as, musambu wa dikumt ne Ibidi, the
twelfth hymn,
20th. -a makumi abldi; as, musambu wa makumi abidi, the twentieth
hymn.
100. The word last is expressed by the phrase -a kunxtkidiiu; as,
musambu wa kunxikldilu, the last hymn.
PRONOUNS.
101. For the sake of convenience and custom the Pronouns may be
classified as Personal, Possessive, Demonstrative, Relative, Interroga-
tive and Indefinite.
102. As may be expected, the pronouns make free use of the prefixes
in their reference to preceding nouns, whether these nouns be expressed
or understood.
Personal Pronouns.
103. By Personal Pronouns we mean all those pronominal forms
which stand for nouns, whether these nouns refer to rational beings
or not.
The personal pronouns may be divided into Disjunctive and Con-
junctive, depending upon whether the pronoun does not or does form
an integral part of the verb as prefix or suffix or infix.
I. Disjunctive.
104. The Disjunctive Personal Pronouns are those which are used
alone and are not joined directly to the verb either as prefix or sufl5x
or infix. These Disjunctive Pronouns may be still farther subdivided
into Simple and Compound forms.
A. Simple Forms.
105. The Simple Disjunctive Personal Pronouns are determined by
the class and number of the noun for which they stand and are as
follows: *
* There is no difficulty about the personal pronoun forms under class I. but
it has been hard to determine the forms for the other classes This difficulty is
due to the fact that the forms employed are more properly demonstratives
which will be considered later. Sometimes we hear for the personal pronoun
construction the forms as here given for classes II to VIII, and again we find
those mentioned under § 156. We have put these forms as given above tmder
the head of personal pronouns, because they seem to have not so much refer-
ence to place as to time i.e.. to a previously mentioned object; at the same
time it must be borne in mind that there is also a demonstrative idea. Some*
times these forms are also used as adjectives.
32 PRONOUNS.
Singular. Plural.
Class I. I St pers. meme, / tuetu, we
** I. 2nd pers. wewe, thou nuenu, you
** I. 3rd pers. yeye, he or she bobo, they
" IL *' ** wou (wowo), U yol (yoyo), they
** III. " *' wewe, U yol (yoyo), they
IV. " " luolu (luoluo), i^ yol (yoyo), //wry
•' V. '* ** dlodl (diodio), U wowo (6), they
VI. *• " biiobu (buobuo), U wowo (6), they
VII. " '< elocl (cloclo), i^ blob! (bloblo), //m;^
** VIII. " " koko, 1^ tuotu (tuotuo), //(«)f
Rem. I. It will be noted that the majority of the forms are made by
prefixing the ordinary secondary prefixes to the letter o, then doubling
the resulting form. Generally the last o is only slightly sounded, but
it is written in parenthesis above.
Rem. 2. We often hear wowo for wewe, ttto for tuetu, nono for
nuenu, yoyo for yeye, which seems to indicate that these may also
originally have been formed with the o.
Rem. 3. In the plural of classes V and VI are found a decided w
sound before the o, which, if written full^, would be aoao, but this
contracts into 6.
Rem. 4. Since there is no distinction for gender, yeye means either
he or she in class I.
Rem. 5. It is also important to bear in mind that there are no in-
definite forms like the English it and they which may refer to any noun
other than persons. The pronoun must be of the same class and
number as the noun for which it stands.
Rem. 6. The objective cases me^ thee, him^ her, us, you, them, it,
when they are used absolutely, are expressed by the same form as
those given above for the subjective cases.
Rem. 7. The possessive case, of me (my), of thee (thy), of him (his),
etc., is expressed by the possessive pronoun forms. See § 128, etc.
Rem. 8. The second person singular is always used when one person
only is meant. This principle holds good throughout the pronoun.
106. The simple disjunctive personal pronouns are used as follows:
(a) Absolutely or for emphasis as subject or object, very much as
^gfff ^«» etc., of the Latin, or sometimes as moi, toi, eux, etc., of the
French. The verb must have its regular pronominal prefix for subject
and the infix for object in addition to the disjunctive forms.
Wewe udi udlma? have you been working? Udl udlma nganyl?
Bleme, who hai been working? I (have), N iambi wakunsunslla
meme^ God has saved me.
PRONOUNS. 33
(6) For emphasis after the possessive form.
Bualu buebl wewe, your own affair,
(c) With certain prepositions.
(i) The locatives (mu, ku and ha) stand regularly before the dis-
junctive personal pronoun forms in all classes save the first throughout
and the singular of class III, in which latter cases the prepositional
phrase is expressed by prefixing the preposition to the verb dl, to be^
to which has previously been attached the proper personal prefix or
suffix. Consequently we must say not lua ku meme, but lua kundi.
come to me; not lua ku tuetu, but lua kutudi, come to us, i.e., where
we are; ya kudlye, go to him, i.e., where he is. This construction will
be treated more fully later. § 321.
But we say regularly ya ku wou, go to it (muct, stick); lala mu
diodi, lie down in it (dioa, hole).
Note. But the most common construction here is for the locatives
to be suffixed to the verb rather than stand before the pronoun. § 320.
Tekamu dtk^la, put the egg in it.
(2) Bu, like, takes the regular unchanged disjunctive forms through-
out.
Wewe udl bu meme, you are like me,
107. Ne, withf andy is peculiar in that it takes not the personal
forms after it, but the possessive (§ 128). Note the elision. There-
fore, we have as follows:
Class
Singrular.
Plural.
I.
ist pers.
n*lnyl, with me
n'etu, with us
I.
2nd pers.
n'ebl, with you
n'eou, with you
I.
3rd pers.
n'andl, with him, her
n'abo, with them
II.
II 14
n*au, with it
n'al. with them
III.
it <(
n*andl, with it
ii*al, with them
etc.
etc.
B. Compound Forms.
108. There are two Compound Disjunctive Pronouns. They are
constructed upon the possessive pronoun forms by prefixing nkl- and
bl- respectively. This seems to correspond to the myself, etc.. of
English, and it gives in inflection the same construction as ne, with.
See § 107.
109. The forms with nki- mean alone^ by one's self, only, etc. In
their inflection note that y is inserted for euphony [§ 34 (a)] between
the two vowels. We thus have:
34 PRONOUNS.
Singular. Plural.
Class I. ist pers. nklylnyif by myself nklyetu, by ourselves
* ' I. 2nd pers. nklyebl, by yourself nklyenu, by yourselves
** I. ** " nklyandi, by himself or nlaya.hOf by themselves
herself
** II. " " nklyvLVLy by itself nkiy&ij by themselves
etc. etc.
Rem. The forms nklylnyt, etc., always follow the noun or the pro-
noun to which they -refer; or they may follow the verb if the noun or
pronoun is not expressed.
Wakaya ku musoko nganyt? Heme nklylnyi, who went to the
town? I alone; netuye nklyetu, we shall go by ourselves; lua ne muot
nkiyau, bring only the stick.
110. The forms with bi- are difficult to translate into English.
Their use seems to be to give a certain roundness or smoothness to a
sentence which would otherwise appear short and curt; besides, a
certain emphasis is obtained which can only be appreciated after some
knowledge of the language has been acquired. Since the ordinary
prefixes or infixes for subject and object must also be used, it is generally
best not to attempt to translate the forms in bl-.
Rem. I. These forms come after the verb.
Rem. 2. Their inflexion is exactly the same as that for nklylnyi,
etc. (§ 109).
Nyaya btlnyl, / am going; wakumpa bllnyt ctfulu, he gave me
a hat; wakuhona blau, it (muci, stick) has fallen; dia biebl, eat thou
(imperative); tuye bletu, let us go.
111. We may sometimes hear both of these compound disjunctive
forms in the same sentence.
Nyaya btlnyl nklylnyt, / am going by myself,
II. Conjunctive.
112. The Conjunctive Personal Pronouns are those which are
inflected directly with the verb and form part and parcel of the Verb.
These are by far the most common personal pronominal constructions
for subject, direct object and indirect object. They may be divided
into Pronominal Prefixes, Pronominal Infixes, and Pronominal Suffixes.
These are now each taken up in turn.
A. Pronominal Prefixes.
113. The Pronominal Prefix always stands at the beginning of the
finite parts of the verb,' agreeing in person, number and class with the
subject, whether the subject be expressed or simply understood. Even
PRONOUNS. 35
the disjunctive personal pronouns cannot take the place of the pro-
nominal prefixes.
Rem. I. The question may be raised as to whether these prefixes
are properly pronouns at all, since they are in fact not much more
than the personal endings w, s, t, mus, lis, nt^ of the Latin. The word
pronoun, however, furnishes a convenient term by which to designate
them, so they are thus called throughout this grammar. It is one of
the peculiarities of the Bantu system of languages that the verb as
well as the adjective should be made to concord with the class of the
noun which stands as its subject.
Rem. 2. The future indicative is the only tense whose sign comes
before rather than after the prefixes. § 293.
Rem. 3. The secondary prefixes are also the pronominal prefixes.
Of course the ist and 2nd persons, sing, and pi., furnish forms not
found under the list of secondary prefixes, since these latter are all 3rd
person.
Rem. 4. Note the usual euphonic changes following n, u and 1.
§§ 27, 28, 29, 31-33.
114. The pronominal prefixes are as follows:
Class I. I St pers.
** I. 2nd pers.
'* I. 3rd pers.
« II. ** '»
.< Ill i. a
<< IV. ** **
(( Y^ tt ti
** VT. ** **
*i VIII. ** **
Examples of pronominal prefixes:
Ndl, / am; iidl, you are; nyaya, he is going; wakadi, he was, in
which the u changes to w before the tense sign aka; cifulu ciaku-
kuluka, the hat has jalleUy in which we have cl as pronominal prefix
+ aku as tense sign + kuluka as stem; nsolo yakufua, the jowls have
diedy in which we have y as pronominal prefix before the tense sign
+ aku as tense sign + f ua as stem.
Rem. I. The negative constructions, as will be seen later, furnish
a few exceptions to the above pronominal prefixes. § 198.
Rem. 2. It is important to note that a sing, second person is always
treated as a sing, and not as a pi., as has become the custom in
English, French and German. § 105, Rem. 8.
ingular.
Plural.
n-
tu-
u-
ou-
u-
ba-
u-
t-
u-
1-
lu-
1-
dl-
a-
bu-
a-
cl-
bi-
ka-
tu-
36 PRONOUNS.
116. When the verb is preceded by a prepositional phrase having
one of the locatives (mu, ku or ha), these latter furnish the concord
of the verb In this case the subject is placed after the verb.
Ha mesa hadt blntu, on the table are the things; mu nsubn mudi
bantu, there are people in the house.
Rem. I. Sometimes the prepositional phrase is understood; as,
kamuena bantu, there are no people in (U).
Rem. 2. Sometimes a simple locative adverb (§ 363, etc.) furnishes
the concord; as, aha hadt atanu, here there are five (mak^la, eggs,
understood).
6. Pronominal Infixes.
116. The Pronominal Infix is always found immediately before the
stem of the verb in inflection and is used in place of the noun as direct
or indirect object.
Rem. I. The noun and its corresponding infix are never both used at
the same time; in this respect the pronominal infixes differ from the
pronominal prefixes. §113.
Rem. 2. Throughout the pi. the pronominal infixes are the same as
the pronominal prefixes. In the sing., however, there .are a few varia-
tions: 2nd pers. sing, class I gives ku, 3rd pers. sing, of the same class
gives mu, and the sing, of class III is also mu.
Rem. 3. Observe carefully the usual euphonic changes with n, u
and I. §§ 27-29, 31-33-
117« The pronominal infixes are as follows:
Class I.
«' I.
" I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
" VII.
" VIII.
Examples of pronominal infixes:
Wakundexa mukanda, he showed me the hook^ in which we have
w as pronominal prefix + aku as tense sign + n as pronominal infix
used as indirect object + dexa as stem, from lexa, to show. § 29.
Bakulxlha, they killed them (nsolo, fowlsy understood), in which we
have b as pronominal prefix (for ba) + aku as tense sign + 1 as pro-
nominal infix + xiha as stem.
Singular.
PluraL
I St pers.
-n-
-tu-
2nd pers.
-ku-
-nu-
3rd pers.
-mu-
-ba-
-u-
-t-
-mu-
-t-
*lu-
-i-
-dt-
-a-
-bu-
-a-
-cl-
-bl-
-ka-
-tu-
PRONOUNS. 37
Jlsus wakutufulla, Jesus died for uSy in which We have w as pro-
nominal prefix+aku as tense sign+tu as pronominal infix+fuila as
stem, meaning to die for.
118« We must note here a special infix -di- which has the same
position and construction as the pronominal infix and is used when
the verb is reflexive, i.e., when the object of the verb is also the subject.
This is, therefore, to be translated by myself ^ yourself^ himself ^ etc.
This construction with -dl- also has the idea of on one's own account^
of one's own accord, etc.
Wakudtt&ha, he cut himself; wakudtsua, he loves himself, i.e., is
proud; wakudtxtnda, he fell down {of his own accord),
119. For full conjugation of verb with infixes, see { 127.
C. Pronominal Suffixes.
120. The Pronominal SuflSxes are always put at the end of the verb
and they form an integral part of the verb inflection. They are never
used for any other than third-person nouns and cannot be used if the
noun for which they stand is also expressed.
131. The secondary prefixes are also the pronominal suflSxes with
the following exceptions:
(i) The sing, of classes I and III has -eye, which is derived from
the disjunctive personal pronoun.
(2) The pi. of class I has bo, which is also from the disjunctive
personal pronoun form.
i;S2« In inflection note that the final a of the verb root is elided
before the -eye; as, hakuhoneye, when he fell, for hakuhonaeye.
Rem. In the case of a few verbs ending in I, the -eye becomes -ye;
as, ya kudtye, go where he is.
123. The pronominal suffixes are as follows:
Singular. Plural.
Class I. 3rd pers. -eye -bo
-u (-wo) -1 (-yo)
-eye -I (-yo)
-In -1 (yo)
-dt (-dto) -& (-n, -wo)
-bu -A (-U, -wo)
-ct (-cto) -bl (-bio)
•ka -tu
Rem. I. Perhaps for the sake of making the sound more round and
full, we sometimes hear the forms ending in o as indicated in parentheses.
We may in classes V and VI occasionally hear a u without the follow-
ing o.
I.
3rd pers.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
33 PRONOUNS.
Rem. 2. The pi. of classes V and VI give regularly the suffix a, but
this, combining with the final a of the root, would give more correctly
an ft, and it is thus written in composition; as, blahonft, if they fall
(mak£la, eggs^ understood).
Rem. 3. For full conjugation of verb with pronominal suffixes, see
§ 127.
124. The pronominal suffixes are used under the following cir-
cumstances and should be carefully studied, for they present some
difficulties:
(a) As subject in subordinate clauses when the regular position of
the pronominal prefix at the beginning of the sentence is taken by
a subordinating particle such as mu-, where (in which), ku-, where
(at which), ha-, where (on which), ha-, when^ bl-, »/» or by a relative
pronoun used as direct or indirect object. These particles will, how-
ever, be treated more fully later under the head of Complex Sentences.
§ 453, etc.
Ciena mumanye kuakuyeye, / donH know where he has gone, in
which we have ku, meaning where + aku the tense sign + y with a of
stem elided + eye the pronominal suffix.
Hakuflkabo ku musoko, bakuxikama, when they reached the
village, they sat down, in which we have h, when, with final a elided
-faku the tense sign + flka the stem + bo the pronominal suffix.
Tudte btdia blakutuheye, let us eat the bread which he has given
us.
(b) As a direct object when the verb also has an indirect object pro-
noun which is any other than a ist pers. sing, pronominal infix. When,
however, the indirect object is ist pers. sing, pronominal infix, the
direct object, if a pronoun, takes the pronominal infix form and comes
just before the indirect pronominal infix.
Wakukuhaci, he gave tt (ctfulu, hat) to you, in which we have
w + aku + ku as pronominal infix 2nd pers. sing. -H ha the verb stem
-H el the suffix used as object.
WakubahabI, he gave them (blfulii, hats) to them, in which we have
w + aku + ba as pronominal infix 3rd pers. pi. -I- ha as stem-Hbl as
pronominal suffix used as object.
Bakntuheye, they gave him to us,m which we have b(a)-|-aku-|-tu
the pronominal infix -h h(a) the stem 4- eye the pronominal suffix as
object. Wakuclmpa, he gave it (cifnln, hat) to me, in which we have
w+aku-f-cl the pronominal infix used as direct object + m the pro-
nominal infix used as indirect object + pa (§ 31).
Rem. Even in the case of the ist pers. sing, pronominal infix as
direct object, we may sometimes have for the direct object a suffix
PRONOUNS. 39
rather than an infix form. Hence we may also say wakumpaci, he
gave it to me,
(c) As an indirect object when there is also connected with the same
verb a direct object pronoun which is 2nd pers. sing, or pi., or ist pers.
pi., or 3rd pers. pi. of class I. When the direct object is a pronoun
referring to any noun other than one belonging to class I, this direct
object becomes the pronominal suffix and the indirect object becomes
the pronominal infix.
Wakukuheye, he gave you to him; wakubaheye, he gave them
to him; wakukuhabo, he gave you to them; wakubababo, he gave
them to them; waknmuhabi, he gave them (bifulu, hats) to him; wakn-
bahabi, he gave them (btfulu, hats) to them.
125» In the compound tenses, i.e., those tenses formed with an
auxiliary and a participle, the pronominal suffix comes after the auxil-
iary. Kuakadibo badlma, where they were working.
186. When a noun is used as subject the pronominal suffix cannot
also be used at the same time, but this subject noun comes after the
verb just as the pronominal suffix would do, only the noun is not in-
flected as a part of the verb.
Hakuflka Kasongo ku musoko, wakuxtkama, when Kasongo
reached the village he sat down.
Relative Position of Pronominal Infixes and Suffixes.
127. It is important to note the relative position of the pronominal
infixes and suffixes. In order further to illustrate the principles of
the preceding rules [§§ 116, 117, 120 to 124 (o)-(0]» the verb, ha, to
give, is conjugated with the prefixes and suffixes. The 3rd pers. sing,
of the Past Indefinite tense of the indicative mood is taken, in which
w is the pronominal prefix and aku the tense sign. Of course the
prefix and the tense sign do not affect the infixes and suffixes. Observing
carefully the laws of euphony, we have then the following:
(a) Conjugation of verb with pronominal infixes:
SINGTTLAR.
I. ist pers. infix wakumpa, he gave to me, or he gave me (dir. obj.) ;
I.
2nd
tt
<l
wakukuha.
(i
4(
*• you
**
tt
tt
you
I.
3rd
(1
((
wakumuha.
<i
C<
''him
**
•♦
tt
him
II.
«
<i
*t
wakaha.
i<
«
" a.
tt
f(
M
U
III.
«
«<
f<
wakumuha,
it
«
*t it
tt
((
t(
it
IV.
«f
t»
«
wakuluha.
t(
•«
(t «
It
(i
(t
tt
V.
«
u
it
wakudiha.
l<
«
(C «
tt
tt
((
it
VI.
<i
(<
<«
wakubuha.
<t
«
« «
tt
tt
tt
it
VII.
«
«
«•
wakuciha,
«
"
it '*
tl
tt
tt
tt
VIII.
tt
<t
<•
wakukaha.
«i
««
tt tt
it
tt
tt
tt
42
PRONOUNS.
(6) Third pers. pi. as indirect object, the other persons as direct:
wakubampa, he gave me to them\
wakukuhabo, he gave you to them;
wakubahe^e, he gave him to them;
wakubahaci, he gave it to them;
wakutuhabo, he gave us to them;
wakunuhabo, he gave you to them;
wakubahabi, he gave them to them.
(7) When both pronouns, direct and indirect objects, belong to
classes II to VIII, we have a paradigm for the various direct objects
as follows [§ 124 {c)]:
* SINGULAR.
he gave if (munylnyl, meat)
'* • ** (nsolo, fowl)
" ** " (lukftsu, hoe)
'* " " (dlk«la, «^^)
'• " *' (bulaiu, bed)
" " * (clntu, thing)
" '* " (kasolo, small jowl) " **
II. wakumuhau,
III. wakumuheye,
IV. wakuinuhalu,
V, wakumuhadi,
VI. wakumuhabu,
VII. wakuinahact,
VIII. wakumuhaka,
to it{mhutk^dog);
PLURAL.
II. wakumuhat, he gave them (minylnyi, meats) to it (mbua, dog)\
III.
IV.
V. wakumuhd., **
VI.
VII. wakumuhabl, "
VIII. wakumuhatu, "
(nsolo, jowls)
(nkAsu, hoes)
(makj^la, eggs)
(malalu, beds) ** **
(blntu, things) " "
(fcusolo, small jowls) '* *'
Possessive Pronouns.
I. Simple Forms.
188. The Possessive Pronouns are nothing more than possessive
adjectives and they refer to nouns of any class or person or number.
We must carefully note that each possessive pronoun has a prefix
and a suffix. The prefix is determined by the thing possessed, the
suffix by the person or thing possessing.
139. The letter -a- furnishes the basis for the formation of most
of the possessive pronouns; to this are attached the necessary prefixes
and suffixes.
.130. The possessive adjective pronouns use the secondary prefix
forms for prefixes, and with some exceptions, the pronominal suffix
PRONOUNS. 43
forms (§ 123) for suffixes. Of course we remember that the secondary
prefix forms furnish the basis for the pronominal suffixes.
Rem. I. In the pronominal suffix forms, note that -eye becomes
•andl.
Rem. 2. The ist and 2nd pers. sing, and pi. of class I furnish suffix
forms not found in the pronominal suffixes (§ 120).
131. Possessive pronouns generally follow the noun modified, i.e.,
the thing possessed, though they may sometimes precede it.
132. Note that for his and her we have the same form (§ 105,
Rem. 4); also note that the 2nd pers. sing, is always used if the sub-
ject is sing.
133
. Th(
s root
and
suffix form of the
possessive pronouns are as
follows
•
Singular.
Plural.
Class
I.
ist pers.
-Inyl, wy, mine.
-etu, our^ ours.
I.
2nd
-ebl, thy, thine,
-enu, your, yours;
I.
3rd
-andl, his, her, hers
-abo, their, theirs;
II.
-au (-awo), its,
-al (-ayo) their;
III.
-andl, ''
(t It
IV.
-alu.
(( ((
V.
-adi (-adlo),*'
-ft (-awo, -au), **
VI.
-abu, **
It tt
VII.
-acl(-acio) **
-abl(-abio), ''
'* VIII.
-aka, **
-atu, * *
Rem. I. We find here the same forms in o and a as were referred to
in § 123, Rems. i and 2. The a of the pi. of classes V and VI would
naturally be written ft on account of the contraction and to prevent
confusion.
Rem. 2. In 2nd pers. sing, we sometimes hear -ebe for -ebl.
134. Examples of possessive adjective pronouns:
muntii winyi, my person (my slave);
bana band I, his or her children i
macu Inyl (§ 23), my ears,
nsolo WAndi, his 01 her fowl;
naolo yandl, his or her fowls; ■.(■•-■
nsolo yabo, their fowls;
bule buau, its (mud, stick) length;
bunsi bual, their (mid, sticks) number;
bunsi buft (buawo or buau), their (mftk^la, eggs) number,
135. The English forms mine, his, hers, yours, etc., when used as
predicate adjective complements after some form of the verb to be,
44 PRONOUNS.
are expressed by omitting the verb to be and putting in its place the
letter n, which is prefixed directly to the possessive pronoun, the latter
agreeing regularly with the noun modified. Observe the resulting
euphony. { 445.
Dikftla edl ndiandl, this egg is his; nsolo eu nsulnyl, this jowl
is mine,
136. Note an emphatic simple disjunctive personal pronoun after
the possessive sometimes. § 106 (6).
Bualu buebi wewe, your business.
137. In some cases a personal pronoun is used in Buluba-Lukia
where a possessive pronoun is employed in English.
Bakumusuika biansa, they tied hts hands, Ut. they tied him hands,
II. Contracted or Enclitic Forms,
138. In the case of certain words belonging to class 1, generally
expressing relationship (§ 42 and Notes), the possessive pronoun
becomes simply enclitic, and the ordinary prefixes proper to that number
and class are omitted from the possessive pronoun, and in some cases
the final vowel of the noun is elided before the simple possessive forms,
all of which begin with vowels. These elisions are indicated by an
apostrophe ('):
z'wlnyi becomes xMnyl, my father;
z'wetu ** x*etUy our father;
batatu betu ** batatu'etu, our fathers;
bamamu babo *' hwaaa.mu*&ho, their mothers;
zakena winyi ** iLtiken'lnyi, my namesake.
Rem. I. Sometimes the regular unelided forms may be heard also;
as, tatu wetu, baba winyi, bababa blnyl, etc.
Rem. 2. Coming under this same rule, so far as the sing, is con-
cerned, are also found some other words of class 1, generally expressing
relationship, such as muana, child, mukftxl, wifCf mukulu, elder brother,
muakunyi, younger brother, muena, owner. Hence we say muan'
Inyi, my child; mukfkxrandi, hts wife; mukulu'ebi, your elder brother;
muakunyl*etu, our younger brother; muen*aci, Us owner; but we
cannot say in the pi. ban'etu, we must say bana betu, our children;
etc.
Rem. 3. By suffixing the inseparable muenu and ciDa to the possessive
enclitic forms of x* and mbl respectively, we have the word for father-
in-law and brother-in-law; as, x'aodi-muenu, his father-in-law, \ 42,
Note 2.
Note. The letter y as a separating consonant comes between mbl
and the enclitic; as, mblyandi-clna, his brother-in-law, § 34 (a).
PRONOUNS. 45
Rem. 4. The prepositional word -a, of, must come after the enclitic
or after the compound word in the forms above given; as, x'andl wa
Kasonso, the father of Kasongo; x'andl-muenu wa Kaspngo, Ka-
songo^s father-ih-law.
Rem. 5. Note that muana combined with the sing, possessives
means my childy your chUdy etc., while muana combined with the pi.
possessives means generally either (i) a brother or sister , or (2) one
of the same trtbe or family, BIuaii*eta means, therefore, our (or my-
fellow townsman, or our (or my), fellow tribesman, or our (or my) brother
or sister.
Note i. The noun referred to by the pi. possessive may be sing., as
indicated in the example just given.
Note 2. The only way to distinguish between brother and sister is
by using the word muluml or mukftxi; as, muan'enu makftxl, your
sister; maan'enu muluml, your brother.
III. Formations with Locatives.
139. When the possessive pronoun modifies a noun which is also
governed by one of the prepositional words mu, ku or ha, the possessive
pronoun takes generally the agreement of the preposition. § 79.
Mu nsubu mulnyi, into my house; ku mp&la kuandl, before his
face, in front of him; ha mitu hetu, on our heads.
Rem. Occasionally we hear the ordinary agreement just as if the
preposition were not present, but this is doubtless to be explained on
the theoiy that the speaker has more thought of the person possessing
or of the thing possessed than of the idea of place or direction. \
140. By prefixing mu and ku (rarely ha) to the stems of the posses)
sive pronouns referring to nouns of class T, we have a peculiar and
much used construction meaning at one's house, at one's village, at one's
home, etc. Hence mulnyl and kulnyl mean respectively in and at
my house or home; muandt and kuandl mean respectively in an,d at
his house or home; etc.
Rem. I. The sing, possessive forms generally refer to the individual
house or home, while the pi. possessive forms refer to the village. It
is also worthy of noting that the pi. possessive forms are used when the
village is referred to whether the person be sing, or pi. Hence muetu
may mean either our village or my village.
141. The above locative words come to have the force of substan.
tives and consequently govern the concord of the sentence. § 79.
Kuenu kudi kunyl? where is your village or home? or where do
you live ?
Kuabo kudl kule, their town is far away, i.e., to their town is far away*
46 PRONOUNS.
Rem. I. These forms are used as nounal adjectives after muena.
inhabitant oj. \ 84 (h).
. Muena kuetu, one from our viilage; bena kuabo, people from their
village.
Rem. 2. Note also the substantive forms bulnyi, bnebi, etc., when
preceded by ha, in which case there is the meaning of in a place by
one's self. Cf. { 186.
. Ta ha buebl, go in a place to yourself.
142« To the forms kuloyl, kuebi, etc. ({ 140), are prefixed mu
and ba of class I and we have a resulting noun which means one from
my village, one from your village^ etc. Most often the possessive pro-
nouns take the pi. form whether one i>erson or more than one is re-
ferred to as possessing. Thus we have mukulnyl, my fellow townsman ;
mukuenu, your fellow townsman; mukuabo, their fellow townsman.
We note, however, that mukuetu is often used for my fellow townsman
rather than mukulnyi.
Rem. Observe the different ways of saying fellow tovmsmany each
having i>erhaps slightly different phases of meaning: muaii*etu (§ 138,
Rem. 5); muena kuetu (§ 141, Rem. i); mukuetu ({ 142).
Demonstrative Pronouns.
143. The Demonstrative Pronouns are those that have reference to
the position of the object referred to.
144. These demonstratives may be used either as simple adjectives
modifying the noun expressed, or as simple pronouns standing for the
noun understood, in both of which cases the inflection is the same and
is determined by the prefix of the noun.
145. The demonstrative adjectives generally precede the noun modi-
fied, though they may sometimes follow it. § 72, Rem. i.
146. Demonstratives, as we may expect, are always third person.
147. There are four classes of these demonstrative pronouns:
(fl) Those indicating objects near to the speaker, corresponding to
English thiSj these.
(b) Those indicating objects remote from the speaker, correspond-
ing to English that, those.
{c) Those indicating objects near the i>erson spoken to, having no
exact equivalent in English.
(d) Certain emphatic forms expressed in English by here it is, etc.
148. In the foot-note under § 105 attention has already been called
to the forms in -0-0, which undoubtedly have somewhat of a demon-
strative force, the idea being that of something previously mentioned
or not regarded as present either to the speaker or to the person spoken
PRONOUNS.
47
to. Hence these forms in -o-o may sometimes be used in a sort of
demonstrative adjective sense, having, however, more reference to
time.iha,ii to place.
I. Demonstratives Indicating Near Objects.
149. The Demonstrative Pronouns indicating near objects and
expressed in English by this or these are formed by suffixing to the
letters e- or a- the ordinary secondary prefixes; e- being used when
the vowel of the prefix is u or i, a- when the vowel of the prefix is a.
150. The demonstratives for near objects are, consequently, as
follows:
Sin^lar. Plural.
Class I. eu aba
t<
II.
eu
et
• »
III.
eu
el
<<
IV.
elu
et
V.
edl
ft
<(
VI.
ebu
ft
<<
VII.
eci
ebt
<«
VIII.
aka
etu
Rem. The pi. of classes V and VI is written ft in order to prevent
mistaking the form which is really aa.
151. Examples of demonstratives indicating near objects:
Eu muntu or muntu eu, this person; aba bantu or bantu aba, these
persons; edl dtk£la or dlk£la edl, this egg; ft mak^la or mak^la ft,
these eggs; nsolo el nyloyl, these fowls are mine {% 135).
II. Demonstratives Indicating Remote Objects,
162. The Demonstrative Pronouns indicating remote objects and
expressed in English by that or those or yonder are formed by prefixing
the secondary prefixes to the letter a, then doubling the resulting form.
Note the euphony of u and I.
163. The demonstratives for remote objects are as follows:
Class
Singular.
Plural.
I.
wawa
baba
II.
wawa
yaya
III.
wawa
yaya
IV.
lualua
yaya
V.
diadia
ft
VI.
buabua
ft
VIL
clacla
blabla
VIII.
kaka
tuatua
48 PRONOUNS.
Rem. The pi. of classes V and VI is written ft, the uncontracteil
form would be aaa. Only the context can show the difference between
these and the corresponding forms for the same classes in demonstratives
for near objects. The pronunciation is the same. Cf. § 150, Rem.
154« Examples of demonstratives indicating remote objects:
Wawa muntu or muntu wawa, that person; baba bantu or bantu
baba, those persons; yaya mid or mlcl yaya, those sticks; ft makftla
or mak£la ft, those eggs.
155. An increase of distance is indicated by lengthening of the
final syllable, though this is not indicated in the written form.
lil. Demonstratives Indicating Objects Near the Person Spoken to,
156« It is rather difficult to determine the exact idea which is in
the mind of the native when he uses this demonstrative. At the same
time there is a quite clear reference either to some object near the person
spoken to, or to some object which in some way concerns that person.
It can scarcely be translated.
157* These demonstratives are formed by sufi^xing to the letter a
the secondary prefixes and are as follows:
Class
Singular.
Plural.
1.
au
abii
II.
au
al
III.
au
at
IV.
alu
al
V.
adi
ft (ati)
VI.
abu
ft(au)
VII.
aci
abt
Vlll.
aka
atu
158. Examples:
Mud wfrbl au neuxihe ludimuenu, that stick of yours there will
break the mirror; lua ne dfulu act, bring the hat {near you there),
IV. Emphatic Demonstratives,
169. The Emphatic Demonstratives which mean here he is, here
it w, etc., are formed for the most part by doubling the secondary pre-
fixes and then prefixing the demonstrative particle ka- to the resulting
form.
Note i. The sing, of classes I and III gives kayeu, while in the
sing, of class II we find kawowo, a more euphonic form than kauu.
Note 2. Observe the separating consonant y in the sing, of classes
I and III, and also in the pi. of classes II, III and IV. { 34. In
these pi. forms of classes II, III and IV we also hear kai (kali).
PRONOUNS. 49
Note 3. The pi. of classes V and VI give regularly k& (kaaa). Some
say kawowo.
160. The emphatic demonstratives are as follows:
Class
Singular.
Plural.
I.
kayeu
kababa
II.
kawowo
kaylyi (kal)
III.
kayeu
(« *•
IV.
kalulu
CI ( (
V.
kadldt
k& (kawowo)
VI.
kabubu
«( ((
VII.
kacici
kabibt
mi.
kakaka
katutu
Examples of Emphatic Demonstratives: .,
. Muntu kayeu, here is the man; makila k&, here are the eggs; kabtbt,
here they are (btfulu, hats^- understood).
161. The emphatic demonstrative particle ka, which must be care-
fully distinguished from the negative ka, is often used before nouns
or other parts of speech to which special attention is called. In such
cases one of the regular demonstrative adjectives is generally .placed
after the noun.
Ka dik£la edi, here is the egg; ka dikda diadia, there is the egg;
ka meme eu, or simply ka meme, here I am; katuye, let us go [§ 237
(«) (5)]-
1G2* This ka may be used before the regular demonstrative forms
other than those given under § 160. A favorite method of expression
is to use the ka with the disjunctive personal pronoun forms (§§ 105
and 148), and then follow this with one of the regular demonstratives;
as, kadiodl edt, here it is here; kadiodi adi, there it is (near you);
kadiodl diadta, yonder it >5— dikila, egg^ being understood in each
case.
Demonstratives with Locatives,
163. When a demonstrative pronoun modifies a noun which is
itself governed by one of the locative prepositions (mu, ku, ha), the
demonstrative takes the agreement of the locative rather than that of
the noun. Cf. § 79.
Therefore we have for demonstratives indicating near objects emu,
eku, aha ({ 25); for remote objects muamua, kuakua, haha; for
objects near the person spoken to amu, aku, aha; for emphatic ob*
jects kamumu, kakuku, kahaha.
Mu nsubu emu, into this house; mu nsubu inuamua, into that
so PRONOUNS.
house; ku musoko eku, at this village^ ba muz<^te aha, on this hox\
ha muxilte haha, on that box; ku muci aku, at that tree {near you).
Note i. The above forms are made regularly according to the rules
for the formation of each demonstrative.
Note 2. We also have the doubled forms munemu, here inside,
kuneku, here at, hanaha, here on, in which the letter u is inserted as a
separating consonant. Instead of the forms muDemu and kuneku
we most often hear munomu and kunoku. §§ 34 {b), 25.
Note 3. The above locative forms with the demonstratives come
to have the force of simple adverbs of place. Hence emu, eku and
aha. in their proper constructions, may mean here; muamua, kuakua
and haha may mean there; amu, aku and aha may mean there {near
you); while kamumu, kakuku and kahaha may mean here or there
according to circumstances.
. Lua eku, come here; teka bintn aha, put the things here; ya kua-
kua, go yonder; lul munemu, come inside here.
Note 4. Owing to the demonstrative idea contained in the dis-
junctive personal pronoun forms we may also have the adverbial words
knokuo, muomuo and hoho. § 148.
Relative Pronouns.
164. There is no distinct Relative Pronoun for use as subject of
the relative clause like the who, which or that of the English; we find
instead only the ordinary personal pronominal prefixes (§ 114) agreeing
in number and class with the antecedent. The relative clause always
follows the antecedent.
Muntu wakukuluka wakuya, the person who jeU has gone; naku-
^ha mbua wakudia munyinyi wlnyl, / killed the dog which ate my
meat.
165. When the relative pronoun is the object, direct or indirect,
of the verb in the relative clause, the ordinary personal pronominal
prefixes are used as relative pronoun. The relative pronoun in such
cases, whether it be direct or indirect object, is always immediately
at the beginning of the verb, pY^ceding all other pronominal prefixes
and tense signs, and is inflected as a part of the verb.
Rem. I. When, however, the subject of the relative clause is 3rd
pers. sing, or pi., this subject is put after the verb, and if it be a pro-
noun, it takes the pronominal suffix form. §§ 123, 124 {a).
Rem 2 Remember that in compound tenses when the subject of the
relative clause is 3rd pers., this subject, whether a pronoun or a noun,
comes after the auxiliary. § 125.
PRONOUNS. 5X
166. Examples of relatives as objects:
Muntu unakumona makelela wakafua, the man whom I saw
yesterday has died, in which the first u of unakumona is the relative
pronoun.
-Muci uwakutuala mulhi, the stick which you brought is short.
Cintu ciudi utuala ndnyi, the thing which you are carrying is mine.
Bantu baudi umona badi baya ku IbanJ, the people whom you
see are going to Ibanj.
Muci wakutualeye wakukuluka, the stick which he brought has
fallen. Tuakudta nsolo ttuakuxiha makelela, we have eaten tHe
fowls which we killed yesterday.
Bakudia nsolo yakuxlhabo makelela, they have eaten the fowls
which they killed yesterday.
Nakudia nsolo yakuxiha Kasongo, / ate the fowls which Kasongo
killed.
Bakudia kanytkma katuakuxiha, they ate the smaU animal which
we killed. Muntu unakuha cifulu wakuya, the person to whom I gave
the hat has gone.
Ndi musue cifulu cidiye uluata, / want the hat which he is wearing.
167. The English possessive whose, together with the phrases of
which, of whom, etc., must be expressed in various ways, since there
is no distinctive possessive relative in the Buluba-Lulua language.
Perhaps the most satisfactory construction is the adjectival use of the
wordmuena (pi. bena), owner. \ 84 {b).
Bikila muena nsolo udi mufue, call the person whose fowl has died.
Rem. We sometimes hear an awkward expression on this plan*.
bantu ba mbuxi yabo ei bakuya, the people whose goats these are
have gone.
168. When the relative pronoun in English is governed by a preposi-.
tion, this generally takes one of three constructions upon being trans-
lated into Buluba-Lulua:
(a) When the antecedent is governed by one of the locative words
(mu, ku, ha), the locative furnishes the relative and stands in place
of it at the beginning of the verb; this is true only when the same loca-
tive which governs the antecedent also governs the relative pronoun.
Tumbele, tudl mu nsubu mOdi.ulala, the peanuts are in the house
in which you are sleeping.
Rem. Observe that when the locatives thus stand at the beginning of
the verb the subject, when 3rd pers., takes the pronominal suffix forms.
§ 123. Ndi nk£ba bintu bid! ha muxilte hadiye uxikama, / am
looking for the things which are on the box on which he is sitting.
(6) On the other hand, if the locative word governing the antecedent
52 PRONOUNS.
is different from that governing the relative word, or if there is no locative
word used before the antecedent and there is one in the relative clause
in English, then there is no locative word used at all in the relative
clause, only the relative pronoun proper to the antecedent is found.
Ndi nk£ba btntu bldl mu miix6te udiye uxtkama, / am looking
for the things which are in the box on which he is sitting.
Ctena mumone nsubu ndlye mnlale, / have not seen the house in
which he slept.
Lua nd muxSte wakadt mnkilxl mnxtkame, bring the box on which
the woman has been sitting.
(c) When the preposition with governs the relative pronoun in
English, this idea is expressed in Buluba-Lulua by using the ordi-
nary relative pronoun proper to the antecedent, with this followed
in the same clause by ne and the possessive form as described in $ 107. .
Muntu unakuya n'andt ku IbanJ wakafua, the person with whom
I went to Ibanj has died.
Kakndia nsolo yonso yakuliia n'al Kason^, I have eaten all
the fowls which Kasongo brought, lit. which came with them Kasongo,
169. Sometimes the antecedent is omitted, in which case we have
the Indirect Question construction. Cf. $ 472.
Wakudia blakumuhabo, he ate what they gave him (bint a, things^
understood).
Rem. Under this head may properly be placed the locatives prefixed
directly to the verb without any antecedent and answering the question
where? ^ i.e., in, at or on which place, but this is reserved for another
section. § 321.
170. For the compound relative words whoever, whosoever, what'
ever, etc., meaning everyone who or everything which, we generally find
onsb, all, every, followed by the relative clause.
Wakukuma bonso bakulua ha buthi n'andi, he struck whoever
came near him; ndt musue btntu bionso biwampa, / want whatever
you will give me.
171. The negative in relative clauses is formed on the same prin-
ciple as the negative of the present subjunctive, except that some form
of di (to be) instead of ik&ta (to be) is generally used with the negative
auxiliary 1. Cf. §§ 305, 225.
Cifulu ciudi kui mutuale nclnyi, the hat which you did not bring
is mine.
Muntu unakadi ct mumone wakafua, the person whom I did not
see died.
Tusuasua bintu blakadiye kai mutuale, we want the things which
he did not bring.
PRONOUNS. 53
Wakalaa ne btntu bind! ct musue, he brought the things which I
do not want,
Ndt musue kutangila muntu udl kai mulue, / want to see the
person who did not come,
Ndl musue cifulu cidl kact clliie; / want the hat which did not
come.
178, The future tense in relative clauses is also generally formed
on the plan of the subjunctive, there being something of a contingent
idea. $ 306 (e).
Funda blnta biwaya n'abl ka IbanJ, write down the things which
you wUl take to Ibanj,
Rem. The future negative in relative clauses is formed after the
manner of the negative of the present subjunctive, except that di {to
be) instead of Ikftla {to be) is used with the negative auxiliary I. § 171.
Kufundl blntu bid! kut uya n'abl ku Luebo, don't write down the
things which you will not take to Luebo,
Interrogative Pronouns.
173» Sonie Interrogative Pronouns are declinable, others are not
In any case the interrogative word, whether used as subject or object
or modifier, almost invariably comes last in the sentence.
Rem. I. KI (5 176) comes after the word modified, whether that word
comes at the end of the sentence or not. Munyl (§ 177) sometimes
comes first in the sentence. The interrogative word when used as
indirect object may come just after the verb followed by thte direct
object (§ 468, Rem. i).
Rem. 2, When the . interrogative word as subject comes last, the
verb takes the same prefix which it would do were the interrogative at
the beginning of the sentence.
The more important of the interrogative words and phrases are now
taken up.
174. Nganyi? who? whom? The pi. is banganyi. This in-
terrogative refers only to persons.
Wakuya nganyi? who went?
Wakuya ne nganyl ? whom has he gone with ?
Bakumut&ha banganyi? who (pi.) struck him?
Rem. I. This is the regular form used in asking a person his name.
IMna dlebl nganyl 7 what is your name ? Ijt. your name is who ?
Rem. 2. The possessive whose ? is expressed by -a nganyl ? or the
pi. -a banganyl?
Clf alu cia nganyl 7 whose hat ?
54 PRONOUNS.
175. Cinganyl? what? The pi. is blnganyl.
These forms, having reference only ter inanimate things or irra-
tional creatures, are used most frequently in asking such questions as
what is it? what are they ?
Bet ncinganyi ? what is this thing ?
Ebi mblnganyl ? what are these things ?
Udl utuala blnganyi ? what things are you carrying ?
Rem. I. Cinyl (pi. blnyl) is often used instead of clnganyt, espe-
cially in the Applied Form of the verb, to express what for ? why ? § 328.
Nudi nusnila baalu boa Nsambt einyi? what do you wish God's
palaver for ?
Rem. 2. Sometimes we hear simply ct (pi. bl) for cinyt or cinganyi.
Rem. 3. Cinganyl and its equivalents are used in asking the names
of things.
Dlna dlacl nclnganyl ? what is its name ? Cf. § 174, Rem. i.
176. KI ? what ? what kind ? which ?
This word is indeclinable and always follows a noun. It may not,
therefore, necessarily come last in the sentence.
Muntu Id ? what or which person ? or what kind of a person ?
Ngangate blntu Id ? what kind of (or which) things shall I get ?
Nsungule clfuln Id ? which hat shall I choose ?
Clfulu Id olakukuluka, cikunse Inyl eitoke? what hat fell, the red
one or the white one ?
177. Munyl? blxi? what? what is the matter?
These words are uninflected.
Wakuamba munyl ? what did he say ?
Aha munyl ? what is the matter here ?
Rem. These are more properly adverbs having the meaning of haw?
how much ? how many ? in what way ? etc. See { 420.
178. Nga? how much? how many?
This word is an interrogative adjective and takes the secondary
prefixes. § 68 (i).
Bantn banga? how many people?
Mlcl Inga ? how many sticks ?
179. The various interrogative words meaning where, when, whence,
whither, why, etc., used in direct and indirect questions will be taken
up later under adverbs and conjunctions.
Indefinite Pronouns.
180. Under the name Indefinite Pronouns are grouped certain
classes of words which, by derivation or by use, have a likeness to pro-
PRONOUNS. 55
nouns. Most of them are used as adjectives or as adjective preposi-
tional phrases or as simple substantives.
I. Words of Number and Quantity.
These are expressed in English by many, jew, all, boih, every, much,
each one, nothing, plenty of, etc.
181. -a bungl, ngia-ngi, ngi, many, mtich.
The form ngi is inflected as an adjective; the same is true of ns^ia-
ngl, but note in the latter case that the prefix of the noun comes before
both ngia and ngi; the -a of the phrase -a bungl is the inflected preposi-
tion meaning of.
Ba bungl bakulua, many came (with bantu, understood).
Adl a bungi, there are plenty (mak£la understood).
Bangia-bangl bakafua, many {peopU) died.
Bintu blngl, many things.
183. Onso, all, entire, whole, every, each, any.
This word is inflected as a simple adjective, taking secondary prefixes.
§ 68 (J).
Bonso bakuya, all (bantu) have gone-, yonso yakafua, they have
all (nsolo) died.
Rem. The substantive form of onso followed by the possessive ad-
jective pronoun has the meaning of all of them, in which case the verb
takes not the prefix of buonso, as might be expected, but the pretix
corresponding to the noun or pronoun referred to by the possessive
adjective.
Buonso buabo bakuya, all of them (bantu) have gone-, buonso
buetu netuye, all of us will go.
Note i. Following this analogy we have the construction for both,
all three, all four, etc., referred to under § 95 (a).
Note 2. Onso is also used to express any, any one you choose, any-
thing, whatever, whoever, used generally in pi. where in English a sing,
is most commonly found. Cf. § 170.
Ndl musue bintu blonso blwampa, / want whatever you will give
me.
183. Nya-nya (§ 76), few.
The same idea may also be expressed by b&le, kise and Ihl. These
words are all adjectives belonging to different dialects and in the sing,
mean small or short.
Nzambi neasungule banya-banya, God will choose a few (bantu
understood); nendale ku IbanJ.matuku mihl, / shall stay at Ibanj a
• few days.
5^ PRONOUNS.
184* Hatuhu, M and dnana mean nothing, none, far nothing.
These forms are indeclinable.
Ndi hatuhu or ndl M or ndt cinana, I have nothing or none.
Rem. The same words preceded by -a mean of no account, worthless-^
as, muntu wa hatuhu, a worthless person,
II. Distributives,
These are expressed in English by each, other ^ some, others, the one . . .
the other, another, of one kind , , . of another kind, etc.
185. Kuabo . . . kuabo and nga . . . nga, the one , . , the other,
some . . . others. These words are inflected as simple adjectives.
Atukuabo wakuya, mukuabo udl ux&la, one {person) has gone, the
other is staying.
Bakudla makftla makuabo, bakuha balunda babo makuabo, they
ate some of the eggs, the others they give to their friends,
Bangra bakuitabuza Jisus, banga bakumuhldia, some believed on
Jesus, others rejected him.
Rem. Kuabo and nga, when not used distributively, express the idea
of another, others.
Nak^la cikuabo, / have bought another (cifulu understood).
186. The combination ha bu- means of its kind, of one kind , , , of
another kind.
The bu- is inflected with the possessive pronominal forms.
Eu muct nha buau, eu nha buau, this stick is one kind, this one
is another kind, i.e., a different kind. For nha, see { 445.
Edi dik<^la nha buadt, diadia nha buadi, this egg is of one kind,
fhat one is of another kind.
Rem. This is apparently the same construction as that referred to
under { 141, Rem. 2.
187. For the construction of each when distribution is meant, see
§ 94 and Rem.
III. Miscellaneous,
188. In English there are certain reciprocal pronominal words, such
as each other, one another. These are expressed in Buluba-Lulua by a
verbal suffix angana, which will be treated later. § 340.
Bakusuangana, they love each other; bad! bafuanangana, they are
like each other.
189. The English they, one (French on), used as indefinite subject,
is expressed bv means of the simple 3rd pers. pi. pronominal prefix
of class I, having bantu understood. This is also a very common
construction for expressing the English passive voice. § 202 (a).
VERBS. 57
Bad! bamba ne, ''Kasongo ulualua/' they say that Kasango is com-
ing.
Bakuxlha mbuzl kudt Kasongo, the goat was killed by KasongOy lit.
they killed the goat by Kasongo.
Rem. In such expressions as he is the one, that is the one, etc., use
the simple disjunctive personal pronouns. § 105.
VERBS.
Preliminary Observations.
The inflection of the Verb, though apparently difficult on account
of the varying pronominal prefixes and other euphonic changes, is
nevertheless essentially simple in itself, for it is remarkably regular, as
may be seen after the principles have been once comprehended.
190* The root, or simplest form, of the verb is found in the 2nd
pers. sing, imperative mood. This root, with very few exceptions, ends
in a. To this simple form are prefixed the various tense and mood
signs, and the pronominal prefixes and infixes. To this root are added,
as occasion demands, certain suffixes which indicate various modi-
fications of the radical idea of the verb. To this simple form the pro-
nominal suffixes are also attached. We have, then, such simple verb
stems as dila, cry, ya, go, lua, come, xlkama, sit down.
Rem. I. The final a suffers change which we shall see later. So we
should say that the unchangeable stems in the verbs just given are
dtl, y, la, xikam.
Rem. 2. In the Vocabulary the root and not the infinitive is given.
191. There are five moods: the Imperative to express command, the
Infinitive to express the abstract notion of the verb root, the Indicative
to express simple affirmation or denial, the Subjunctive to express certain
conditional or contingent ideas, the Purportive to express end or pur-
ix>se.
193. The participles are adjectives in construction, are used mostly
in the formation of comix>und tenses, and agree in inflection with the
noun or pronoun to which they refer.
193. The simple tenses are those formed directly on the root of the
verb, without the aid of any auxiliary verb; as, wakuha, he gave;
bakuluangana, they fought.
194. The compound tenses are those formed with a participle and an
auxiliary verb. In this case it must be borne in mind that the auxiliary
is the real verb, the added participle, which must always agree in number
and class with its subject, being only a verbal adjective; as, wakadi
S8 VERBS.
mulale, he had been lying down; udi ufunda mukanda, he is writing
the letter,
195. The verb agrees by means of its personal pronominal prefixes
(§ 114) in person, number and class with its subject. These prefixes
are the same for all moods and tenses, save in certain negative forms.
The usual laws of euphony in all cases need to be carefully observed.
Negative Constructions.
196. The negative forms are quite different in many cases from
the aflteiative; to such an extent is this true that some Bantu gram-
mars make this difference the basis for two conjugations. Owing to
these differences the afl&rmative and the negative forms are given side
by side in the paradigms.
197. The common negative particle is ka-, which is always found
prefixed at the beginning of the verb, preceding all other pronominal
prefixes, infixes and tense signs. In compound tenses it is prefixed to
the auxiliary.
ExCEP. I. In class I, ist pers. sing, and 2nd pers. sing., the nega-
tive is cl- and ku, respectively, instead of ka- and the regular prefixes.
ExCEP. 2. In 3rd pers. sing, of classes I and III the pronominal
prefix u- is omitted after the ka-; be careful to note the elisions that
follow
198. The negative pronominal prefixes are, therefore, as follows:
Class
Singular.
PluraL
i I.
ist p.
ci-
katu-
2nd p.
ku-
kanu-
3rdp.
ka- or k-
kaba-
II.
kau- or kaw
kal- or kay-
III.
ka- or k-
(< it it
IV.
kalu-
(< tt it
V.
kadl-
kft-
VI.
kabu-
kft-
VII.
kaci-
kabi-
VIII.
kaka-
katu-
Rem. I. The forms k-, kaw- and kay- result from the laws of euphony
when the regular prefix is followed by a vowel. §§ 23, 27, 28.
Rem. 2. The final a is considered as elided before all forms beginning
with a save in the pi. of classes V and VI, where it is written ft, whether
the form begin with a or not.
199.. In cases where the copulative predicate is omitted the negative
is simply kan- prefixed directly to the noun or other part of speech.
5 445, Rem. 5. •
VERBS. 59
Cintu eci kandik^ia, this thing is not an egg) clfulu aci kanclnyi,
that hat is not mine. *
Voice.
200. Verbs in the Active Voice are the regular forms and present
no peculiarities in inflection. Such verbs may, as occasion demands,
be transitive or intransitive.
201* By means of certain suffixes added to the verb root, a modifi-
cation of meaning takes place corresponding to the Middle Voice idea
of the Greek. This form is neither active in the sense of its subject
performing an act, nor is it passive in the sense of its subject being the
recipient of an act from anything external, but it is between the two.
The verb in this case supposes that an internal agent exists, or that
the condition came about naturally without any external agent.^ At
the same time it expresses an active condition or state or result, which
is attributed to the subject itself. This neuter or stative or middle
voice form is obtained b> suffixing -uka to the verb root after dropping
the final a.
Wakuandamuka, he has turned around] mulondo wakucibuka, //^
jar has broken) mbuxt wakuh&tuka, the goat has gone out.
Rem. I. These middle voice forms are treated as intransitives in the
dictionary.
Rem. 2. There is nearly always a corresponding active transitive
form having the suffix -una or -ula or ->ola; as, wakuandamuna nsubu,
he has turned the house around) wakueibula mulondo, he has broken
the jar) wakuh&tula mbuxi, he has driven out the goat.
Rem. 3. The middle voice forms are inflected exactly as the active
forms
Rem. 4. Sometimes the suffixes -ika and -ma seem to be used in the
middle voice sense; as, mucima winyl wakuhandika, my heart has
split, i.e., / am very much frightened) nakusokoma, / hid myself.
202. The Passive Voice may be expressed in several ways:
(a) By the indefinitie 3rd pers. pi. active voice (§ i8g), thus avoid-
ing the passive construction, which is used much less frequently than
in English. When the agent is mentioned this is preceded by the
prepositional word kudi, by.
Bakuziha mbuxi, the goat has been killed, lit. they have killed the
goat.
Bakuxiha mbuxi kudi Kasongo, the goat has been killed by Kasongo
{b) By the various tenses of the verbs meaning to be used as auxil-
iaries with the passive past participle. The participle then becomes
only an adjective taking the ordinary primary prefixes. It will be
noted that this construction conforms to the English passive. Cf, § 251,
6o VERBS.
Ndi mut&ha, / am {have been) struck.
Nsolo Idi mlzlha, Uie chickens are killed.
Kasongo ndi mut&ha kadi Kabata, Kasongo was struck by Kahata,
Rem. It is very important to note here the difference between the
primary and the secondary prefixes with the participle. As we shall
see later ({{ 244 and 252), the secondary prefixes make the verb active.
Hence udi mat&ha means he is struck, but udi ut&ha means he struck.
{c) By use of the suffix -ibua added to the verb root. It is interest
ing to note that, like the middle voice forms, this also has the regular
active voice inflection throughout. Hence the word kut&hlbaa means
to be struck. The form is active, but the meaning is passive.
Udi at&hibua, he is being struck; udi mat&hlbue, he has been struck,
Ulu wat&hlbua, he is always getting struck.
Utadi nt&hlbua, you are about to be struck,
Neat&hlbue, he wUl be struck.
Z03. For the sake of comparison, note the three voices on the same
loot:
Active: waknelbula mnel, he broke the stick.
Middle: maei waknclbuka, the stick has broken.
Passive: mnei wakuclbtboa, the stick has been broken.
:304« These middle and passive voice forms will be treated again
under Derivative Verbs. §§ 341-345.
Auxiliary Verbs.
205* The Auxiliary Verbs are those used to aid in the formation of
certain tenses. The majority of these are somewhat irregular and
defective. Some of the more important of them are now given.
Rem. There are no auxiliaries corresponding to our have and had —
these are expressed either by one of the forms to be given below or by
the past tense signs.
I. Dl, to be.
206* The root of this word was perhaps originally la which under
the influence of i has become d.
Rem. a form having the root ena and taking the regular negative
prefixes is used as the present tense negative of dt.
207. This verb, which is found only in the past tense (affirmative
and negative) and in the affirmative present, is used in the formation of
the following tenses in the indicative mood: Present Progressive,
Present Perfect Progressive, Past Progressive, Past Perfect Progressive.
In addition to these it also furnishes through ena the negative of
certain other tenses: Present Imminent, Second Present Actual, Present
VERBS. 6l
Repetitive, Past Repetitive, Future and Future Imminent. It also
furnishes the auxiliary for formation of the Past Tense Subjunctive.
Present Tense.
Appirmatxvb. I Nbgativb.
208. Formation: pro. prefiz+di. 209. Formation: neg. pro. prefix
I +eiia.
Past Tense.
Afpirmativb.
310. Formation: pro. prefiz+
aka the tense sign+di.
Nbgativb.
311* Formation: neg. pro. prefix
+ aka the tense sign+dl.
II. Cidi, to be,
212* Perhaps the original root was eila, but this has become eidl
under the influence of I.
Rem. a form having the root eena and taking the regular negative
prefixes is used as the present negative of cldi.
213* This verb, which is found only in the past tense (affirmative
and negative) and in the affirmative present, is used in the formation
of the First Present Actual tense, indicative mood.
Rem. Sometimes the past tense of cldi is used as auxiliary, making
much the same sense as the past progressive.
Present Tense.
Appirmativb. I Nbqativb.
214* Formation: pro. prefix + 215* Formation: neg. pro. prefix
eldl. * + eena.
Past Tense.
Appirmativb. Nbgativb.
218. Formation: pro. prefix + 217* Formation: neg. pro. prefix
aka the tense sign + cidl. + aka the tense sign + cldi.
III. Tadl (or Kadi), to be about to.
218* The stem of this verb was perhaps tala or tana.
Reic. z. The Baluba say kadi and the Bena Lulua tadi — the latter
is used in the paradigms.
Reic. a. We find on this root only the present affirmative; the nega^
tive is expressed on the root ena. § 206, Rem.
Appirmativb. I Nbgativb.
219. Formation: pro. prefix + I 220* Formation: usetheneg.!
tadi. I
62 VERBS
321. This auxiliary is used in the formation of the Present Immi-
nent and the Future Imminent tenses, it is also used much as the verb
dl, to he, when not employed as auxiliary.
IV. TvL^tohe (habitual).
332. This word is used only in the formation of the Present Habitual
tense and has only the present tense, affirmative and negative.
Present Tense.
Affirmativb.
223* Formation: pro. prefix +tu.
Nbgativb.
224. Formation: neg. pro. prefix
+ tu.
V. The Negative I, not to he.
22Sm This form seems to be found only in the present negative and
is used by the Baluba sometimes in place of the negative ena ({ 206,
Rem.). It is specially used in formation of the negative in the Present
Subjunctive in conditional sentences and in the negative of relative
clauses.
Present Tense.
226. Formation: neg. pro. prefix +!.
VI. Ik&la, to he,
227. This verb is regular throughout and is used in some places
where di is defective; especially is this true in the formation of the
Present Subjunctive and the Future Indicative.
Biwik&la muana wa Nzambt, Nsambt neakusungile, if you are a
child of God, God will save you.
Blwenza nunku, newik&le ne bualu, if you do thuSy you will he in
trouble.
228. The verb anaa followed by the infinitive means to have just
done) the negative has the idea of not to have yet done.
Wakuanza kulua, he has just come; kena muanze knlna, he has
not yet come.
VTI. Other Auxiliary Words and Constructions,
229. Quite a list of verbs and verbal combinations are used in an
auxiliary sense, followed most often by the infinitive mood or by the
VERBS. 63
purportive. These must be learned mostly from experience, as only
the more important ones can be mentioned here.
230. The English ca», be able, etc., may be expressed in several ways:
(i) By the auxiliary di followed by mua and in&iitive.
Ndl mua kum^ma mux^te, / can lift the box.
(2) By the verb mona followed by mua and the infinitive.
Ndi mona mua kumSma muxite, / can lift the box,
(3) By the verb mtinya followed by mua and the infinitive.
Ndi mumtlnye mua kum^ma mux^te, / can lift the box.
Rem. There seems to be some 'difference between mona and mtlnya;
the former has more the idea of physical, the latter of mental, ability.
231* The English may, meaning permission, is expressed by the
purportive mood. § 312 (6).
232. For the English must and ought no satisfactory equivalents
have yet been found in the Buluba-Lulua. The same can perhaps be
said of most other Bantu languages. This seems very unfortunate, for
these words are so forceful in English. It is also interesting to note
that such equivalents are also wanting in the Hebrew. Wherever the
word must occurs in the English translation of the Old Testament, it
represents merely some idiomatic expression conveying that meaning.
In Buluba-Lulua these ideas must be expressed by the simple tense forms.
Perhaps the phrase bualu bukHle, followed by the Causative Form
(§ 333> etc.) of the verb, will express the idea of must with some accuracy;
in the same way we may use bualu butmbe or bimpe, followed by the
infinitive, for ought,
233. Note these words which are generally followed il construction
by the infinitive: banga, begin to; dlanjlla, be first to; hansa, fail
to; sua, want to; mona, finish (to).
Rem. The word lua, go to, often expresses a future idea, just as in
English we say / am going to do. The Second Present Actual is a
favorite tense in this construction; as, ulualua kusungula bantu
bandi^ he is going to choose out his people.
Formation of Moods and Tenses with their Uses.
It will prove helpful to study these moods and tenses, as they are
explained, in connection with the paradigms. § 318.
Further study and investigation will undoubtedly reveal additional
tenses and verbal forms and combinations, but certainly the more
common and useful are given below.
64
VERBS.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
I334. The simple Imperative forms have only the present tense,
affirmative and negative, and their uses are the same as in English.
AVFIRMATIVB.
235* Formation:
(a) The 2nd pers. sing, is the
simple stem of the verb.
(b) The 2nd pers. pi. is formed
by changing final a of the stem
toi.
Nbgativb.
Z3S. Formation:
(a) Second pers. sing, is formed
by prefixing ku to the stem
and changing final a to L
Rem. I . When the verb stem
ends in la, we have simple i
resulting after the addition of
1 of the negative imperative;
hence kudll becomes kudl,
don't eat.
Rem. 2. When the verb stem
ends in ua, we have left simply
D, the I of the neg. being
omitted; as, kulu, don't come,
for kulul.
Rem. 3. When the verb ends
in na, y is inserted after the
n upon addition of the neg. 1
[§ 34 (a), Rem. ; as, kusunyl
ml, don't carry water, for ku-
sunl ; kuclnyl, don't be afraid,
for kueinl.
(b) Second pers. pi. neg. is
formed thus: ka+nu + stem
with final a changed to I.
Rem. In the case of verbs
ending in la, ua and na, see
i 236 (fl), Rems. 1-3.
!^7* Some peculiar imperative constructions must be noted: *
(a) Ku is added to the stem sometimes for emphasis, especially in
2nd pers. sing, affirmative
Taku, go, be gone, or don't be afraid to go; ambaka, speak,
(b) In many cases, especially atter verbs of motion, where in
English the two verbs are imperative, the Buluba-Lulua puts
one in the imperative and the other in the purportive mood.
VERBS. 6$
Ta uxihe nsolo, go and kill the fowl.
Lua undeze makila, come and show me the eggs,
(c) The Hortative Imperative idea is expressed io several ways:
(i) For ist pers. pi. we generally find a form made thus: ist pers.
pro. prefix + root with final vowel changed to I.
Tuyl, let us go^ tudlml, let us work,
(2) There is also a common hortative following the analogy of
i »37 (»).
Lua tuye, come (sing.)» let us go; Im tuye, came (pl.)> ^ ^^ go,
(3) We may have the simple ist pers. pi. purportive mood, which
seems to correspond to the Latin amemus, let us lave; as,
tuye, let us go,
(4) The purportive mood is also used to express the hortative
idea in 3rd pers. sing, and pi.
Alue, let him came; balue, let them come.
(5) In view of § 161 we may have the emphatic prefix ka with
ist pers. pi. purportive mood; as, katuye, let us go,
(6) We may also have the emphatic suffix ku corresponding to
i 237 (a) i as, tuyaka, let us go,
(d) There is also heard a weaker imperative form expressing a
simple wish. This is found in 2nd pers. sing, and pi., and
corresponds to these forms found in the present subjunctive.
{ 306 (c), Rem. 2.
Waya blebl bimpe, go well, good journey to you,
Nnalala btenu bimpe, sleep well.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
238« The Infinitive is formed by prefixing ku to the stem.
239. Remembering that the infinitive is the abstract idea of the verb
and consequently in most cases is a noun, we find the most common
uses of the infinitive to be as follows:
(a) It may be used as subject of the sentence; as, kuamblla bantu
baknabo bualu bna. Niambi kudi kuhlta kuxlkama
dnana, to tell other people the palaver of God is better than to
sit idle.
66 VERBS.
(b) It may be used as part of an adjective phrase [§ 87 (/)]; as^
bintu bia kudia, things to eat; mbuxl wa kfkla ulualua, a
goat to buy is coming; luvu lua mbua kudlla, a trough for
dogs to eat out of.
Rem. I. Note the locative: forms corresponding somewhat to the
forms mentioned in iSy{d) and Rem. 1.
Ndi nk^ba kua kuteka hintu, I am looking jot d place to
put the things^ I am looking where to put the things.
Rem. 2. Also note mua with infinitive after constructions meaning
to know how tOy to be able to, etc. § 230.
Ciena mumflnye mua kusonga buatu, / don*t know
how to make a boat.
(c) It may be used adverbially to modify the predicate in expressing
end or purpose; as, bakuya kuluangana nvita^ they have
gone to fight.
(d) It may be used as direct object; as, ndl musue kuya ku IbanJ,
/ want to go to Ibanj.
{e) It may be used as complement of the predicate modifying the
subject. Cf. kuflta under § 239 (a).
S40« It is important to note that the use of the infinitive in English
does not always correspond to its use in the Buluba-Lulua. The
different uses in the two languages must be learned by experience, re-
membering that the infinitive is more common in English. As a general
rule, which will cover the majority of cases, we may say that when the
subject of the first verb is also the subject of the second, the infinitive
is used for the latter; when, on the other hand, the subjects of the two
verbs are different, the purportive mood is used with the latter. §§461,
462.
Ndl musue kuya, I want to go; bakuya kuluangana, they have gone
to fight; ndl nkdba muntu aye ku Luebo, / am looking for a person
to go to Luebo.
Rem. There is also heard in this connection a peculiar construction
in which the infinitive is used even when its subject is different from
that of the leading verb. Sometimes the infinitive seems to take here
the pronominal sufl5xes.
Lua ne bia mulunda wlnyl kudla (or kudieye), bring something for
my friend to eat. But the most common way of saying this is lua ne
bia kudia mulunda winyl adie.
241. The infinitive may take all the ordinary concomitants of the
verb, such as direct object, indirect object, prepositional phrases, etc.
VERBS. 67
PARTICIPLES.
242. The Participles, which are used for the most part as verbal
adjectives in the formation of compound tenses ({ 194), agree in number
and class with the suDJect or word to which they refer; ' the present
participle also agrees in person.
Rem. Note that the participles take all the usual concomitants of
the verb, such as direct object, indirect object, prepositional phrases,
etc,
243. There are three participial forms: the Present Active, the P^st
Active and the Past Passive.
/. Present Participles,
344. The Present Participles are formed by prefixing the ordinary
pronominal prefixes of all classes, numbers and persons directly to the
stem of the verb, but before the pronominal infix if one is used.
345. The present participles are used in the formation of the follow-
ing tenses, all in the indicative mood : Present Progressive, First Present
Actual, Present Imminent, Present Progressive.
Rem. Observe the use of the present participle as predicate adjective
after other words than those meaning to be.
Udl wenda uzobela, he walks limping.
246. When n of ist pers. sing, is prefixed directly to the stem, it is
necessary to note carefully the resulting euphony. Some examples are
here given to refresh the memory:
(a) When the stem begins with h, the n becomes m and the hap.
§32.
Ndi mpa mukOxi lueho, I 4im giving the woman some salt (from
the stem ha).
(() When the stem begins with I, this letter becomes d. § 29.
Ndi ndexa, I am showing (from the stem lexa).
(c) When the stem begins with a vowel, the n becomes ng. § ^^.
Ndi nsamba, I am speaking (from the stem amba).
Ndi ngenza, I am making (from the stem enza).
Ndi nglmAna, / am standing (from the stem Imlkna).
(d) When the initial letter of the stem is b or p, the n becomes m.
§3'-
Ndi mb&la, I am counting (from stem b&Ia).
68 VERBS.
{e) When the stem begins with m or n, the n of the pronominal
prefix is elided. { 33, Rem. a.
Ndl mona, 7 am looking; ndl nna ml, I am drinking water,
Z47* The same rules hold good for the use of n when it comes before
the pronominal infixes.
Ndl mumona, I am looking at him (for nmumona); ndl nmnona,
I am looking at you (for nnumona); ndl mbamona, / am looking at
them (for nbamona); ndl ngomona, / am looking at it (for numona,
with a noun in the sing, of class II understood); ndl nslmona, / am
looking at them (for nimona with a noun in the pi. of class II under-
stood).
248. The above rules apply equally regularly in the future indicative
and in the purportive mood, where we also have an n prefixed either
immediately to the stem or to the pronominal infix if one is employed.
II. Active Past Participles.
240* The Active Past Participles are formed thus: primary ad-
jective prefixes + stem with final vowel change to e.
Hence we have mulue, from Imlua, to come; mndime, from kndlma,
to work. Observe that the infinitive sign ku is elided.
Rem. Note that the active past participles do not indicate the person
of the subject; they all have the third person form. If the subject
belongs to class I, ist pers. sing, or 2nd pers. sing., the participle takes
mu; if the subject belongs to class I and is ist pers. pi. or and pers.
pi., the participle takes ba.
250. The active past participles are used in the formation of the
Present Perfect Progressive and Past Perfect Progressive tenses of the
indicative mood.
Rem. It must be borne in mind that some verbs, though passive
in meaning, are active in form. Cf. { 30a (c).
III. Passive Past Participles.
951 • The Passive Past Participles are formed thus: primary ad-
jective prefixes + stem.
Hence we have mut&ha, from kut&ha, to strike; muhanda, from
kuhanda, to split.
Rem. Note that the passive past participles, following the analogy
of the active past participles, do not indicate the person of the subject-
Apply the principles of { 249, Rem. p
VERBS. 69
252* The passive past participles are always transitive verbs used
with some part of the verb $0 be to express the idea that the subject
has been acted upon. The auxiliary may be present tense, but the
participle is always past in significance, in fact nothing ^ore than the
predicate adjective.
Mud udt mnclbula, the stick is (has been) broken; bintn bldl
bluvua kadi Kabata, the things have been washed by Kabata,
253* It is very important to note here the difference between the
two past participles, active and passive, when they are used as pure
verbal adjectives. The active past participle is used when the verb is
intransitive or middle voice in meaning; the passive past participle is
used when the verb is transitive and an agent can be employed. {§ 85,
201-203.
Muntu mufae means a dead person, one who has died (intransitive).
Muntu mut&ha means a wounded person, a person who has been
struck by another (transitive).
Muct muclbuke means a broken stick, from the intransitive or middle
voice verb kuclbuka, which means to break of its oivn accord; on the
other hand mucl muclbula means a broken stick, from the transitive
verb kuclbula which means to break.
254* There are two rarer partidpal forms, one used in the formation
of the Present Habitual tense, indicative mood, the other in the forma-
tion of the Future Imminent tense of the same mood. The letter a
prefixed to the root is the sign of the Present Habitual tense form, while
the Future Imminent form has as sign the letters aku. The first of
these takes the ordinary pronominal prefixes corresponding to the
person, number and class of the subject; the second form takes also
the same prefixes save in class I, where u(w) is found throughout in the
sing, and ba throughout in the pi. See {{ 268, 269, 296.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
255^ The names given to the tenses are more or less arbitrary — ^in
fact some difficulty has been found in getting suitable names — but
those have been adopted which, either from usage or from the ordinary
meaning of the word, would convey some idea of the import of the
tense.
Some tenses of the indicative mood are simple, others are compound.
§§ i93» 194.
T)xe uses of this mood are in general the same as in English.
70 VERBS.
Present Progressive.
Appirmativb.
256. Formation: pres. tense of
auxiliary dl followed by
pres. participle.
Negative.
257» Formation: pres, neg. of
auxiliary ena followed by
pres. participle.
258. The Present Progressive tense is used to indicate continuous
or progressive action or being in present time, without any idea as to
when the action began or when it will be completed.
Udl udlla, he is crying; udi ulua, he is coming.
Rem. I. There is also to be observed a strong tendency to throw
the future back into this present tense form; in fact the negative of
the future is always the negative of the present progressive tense. § 294.
Rem. 2. Several other tenses which lack a regular negative seem to
use the negative of the present progressive, such as the present imminent,
the second present actual, the present repetitive and the future immi-
nent. Perhaps, however, it would be more correct to say that these
tenses form their negative with the auxiliary ena.
Present Perfect Progressive.
Nbgativb.
260. Formation: pres. neg. of
auxiliary ena followed by
active past participle.
Afpiricativb.
259. Formation: pres. tense of
auxiliary di followed by
active past participle.
261* The Present Perfect Progressive denotes a finished or com-
pleted action which has just been going on within the present time
limit.
Ndl mudile, I have been crying (to-day, for example, but am not
crying now),
Udl mnlue, he has come (i.e.» he has been coming to-day^ hut is not
coming now, for he has already arrived).
First Present Actual.
Appirmative.
262* Formation: pres. tense of
auxiliary idi followed by
pres. participle.
Nbgativb.
263. Formation : pres. tense neg.
of auxiUary cidi followed
bv pres. participle. § 212,
Rem.
264. The First Present Actual tense denotes that the action is
actually in progress at the moment of the speaker's utterance.
Rem. It is difficult to distinguish clearly between the rst pres.
VERBS,
71
actual and the second pres. actual and the pres. progressive, for the
latter, as has been seen, also indicates an action which is in progress
at the moment of the speaker's utterance. The present progressive,
however, may often indicate a state rather than an action at the moment.
For example, udl udila may mean that / am tn the crying way cr state
(as is the native custom upon the death of a friend), but perhaps not
actually crying at this moment. On the other hand, ncldl ndila can
only mean / am crying at thts momenL
For use of second pres. actual see below.
Second Present Actual.
Nbgativb.
The neg. of pres. progressive
is used as neg. of second
present actual.
Appirmativb.
/365* Formation, pronominal pre> 966i
fix + stem + stem.
Rem. Note that only the pure
stem is r peated; as, ndom*
balomba, / am begging (from
the stem lomba).
367. The Second Present Actual is used much as the first present
actual.
Rem. I. The second present actual is used mostly with monosyllabic
verb stems, though polysyllabic stems are sometimes found to take
this tense also, as, ulualua, he is coming, from the root lua; ndiadia,
/ am eating, from diaj utuatua, she is pounding, from tuaj ngen-
denda, / am going, from stem enda (note ng and the elision of final
a of stem before e).
Rem. 2. Sometimes this second present actual has a future significa-
tion, very much as in the English sentence / am going Uhmorr<fW\
for this the Baluba say nyaya makelela«
Present Habitual.*
Appirmativb.
368. Formation: pronominal pre-
fix +tu, followed by a par-
ticipial word formed as
follows: pronominal prefix
+ a the tense sign + stem.
Nbgativb.
!S69. Formation : neg. pronominal
prefix + tu, followed by a
participial word formed as
indicated under § 268.
* Sometimes this Present Habitual tense idea is expressed by the use of a verb
ya followed by the infinitive. To the word ya are prefixed directly the ordinary
personal pronomina! prefixes, as.nya kunaa makanya. / smoke tobacco, ciya
kunua makanya / don'tsmoke tobacco.
72 VERBS.
270* This tense is used to denote present habitual or customary
action.
Mtu nsalamba bidia, I cook food (that b my business or work).
Citu nganua makanya, I donH smoke tobacco, i.e., it is not my custom.
211* The letter g is inserted between n and a in first pers. sing.
i33-
Past Indefinite.
Apfirmativb. > Nboativb.
272. Formation; pronominal pre I 973. Formation: neg. pronominal
fiz+aku the tense sign+ prefix +aku the tense sign
stem. \ + stem.
274. The Past Indefinite is the common tense for indicating simple
completed action in past time, without any special reference to near-
ness or remoteness in the past. It seems to correspond very nearly
to the Aorist of the Greek. It is to expressed in English according
to circumstances, either by the simple past tense, such as he loved,
he went, etc., or by the present perfect tense, he has loved, he has gone,
etc. Only the connection can determine wuich English tense to use.
Wakuya, he has gone, he went; wakudlla, she has cried, she cried, '
275. For the omission of the g in ist pers. sing, affirmative see
} 33, Rem. i.
Past Perfect.
Appiricativb.
276* Formation : pronominal pre-
fix +aka the tense sign
+stem
Nboativb.
277* Formation : neg. pronominal
prefix +aka the tense sign
+ stem.
278« The Past Perfect tense is used to denote an action that was
completed before some other action or event took place. This action
or event need not always be expressed, but it is understood in the
mind of the speaker. There is also the thought of the action being
completed or done once for all, irrevocably.
This tense is liable to be confused with the past indefinite. Perhaps
an example will illustrate, in a general way, the difference: wakuya
(past indefinite), he has gone, he went, without any thought of a con-
comitant event; wakaya (past perfect), he had gone {before you came),
or he has gone (and there ts no recalling him),
279* For the omission of g in ist per. sing, affirmative see ) 33.
Rem. I.
VERBS. 73
Past Progressive,
Apfiricativb.
980. Formation: past tense of
auxiliary dl followed by
present participle.
Nboa,tivb.
981 • Formation: neg. past tense
of auxiliary di followed by
present participle.
282« The Past Progressive tense denotes an action as having been
going on in past time, as progressive, but is now completed and was
completed before the time limit of the present was reached. WakadI
udlla, he was crying.
283. This tense is easily confounded with the present perfect pro-
gressive. This latter tense, however, is used of completed action
within the present time limit, whereas, as has been stated, the past
progressive is used of completed action before the present time limit.
WakadI udila, he was crying (e.g., yesterday) j udi mudlle, he
has been crying (e.g., to-day)
APPIRMAriVB.
284* Formation: past tense of
auxiliary dl followed by
past active participle.
Past Perfect Progressive.
Nbgativb.
285. Formation: neg. past tense
of dl followed by past
active participle.
286. The Past Perfect Progressive is used to indicate an action
as going on before some other action in past time took place. See
1 283.
"WakadI mudlle, he had been crying.
Present Repetitive.
Afpiricativb.
287. Formation: pronominal pre*
fix + stem.
Note. The form must be re-
peated once or twice.
Nboativb.
288. No distinct neg. for this
tense. Perhaps the neg. of
the Present Progressive
could be used, if ever
needed.
289. The Present Repetitive tense expresses repeated action in
present time or a succession of similar acts performed by different
persons or things.
Nsolo yinyl Ifua Ifua, my fowls die and die, i.e., they are dying one
at a ttmc.
74
VERBS.
Nkuna nkuna mamina^ kena am^na, / plant and plant the seeds,
they do not sprout, i.e., / ant continually planting.
Rem. This tense (with the form used only once) may perhaps also
have the sense of a general or universal present.
Past Repetitive,
Appirmativb.
]S90. Formation : pronominal pre-
fix + a the tense sign +
stem.
Note. The form must be r e -
peated once or twice.
Nbgativb.
291. No distinct neg. for this
tense. Perhaps the neg.
of pres. perf. progressive
could be used, if ever
needed.
292, Th^ Past Repetitive is used to express repeated action in
past time or a succession of similar acts performed in past time by
different persons or things.
Ngakuna ngakana mamlna, kena mam^^ne, / planted and planted
the seeds, they have not sprouted,
Mbuxl yandl yafua yafua, his goats died and died.
Rem. This tense (with the form used only once) may perhaps also
have the sense of a general or universal past.
Future.
Appirmativb.
293« Formation: tense sign ne + pronominal
prefix + stem with final a changed to e.
Note i. This is the only case in which the
tense sign comes before the pronominal
prefix.
Note 2. The pronominal prefix of 3rd pers.
sing, of classes I and III is a instead of u.
Note 3. Some seem to make the tense sign
na (nga) throughout instead of ne.
294.
Nbgativb.
There is no dis-
tinct future
form for the
neg. When
needed, use
neg. of pres.
progressive.
295. The Future Tense corresponds almost exactly to the future
of the English, the only difiference being that the Buluba-Lulua does
not use the future form so frequently, the present progressive being
employed in its stead, or the infinitive moo after the verb kulua,
to come, § 233, Rem.
VERBS.
75
Future Imminent.
Nbgativb.
No distinct neg. for this
tense. The neg of pres.
progressive can be used, if
needed.
Appirmativb.
296. Formation: pres. tense of 297.
auxiliary tadi followed by
a participial form con-
structed as follows: second-
ary prefix +aku the tense
sign -I- stem.
Note i. The for n following the
auxiliary is participial in its
inflection and is so treated.
§254.
Note 2. In class I note the pre-
fix a(w) throughout in the
sing, and b(a) throughout in
the plural.
298. The Future Imminent is used when an action is represented
as liable to happe i or about to happen or is impending.
There is some danger of confusing this tense with the present immi-
nent, but the latter always means that which is just about to be done
or to happen, within the present time limit, while the future imminent
is more indefinite as to the time limit. Two examples will illustrate:
ntadi nya, / am about to go (spoken by one who has been sitting near
you just as he rises to go); lufu lutadi luakulua, death is impending
(may come any time).
Present Imminent.
Nbgativb.
300. No distinct neg. form. Use
neg. of pres. progressive.
Appirmativb.
299. Formation: pres. tense of
auxiliary tadl followed by
pres. participle.
301. The Present Imminent tense is used to indicate an action
as just about to take place within the present time limit, and is to be
expressed in English by about to or going to. § 298.
302. For the use of kadi instead of tadl, see { 218, Rem. i.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
303. The Subjunctive mood is used in certain conditional or con-
tingent clauses, though not in all conditional clauses.
76 VERBS.
Present Tense.
Nboativb.
305* Formation: regular affinna-
tive pres. subjunctive of
ikftla (§ 227), followed by
present tense of auxiliary
verb I (J 225), followed by
past active participle.
Afpiricativb.
304. Formation r pronominal pre
fix+a the tense sign
+ stem.
Note i. Because of the subor
dinating particles bi- and
ha- which are usually em-
ployed with this tense, the 3rd
pers. prefi es are seldom used.
i 124(a).
Note 2. For omission of sin ist
pers. affirmative and negative,
see § 33, Rem. i.
306. The Present Subjunctive is used as follows:
(a) In the protasis of present general conditional sentences, taking
the subordinating conjunctive prefix bi-, if. { 459 (a).
Blwikftla muana wa Niambi, kuena mutvi, if you are a chUd of
God, you donH steal, or are not a thief,
(b) In the protasis of future conditions, taking also the subordinating
conjunctive prefix bi-, if. § 459 (p).
Blwadlma bimpe, nenkuhe lukama lua mlbela, if you work welly
I shall give you one hundred cowries.
(c) In the various subordinate clauses introduced by the subordi-
nating conjunctive prefix ha- (or hu-), meaning when^ after^ until,
all having a more or less future or contingent idea. § 458 (a) (c).
Hawalua nenkuhe lukama lua mlbela, when you come (after you
come), I shall give you one hundred cowries.
Rem. I. Sometimes the subordinating particle is omitted, but it
may be understood; as, nendue ngondo walua, I shall come next
month, i.e., when the moon comes.
Rem. 2. Under this same head may be noticed the weak impera-
tive forms referred to under § 237 {d); as, blwasua kumpa, wampa,
if you wish to give me, give me (i.e., if you choose),
(d) In certain contingent clauses expressing the idea of if you choose,
where you choose, etc.; as, teka clntu hawateka, put the thing where
you choose.
VERBS.
77
Rem. Note that the Locative Prefixed form is used in such cases.
i 321.
(e) In relative clauses with a future or contingent idea; as, funda
bintu biwaya n'abl ku IbanJ, write down the things which you will
take to Ihanj, Cf. { 172.
Past Tense,
Appirmativb.
307. Formation: past tense of
auxiliary dt followed by
infinitive mood.
Nbgativb.
308. Formation: past tense neg.
of di followed by infinitive
mood.
309. The Past Subjunctive is used in the apodosis of past or im-
possible conditional sentences. { 459 (c).
Bu wewe rnulne luklksa, Lasalus kakadl kufua, if you had come
quickly, Lazarus would not have died,
Bu nuenu badlme bimpe, nakadt kunuha lukama lua mibela,
if you had worked well, I would have given you one hundred cowries.
Rem. The same tense is sometimes used in neg. past tenses with
munyl? why? { 420 (6), Rem. 2.
PURPORTIVE MOOD.
Present Tense.
Nboativb.
311. Formation: neg. pronominal
prefix + stem with final a
changed to e.
Appirmativb.
310. Formation: pronominal pre-
fix + stem with final a
changed to e.
Note.. In 3rd sing, of classes I
and III the u beco 1 es a.
313. The Purportiye mood, which, as far as investigated, seems to
have only one tense, is used quite extensively to express various rela-
tions, the most common being that of end or purpose, which fact fur-
nishes the name for the mood. The most common uses of this mood
are as follows:
{a) To express end or purpose, generally rendered into English by
in order that, that, so that, to with the infinitive mood, lest, in order that
not, etc. § 461 and Rem.
Lua ne bldla, mulunda winyl adie, bring the bread that my friend
may eat.
Ndt nk£ba mantu aye ku IbanJ, I am looking for a man to go to
Ibanj.
78 VERBS.
Ndi ntenga buteya, nkuate mpuku, / am making a trap in order
thai I may catch some rats.
Tula cikuku, kaclt&he bantu ku makflsa, pull up the root that it
may not strike people on the feet.
(6) In asking permission, or in inquiring as to ihe desirability of
doing something. These ideas are most often expressed in English
either by the future indicative or by may or shall and the in6nitive.
Tub&le mlbela? shall we count the cowries?
Nye 7 may I go?
(c) In the expression of various imperative ideas, especially the
hortative. § 237 (&) and (c) (3) (4).
PECULIAR NEGATIVES,
313« In addition to the above moods and tenses there are two pecu-
liar negative tenses which it may be as well to group together. One
of these we shall call the Munyl Negative, the other the C! Negative.
The first of these is thus called because it is always found with munyl ?
why {not)? The other is so called because ci is its tense sign.
Rem. Just as we have found some tenses used only in the aflfirma-
tive with no distinct negative, so here we find negatives with no dis-
tinct aflfirmatives.
The Munyi Negative.
314. This tense form, which is found only in the negative, is made
thus: neg. pronominal prefix + stem with final a changed to I.
Note Verbs ending in la, ua and na have the same changes here
as were indicated in the neg. imperative, § 236, Rems. 1-3.
315. This form is used after munyl? why (not)? { 420 (ft).
Munyl kuyl 7 why donH you go ?
Munyl Vudimilwhy donH you work?
The CI Negative.
316. This tense form, which is found only in the negative, is made
thus: neg. pronominal prefix +cl the tense sign + stem with final
a changed to I.
Note. Verbs ending in la, ua and na have the same changes here
as were indicated.in the neg. imperative. § 236, Rems 1-3.
317. This tense is used as a sort of half command and half ques-
tion, especially when it is used in 2nd and 3rd persons. In the ist
pers. it has an affirmative significance, though a neg. form.
VERBS.
79
Kuciblkldi Kasongo, call Kasongo, or why don't you call Kasongof
or ij you have not called him^ do so.
Katuciyi, let us go^ or why not go ?
VERB PARADIGMS.
318. Below are given the various Mood and Tense forms, first of
the Auxiliary verbs and later of the verb suina, to bite. These should
be carefully studied and incessantly practised, for the success or failure
of speaking the language depends upon the degree of accuracy with
which the verbal inflections are used.
A. Auxiliary Verbs.
I. Di (neg. ena), to he.
Present Tense — I aw, etc.
Appirmativb.
Nbgativb.
Singular.
Plural.
Singular.
Plural.
I.
I St p.
ndi
tudi
Ciena
katuena
2nd p
.udi
nudi
kuena
kanuena
3rd p.
udi
badi
kcna
kabena
II.
<«
udi
Idi
kawena
kayena
III.
(<
udi
Idi
kena
kayena
IV.
'«
ludi
idi
kaluena
kayena
V.
didi
adi
kadiena
kena
VI.
*'
budi
adi
kabuena
kena
VII.
( <
cidi
bidi
kaclena
kablena
VIII.
«(
kadi
tudi
Past Tense— 7
kakena
was, etc.
katuena
Appirmativb.
Nbgativb,
Singular.
Plural.
Singular.
Plural.
I.
I St p.
nakadi
tuakadi
ciakadi
katuakadi
2nd p
. wakadi
kuakadi
kanuakadi
3rd p.
, wakadi
bakadi
kakadi
kabakadi
II.
wakadi
yakadi
kawakadi
kayakadi
III.
wakadi
yakadi
kakadi
kayakadi
IV.
luakadi
yakadi
kaluakadi
kayakadi
V.
dlakadl
akadi
kadlakadi
kftkadi
VI.
buakadi
akadi
kabuakadi
kftkadi
VI!.
ciakadi
blakadi
kaciakadi
kabiakadi
VIII.
kak di
tuakadi
kakakadi
katuakadi
So
VERBS. .
II. Cidi (neg. cena)) to be.
Present Tense — / am, etc.
Appirmativb.
Nbgativb.
Singular.
PluraL
Singular.
PlumL
I.
ist p
ncldi
tucidl
cicena
katucena
2ndp
ucidl
nucidi
kucena
kanucena
3rdp
UGldt
bacldi
kacena
kabaccna
II.
ncldi
Icldl
kaucena
kaicena
III.
ucldl
Ictdi
kacena
kaicena
IV.
lucidl
Icldi
kalucena
kaicena
V.
dlcldl
actdi
kadicena
IcAcena
VI.
bucldi
acldl
kabucena
kAcena
VII.
clcldi
bicidi
kaclcena
kabicena
VIII.
kacldl
tuctdl
kakacena
katucena
Past Tense — /
waSf etc.
Appirmativb
Nbgativb.
Singular.
Plural.
Singular.
^ural.
I.
ist p.
nakacldl
tuakacidl
ciakacldi
katuakacidi
and p.
wakacidl
nuakactdt
knakacldi
kanuakacidi
3rdp
wakacidi
bakacidl
kakacidl
kabakacidi
II.
wakactdi
yakactdi
kawakacidi
kayakacidi
III.
wakactdl
yakacidi
kakacidl
kayakacidi
IV.
luakacldi
yakacidt
kaluakacidl
kayakacidi
V.
diakacidi
akacidt
kadiakacidl
kAkacidi
VI.
buakacidl
akacidi
kabuakacldi
kAkacidi
VII.
Giakacldl
blakacidi
kaclakacidl
kabiakacidi
VIII.
kakacidl
tuakacidl
kakakacidi
katuakacidi
III. Tadi (or Kadi), to be about to.
Present Tense — I am about to, etc.
Appirmativb.
Nbgativb.
Singular.
Plural.
I.
ist
P-
ntadi
tutadi
2nd
P-
utadi
nutadi
3rd
P
utadi
batadi
II.
utadi
itadi
For neg. use the root ena,
III.
utadi
itadi
the pres. neg. of di.
IV.
lutadi
itadi
§ 318, A I.
V.
ditadi
atadi
VI.
butadi
atadi
VII.
citadi
bitadi
VIII.
katadi
tutadi
VERBS.
8i
IV Tu, to be (Habitual).
Present Tense — I am, etc.
I.
1st
Affirm A TiVB.
SingxUar. Plural,
p. ntu tutu
2nd
P-
utu nutu
II.
3rd
P
utu batu
utu Itu
III.
utu itu
IV.
lutu Itu
V.
ditu atu
VI.
butu atu
VII.
cttu bitu
VIII.
katu tutu
Nbgativb.
Singular.
Plural.
citu
katutu
kutu
kanutu
katu
kabatu
kautu
kaitu
katu
kaitu
kalutu
kaltu
kaditu
k&tu
kabutu
kfttu
kacitu
kabitu
kakatu
katutu
V. Negative I, noi to be.
Present Tense — / am not, etc.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
Singular,
ist p. ct
2nd p. kut
3rd p. kat
kawi
kal
kalul
kadi
kabul
kact
kakal
Plural.
katul
kanul
kabai
kayl
kayl
kayl
kAi
kftl
kabt
katul
B. Paradigm op Regular Verb Suma, to bite,
I. Imperative Mood.
Present Tense — Bite thou, etc.
ApPtRMATiyB
Singular. Plural.
2nd p. suma snml
Nbgativb
Singular. Plural.
kusuml kanusumi
n. Infinitive Mood.
Present Tense— r<? Wte.
kusuma.
82
VERBS.
III. Participles
(a) Active.
Present Tense—
BUing.
Past Tense^Having bitten.
Singular.
Plural.
Singular.
Plural.
I.
I St p. nsuma
tusuma
musume
basume
2nd p. usuma
nusuma
musume
basume
3rd p. usuma
basuma
musume
basume
II.
**
usuma
isuma
musume
misume
III.
<•
usuma
tsuma
musume
misume
IV.
((
lusuma
isuma
lusume
misume
V.
ti
disuma
asuma
disume
masume
VI.
tt
busuma
asuma
busume
masume
VII.
«*
clsuma
cisume
bisume
VIII.
(<
kasuma
tusuma
(6) Passive
kasume
tusume
Past T^nsc—BiUen,
Singular.
Plural.
I.
ISt
p. musuma
basuma
2nd
p. musuma
basuma
basuma
II.
< (
musuma
misuma
III.
tt
musuma
misuma
IV.
a
lusuma
misuma
V.
ti
disuma
m-isuma
VI.
((
busuma
masuma
VII.
(«
cisuma
bisuma
VIII.
<(
kasuma
tusuma
IV. Indicatwe Mood.
(a) Present Progressiv Tens -
-/ am biting, eU
.
APPIRIfATIVB.
Singular.
PluraL
I.
ISt p. ndl
nsuma
tudi tusuma
2nd p. udi
usuma
nudi nusuma
3rd p. udi
usuma
bad! basuma
n.
** udi usuma
idi isuma
III.
•' udi
usuma
Idi Isuma
IV.
" ludi lusuma
Idi Isuma
V.
" didi disuma
adi asuma
VI.
" budi busuma
adi asuma
VII.
'" cidi cisuma
bldi bisuma
VIII.
' ' kadi kasuma
tudi tusuma
VERBS.
(6) Present Perfect Progressive Tense — / have biUen, etc.
83
V
Nbgativb.
Singular.
Plural.
I.
ISt
P-
ctena nsuma
katuena tusuma
2nd
P-
kuena usuma
kanuena nusuma
3rd
P-
kena usuma
kabena basuma
11.
kawena usuma
kayena Isuma
III.
k na usuma
kayena isuma
IV.
kaluena lusuma
kayena isuma
V.
kadtena disuma
kena asuma
VI.
kabuena busuma
kena asuma
VII.
kaclena cisuma
kablena bisuma
VIII.
kakena kasuma
katuena tusuma
Appirmativb.
Singular.
Plural.
I.
ISt
P-
ndi musume
tudi basume
2nd p.
udi musume
nudi basume
3rd
P-
udi musume
badi basume
II.
udi musume
idi misume
III.
udi musume
idi misume
IV.
ludi lusume
idi misume
V.
didi disume
adi masume
VI.
budi busume
adi masume
VII.
cidi cisume
bidi bisume
VIII.
kadi kasume
Nbgativb.
Singular.
tudi tusume
Plural.
I.
ISt
P-
Ciena musume
katuena basume
2nc
p.
kuena musume
kanuena basume
3rd
P-
kena musume
kabena basume
II.
kawena musume
kayena misume
III.
kena musume
kayena misume
IV.
kaluena lusume
kayena misume
V.
kadle a disume
kena masume
VI,
kabuena busume
kena masume
VII.
kaciena cisume
kabiena bisume
VIII.
kakena kasume
katuena tusuma*
84
VERBS.
(c) First Present Actual — / am now bUingy etc.
Afpirmativb.
Singular.
Plural.
I.
1st p.
ncidi nsiima
tucldi tusuma
and p.
ucidt usuma
nucidi nusuma
3rd p.
ucidl usuma
bacldi basuma
II.
uctdi usuma
IcidI isuma
III.
uctdt usuma
IcidI isuma
IV.
lucidl lusuma
icidi isuma
V.
dicldi disuma
acidi asuma
VI.
bucldi busuma
acidi asuma
VII.
cicidi cisuma
bicidi bisuma
VIII.
kacidl kasuma
Nbgativb.
tucldi tusuma
Singular.
Plural.
I.
ist p.
ctcena nsuma
katucena tusuma
2nd p.
. kucena usuma
kanucena nusuma
3rd p.
kacena usuma
kabacena basuma
II.
kaucena usuma
kaicena Isuma
III.
kacena usuma
kalcena Isuma
IV.
kalucena lusuma
kaicena isuma
V.
kadlcena disuma
kftcena asuma
VI.
kabucena busuma
kftcena asuma
VII.
kacicena cisuma
kabicena bisuma
VIII.
kakacena kasuma
katucena tusuma
(d) Second Present Actual — I am bUing, etc.
Affirmative.
Negative.
Singular.
Plural.
I.
ist p.
nsumasuma
tusumasuma
2nd p.
usumasuma
nusumasuma
3rd p.
usumasuma
basumasuma
II.
usumasuma
Isumasuma
Use neg. of Prese
gressive. §
IV (a).
III.
usumasuma
Isumasuma
IV.
lusumasuma
Isumasuma
V.
dlsumasuma
asumasuma
VI.
bu sum asuma
asumasuma
VII.
i^III.
cisumasuma
kasumasuma
bisumasuma
tusumasuma
§ 318 B
VERBS.
8S
(e) Present Habitual— 7 bite, etc.
Appirmativb.
Singular.
Plural.
I.
ISt
P-
ntu nsasuma
tutu tuasuma
2nd
P-
utu wasuma
nutu nuasuma
3rd
P-
utu wasuma
batu basuma
II.
utu wasuma
Itu yasuma
III.
utu wasuma
Itu yasuma
IV.
lutu luasuma
Itu yasuma
V.
ditu dlasuma
atu asuma
VI.
butu buasuma
atu asuma
VII.
cltu ciasuma
bttu blasuma
VIII.
katu kasuma
Nbgativb.
Singular.
tutu tuasuma
Plural.
I.
ISt
P-
cltu ngasuma
katutu tuasuma
2nd
P-
kutu wasuma
kanutu nuasuma
3rd^
P-
katu wasuma
kabatu basuma
II.
kautu wasuma
kaltu yasuma
III.
katu wasuma
kaitu yasuma
IV.
kalutu luasuma
kaitu yasuma
V.
kaditu diasuma
kAtu asuma
VI.
kabutu buasuma
k&tu asuma
VII.
kabitu blasuma
VIII.
kakatu kasuma
katutu tuasuma
(/) Past Indefinite—/ bU, etc.
Appirmativb.
Nbgativb.
Singular.
Plural.
Singular.
Plural.
I.
ISt p.
nakusuma
tuakusuma
ciakusuma
katuakusuma
2ndp
wakusuma
nuakusuma
ku akusuma
kanuakusuma
3rdp
wakusuma
bakusuma
kakusuma
kabakusnma
11.
wakusuma
yakusuma
kawakusuma
kayak usuma
Ill
wakusuma
yakusuma
kakusuma
kayakusuma
IV.
luakusuma
yakusuma
kaluakusuma
kayakusuma
V.
diakusuma
akusuma
kadlakusuma
kAkusuma
VI.
buakusuma akusuma
kabuakusuma kAkusuma
VII.
ciakusuma
bi akusuma
kaqiakusuma
kabiakusuma
VIII.
kakusuma
tuakusuma
katuakusuma
86
VERBS.
(g) Past Perfect—/ had bitten, etc.
Afpirmativb.
Singular. Plural.
I. ist p. nakasuma tuakasuma
2nd p. wakasuma nuakasuma
3rd p. wakasuma bakasmna
II. *' wakasuma yakasuma
III. ** wakasuma yakasuma
IV. ** luakasuma yakasuma
V. ** diakasuma akasuma
VI. ** buakasuma akasuma
VII. ** ciakasuma biakasuma
VIII. '* kakasuma tuakasuma
Negative.
Singular. Plural.
ciakasuma katuakasuma
kuakasuma kanuakasuma
kakasuma kabakasuma
ka wakasuma kayakasuma
kakasuma kayakasuma
kaluakasuma kayakasuma
kadiakasuma k&kasuma
kabuakasuma kAkasuma
kaclakasuma kabtakasuma
kakakasuma katuakasuma
{h) Past Progressive — I was biting, etc.
Affirmative.
Singular,
ist p. nakadl nsuma
2nd p. wakadi usuma
3rd p. wakadi usuma
II.
wakadi usuma
III.
wakadi usuma
IV.
luakadt lusuma
V.
diakadi disuma
VI.
buakadi busuma
VII.
VIII.
clakadi cisuma
kakadi kasuma
Negative.
Singular.
I.
ist p.
clakadi nsuma
2nd p.
kuakadi usuma
3rd p.
kakadi usuma
n.
kawakadi usuma
III.
kakadi usuma
IV.
kaluakadt lusuma
V.
kadiakadi disuma
VI
kabuakadi busuma
v:i.
kaclakadl cisuma
VIII.
kakakadi kasuma
Plural,
tuakadt tusuma
nuakadi nusuma
bakadi basuma
yakadi Isuma
yakadi isuma
yakadi isuma
akadi asuma
akadi asuma
btakadt bisuma
tuakadi tusuma
Plural.
katuakadi tusuma
kanu akadi nusuma
kabakadi basuma
kayakadi isuma
kayakadi Isuma
kayakadi Isuma
k&kadl.asuma
k&kadi asuma
kablakadi bisuma
katuakadi tusuma
VERBS.
87
(j) Past Perfect Progressive— 7 had been biting, etc.
Appirmativb.
Singular.
Plural.
I.
ist p.
nakadi musume
tuakadi basume
2nd p.
«rakadi musiune
nuakadi basume
3rd p.
wakadi musume
bakadi basume
II.
wakadi musume
yakadl mlsume
III.
wakadi musume
yakadl mlsume
IV.
luakadi lusume
yakadl mlsume
V.
diakadi disume
akadl masume
VI.
buakadi busume
akadl masume
VII
ciakadl cisume
biakadi blsume
VIII.
kakadt kasume
Nboativb.
tuakadi tusume
Singular.
Plural.
I.
ist p.
ciakadl musume
katuakadl basume .
2nd p.
kuakadi musume
kanuakadl basume
3rd p.
kakadi musume
kabakadl basume
II.
kawakadi musume
kayakadl mlsume
III.
kakadi musume
kayakadi mlsume
IV.
kaiuakadi lusume
kayakadl mlsume
V.
kadlakadi disume
kftkadl masume
VI.
kabuakadl busume
VII.
kaciakadi cisume
kabiakadi blsume
VIII.
kakakadi kasume
katuakadl tusume
(7) Present Repetitive — 7 keep biting and biting, etc.
Appirmativb.
NBGAnVB.
Singular^
Plural.
I.
ist p.
nsuma Qsuma
tusuma tusuma
2nd p.
usuma usuma
nusuma nusuma
II.
3rd p.
usuma usuma
usuma usuma
basuma basuma
isuma Isuma
Use neg. of
Present Pro-
III.
usuma usuma
isuma isuma
IV.
V.
lusuma lusuma
disuma disuma
isuma isuma
asuma asuma
gressive.
§ 318 B IV
{a).
VI.
busuma busuma
asuma asuma
VII.
cisuma clsuma
bisuma bisuma
rai.
kasuma kasuma
tusuma tusuma
ss
VERBS.
(k) Past Repetitive—/ kept biting and biting, etc.
Apfirmativb.
Singular,
ngasuma ngasuma
I. ist p.
and p.
3rd p. wasuma wasiima
II. ** wasuma wasuma
III. " wasiima wasnina
IV. '* luasuma luasuma
V. " dlasuma dlasuma
VI. *' buasuma buasuma
VII. '* clasuma clasuma
VIII. '* kaauma kasuma
Plural.
tuasuma tuasuma
nuasuma nuasuma
basuma basuma
yasuma yasiinia
yasnma yasuma
yasuma yasnma
asiima asuma
asuma asuma
blasoma blasoma
tuasuma tuasuma
Nbgativb.
Use generally
neg. of Pres.
Perf. Pro-
gressive.
J 318 B IV
(ft).
(/) Future—/ shall bite, etc.
Singular.
I. ist p. nensume
and p. neusume
3rd p. neasume
APFUUfATiyB.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
vni.
neusume
neasume
nelusume
nedisume
nebusume
nectsume
nekasume
Plural.
netusume
nenusume
nebasume
neisume
neisume
neisume
neasume
neasume
neblsume
netusume
Nbgativb.
Use neg. of
Pres. Pro
gressive.
J 318 B IV
(a).
(ffi) Future Imminent — / am about to bite.
Afpirmathtb.
Singular.
I. xst p. ntadi wakusuma
and p. utadt wakusuma
3rd p. utadi wakusuma
n. *' utadl wakusuma
III. " utadl wakusuma
IV. " lutadi luakusuma
V. " dltadi diakusuma
VI. *' butadi buakusuma
VII. " cttadi clakusuma
VIII. ** katadl kakusums
PluraL
tutadi bakusuma
nutadi bakusuma
batadi bakusuma
Itadl yakusuma
Itadl yakusuma
itadl yakusuma
atadi akusuma
atadi akusuma
bitadi blakusuma
tutadi tuakusnma
Nbgativb.
Use neg. of
Pres. Pro-
gressive.
{ 318 B IV
VERBS.
89
(«) Present Imminent-
-/ am just about to bite,
etc.
Afpirmativb.
Nbgativb.
Singular.
PluraL
I.
ist p.
tutadi tusuma
2nd p.
utadi usuma
nutadi nusuma
II.
3rd p.
utadi usuma
utadi usuma
batadi basuma
Itadi isuma
Use neg. of
Pres. Pro-
gressive.
f 318 B IV
(a).
III.
IV.
utadi usuma
lutadi lusuma
itadi isuma
Itadi isuma
V.
ditadi disuma
atadi asuma
VI.
butadi busuma
atadi asuma
VII.
bitadi bisuma
VIII.
katadi kasuma
tutadi tusuma
V. Subjunctive Mood.
Present Tense— (//) / bite,
etc.*
Afpirmativb.
Singular.
[Plural.
I.
ist p.
nasuma
tuasuma
2nd p.
wasuma
nuasuma
3rd p.
wasuma
basuma
11.
wasuma
yasuma
III.
wasuma
yasuma
IV.
luasuma
yasuma
V.
diasuma
asuma
VI.
buasuma
asuma
VII.
ciasuma
biasuma
VIII.
kasuma
tuasuma
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
Nboativb.
Singular.
ZSt p. nsrikftla ct musume
2nd p. wikftla kui musume
3rd p. wikftla kai musume
'* wikftla kawi musume
" wikftla kai musume
" lulk&la kalui lusume
" dikftia kadi disume
" bulkftia kabul busume
" dk&la kaci cisume
" kik&la kakai kasume
Plural.
tulkftla katui basume
nuik&la kanui basume
bik&la kabai basume
yikftla kayi misume
yikftla kayi misume
yikftla kayi misume
Ik&Ia kfti masume
ik&la kfti masume
blkftla kabi blsume
tulkftla katui tusume
♦ Though the Pres. Subjunctive forms are nearly always found with the sub-
ordinating prefixes bl. if ha. when. etc.. with the consequent pronominal
suffixes in all 3rd person forms, yet the pronominal prefixes are used in the
paradigm. . Compare § 306 (c) Rems. x and a.
.^n
90
VERBS.
Past Tense — / would have biitetty etc.
Appiruativb.
Singular.
I. ist p. nakadi kusuma
2nd p. wakadi kusuma
3rd p. wakadi kusuma
II. '* wakadi kusuma
III. '* wakadi kusuma
IV. *' luakadi kusuma
V. ** diakadi kusuma
VI. '* buakadi kusuma
VII. " ciakadi kusuma
VIII. " kakadi kusuma
Plural.
tuakadi kusuma
nuakadi kusuma
bakadi kusuma
yakadi kusuma
yakadi kusuma
yakadi kusuma
akadi kusuma
akadi kusuma
biakadi kusuma
tuakadi kusuma
Nbgativb.
Singular.
I. ist p. ciakadi kusuma
2nd p. kuakadi kusuma
3rd p. kakadi kusuma
II. '* kawak'adi kusuma
III. *' kakadi kusuma
IV. ** kaluakadi kusuma
V. " kadiakadi kusuma
VI. " kabuakadi kusuma
VIL " kaciakadi kusuma
VIII. " kakakadi kusuma
Plural.
katuakadi kusuma
kanuakadl kusuma
kabakadi kusuma
kayakadi kusuma
kayakadi kusuma
kayakadi kusuma
kftkadi kusuma
kftkadi kusuma
kabiakadi kusuma
katuakadi kusuma
VI. Purportive Mood,
Present Tense — Thai I may bite, etc.
AFFIRUATrVB.
Nbgativb.
Sidgular.
PhxcaL
Singular.
Plural.
I.
1st p.
nsume
tusume
cisume
katusume
2nd p.
usume
nusume
kusume
kanusume
3rd p.
asume
basnme
kasume
kabasume
II.
usume
Isume
kausume
kalsume
III.
asume
Isume
kasume
kalsume
IV.
lusume
isume
kalusume
kaisume
V.
disume
asume
kadisume
kAsume
VI.
busume
asume
kabusume
kftsume
VII.
cisume
bisume
kacisume
kabisume
VIII.
kasume
tusume
kakasume
katusume
LOCATIVES WITH VERBS.
91
VII.
The Peculiar
Negatives.
(a) The Munyl Negative—
Why don't I hitefy etc.
Sing^ular.
Plural.
I.
ist p.
cisumi
katusumi
2nd p.
kusumi
kanusumi
3rd p.
kasumi
kabasumi
II.
kausumi
kaisumi
III.
kasumi
kaisumi
IV.
kalusuml
kaisumi
V.
kAsumi
VI.
kabusuml
kftsumi
VII.
kacisumi
kabisumi
VIII.
kakasumi
Icatusumi
(6)
The CI
1 Negative— P^Ay don't I hUef, etc.
Singular.
Plural.
I.
ist p.
cicisumi
katucisumi
2nd p.
kucisuml
kanucisumi
3rd p.
kacisumi
kabacisumi
II.
kauclsumi
kaicisumi
III.
kacisumi
kaicisumi
IV.
kalucisuml
kaicisumi
V.
kadicisumi
kftcisumi
VI.
kabucisumi
k&cisumi
VII.
kacicisumi
kabicisumi
VIII.
kakacisumi
katucisumi
LOCATIVES WITH VERBS.
319. The locatives, mu and ku and ha, when inflected with the
verb, need careful study, for they are of frequent occurrence. The
locatives may be either suffixed or prefixed directly to the verb.
I. The Locatives Suffixed.
330. The locatives are suffixed directly to verbs, affirmative and
negative, when there is the idea of place expressed or understood in
the sentence. In such cases the locative is to be translated by in it,
in them, at it, at them, on it, on them, thither, within, wUhotU, hence,
thence, hither, etc.
RzM. I. The locative word to be employed depends upon the loca-
tive expressed or understood in the course of the conversation.
92 LOCATIVES WITH VERBS.
Rem. 2. In compound tenses the locatives are suffixed to the par-
ticiple rather than to the auxiliary.
Rem. 3. Observe that hu is preferred to ha as the suffixed form.
Examples of locative suffixed:
Ndimu, / am in {U); ndiku, I am at («<); ndlhu, I am on (U).
Cifulu cidi ha mesa? cidihu, is the hat on the table? it is on (it).
Wakuxikama mu nsubu? nakuxikamamu, did you sit in the house?
I sat in (it).
Wakayaku/^ has gone to it (thither).
Lua ne cisflka, ngrelemu [§ 312 (a)] blntu, bring the basket in order
that I may put the things in it.
Kehaku, he is not here, or is not there.
II. Locatives Prefixed.
321. The locatives are prefixed to the finite parts of the verb, not
to participles or infinitives. They are thus used in many kinds of
subordinate clauses expressing place, especially in indirect questions
and in relative clauses which in English are introduced by where,
whither^ whence, whereon, wherein, etc., in which the antecedent with
its governing locative is unexpressed, but understood. Cf. § 169, Rem.
Ndi mflnya kuakukulukeye, / know where he fell.
Kena mumflnye hanakuya, he does not know where I went.
Undexe hakueitekeye, show me where he put it (cifulu, hat).
Ciena mumftnye mudiye, / don*t know in what (e.g., house) he is.
Wakumona hadi bakflzi badima? have you seen where the women
are working ?
Tumbele tuakadl muakulaleye, the peanuts were (ifi the house) in
which he slept.
Rem. I. Note the following use with ne, whether, if.
Ya uk(ba ne mudi bixi, go and see if there are any insects in (it),
lit. go and see whether therein are insects.
Rem. 2. We have a somewhat similar construction with the infini-
tive, but the locative in such cases preceded the -a, meaning to or for.
Cf. § 239 (b), Rem. i.
Ciena ne mua kutekela bintu bilnyi, / have no place in which to
put my things.
Rem. 3. In all cases where the locatives are used with the finite
parts of the verb, the subject, if third person, is the pronominal suffijc.
Cf. § 124 (a).
Rem. 4. The locatives are prefixed to the auxiliary in compound
tenses, not to the participle as in the case of the locative suffix. Cf*
{ 320, Rem. 2.
DERIVATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS. 93
Rem. 5. It is of importance to distinguish when to use the locative
suffixed and when the locative prefixed. As a general rule the former
are translated by the simple phrases in it, in them, etc., whereas the
latter are translated by where, whither, wherein, whereon, etc., in sub
ordinate clauses with the antecedent omitted.
Rem. 6. The locative word to be employed depends upon the loca-
tive expressed or understood in the course of the conversation.
Rem. 7. The above use of the locative prefixes in subordinate clauses
is not to be confounded with the locatives prefixed in simple sentences
(§ ii5)» or with the relative clause when locative and antecedent are
expressed, though the principle is the same in all.
Rem. 8. The locative prefixed construction is used in direct ques-
tions with the verb di, to he. § 381.
Wakuya kudi kunyi ? where has he gone? lit. he has gone to it is
where?
Rem. 9. As we have seen under § 106 (c) (i), the locatives do not
stand immediately before the disjunctive personal pronouns of class I
and the sing, of class III. In these cases we have the locative pre-
fixed construction with some verb meaning to he. In fact we oftcfn find
this construction not only with the pronoun, as above mentioned, but
also with nouns, where in English the simple preposition with the
pronoun or noun would be used; as, lua kundi, come to me, i.e., where
I am; ya kudlye, go to him, i.e., where he is; ya kudi mamu'ebt,
go to your mother,
DERIVATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS.
322. The Buluba-Lulua language is very rich in derived verbs
and nouns, and these add much to the flexibility and precision of ex-
pression. As a general rule, we may say that the agglutinative process
is the principle on which the majority of such derivatives are made.
Naturally such words occupy a large and an important place in the
language.
One would suppose that, having stated the general laws governing
the formation and meaning of the various derivatives, only the root
word need -be introduced in the Vocabulary, but often the derived
form comes to have a special meaning which demands for it a place
in the Vocabulary. On the other hand certain English words have
as their equivalents some of the derived forms, and these must of
necessity be introduced. But these derived forms have not been put
into the Vocabulary except when necessity seemed to demand it, other-
wise the number of words would be almost indefinitely large.
94 DERIVATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS.
I. Derivative Verbs.
323. Nearly every simple verb root in the language may have one
or more derivative forms which modify in various ways the root idea.
This modification is made by means of certain suffixes, whereas, in
English, such modifications are made by prefixes, for the most part.
Thus, in English, we say make, remake, unmake; form, reform, trans-
farm, conform; etc. In the Buluba-Lulua we have, for example, from
the root sanga, io put together, some such derived forms as sangila,
sangixa, sangakana, sangakanya, sangangana, sanguluka, etc.
324. Of course not every verb root can have, as a fact, all the de-
rived forms, for often the root meaning would preclude it.
325. All of these derived f rms are, in every sense, verbs, and they
take the usual pronominal prefixes, suffixes and infixes, and have all
the usual verbal adjuncts.
326. Sometimes we may find two or more suffixes at the same time,
added to the same root, thus still farther modifying the meaning.
327. Some verbs are simple roots, though they have apparently
a derived form. On the other hand some verbs evidently have a de-
rived form but have lost the derivative signification.
Applied Forms,
328. What is called the Applied Form of the verb is obtained by
changing the final vowel of the root to ila or ela or ina or yina, in ac-
cordance with certain rules which will be stated later. The resulting
form expresses the idea of advantage or disadvantage to the person
or thing affected; or it may in a' general way denote an action done
to some object or done on behalf of • some object or because of some
person or thing, and hence can generally be translated into English
by to, for, against, etc.
banda, to climb, gives bandlla, to climb for {one); *
iba, to steal, gives iblla, to steal for (one);
songa, to carve, gives songela, to carve for {one) ;
tiuna, to send, gives tumina, to send to {one) ;
suna, to fetch water, gives sunylna, to jetch water for {one).
Rem. I. The Applied Form is often used where in English we find
a prepositional phrase indicating instrument or purpose, and hence
is sometimes to be translated by with or jor or other appropriate prepo-
sitions. This same form has an extensive use in asking the question
why? what for? etc. § 420.
♦ Observe that the simple roots are translated as infinitives.
DERIVATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS. 95
Udl uylla ku IbanJ cinyl? why are you going to Ihanj?
WakCldila makfila cInyl? jor what reason did you buy the eggs?
Ndi nk#ba luvu lua mbua kudlla, / am looking jor a trough jor
the dog to eat out oj.
Rem. 2. Often these Applied Forms can scarcely be translated into
English.
Ylla (from ya, to go) ek]i, go around this way,
329. The rules for the formation of the Applied Forms are as follows;
{a) Ila is used when the last vowel of the root (not counting the
changeable final a) is a, &j i, I, u, tk, or a monosyllabic stem like ya,
to go, § 26.
banda, to climb, gives bandlla, to climb jor;
t&ha, to cutf gives t&hila, to cut jor;
iba, to steal, gives Ibila, to steal for;
ziha, to kill, gives zlhlla, to kill jor;
sumba, to buy, gives siunbila, to buy for;
ibtkka, to build, gives ibtkkila, to build jor;
ya, to go, gives ylla, to go for.
Note. Sometimes the roots in I give ela; hence we may from the
root xiha have both xlhila and xlhela.
(b) Ela is used when the last vowel of the root (not counting the
changeable final a) is e, # or o. § 26.
teka, to put, gives tekela, to put jor;
kAba, to search for, gives k£bela, to search jor for;
lomba, to beg, gives lombela, to beg jor.
(c) Ina or ena is used when the last syllable of the verb has m or
the double consonant ny. § 15 (5) (i), Rem.
tmna, to send, gives tumlna, to send jor;
abanya, to divide up, gives abanyina, to divide up jor;
kema, to wonder, gives k£mena, to wonder for.
Rem. The Applied Form of zima, to tell jalsehood, is ziminyina,
to tell falsehood on.
(d) Ylna or yena is used when the stem of the verb ends in na.
§ 34 (fl)i Rem.
suna, to bring water, gives sunyina, to bring water jor.
(e) When the last syllable of the unchanged root is a diphthong,
the second letter of the diphthong generally determines the suffix in
accordance with the rules above given.
hueka, to go down, gives huekela, to go down for;
buika, to shut, gives buikila, to shut for.
96 DERIVATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS.
(/) When the final a is itself part of a diphthong, ua or ta, the form
in lla is used.
dia, io eat, gives dtla, to eat for;
fua, to die, gives fulla, to die for
330. It has been already noted (§ 326) that sometimes two or more
suffixes may be added to the same root at the same time. Here it
must be observed that certain irregularities occur when the Applied
Forms are added to verbs already having the derivative suffixes -akana,
-angana, -una and -ula. The other suffixes add ila, ela, etc., regu-
larly.
(a) Verbs in -akana give -akena; hence endakana, to walk about,
gives endakena, to walk about for. Cf. § 339.
(b) Verbs in -angana give -ilangana, -elangana, -tnanffana,
-enanffana, -yinanffana, -yenangana; in other words, an^ana is
simply added to the regular Applied Forms. Hence t&hancana, to
strike each other, gives t&hilangana, to strike each other for; henda,
to offend, gives hendelangana, to offend each other for; abanya, to
divide up, gives abanyinangana, to divide up among each other for.
{c) Verbs in -una give -ulna. (341.
andamuna, to turn over, gives andamuina, to turn over for,
(d) Verbs in -nla give -ulla. § 341.
cibula, to break, gives clbntla, to break for.
331* Further observation may lead to the discovery of other methods
of forming the Applied derivatives, but the great majority of verbs
will be found to come under one or the other of the above rules.
339* The Applied Forms are generally regarded as transitive, taking
a direct and an indirect object, but sometimes we find only the indirect
object. Note that the indirect object immediately follows the verb.
Wakusunyina Malendola ml, she has brought water for Malen-
dola. Wakatnfutla, he died for us. ^
Causative Forms.
333. The Causative Form of the verb is obtained by changing the
final vowel of the root to ixa, eza, nxa or yixa, in accordance with
rules which will be given later. The resulting form is always a transi-
tive verb which signifies making or causing a person or thing to do
or be the thing implied in the original verb root.
banda, to go up, gives bandlxa, to cause to go up, i.e., to raise;
flka, to be black, gives flkixa. to cause to be black, i.e., to blacken.
DERIVATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS. 9)
334. The rules for the formation of the Causative Forms are as
follows:
(a) Ixa is used when the last vowel of the root (not counting the
changeable 6nal a) is a, &, 1, I, u or fl. § 26.
banda, to go up^ gives bandlxa, to cause to go up, to raise;
t&ha, to cuty gives tfthlxa, to cause to cui^
flka, to be blacky gives flklxa, to cause to become black, to blacken;
tuta, to come backy gives tucixa, to cause to come back (§ 30);
ibtkka, to buildy gives Ibtkklxa, to cause to build.
{b) Exa is used when the last vowel of the root (not counting the
changeable final a) is e, A or o. {26.
teka, to puty gives tekexa, to cause to put;
kAba, to search fory gives kfibexa, to cause to look for;
lomba, to begy gives lombexa, to cause to beg.
(c) Uxa is generally used when the form to be made causative ends
in ola. § 26, Rem.
ula, to be fully gives uxa, to cause to be futty i.e., to fUl.
{d) Yixa is used when the stem of the verb ends in na. Cf. § 34 (a).
Rem.
clna, to fear, gives clnyixa, to cause to feary i.e., to frighten.
(e) When the last syllable of the unchanged root is a diphthong, the
second letter of the diphthong generally determines the suffix in ac-
cordance with the rules above given.
hueka, to go downy gives hoekexa, to cause to go down;
buika, to shuly gives buikixa, to cause to shut.
(/) When the final a is itself part of a diphthong, ua or ia^ the form
in Ixa is used.
dia, to eaty gives dtxa, to cause to eat, i.e., to feed;
hua, to be completedy gives hulxa, to complete.
335* Just as other derivative forms are sometimes given the Applied
Form, in the same way we fi d that other derivative forms may, as
occasion demands, take the Causative Form. Here we must note a
few peculiarities;
(a) The Cusative Form is made 'Applied or Reciprocal by adding
the regular Applied or Reciprocal suffixes.
bandixa gives bandlxila;
mflnylxa gives mflnyixangana
9^ DERIVATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS.
{b) Verbs in -akapa (§ 339) change this to -akdxa or -akanya.
tambakana, to go back and jorth, gives tambaktixa or tamba-
kanya, to cause to go back and forth.
Rem. The form in -aktkxa is Buluba, that in -akanya is Luiua.
{c) Verbs in -uka give -uxa, those in -tkka give -Oxa, those in
-adika give -adtxa.
dim uka, to he informed^ gives dimuxa, to inform;
tangalAka, to scatter (intr.), gives tangaitixa, to scatter (trans.);
tangadlka, to^ scatter (intr.), gives tangadlxa, to scatter (trans.).
{d) There are a number of other forms which have some peculiari-
ties in the formation of the Causative or transitive construction. We
have words in -ala (-ftla) having the Causative in -axa (-&xa); some
words in -ela take Causative in -exa; some words take -ikixa; some
take -Ika; some in -oboko have -oboxa; some in -akala give -akAxa.
sangftia, to amende gives sang&xa, to cause to amend;
buela, to go in^ gives buexa, to cause to go in;
sela, to move sidewisCj gives sexa, to cause to move sidewise;
fuana, to be alike, gives fuanylkixa, to cause to be alike [§ 34 (a),
Rem.];
lala, to lie down, gives ladika, to cause to lie down;
vuala, to put on one's clothes, gives vuadika, to clothe;
xlkama, to sit down, gives xikika, to seat {one);
nyongoboka, to be crooked, gives nyongoboxa, to cause to he
crooked;
zakala, to tremble, gives zakAxa, to cause to tremble.
Rem. There are a few other peculiar forms, but the great majority
of the verbs make the Causative in one or the other of the ways in-
dicated above.
336. It will be observed that the vowel assimilations for the Causa-
tive Forms are almost the same as those for the Applied. Note, how-
ever, that the forms with m and ny take Ixa or exa, depending upon
the vowel of the root rather than upon the presence of m or ny. § 329 (c) .
tuma, to send, gives turn! x a, to cause to send;
abanya, to divide up, gives abanyixa, to cause to divide up.
337. It is important to note that the Causative Form of the verb
is extensively used to express the English idea of to help to do, to aid
in doing, etc. In this case the person or thing helped comes imme-
diately after the verb.
Wakusunyixa Maiendola ml, she helped Malendola to carry the
water.
DERIVATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS. 99
Ta wibAkixe Kasongo nsubu wandl, go and help Kasongo to build
his house.
Nakumudlmlxa, I helped him to work.
Bakukombexa Buabu, they helped Buabu to sweep.
338. The Applied Form of the Causative means to haze something
done for or to get something done jor; as, from ensa, to do. We have
enzeia, to do for^ and enzexa, to help to do, and enzexela, to cause
to do for one, i.e., to have done or get done for one.
Intensive Forms.
339* The Intensive Form of the verb is formed by changing the
final vowel of the root to -akana, which gives to the root the idea of
intensity of action or movement, and can generally be translated by
back and forth^ over and over again^ constantly, etc. Sometimes there
is a thought of many doing the same thing, each independently. In
many cases the intensive form cannot be translated into English.
enda, to go, gives endakana, to go about from place to place;
huyakana, to pant;
tamba, to go by, gives tambakana, to go back and forth.
Rem. I. Verbs in -ma have the Intensive suffix -enena.
nema, to be heavy, gives nemenena, to be heavy.
Rem. 2. For Applied Form of these verbs in -akana, see § 330 (a).
Reciprocal Form.
340* The Reciprocal Form, of the verb is obtained by changing
the final vowel of the root to -angana, and it conveys the idea that
the action of the original word is carried on mutually by two or more
persons or things with reference to one another.
s6ka, to laugh, gives s^kangana, to laugh at each other;
tftha, to cut, gives t&hangana, to cut each other;
mtknya, to know, gives mAnyangana, to know each other.
Rem. I. Sometimes this suffix -angana is used to express custom
or habit; as, mbua udl usumangana, the dog bites.
Rem. 2. For Applied Form of these verbs in -angana, see § 330 (b).
Active Transitive and Middle Voice Forms.
341. As we have already seen under § 201, a Middle Voice form
is obtained by displacing the final a of the root and suffixing -uka
(sometimes -Ika or -ma). In many verbs having this Middle Voice
form, there is also a corresponding Active Transitive Form which is
lOO DERIVATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS.
obtaiaed by displacing the 6nal a of the root and suffixing -una or -ula.
Hence we have
Active Transitive. Middle Voice.
andamuna, to turn over^ andamuka, to turn over;
sftbuia, to put one across a stream^ sftbuka, to go across a stream;
clbula, to break, cibuka, to break;
tula, to pull out, tuka, to come out.
Rem. I. A few middle voice forms in -ma have a corresponding transi-
tive form in -ka; as, sokoma, to hide {one's self), gives sokoka, to
hide (trans.).
Rem. 2. For Applied Form of verbs in -una and -ula, see § 330 (c)
and {d).
342. It has been noted ({ 333) that many intransitive and middle
voice verbs are made transitive by means of the Causative suffixes.
It is sometimes difficult to determine whether some suffixes ought to
be classed under Causative Forms or under the active transitive.
343* A few verbs have a middle voice or intransitive form in -eka
(-oka), without any corresponding transitive suffix.
ona, to corrupt, gives oneka (onoka), to become corrupt;
mooa, to see, gives mueneka, to become seen, i.e., to appear.
Passive Voice Forms.
344* As we have seen under § 202 (c), one method of expressing
the Passive Voice is by means of the suffix -ibua, which has the regular
active forms in conjugation.
Expansive or Rev^sive Forms.
345. The Expansive or Reversive Forms are obtained by displacing
the final a of the root and suffixing -uiula or -ola or -olola. The
resulting form expresses with more or less regularity the idea of ex-
pansion, elongation, separation, opening, reversion, etc. Often the
thought is expressed in English by the prefix un-.
The above-mentioned suffixes, -ulula, -ola and -olola, are active
transitive; there are also the corresponding middle voice or intransi-
tive forms in -uluka, -oka and -oloka. Cf. § 341.
Active Transitive. Middle Voice.
sangulula, to scatter, sanguluka, to scatter;
abulula, to separate^ abuluka, to separate;
tfululula, to raise to life, fululuka, to arise from death;
ololola, to unfold, ololoka, to unfold;
gulula, to unfasten, suluka, to become unfastened;
hikula, to redeem (from muhlka, a slave).
DERIVATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS. loi
Repetitive Forms.
346. These forms are made by using the suffixes -ulula and -unona,
the resulting form having the idea of repetition of the action.
amba, to tell^ gives ambulula, to tell over and over;
dima, to work, gives dimununa, to work over and over again.
347. There are other verbal suffixes of more or less definite mean-
ing, but it hardly seems profitable to introduce more of them here.
The most common and important have been mentioned.
348. We must note that some verbs are derived from nouns; as,
hlkuia, to redeem^ from muhika, a slave; liuna, to cohabit with^ from
mulumi, man; etc.
II. Derivative Nouns.
349. The more common Derivative Nouns are obtained from other
nouns, or from adjectives, or from simple or derived verbs, or from
certain prepositional forms. Each of these classes of derived nouns
is now taken up.
Nouns from Other Nouns.
350* The prefix bu- (class VI), used with the root of a noun belong-
ing to any other class, conveys the idea of abstract state or condition,
and is generally to be translated into English by the suffix -ship or
'hood.
mukelenffe, chief j gives bukelenge, chief ship;
muana, child, gives buana, childhood.
Rem. It has already been noted that the language of a people is
expressed in the same way. § 55, Rem. i.
351. An ironical word can be made by using the prefixes of class
VII and the suffix -ana.
cilumlana, a big man, from mulumi, man;
clktkxiana, a big woman, from muk&xi, woman.
352. Words indicating worthlessness or iiicongruousness may be
made by using the prefixes of class VII and doubling the root of the
word. See § 356 (g).
353* When the speaker does not care to bother with mentioning
the name of the person or thing, or if he has forgotten the name, an
indefinite reference may be made by suffixing -ana; as, mulumlana,
a man whose name has been forgotten, or whose name you don't care to
bother with mentioning; mukftxlana, a woman whose name, etc.
I02 DERIVATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS.
Rem. The words muntlnyi (from muntu, person, or clntu, thing)
and kampa da (class I) have the same meaning as maluinlana, etc.
These words have an adjective force and may take the prefix of
the class of the noun referred to. Hence we have, according to class,
munttnyi, . antlnyl, clntlnyl, lunttnyl, etc.; also bakampanda,
clkampanda, etc.
Nouns from Adjectives and Numerals.
354* The abstract idea of the adjective is expressed by prefixing
bu- (class VI) to the root of the adjective.
toke, white, gives botoke, whiteness;
nine, large, gives bunlne, largeness.
Rem. The same form is used with numerals to express entirety.
§ 95 (^)* Butanu buabo bakuya, all five of them went.
355* The expressions how often and how many times are made by
prefixing eiaka- (sing.) and biaka- (pi.) to the numerals. { 95 (&).
ciakabidi, second time; biakabidl, two times, twice.
Rem. Note also diakamne, clahantue and dlacimae. { 95 (b),
Rems. I and 2.
Nouns from Verbs.
356. We find several forms of noun derivatives from verbs:
(a) The agent or performer of an act is expressed by changing the
final a of the verb root to 1 and using the prefixes of class I.
muibl, a thief, from iba, to steal;
mutndi, a blacksmith, from tula, to forge;
mnsnnffidi, a savior, from sungila, to save.
Rem. In the same way the noun denoting the sufferer of the action,
the noun denoting the one who causes the action, the noun denoting
the one who acts for another, may be obtained from the Passive, the
Causative and the Applied Forms of the verb respectively. The same
is true of the other verbal derivatives.
{b) The place where an action is usually performed is expressed
by suffixing -llu (-elu) and prefixing cl- and bl- (class VII) to the
root of the verb. Perhaps it would be better to say that the final a
of the Applied Form is changed to u.
eibandiln, a stairway, from ban da, to go up;
cllamblln, a kitchen, from lamba, to cook;
clxikidlln. destination, from xlka, to end.
DERIVATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS. 103
(c) The way or manner of doing is expre sed by using the prefixes
of class VII and the Applied Fonn of the verb with final a changed
toi.
elensedi, way of doing, from ensa, to do;
ellambidt, way of cooking, from lamba, to cook.
Kuena mumAnye cilambldl cikaabo 7 don*t you know another way
of cooking f
Rem. Sometimes we find the place and the manner forms used
interchangeably; this is doubtless due to differences of dialects.
{d) An abstract idea of the verb root may often be expressed by
using the sing, prefix of class IV (lu-), with the final vowel of the root
changed generally to u or o.
luendu, a journey, from enda, to go, to walk;
lulelu, poioer to give birth, from lela, to give hirih;
luf q, death, from fua, to die.
Rem. I. This derivative form in In- may often be used to express
habit, ability, persistence or perseverance in an action; as, muntu
wa lulombo, a begging person; muena lulombo, a beggar; mulumi
eu udl ne luendo, this man has the power to walk much, or he does
much going about.
Rem. 2. From the verb sua, to love, we have not lasa, as might be
expected, but lose, love.
(e) We have a few noun derivatives from verbs put into class VI;
as» budlml, field, from dima, to cultivate; bulalu, bed, from lata, ta
He down.
if) The bad or wrong or careless way of doing anything is expressed
by the prefix bu- (class VI) and the suffix -&fl (-afl).
baluat&fl, slovenliness, from luata, to wear;
boel&fl, bad aim, from ela, to shoot,
(g) The idea of worthlessness or incongruousness is expressed by
the prefixes of class VII and the doubling of the root of the word. These
derivatives can be made either from nouns or from verbs. See § 352.
ellumlliiml, a worthless man, from mulumi, man;
clsubusobu, a worthless house, from nsubu, house;
elelele, a no-account knife, from kele, knife;
elanana, a no-account child, from muana, child;
eltokatoka, an albino, from toka, to be white;
ellambalamba, bad cooking, from lamba, to cook;
elakulakula. nonsense, gibberish, from akola, to talk;
elendenda, vagrancy, from enda, to walk.
I04 DERrSTATIVE VERBS AND NOUNS.
(h) The past active participle of some verbs may be used as nouns.
mahote (class I), a fool, from hota, to be foolish,
(i) The infinitive of the verb is used as a noun to express the simple
abstract idea of the verb root. In this case the infinitive sign kii«
furnishes the prefix for the concord.
Kndima kadi kutamba kuzlkama cinana, to work is better than
to sit idle.
Nouns from Locative Forms.
357* From the forms kulnyl, kuetu, kuenu, etc., we have by
using the prefixes of class 1 a group of nouns meaning my feUaw towns-
man, etc. Cf. S 143.
makuetu, our (or my) fellow toivnsman;
baknabo, their fellow townsman.
Rem. Much like this is mukua, one from the village of. { 87 (d).
Rem. 2.
358. From kunzl, doTvn at, we have diknnxi (V), a pillar, post.
359. There is quite a number of words, gotten by the combination
of the locative and an inseparable substantive form, which come to
have in English the force of a noun, though retaining the prepositional
form and construction. Some of the more common are the following:
Munda, the inside, the abdomen; kuntaku, at the butt end; kun-
kflcl, at the center; mundankulu, midnight; hanxl, floor, on the
ground; haciacia, daybreak, at the dawning; kumanda, stefm, at
the lower end; kukala, beach, at the edge. § 423 (2) (b). ,
960* Reference has already been made to nouns of foreign origin.
See § 55, Rem 2, with Notes i and 2.
361 • There are some other derived nouns, but it hardly seems
profitable to mention more of them here, since the most conmion have
been treated.
Great caution must be exercised in presimiing from analogy that
because certain nouns derived in a certain way have a certain fixed
meaning, therefore other nouns formed in a similar way will have a
similar meaning. This does not always follow. It seems highly
probable that some lexicographers have gone too far in this respect
and have brought words into the language which have no place there,
because they are not used by the natives. The same caution must be
observed in the case of the derived verbs. Let it be c ntinually borne
in mind that as a general rule the native avoids the complicated derived
ADVERBS. loS
form, both in nouns and in verbs, and usually throws his sentences
into the simplest form both as regards the words and the constructions
used.
ADVERBS.
362. The Buluba-Lulua language is comparatively poor in regular
adverbs. This lack is supplied for the most part by the use of nouns,
prepositional phrases, locative formations and other idiomatic expres-
sions.
In many cases the adverbial idea is contained in the verb; as, kusft-
buka, to go over; kubtka, to stand up.
Some of the more common English adverbs and adverbial phrases,
with the Buluba-Lulua equivalents, are now given. Others can be
gotten from the Vocabulary.
I. Adverbs op Place.
963. Here the locatives, mu and kn and ha, play a most important
part. They are used separably or inseparably, in connection with
nouns and adjectives and certain inseparable words to express these
various place relations. The particular locative to be used is deter-
mined by the context or the thought in the mind of the speaker.
364. Above, up, upwards, on high, etc.: ktilu, mtkln, heulu. The
stem in these forms is -ulu which is inseparable. Note henlu instead
of haulu.
Rem. Note the expression bika hanxi, get up, because ha means
either down on or up from.
365. Across, on the other side, etc.: dlxia, a noim belonging to dass V.
Ta dtxta, go across.
366. At the same place, at one place, together, etc.: mumue, knmae,
hamue, from mue, one; kaba kamue (diminutive of muaba, place);
muomiimne, kuokumue, hohamue, from -o-ainae(mue), § 9(^
Rem. 2.
367. Before, in front, forward, etc.: ku mp&la, kumudlla (hi-
separable).
Rem. Sometimes the noun forms dlambed I nd dlbedl are used in
this sense. They belong to class V.
368. Behind, in the rear, etc: ku nylma, haxlxe (inseparable).
369. Down, downwards, etc: munxt, ku xi, hanxl, from the
inseparable -nxl which in . ome diale ts means the ground,
(a) Monxl means down tinder, down in, underneath,
{h) Kunxl means down at or down near,
(c) Hanxl means down on or simply down.
r06 ADVERBS.
870* ElsewherCf somewhere else, etc.: mukuabo, kukuabo, hakoabo;
munffa/ kunga, hanga. These are from the adjectives kuabo and
nga meaning another.
371* Everywhere: kuonso, from the adjective onso, all.
Note. Possibly maonso and honso may be used, but they are very
rare.
372. Far, far away, etc.: mule, kale, hale, from the adjective le,
long.
(a) Blule means far inside.
{b) K le means far away at (by far the most common of the three
forms).
(c) Hale means far away on.
373* Here, h ther, hence, et-^. : emu, eku, aha; munemo, kuneku,
hanaha; also the emphatic emonstratives with ka; sometimes the
Locative Suffixed construction. §§ 163, Note 3, 320.
374. Hither and thither: this idea is perhaps best expressed by
means of the Intensive For of the verb having the suffix -akana.
S 339-
375. In, inside, etc.: generally use the simple verb, or mu in
Locative Suffixed construction (§ 320); as, buela, go in; buelamu,
go in {it).
376. Near: mulhl, kulht, hihl, ha bulhl. All these forms are
made on the root of the adjective ihl, short.
Rem. I. Sometimes we hear hehl instead of hihl. § 23, Rem. 4.
Rem. 2. The prepositional phrase near to is expressed by hehi ne.
Teka bintu hehi ne ngubu, put the things near to the house.
377. Outside, out, etc.: this is best expressed in most cases by the
verbal suffixes -ula and -uka (§§ 341, 345), or by mu in the Locative
Suffixed construction. (§ 320.)
Luhuka, go out) luhula bintu, put the things outside; umukamu,
get out (of it).
378. Somewhere: muntu, kuntu, hantu.
Rem. I. It will be noted that these words are formed on the same
stem as muntu, person, and cintu, thing.
Rem. 2. In the case of a place which you have forgotten or do not
care to mention, use the locatives with kampanda or ntlnyl. In
these cases the preposition is inseparable. § 423 (2) (a).
379* There, thence: muamua, kuakua, haha; muomuo, kuokuo,
hoho; amu, aku, aha. § 163, Notes 3 and 4.
Rem. The emphatic forms kamumu, kakuku and kahaha may
mean either here or there.
380. Under, underneath: munzi. Cf. § 369 {a).
ADVERBS. IC7
381, Where? whence? whither?-, kunyi? hanyl? (from the same
root as cinyi, § 175, Rem. i). Blunyi 7 seems to be seldom used.
These forms are sometimes used alone, coming at the end of a sen-
tence, as is the usual custom with interrogative words, but the most
common method is to have them precede it by the Locative Prefixed
form of the verb dl. to he. The locative prefix is the same for the verb
and for the interrogative word. § 321, Rem. 8.
Wakuya kud kunyi? where did he go ? lit. he has gone to it is where?
Udl uxikama hadi hanyi ? where are you sitting?
Note i. We have mentioned above that munyi seems to be seldom
used; for it we may have kunyi, even to the extent of having a different
locative before the verb di.
Udl obueia mudi kunyi? where are you going in?
Note 2. For where in adverb clauses and in indirect questions we
use the Locative Prefixed construction. See §} 321, 457, 472 (c).
382* It is interesting to note that some of these adverb forms have
a substantive use when they are followed by a noun in an adjective
prepositional phrase.
Ta munxi mua mesa, go under the table, i.e., go to the underneath
the table.
Ta Idklu kua nsubu, go to the top of the house,
Ta dixia dia ml, go across the water,
II. Adverbs of Time.
383. Again: kabidi. § 95 (6), Rem. i.
Rem. Kabidi seems to be used almost exclusively when there is no
special reference as to the exact number of times. Cf. §§ 394, 395.
384* AgOy long ago, etc.: kale, bangabanga, diambedi.
Rem. Long ago, in the sense of not jar in the past, is expressed by
musangu mule.
Nakukubiklla mugangu mule, munyi kulu? / called you long ago,
why did you not come? (Perhaps it was early in the morning and it is
now noon.)
385. Always, ceaselessly, constantly, ever, forever, etc.: matuku
onso, ku dituku ku dituku, ku did ku did, cendelele, l&hal&ha,
kaxidi, to. See Vocabulary under ceaselessly.
(a) The phrases matuku onso and ku dituku ku dituku and ku
did ku did mean a long time or a long succession of days, used espe-
cially with reference to the present or the past.
Wakadi ufuQda mikanda matuku onso, he was always writing
letters.
Io8 ADVERBS.
(6) Cendelele and Ifthalftha are used with special reference to the
future.
Wakaya cendelele, he has gone forever^ i.e., for good.
386. At the same time, at one time, simultaneously, etc.: clamumue,
clahamue, dlakamoe, dlaclmue. § 95 (b). Rem. 2.
387* Before, first: diambedi, dibedi, kumudllu (inseparable), ku
mp&la, also the verb dlanjila (§ 233).
388. Daily: ku dltuku ku dltuku, ku dtcl ku diet.
389* Early (in the morning), soon: dioda, haclacia, lunkelu.
Rem. Dinda is a noun belonging to class V; lunkelu belongs to class
IV. Haciacia is gotten by doubling the root of the verb cla, to break
day, and prefixing ha.
390* Evening, afternoon: dllolo, a noun belonging to class V.
391* Frequently: see { 394.
392* Noon, midday: munda munya.
393* Now, at once, immediately, instantly, etc.: katataka, mpln-
deu, diodlono.
394. Often, many times, frequently, etc.: use any word meaning
times, s ch s misangu (II), bikondo (VII), mtsunsa (II), followed
by -a bunffi.
Nakumumona misangu ya bungl, I have seen him many times.
Rem. The same idea may often be expressed by the Repetitive or
Habitual tenses.
395* Once, twice, thrice, etc. (numerical adverbs): clakamue,
ciakabldl, etc.; dlakamue; kabldl, kasfttu, etc. Cf. § 95 (6), Rems.
I and 2.
396. Soon: see §§ 389 and 393.
397* To-day: lelu. This very day is expressed by lelu eu.
398. To-morrow, yesterday: malpba, makelela.
Rem. I . Only the context can detemune whether to-morrow or yester-
day is meant.
Rem. 2. Day after to-morrow is expressed by malhi.
399. To-night: butuku, bufuku. These words belong to class VI.
400. When? dlba hanyl? diba kl? dltuku kl? ngondo kI7
cldimu kl?
Rem. I. There is no indefinite word for when; use one of the bove
phrases according to sense, remembering that dlba and dltuku are
nD ns belonging to class V, ngondo to class III and cldimu to class
VII.
Rem. 2. For when in indirect questions, see § 472 (b).
ADVERBS. 109
III. Adverbs op Degree and Quantity.
401. As , , . as. See § 90 (d).
402. How many? haw much? See § 411, Note i.
403. More — Comparison of Adverbs. The comparative degree of
the adverb as well as the superlative is expressed by the verbs tamba
and hita, to excel, having thus the same construction as the comparison
of adjectives (§88).
Note the following examples as being the most common construc-
tions for comparison of adverbs:
Wakuntamba lubllu, he ran faster than I, lit. he excelled me in
haste.
Kabata udl utamba Kasongo kunsua, Kahata loves me more than
Kasongo.
Muluml wakutamba mukftxl kuela muci, the man threw the stick
farther than the woman.
MukAxI udi utamba muluml kulamba bidia, the woman heats the
man cooking.
404. Much', the phrase ya bungi seems to be most commonly used
in this connection. The adverb little^ when used in the same way,
is perhaps best expressed by the word kaklse.
Wakunsua ya bungI, kaklse, he loves me much, little.
405. Too: see § 90 (6).
406. Very: see § 90 W-
IV. Adverbs of Manner.
407. Backwards: cianyima.
408. Certainly y truly , truthfully, etc.: bulllela, bulnabulna, buala-
buala, buxua, bulkflxa. All of these words are nouns belonging to
class VI.
409. Gently, slowly, patiently, carefully, quietly, feebly, etc.: bite-
kete, bitulu. '
410. Hastily, in a hurry, quickly, etc.: lubilu, lukflsa. These
words belong to class IV.
411. How? in what way? taunji? blxl? These words come last
in the sentence, as might be expected.
Udi uclbula luhanza munyl? how do you open the tin?
Note i. Munyl and blxl are also used to modify adjectives or rather
the substantive form of the adjective. There is also the adjective
form nga. § 178.
Nsolo webl udl bunlne munyl? how large is your fowl?
Udl ne nsolo bungI munyl? how many fowls have you?
no ADVERBS.
Hlci inga? how many sticks?
Note 2. For how? ia indirect questions, see § 47a {d).
412. So; see Vocabulary.
413. Thus, in this ivay, so: nnnku. Sometimes this word 18 pro-
nounced nenku or nanku.
V. Adverbs or Affirmation and Nboatiqn.
414. No (negative answer to a question): naxa, bnala, nanyl,
bl.
Rem. I. Sometimes one of these negative words is put for emphasis
at the end of a sentence and after the ordinary neg^ative pronominal
prefixes.
Katuakuhldla bnalu bua Nsambl, naxa, Vfe have not refused Gods
palaver^ no.
Rem. 2. When the question is in negative form, the Baluba and
Bena Lulua affirm or deny the truth of the question rather than
the fact asked for by the questioner. It is very important to note this
difference in idiom between the English and the Buluba-Lulua, for,
owing to this difference, confusion and misunderstanding are often
produced.
Kuakuya tela 7 E, didn*t you go to-day? No,
415. Not: generally use the negative pronominal prefixes inflected
directly with the verb. { 198.
Rem. I. The word not when standing before a single word such as
a personal pronoun or a noun is expressed by ka; as, ka wewe, not
you; ka tuetu, not we.
Note. If, however, the copula is considered as being omitted we have
the construction with kan-. § 199.
Rem. 2. Naxa is sometimes heard in the sense of either , , , or
if not . . . then.
Usuasua clnyl? Naxa lueho, naxa cllulu, what do you want? (/
want) either salt or doth, i.e., if not salt, then cloth.
416. Yes: e.
Wakuya ka Kasensa? E, did you go to Kasenga? Yes.
Rem. For negative question, see § 414, Rem. 2.
VI. Formation of Adverbs from Adjectives.
417. Adverbs are formed from adjectives by prefixing bi- to the
stem of the adjective; as, bimpe, weU, from impe, good\ blbl, badly,
from bl, had\ bitekete, slowly, from tekete, weak\ bikftle, strongly,
from ki&le, strong.
ADVERBS. Ill
VII. Miscellaneous.
418« Only, just, for nothing, etc.: hatuhn, bd, cinana.
Tudl tusomba hb (or hatahu, cinana), we are just talking,
419« Therefore, hence, consequently, so, wherefore, etc.: ka, bu-
(bualu understood) with Applied Form of verb.
Mulunda winyl ndl nbela, ka nakulua, or malunda winyl udi
ubela, bunakuluila, my friend is sick, therefore I have come.
420. Why? what for? etc.: clnyl? cinganyl? munyi? buaclnyl?
blzi7bualakl?
(a) When the question is affirmative we find most commonly the
Applied Forms of the verb followed by cinyl 7 or clnganyl 7 or bizl 7
Udl ndidila clnyi 7 why are you crying ?
XJdl nylla ku musoko cinyl 7 why are you going to the village ?
Wakiidila mak^la blxi 7 why did you buy the eggs ?
Rem. The Applied Forms of the verb are not generally used with
boa cinyl 7 and bnalu kl 7
Udi udila bua cinyl (or bualu Id) 7 why are you crying ?
(6) When the question is negative we find most frequently mnnyl 7
beginning the sentence, followed by the Munyl Negative. §§3I4»3T5.
Rem. I. We may sometimes, however, hear in the negative the ordi-
nary negative tenses of the Applied Form of the verb followed by cinyl,
etc.
Kuakulutla cinyl 7 why did you not come ?
Rem. 2. When the question is past tense negative we sometimes hear
the munyl 7 with the past tense negative of the auxiliary dl, to he, fol-
lowed by the infinitive mood (thus making the past subjunctive or an
impossible condition).
Hunyl kuakadi kCkla laRlsJilRl why did you not buy the eggs ?
Note. Even in these past tense negative forms we generally hear
the simple Munyl Negative tense.
Hunyl kulu7 why didnH you come?
(c) For why in indirect questions, see { 47a (e).
421. Very, exactly, just, absolutely, etc.: mene.
Ta ku musoko lelu mene, go to the village this very day.
112 LOCATIVES AND OTHER PREPOSITIONS.
LOCATIVES AND OTHER PREPOSITIONS.
422« There are few pure prepositional words in the Buluba-Lulua
language. Just as in the case of adverbs ({ 362), this lack is supplied
by the use of noun forms and other constructions.
Often the prepositional idea is contained in the verb; as, knsftbnka
ml, to cross over the vfoter; naldkdila Kasonffo lueho, / bought the
salt for Kasongo, The English, owing to its lack of complicated in-
flections, is rich in prepositions, and it is of no small importance to
know the corresponding equivalents of these in a language strikingly
lacking in such forms. Often the idioms in the two languages are
entirely different.
I. LOCATIVBS.
423. We have often had occasion to refer to the locatives mu, ka
and ha. Their construction and use in the sentence are so different,
in some respects, from anything found in English that they demand
special attention. Since many of these peculiarities have already been
treated of under the different headings, as it became necessary, we
shall now, in order to refresh the memory, gather up the most important
of these uses and refer the reader to the section where fuller treatment
will be found, at the same time mentioning such new constructions as
need attention.
(i) They often have the force of a noun ({ 61) in that they may furnish
the concord for succeeding words. This concord is found in the follow-
ing cases:
(a) With the possessive pronoun forms. . {{ 139, 140.
(6) With the several demonstrative forms. (163 and Notes.
(c) With verbs as prefix — Locatives Prefixed. {{ 321, 115 and Rems.
I and a, 124 (a), 441 (<0. 468, 472 (c).
(d) With verbs as a suffix — Locatives Suffixed. { 320.
(e) With certain adjectives. § 79.
(/) With the preposition -a, of. % 87 ((f) and Rem., 87 («)•
ig) With relative clauses. § 168 (a).
(2) There is a considerable class of nouns in which the ordinary
prefix is displaced by the locative words.
{a) Some of these we have already noted in the case of such a form
as ham 'bid! (for ha mubldl), on the body [{ 24 (J)]; slso in the forms
kultu (for ku dltu), hekn (for ha dlkn), mnlsn (for nm dlsii), | 47,
Rem.
LOCATIVES AND OTHER PREPOSITIONS. 1 13
Here might also be mentioned muntu, kuntu, hantu, and the loca«
tives with kampanda and ntlnyl. § 378 with Rems. i and 2.
(b) In the words just mentioned the noun has its ordinary prefix
which is only temporarily displaced by the locative, but there is a
class of words which seem to have lost entirely the prefix and only the
inseparable forms with the locatives are found. Some of these come
to have an adverbial force and have been referred to under adverbs.
The more common of these are the following (cf . { 359) :
Munda, the inside; kunzl, munxi, hanxl (§ 369); kunxikidlln,
a/ the end; munkflci, hanktkcl, kunkAcI, in or at the middle; milla,
kAlu, heulu (§ 364); kumndiln (§ 367); kumanda, mumanda, ai
or in the bottom; kukala, at the edge^ the beach; munkulu, in the cenier;
haciacla, at the dawning; hax*lxe, at the rear; kunyl? and hanyl?
(I 381); mnndankulu, at midnight; kuntaku, at the butt end,
(3) To show that the substantive idea in these locative combinations
-has been preserved we often have the adjective phrase with -a, of,
following them, and that, too, in constructions where in English a
simple preposition is used. Hence we do not say mnnxl mesa, but
mnnxl mua mesa, under the table, lit. the underneath of the table;
munkflci mua nsubu, in the center of the house; killa kua nsubn,
on top of the house; etc.
(4) Note the noun forms mukna and mnkueta. §{ 87 (d). Rem. a,
142.
424. We shall now consider the special meaning and uses of the
three locatives.
(i) As a simple preposition ma implies a stateaof rest in, or motion
ifito or out of, a place which is enclosed. The following English prepo-
sitions and prepositional phrases are usually expressed with more or
less certainty by mu: »n, in among , among j amongst, in the midst of,
inside of, within^ along (a path), into, out of, out from, outside of.
Waknenda mu nxlla, he went along the path,
Umuxa blntu mu nsubu, put the things out of the house,
(2) As a simple preposition ku implies motion toward or from a
place, or rest at a place. The following English prepositions and
prepositional phrases are expressed with more or less certainty by ku:
at, by {close to), for, in (at), in (a line), over, around, by (hold by), to,
towards, unto, from, away from, for (price), against.
Wakuhana nsolo ku cllulu, he sold the fowls for cloth,
Wakukuata muana ku dlboko, he caught the child by the arm.
Wakulna ku musoko, he came from the village,
. Imftnf ku mulongo, stand in a line,
(3) As a simple preposition ha implies rest on or upon, or motion
X14 LOCATIVES AND OTHER PREPOSITIONS.
towards or off from, a surface. The following English prepositions
and prepositional phrases are expressed with more or less certainty
by ha: on, upon, onto, over, down on, down upon, up from, off from.
Bnlklla cllulu ha bintu, put a cloth over the things.
Umuxa malouKa ha mesa, remove the plates from the table.
Bixa bintu ha mux^te, lift up the things from the box.
Rem. The time relations in and within are expressed by ha.
Nendue ha matuku atanu, / shall return within five days,
II. Other Prepositions.
425. The preposition -a, of, so far from furnishing any concord
for following words, is itself made to concord within the word preced-
ing it, whether that word be a simple noun or a locative word or a loca-
tive phrase. The uses of -a have been discussed under §§86 and 87,
and it is dot necessary to repeat them here.
4I36* The preposition ne is uninflected and expresses the idea of
instrument or accompaniment, and is generally expressed in English
by with or and.
Udl ukosa mud ne muele, he is cutting the stick with a knife,
Ta ne Kasonso, go with Kasongo.
Rem. I. Recall the peculiar use of the possessive forms with ne
instead of the personal pronouns. § 107.
Rem. 2. A most conmion construction is the use of ne with one of
the verbs meaning to be, by which the English to have (to possess) is
expressed.
Ndl ne nsolo, I have a fowl.
Rem. 3. Note the peculiar phrase muan'abo ne, etc., meaning brother
of, sister of, one of same kind, etc. Cf. § 138, Rem. 5.
Rem. 4. It is often difficult to determine whether the ne is to be
xegarded as a preposition {with) or a conjunction (and). Fortunately
it does not make much difference, since the constructions are the same.
4:27 • The word kudi, by, is used with the agent in the passive voice.
§ 202 (a),
428. The words bu and buina furnish no difficulties in inflection
and have the meaning of like, similar to, etc.
Cifulu eel cidl bu clacla, this hat is like that one.
Rem. Note the combination bu -a.
Hubidl wand! wakadi bu wa muntu, his body was like that of a
person.
429. Some of the more common remaining English prepositions
and prepositional phrases have the following equivalents in the Buluba-
Lulua language:
LOCATIVES AND OTHER PREPOSITIONS. 11$
(a) After ^ behind, in the rear of, etc. : ku nyima kua.
(fi) Around: ku or ku nyima kua.
Unyengele muoxl ku muci, wind the string around the stick.
Udi ucimbakana ku nyima kua nsubu, he is going around the house,
(c) Before, in front of, etc.: ku mp&la kua, kumndllu kua.
Ta ku mpftia kua Kabuya, go before (in front of) Kabuya.
(d) Beside, near to, by, etc.: ha bulhi ne, hehi ne.
Mud udl ha buihi ne (hehi ne) nsubu, the stick is near the house,
Lua ha buihl n'lnyl, come near to me. § 107.
(e) Across, on the other side of: dixia dia, ku nyima kua, dia mua-
mua dia (doubtless dixia understood).
Musoko wandl udi dia muamua dia ml, his village is on the other
side of the water.
Musoko wandl udi dixia dia ml, his village is on the other side of
the water.
Mucl udl ku nyima kua lumbu, the tree is on the other side of the
fence.
Rem. Note that the words dixia and nyima are nouns belonging to
classes V and III, respectively.
(J) On this side of: dia munemu dia, dixia dia munemu dia.
Musoko udl dixia dia munemu dia ml, the village is on this side
of the river (water).
Mu<;l udi dia munemu dia lumbu, the tree is on this side of the fence.
(g) Between, in the middle of, in the midst of, etc.: hankflci ha,
munkflci mua. Cf. { 423 (2) {b).
Nkuasa udi munkflci mua nsubu, the chair is in the middle of the
house.
Cifulu cldi hankflci ha mukanda ne mucl, the hat is hehveen the
book and the stick.
{h) On top of, over, over the top of, etc.: ha mutu ha.
Ta ha mutu ha nsubu, go on top of the house.
Rem. I. Over in sense of across is expressed by dixia dia. { 429 {e).
Rem. 2. Over in such a sentence as throw it over the house is best
expressed by the verbs tambixa or hlcixa followed by the phrase ha
mutu ha, while go over or pass over the house is expressed by tamba
or hita followed by the phrase ha mutu ha.
Wakuhlcixa mucl ha mutu ha nsubu, he threw the stick over the
house, i.e., caused it to pass the top of the house.
Mud wakutamba ha mutu ha nsubu, the stick passed over the
house.
(*) Through: this idea is perhaps best expressed by using two verbs,
one denoting the entering, the other the going out.
1 1 6 CONJUNCTIONS.
Mutelenffe wakuknma mn mnkanda, wakuluhuka, the cartridge
struck into the paper and went out, i.e., the cartridge went through the
paper,
Wakubnela mu nsubn, wakatamba, he passed through the house.
Note i. Sometimes the idea is expressed in the verb; as, sombola,
to-pass through (as bullet); tabula, to punch through.
Note 2. We may also have the verlfs tamba, tamblza, hita, hiclxa
followed by mu and the noun; as, kutamblxa mu nsubu, to cause to
pass through the house.
(j) Up on inside of: heulu ha. { 364.
Manva adl heulu ha nsubu, the corn is up on (a loft inside) of thU
house,
CONJUNCTIONS.
430* Just as we have found a paucity of pure adverbs and prepo-
sitions in the Buluba-Lulua language, so we also find a scarcity of
pure conjunctions.
The Conjunctions may be divided into two general classes: (a) Co-
drdinate and Correlative, and (6) Subordinate.
I. Coordinate and Correlative Conjunctions.
431. These connect words, phrases, clauses or sentences of the
same order or rank in the sentence.
432. Ne is the most conunon coordinate conjunction and means
and.
Rem. I. Ne is not expressed so often as the and of the English, espe-
cially when two verbs follow each other in close succession.
Wakuya, wakumuamblla, he went and told him.
Rem. 2. Ne . . . ne expresses the correlative both , , , and,
Ulftme bana bebl ne bad! aha ne badl kule, watch ever thy children^
both those who are here and those who are far away.
433. Naxa . . . naxa (§ 415, Rem. 2) is apparently a negative
word which expresses the English either . . . <7r, the idea seeming to
heifnot.,. then.
Naxa mlbela wampa, naxa mabue wampa, give me either cowries
or beads.
Rem. Neither . . . nor is perhaps best expressed by throwing both
parts into the negative.
Ciena musue luebo, clena musue mabue, 7 want neither saU nor
beads.
CONJUNCTIONS. 1 17
434. The word f nyl means or and is generally used in asking ques-
tions.
Udi nkfiba lueho, f nyl, udl ukdba ciluln 7 a/re you looking for saU
or jor cloth ?
Nealue kabldl Inyi 7 will he come hack again or {not) t
Rem. This word Inyl is often used in simple interrogative sentences
when there is no other interrogative word. See the example just given
above.
435. Tadi and kadi mean hut. They are, however, not used so
frequently as the corresponding English equivalent; the sentences are
simply placed in juxtaposition and the arrestive idea is expressed more
by the tone of the voice and the. position of the sentences than by any
particular word.
n. SXTBORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS.
436. Subordinate Conjunctions are those that join a subordinate or
dependent clause to that on which it depends. Since these various
subordinate clauses are treated more fully under Syntax, a full dis-
cussion of the uses of these conjunctions is postponed for the present.
Only a summary b made for the sake of reference. They may be
divided as follows:
(a) Those used in Noun Clauses:
(i) Ne: ihat, whether, whether . . . or, { 455 (J) (2) and (3).
(a) Indirect Questions used as noun clauses are introduced by
I. Relative pronouns with antecedents omitted, meaning who,
whom, what, which, etc. { 472 (a).
II. Relative pronouns with antecedents dituku, diba, did, etc.,
omitted, meaning when. { 472 {h),
UL The locatives prefixed, meaning where, whence, whither,
I 47a (0.
IV. Mua with infinitive, or mn- prefixed directly to verb, mean-
ing how. § 472 (d).
When the munyl? modifies an adjective, see { 472 (d) (2).
V. CI- prefixed to affirmative verb and mu- to negative verb,
meaning why, § 472 (e) (i) and (2).
(b) Those used in Adverb Clauses:
(i) Locatives prefixed to express place, such as where, whence,
whither, etc. {( 321 and Rems., 457.
1 1 8 INTERJECTIONS.
(2) Ha- prefixed is used
I. To express after, when, as soon as, etc. § 458 (a) (i) and '2).
II. To express before, § 458 (b) and (5).
III. To express tUl, until. { 458 (c).
IV. To express whUe. { 458 (J) (2).
(3) Ku mp&la and diambedi, before. { 458 (b) (2) and (3).
(4) Bl- prefixed, if. §§ 459 (a) and (b), 460 (a) and (ft).
(5) Bu separable, if. §§ 459 (c), 460 (c).
(6) Mu- prefixed, a^, like. § 465.
(7) Bua separable, because, for, since. § 466.
(c) Subordinate clauses not introduced by conjunctions in Bu^uba-
Lulua, but having a conjunction in English:
(i) Before sometimes. { 458 (6) (4).
(2) Until sometimes. § 458 (c) Rem.
(3) All constructions expressing purpose and meaning that, in order
that, so as to, lest, etc. § 461.
(4) Constructions expressing result and meaning that. § 463.
(5) Comparative constructions. § 464.
INTERJECTIONS.
437. This language is quite rich in Interjections. These, combined
with many significant gestures, clicking in the throat, and other meth-
ods more or less articulate, make the language and the speaker pic-
turesque. One of the quickest ways of winning the heart of a native is
to lay in a good supply of interjections and learn his methods of ges-
ticulation. There are many onomatopoetic words and phrases, which
the natives are particularly skilled in using, but it is hardly profita-
ble to attempt to introduce them here. Sometimes these may have a
substantive or an adjectival use.
Some of the more common interjections are as follows:
(a) Aka, kaka, kia and da express simple surprise.
(b) D! expresses a scattering, as of people when they are frightened.
{c) Eyo indicates assent or satisfaction.
(d) Mame [§ 437 (e)], mamo, mamu wetu mamu, baba wetu baba
and tatu wetu tatu are all expressions of pain or sudden unpleasant
surprise. These words mean father and mother.
{e) -E(ye) is pK)stpK)sitive and is used in calling or addressing a per-
son at a distance. It may come after any part of speech and is gen-
erally translated by the English O.
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. HQ
(/) Elele expresses amusing surprise.
(g) Muoyo, lifey is the ordinary salutation and means good mornings
good evening^ good day, etc.
Note i. The Baluba often say Ixaku or Inyixaku; then the person
addressed responds, "Ndl mulnylxe.'*
Note 2. The Bakftte say wlbika, the one responding says nibika.
Note 3. The Bakuba say wlnung, the one responding says dlnung.
(h) To implies very far, very long, etc.
SYNTAX.
438. Necessarily many matters usually treated under Syntax have
already been dealt with in considering the various parts of speech.
These will not be repeated here except when necessary to complete
the line of thought.
Sentences may be classified as Simple, Compound and Complex.
I. THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
439. A Simple Sentence is one made up of one subject and one
predicate, either one or both of which may be compKJund.
Rem. I. The imperative mood makes a simple sentence, as far as
its general construction is concerned, so it needs no special treatment
here.
Rem. 2. The direct interrogative makes also a simple sentence, but
a fuller discussion of this is reserved for another place. §§ 468, 469.
The Subject.
440. The Subject is the governing word in the sentence, and owing
to the principle of alliterative concord its influence is far-reaching
441. The subject may be
(a) A single noun.
Muntu wakuya, the person has gone,
(b) The simple pronominal prefix, or this in connection with a dis-
junctive personal pronoun, an interrogative pronoun, or one of the
demonstratives.
Bakuya, they have gone; bobo bakuya, they have gone; eu udl
ux&Ia, wawa wakuya, this (person) is staying, that one has gone,
Udi umbikila nganyi ? who is calling me ?
(c) An infinitive.
Kuambila bantu bakuabo bualu bua Nzambi kudi kuhita kuxi«
kama hatuhu, to tell other people God's palaver is better than to sit idle.
120 THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
(d) Locative words, phrases and clauses.
Kuenu kadi bantu ba bunsl, at your town are plenty oj people,
Mu musoko wetu muakadl nkazama, in our viUage there was a
leopard (loc. phrase).
Mu nsubn kamnena bantu, th$re are no people in the house (loc.
phrase).
Ku IbanJ kndl kulmpe, at Ibanj it is good (loc. phrase).
Hadibo badlma hadl mazlnde a bungi, where they are working there
is plenty of grass (loc. clause).
Rem. The above phrases and clauses used as subject are perhaps
not properly subjects, but they at least furnish the concord of the verb
and are very much like the English expletive or temporary subject,
there, which is the most natural translation of the above phrases and
clauses, when the real subject is thrown after the verb.
{e) An adjective or numeral with its noun understood.
BasAtu bakulua, three (people) came; bakuabo bakuya, the others
have gone,
if) Compound, i.e., made up of different combinations of nouns and
pronouns.
(i) Two or more nouns may thus be connected to form a compound
subject. It seems rather difficult to fix any definite rule regarding the
verb prefix in such cases, especially when the nouns belong to different
classes. The prefix must, however, always be plural. The two follow-
ing Remarks will be found to hold good in most cases:
Rem. I. When the two nouns belong to class I the verb invariably
takes the 3rd pers. pi. prefix of class I.
Kasongo ne Ntumba bakuya, Kasongo and Ntumba have gone.
Rem. a. When the nouns belong to any classes other than class I,
or even class I joined with a noun of any other class, or still farther
when the nouns belong to the same class, quite a safe rule is to use
the pi. prefix bl- of class VII.
Mnana ne mnkanda blakuhona, the child and the book have fallen,
Mnkanda ne cifulu blakuhona, the book and the hat have fallen.
Note. Occasionally, if two nouns thus compounded belong to the
same class, they may take the pi. prefix of that class, but this seems
rather rare, the prefix bl- being most common.
Nsolo ne mbuxl yakufua, the fowl and the goat have died,
(2) Two or more pronouns or nouns of different persons may form
a compound subject. In this case the verb prefix is always pi., and it
is ist pers. rather than 2nd or 3rd, and it is 2nd pers. rather than 3rd.
Meme ne Kasongo tnyaya, Kasongo and I are going.
M eme ne wewe tuyaya, you and I are going.
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 121
Meme ne bobo tnyaya, they and I are going,
Wewe ne yeye nnyaya, you and he are going,
Meme ne mucl tuakuhona, the stick and I jeU,
Wewe ne mncl nuakuhona, you and the stick fell.
Rem. I. Another very common manner (perhaps the most common)
of expressing the compound subject is to use the more important of
the subjects with its regular verbal prefix, then after the verb put the
other subject connected by the conjunction ne, and.
Nakuya n*andl, he and I tvent,
Naknhona ne mncl, / jell and the stick.
Rem. a. We may also have the plural verb in such constructions,
although the real subject is singular.
Tuyaya ne Kasongo, Kasongo and I are going. The tnyaya pre-
serves the plural idea.
Rem. 3. The pronouns generally come in the order ist, and and 3rd
pers. in compound subject construction.
443. The subject may be modified by
(a) An adjective, an adjective possessive pronoun, an adjective
demonstrative pronoun, an inflected numeral.
Rem. For two or more adjectives .modif3dng the same noun, see
583.
(h) An adjective phrase, with -a. (For full discussion of this sub-
ject, see §§ 86, 87.)
Rem. I. Note joint and separate possession. § 87 (a), Rems. i and a.
Rem. 2. Note double prepositional forms. { 87 (<Q.
Rem. 3. Note -a with the infinitive. § 87 (/).
(c) A relative clause. §{ 164, etc.
(d) A noun in apposition.
Kueta, mnkelenge wa Kasenga, nlualiia, Kuata^ the chief of
Kasenga, is coming,
443. The subject may have three positions in the sentence, Natural,
Inverted and Transposed.
(a) In the Natural Position the subject, whether pronominal prefix
or any other word used as subject, comes before the verb. This posi-
tion is used in all simple and declarative sentences and needs no farther
explanation.
(b) In the Inverted Position the subject comes after the verb and
the place of the pronominal prefix at the beginning of the verb is taken
by a relative pronoun or some other subordinating prefix particles which
will be mentioned below.
Rem. I. The Inverted Position is only used when the subject is
3rd pers. I ia6.
122 THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
Rem. 2. If the subject is a pronoun, the sufl^ form must be used.
§ 1 20.
Rem. 3. If the subject is a noun (or some word used as a noun),
this comes after the verb, but the pronominal suffix cannot also be
used at the same time § 120.
Rem. 4. In CompK)und Tenses (§ 194), the subject, whether a noun
or a pronominal suffix, comes after the auxiliary. Sometimes, how-
ever, the subject, if a noun, may come after the participle, in which
case the participle takes the same subordinating prefix as the auxiliary.
§ 125.
Kuakadibo badima, where they were working,
Kuakadi bakftxl badima, where the women were working.
Kuttt kuabuela dlba, where the sun sets.
Rem. 5. The Inverted Position is used as follows:
(i) In relative clauses when the relative pronoun is direct or in-
direct object. § 165, Rem. i.
Kabata wakuhana blntu blaktkleye, Kahata has sold the things
which he bought.
(2) In substantive clauses when these clauses are used as objects
in indirect questions. In most of these cases the construction is that
of a relative clause with antecedent omitted. Even in the substantive
clauses when used as objects, if the subject of the clause is the relative
pronoun, it takes the Natural Position, as would be expected. §§ 455
{b) (i) and 472 (fl)-(c).
Ciena mumtinye knaknya Kasongo, I don*t know where Kasongo
has gone.
Ciena mumftnye badi badila, I donH know who are crying.
(3) In adverb clauses when these are introduced by the following
subordinating prefix particles:
I. Mu, ku and ha as Locatives Prefixed. { 32i.
Nyaya kudiye, / am going where he is.
II. Ha meaning after^ when, etc. { 458 (a).
Hayabo, nenkuhe lukama lua mibela, when they go, I shall give
you one hundred cowries.
III. Bi meaning if. § 459.
Biayabo, nenkuhe lukama lua mibela, if they go^ I shall give you
one hundred cowries*
(c) The Transposed Position is used only in direct questions in
which an interrogative word is employed. In this case the verb takes
the regular pronominal prefix as if the subject stood in its proper place.
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. I 23
but the interrogative word which is used as subject is transposed to
the end of the sentence. § 173 and Rem. 2.
Wakumut&ha nganyi? who struck him ?
Bakuya kOdila mukelenge nsolo banganyi ? who have gone to buy
fowls for the chief?
Note. Where there is no distinctly interrogative word, the Natural
Order is used, only the tone of the voice indicating the interrogation.
§469.
The Predicate.
444. The Predicate, when expressed, is always a finite part of the
verb and may be found in any simple or compound tense. The in-
finitive or participle, standing alone, cannot constitute a complete predi-
cate.
Rem. I. The predicate takes the pronominal prefixes proper to its
subject, when the subject is in the Natural or Transposed Positions
[§ 443 (^) and (c)]; when, however, the sentence h9,s its subject in
the Inverted Position, the verb takes the pronominal suflfixes proper
to the subject. In this last case it is necessary to note that the place
of the pronominal prefix at the beginning of the verb is taken either
by a relative pronoun used as direct or indirect object or by one of
the subordinating prefix particles mu, ku, ha, ha {when, after y etc.), bl.
Rem. 2. For agreement of predicate with compound subject, see
§ 441 (J) and remainder of section.
. Rem. 3. For agreement of predicate with buonso, aU of, when fol-
lowed by the possessive adjective pronouns, see § 182, Rem.
445. The predicate when used as simple copula is often omitted,
but its place is taken by n(m) which is prefixed to the predicate noun,
adjective, etc. § 81.
Rem. I. Note the usual euphonic changes following n. §§ 29, 31,
32, ZZ-
Rem. 2. It is also to be noted, as might be expected, that w and y
are restored to their original u and 1, since they no longer begin the
word. §§ 27, 28.
Rem. 3. An adjective following a noun which has this prefixed n
retains the original prefix of the class unchanged.
Rem. 4. This copula in n is not used when it would be followed
by the locatives or any of the locative combinations. In that case
the regular copulative verbs meaning to he^ such as dl, tadi, etc., must
be used.
Rem. 5. The negative simply prefixes the regular negative sign ka-
to the n. §§ 197, 199.
124 THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
Examples of the predicate with n:
Eel clfulu ncilnyl, clacia ncla Kabata, ^is hat is mine, that one
is Kabata* s.
Bllulu blandl mblmpe, his clothes are good*
Muana eu ngulnyl, this child is mine,
Nsolo el ngllnyl, these jowls are mine.
Dl ^la Niambl ndungenyi lueta, dl dlA Sataaa ndnfn laetu,
the word of God is our wisdom, the word of the devil is our death.
Cifalu eel kancllnyl, this hat is not mine,
Muntu eu kanguandl, this person is not his,
446. The predicate may be compound, in which case the conjunc-
tion is generally omitted.
Bantu bakublka, bakuya, the people have gottmt up and haw ffme.
447« The predicate may be modified by
(a) A simple adverb.
Ta lukftsa, go quickly,
if) An infinitive or infinitive phrase.
Bakuya koluansana, they have gone to fight,
(c) A prepositional phrase.
Badl baxikama ha mesa, they are sitting on the table,
{d) An adverbial clause expressing the various relations of time,
place, condition, etc.
Hanallka ku musoko, nenknhe mibela, when I reach the
village I shall give you the cowries.
448. The position of the predicate modifiers is generally after the
verb.
Rek. I. For emphasis, a prepositional phrase may sometimes come
first in the sentence, and the adverb clause is regularly first.
Mu nsubu mud! bantu, in the house there are people.
Binuik&la bltabuxe bualu baa Nsambi, neanusimglle, if you
accept God^s palaver, he will save you.
Rkk. 2. Monyl ? why f, when used with negative questions, comes
first. § 420 {h),
449. The complements of the predicate may be
(a) A predicate noun or pdjective or pronoun or prepositional phrase.
Rex. The predicate with n is the most common oonstructian here.
§44S-
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 12$
(6) A direct object which may be
(i) A simple noun.
Wakuziha nsolo, h^ killed the fowl.
(2) A pronoun, which may be possessive, demonstrative, relative,
interrogative or indefinite.
Wakuziha winyl (nsolo, fowl), he killed mine.
Ndl nsunsnla ciacia (cifnlu, hat), I choose that one.
Tuakudia bintu blakutuheye, we have eaten the things which
he gave us.
Bakut&ha nsanyl ? whom have they killed f
Bakftla bionso, they bought them all (blntu, things).
(3) A pronominal infix.
Niambi wakutufuka, God created us.
(4) An infinitive.
Nsnasua kujra ku mnkelense, I wish to go to the chief.
(5) A simple adjective or numeral agreeing with the noun under-
stood.
BakOla bis&tu, they bought three (bifulu, hats).
(6) A subordinate clause, thus making a complex sentence.
Wakundeza hakadi bana, he showed me where the children
were.
(7) A prepositional infinitive phrase. § 239 (5), Rem. i.
Udi uk^iba kua kuteka bintu, he is looking where to pu^ (he
things.
(8) Compound, in which case we may have
I. Two or more nouns connected by conjunctions.
Nakumona muloml ne makAzl'andi, / saw the man and
his wife.
II. A noun and the pronominal infix used as objects.
Nakumumona ne mukAzl'andl, / saw him and his wife.
III. A pronoun and the pronominal infix used as objects.
Nakukumona ne eu, I saw you and this (person).
Niambi wakutufuka ne bobo, God created us and them.
IV. Two pronouns.
Nakumona eu ne wawa« 7 saw this one and that one (monta
person, understood).
126 THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
(c) An indirect object which may be
(i) A simple noun.
Nakuha Kasongo clfuln, / gave Kasongo a hat.
(2) A pronoun, which may be possessive, demonstrative, relative,
interrogative or indefinite.
Wakuamblka winyl (mbua, dog) manylnyl, he gave mine the
meat.
Wakuamblka eu munyinyl, he gave this one the meat.
Ea mbua wakaha Kasongo munylnyi, this is the dog to which
Kasongo gave the meat.
Waknha nganyl clfulu? to wham did you give the cloth f
(3) A pronominal infix.
Wakomuha clfulu, he gave him a hat.
(4) Compound, in which case we may have
I. Two or more nouns connected by conjunctions.
Nakuha mulumi lueho ne mukfixPandl, / gave the man
and his wife some salt.
II. A noun and the pronominal infix used as indirect object.
JUus wakutuha muoyo ne bana bandl bonso, Jesus has
given us and all his children life.
III. A pronoun and the pronominal infix used as indirect object.
Wakumpa bintu ne eu, he gave me and this {person) the
things.
IV. Two demonstrative pronouns.
Wakuha eu bintu ne wawa, he gave this (person) things
and that one also,
(d) An object with an objective (or factitive) predicate noun.
Bakumuldlka Kabeya, they named him Kaheya.
Bakuangata Kasongo mukelenge wabo, they made Kasongo
their chiefs lit. have taken him as their chief.
Rem. The idea of appointing to a certain ofl5ce is generally expressed
by kuha, to give, followed by the abstract name of the office.
Bakuha Kasongo bukelenge, they appointed Kasongo chief,
{e) A double object.
Wakulomba mukelenge lueho, he begged the chief for salt;
wakumbanda bulbl, he accused me of stealing.
(/) A direct and an indirect object.
Nakuha Kasongo lueho, I gave Kasongo some salt.
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 1 27
(g) An internal object (Cognate Accusative), i.e., an object which is
of kindred significance to the verb and represents the idea
already contained in the verb.
Bakuxa maxa, they danced (a dance),
Wakuonona biono, he snored {snores).
450. The position of direct and indirect objects must be noted.
(a) When the verb has only one direct object this regularly follows
the verb, the only exception being the pronominal infix.
Wakuxiha nsolo, he killed the fowl; wakumuxiha, he killed it
(nsolo, jowl).
Rem. I. In the passive voice construction' with the 3rd pers. pi. and
kudl, the object, which is really the subject in English, may some-
times for emphasis be placed first.
Mbuxl bakuxiha kudl Kasongo, the goat was killed by Kasongo.
Rem. 2. Sometimes, for emphasis, the object in ordinary construc-
tions may come before the verb, but this is rare. Be cautious about
putting an3rthing before the verb other than the subject or the word
with which the predicate is to agree in prefix — the tendency of the
language is strongly against it.
{h) When a verb has a direct and an indirect object we must note
that
(i) When both objects are nouns they follow the verb, the indirect
object coming first.
Nakuha Kasongo clfulu, / gave Kasongo a hat.
Note. ITie same rule holds good when any pronominal word other
than pronominal infix or suffix takes the place of either direct or in-
direct object; as, nakuha eu clfulu, / gave this (man) a hat; nakuha
Kabeya ciacia, I gave Kaheya that one (clfulu).
(2) When the direct object is a noun or a demonstrative pronoun
or a possessive pronoun or an interrogative pronoun, and the indirect
object is a personal pronoun, then the direct object comes after the
verb and the indirect object takes the pronominal infix form.
Wakumuha clfulu, he gave him a hat.
Wakumuha clacla, he gave him that one (clfulu).
(3) When the indirect object is a noun or a demonstrative pronoun
or a possessive pronoun or an interrogative pronoun, and the direct
object is a personal pronoun, then the direct object takes the pronominal
infix form:
Wakuclha Kasongo, he gave it (clfulu) to Kasongo.
(4) When both direct and indirect objects are personal pronouns,
see § 127.
128 THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
451. The direct and indirect object may be modified by adjectives,
etc., in the same manner as the subject. § 442 (a)-{d),
II. THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
453. The Compound Sentence is made up of two or more simple
sentences which may or may not be connected by a conjunctive word.
These simple sentences follow in every particular the principles already
laid down for the Simple Sentence. {{ 439-451*
The coordinate conjunction is most frequently omitted. { 433, Rem. i.
Kacunga wakuya ku IbanJ, Kongola wakualuka kna Ndumba,
Kacunga has gone to Ibanj and Kongola has returned from Ndumba*s.
III. THE COMPLEX SENTENCE.
453. The Complex Sentence, being made up of an independent
clause and one or more dependent clauses, may be best treated accord-
ing to the character of the dependent clause, which may have the force
of an Adjective or a Substantive or an Adverb.
Rem. The same general rules for subject, predicate, objects, etc.,
which have been considered under the Simple Sentence also hold good
for the subordinate clauses in complex sentences.
A The Adjective Clause.
454. The Adjective Clause is always introduced by the relative
pronoun and always follows the noun or pronoun which it qualifies.
For full treatment of the Adjective Clause, see {{ 164, etc.
B. The Substantive Clause.
455. The Substantive Clauses have the force of nouns in their
relation to the verb of the independent clause. The Substantive
Clause is. generally used as follows:
(a) As subject of the verb in independent clause.
Kasongo, ne uyaya ka IbanJ, ne udl ux&la munemu, mbaalu
buandl, whether Kasongo goes to Ibanj or remains here is his affair
(formbualu, see { 445).
(6) As object of the verb in the independent clause.
(i) The whole list of Indirect Questions can be thus used as objects.
Of course the greater part of these are nothing more than relative
clauses with antecedents omitted.
Ciena mumfhnye kudiye, / don*t know where he is.
THE COMPLEX SENTENCE. 1 29
(2) Here also may be placed the Direct Discourse constniJtion
after the verbs of saying, thinking, etc., in which the verb of the in-
dependent clause expressed or understood is connected with the follow-
ing noun clause by the subordinating conjunction ne (sometimes se).
There does not seem to be any distinctly Indirect Discourse con-
struction, involving such a formidable array of sequence of tenses as
we find in Indo-European languages. The exact words of the speaker
are usually quoted, in which case the ne becomes really equivalent
to thuSf saying, or some such expression usually employed before a direct
quotation. Of course, when translating into English the usual that
is generally employed, with the accompanying tense sequence.
Muktkxl wakuamba ne, ** Ndl musue lacho,** ihe woman says that
she wants some salt, lit. spake saying, *'/ want some salt."
Wakamba ne, *' Ciena ndaa lelu,** he said that he would not come
to-day.
S&l wakukonka Jlsus ne, ** Udi musue ngense clnyl ? **, Saul asked
Jesus what he wished him to do.
Rem. I. Sometimes the verb of saying, thinking, etc., is not ex-
pressed.
Muoyo wandl wakunylngala ne, **Munyl clledi bllnyl muana? '*,
Her heart was sad (and she said), " Why do I not hear a child f "
REIT. 2. It is important to note the mood (purportive) in the follow-
ing expressions where in English we have an infinitive construction :
Ya wamblle bantu badime, go and tell the people to work, lit. that
they may work.
When the person delivers the above message he says, udi wamba
ne badime, he says for them to work, i.e. let them work.
Ya umuamblle ab&le mlbela, go and tell him to count the cowries.
The person delivering this message will say. udi wamba ne abftle
mlbela.
Ya umuamblle alue, go and tell him to come.
(3) Note here the constructions for whether {if) and whether . . . or.
The subordinating conjunction is ne and ne . . . ne.
Ya umone bantu ne badl badlma, go and see whether the people
are working.
Mona ne mudl tulxl, see if there are any insects in it,
Ciena mumiinye ne wakuya, / donH know whether he went {or
not).
Ciena mumiknye ne wakuya ne udiku, / donH know whether he
went or stayed {is here).
IJO THE COMPLEX SENTENCE.
C. The Adverb Clause.
456. The Adverb Clause qualifies the verb or an adverb or an ad-
jective in an independent clause, and may express the various rela-
tions of Place, Time, Condition, Purpose, Cause and Manner.
Rem. I. Generally some subordinating word or particle connects
the two clauses, and these give to the subject of the dependent clause
the Inverted Position when the subject is 3rd pers. {§ 443 (6) and
Rems.
Rem. 2. Sometimes the dependent clause follows the independent
clause, sometimes it precedes it. The English order in such cases is
usually a safe guide.
Adverb Clauses of Place.
457* The Adverb Clauses of Place are expressed by means of the
Prefixed Locative construction and are to be translated by where,
whence f whither y etc. § 321.
Udi ulala hakahoneye, he is lying where he fell.
Rem. For where in indirect questions, see § 472 (c).
Adverb Clauses of Time.
458« It is found better to take the more common English time
constructions and group them according to meanings, then give their
equivalents in the Buluba-Lulua.
(a) After, when, as soon as, aSy are expressed by prefixing ha- to
the verb of the dependent clause.
(i) In past constructions the indicative mood in some appropriate
past tense is used.
Hakablka Jlsus ku lufu, wakaya k(klu kua Tata*andi, after
(when) Jesus had risen from the dead, he went up to his Father^ s.
Hanakadl ndua ku masoko, tuakusangakana ne Kasongo ma
nxlla, as I was coming from the village, Kasongo and I met in the path.
(2) In future construction the present subjunctive is used in the
subordinate clause, while the independent clause may have any tense
expressing future idea, such as imperative, future or present progressive
indicative, present purportive.
Hawab&la mlbela, uye ku masoko, ajter (when, as soon as) you
have counted the cowries, you may go to the village.
(b) Before is expressed under various circumstances by ha- prefixed
to the verb, by ka mp&la, by ku mp&la ku-, by dlambedi, by the
THE COMPLEX SENTENCE. 13^
simple negative, by ha- having the same force as has been mentioned
under § 458 (a) (i) (2).
(i) Ha- in connection with dlambedl is used mostly with past tenses
in the indicative mood.
Munyl kuangaci clkowela dlambedl, hawakulua? why did you
not get your coat before you came?
Hakuyeye ku musoko, wakuela clfufu ne Kabeya dlambedl,
bejore he went to the village he had a consultation with Kaheya.
Rem. Sometimes we hear hu- instead of ha-.
(2) Ku mp&la, without a following ku- joined to the verb, has more
the force of first. We have in this case nothing more than two simple
sentences, but the order of the clauses is inverted, as will be seen from
the following examples. This construction serves for any of the moods
and tenses.
The word dlambedl can be used in place of the phrase ku mp&la.
Ku mp&la (or dlambedl), ub&le mibela, uye ku musoko, first
count the cowries y then go to the village \ or before going to the vUlage,
count the cowries.
Ku mp&la (or dlambedl), wakuela clfufu ne Kabeya, wakuya
ku musoko, first he had a consultation with Kabeya^ then he went to
the village.
Rem. Sometimes the sentence with ku mp&la or dlambedl is thrown
into the negative, in which case the clauses are in the same order as
when before is used. The Negative I (§ 225) followed by a participle
is the most common construction here.
Ku mp&la (or dlambedl) kal muye, wakub&la mibela, before he
went he counted the cowries, i.e., first, he had not gone yet, he counted
the cowries.
Ku mp&la (or dlambedl) Kasongo kal muye ku musoko, wakuela
clfufu ne Kabeya, before Kasongo went to the village he had a con-
sultation with Kabeya.
(3) Ku mp&la ku- and dlambedl ha- are used exactly as before
in English and the clauses have the same order as in English.
Rem. I. The ku- becomes a prefix to the verb, causing the subject
to take the Inverted Position when it is 3rd pers.
Rem. 2. In past tenses use the ordinary past tenses of the indicative
mood in both clauses.
Rem. 3. In future or present general constructions use the present
subjunctive mood in the dependent clause and any present or future
tense of the indicative, imperative or purportive moods in the inde-
pendent clause.
Rem. 4. Sometimes the ha- following dlambedl is omitted.
1 32 THE COMPLEX SENTENCE.
Examples:
Ka mp&la kawakuya (or dlambedi hawakuya), wakubftla mlbela,
before you went, you counted the cowries.
Ka mp&la (or dlambedi kul uya) kuwaya, nbftle mlbela, hejore
you go, count the cowries,
Ku mp&la kuayeye, ab&le mibela, before he goes, let him count the
cowries.
Ku mp&la kawaya, nenkuh* mibela, before you go, I shall give
you the cowries.
(4) The simple negative is used in the subordinate clause with no
real subordinating word to express the idea of before. This construc-
tion is nothing more than two simple sentences. Some form of the
Negative I ({ 225) is most often found here, having with the following
past participle a past idea, though the verb in the independent clause
may be either past, present or future in its significance.
Nakub&la mibela, ct muanse kulua, I counted the cowries before I
came, j.e., I had not yet come.
Kul muanie kuya, ub&le mibela, before you go count the cowries,
i.e., you have not yet gone, count the cowries.
Rem. Note also the neg. form with ku mp&la and dlambedi ha-,
which is the most common construction. } 458 (6) (2), Rem.
(5) We may also express before by transposing the clauses and using
ha- with the same constructions as are employed for after, \ 458 (a) (i)
and (2).
Hawab&la mibela, aye ku musoko, after you have counted the
coTvries go to the village, i.e., before you go to the village, count the cowries.
(c) TiU, until, seem best expressed by ha- joined to the verb exactly
as in the rendering of after, with this in turn followed by a verb
expressing what is done after the preceding temporal clause. { 458
(a) (I) and (2).
Ta udime, hela ngoliga, alekele, go and work tiU the bell rings*
i.e., go and work; when the bell rings, stop.
Rem. The idea of till and until may often be expressed by two simple
sentences; as, imfhna, nduadaa, wait until I come, i.e., wait, I am
coming.
(d) For when we may have the following constructions:
(i) In the sense of after, see { 458 (a) (i) and (2).
(2) In the sense of while it is perhaps best expressed by ha- joined
with any of the tenses of the indicative mood; as, Jlsus, hakadiye
ka bulobo, kal maanse kaya ktklu, wakatuxlla di diandi, Jesus,
while he was on the earth, before he ascended, left for us his word.
(3) In indirect questions, see { 472 (6).
THE COMPLEX SENTENCE. 133
Adverb Clauses of Condition.
459. Conditional clauses are introduced by the subordinating
particles bl- (inseparable) and bu (separable), if.
Note the extensive use of the auxiliary Ik&la ( j 227) in these con-
ditional constructions, owing to the usual auxiliaries being defective
in the subjunctive mood.
(a) Present General Conditions are formed by using in the prota-
sis bi- with the present subjunctive, and in the apodosis the pres-
ent progressive indicative or imperative or any other present con-
struction*
Blwlk&la maana wa Xsambl, kaena mulvt, if you are a child of
God, you are not a thief.
Bltaik&la benie bimpe, bantu bakuabo badl batusue, if we do
well, other people love us.
(6) Future Conditions form the protasis by prefixing bl- to the
present subjunctive^ while the apodosis employs the future indicative
or any other future construction.
Blwadlma blmpe, nenkuhe mlbela, if you work well, I shall give
you some cowries.
Bltuadlma blmpe, neatahe mlbela, if we work well, he will give
us some cowries.
Bladlmeye bimpe, nemahe mtbela, if he works well, I shall give
him some cowries.
Rem. Note the frequent use of the present subjunctive of Ik&la with
the past active participle in the protasis.
Bituik&la badlme blmpe, neatuhe mlbela, if we work well, he will
give us some cowries.
BIk&labo badlme blmpe, nembahe mlbela, if they work well, I shaU
give them some cowries.
(c) Past or Impossible Conditions form the protasis with bu followed
by the past active participle agreeing with the subject, while the apod-
osis takes the past subjunctive.
Ba wewe mulue luktksa, Lazalus kakadi kufua, if you had come
quickly y Lazarus would not have died.
Ba bobo badlme blmpe, nakadi kubafuta, if they had worked well,
I would have paid them.
Rem. The subject always seems to be necessary before the participle
in the protasis.
460. When the protasis is negative and is to be translated by if not,
unless, except, we have the following constructions for the three classes
134 THE COMPLEX SENTENCE.
of conditions, the apodosis remaining unchanged, that is, the same
as affirmative protasis:
(a) For Present General Conditions we have present subjunctive
affirmative of ik&la preceded by bi-, followed by the present tense of
the Negative I. This may in turn be followed by the past active parti-
ciple when it is required. This is the negative present subjunctive.
S 305-
Blwik&la kul rnnana wa Nsambl, udl nmana wa Satana, if you
are not a child of God, you are a child of the devil.
{b) For Future Conditions use the construction as indicated in { 305
for the neg. present subjunctive.
Biwlk&la kul madlme blmpe, elena nkuha mlbela, if you don*t
work welly I shall not give you any cowries.
Blk&labo kabai badlme blmpe, clena mbaha mlbela, if they don't
work welly I shall not give them the cowries.
Rem. We car also have here simply the present tense of the Nega-
tive 1, followed by the past active participle with the forms of Ikftla
omitted; the bl- in this case is also omitted.
Kul mudime blmpe, clena nkuha mlbela, {if) you donH work weU^
I shall not give you the cowries.
(c) In Past Conditions with neg. protasis, use bu followed always
by the subject expressed, with this followed by the Negative I, and
this in turn by the past active participle.
Bu nuenu kanul badlme blbl, nakadl kunuha mlbela, if you had
not worked hadlyy I would have given you the cowries.
Adverb Clauses of Purpose.
461 • These Dependent Clauses of Purpose are in English intro-
. duced by thai, so that^ in order to^ in order that, to; in Buluba-Lulua
they are expressed for the most part by the purportive mood without any
subordinating conjunctive word.
Ta udlmlne Kabata, alue blandl kunoku, go and work for Kabata,
that he may come here.
Lua ne bla kudla, mulunda winyl adle, bring something to eat,
that my friend may eat.
Muha ml, anue, give him some water that he may drink.
Ndl nk£ba muntu, aye ku musoko, / am looking for a man to go
to the village.
Ndl mbatuma, baye kudlma, I am sending them to work, i.e., in order
that they may work.
Ya wambile bantu, badlme, go and tell the people to work. § 455
(6) (2), Rem. 2. •
THE COMPLEX SENTENCE. 1$S
Rem. The negative so that not, in order that not, lest, etc., is ex-
pressed by the simple purportive negative.
Sulka mukoko blkille, kautuke, tie the sheep tightly, lest ii get
loose.
Tula eukuku, kaclt&he bantu ku makCksa, pull up the root in
order that it may not strike people on the feet.
Ndl ngela malobo mu dlna, ctlue kudixlndamu, / am putting dirt
in the hole that I may not come and fall in it.
462. The infinitive mood in several constructions expresses the
purpose idea.
(a) The infinitive in an adjective phrase is often thus used. { 239 (b),
Muha ml a kunua, give him some water to drink.
Lua ne clntu cia kuclbula n*ael luhansa, bring the thing for
opening the box.
Rem. It is important to distinguish here between the infinitive and
the purportive mood constructions. In the former the adjective idea
prevails, in the latter the purpose idea prevails to such an extent that
a new clause is introduced. Hence muha ml a kunua means give
him some drinking-water-, while muha ml, anue means give him some
water that he may drink,
{b) The infinitive as an adverb is used in the purpose sense.
Bakuya kuluangana, they are going to fight.
Rem. Here, too, it is necessary to distinguish between infinitive and
purportive construction. { 240 and Rem.
Adverb Clauses of Result,
463. This construction, which in English furnishes a subordinate
clause introduced by that following upon so in the independent clause,
is perhaps best expressed in Buluba-Lulua by two independent clauses,
and is consequently not a complex senfence.
Wakuya to lubllu, wakudlxlnda, he ran so quickly that he fell
dawn.
Adverb Clauses of Degree or Comparison.
464. In English these clauses are introduced by than, as . . , as,
not so . . . as, etc., following upon a comparative adjective or adverb
in the independent clause. In Buluba-Lulua we find here again the
simple rather than the complex sentence construction.
(a) For comparison of adjectives, see §§ 88, 89.
(b) For comparison of adverbs, see § 403.
(c) For the construction with as . . . as, see {{ 90 (d).
{d) For the cpnstryctipn with not fP . , . as, see ^ 90 («),
13 6 INTERROGATIVE CONSTRUCTIONS.
Adverb Clauses of Manner,
465« In English these clauses are introduced by as, just as, like,
while in Buluba-Lulua they are introduced by the inseparable prefix
mu-, derived no doubt from monyl ? haw f , in answer to the question,
HawshaUI doitf
Enia mandl ngensa, do as I am doing,
Nealue blandl muakuyeye, he will come again (in the same manner)
as he went.
Rem.. Very often we have nankn, thus, in the independent clause.
Adverb Clauses of Cause,
466. These clauses are introduced in English by because, for, since;
in Bulub^-Lulua they are introduced by bna. This baa is for bu+a
with boaio, palaver, understood; and it is separable, consequently the
Natural Position prevails in the dependent clause.
Wakuya ku IbanJ, bua mulunda wandl udl ubela, he has gone to
Ibanj, because his friend is sick.
Boa mulunda winyl udl ubeia, bunakuluila ku IbanJ, because my
friend is sick, therefore I have come to Ibanj, See § 419.
INTERROGATIVE CONSTRUCTIONS.
467. Interrogative sentences may, for convenience of treatment, be
divided into Direct and Indirect.
I. Direct Interrogative Sentences.
468. These ask a direct question to which an answer is expected,
and they follow the general construction of the Simple Sentence through-
out, save that the interrogative word, when one is used, generally comes
last in the sentence whether this interrogative word be subject, direct
object, indirect object, adverb or prepositional phrase. For full treat-
ment of direct interrogatives with interrogative pronouns, see {§ 173,
etc.; for their treatment with interrogative adverbs, see §§ 381, 400,
411, 420.
Waknya nganyl ? who has gone f
Bakutftha nganyl ? whom did they strike f
Uyaya kudl knnyl ? where are you going f
Bakulba elf uln ellnyl kudl nganyl ? who stole my hat f
Ciakuhona cinyi ? what {thing) fell ?
Rem. I. When the interrogative word is an indirect object it takes
INTERROGATIVE CONSTRUCTIONS. 137
its place immediately after the verb, if the direct object is a noun or a
demonstrative pronoun, Cf. { 450 (b) (i), Note.
Udl akuaclla nganyl clfalu? for whom are you holding the hoi?
Wakaha nganyl clacta? to whom has he given that one (clfulu) ?
Rem. 2. When the subject of the interrogative sentence is expressed
and is not the interrogative word, it takes its regular place at the begin-
ning of the sentence.
Kasongo wakuha nganyi clfulu 7 to wham did Kasongo give the
hat?
Rem. 3. Munyl ? why? in negative sentences comes first. § 420 {h),
469. In sentences where simple yes or no is expected there is generally
no interrogative word. The interrogation in this case is indicated by
raising the tone of the last vowel of the sentence. This corresponds
to the English, but where the English makes the subject postpositive
in such sentences, the Buluba-Lulua retains the subject in its normal
place at the beginning of the sentence.
Wakuya ? has he gone f
Mbua wakadla munylnyl ? did the dog eat the meat f
Rem. I. Often the word inyl, or not^ asks the question in such con-
structions; as, wakuya Inyl? has he gone or not? § 434, Rem.
Rem. 2. Note the peculiar idiom when the question is negative fonn.
§ 414, Rem. 2.
II. Indirect Interrogative Sentences.
470* In Indirect Interrogative Sentences we have not the question
but the answer to the direct question.
471* These sentences are generally complex, and the subordinate
clause has the equivalent of a substantive. { 455 (6) (i).
47^3* The dependent clauses in such sentences are usually nothing
more than relative clauses with the antecedents omitted. The more
common English words introducing these indirect question clauses are
who^ whom, what, which, when, where, whither, whence, how and
why, depending upon the word used in the direct question.
(a) Who, whom, to whom, what, which.
Ciena mumftnye badl badlla, / don't know who are crying.
Ciena momAnye wakut&habo, / donH know whom they struck,
Ciena mumftnye wakuheye clfalu, / don*t know to whom he gave
the hat.
Ciena mumftnye cldlye mnCma, / donU know what he is lifting
(clntu, thing, understood).
138 INTERROGATIVE CONSTRUCTIONS.
Ciena miimAnye ciakuangateye, I donH know which one (cifulu)
he got.
Ndi ngenia muakuambeye, / am doing what he said. \ 177.
. Rem. I. The possessive whose, which is expressed in the direct form
by an adjective phrase with -a, usually takes in the indirect form the
word muena, owner. { 84 (6).
Ciena mamftnye muen'acl, / donH know whose it is, i.e., I don't
know the owner of it.
Rem. 2. When the interrogative word would be the subject of one
of the verbs meaning to he, this latter is omitted in the indirect question
construction, and the interrogative word is simply incorporated as a
pronominal in6x.
Wawa nganyl? eiena momumanye, who is that? I don't know
who it is, lit. I don*t know him.
Ciena muclmanye, I don't know what it is.
Rem. 3. It will be noted in the above examples that when the direct
question form has cinyl ? or clnganyl ?, then the indirect form is cl;
when the direct form is nganyi ?, the indirect form is mn; when the
direct form is mnnyi?, the indirect form is mu. {{ 174, 175, 177.
{b) The construction used for expressing when is determined by the
word used in the direct question. { 400.
Ciena momtknye dialueye, I don't know when (dltuku, day, under-
stood) he will come.
Ciena momtknye (ngondo) walueye, I don't know when (what
moon) he will come.
(c) Where, whence, whither. Here the indirect question clause is
introduced by the locatives mu, ku or ha, and assumes the form of
the Locatives Pre6xed. j 321.
Ndl momtknye kuakudixlndeye, I know where he jell,
Ndl momtknye kuyayeye, / know where he is going.
Ciena momfinye kolualoeye, I don't know whence he is coming, i.e.,
where he is coming from.
{d) In rendering the word how we need to note the following con-
structions (j 465):
(i) When the direct question is asked with monyl? ({411) following
the verb, the subordinate clause in the indirect question takes moa
followed by the infinitive when the subject of the infinitive is also the
subject of the independent clause [j 239 (6), Rem. 2Ji but the sub-
ordinate clause takes mu- prefixed to the verb when the subject of the
subordinate is different from that of the independent clause. Com-
pare a somewhat similar construction under § 240.
INTERROGATIVE CONSTRUCTIONS. 139
Ciena mumftnye mua kuclbula muzftte, / donH know how to open
the box.
Ciena mumAnye mudiye uclbula muzftto, / donH know how he
opens the box,
(2) When munyl? in the direct question modifies an adjectival
substantive (§ 411, Note i) we have either one of two constructions:
I. We may have the substantive form of the adjective followed
immediately by the possessive pronoun, which refers back to the noun
modified in the direct question.
Ciena mumanye bunlne buau (muci, sticky understood), / don*t
know how large it m, lit. / don^t knoiv the bigness of U.
Ciena mumanye bungi buabo, / don't know how many there are
(bantu, people, understood), lit. / don^t know the number of them,
II. Or we may have the substantive form of the adjective furnish-
ing its prefix to the verb, and the prefix of the noun modified in the
direct question furnishing the pronominal suffix.
Ciena mumftnye bunlne budiwo, / donH know how large it is (mucl,
stick, understood).
Ciena mumanye bungi buyayabo, I donH know how many (bantu,
people, understood) are going.
{e) In rendering the word why we note the following constructions:
(i) When the direct question is asked in the affirmative by means
of cinyi? or cinganyi? or bizi? and the Applied Forms of the verb,
the subordinate clause in the indirect question takes ci- prefixed to
the Applied Form, though sometimes the simple form of the verb is used.
Udi udidila cinyi? ciena mumftnye cidiye udidlla (or cidiye
udila), why is he crying ? I don't know why he is crying.
Udi uyila ku musoko cinyi? ndi mumAnye cludi uya (or ciudi
uyila), why are you going to the village ? I know why you are going.
(2) When the direct question is asked with munyi ?, the subordinate
clause takes mu- prefixed to the verb, with the pronominal suffix for
subject if the subject is 3rd pers. § 120.
Munyi kadimi bimpe? ciena mumflnye mudiye kai mudime
bimpe, why does he not work well ? I donH know why he does not work
weU.
(3) When the direct question is. asked with buala kl?, the sub-
ordinate clause takes bu- prefixed to the verb. § 420.
Kuena mumanye bunakuluila, you don*t know why I have come.
(/) Whether . . . or. For this construction, see § 455 (b) (3).
DICTIONARY.
L ENGLISH-BULUBA-LULUA.
NOTES ON THE USE OF THE DICTIONARY.
1. Figures immediately after the nouns, either in parentheses or
separated by commas, show the class to which the nouns belong.
2. Only the root forms of verbs and adjectives are given.
3. The words in the Buluba-Lulua-English section are arranged
according to the English alphabet, regardless of the diacritical marks.
4. In the Buluba-Lulua-English section, when the word being de-
fined is repeated, it is represented by using only the first letter of the
word.
5. A native word or letter in parentheses indicates another way of
spelling or pronouncing. The form in parentheses may or may not
be found in the Dictionary.
6. The following abbreviations are used:
act.f active.
adj., adjective.
adv.f adverb.
B.L.-Eng., Buluba-Lulua-English
section of Dictionary.
Buk., dialect of the Bakete.
card.y cardinal (numeral).
cf., compare.
coUoq., colloquial.
conj.f conjunction.
demon. y demonstrative.
dim. or dimin., diminutive.
Eng.f English.
Eng.'B.L., English-Buluba-Lulua
section of Dictionary.
infin., infinitive.
insep.y inseparable.
interjec.f interjection.
interrog.^ interrogative.
intr.y intransitive.
lit., literally.
loc., locative.
»., noun.
neg.f negative.
nph.f noun phrase.
num., numeral.
ord.y ordinal (numeral).
part.y participle.
pass., passive.
pers., personal.
ph., phrase.
pi., plural.
poss., possessive.
p.p., past participle.
prep., preposition.
pro., pronoun.
reflex., reflexive.
rel.y relative.
sing., singular.
sub., subordinate.
subj., subject.
trans., transitive.
v., verb.
vi., intransitive verb.
vph., verb phrase.
vL, transitive verb.
143
ENGLISH-BULUBA-LULUA DICTIONARY.
Abandon, v/.(leave), xia, lekela.
(lefuse), hldia, benga.
Abase, v/., see humiliate.
Abate, vi.(sis water), uma, kama.
(as stream in dry weather), hue-
kela.
Abbreviate, vt.j ihlhlxa, kehexa,
nyanyixa.
Abdomen, n., difu, 5; munda
[insep. prep, word, § 423 (2)
(b)l
Abhor, vt.^ use the ph. di ne lu-
kuna (4)- This expression is
used of persons,
(loathe food), tonda, tua. The
person loathing becomes the
object of the verb; as, bidia
bidi blntonda, / loathe the
bread.
Abhorrence, «.(toward persons),
lukuna, 4.
Abide, ^'.(dwell, live), Ik&la.
Ability, ».(mental), lungenyi, 4;
mexl, pi. of 5 ; lukanyl (Buk.)
4-
(physical), buk ale, 6; ngulu, or
ngudu, pi. of 3; dikanda, 5.
Able, be, w., mtknya or di or
mona followed in each case
by mua and infinitive.
Abort, -z;. (miscarry), tula difu,
tula muana, lela kabixe.
Abound, w., use any verb meaning
to he followed by -a bungi or
ngia-nsi or ngri; as, nyOma
ya bung! id! muitu, animals
abound in the forest.
About, adv., to do, use Future Im-
minent tense of verb or amba
followed by infinitive; as,
ndi ngamba kuya, / am about
to go.
walk, endakana.
/>rc/>. (concerning), bualu bua.
(at, near, around), ku.
Sometimes the idea if contained
in the verb; as, ndi ngamba
cifulu, / am talking about the
hat.
Above, adv., use the insep. root
-ulu with mu, ku or ha as
prefixes, according to sense.
We then have mtklu, ktklu and
heulu.
prep., use the ph. kttlu ha mutu
ha.
Abridge, vt., kehexa, ihihixa,
nyanyixa.
Abscess, «.(sore), mputa, 3.
(boil, bubo), ciuxa, 7; disungru,
«;.
Absent, be, vi., use the negative
verb ena with Locatives Suf-
fixed construction; as,'kena-
ku, he is not present, i.e., is
absent. § 320.
143
X44
ABSOLUTELY— ADAPT.
Absolutely, oJv.(very), mene.
(truly), buliiela, buinabuina,
buxua, buikfixa, bualabuala.
The word bualu(5) is under-
stood in each case.
Absolve, vL, see pasdon.
Absorb, vt.(dry up), kamixa,
umlxa.
Abstain from, vi., hidla, le-
kela, benga.
(as food), Jilu.
Abxtndance, n., buni^i, 6.
Abxtndant, adj., -a bungl, ngi,
nsia-nsi.
Abuse, v^ (speak evil of, ofifend),
henda, tuka.
(abuse each other, quarrel),
tanda, tandangana.
(treat or use badly), n7ansa,ona.
(with a click of the throat), sodia.
n., clhendo, 7; matandu, pi. of
5 or 6; cinyangu, 7.
Accede to, v., Itabuxa.
Accept, vt., Itabuxa.
Accident, n.(by slipping), buflnu,
6.
Accidentally, adv.^ there being no
distinct word, the idea is ex-
pressed in the verb. For the
accidental firing of a gun, or
the slipping of an arrow before
aim is taken, or the cutting of
a finger, or the slipping of
something from the hand un-
intentionally, use the verbs
flnuka, flnukila, halamuka,
sohoka, disohokela.
Accompany, vL, flla, ya followed
by ne, xlndikixa.
Accomplish, v/., ensa, osa, klxa
(Buk.).
Accoucheuse, n., mulelexi; (act
as), vt.y lelexa.
Account, «.(afiFair), bualu, 6;
muanda, 2.
(dpbt), dibansa, 5.
no, see worthless.
(on account of), bualu baa,
muanda wa.
(to do on one's own account).
Account (continued).
use the reflexive form of verb
with -di-. § iiS:
Accuse falsely, vt., dingila, xlmln-
ylna, dimbila, banda.
(accuse one behind one's back),
sonsuela.
(accuse one of theft), banda
bulbl.
Accustom to, vL, ibldlxa.
Accustomed, be, vi,, ibidlla, lobo-
kela.
Ache, v., sama, bela. Generally
the part which aches is said
to make sick the person; as,
mutu udi unsama, my head
aches. Often the person is
spoken of as aching in the part
aJQfected; as, ndl mbela mutu,
I am sick as to my head,
head-, mutu followed by the p.p.
mubele or musame.
(smart, burn), oxa, hlakana.
(stomach), nyenga.
Acm, be, v., dl ne baanjl, 6;
sasa; aya.
Acidity, n., buanjl, 6.
Acknowledge, t;. (confess), soko-
la, Bokolola, tonda, dlson-
suela.
AcQXHESCE, v.(consent), Itabuxa.
Acquire, v., angrata.
ACQIHT, v/., binsixa.
(be acquitted), vi,, blnga.
Across, prep, or adv., dixla dia,
ku nyima kua, dia muamua
dia. The words dixia and
nyima are nouns belonging to
classes V and III, respectively,
(go across water), vi., sabuka;
7;/.(put across), sabula.
(go across a path, etc.), vi,,
sambuka; 7;/.(put across),
sambuia.
Act, 7;. (do), ensa, osa, kIxa(Buk.).
Action, have, v. (of bowels), nyina.
Actually, adv.iyexy, exactly),
mene.
Adapt, v., see fit.
ADD— AFTER.
14S
Add, ^/.(lengthen, widen), lunga-
kaxa, lungakanya,. lunga,
liinsanya, diundlza, landixa,
lehexa.
a little more to conclude the
trade, sekidila, tentekela.
(pile one on top of the other),
ambakAxa, ambakanya.
up, sansixa.
Adequate, be, vf'., fuanansana,
akanansana, dleleka, vula,
kumbana, dl -a biinKi» xika.
Adhere, vf., l&m&ta, kaatakana.
cause to, vt.^ l&mlka, kuata-
klkxa, kuatakanya.
(come apart after adhering),
l&muka.
(pull apart things adhering),
l&miina.
Adherent, n., mul&m&cl, i.
Adieu, n., muoyo, 2.
(to tell one adieu), vt., laya; ha
or ela or ebexa with muoyo.
See SALUTATION.
Adjacent, be, vi., kuatakana,
tuangana.
Adjust, ^/.(arrange), lonsolola.
Admonish, v/. (reprove), b*la,
samlna, nani^a, buluklla.
(warn), dimuxa.
Adolescence, n., bimsonsalumi,
6; buhlankunde, 6.
Adore, vt., nemekela, tendelela,
tiimblxa, Inylxa, nemeka,
menekela, meneka.
Adorn, v/.(dress up), vuadika or
luacika or luaclxa followed
by bilenga.
(be adorned), use the participles
vuale and luate combined
with the auxiliary di; as, ndi
muvuale, / am dressed up.
There may also be used the
passive voice forms, see § 202
{b).
Adornment, n., cllensa, 7.
Adult, n., inantu(i) mukftle.
Adulterer, n., inaeiia(i)
dl(pl. of 5 or 6).
Adulterous, adj., -a masandi, pi.
of 5 or 6.
Adultery, n., masandi, pi. of 5
or 6.
to commit, v., enda masandi,
sanda. This is used of both
sexes.
Advance, w.(go), ya, enda.
in, ku mp&la, diambedi, kumu-
dilu [see § 423 (2) (b)l
price, vL, bandixa muxinsa(2);
vi., muxlnsa udi ubanda.
(to be or do in advance), dian-
Jila.
wages, vt., bandixa difata(5).
Adversary, n., muena(i) luku-
na(4).
Advice, n., lunirenyl, 4; mexl, pi.
of 5; lukanyi(Buk.), 4.
give, see advise.
Advise, v/., amblla, ha with lun-
senyi or mexl.
(warn), dimuxa.
Advocate, v/. (speak for), akulla,
ambidila, lumbuluila.
n., muakuidi, i; muambididi,
i; mulumbuluidi, i.
Affair, n., bualu, 6; muanda, 2.
Affect, v^. (cause), use Causative
Form of verb.
Affection, n., dinanga, 5; disua,
5. Use also the infinitives
kunanga and kusua.
(pity), lose, 4.
Afflict, t;/., nyanga, tacixa, ona.
Affliction, n.(disease), disama, 5;
dibedi, 5; bubedl, 6.
(misfortune), bualu or bualu
bubi.
(oppression), clnyangu, 7.
Afire be, v*., hla.
Afraid, be, v»., cina, di ne
buowa(6).
(as wild animal), b&xa.
make, cinyixa.
See TIMID.
After, prep., ku nylma or kn
nyima kua, haxixe.
Note that after in such phrases
as after death, etc., must be
146
AFTER— ALIKE.
After (continued),
expressed by ku mp&la or
kumudllu.
For after as sub. conj., see § 458(0)
Afterbirth, n., nkiziabendi, 3.
Afternoon, n., dilolo, 5; diba(5)
diaktkhuka.
Again, adv.y the general word is
kabldi, lit. second time; but
for special reference to the
number of times, see § 95(6),
Rem. I.
The Present and Past Repetitive
Tenses express the idea of
again and again.
(never again), neg. verb with
cendelele or l&hal&ha or
matuku onso or kaxidi.
Against, prep., ku.
Age, n. There is no distinct word
for age. In asking the age of
a person, use, according to
circumstances, such expres-
sions as bidlmu bldi bungl
munyi? or ngondo idi bungi
manyi? or matuku adi bungi
munyi?
of same, inulonKo(2) umue.
old, bununu, 6; bukulukAxe,
6; bukulumpe, 6; bukulu, 6;
bukulukulu, 6.
Aged, adj., nunu, kuluktkxe, kulU)
kulukulu, -a kale.
become, vi, kulukAxa, kulumpa.
Aggravate, v/.(annoy), kuacixaor
ufuixa with the word clxl(7) ;
taclxa; flklxa munda; ken-
gexa; lambakana; ho tela;
lobola.
(be aggravated), vi., kuata or
ufua or unva followed by
clxl(7); tata; dl ne munda
muflke; di ne cixl(7).
Ago, ctdv.f long, kale, banga-
banffa, diambedl.
(near, as compared with kale),
musanKu(2) mule.
Agony, «. (mental), kanylngan-
yinga, 8.
Agree, v. (be same or alike), aka-
nangana, fuanangana, kele-
mene, di with muomumue or
«o-umue.
(come to same conclusion), use
such expressions as di(5)
diakuakanangana dimue,
di(5) diakuhunirakana, hun-
guluxa di.
(consent), itabuxa.
(fit, match), vi.f akanangana,
akana, dieleka; vt., akAxan-
gana, fuanyikixa, kelemexa,
akAsa.
Agreeable, be, v., to taste, xema-
kana, di ne nse (pi. of 3 or 4).
Agreement, «., cifufu, 7.
make, hunga di(5).
Ahead, adv., ku mp&la, kumu-
dllu.
of, ku mp&la kua, kumudllu
kua.
(pass on ahead), v., hlta, tamba,
dika.
Aid, vt., see help.
Aim, v., dingila, l&ma, ludlklla,
Idiklxa, elekexa.
miss, hanga, ela hanxl.
n., ^xxi, ndudl, 3.
bad, buel&fl, 6.
Air, «. (movement of air by fan-
ning, wind), luhehele, 4.
Ajar, be, vi., unsuluka.
set, vt.y unsulula.
Alarm, 2;^ (frighten), cinyixa, ban-
dlxa or sakAxa followed by
mucima(2).
give, v., kobola(kubola), ela
bila (pi. of clla), blnglla.
(startle), tabuluxa; w., tabu-
luka.
Alarum, »., clla, 7. .
give, ela bila^ bingila, kubola.
Albino, «., s^ka-muabl (pi. 8«ka-
miabi, 2), cltokatoka, 7.
Alert, be, vi., dimuka.
Alike, be, vi., fuanangana, kele-
mena, dieleka.
(identical), muomume, o-umue.
make, fuanyikixa, kelemexa.
ALIVE— ANGUISH.
147
Alive, be, w., di ne inuoyo(2).
All, adj.y onso. This word takes
Secondary Prefixes.
(all of them), baonso(6) followed
by possessive pronoun. § 182,
Rem.
(all day long), dinda to ne
dllolo.
(all night long), butuku to ne
with lunkelu or dinda.
(entire), xima.
Allow, v/. (consent), Itabuxa.
See PERMISSION.
Allure, vt., Ibidlxa, teya, mtkn-
ylxa or iyixa followed by
bualu bubi.
Allurement, «., buteyi, 6.
Almanac, n., alamanaka(£ng.), 3.
§ 55, Rem. 2.
Almost, adv., use ph. kaba (dimin.
of muaba, place)^ kab&le or
kaba kaklse with the verb
amba, to be about to; as,
nakuamba kuhona kaba ka-
b&le, / almost fell.
The verb amba with infinitives
alone often has this idea.
Alone, adv. or adj.y ne -Ine, see
§ 80; the indeclinable mene;
compound pronominal form
nklyinyi, etc., see § 109.
(in a place alone), ha bu- joined
with poss. pro. forms, see
§ 141, Rem. 2.
let, vt.y lekeia.
Along, prep.y in the path, mu
nxlla(3).
(go along with), vt.y fila.
with, ne {conj.).
Already, adv.y most often ex-
pressed by past tense of the
verb.
Also, adv., kabldl, ne {conj.).
Alternate, v»., tompakana, xln-
takana; vt.y tompaktkxa,
tompakanya, xintakAxa.
Altitude, w., bule, 6.
Altogether, adv.y use the sub-
stantive buonso, 6.
Always, adv., see ceaselessly.
Amaze, vt.y k^mexa.
(be amazed), vi.y k«ma, bingila,
ela blla (pi. of 7), tua clkft-
ma(8).
Amazement, n., clk^ma, 7.
cry of, clla, 7.
Ambassador, n., niuena(i) niu«
kenji(2); mulohO) 2.
Amend, vi.y in health, sang&la,
kAsaniubidl(2), sanguluka.
America, n., Ameleka.
American, n., muena(i) Ameleka.
Amiability, »., kalolo, 8.
Amiable, adj.y -a kaloio(8).
Among, prep.y mu.
(into midst of, in among), han-
kflci ha, munkflci mua, mu
bunlne(6) bua.
Amount, «., full, buonso, 6.
(be full amount), vi.y kumbana,
vula; vt.y kumb&xa, vudixa.
Amputate, vt.y kala, kosa.
Amuse, vt.(ma,ke to laugh), sCkexa.
(be amused), vi.y s£ka.
(play with), s&blxa, s&ba ne,
s&blla, nayixa, naya ne.
Amusing, be, ^.(producing laugh-
ter), sSkexa.
AN-fiSTHETiZE, vt.y leula.
Anathema, «., mulau, 2.
Anathematize, vt.y ela malau(2).
Ancestor, m. (grandparent), kaku,
i; nyinka, i.
Ancient, adj.y -a kale, kulu, nunu,
kulukuxe, knlukulu.
And, conj.y ne.
both . . . and, ne . . . ne.
Angel, ti., muanjeio(i), pi. ban-
Jelo. From Greek.
Anger, m., cixi, 7.
vt.y see annoy.
Angle, w. (corner of house), di-
tumba, 5.
Angry, be, vi.y dl ne cixl(7), cixi
cidi cikuata, unva or ufua
with cixi, di ne munda mu-
flke.
make, vt., kuacixa cixi, ufuixa
cixi, flkixa munda.
Anguish, n., kanyinganyinga, 8,
148
ANIMAL— APPEASE.
Animal, n., nyOma, 3.
tame, cimuna, 7.
Animosity, n., lukuna, 4.
Ankle, n.(ankle bone), kahombo,
8; dikoyabolo, 5.
Anklet, n., lukanu, 4.
Annoxtnce, V,, amba.
Annoy, vt., kuaclxa or ufalxa with
cizi(7), taclxa, flklxamunda,
kengexa, lambakana, hotela,
lobola.
(be annoyed), kuata clxl(7),
ufua or unva with clxl, tata,
dl ne munda muflke, di ne
cixi.
(provoke anything to bite), k£ba
laoxi(4).
Anoint, v., ela minyi (pi. of 5).
Another, adj.j kuabo, nga.
(of one kind ... of another
kind), ha bu- ... ha bu-.
§ 186.
(one another, reciprocal), use
verbal suffix -angana. § 340.
Sometimes a ph. with the inde-
clinable bende is used.
Answer, v.(when called), Itaba.
Ant, «. (driver), luhumbe, 4.
(large black), dixindi, 5.
(ms^ing large hill), cintunte, 7.
(making low hill), lusua, 4.
(small red), kangenene, 8.
(white), masuasu, 2.
(winged), mulonga, 2.
The mulonga, cintunte and
lusua are edible.
Ant-eater, «. (scaly manis), nka-
ka, 3.
Antelope, n. There are many
different species, the more
common of which are ngu-
lungu, 3; lusumbi, 4; kabu-
luku, 8; cintumbindi, 7;
ntundu, 3; muhala, 2.
Ant-hill, «.(made by the bin-
tunte), mutunda, 2.
(small black), ditua, 5.
Anticipate, v.(to do first), dian-
Jila followed by infin., when
necessary.
Antipathy, n.(enmity), lukuna, 4.
Anxiety, n., kanyinganyinsa, 8.
Anxious, be, vi., handika or
nyingala with mucima(2) as
subject.
Any, adj., onso. Generally use pi.
The word any is often not ex-
pressed; as, muntu uyaya ku
muBoko? is any person going
to town.
Anybody, n., bantu bonso. Some-
times we find the sing.
Anything, n., bintu bionso. Some-
times we find the sing.
Anywhere, adv., kuonso, honso,
muonso. § 363. Locatives
with onso.
(anywhere you choose), this is
generally expressed by the Pre-
fixed Locative and Subjunctive
Mood; as, teka cintu hawa-
teka, put the thing anywhere
{you choose).
Apart, adv., use generally the Ex-
pansive Form of the verb.
8 345-
Apologizz, v., there is no satisfac-
tory word, try tokexa munda.
bomba.
Apology, «., lubombo(4), from
bomba, to apologize.
Apostle, n., muloho, 2; mutan-
sadikl, I.
Apparel, n. pi., bllulu (sing.
cllulu); bilamba (sing, d-
1am ba).
Apparition, «., muklxi, 2; mu-
xangi, 2.
Appear, 7;}.(be seen), mueneka,
mueka.
(appear dififerent from reality),
use ph. ku mesu; as, cllulu
cidl clmpe ku mesu, lit. the
cloth is good to the eyes,
(as moon), b&la.
Appease, vt.(as thirst), mftna or
hulxa with mlota(nyota);
talAxa or holexa with ha
dlmlnu(5) or ha mumlnu(2).
APPEASE— ASK.
149
Appease {continued).
(be appeased of hunger), dif u as
subject of verb ukata.
Appetite, n., ns&la, pi. of 3.
have an, be hungry, di ne or uf ua
or unva with ns&la, suma
or sama with ns&la as subject
and the person as object.
Appoint, vt.{io an oflSce), ha or
buexa ma or dlxa followed
by the abstract name of the
office,
a day, amba dituku(5).
Apportion to, v., abanya, aban-
yina, abuluxa.
Apprehend, v/.(catch), kuata,
angata.
(know), m^nya.
Approach, v., ya or lua or flka
with ha buihi(6) or hehi.
Approve, vt., itabuxa.
April, n., ApiIa(Eng.).
Arbitrate, v., lumbulula.
Arbitrator, n., mulumbuludl, i.
Arduous, adj., kttle, from v. kttia,
to be arduous.
Argue, v., ela or elangana or di
ne with mp&ta (sing, luh&ta,
4)-
(quarrel), tanda, tandangana.
Argument, n., luh&ta, 4.
settle an, vt., tuixa.
Arise, v., from sitting position,
bika, Juka.
(ascend), banda.
(as sun), banda, h&tuka, lu-
huka.
from the dead, bika ku lafu(4),
fuiuluka.
to the surface, tunduka.
Arm, n.(of the body), diboko, 5.
(left), diboko dia bakAxi (pi.
of i).
(of tree), ditamba, 5.
(right), diboko dia baliuni (pi.
of i).
Army, n. pi., bena (sing, muena)
nvita(3), masoladi (sing, dl-
soladi, 5).
Aroma, »., muhuya(2) muimpe.
Around, prep., ku, ku nyima kua.
go, cimbakana, nyunguluka,
luila, yila.
Arouse, v/.(as from sleep), bixa.
Arrange, vt., longolola.
(separate and arrange), t&hulula.
Arrest, vt., kuata.
Arrive, w., flka.
Arrogance, n., cikama, 7; dika-
makama, 5; din tan ta, 5.
Arrogant, be, vi., ena ne bundu
(6), di ne eikama(7), di ne
dikamakama(5), di ne din-
tanta(5), disua, ibidila.
Arrow, n.(with iron point), mu-
kite 2.
(without iron point), lub&le, 4.
(with blunt end for killing birds),
nkoyi, 3.
(poison used on arrows), lulen-
KU, 4
Artery, «., mujilu, 2.
Artful, ai/;. (cunning), -a budi-
mu(6); dimuke, from v.
dlmnka, to he artful.
Article, «. (thing), cintu, 7.
As, a iv. and conj.
as ... as, see § 9o(£f).
a3 far as, to, ku.
(like), see § 465.
as soon as, see § 458 (a),
not so ... as, see § 90 (c).
Ascend, w.(go up), banda.
Ashamed, be, v., di ne or nfua or
unva with bundu(6) or bun-
vu(6); bundu or bunvu as
subject of the verb kuata with
the person as the object,
(be not ashamed), use neg. of
above expression or ume (p.p.
of uma, to he dry) mu mesu.
make, vt., kuacixa or afnlxa
with bundu or bunvu.
Ashes, n., butue, 6.
Aside, turn, vi., sesuka, ehuka
(ahuka).
Ask, v. (beg), lomba.
(ask one to pay a debt), nana.
(inquire about), ebexa, konka.
permission, see PERMISSION.
ISO
ASLEEP— AWAY.
Asleep, be, vL, lala, lala tula (pi.
or 8).
Ass, n.y kab&lu, 8.
Assemble, vi.f sangakana, tuta-
kana, lua cisumbu(7), dl-
sanga, diunguixa, kunga-
kana, sambakana, dikunga;
vt.^ sangixa, tutak&xa, tuta-
kanya, kungixa, sangila,
sanga, sangakanya, sanga*
ktkxa, sambakanya, samba-
kflxa.
Assembly, m. (crowd), cisiunbu, 7.
Assent, «., nod, xukulamutu(2).
give, V.J itabuxa followed by
verbal noun in lu-. See per-
mission.
Assert, v.^ amba.
Assertion, »., dl, 5.
Assist, vt., enzexa. This idea is
most often expressed by the
Causative Form of the verb.
Assort, vL, t&hulula, sungulula
(arrange), longolola.
ASTONlS^i, vt.y tabuluxa, kimexa.
(be astonished), vi.^ tabuluka,
kCma, tua cikSina(7).
Astonishment, »., clk<^ma, 7.
Expressed by a grunt,
cry of, clla, 7.
Astray, adv., go, be lost, vi.,
hambuka.
(lead away, entice), vL, mtin-
yixa or iyixa or ibldixa with
the ph. buiau bubi.
(show wrong path), vt., ham-
buxa.
At, prep.y ku.
bottom of, hanxi ha.
once, see now.
the village or home of, kua, maa,
ha. § 87 ((/), Rem.
It most often happens that cU is
expressed in the verb; as,
mona, look at; ela mbuxi
muci, throw a stick at the goat.
Atone, T'/.(pay a debt for), fucila.
(die for), fulla.
Atonement, make for, vph., fucila
dlbanza(5).
Attempt, v., lablla, tela, Idlklxa,
elekexa.
and fail, hanga.
Attend, v/. (accompany), flla,
xindiklxa.
(as slave his master), l&m&ta.
(listen), unva, telexa macu
(sing, dlcu, 5).
(look after, tend), l^Una.
Attendant, «., mul&m&ci, i;
muana, i.
(for the foreigner), mbol(Eng.), I.
(slave), muhlka, i.
Attention, pay, v., telexa.
Attorney, «., muambldldl, i;
muakuidi,i; mulumbululdl,!.
Attractive, adj., -a kalolo(8).
Attractiveness, «., kalolo, 8.
Attune, vt., stkklla hamue, aktk-
xa, suka.
Aubergine, «., luJUu, 4.
Audacious, be, vi., ena ne
bundu(6), di ne with clka-
ma(7) or dlkamakama(5) or
diiitanta(5), dlsua, Ibldlla.
Audacity, «., cikama, 7; dikama-
kama, 5; dintanta, 5.
August, «., Aguslte(Eng.).
Aunt, «.(on the mother's side), an
elder sister of the mother is
inamu(i) mukulu, a younger
sister of the mother ismamu(i)
muakunyt.
(on the father's side), tatu(i)
muktkxl(i), niankaxi(i).
Authority, «.(chiefship), buke-
lenge, 6; bunfumu, 6.
Await,, i;/., Indlla, knba.
Awake, vt., blxa ku tulu (pi. 8),
katamuxa.
be, vi.y bika, tab&la, katamuka.
(keep awake all night), lala
cltab&la(7).
Aware, be of, t;^(know), mtknya.
make, dimuxa, mAnylxa.
Away, be, vi., use neg. ena with
Locative Suffixed construction.
§ 320-
far, kule.
go, ya, urnuk^.
awe-
-BARE. 151
Awe, »., buowa, 6.
Bake, t;/., oxa mu uYuma(Eng.).
Axe, n. cisul, 7; cikenge, 7.
As a fact the native never
(battle-axe of Zappo Zapps),
bakes.
cilonda, 7.
Bald head, n., dlb&la, 5.
Bale, «., dikutu, 5.
v.f kuta.
B.
out water, vt.j tua.
Ball, n., clbul.uiige, 7; dibulunge,
Babble, 2;., akula blakulakula
5-
[§3S6(^)].pl.of 7; labakana.
(bullet), mutelenge, (2)wa lu-
Baby, m., muana(i), or the dim.
tende(4).
kana (8).
make into a, vt.y bulunguxa.
new-born, katoto, 8.
of rubber, dlbulu, 5.
Bachelor, «., mujike, 7.
of twine, clkata, 7.
Bachelorship, n.(state of being
Bamboo, n. The midrib (mukuo-
unmarried), bujike, 6.
lo, 2) of the palm is sometimes
Back, «., nylma, 3.
thus improperly called. The
come, vi.f aluka, alukila, hln-
hard outside part of the mid-
gana, tuta, tuclla, hlngu-
rib is called lusele(4) or
luka.
lubaie(4) or lubftxe(4). The
(go back and forth), tambakana.
last word is Buk.
of knife, muongo, 2.
(found in forest and used for
send or bring, vt., aluklza,
making fence), einkete, 7.
hinglxa, tuciza.
Banana, «., dlbote(5), used either
Backbite, vi., songuela.
, of the bunch or the single
Backbiter, n., muena(i) bun-
fruit.
songe(6), niaena(i) muko-
hand of, cisangi, 7.
sa(2), musonKuedl(i).
stalk of, clkuondekiionde, 7.
Backbiting, »., bunsonge, 6; mu-
Band, w.(crowd), cisumbu, 7.
kosa, 2.
(strip), luhola, 4.
Backbone, n., muongo, 2.
(stripe), muhola, 2.
Backwards, adv., clanyima.
Bank, «.(beach), muelelu(2) or
fall, vi.y dlxlnda bualama (adv.)
musala(2) or kukala or bu-
(go backwards and forwards), vi.y
elka(7) or kusula or kunfu-
dilu or kusala followed by the
Bacon, n., munyinyi(2) wa ngu-
adjective phrase -a ml. See
lube(3).
§ 423 (2) w.
Bad, adj., bi.
high, eibungubungu(7), mu-
(go bad, become useless), vi..
bangu(2).
onoka, nyanguka.
of earth piled up, muklxl, 2.
(make to go bad), vt., ona,
sand-, lusenga, 4.
nyanga.
Baptize, v., batiza (from Greek),
(rot), vi., bola.
mlamina ml.
(smell bad), v., nunka muhu-
* Barbarian, «., musenxi, i. This
ya(2) mubl.
is an imported word.
Badge, »., cimonyinu, 7.
Barber, m., mubeyi, i.
Badly, adv., bibi.
Bare, adj., -headed, ku mutu(2)
Badness, »., bubl, 6.
kutuhu.
Bag, «., cibombo, 7; luhlya, 4.
(to shave the head bare), vt.,
(large open scrip), ns&bo, 3.
kungula.
152
BARGAIN— BEAUTIFY.
Bargain, n., muzinsa, 2.
drive a, tua muzinsa.
Bask, 7;.(as dog), buluka.
(strip off), ubula.
n., of a tree, clhusu, 7; ciBuba,7.
Bakrel, n., of gun, mulonda, 2;
muziba, 2.
Bakren, i)erson or animal, n.
nkumba, 3.
Barter, v. (buy and sell), enda or
endalula with inuzinsa(2).
(buy), ula, suinba.
(sell), hana.
Base, n.(at the base of), kumanda,
kunzl. See § 423 (2) (6).
(bottom), citaku, 7.
(bad), adj., bl.
Bashful, be, vi., dl ne bundu(6).
Bashfulness, n.f bundu, 6; bun-
vu, 6.
Basin, n., dilonsa, 5.
Bask, t;., ota munya(2).
Basket, n. (fish-trap), mukinda, 2.
(for carrying fowls), mus&sa, 2.
(large with top), dikumbu, 5.
(long for carrying on head),
cistkka, 7.
(small with top), nkobo, 3.
Bass, voice, nph., dl(5) dinlne.
Bastard, nph.y muana(3) wa
masandl (pi. of 5 or 6).
BAT(rodent), n. (large), mudlma, 2.
(small), kahulukusu, 8; kaku-
luknku, 8.
Bathe, vi., owa; vL, owexa.
Batten, n., lubambalu, 4. These
are tied crosswise on the rafters.
Battle, «., nvita (nflta), 3.
Battle-axe, «., cilonda, 7. Made
by the Zappo Zapps.
Bawl, v. (as cow), dlla.
Be, vi., di, cidi, tadi (kadi), tu,
Ik&la; also the negatives ena
and 1 and eena. §§ 205, etc.
Sometimes the verb to be is
omitted, then we have n pre-
fixed to predicate word. § 445 .
Beach, n., muelelu(2) or musa-
la(2) or kukala or kusula
or kunfudllu or kusala or
Beach {continued),
bucika(6) followed by the ad-
jective ph. -ami. § 423 (2)(6).
on the, mpata, 3.
Bead, n., dibue, 5.
Each variety has a distinct name;
as, kahaba(8), liimbidl(4),
lafaote(4), kaluaci(8).
Beak, n., mulnu, 2.
Beam, n.(stick), muci, 2.
Bean, «.(black-eyed pea), lu-
kunde, 4.
a large, clkundekunde, 7.
Bear, v. (as cassava, potatoes, etc),
Ika.
(as tree), kuama.
(bring forth, give birth), lela.
(carry), tuala.
Beard, n., muevu, 2; muedi, 2.
a hair of, lusuki, 4; lunyonyl, 4.
Beast, n., nyflma, 3.
Beat, v.(strike), kuma, tuta.
down, as grass, zindika.
down, as loose dirt, beta.
down the price, huekexa or
tekexa with muxinsa(2).
(drive away), Ita&ta.
drum, imba.
(excel), tamba, hita.
fine, as powder, botexa.
(heart), vph., kuma manda.
in a mortar, tua.
out, as dust from a mat, tutiila.
out iron, forge, tula, fula.
(overcome), use verb tamba or
hIta followed by one of the
nouns bukftle(6) or iigulu(3)
or dikanda(5); clmuna.
(punish), kengexa, nyanga, ona
with fist, kuma or tuta or tua
with cisu8u(7).
with knuckle, tua lukonyi(4).
with open hand, kuma with
luhl(4) or dibi(5).
up, as eggs, vundula.
Beautiful, adj., Impe, akane,
lengele, -ampQci (slang).
Beautify, v/.(make good), len-
gexa.
BEAUTY— BELONG .
^53
BeautX) n.f bulmpe, 6; buakane,
6; bulengele, 6; mpoci
(slang), 3.
Because, sub. conj., bua. See
§466.
(on account of), baalu(6) bua,
muanda(2) wa.
Beckon, v., with hand, loba.
Become, vi. This idea may be
expressed in four ways:
(i) With the verbs kudimuka,
andamuka, lua.
(2) Pres. Imminent tense of
amba followed by infin.; ci-
lalu cikadl ciamba kuflka,
the cloth is becoming black.
(3) Pres. or Past Progressive
tense of the verb; as, udl
utoka, he is becoming white.
(4) Pres. Imminent tense of lua
followed by adj.; as, ukadi
ulua mubl, he is becoming bad.
chief, etc., dia bukelense(6).
Bed, »., bulalu, 6; clladilu, 7.
Bee, n.(honey-), lubulubulu, 4;
lunyeke, 4.
(sweat-)) kambulnkidl, 8.
(insect), ctxi, 7.
Beef, nph., munylnyi(2) wa
ngombe(3). '
Beer, n.(made from maize or mil-
let), malua, pi. of 5; maluvu,
pi. of 5.
to brew, vt.y enga.
Beeswax, n., dikaci, 5; dlhula, 5.
Beetle, ;t.(goliath-), kababu, 8.
(very large), ntambangoma, 3;
dingonge, 5.
Before, sub. conj., see § 458 (6).
adv. {do before), anticipate, v.,
dianjila.
(go before), hita or tamba or ya
followed by ku mp&la or ku-
mudilu or dlambedi.
prep. {in front of, ahead of), ku
mp&la kua, kumudllu kua.
Beforehand, adv., dlambedi.
Beg, v., lomba.
Beget, 2/. (male), Imlclxa; lelamay
sometimes be used figuratively.
Beggar, n., mulombi, i; mue-
na(i) luloinbo(4).
Beggary, n., lulombo, 4.
Begin, v. (start at the beginning),
tuadixa, banglla, angacUa
kabidl.
to do, banga.
Beguile, vt., dlmba, xlma, dlnga.
Behead, vt., kosa mutu(2).
Behind, adv.^ ku nylina(3), ha-
xlxe.
prep., ku nylma kua.
(the one behind), -a kunxlki-
dllu, -a haxlxe. § 423 (2) {b).
(be behind or last in doing), v.,
xlxa.
Behindhand, be, or do, v., xlxa
followed by infin., when neces-
sary.
Behold, i;.(]ook at), mona, tan*
gila, xoxa
(look steadfastly at without
speaking), mona talala.
Belch, v., blola, beula.
Belief, «., use infin. of Itabuza.
Believe, v., Itabuxa.
Belittle, vt., kehexa.
Bell, «.(largeEuropean, as church
bell), ngonga(3). This word
doubtless comes from the Low-
er Congo,
(native manufacture, made of
iron), lumembo, 4.
ring a, vt., ela, Imba.
(small European with rattles),
kadlbu, 8.
(small, for wearing), ludlbu, 4.
(wooden, tied around dogs in
hunting), cldlbu, 7.
Bellow, v., dlla.
Bellows, n., mubanse, 2; mudua,
2.
blow, vt., Imba.
Belly, »., dlfu, 5; munda [§ 42?
(2) {b)l
Belong to, v. This idea is gener-
ally expressed by some one of
the words meaning to be fol-
lowed by the adjective ph.
with -a.
154
BELOW— BITE.
Below, adv. and prep., munxi or
munxl mua.
Belt, n., muk&ba, 2.
Bemoan, vL, dila, Jinga.
Bench, n., ditanda, 5.
Bend, v/.(as a stick, wire, etc.),
tonya, tonta, kobeka, konya,
henguluxa, nyongoboxa.
(fold), bunya.
(stoop), In&ma.
straight, olola, ludika.
the edge of anything, benda-
mixa; vi.j bendama.
(be bent, crooked), vi., konyan-
gala, tony&ma, kobama,
henguluka, nyongroboka.
n., dintonya, 5.
Bendable, be, vi., xoboka, nyen-
grabala, dl ne inuxobo(2).
Beneath, adv. and prep., munxi or
munxi mua.
Benevolence, «., diha, 5.
Benevolent, acj., -a diha(5).
person, cihahl, 7.
Bequeath, vi.y ha buhianyl(6).
Beseech, 7;/. (plead with), sengela,
sengelela.
BEsroE, prep.f ku, kunxi kua, ha
buihi ha (ne), hehi ne.
con;. (also), ne, kabidi.
Bestow, vL, ha, ambika(Buk.).
Bet, vph., dia luhiku(4).
n.f luhiku, 4.
gain a, binga.
loose a, hila, luhiku as subject
of the V. kuata.
(put up anything for a bet), vt.,
hikila.
See GAMBLE.
Betray, v.j a secret, sokolola.
(accuse behind the back), son-
guela.
Betrothed, be, v.(the man),
banga.
(the woman), use passive of
banga.
Better, be, vt. (comparative degree
of good), tamba or hita with
buimpe(6).
Better, be ( ontinuec).
(convalescent), sang&la, kAsa
mubidi(2), sanguluka.
Between, prep.^ use mu, ku or
ha with the insep. -nkdei.
§423(2)W.
Bewail, vt., dila, Jinga.
Beware, i;.(be warned), dimuka.
Bewilder, vt., tuhakfixa, tuha-
kanya, buandakAxa, buan-
dakanya; vi., tuhakana,
buandakana.
(be lost in way), hambuka.
Bewitch, vt., Iowa.
Beyond, adv., ku nyima(3); mua-
mua or kuakua or haha, de-
pending upon the sense.
prep., ku nyima kua.
be, vi., tamba, hita.
Bible, nph., mukanda(2) wa
Nsambi.
Bicker, v., tanda, tandangana.
Bid, v.(command), amba, ambila.
Big, adj., nine.
Bill, n.(beak), muinu, 2.
Billow, n., divuala, 5.
Bind, i;/.(tie), suika, xika, Inya.
(wrap around), Jinga, Jingila,
Tunga, vungila, nyengela.
Bird, «., nyunyu, 3.
Birth, to give, v., lela.
cause to give, act as midwife,
vt., lelexa.
power to give, ^., bulrdi, 6;
lulelu, 4.
Birthright, nph., bintu bia
muan'a bute(6).
Biscuit, «., cisikit(Eng.), 7. § 55,
Rem. 2, Note 2.
Bishop, n., the ph. mul&n]i(i) wa
bantu ba Nsambi.
Bit, n.(small piece cut off), cituha,
7.
(small piece split off), cih^su, 7.
A small quantity is generally ex-
pressed by the diminutive pre-
fixes of class VIII.
Bitch, nph., muktkxi'a mbua(3).
Bite, vt., suma.
excite to, k£ba luoxi(4).
BITE— BODY.
ISS
Bite (continued).
off with front teeth, to gnaw,
kunya.
(a biting animal), dl ne luoxi.
Bitter, be, vi.y lula. Often the
substantive form bululu(6) is
used; as, ciombi cidi buiuiu,
the a ioc is bitter.
Bitterness, n., bululu, 6.
Black, a.;., flke (p.p. of flka, to
be black).
Blacken, vt., flkixa.
Black-eyed pea, »., lukunde, 4.
Blackness, n., buflke, 6. Some-
times the infin. kuflka, to be
blacky is used in comparative
constructions. § 90 (g).
Blacksmith, n., mutudi, i ; nsen-
da, 3; mufudi, i.
shop, cttudilu, 7.
Bladder, n., cinyu, 7.
Blade, n., of grass, dixinde, 5;
dtbexi, 5; dUnyi, 5.
of knife, muele, 2.
back of, muongo, 2.
(shoulder-), clklyaklya, 7; dl-
keha, 5.
Blame, vt., falsely, banda.
Blank, adj. (empty), cinana (inde-
clinable), tuhu.
Blanket, n., mbulankete(Eng.),3.
Blaspheme, vph.^ tela dtna dia
Nzambi.
Blaze, nph., ludimi(4) lua ka-
hla(8).
Bleach, v/., tokexa.
Bleat, v., dila.
Bleed, w*.(nose), miluluba (pi. of
2) idl ituka.
vt,f smnika.
(small gourd used for bleeding or
cupping), lusumu, 4.
Bless, 7;^.(make happy), sankixa;
vi.y sanka.
(praise, as God), tendelela, tum-
blxa, Inyixa.
Blind, be or become, vi., fofa,
xib&la mesu.
(white spot in pupil), lusongo, 4.
Blindness, n., bufofo, 6.
Blister, n.(made by fire, hot
water, etc.), dibuba, 5.
Blood, n., maxi, pi. of 5 or 6.
from (the nose), miluluba, pi.
of 2.
Bloom, Blossom, n., cilongo, 7;
clsu, 7.
V.J Tunguluka, baluluka.
Blot out, vt.y Jlmlxa, Jima.
Blow, n., mukumu, 2 ; mututu, 2.
away by wind, v/., hehula; v«.,
hehuka.
bellows, vt.y imba with mudua(2)
or mubanse (2).
breath, vt., ela inuhuya(2).
down, as tree, vt.y ximbuia; vi.,
ximbuka.
fire, vt.y temexa, huxa, huhixa.
(hit with fist), vt.y kuma or tuta
or tua with ci8usu(7) or dl-
8undu(5).
(hit with knuckles), vt.y tua lu-
konyi(4).
(hit with open hand), vt.y kuma
or tuta with dlhi(5) or luhi(4).
horn, whistle, vt.y ela.
meat, as by flies, v., ela ciku-
su(7).
nose, hemba with lusole(4) or
tumina pi. of 8).
out, extinguish, vt.y JIma.
(pant), v.y huyakana.
violently, as storm, v.y huha.
Blue, adj.y flke (black), flkuluke.
These words are p.p. of flka
and flkuluka.
Blunder^ v.y tuhakana.
Boar, n., ng^ulube, 3.
(male), mulumii(i) wa nfpilu-
be(3).
Board, «., diblya, 5.
(piece of board for bottom of
basket), cib&sa, 7.
Boast, v. {he proud), disua.
Boat, n.(canoe), buatu, 6.
(steamer), dikumbl(5) dia ml;
maxua, pi. of 5 or 6.
Body, n.y mubidi, 2.
(corpse), cit&lu, 7; muxangi
(Buk.), 2.
156
BOGIE— BRACES.
Bogie, n., mukixi, 2; muxan-
gl(Buk.), 2.
Boil, n., ciuxa, 7; disungu, 5.
(sore), mputa, 3.
(very small), luhusu, 4.
vf.(as water), s&ba, blla.
vt,f tumpa, 8&bula.
(render oil or evaporate for salt),
enga.
Bold, orf/., see brave.
Boldness, n., see bravery.
Bondage, n., buhlka, 6.
Bonds, n., lukanu, 4.
put in, vph., ela mu lukanu.
Bone, n., mufufa, 2; mufuba, 2;
mukuha, 2.
of fish, dieba, 5. PI. meba.
Book, n., mukanda, 2.
leaf of, dilnyl, 5; dlbexi, 5.
Boot, n.(shoe), cisabatu, 7.
Border, n., of path, field, cloth,
etc., muelelu, 2; musala, 2;
bucika, 6; also the Locative
words kusula, kunfudllu,
kusala. § 423 (2) (6).
(dividing line), mukalu, 2.
vi.j tuangana.
Bore, vph., tubula dlsoso(5).
Borer, n.(an insect), mbumbu, 3.
Born, be, v»., use any auxiliary
verb meaning to be followed by
pass, past part, of lela.
first-, muan'a bute(6).
last, muan'a mukala(2).
new-born child, katoto, 8.
(still-bom child), kana(8) ka-
bixe.
(be born again, metempsycho-
sis), vi.f sanguka, tanda,
lenguluka.
Borrow, v/.(with the idea of return-
ing the exact article), hanza.
(with the idea of not returning
the exact article borrowed, but
its equivalent in kind), somba.
Bosom, «., ciadi, 7.
Both, conj.(hoth. . . . and), ne
. . . ne.
n.(in sense of all two), bu-
bldl, 6. § 95 (a).
Bother, v/. (annoy), tacixa, 1am-
bakana, hotela, lobola.
(be bothered), vi., humba, tata.
(interrupt), vt., humbixa, kose-
xa, humbakdxa.
Bottle, n., mulondo, 2.
Bottom, ».(base), cltaku, 7; also
the Locative words kumanda,
mumanda.
(bottom on the inside), hanxl ha.
Bough, n., ditamba, 5.
Bounce, vi. lundumuka.
Bound, v».(jump), tuhika.
(rebound), lundumuka.
«.(limit), see boundary.
Boundary, ».(edge of field, path,
etc.), muelelu, 2; musala, 2;
bucika, 6; also the Locative
words kusula, kunfudllu, ku-
sala, kukala.
line, mukalu, 2.
Bow, n.(rain-), muasankongolo, 2.
(-string), mul^mu, 2.
(to put on bowstring), l#ma
buta(6).
(weapon), buta, 6.
See KNOT.
v., in&ma, inyika mutu(2).
Bowels, «. (intestine), dlla, 5.
action of, v., nylna.
(peristaltic movement with noise),
v.f nyenga.
running off of, vph.y huya or ela
or uha with munda.
Bowl, n., dllonga, 5.
Bowstring, w., mul^mu, 2.
put on, vLy lema.
Box, w., mux^te, 2.
Boy, w., muana(i) muluml(i).
(lad), songalumi, i; muhian-
kunde, 2.
(the foreigner's personal attend-
ant), mboi(Eng.), i. This
term is also applied to a female
attendant.
Boyhood, n., bunsongalumi, 6;
buhiankunde, 6.
Bracelet, n., lukanu, 4.
Braces, n. (suspenders), mikAba
(pi. of 2) yamlh&nu (pi. of 2).
BRAG— BRING.
157
Brag, v., disua.
Braid, z;/. (plait), luka clhia(7).
Brain, n., buongo, 6.
Branch, w., of a tree, ditamba, 5.
i^*.(as a stream or path), handu-
luka, abuluka, t&huluka.
Brand, «.(sign), clmonylnu, 7;
cllexilu, 7.
(fire-), clmunyi, 7.
Brass, «., there is no distinct word,
use ciaina(7) clkanse or lu-
kanu(4) lutoke.
rod, used in some places as cur-
rency, mutaku, 2.
Brave, adj.^ -a dikima(5), -a
bukltu(6), -a inuciina(2) mu-
kftle.
be, vi.y teka diklma(5).
Bravery, n., dikima, 5 ; bukitu, 6;
inuciina(2) muklile.
Bray, v., dila.
Bread, n., bldla, pi. of 7; nxima,
pi. of 3 or 4.
(European bread made from
wheat flour), bldla blamajnpa
(this word from Lower Congo).
Breadth, «., the Locatives mu or
ku followed by buihl(6) or
buklse(6); ntaiita(3) maihi;
bunlne is used often when
there is no comparison between
length and breadth.
Break, v/., cibula; vi.y cibuka.
(as day), butuku(6) as subj. of
verb cia.
(as dish), vi.^ fua, handika; vt.y
xlha.
(as fire-wood), v/., caba.
(as friendship), xlha with bu-
luiida(6) or bunyana(6).
down, be exhausted, v»., hanga;
vt.y hangixa.
in, as thief, vt.y handa.
loose, vi., tuka; vt.^ tula.
wind, ela inuxa(2).
Breakfast, «., bldla (pi. of 7) bla
dlnda(s).
Breast, «. (chest), cladl, 7.
(heart, conscience), muoyo, 2;
mudma, 2.
Breast {continued),
(teat), dlbele, 5.
Breath, n., muhuya, 2.
blow the, ela muhuya.
draw the, eyela or koka or huCa
with muhuya.
Breathe, v»., eyela.
(pant), huyakana, eyakana. .
Breeches, n., muh&nu, 2; mu-
klya, 2. The pi. is generally
used in each case.
Breed, vt.^ Imlclxa.
Brew, vt.y enga.
Bribe, vt., futa.
n., dlfutu, 5.
Brick, n., kaxola, 8.
Bride, n., mubftklbul, i. From
pass, b&klbua, to he married.
Bridegroom, n., mub&kl, i. This
word is generally followed by
the ph. wa muk&xl.
Bridge, n., dlamba, 7; cllanda, 7;
dlsfike, 5.
Briefly, adv. {to speak briefly), us^
neg. of lunguluka.
Brigand, »., munyengl, i.
Bright, ac'j. (smart), -a hingen-
yl(4); -a mexl (pi. of 5); -a
lukanyl(Buk.), 4.
be, vi.{io glisten, shine), enge-
lela, balakana.
Brighten, v/.(make to shine),
balakAxa, engelexa.
(whiten), tokexa.
Brightness, n. (intelligence), lun-
genyl, 4; mexl, pi. of 5;
lukaiiyl(Buk.), 4.
(of color), butoke, 6.
(of moon), dlkenka, 5.
(of sun), munya, 2.
Brim, n., mubangu, 2; mulemu
(mulomio), 2; muxuku, 2.
Bring, vt.^ lua ne.
about, to cause, use Causative
Form of verb,
(accompany, conduct), flla.
back, aluklta, tuclxa, hlnglxa.
(carry), tuala.
forth, lela( woman), kuama(tree),
lka(cassava, potatoes, etc.).
158
BRING— BUSH.
Bring (continued).
out, umuxa, h&tala, luhula.
to mind, Tulula, Tuluxa.
to, resuscitate, sanguluxa, tuyi-
xa, fulula.
up, rear, dlxa, kftlexa.
water, suna.
Brink, n.(cliff), clbungubungu, 7*
(beach), muelelu(2) wa ml.
Broad, a<f;.(large), nine.
Broaden, 2;/., dlundlxa, lundlxa.
Brood, z;.(as hen), ladlla.
over, bungama.
Brook, n., musulu, 2.
Broom, n., lukombo, 4.
Broth, n., musoxl, 2; mukele-
kele, 2; n8upu(Eng.), 3-
Brother, «., there is no general
name for brother save the in-
definite ph. muan'etu mulumi,
etc. § 138, Rem. 5, Note 2.
(elder), mukulu, i,
(younger), muakunyl, i.
The words mukulu and mua-
kunyl are generally followed
by the poss. pro. as enclitic.
§ 138, Rem. 2.
Brother-in-law, «. (brother or
sister of wife), bukonde, i.
(brother or sister of husband),
mbI-(poss. pro.)-cina. §§ 138,
R m. 3 and Note; 42, Note 2.
Bro>v, «. (forehead), mp&la, 3.
eye-, dlklkl, 5.
knit the, vph.^ nyenga or fudlka
with mp&la(3).
Brown, adj.y kunze, kunzublle,
kunzuluke. These words are
p.p. from the verbs kunza,
kunzublla and kunzuluka.
Brush, «. (broom), lukombo, 4.
-wood, cisala, 7.
V. (sweep), komba.
(as clothes), kuhula.
Brushwood, «., cisala, 7.
Brutal, adj.y -a lukuna, 4; -a
dnyangru, 7.
Brutality, n., lukuna, 4; cln-
yangu, 7.
Brute, «.(animal), nyAma, 3.
(person), muena(i) with luku-
na(4) or clnyangu(7).
Bubble, n., lututu, 4; lukende, 4.
Bubo, n., cluxa, 7.
Bud, n.y lutonga, 4; musele, 2.
vi., m#na, samplla, toloka,
tempela.
Buffalo, «., mbowo, 3.
Bug, w.(generic), clxl, 7.
Bugle, n., mpungl, 3.
Build, vt.y Ibftka, asa (see under
asa in B.L.-Eng.).
Building, ». (house), nsubu, 3.
BuLL,n.,muluml(i) wangombe(3)
Bullet, »., lutende, 4; mute-
lenge, 2; mutelenge(2) wa
Iutende(4).
Bunch, «.(of bananas), dlbote, 5.
(of plantains), dlkuonde, 5.
(hand of bananks or plantains), *
clsangi, 7.
(of palm nuts), clngftji, 7.
(of things tied together), clsum-
bu, 7.
Bundle, ».(bale), dlkutu, 5.
(of grass or other material tied
up), clsumbu, 7.
(roll), muTungu, 2.
(small), mubombo, 2.
Burden, «., see load.
Burn, vt.y oxa, hlxa; vi., hia.
(roast), oxa.
(scorch, as food), vt., xldlxa,
lunguxa; vi., xila, lungula.
(set on fire), oxa.
(singe), vt.y babula; vi.y babuka.
(smart), oxa, hlakana, susuma.
Burnt offering, w., see sacrifice.
Burrow, v., Imba, umbula.
Burst, vt.y handlxa, taylxa(to«
ylxa); vi., handlka, taylka
(toyika).
(crack, as nuts), vt.y bfila, bula,
bosa, totobula, taya (toya).
Bury, vt.y Jlka.
Bush, «. (forest), dltu, 5. PI.
metu.
(copse on plain), clhuka, 7.
BUSHMAN— CARDINAL
159
Bushman, n., musenxl, i. An
imported word.
Business, ^.(occupation), mudl-
mu, 2.
(affair), bualu, 6; muandai 2.
Busy, be, v., di ne mudimu(2).
But, conj., tadl, kadi. These
words are not used as fre-
quently as the English equiva-
lent.
Butt end, n., cltaku, 7; also the
loc. word kuntaku, § 423 (2)
(6).
Butter, nph,, mlnyi (pi. of 5) a
ngonibe(3), manteke (pi. of
Butterfly, «., dblyibiyi, 7.
Buttock, n.,dltenKe, 5; dltaku,5.
Button, n., mbote, 3.
-hole, di8u(5) dia mbote.
Buy, vi.f ula, sumba.
(buy and sell, trade), enda or
endulula with inuxliiga(2).
By, prep. (near to), ku, kunxl, ha
bulhi(6) ne, hehi, kulhl.
(agent), kudi.
Cachle, vph.f tuta or ela with
mukuekue(2).
Case, n., mus&sa, 2.
(pen), elkumbi, 7.
CALABiiTY, nph.y biialu(6) with the
adjectives bubi or bukille.
Calf, »., muan'a ngombe(3).
of leg, dlfu(5) dlamukolo(2).
Call, v., biklla.
(by beckoning with hand), loba.
one's name behind one's back,
tela.
to fight, kobola.
tomind, vf'., vuluka; i;^.,vulula,
Yuluxa.
(to name), Idlka, Inylka.
Calling, ^.(occupation), mudlmu,
2.
Calm, se, vi,, hola, talala, dl with
hola or talala as advs.
Calmly, adv., hola, talala!
Calumniate, v., songuela, banda.
Calumniator, w., muena(i) with
bunsonge(6) or mukosa(2).
Calumny, n., bunsonge, 6; mu*
kosa, 2
Camel, »., kamelo(£ng.), 8.
Camwood, n., kakula, 8.
Can, n., luhansa, 4.
v.(be able), see § 230.
Cancel, z;/.(blot out),Jlmlxa, Jlma.
Candle, n., kahla, 8; kadllu, 8;
mulnda(muendu), 2. This
last word is perhaps from the
Lower Congo.
Cane, n., sugar-, muenge, 2; cl-
lengelenge, 7.
walking, cibangu, 7.
Cannibal, n., mudlanganyi, i.
Cannon, n., ditende, 5.
Canoe, «., buatu, 6.
Canvas, «.(for wrapping around
bales), dlkutu, 5.
Caoutchouc, «., ndunda, 3.
Cap, «.(for head), elf ula, 7.
(percussion), lufataci, 4.
Capable, be, vi.(he able), m&nya
or dl or mona followed by mua
and infin., see § 230.
Capital, «.(very large village),
clmenga, 7; clhunda, 7.
Capsize, vi., Iclklla; vi., Iclklxa.
Captain, »., kapiten(from French
or Eng.).
Captious, be, v., tontolola.
Capture, vt., kuata.
Caravan nph., batuadl(i) ba
blntu(7) mu nxila(3).
Carcass, w.(dead body of person),
clt&lu, 7; niaxangi(Buk.)) 2.
(skeleton), use pi. of words for
bone, mlfuba, mikuha, ml-
fufa.
Cardinal points, n. The natives
have no names for these. For
brevity and convenience in
teaching, the following nativ-
ized Eng. words are suggested:
North, n., Nttta, 3.
South, n., Sauta, 3.
i6o
CARDINAL— CAUTIOUS.
Cardinal points (cotuinued) ,
East, n., Islta, 3.
West, »., Weslta* 3.
For East we may also have the
ph. Imtu Imaluhuka dlba or
Imtii kuah&tuka dlba.
For West we may also have the
ph. kutu kuabuela dlba or
kutu dlba dlabuela.
Care, ^.(affair, concern), baala, 6;
muanda, 2.
(attend), Iftma.
for, vt,. nanga* sua ha luse (4).
Carefully, adv.. bttekete, bla-
kane, bimbe, bltulu.
Careless, be, vi., cimba, cimba-
kana, humbakana.
Carelessly, adv., blkftle, lubilu,
luktksa, bibl.
Caress, vt,, hotela, hunbakana,
bomba.
Carnal, adj,, -a muciina(2) mubi.
knowledge, n., masandl, pi. of 5
or 6.
Carpenter, nph., muena(i) ma-
blya (pi. of dlblya, 5).
The term kaplta(8) is used for,
the West Coast men. The
word is from the Portuguese,
meaning headman.
Carriage, n., sugeest some such
ph. as cintu(7) clkoka kudl
tub&lu (pi. of kab&lu, 8).
Carrier, nph., mutuadi(i) wa
bintii.
Carry, vt.^ tuala, mfima, angata,
ya ne, lua ne.
across a stream, etc., sabula.
water, suna.
Cartridge, n., mutelenge, 2.
(ball),mutelenge wa lutende(4).
(loaded with shot), mutelenge
wa tundimba (pi. of 8).
Carve, vt.{as meat), seya, saya.
(as wood), songa.
Carver, «.(of wood, etc.), mu-
songi, I.
Case, n.(affair), bualu, 6; muan-
da, 2.
(box), mux£te, 2.
Case {continued),
(sheath for knife), cibubu, 7;
luhaha, 4; clmanga, 7.
Cassava, n., clombe, 7.
(leaves of, used as greens), ma-
tamba (pi. of 5), kalexl(8).
to soak the, vt,, Ina, sablka.
the unsoaked, clombe cla mpete
(pi. of 4). ,
Cast, v^. (about, scatter), tanga-
Ilixa, tangadlxa; vi., tanga-
llika, tangadlka.
away, as useless, Imflxa, sum-
bula, nyflka.
leaves, hohoka.
out, vt.y h&tula, luhula, mnuxa,
tambuIa(Buk.); Vf., h&tuka,
luhuka, iimnka, tambuka
(Buk.).
(throw), ela.
Castrate, vt.y tangala, haknla.
Cat, n.(wild-), mb&lab&la, 3.
(domestic), kamblxl, 8; mpua
(Eng.), 3.
Cataract, »., clblla, 7.
Catch, v/., kuata.
(by throwing hands down on),
uhuklla.
disease, the person catching the
disease is the obj. of the verb
kuata, while the disease is the
subj.
(in hands, as ball), akldlla.
(to snare), teya.
(with hook, as fish), loha.
Catechism, n^A.,mukanda (2) wa
dllongexa(5).
Catechumen, n., miuena(i) dllon-i
gexa(5).
Caterpillar, «.(edible), dlxl, 5.
PI. is mexl.
(not edible), clxl, 7.
Cause, n., bualu, 6; muanda, 9.
vt.j use the Causative Form of
verb,
(for what cause ?), see WHY?
without, cinana, hatuhn.
Caution, vL, dlmuxa.
Cautious, be, w'., dlmuka.
CAVE— CHATTERING.
i6i
Cave, n., lubingra, 4; lubuo, 4.
in, tH., bumbuka.
Cavil, v., tontolola.
Cease, vi., from, lekela.
raining, tangadikaortangalAka
with nvula as subj.
Ceaselessly, adv. This idea may,
according to sense, be ex-
pressed in several ways:
(i) By the adv. to.
(2) By one of th^ Repetitive
tenses. §§ 287-292.
(3) By tile Pres. Habitual tense.
(4) By the verb in -akana. § 339.
(5) By the verbal suffix in lu-.
§ 356 (d), Rem. i.
(6) By the phs. matuku (pi. of 5)
onso, ku dituku ku dituku,
ku dlci(5) ku dlci.
(7) In sense of forever^ by l&ha-
l&ha, cendelele, kaxidl.
Celestial, adj., -a diulu(5).
Cbmetery, »., use pi. of lukita(4)
or clduaya(7).
Censure, vt,, dlula, nyoka.
Centipede, n., lumlnylmlnyi, 4.
Centre, n., mu bunlne(6); also
the insep. loc. words munk&ci,
kunktkci, hankAci, munkulu.
§ 423 (2) (b).
Certain, see certainly.
Certainly, adv., use the substan-
tive forms bulilela, buxua,
bualabuala, buinabuina, bui-
ktlxa.
Certainty, n., bulilela, 6; buxua,
6; bualabuala, 6; buina-
buina, 6; bulkftxa, 6.
Certify, v., amba.
Chaff, n.(o{ com, rice, etc.),
clsote, 7.
Chagrin, »., bundu, 6; bunvu, 6.
(cause one chagrin), vt. ufulxa
bundu.
have, v., ufua or unva with
bundu.
Chain, »., lukanu, 4.
vt.y ela mu lukanu.
Chair, »., nkuasa, 3.
Chalk, »., luhemba, 4.
Chamber, n., nsubu, 3.
See ROOM.
Chameleon, n., lungonyonyl, 4.
Change, v/. (alternate), xlntakftxa*
tompakanya, tompakAxa,
xlntakanya; in., tompakana,
xlntakana.
(act of metempsychosis), lengu-
luka, sansruka, tanda.
(become different, be trans-
formed), vi., kudlmuka, an-
damuka.
(exchange, trade), xlntaktlxa,
xlnta, xlntakana, xlntakan-
ya, hlngakanya, hingakana,
sombakfixa, hlngakftxa.
mind, vt., kudlmuna or anda-
muna with muclma(2) or
muoyo(2).
(turn around or over), vt,, kudl-
muna, andamuna; v«., kudl-
muka, andamuka.
Character, n., see kind.
Charcoal, n., dlkala.
Charge, vHask a price), lomba.
deny a, vUa.
Chariot, »., see carriage.
Charity, «.(pity), luse, 4.
In expression "faith, hope, char-
ity," it is perhaps best to use
infin. kunanga, kusua, etc.
(generosity), dlha, 5.
Charm, «., see medicine.
Chase, vt., away, Ih&ta.
out, luhula, imiuxa, h&tula,
tambula(Buk.).
(hunt with dogs), ta.
Chaste, adj.{giood), Impe, akane,
lengele.
be, vi,, ena ne masandl (pi. of 5
or 6).
Chasten, vt., see chastise.
Chastise, vt., kuma, tuta, ken-
gexa.
Chastisement, n., dlkengexa, 5.
Chatter, v.(speak rapidly), laba-
kana.
Chattering, n., clakulakula
§356(^).
1 62
CHEAP— CLAPPING.
Cheap, adj, ph., -a iiiuxlnKa(2)
mutekete.
Cheapen, v/.(bring down price),
tekexa or huekexa with mu-
xinKa(2).
Cheat, v.(steal), Iba.
Check, v/.(stop), lekexa.
Cheek, n., ditama, 5.
Cheer, v/. (console), samba, kft-
lexa mueiina(2), bomba.
(give alarum), ela bila (pi. of
eila, 7), blnglla.
(make glad), sanklxa.
Cheese, «., cisl(Eng.), 7- § 55»
Rem. 2, Note 2.
Chest, n.(box), muxfite, 2.
(of body), ciadi, 7.
Chew, v/., botexa.
(as bones or dried corn), bele-
keta.
(with unpleasant noise), tan-
funya.
Chicken, »., nsolo, 3.
Chief, n., mukelengre, i; tatu, i;
nfiunu, I.
Chiefship, n., bakelenge, 6; bun-
fumu, 6.
Child, n., muana, i.
(about three or four years old),
citendi, 7.
(be with), dl ne with difu(5) or
diml(5), Imlta.
(be with by, beget), imiclxa.
(first-bom), muan'a bute(6) .
(last bom), muan'a mukala(2)
or muan'a lukala(4).
(new-bom), katoto, 8.
own, muana mulela.
(still-bom, foetus), kana (dimin.
of muana) kabtxe.
Child-bearing, n., lulelu, 4; bu-
ledi, 6.
Childhood, n., buana, 6.
Childless woman, n., nkumba, 3.
Chilliness, «., dtelele, 7; claxi-
ma, 7; maxlka, pi. of 5 or 6.
Chilly, adj., see cold.
Chin, »., eibanga, 7; lubanga, 4.
Chip, n., clta&tu, 7.
CmROGRAFHY, w., cifundldi, 7.
Choir, »., kuIa(Eng.), 3.
Choke, vph.{yf ith food), kuata ha
withmumlnu(2) or diminu(5).
(throttle), vt., flekela nxlnsu(3).
Choose, vt., snngula.
Chop, v/.(as wood), kosa, kali^
t&ha, kuota.
into small pieces, to hash, sasa.
».(food), bldia, pi. of 7; bia
kudia.
Chorus, n.^ koluB(Eng,), 3.
Christ, n., Kalistu (Kallsitu).
Christian, nph., muntu(i) wa
Nsambi.
Christianity, nph., bualu(6) bua
Nsambi.
Christhas day, nph,, dltiika(5)
dla Santa Kllis.
Church, «.(building), nsubu(3)
wa Nzambi.
members of the, bantu ba Nsam-
bi.
Cicatrice, n., cibangu, 7.
Circle, n., eijengu, 7; clfundu,
7; citanga, 7.
go around in a, v., nyunguluka.
Circular, adj., -a cijengu(7); -a
cifundu(7); -a citanga(7).
Circumcise, vi., tengula.
be circumcised, use passive fonns
of tengula. § 202.
CiRCXTMSTANCE, n,, bualu, 6;
muanda, 2.
Citizen, n., muena, i.
fellow, muan'etu, etc; mnena
kuetu, etc.; mukuetu, i, etc.
City, n., musoko, 2; ditnnga, 5.
(large collection of villages),
cimenga, 7; cihnnda, 7.
Civil, adj., -a kalolo(8).
CiviLrrY, n., kalolo, 8.
Clan, n., see tribe.
Clap, n.(of thunder), dikubakuba,
5-
V.J the hands, tuta or kuma with
luk1ixl(4).
the hand crosswise in expression
of regret, tuta cibubu(7).
Clapping, n., of the hands, lukftzl,
4; cibubu, 7.
CLASP— CLOTHES.
163
Clasp, ?;/. (embrace), uhukila.
(catch in the hands), akidlla.
hands, kuatangana ku bianza
(pi. of 7).
Class, n., catechumen, dilongexa
5-
(group), disanza,5; cisumbu, 7.
See KIND.
Claw, n., luz&la, 4; luz&dl, 4;
luala, 4.
Clay, n.(xor making pots), dlbum-
ba, 5; dima, 5 (the pi. is
mema).
white, used for whitewashing,
iuhemba, 4.
Clean, cuij.y toke (p.p. of toka, to
be clean); impe; pass. p.p. of
verbs UTua, sukala (Lower
Congo), kuhula.
person, -a mankenda (pi. of 5
or 6).
v.(to whiten), tokexa.
(to rub or brush), kuhula.
(to wash), uTua, sukula.
Cleanliness, n.(oi person), man-
kenda, pi. of 5 or 6.
Cleanness, w.( whiteness), butoke,
6.
Cleanse, v/.(as clothes, etc.), uvua,
sukula (Lower Congo),
(give a bath), owexa.
Clear, vt.j a field, sola.
away, umuxa.
away, as sweeping, boya.
vi.j away as mist or cloud, tanga-
lAka, sanguluka.
a<f;. (transparent), toke (p.p. of
toka, to be white).
Cleave, vi. (stick together), i&m&-
ta, kuatakana.
v/.(split), handa.
Clench, vph.^ the fist, tonya minu
(pi. of 2). .
Clever, arf;., -a lungenyi(4), -a
mexi (pi. of 5).
The phrases di ne muhongo(2)
and dl ne buloxi(6) have the
secondary meaning of clever^
ingenious^ etc.
Cleverness, «., lungenyi, 4;
mexi, pi. of 5 ; lukanyl(Buk.),
4; muhongo(2) and buloxi(6)
also have a secondary meaning
corresponding to cleverness,
dexterity y etc.
Click, vi.{?j& gun), aba.
(in the throat to indicate anger),
sodia.
Cliff, «.(a great depression formed
by landslide), lubuyl, 4; cibu-
yubuyu, 7.
(near to water), cibungubungu,
7-
Climb, vi., a tree or hill, ban da.
(as vine), lamba.
Clock, n., diba, 5. PI. is meba.
This word is used because the
clock indicates the position of
the sun.
(o'clock), for divisions of the day
and night, see day.
Clod, «., dibu, 5.
Close, vt (as box, book), buikila.
(as bracelet), bangika.
(as door), inxila, xiblka.
(as eyes), bulka ku mesu.
(as path, so no one can pass),
nyanga, ona.
(near to), see by.
(stand or be close together), vi.
ImQnangana, kuatakana.
See together.
Closeness, «. (nearness), buihl, 6.
Cloth, n., cilulu, 7; cllamba, 7,
There are different names for
the various kinds of European
cloth; as, cimaza(7), dllesa(5),
kakangala(8), kandolo(8),
mungulumungu(2), ndunga
(3), kandangama(8).
(native cloth made from the
palm), didlba, 5; cinsanki, 7;
mpualala, 3.
(small piece of cloth worn in
front and behind), lubondla, 4.
Clothe, vt.y luacika, luacixa,
Tuadika.
Clothes, n., bllulu, bllamba
Both pi. of 7.
1 64
CLOUD— COME.
Cloud, n., dituta, 5; dlbuba, 5.
(not heavy), dululu, 7.
Cloudy, be, vt. (threaten rain),
flnda.
Cloven foot, n., mukono(2) mu-
handike.
Coagulate, vi.y kuatakana.
Coal, n., dikala, 5.
oil, petroleum, inpltolo(£ng.), 3.
Coast, «., inuelelu(2) or musa-
la(2) or bucika(6) or the loca-
tive words kukala, kusula,
kunfudila, kusala, all fol-
lowed by the adj. ph. -a ml.
Coat, n., clkowela, 7; kasaku, 8;
cinkutu, 7.
v.{as paint), whitewash, laba.
Coax, z;/., sengela, sengelela.
Cob, n., clkumbuxi, 7; clkiunbu-
kumbu, 7.
Cobweb, n., buntate, 0; buta-
tande, 6; bukuondo, 6.
Cock, ». (rooster), citlla, 7.
(first cock to crow in the morn-
ing), citlla clbedl.
vt.f gun, baDgula.
CocKCROWiNG, «/>A.(dawn), hadl
hasama nsolo, ha bitlla.
Cockroach, n., luhenzu, 4.
Cocoa, «. koko(£ng.), 3.
Coerce, v/., use Causative Form of
verb.
Coffee, n., kafl(Eng.), 3 or 8.
Cohabit, v., luma, lala ne, lu-
mlxa, tentemexa.
Coil, v/., vunglla, Jinglla, Jinga,
vunga, nyengela.
Coin, n., mpalata, 3.
Cola, nut, «., diku, 5. These are
eaten with the palm wine.
Cold, adj.^ -a maxika (pi. of 5 or
6), -a citelele(7), -a cla-
xlma(7).
be or feel, vph.^ maxika as sub-
ject of v. kuata with person as
object, or the person as subject
of V. unva with maxika as
object,
(be not warmed ),v«.,*talala, hole.
make, vL, talfixa, liolexa.
Cold {continued),
n.(a cough), lukosolo, 4.
(catarrh in nose), cimpumpu, 7.
Coldness, n., maxika, pi. of 5 or 6;
citelele (citalele), 7; cia-
xima, 7.
Collect, vt., tutakanya, tuta-
kilza, sanglxa, sambakanya,
sambakfixa, sangakanya,
sangakAxa, kungixa, sangi-
la, sanga.
Collide, v., kumangana, tutan-
gana.
Color, n., mubidi, 2.
There are only three definite
words expressing color, viz.,
toke(white), flke(black),
kan*e(red). These are really
past participles derived from
the verbs toka, flka, kunza,
respectively. From the three
words above mentioned are
derived words which express
the intermediate colors as fol-
lows:
(blue, green), flkuluke.
(brown, yellow), kunsubile, kun-
zulake.
(gi'^y)) tokoloke.
Sometimes blue and green are
represented by flke, yellow and
brown by kunze.
(spotted), di ne matoba(pl. of 5)
or dl ne mab&xi (pi. of 5).
(striped), di nemlhola (pi. of 2).
Comb, n., clsaku, 7; cisamuinu, 7.
of fowl, mualala, 2.
of honey, dikacl, 5; dihula, 5.
vl.j samuna.
Combine, vi.y sangixa, sangakan-
ya, sangaktixa, sangila, san-
ga, tutakanya, tutakdxa,
sambakanya, sambakAxa;
vi., sangakana, sambakana,
tutakana.
Come, v.y lua.
after, follow, londa.
around to other side, luila.
(arrive at), flka.
COME— CONCEIT.
I6S
Come (continued).
back, aluka, aluklla, hingana,
tuta, taclla, andamuka.
down, tuluka, Ika.
from, lua with proper locative,
fuma.
in, into, buela.
into view, mueneka, mueka.
off, as skin, l&muka, huluka.
out, as blade out of handle, kuka.
out of, luhaka, umuka, h&tuka.
out of place, tuka.
over, as water, sabuka.
past, hita, tamba.
slowly, stealthily, onguela.
to consciousness, fululuka.
together, sangakana, tutakana,
laa clsumbu(7), dianguixa,
disanga, sambakana, kunga-
kana, dikunga.
to mind, vuluka.
with, accompany, flla.
Comfort, ^/.(console), samba,
bomba, klilexamucinia(2).
(when crying), kosexa or huixa
with inuadl(2).
Command, v., amba, amblla, tu-
mlna dl (5).
not, prohibit, kanda.
n.y see commandment.
Commandment, n., dl, 5. PL isme.
(negative), makandu, 2.
(positive), makenjl, 2.
Commence, v., again, tuadixa,
baaglla.
to do, banga.
Commend, vt., Inyixa.
Commingle, vt.^ baelakana.
Commit, v. (do), enza, osa, klxa
(Buk.).
adultery, enda masandl (pi. of
5 or 6), sanda.
rap)e, kuata mukaxi(i) ku bu-
kftle(6).
suicide, dixiha, dlowa(by hang-
ing).
Common, adj.(be of little account),
-a cToana, -a hatubu, -a b£.
have things in, vph.^ sanglxa
bintu.
Commotion, «. (disturbance), diyo-
yo, 5-
Communion, w.(Lord's Supper),
bidia (pi. of 7) bla Nzambl.
wine, ml a Nzambi.
Companion, n., mulunda, i ; nya-
11(a), i; miuan'etu, etc., §138,
Rem. 5.
Companionship, n., bulunda, 6;
bunyana, 6.
Company, «.(crowd), dsumbu, 7.
Compare, vi., idikixa, elekexa.
Compassion, n., luse, 4.
feel, v.f ufua, or unva with luse.
have for, ha luse, samba.
Compel, v., use Causative Form of
verb.
Compensate, vt.y futa.
Compensation, n., dlfutu, 5.
Competent, be, v.(able), m&nyaor
dl or mona followed by mua
and infin. § 230.
Complain, v., about, tontolola.
of before another, songuela.
Complaint, «.(have against one),
bualu, 6, muanda, 2. Ndl
n'ebi bualu, / have a com-
plaint against you.
Complete, be, w. (exact number),
ula, xlka. Clnunu with dule
or clxlke, an exact thousand,
vt.f mAna, m&nyixa, xlkixa,
hluxa; vi.y hua, xlka.
(full quantity or measure, be),
vi.y kumbana, Tula; vt., kum-
b&xa, vudixa.
adj., xila, kanda.
Compliment, vt., Inyixa.
Compliments, «., muoyo, 2.
give, v., ha or ela or cbexa with
muoyo(2).
Comprehend, v. (hear), unya.
(known), mftnya.
Compress, vt., kama, mata.
(press down), bambila, nyeme-
nena, xindika.
Conceal, vt.y sokoka; vi.y soko*
ma.
Concede, v.. Itabuxa.
Conceit, ». (pride), disanka, 5.
i66
CONCEITED— CONSENT.
Conceited, be, vi. (proud), disua.
Conceive, v., imlta with difu(5)
or diiiii(5). This latter word
seems to be used only of
women,
cause to, imicixa.
(think), ela or elangana fol-
lowed by Iungeiiyl(4) or mexl
(pi. of 5) or muclma(2).
Concern, n.(matter), bualu, 6;
muanda, 2.
Concerning, prep.y bualu(6) bua.
Conciliate, vt., sung^a.
Conclude, v. (come to same con-
clusion after consultation),
di(5) dlakuakanangana di-
mue, hunguluxa di, akftxa
me.
(finish), mUna, manyixa, xl-
klxa, huixa.
(resolve), amba.
Concourse, n. (crowd), cisumbu, 7.
Concubine, «. (general term for
wife), mukdxi, i.
(first concubine taken), cilon-
de(7) maadl(2).
Condemn, v/., hlxa.
(be condemned, convicted), vi.y
hlla.
(not to praise), vt., diula, nyoka.
Condemnation, «.(doom), mulau,
2.
Condition, «., suggest infin. kul-
k&Ia.
Conduct, vt.y flla, xindikixa, ya
De, lombola.
n., cilele, 7; clenzedi, 7; clbl-
lu, 7.
Conductor, «. (leader), mulom-
bodi, i; mudianjldl, i.
Confer, i'.(give an oflSce to), ha
or dlxa followed by abstract
name of ofl5ce.
together, ela clfufu(7).
Conference, ^.(private), cifufu,
7.
Confess, v., itabuxa, sokola, ton-
da, dlsonguela.
Confidence, have in, v/., teke-
mena.
Confluence, n.,di8aiigu, 5. Gen-
erally used in pi.
Conform to, v.(be like), fuanan-
gana, akanangana, dieleka.
Confound, 7;/.,buandaktixa,buaii-
dakanya, tuhakilxa, tuha-
kanya; vi.y tahakana, buan-
dakana.
Confuse, v/., buandakAxa, buan-
dakanya, tuhakfixa, tuha-
kanya; vi., tuhakana, buan-
dakana.
(miss path), hambuka.
(put in disorder), tangadixa,
tangalAxa, muanga, muan-
galOxa; vi.y tangadika, tan-
galAka, muangaltlka.
Confusion,* w.(noise), dlyoyo, 5.
be in, vi., tangadika, tangalftka,
muangaiaka.
put in, vt., tangadixa, tanga-
IQxa, muangalAxa.
Congeal, v., kuatakana.
Congo Independent State Gov-
ernment, with all oflBcials, «.,
Bula Matadi (Lower Congo).
Congratulate, vt., sekelela.
Congregate, vi., sangakana, tu-
takana, lua cisumbu(7), di-
sanga, dlunguixa. kunga-
kana, sambakana, dikunga.
Congregation, «.(crowd), cisum-
bu, 7.
Conjure, ^/.(bewitch) lowa.
(divine), buka, tern pa, tempexa.
(do sleight-of-hand trick), enza
dijimbu(5).
Conjurer, «., see sorcerer.
Conquer, vt., hita or tamba fol-
lowed by bukttle(6) or ngu-
lu(3); cimuna.
Conscience, n., mucima, 2; muo-
yo, 2.
Conscious, of v., mUnya, unva,
ufua.
Consecrate, vt., see sanctify.
Consent, v., itabuxa.
See permission.
C ONSEQUENCE— CON VULSE.
167
Consequence, n., of no, kakuena
baala(6); -a cinana; -a
hatuhu.
Consequently, adv., see there-
fORE.
Consider, v., ~ela or elangana fol-
lowed by lun8renyi(4) or
mcxl(5) or muclma(2) or
lukaiiyl(4).
. (reckon), amba.
Consistent, adj, ph., -a dl(5)
dlmiie.
Console, i*/., samba, kftlexa mu-
clina(2), bomba.
(when crying), kosexa or hulxa
with muadi(2).
Conspicuous, be, v».(be seen),
mueka, mueneka.
Conspiracy, »., clfufu(7) clbl.
Conspire, v., ela clfufu(7) clbi.
Constantly, adv,, see ceaseless-
ly.
Constipation, n., clnyenga, 7.
(be constipated), v., nyenga with
munda as subj., di ne cin-
Tenga.
Constrain, ?;/. (hinder), humblza,
humbak&xa, kosexa; vi.,
humba.
(cause to do), use Causative Form
of verb.
Construct, v/. (build), ibikka, asa
(see note in B.L.-Eng.).
(make), enza, osa, klxa.
Consult, vi., for advice, konka,
ebexa.
medicine man, tempa, tempexa,
buka, nua clala(7).
together secretly, ela clfufu(7).
Consultation, «., secret, clfufu, 7.
Consume, v/., oxa.
(be consumed by fire), hla.
(be finished), xika, hua.
(spend, eat up), dia.
Contagious, be, vi,, tampakana,
ambuluklla, sambuluklla.
Contain, vi., dl ne.
Content, be, vLy sanka, muci-
ma(2) udl with mutalale or
muhole.
Content, be {continued).
The last two words are p.p. of
talala and hola.
Contention, «.(dispute), luh&ta,
4.
have a, dl ne or ela or elangana
with mp&ta (pi.).
Contentment, n., dlsanka, 5.
Contiguous, be, vt., tuangana,
kuatakana.
Continually, adv,, see cease-
lessly.
Continue, v.(reside), Ik&la.
(persevere), use neg. of lekela or
hanga, or Pres. Habitual
tense.
Contract, «.(a secret agreement),
clfufu, 7.
make a, v.', hunga dl(i;).
a written, mukanda, 2.
(shorten), vU, llilhlxa, kehexa.
(as a bug when touched), vi.
fulama.
Control, v/.(as mother a child),
buluklla, samlna, b£la, nan*
sa.
Controversy, «., luh&ta, 4.
engage in a, v.^ dl ne or ela or
elangana followed by mp&ta
(pi.).
settle a, v., tulxa.
Convalesce, vi., sang&la, kiksa
niubidl(2), santpiluka.
Converge, vi., sambakana, sanga-
kana, sangila.
Conversation, n., muaku, 2.
hold a, v., somba.
Converse, vi., somba.
Convert, vt., kudlmuna, anda-
muna.
(be converted in religious sense),
kudimuka muntu(i) wa
Nsambl.
n., muntu wa Nsambl.
Convict, vt., hlxa.
(be convicted), vi., hlla.
Convince, vt., itabuxixa.
Convulse, vt.(to have a fit), ha-
luka, fua with cls£ke(7) ot
tungulungu (pi. of 8).
i6S
CONVULSION— COUGH.
Convulsion, n.(fit), cis«ke, 7;
tungulungu, pi. of 8; nkoyl,
3. The latter word is u^
only of children.
Cook, v., lamba, Ihlka.
(be haJf cooked), tnya.
(boil, stew), tumpa.
(dry by fiie, as meat), Injika,
nanga(nana).
(try), kansa.
(roast in a pot, as com, peanuts,
etc.), kanga.
i roast in fire), oxa.
with seasoning, such as salt, pep-
per, oil, etc.), lungra.
n., kukii(Eng.), inulambi(i),
maihlki(i).
house, kitchen, clkuku(£ng.), 7.
Cool, see cold.
Coolness, »., see coldness.
Copper, i»., ciania(7) ctknnse.
Sometimes clombo(7) seems
to be used for copper, but this
latter word may mean either
copper or iron made into
crosses. Note that clama
means either iron or copper,
the distinction being made with
the adjectives flke and knnse,
respectively.
Copse, n., cihuka, 7.
Copulate, v., luma, Imnlza, ten-
temeza, lala ne.
Copy, »., cldiklxilu, 7; clmon-
jfnUf 7; cilexilu, 7; cldlki-
xu, 7^ luedl, 4; luelekexl, 4;
luldl, 4.
v., Idlklxa, elekexa.
Cord, »., muoxi, 2; muxiiiKa, 2.
Cork, ».(stopper of bottle), clxl-
blku, 7; clbuiku, 7; dbul-
kllu, 7.
Corn, ». (maize), dianva, 5; di-
t&la, 5. Generally usea in pi.
to express quantity. Dianva
and dit&la mean one ear of
com,
cob of, clkumbuxl, 7; ellnmi-
bukmnbu, 7.
shuck of, cihusu, 7.
Corn (continued),
silk of, beard, manyanTudl, 2.
•talk of, cikolakola, 7; lubala-
bala, 4; musengeleke, 2.
tassel of, luseba, 4.
Corner, n., of house, ditumba, 5.
Cornet, n., mpansi, 3.
Corpse, n., cit&lu, 7; muxangi
(Buk.), 2.
Corpxtlent, grow, vi., dinnda,
Innda.
Correct, adj., Impe, akane, len-
gele, o-umue, muomumue
(adv.)
i;.(rebuke), b^la, nanga.
(scold), samina, bulukila.
Correctly, a^v.( truly), bnUlela,
biilnabuina,bualabaala, bui-
ktkxa, buxua. These words
are really adjectives with
bualu(6) understood,
(rightly), blmpe, blakane.
Correctness, n., see truth.
Correspond to, vi., fuana, fuan-
angana, akana, akanangana
dleleka, dl with bu or bulna.
(write to each other), fundllan-'
gana mikanda (pi. of 2).
Corrode, i;.(rust), knata dime-
ma(5).
Corrosion, n.(rustK dlmoma, 5.
Corrupt, adj.(haa^, bl.
(be rotten), vUf bola.
(make rotten), v/., bolexa.
(make to go bad), v^., ona,
nyanga; vi,, onoka, nyan-
guka.
(spoil, as a child), vt,, Ibldlxa
bualu(6) bubl.
Corruption, n. (badness), bubl, 6.
Cost, n.(price), muxlnga, 2.
Costive, be, v., dl ne clnyenga(7),
nyenga mnnda.
CosnvENESs, »., see constipation.
Costly, adj,, -a muxlnga (2) mu«
kftle.
Cotton, n., buanda, 6.
Couch, n,, bulalu, 6.
Cough, n., lukosolo, 4.
v., kosola.
COULD— CRANE.
169
Could, v., see able. Use the
proper past tense.
Council, n., cilumbu, 7.
(hold a council or court), v.,
Imnbulttla, zainbala(Buk.).
Councilor, ».(attomey, one speak-
ing for another at court),
muambidldi, i; muaknidl, i;
muluinbuluidl, i.
Counsel, vL, ambila, ha with Inn-
genyi(4) or mexi(5) or lu-
kanyi(4).
(warn), dlmuxa.
n., lungenyl, 4; mezi, pi. of 5;
lukanyi, 4.
Count, v., b&la.
Countenance, «., see features.
Countless, adj., use neg. of mOnya
or mona or ena with mua
kub&la, to count.
Country, «. The country of a
certain clan or tribe is gener-
ally expressed by giving the
simple name of the people.
We may also have the indefi-
nite misoko (towns),
(down<x>untry), kuinanda. §423
(2) (J).
of the foreigner, mputu, 3. This
word is a corruption of the
name Portugal.
Countryman, n., rnnena, i ; mu-
kua, i; inuan'eta,etc.; mae-
na kuetu, etc. ; muknetu, etc.
§§ 138, Rem. 5; 141, Rem. i;
142; 87 (d), Rem. 2.
Couple, n.(all two), bubidi, 6.
Courage, »., dlklma, 5; bukitu,
6; inaclina(2) mukille.
have, v., teka dlkima or bukitu
or maclma mukille.
Courageous, adj., see brace.
Court, n., of justice, cUumbo, 7.
(enclosure), use mu with lu-
hangu(4) or cihaiigu(7) or
lumbu(4).
(talk palaver at court), v., lum-
bulula, zambala(Buk.).
(yard, open space in village), lu-
bansa, 4; bula, 6,
Court (continued).
v.(woo), endela.
Courteous, adj.f -a kalolo, 8.
Courtesy, n., kalolo, 8.
Cousin, n. Generally expressed
by the indefinite muan'etn,
etc. § 138, Rem. 5.
Covenant, n., see agreement.
Cover, vt., bulklla.
a house, flnga, knma.
(be covered with, as clothes with
dirt), vi.f t&hakana.
»., clbnlkllu, 7; cibuiku, 7;
cixlbiku, 7.
Covet, vph.f use muoyo(2) or mu-
clma(2) as subject of] v sa-
mina or kuinlna, ela ma-
clma. Hence we say nakuela
cifulu ciandi maclma, /
coveted his hat.
Covetous, adj.^ -a macima(2).
Cow, »., nKombe(3) maktkxi, ma-
ktkzl'a ngombe.
Coward, n., maeaa(i) baowa(6),
muena maclma(2) matekete.
Cowardice, n., baowa, 6; maci-
ma(2) matekete.
Cower, v.(as animal), b&za, di ne
mb&zib&zl (pi. of 3 or 4).
Cowry, n., mabela, 2; la]i&xl(Buk.
and Bukuba), 4.
Crab, n., nkala, 3; lukala, 4.
Crack, n., matanta, 2.
v/., handa mataiita(2); vi.^
handlka mutanta, faa ma-
tanta.
(as nuts), b^la, bula, bosa, toto-
bala, taya(toya).
Craft, n. (occupation), madlma, 2.
Craftiness, n. (meanness), lakl-
na, 4.
(sharpness), badlmu, 6.
Crafty, adj., -a badima(6), dl-
make (p.p. of dlmaka, to he
crafty).
(mean), -a lakina(4).
Cram, t;/. (together), bambila, nye-
menena, zindlka, kamata.
Crane, n.(bird), nyanyu(3) ^»
mudlnga(2).
170
CRAWFISH— CRY.
Crawfish, n., cisasankala, 7;
cisasa, 7.
(shrimp), luziza, 4; luxoza, 4.
Crawl, vi.(gia caterpillar, lizard),
landala, lundamana.
(as child), kalaba, jeka.
(as snake), enda ujongoloka
(from V. jongoloka).
Craziness, n., buhale, 6; butom-
boke, 6; bubuluke, 6.
Crazy, be, vi.f buluka, hala, tom-
boka.
oJ;., buluke, hale, tomboke.
These are p.p. of the above
verbs.
Crease, n., mufudi, 2.
Create, v/., fuka.
Credit, v. (let one have something
as a debt), ha dibaiiia(5).
Hence we have nakuha Ka-
songo dibansa dilnyi dla
cinanu da mlbela, / credited
Kasongo for 1,000 cowrieSf lit.
/ gave him my debt far 1,000
cowries.
Credulity, n., luitabuxu, 4.
Credulous, cidj., -a liiitabiixu(4).
Creek, n., musalu, 2.
Creep, vi.(as child), kalaba, jeka.
(as vine), lamba.
stealthily, bombelela, tobela.
Creeper, n. (generic), muozi, 2.
There are many species, but
the most useful is the lukodi(4),
which is extensively employed
in making houses, fences, mats,
nets, baskets, etc.
Creeping thing, n., qIxI, 7.
Crevice, n., mutanta, 2.
Cricket, n., clmpul , 7; cinson-
kela, 7.
(edible), muenie, 2; muntuntu,
2.
Crimson, adj., kunse (pp. of
kunza, to be crimson).
Cringe, vi.y with fear, as animal,
b&xa, di ne mb&xlbftzi(3).
Crippled, be, v*.(Iimp), sobela.
Croak, v».(as frog), dila.
Crocodile. «., ngandu, 3.
Crook, n.(bend), dintonya, 5.
Crooked, be, vi., konyangala,
tonyttma, nyongoboka, hen-
guluka, kobama.
Crop, n.{oi bird), dibodlo, 5.
Cross, n.(like that on which Christ
was crucified), maci(2) mucia-
makane.
iron or copper made into, ciom-
bo, 7.
(be fretful), vi.f nylngabala.
(as one path or stick crossing an-
other), vi.y clamakana; vt,,
ciamakttxa.
a stream, vi., sabuka; vt., sa-
bula.
Crossing, n.(ford or ferry), clsabn,
7; dllobo, 5 ; cisabakilu, 7.
Crouch, vi., Inttma, butama,
batama.
Crow, v.(as cock), sama.
Crowd, n., cisiunba, 7; dlsanga,
5; bungl, 6.
together, vi,y baelekana; vt.,
buexakana, buelakttxa.
Crown, n., of head, lubombo, 4.
Crucify, vph., xlha ha macl(2)
muclamakane.
Cruel, adj., -a liikiiiu(4), -a
clnyaiiKa(7).
(be cruel toward one) vt,, nyan-
ga, ona.
Cruelty, n.,luklna,4; clnyaiigU)7.
Crumb, n., cisunsukila, 7; lako-
toto, 4; kavuku, 8.
Crumble, vt,f sunsala. .
Crunch, vt., beleketa.
Crush, v/. (grind between stones),
hela.
(by beating), kuma, tuta.
(by rubbing), vlnga, sunsala.
in mortar, tua.
(squeeze), kama.
to powder, botexa.
Crust, n., lukototo, 4; cilttmu-
Ittmu, 7.
Cry, v., dila.
(console or stop from crying),
kosexa or halxa with mua-
dl(2).
CRY— DARK.
171
Cry {continued).
(exclamation used in calling to
fight), v.y kobola.
(exclamation of surprise, or joy
by a number of people), v.,
bingila, ela bila (pi. of 7).
for, dlla, Jinga.
«.( weeping), muadl, 2.
(alarum), clla, 7.
Crying, n., muadl, 2.
Culpable, be, vi.^ hlla.
Cultivate, v., dlma, ihila.
Cunning, adj,, -a budlma(6), dl-
muke (p.p* of dlmuka, to he
cunning),
Cunningness, n., badlnm, 6.
Cup, n., luhansa, 4.
ito bleed), vt,f sumika.
small gourd for cupping), n.,
lusamu, 4.
Curb, v^(heal), ondaha (used in
reference to the person heal-
ing), holexa, talOxa, umixa.
The last three words have refer-
ence to the medicine perform-
ing the cure,
fbe cured), v».,talala, hola, uma.
(to give a present of something to
eat to a person wounded, the
rift to be given by the person
inflicting the wound), lunga.
Curse, v<.(doom), ela miilaa(2).
(offend), henda, tnka.
»., clhendo, 7.
(doom), mulau, 2.
Curve, i;<.(bend), tony a, tonta,
kobeka, konya, hengulnxa,
nyongoboxa; vi,, konyon-
gala, tonyfima, nyongoboka,
kobama, henguluka.
»., dlntonya, 5.
Custom, »., clbllu, 7; cllele, 7;
clensedi, 7.
CUT, vt.f kosa, t&ba, kata.
(as vine for rubber), tftba, benda.
away, as trash in field, sengrnla.
away, as large timber for field,
sola.
f carve), songa.
castrate), tungula, liakula.
Cut (continued).
(chop), kuota.
down, as grass or tree, t&ha,
xumbula, uhula.
finger nails, bengula ni&dl.
fire-wood, handa, t&ha, kuota.
grass with hoe, dlma, Ihlla.
open, split, handa.
(slice), benga.
teeth, mtaa with dlna(5) as
subj.
up, as an animal killed, seya,
saya.
up by the roots, jula.
up into small pieces, to hash.
(wound), t&ha mputa(3).
».(wound), mputa, 3.
D.
Daily, adv., ku dltukn(5) ku dl-
tuku, ku dlcl(5) ku did.
Daintiness, n., mankenda, pi. of
5 or 6.
Dainty, (u/;., -a mankenda (pi. of
5 or 6).
Damage, v/., ona, nyanga.
Damn, v., ela mulaa(2).
Damnation, n., mulau, 2.
Damp, adj.^ -a cltelele(7), -a cla-
zlnia(7).
be, vi., talalaj hola, bombama.
(be wet), vi,, bola, toha.
Dampen, vl.^ talftxa, holexa, to-
hexa, bolexa, bombeka.
Dampness, »., cltelele, 7; cla-
xlma, 7.
Damsel, n., see maid.
Dance, n., maxa, pi. of 5 or 6.
v., xa, xa maxa.
Danger, »., bualu, 6; miuiiida, 2.
Dan L"^, v»., lembelela. <
Daring, be, see brave. ^
Dark, o^;. (color), like (p.p. from
flka, to he dark).
(as in closed room, or darkness
or night), mldlma, pi. of 2;
muflta, 2.
172
DARK— DECEMBER.
Dark (continued).
(become dark), see becoice.
(make dark, darken), vLy flkiza.
Darken, vL, flklxa.
Darkness, ».(as night), midlma)
pi. of 2; mnflta, a.
(color), buflke, 6.
Dash, n.(West Coast English for
gift, or the extra amount which
must always be given in trade),
matablz» (pi. of 5 or 6), n e-
kidldi(3), ntentekedl(3).
give a, v.f sekidila, tentekela.
Date, n. This idea must gener-
ally be expressed by reference
to the moon (ngondo or muen-
xi), or to one of the seasons
(muxlhu, mayowa, nyula).
Daub, v., m^ta, bna.
(be daubed over with, as clothes
with mud), tfthakana.
Daughter, n., miiana(i) mukfl-
xl(i).
(one's own daughter), muana
mulela.
Dawn, »., haciacia (adv.). S 423,
(») (*).
(cockcrowing), hadl hasama
nsolo.
little after, dlnda, 5; lunkeln, 4.
v., batiikii(6) or bafuku(6) with
the V. cia.
Day, n., dltuku, 5; difakn, 5;
dlcl (pi. meci), 5.
(all day long), dinda(5) to ne
dlIolo(5).
(day after to-morrow), adv.,
malhi.
(day by day), ku dltuku ku dl-
tuk , ku ici ku dlcl.
(daytime), munya, 2.
For days of the week, see week.
Daybreak, n., haciacia. § 423
(2) (b),
Dayugbt, »., munya, 2.
Daytime, »., munya, 2.
Dazzle, vpk.^ tuila mu mesu.
Dead, adj., fue (p.p. of fna, to
die).
Deaf, adj,, -a mahaha (pi of 5).
If one ear only is deaf use the
sing., dl.ialia.
person, muena(i) mahaha.
Deafness, n. If person is deaf in
one ear use dihaha(5), if in
both ears use the pi. mahaha.
Deal, v., in, trade, enda muxin-
fl:a(2) ne; as, utu wenda
muxinga ne ndundu, he deals
in rubber.
(large amount), -a bunfl:i(6), ngi,
ngia-ngi.
Dear, a^f;. (costly,) -a mnxingaia)
mukille.
make, v/., bandixa muzi ga.
Dearth, n., bunyabunya, 6; bu«
b&le, 6; buklse, 6.
Death, »., lufu, 4.
put, to zlha.
(to be very near death, about to
die), v., use lufu as subject of
V. tonda with the person as
obj.
Debase vt., kehexa.
Debate, n.( dispute)^ luhftta, 4.
v.f ela or elagana or di ne with
luhftta. PI. mpftta is generally
used.
Debris, n., see trash.
Debt, n., dibania, 5.
ask for the payment of, v., nana.
be in. The debtor is said to
possess or get (di ne or angata)
the debt of the creditor — ^just
opposite of the English; as,
ndi ne dibania dia Kasongo
dla cinunu cia mibela, / am
in debt to Kasongo for 1,000
cowries.
Sometimes the verb knata is used
with dibania as subj. and the
person who is in debt as the
obj.
incur a, v., enia dibania.
Decay, w., bola.
Deceit, n., ludimi, 4.
Deceive, v., xima, dinga, dimba.
December, »., Di8emba(Eng.).
DECIDE— DEMENTIA.
173
Decide, v.Qudge), lumbulula.
after consultation, dl(5) dlakua-
kanangana d^mue, hunfni*
laza or aktkxa with dl(5).
on, sungula.
i resolve), amba.
settle a dispute), tuixa; kosa or
kala vnih nsambu (pi. of 3
or 4).
Declare, v., amba.
Decline, v^. (refuse to give), Imlna.
(as price), vi., teketa.
(refuse), hldla, benga.
Decompose, v. bola.
Decorate, vL, lengeza.
Decoration, ».(omament), ci-
lenga, 7.
Decorous, adj., -a kalolo(8).
Decorum, n., kalolo, 8.
Decrease, v^(as price), hnekeza
or tekeza with inuxlnKa(2).
(as swelling), vi , fuba, hohftla.
(as wages), v/., hnekexa dlfu-
tii(S).
(as water abating), uma, kama.
(in quantity or size), vi,, keha,
nyana; vt., keheza, nyan-
yiza.
Decree, »., dl, 5; mukenji, 2.
v., amba followed by di(5) or
makenji.
Deed, n.(affair), bualn, 6; muan-
da, 2.
Deep, adj., le.
Deepen, vL, leheza.
Deepness, n., bale, 6.
Defame, v/., songuela, banda.
Defeat, vt., hlta or tamba fol-
lowed by bukftle(6) or ngu-
lu(3), clmuna.
Defend, vt., sungidila, sunslla,
handixa.
Defender, »., mustmsldl, i.
Deference, »., kalolo, 8.
Deferential, adj., -a kalolo, 8.
Deficient, be, v».(be not enough},
x&la- ena ne.
Defile, v/. (blacken), flkixa.
(make to go bad), ona, nyanga.
Define, v., amba. Sometimes
bualu baa follows amba.
Deformed, adj., in back, hiunp-
backed, kobame (p.p. of ko-
bama), dltonte(p.p. of dl-
tonta), -a dikoko(5).
in legs, -a kaneke(8), -a nje-
ku(3), -a clbombo(7).
Deformity, «., in back, dikoko, 5.
in legs, kaneke, 8; njeka, 3.
Defraud, v/., iba.
Degrade, vt., kehexa.
(discharge), fttla.
Delay, vt., humbixa, lekeza.
(remain behind), xftla, humba.
(stop), vi., lekela.
Deliberate, v., ela or elangana
followed by mexi(5) or lun-
genyi (4) or muclma(2).
(hold conference), ela with ci-
fafu(7) or clfa(7).
Deliberation, n., cifafu, 7; clfu,
7-
Delicate, adj,(not strong), ena ne
followed by bukille(6) or
nKala(3).
Delight, vt., sankixa; vi., sanka.
Delirious, be, T;.(talk in delirium),
akula biakalakula(pl. of 7).
§ 356 ig)'
Deliver, v. (act as midwife), le-
lexa.
a child, lela.
from slavery, redeem, hikala.
message, amblla, amba with
di(5) or mukenji(2).
(save), sungUa, sungldlla, han-
dixa.
Deliverance, n., luhandu, 4.
Deliverer, n., musungidl, i.
Demand, v. (ask for), lomba.
(to question), ebexa, konka.
Demented, adj., bnluke, tom-
boke, hale. These are p.p. of
baluka, tomboka and hala,
respectively, meaning to be
demented.
Dementia, n., buhale, 6; batom*
boke, 6; bubulake, 6.
174
DEMOLISH— DESTROY .
Demolish, vt., sasula, cibula,
handakanya, tangadixa, tan-
galttxa, xlha.
a village, nyanga, ona, hanla.
Pemon, ff.(£iblical sense), mul&-
m&ci(i) wa Satana.
(devil), Satana, i.
(spirit, ghost), muklxi, 2; mu-
xangi, 2.
(witch), maena(i) muhonKo(2),
muena buloxl(6),inuenaiiiu-
l0Xi(2).
Den, »., buina, 6. Pi. is mena.
Denounce, v/., diula, nyoka.
Dense, be, v.(as forest), zltakana.
Deny, v., hidla, benga.
a charge, Vila.
(refuse to give), Imlna.
(renounce), hldla, nyoka, ben-
ga, dlula.
Depart, v., ya, umuka, blka.
Depose, vt.^ umuxa, fttla.
Depress, v/. (lower), huekexa.
(be depressed with sorrow), bun-
gama, nyingala muclnia(2).
Depth, «., bule, 6.
Derange, t;/. (disarrange), tanga-
dlxa, buandakanya, baanda-
kfixa, tangalfixa, tuhakAxa,
tuhakanya, muanga, muan-
galAxa, buexakana, sanga-
kAxa, sangakanya; vt.(be
disarranged), buandakana,
tangadlka, tangalAka, tuha-
kana, muangalflka, buela-
kana, sangakana.
Deranged, a^;. (mentally), buluke,
tomboke, haie. These words
are p.p. of buluka, tomboka
and hala, respectively, mean-
ing to he deranged.
Deride, vty s£ka.
Derision, «., kas^ku, 8.
Descend, z;t.(as sun in the heavens)
uhuka.
(come down from tree), etc.
tuluka, ika.
(fall), bona, kuluka, m&ta.
(go down-stream), hueka.
Descendant, »., muana, i. See
generation.
Descent, «., line of, generation,
cilongo, 7.
place of, clhuekelo, 7.
Describe, vU^ amba. Sometimes
bualu bua follows amba.
Desecrate, v/., ona, nyanga.
Desert, v/., xla, lekela.
(move to another place, scatter),
muangala.
(uninhabited place), nph., mu
muaba(2) kamuena bantu.
Deserted village, »., dlkolo, 5;
cikulu, 7.
Deserve, v».(be right or best to
do), bualu(6) bulmpe or
blmpe(adv.) followed by infin. ;
as, bualu buimpe kumukuma,
it is right to whip him, i.e.,
he deserves a whipping.
(be fit or proper), fuana.
Desire, v., sua, nanga, Inylxa.
«., changeable, cisuasua, 7.
^ §356 (^).
Desist, v., lekela.
Desolate, v/., haula.
Despise, v/., use the ph. dl ne
lukuna(4); neg. of sua, nanga
and Inyixa.
See loathe.
Despite, n., lukuna, 4.
Despoil, vt., haula.
Despond, vi., bungama, nyln-
gala niucima(2).
Despondent, be, w., see despond.
Despot, »., muena(i) clnyan-
af«(7).
Despotic, adj., -a clnyangu(7).
Destination, n.(end), cizlkK
dllu, 7.
Destine, v/.(choose), sungula.
DESTrrXTTE, a</7.(poor),hele, landa.
(be destitute of), use neg. enane.
Destitution, «.(poverty), buh«le,
6; bulanda, 6.
Destroy, vt., xlha, dbula.
house, sasula.
(pillage), haula.
village, nyanga, ona.
DETAIN— DIRECT.
175
Detain, vt.^ lekez^i) humblza,
humbakfixa, kosexa.
(be detained), vi.^ humba.
Detect, v^.(feel, become conscious
of), unva, ufua.
Detter, vt.f humblxa, lekexa,
kosexa, humbakAxa.
Deteriorate, vi., nyanguka, ono-
ka(oneka).
Determine, v., see decide.
Detest, vL, use the ph. dl ne
lukuna(4); also neg. of sua
and nanga and Inyixa.
See LOATHE.
Detestation, n., lukuna, 4.
Detour, make a, v., sesa, sesuka.
Devastate, v/., see destroy.
Develop, t/f*.(grow), kftla, lunba,
dlunda, leha.
Devil, «., see demon.
Devotion, n. (affection), disua, 5;
dlnanga, 5.
(pity), lose, 4.
Devour, v/., dla.
Dew, n., mume, 2; dime, 5.
Dexterity, «., see cleverness.
Dialect, n., muaku, 2; ciakuilu,
7; ludlml, 4; muakuilu, 2.
The different dialects may be
represented by prefixing bu
to the name of the people.
§ 55, Rem. I.
DiARRHCEA, n., to have, huya
munda, ela munda, uha
munda.
Die, vi.y fua.
(be about to die), tonda with
lufu as subj. and the person
as obj.
for, as substitute, fulla.
Differ, v. (dispute), ela or dl ne
or elangana followed bymp&-
ta(p]. of 4).
(be unlike), use neg. of fuanan-
sana and fuana and kele-
mena and dieleka; also neg v.
with muomumue or o- mnne.
Difference, ^.(argument), lu-
hftta, 4.
settle a, vt., tuixa.
Different, be, v*., see differ.
way of doing, w., cienKedi(7)
cikuabo.
Differently, adv,, use the deriva-
tive noun forms as described
under § 356 (c) followed by the
adj. cikuabo, other; as, enza
ciensedl cikuabo, do U dif-
jeretiUy.
Difficult, adj., kaie(p.p. of kftla,
. tohediffkuU).
Difficulty, ^.(palaver), bualu, 6;
muanda, 2.
Diffidence, »., bundu, 6; bunvu,
6.
Diffident, be, v»., ufua or unva
or dl ne followed by bundu(6)
or bunvu(6).
Dig, v., a hole, Imba, umbula.
(to hoe), dima, Ihikt.
up, as tree, Jula.
Dilatory, be, vi., xixamuka.
Diligent, adj., use some such ph. as
-amuclma(2) waniudiniu(2);
or the neg. v. with bufuba(6)
or bukata(6).
Dimension, ^.(length), bule, 6;
ntanta(3) mule.
(width), bulhi, 6; buklse, 6;
ntanta(3) mulhl.
(size), bunlne, 6.
take, measure, vt., Idlklxa, ele-
kexa.
Dibonish, vi.y see decrease.
Dimtnutive, adj. The diminutive
idea is generally expressed by
means of the prefix ka(pl. tu).
There are, of course, the adjs.
kise, b&le, nya-nya.
Dinner, nph., bidiafpl. of 7) bia
munda mun7a(2), bidla bla
hanktkcl.
Dip, v. (immerse), Ina.
in, tua.
up, tunta, t&ha.
Direct, v.(show), lexa.
(tell, command), ambila.
the way, lombola.
a<^;.(strai^t), lul&me(p.p. of
lul&ma, to be straight), «
176
DIRECTION— DISENCHANT.
Direction, n.(coinmand), dl, 5;
mukenjly 2.
towards, prep,f kn.
Directly, a(fv.(soon), katataka,
dlodlono, mpinden.
suh, can j, (as soon as), ha used as
prefix to verb in sub. clause.
|458(«).
Dirt, n. (earth), malobo, pi. of 6.
(excrement), ttlfi, pi. of 8. See
note under B.L.-Eng.
(loose sand), dlfukenya, 5;
nsenga, pi. of lasenga(4);
nsele, pi. of la8ele(4).
on the body, manyanu, pi. cf 5
or 6; mbindu, pi. of 3 or 4.
(trash), cilu, 7; clsonso, 7.
The pi. of these words gener-
ally used.
Dirtiness, n., buflke, 6; bubi, 6.
(untidiness), bukoya, 6.
Dirty, adj. (as clothes), flke, bi.
(in person), -a manyana(pl. of
( or 6), -a mbiiidu(pl. of 3 or
4).
(untidy), -a bakoya(6).
Disagree, 7/.(have dispute), di ne
or ela or elansana with
mpftta(pl. of luh&ta).
Disagreement, n., luhftta, 4.
settle a, vt.^ tulxa, kosansambu.
Disappear, vi., jlmlna.
Disappointed, be, v., in doing,
humbixa, humba.
Disapproval, n., mukandn, 2;
buhidla, 6; cibenga, 7.
Disapprove, v/., hidla, bensa,
kanda.
(with a click of the throat),
sodla.
Disarrange, vt.^ tangadixa, tu-
hakttxa, tuhakanya, tanga-
Itlxa, buelaktkxa, buexakana,
sansakttxa, sangakanya,
muansa, muansalttxa; vi.(he
disarranged), tansadlka, tan-
saltlka, buelakana, sanga-
kana, tuhakana, mnauga-
liUca.
Disaster, npk,, bualn(6) bubl
(or bukille).
Discard, vt., hidla, benga.
Discharge, vt., employee, nmuxa,
ftUa.
(unload), h&tula, umaxa.
a, perhaps venereal, n., misele,
pi. of 2.
Disciple, »., mnloho, 2; mutan-
gadlki, i; muiyidi, i.
Discipline, v/.(punish), kiima,
tuta, nyanga, kengexa, ona.
(rebuke), b^la, samina, bnlu-
klla, nanga.
(teach), amblla, lonKexa(Buk.
or Lower Congo), iylxa^ mikn-
yixa, labuklxa(Buk.).
Disclose, ^/.(unhide), sokolola,
sokohfc.
Disconcerted, be, vi., tuhakana,
buandakana.
Discontented, be, v».(g;rumble),
tontolola.
Discontinue, v., lekela.
Discordant, be, v.(as musical in-
strument out of tune), silkuka.
Discourage, vt,, nemexa or han-
Klxa with muclma(2); v».(be
discouraged), mnclma as subj.
of V. nema.
Discourse, n. Perhaps the most
satisfactory word is the infin.
kuamba used as a noun. Ba-
alu(6) and muaiida(2) and
di(5) may be used, according
to sense.
Discover, vph,, dianjila kumona.
(detect), become conscious of,
ufua, nnva.
Discretion, n., langenyi, 4; mexl,
pi. of 5 or 6; ]nkanyl(Buk.),
(4). .
Discussion, ^.(dispute), luh&ta, 4.
have a, v., ela or elangana or
di ne with lahftta(4). The
pi. of luh&ta is generally used.
Disease, n., dlbedl, 5; disama, 5;
bnbedl, 6.
Disenchant, vi,, hoiiffola(?).
DISENTANGLE— DISTEND.
177
Disentangle, vt., sulula, kutu-
lula, Jlngulula, yangulula.
Disgrace, vt.y kuaclxa or ufulza
with buiidu(6), kehexa.
n.f bundu, 6; bunvu, 6.
Disgust, n. (hatred), lukuna, 4.
Disgusted, be, w., with food, to
loathe, tonda, tua.
Dish, n., dllonga, 5. This word
is perhaps from Lower Congo.
Dishearten, v/., nemexa or han-
gixa with inucliiia(2) ; t^*.(be
disheartened), muclma as
subj. of nema.
Dishonest, adj., -a muclma(2).
be, v., Iba, dl ne followed by
bulvl(6) or buibl(6) or bl-
ania(pl. of 7) bile.
person, n., mulvl, i; mulbl, i.
Dishonesty, «., bulvl, 6; bulbl,
6.
Dishonor, v/., kehexa; also neg.
of tumblxa or nemeka.
Dislike, vL, see despise.
Dislocated, be, vi., luhuka, hft-
tuka.
Dismay, vt., clnylxa; vi.(he dis-
mayed), dna.
Dismiss, v/., from employ, fttla,
umuxa.
Disobedience, n., clbengu, 7;
buhldla, 6; clcu, 7.
(stubbornness), clxlku, 7.
Disobedient, adj.y -a clbeiisu(7),
-a clcu(7), -a buhldla(6).
be, v., use neg. of tumblxa or
nemeka or tumlklla or unva
or Itabuxa mu dl or ensa mu-
foUowed by proper tense and
person of amba.
(stubborn), -a clxlku(7).
Disobey, v., hldla or benga fol-
lowed by dl(5); neg. of unva
or nemeka or tumblxa or
tumlklla or Itabuxa mu dl or
ensa mu- followed by proper
for-n of amba.
(dishonor), kehexa.
Disorder, «., to put in or be in,
see derange.
Disown, t;/., nyoka, dlula.
(refuse), hldla, benga.
Disperse, vt.y tangadlxa, tanga-
lAxa, muanga, muangalttxa;
vi.j tangadlka, muangalAka,
tangalAka.
Displease, vLy kuaclxa or ufulxa
with clxl(7), flklxamunda.
Disposition, «.(heart), muclma, 2.
Disputation, n., luh&ta. 4.
Dispute, v., dl ne or ela or elan-
gana with mpftta(pl. of lu-
hftta).
settle a, tulxa, kosa nsambu(3)
n., luhftta, 4.
Disreputable, adj.f bl.
Disrespect, n., dlkamakama, 5;
clkama, 7; dlntanta, 5.
Disrespectful, adj.y -a dlkama-
kama(5), -a clkama(7), -a
dlntanta(5).
be to, vi.y kehexa; also neg. of
tumblxa or nemeka.
Dissatisfied, be, v».(grumble),
tontolola.
Dissect, v/.(cut up an anmial
killed), seya,saya.
Dissent, v. (refuse), hldla, benga.
n., nod, v., kuhamutu(2).
Dissimilar, be, vi., use neg. of
fuanangana or kelemena;
also neg. with muomumue or
o-umue or muan'abo ne.
Dissipation, n. (drunkenness), bu-
buluke(6) or buhale(6) or
butomboke(6) followed by
maluYu(pl. of 5).
Dissolve, vi.y flngaluka, engu-
luka.
Dissuade, v/. (interrupt), humblxa,
kosexa.
Distance, «., long, bule, 6.
short, bulhl, 6.
(long or short), ntanta, 3.
Distant, adj.^ see remote.
Distasteful, be, vi.{as unsea-
soned food), talala, hola.
Distend, vL, tuntumuxa, tanta-
mlxa, uxa; v/., tantamlka,
tuntumuka, ula.
178
DISTINCTLY— DOOM.
DISTINCTLY) adv., bimpe, blakane.
Distinguished, adj., see famous.
Distort, v. {as face), kama ku
inesu(pl. of 5).
Distress, n.(mental), kanyingan-
yinga, 8.
Distribute, vt., abanya.
among each other, abanyan-
gana.
to, abanylna.
District, «., see country.
Distrust, v., use neg. of tekemena.
Disturb, v/. (interrupt one in do-
ing), humblxa.
(make trouble), teka followed by
diyoyo(5) or mutftyo(2).
Disturbance, ». (trouble), diyoyo,
5; mutftyo, 2.
Ditch, n., mutubu, 2; nkoka, 3;
muexl, 2.
Dive, vi., dina.
Diverge, vi., abuluka, handu-
luka, tfthuluka.
Divers, adj,{rDa.ny)f -a bungl(6),
ngl, ngla-ngl.
(be different), vi., use neg. of
fuana or fuanangana or die-
leka; also neg. v. with muo-
mumue or o-umue.
Di\'ERSE, BE, vi., see differ.
Divide, vt., among, abanya, aban-
yina, abuluxa.
among each other, abanyangana.
into parts, assort, t&hulula, sun-
gulula.
(separate), vt., handulula, abu-
luxa; vi., handuluka, abu-
luka.
(dividing line between two fields),
mukalu, 2.
Divination, w.(the fetish with
which it is done), lubuku, 4.
Divine, v., buka, tempa, tempexa,
Duaciala(7), depending on the
form of enchantment or divina-
tion employed.
adj.{oi God), -a Nzambl.
Diviner, n., muena(i) lubuku(4),
mutempexl(i), mpaka(i)
manga(pl. of 6), muhttkl(i)
Diviner {continued).
wa manga, muena(i) cla-
la(7).
Division, n., of anything cut ofif,
cltuha, 7.
of anything split, clh^su, 7.
(partition in house), cldldl, 7.
(side), lus^ke, 4.
Divorce, vt., xiha dibaka(5).
(be divorced), vi., dibAka as
subj. of V. fua.
Divulge, v., sl secret, sokolola,
sokola.
Dizziness, n., kantetu, 8; kan-
yungunyungu, 8; dlnyungu,
5; lunyungu, 4.
Dizzy, be, v., di ne followed by
kantetu(8) or kanyungun-
yungu(8) or dlnyungu(5) or
lunyungu(4).
Do, vt., ensa, osa, klxa.
(be done, completed, no more),
vi., xlka, mAna, hua.
(complete), vt., xlklxa, mAnyl-
xa, hulxa.
in advance, dlanjlla.
The above verbs meaning do are
never used in the sense of the
English auxiliary do.
Docile, be, vi., tumlka, tumi-
klla, dl ne kalolo(8).
Docility, n., kalolo, 8.
Doctor, n., muhOkl(i) wamanga,
mpaka(i) manga.
(diviner), muena(i) lubuku(4),
mutempexl(i), muena cia-
la(7), muena buanga(6).
(witch doctor), muena cihaha(7)
Doctrine, n., bualu, 6; muanda,
2.
Dodge, v., ehela.
Dog, «., mbua, 3.
Domestic, adj., animal, -a ku
bula(6), -a ku lubanza(4).
Dominion, «., see country.
(kingship), bukelenge, 6; bun-
fumu, 6.
Donkey, n., kabftlu, 8.
Doom, vt., ela mulau(2).
n., mulau, 2.
DOOR— DRUM.
179
Door, «., clbl, 7.
-post, cilua, 7; clxlkl, 7. These
words may also mean the posts
in the wall,
(space just in front of door), ku
mbelu(3), ha mbelu.
-way, muxuku(2) wa mbelu,
mbelu(3), clbuedelu(7).
Doorway, «., see under door.
Dor, »., dltoba, 5; dlb&xl, 5.
Double, v/.(fold back), clbulula.
(all two, two and two), «.,
bubldl, 6.
Double-minded, be, vi.^ dl ne
micima Ibidl.
Doubt, v., use some neg. form with
bulilela(6) or buxua(6) or
bualabuala(6) or bulnabulna
(6) or bulkfixa(6).
Doubtful, ai;., see doubt.
Dove, »., nkudimba, 3.
Down, adv., use the proper locative
with the inseparable -manda
or -nxl. § 423 (2) (&)•
at, kunxi kua.
in, munxi mua.
on, hanxi ha.
-stream or -hill or -country, ku-
manda.
Often the idea is expressed in the
verb.
Downward, see down.
Dowry, ».(sum paid by groom to
parents of bride), luselu, 4;
bintu bla buku(6).
to pay the, v/., sela, flla.
Doze, v., bung^t tulu(pl. of 8).
Drag, vL, hulumuna, koka, huta.
Draw,i;/., hulu-nuna, koka, huta.
breath, eyela, huta, koka.
near to, vi.y see approach.
out, vt.y tula, hulula.
out, stretch, koka, huta.
picture, idiklxa or elekexa fol-
lowed by the infin. kufunda,
to write-, as, wakuldlkixa ku-
funda miintu, he drew a pic-
ture of a person.
uo, as bug when touched or as
clothes when washed, fulama.
Draw {continued).
water, from spring or stream,
suna.
water, urinate, sukula.
Dread, w., buowa, 6.
v.y clna.
Dream, v., l&ta with mutu(2) or
ciiata(7) or dilu(5).
«., mutu, 2; cimta, 7; dllu, 5.
Dregs, n., blnyindanylnda, bixi-
kixikl. These are pi. of 7.
Dress, vi., luata, vuala; vt., vua-
dlka, luacika, luacixa.
(be dressed up, adorned), luata
or vuala with bllenga(pl. of
w., clkowela, 7; kasaku, 8;
clnkutu, 7.
Drink, v., nua.
give to, v/., nulxa.
Drip, vL, m&ta
Drive, v/., away, Ih&ta.
a bargian, tua iiiuxlnKa(2).
in, buexa.
in, as a nail, kumlna, hohela.
out, h&tula, umuxa, luhula,
Ih&ta, tambula(Buk.).
Driver ant, «., luhumbe, 4.
Drop, n., dlmpompo, 5 ; dim&ta, 5.
v. (drip), m&ta.
(fall), hona, kuluka.
Dropsy, «., of the feet, buzevu, 6.
This word seems to come from
nsevu, elephant.
Drought, «., lumu(from uma, to
he dry)y 4; munanga(from
nanga, to he dry), 2.
(dry season), muxlhu, 2.
Drove, «., clsumbu, 7.
Drown, vph., fua mu ml.
Drowsy, be, v., bunga tulu(pl. of
8).
Drum, «.(made with hide), ngoma,
3.
(hollowed piece of wood), clon-
do, 7; lunkunvu, 4; lu-
membo, 4.
, beat a, vt., Imba, nmba.
I of ear, nyongo'a dlcu(5).
i8o
DRUNK— EARTH.
Drunk, be, v.y kola or kuaclka or
tomboka or buluka or hola
followed bv maluvu; or
maluYU as subj. of v. kuata
with the person as obj.
make, i//., hadlxa with maluvu
as subj.; the v. ziha is also
used in the same way.
Drunkenness, «., bubuluke(6) or
buhale(6) or butombok:(6)
followed by maluvu.
Dry, vt.f umixa, Inyika, nanga
(nana), kamiza; Vf.(be dry),
uma, kama.
season, n., muxlhu, 2.
(shrivel up, wither), vi,y fuba;
vt.y fublxa.
(wipe), kuhula.
Dryness, ». (drought), lumu(from
uma, to he dry), 4; munanga
(from nanga, to dry), 2.
(thirst), miota, pi. of 2. The
common Lulua form is nyota.
§ 43, Rem.
Duck, «., mpatu, 3. From Portu-
guese.
Due, «.(wage), difutu, 5.
Dull, be, v.(as knife), fua menu
(pi. of dlnu), tuh&la, cihftla.
(as point), ena ne lusongo(4)
lutue.
(stupid), hote(p.p. of hota, to be
duU), xibftle(p.p. of xlb&la, to
he dull).
make, vt., xiha menu, tuhttxa,
cihttxa.
Dumb person, n., kamama, 8.
Dun, vt., nana.
Dunce, n., muhote, i; muxl-
b&le, I.
Dung, «., ttlfl, pi. of 8. See under
B.L.-Eng.
Dunghill, «., dlala, 5.
Dust, «., luhuxi, 4.
v., kuhula, tutula.
Dutiful, be, vi., tumlklla.
Ditty, n.(tax), mulambu, 2.
pav. vt., lambula.
(obligation). Thus far it has
been impossible to find any
Duty (continued),
word expressing the idea of
obligation or duty. // is right
or ii is hest to do may be ex-
pressed by bualu buimpe cr
blmpe followed by infin.; as,
bualu buimpe kuya, %t %s right
to go, i.e., ii is a duty to go.
Dwarf, n., muntu(i) muxunguke,
muntu wa cltulia(7), cihki-
dl(7), njeku(3), kaneke(8).
to be a, vi.y xunguka.
(a small people said to live in
the forests), kay^ke, 8. See
note under pygmy.
Dwarfish, adj., -a njeku(3), -a
cihindi(7), -a cltuba(7), xun«
guke(p.p. of xunguka, to he
dwarfish).
Dwell, vi., see live.
Each, adj., onso.
(distribution), see §94 and Rem.
other, reciprocal, use Reciprocal
Form of v. § 340.
one, totality, «., buonso(6) with
poss. pro. § 182, Rem.
Ear, n., dicu, 5; dltu, 5.
drum of, nyongo'a dlcu.
of maize, dianva, 5; dltftla, 5.
Early, adv., in the morning, dln-
da(5), lunkelu(4), haclacla
(adv.).
Earn, vph., angata dlfutu(5).
Earnest, n.(token), clmonylnu, 7.
Earnestly, adv. (well), blmpe.
(strongly), blkftle.
Earnings, n., difutu, 5.
Earring, n., kakanu(8) ka ku
dlcu(5).
Earth, «. (world), bulobo, 6. The
pi. malobo is generally used to
mean loose earth or dirt.
for making pots, dlbumba, 5;
dlma(p1. mema), .<.
white, used for whitewashing,
luhemba, 4.
EARTHQUAKE— EMACIATION.
iSt
Earthquake, n., use bulobo(6) as
subj. of taka or cika. These
verbs mean to quake.
Earthworm, n., munyenya, 2.
Ease, be at, vi,{io rest), Ikixa,
zikama, eya.
v., pain, talAza, holexa.
Easily, adv.f bltekete.
East, nph., kutu kualuhuka or
kutu kuahfttuka followed by
dlba(5), the sun. For con-
venience is also suggested
l8lta(Eng.), 3-
Easy, adi.{not hard), tekete(p.p. of
teketa, to be easy).
Eat, v., dia.
give to, vt.f dlza.
Eavesdrop, ^/.(to spy), tentekela.
Eavesdropper, n.(spy), mutente-
kedl, i; maena(i) lu8oko(4).
Eavesdropping, n., lusoko, 4.
Echo, vph., use di(5) as subj. of
idlkiza or elekexa.
Edge, n., of field, water, etc.,
inuele]n(2); musala(2); bu-
cika(6); and the locative
words kukala, kusula, ku-
sala, kiinf udilu. § 423 (2) (5) .
(bend edge of knife), vt., benda-
mlxa; vi., bendama.
(bordering on cloth), liiliola, 4.
of knife, ku menu(pl. of dlnu).
(put an edge on), nuona.
to have an, be sharp, tua.
Edible, adj., -a kudla.
Edifice, n., nsubu, 3.
Educate, vt., lylxa, mdnyixa,
amblla, lubuklxa(Buk.)) lon-
gexa(Buk. or Lower Congo).
Effect, v., see do.
n., bualu, 4; muanda, 2.
Effervesce, v., sftba.
Effort, «., make an, see try.
(make effort and fail), v., hanga.
Effrontery, n., dikamakama, 5;
clkama, 7; dintanta, 5.
Egg, n., dlk«la, 5; di(pl. mai, 5).
inside of, white or yolk, mulun-
ga, 2.
lay, vt,, ela.
Egg (continued).
shell of, cihusu, 7; cliubu, 7.
white of, milembulembu, pi. of
2.
yolk of, bukulukulu, 6.
EGGPtANT, n.f lujilu, 4.
Egotistical, be, vi., disua.
Eight, card, num., muanda mu-
kulu.
Either . . . or, conj., naxa . . .
Eject, v/., h&tula, luhula, umuxa.
Elapse, v., use cldiinu(season) or
dituku(day) with v. lua; or
ngondo(moon) with v. bftla;
also the verbs leha and nenga.
Elastic, be, m., nyengabala.
Elbow, n., lukongeba, 6.
Elder, n. (ecclesiastical), mukuln,
i; mukulumpe, i-; tatu, i.
brother or sister, mukulu, i.
This word is followed by the
poss. enclitic. § 138, Rem. 2.
Elect, ^.(appoint to office), ha or
buexa or dtxa followed by ab-
stract name of office,
(choose), sungula.
Electric fish, »., nylxl, 3;
Elegance, n., bulmpe, 6; bulen-
gele, 6; buakane, 6.
Elegant, adj., Impe, lengeie,
akane.
Elephant, n., kahumbu, 8; nze-
v«, 3-
Elephantiasis, «.(of foot), bu-
levu, 6. This word is from
nzevu, elephant.
Elevate, vt., blxa, bandlxa, jula.
Else, a^;'. (other), kuabo, nga.
(somewhere else), adv., use loca-
tives inseparaby with kuabo
or nga.
Elsewhere, adv., use locatives in-
separably with kuabo or nga.
Emaciate, vt., nyanyixa.
(be emaciated), vi., nyana, di ne
or uma with cionda(7) or
clnyanu(7).
Emaciation, n., cionda, 7; cln-
yanu, 7.
l82
EMANCIPATE— ENGAGE.
E&IANCIPATE) vLy hikula.
Emblem, n.f cimonylnu, 7.
Embrace, vL, uhuklla, akldlla.
Embryo, n., disu, 5; muoyo, 2.
Emerge, ^/.(appear), mueiieka,
mueka.
(come out), luhuka, umuka,
h&tuka.
Emigrate, vt. (scatter), muangaia.
Eminence, n.(hill), mukuna, 2.
(importance), bunlne, 6.
Eminent, adj.^ nine, tambe(p.p. of
tumba, to be eminent).
Emit, v.^ an odor, nunka.
Employ, v/., see engage.
Employment, w. (occupation). This
idea is generally expressed in
one of three ways: (i) noun
derivative of class I. § 356 (a) ;
(2) muena followed by the
proper noun, § 84 {b)\ (3)
Pres. Habitual tense of verb,
to seek, k^ba mudiniu(2).
(work), »., mudlmu, 2.
Empty, adj., tuhu, cinana. The
latter word is indeclinable.
The locatives are often used be-
fore the noun; as, ha mesa
hadl hatuhu, the table is
empty; mu mulondo mudl
mutuhu, the jar is empty.
vt.{pouT out), humuna, iclklxa,
umuxa, luhula.
Emulate, vt., Idlkixa, eiekeza.
(do as another), see § 465.
Enchant, v/., Iowa.
(divine), buka, tempa, tempexa,
nua clala(7), depending on
the form of enchantment em-
ployed.
See WITCH.
Encircle, vt., jlnga, jlngila,
nyengela, vunga, vunglla,
nyungulula.
vi.(go around), nyunguluka,
cimbakana. Generally use
.ph. ku nylma with these
words.
Enclose, vt., see encircle.
Enclosure, n. (fence), luhangu, 4;
clhangu, 7; lumbu, 4.
. (yard, enclosed space, court),
lubansa, 4;- bula, 6. By
using the locative mu with the
words luhangu and clhangu
and lumbu we have other
forms for yard, enclosure,
court, fold, etc.
(pen), clkumbi, 7.
Encourage, vt., killexa mu-
clma(2).
End, vi., be on, stand, Imikna.
bring to, finish, vt.y mttna, mtln-
ylxa, xlklxa, bulxa.
come to, be finished, v*.-, xlka.
come to, stop, lekela.
come to the, vi.^ xiklla.
put on, stand up on, vt., Imikn-
ylka.
at the hind, the locative words
kunxikldllu, haxixe.
butt, »., citaku, 7; also the loc.
word kuntaku.
(destination), «., clxlkldllu, 7.
front, ku mp&Ia, ku mutu.
lower, kumanda(loc.).
of stick, string, etc., the preposi-
tional words kusula, kunfu-
dllu, kusala.
(point of needle, etc.), lusongo,
4-
Endeavor, v., see try.
(endeavor and fail), hanga.
Endlessly, adv., see ceaselessly.
Endow, v/. (bequeath), ha buhlan-
yl(6).
(give), ha, amblka(Buk.).
Enema, n., bukanda, 6.
give a, v., ela bukanda.
Enemy, n., mueDa(i) lukuna(4).
Udl ne Kasongo lukuna, he
is an enemy of Kasongo.
Energetic, see diligent.
Energy, ».(strength), ngulu, pi. of
3; makanda, pi. of 5; bu-
k&le, 6.
Enfeeble, vt., tekexa.
Engage, v. (be engaged, betrothed).
When speaking of the man use
ENGAGE— ETERNALLY.
183
Engage {continued),
the active forms of banga,
when of the woman use the
passive forms of same verb,
in fight with, iuangana.
(hire), ha mudimu(2), buexa ku
mudlmu.
Englishman, »., inuena(i) Inge-
lexi. Generally used of all
who speak English.
Enigma, n. (puzzle), dljimbu, 5;
dialu, 5.
Enlarge, v/., dlundiza, lundixa.
Enmity, n., lukuna, 4.
Enormous, adj.^ nine.
Enough, be, vt.(adequate), fuan-
angana, akanangana, die-
leka, vula, kumbana, dl -a
bungi(6), xlka.
(be satisfied with food), v.,ukuta.
Enquire, v., see inquire.
Enrage, vt.y kuaclxa or ufulxa
with cixl(7), flklxa munda,
tacixa.
(be enraged), v/., kuata or ufua
with cixi, flka munda.
Enrich, vt., luixa bubanji(6).
Enslave, vt.y ha or buexa mu
followed by buhlka(6), luixa
with muhlka(i) or buhlka.
Ensnare, vL, teya.
Entangle, vt,^ in speech, tuha-
kdxa, tuhakanya; v*.(be en-
tangled), tuhakana.
in net, jlngila, jinga; vi.(^
entangled), dijtnga.
Enter, vt., buela.
Entice, vt.y m&nyixa or lylxa or
ibidixa with bualu(6) bubl.
by leaving something to tempt,
to trap, teya.
by lying to, dinga, xima, dlmba.
Enticement, »., buteyi, 6.
Entire, adj.y on so, xima.
Entirety, »., buonso, 6; buxlma,
6.
Entrail, »., dila, 5.
Entrance, «., muxuku(2) wa
mbelu(3), mbelu(3), cibue-
delu(7).
Entrap, vt.y teya.
Entreat, vt.y sengela, sengelela.
Entrust with, vph.y xia mu bian-
Ba(pl. of 7).
Entwine, vt.y Jtnglla, vunglla,
jinga, vunga.
Enumerate, vt.y bftla.
Envious, o-ij. (jealous), -a mu-
kau(2).
Envy, n., mukau, 2.
Epileptic fit, n., cisike, 7; tungu-
lungu, pi. of 8.
Epistle, »., mukanda, 2.
Equal, adj.y length, size, number,
etc., mue(mo), o-umue; also
the indeclinable words bu,
bulna, muomumue.
be, vi.y fuanangana, fuana,
kelemena.
make, vt.y fuanyikixa, kele-
mexa.
Eradicate, vt.y jimlxa, Jima.
Erase, vt.y Jlmixa, jima.
Erect, z;/.(build), ibtika, asa.
be, vi.y imttna, Jaiama.
(cause to stand erect), imAn-
yika, jadika.
Err, v.y ensa or osa or klxa with
the adv. bibi.
Escape, v., from captivity, from a
fight, from danger, handuka.
from trap or when tied, tuka.
(run away), nyema, ongoloka.
(slip loose, as animal when caught
with the hands), flnuka.
Escort, vt.y flia.
on the way a short distance, then
return, vt.y xindikixa.
Espoused, be, v. When speaking
of the man use the act. forms
of banga, when of the woman
use the pass, forms of same
verb.
Esteem, t;/.(do honor to), nemeka,
nemekela, tumbixa, meneka,
menekela.
(to love), sua, nanga, Inyixa.
Eternal, adj.y -a cendeiele, -a
l&hal&ha, -a kaxidt.
Eternally, adv.y see ceaselessly
1 84
ETERNITY— EXCEPT.
Eternity, n. (forever), inatiikii(pl.
of 5) onso, l&hal&ha, cende-
lele, kaxldi. The last three
words are advs.
Eunuch, >f.(one castrated), ma-
tungula, I.
Evacuate, v.(go out from), lu-
huka, umuka, h&tuka.
the bowels, nylna.
Evangelist, n., mutanKadlkl (col-
loq.), I.
Evaporate, w., kama, uma.
for salt, vt., ensa.
Even, be, vi,, fuanangana, alca-
na, akanangana, langakana,
hungakana, hunga, kele-
mena, dieleka, lamakana;
vt.f make, akflxangana, lan-
gakflxa, ludlkila, hunga-
kjlxa, fuanylkixa, kelemexa,
elekexa, akflxa.
(be parallel), vi., lul&ma; vt.,
make, ludlka.
Evening, »., dilQlo, 5; dlba(5) as
subj. of V. uhuka.
Ever, adv,, see ceaselessly.
Everlasting, oJ;., -a cendelele,
-a l&hal&ha, -a kaxldi.
Every, oJ;., onso. Generally use
pi.
(every one of them, totality), ».,
buon8o(6) with poss. pro.
(each, distributive), see § 94 and
Rem.
-body, bantu bonso.
-thing, blntn blonso.
-where, use the locatives insep.
with onso.
Everybody, n., bantu bonso.
Everything, n., blntu blonso.
Everywhere, adv,j use locatives
insep. with onso.
Evil, n., bualu(6) bubl, muan-
da(2) mubl, bubl(6). Often
we hear simply mabl and mlbi,
indicating that the pi. of bualu
and muanda are generally used
instead of the sing.
adj., bi.
Exact, be, vi., akanangana, die-
leka, kumbana, vula; v/.,
make, akflxa, akikxangana,
kumb&xa, vudlxa, elekexa.
(exact number), vi., ula, xika;
also the adj. forms xlla and
kanda. Cinunu with ciule
or cixlke, an exact thousand.
Note that ciule and dxike
are p.p.
Exactly, adv.{tTu\y), use the fol-
lowing nouns as adverbs: bu-
lUela, bualabuala, bulklkxa,
buxua, buinabuina.
(very), mene.
Exactness, n., see truth.
Exaggerate, vt., dlundlxa or lun-
dlxa with bualu(6).
Exalt, T;/.(eztol), tumbixa, In-
yixa.
ExAiciNE, vt.f by handling, ienga,
lamba.
by looking at, mona, xoxa, tan-
glla.
by measuring, Idikixa, elekexa.
by questioning, konka, ebexa.
by tasting, lablla.
Example, n.(fable), muanv, 2;
luxlminyinyu, 4; lusumul-
nu, 4.
(illustration), cifuanylklxa, 7.
(sample, specimen, copy), clmon-
yinu, 7; cldikixllu, 7; cUe-
xUu.
Exasperate, see annoy.
Excavate, vt., Imba, umbula.
Exceed, vt., tamba, hlta.
(be left over), vi., x&la.
(be more than enough), v».,
sambuka.
Exceedingly, adv., see veky.
Excel, vt., tamba, hlta.
Excellence, n., buimpe, 6; bu-
lengele, 6; buakane, 6.
Excellent, adj. (good), Impe, len-
gele, akane.
Except, sub. conj., neg. condition
equivalent of if not, unless, use
neg. of usual conditional forms
as indicated under § 460.
EXCEPT— EXPLAIN.
I8S
Except {continued),
, prep. Perhaps best expressed by
a vph. with x&la; as, bantu
bonso bakuya, umae adl
muz&le, <iU the people have
gone except one.
vt,, xla.
Excess, be, in v., tamba or hlta
with bunsl(6).
Excessively, see very.
Exchange, v/., zintaktkxa, xlnta,
xlntakana, xintakanya, hln-
gakanya, hlngakflxa, hlnga-
kana, sombakflxa.
Excite, i;/. (frighten), clnylxa; vi,
(be excited), handlka mucl-
ma(2), clna, lakala, kanka.
(provoke animal to bite), k^&ba
luoxl(4).
Exclaim, v., in surprise, k«ma, tua
clk«ina(7).
(tell), amba.
Exclamation, »., clk«ma, 7.
make an, v., tua clkCma.
See Interjections in Grammar,
§437-
Exclude, vt,, hldla, benga, umn-
xa, h&tula, fflla.
(except), xia.
ExcOBiMUNiCATE, vt,, luhula, umu-
xa, h&tula.
Excrement, »., tafl(tulnvl), pi.
of 8. See B.L.-Eng.
hard, as result of constipation,
«., mpaka, 3.
discharge, vt., nylna.
Excuse, vt., see pardon.
Exhaust, i;/.(spend), tangadlxa,
tansalfixa, muansalflxa,
nyanga, ona, dla.
(be exhausted, spent), vi,, tan-
gadlka, nyanguka, muanga-
Iflka, hua, xika, tangalflka,
onoka.
(weaken), vt,, tekexa, susula;
Vf.(be weak), teketa, hanga,
susuka.
Exhaustion, n,, butekete, 6;
dihangu, 5.
Exhibit, v, (show),lexa.
Exhort, v. (tell), amblla.
Exhortation, «., di, 5. PL is
me.
Exist, see be.
Existence, n,, suggest infin. kul-
k&la.
Exorcise, vt,, hongola( ?).
Expand, vi,, tuntumuka, ula,
tantamlka; vt,, tuntumuxa,
uxa, tantamlxa.
Expect, v^.(look for), tekemena,
alamlna.
Expectorate, v., tulla or ela with
lute(4). Note that the pi. of
lute is mate. §51.
Expectoration, n., lute, 4. The
pi. is mate, see § 51.
Expedite, vt,, endexa.
Expel, vt., umuxa, ftbla, h&tula,
luhula.
Expend, v. (pay), futa.
recklessly, vt., tangadlxa, tan-
galflxa,muangalflxa,nyanga,
ona, dla; vi.{hc expended),
tangadlka, muangalflka hua,
xika, tangalflka, onoka,
nyanguka.
Expense, n.(price), muxlnga, 2.
(pay), »., dlfutu, 5.
Expensive, adj,, -a muxlnga(2)
muk&le.
make, vt., bandlxa muxlnga.
Experience, to have, v.(to know),
mflnya.
(be accustomed to), v., Ibldlla,
lobokela.
Expert, adj,, -a lungenyi(4), -a
mexi(pl. of 5 or 6).
Expire, ^.(breathe out), ela mu-
huya(2).
(die), fua.
(of time), V,, leha, nenga; as,
haleha eltuha, nendue, when
a short time has expired, I
shall come.
Explain, v., amba.
to, vt,, amblla, iyixa, longexa,
mtknylxa, lubukixa.
(show), lexa.
i86
EXPLODE—FAINTNESS.
Explode, vi., Jlknka, taylka,
xlbuka; vt,^ Jlkula, taylxa,
xlbula.
Expose, vi.(be visible), appear,
mueneka, iniieka.
(open), vt.y bulula.
(show), vt.j lexa.
Extend, ^/.(as hand), olola.
(reach down to), vt., tua ku.
(reach to), vi.y flka.
Extended, a<i;.(long), le.
Extension, extent, ^.(distance,
dimension), bale, 6; banlne,
6; bulhl, 6; iitanta(3) mule,
ntaiita(3) muihl.
Exterior, »., ha nylma(3), ku
nyima.
External, adj,, -a ha nylina(3),
-a ku nylma.
ExTiNGXnsH, vt.y Jima.
Extol, t;/., tumblxa, Inyixa.
Extra, adv.y see very.
(extra amount added to close
trade), n. nsekididi, 3; ma-
tabixa, pi. of 5 or 6; ntente-
kedl,3.
Extract, v/., tula.
Extraordinary, adj., -a kuk^ma*
(great), nine.
Extravagantly, spend, vt.y nyan-
ga, tangadixa, tangalfixa,
muangalAxa, dla, ona.
Extremely, see very.
Extricate, v^. (disentangle), Jin-
gulula, Yungulula.
(loosen) sulula, kutula.
Exult, v.{hc happy), sanka.
Eye, n.y disu, 5. PI. is mesu.
(a disease of, in which pupil
becomes white with consequent
blindness), lusongo, 4.
-brow, diklki, 5.
-lash, lulavl, 4; iukofla, 4.
-lid, cllavinyi, 7; cilabuidl, 7.
of needle, disu, 5.
open, vt.j bulula, handa, tab&Ia.
pupil of, lumiknyl, 4.
shut, vt.y bulka.
Fable, n., luxlmlnylnyu, 4; lusn*
mulnu, 4; muanu,^2.
tell a, vt.y ela with any one of the
above words as obj.
Fabricate, v.^ dlnga, xtma, dlxn-
ba.
Face, n. There is no word for the
face as such. The word for
forehead, cheek, eyes, etc.,
must be used according to
sense. The word mp&la(3),
forehead, is often used in general
sense for face,
(before one's face), ku mp&la,
ku mesu(pl. of 5).
v.y each other, tanglxangana
(mp&la).
Facing, be, v., each other, tangl-
xangana (mp&la, 3).
Fact, n. (affair), bualu, 6; muan-
da, 2.
(truth), bulilela, bulkftxa, bu-
xua, bualabuala, buina-
bulna. All these are pi. of 6.
Factory, «., tradings nsubu(3) wa
blntu.
Fade, i;^., tutuka, tanduka.
Fag, vt.y hanga.
Fail, f. (attempt and fail), banga.
to do, humblxa, bumba.
Fain, '^.(to wish), sua, nanga,
Inyixa.
Faint, v. (swoon), fua with cls«-
ke(7) or tungulungu(pl. of 8)
or clfuldixe(7).
from dizziness, see dizzy.
from hunger, fua n8&la(pl. of 3
or 4), ns&la as subj. of v.
xiha with the person as obj.
be, ^/^.(weak), teketa.
be, f»'.( weary), hanga, susuka.
sound, n. (whispering), dinun-
ganyi, 5.
Faintness, n. (dizziness), lunyun-
gu, 4; kantetu, 8; kanyun-
gunyungu, 8; dinyungu, 5.
(as in smothering), cifuidixe, 7.
(tiredness), dibangu, 5.
FAIR— FASHION.
187
Fair, ati;. (handsome), impe,akane,
lengele, -a mpocl (slang),
(honest), Impe, akane, lengele,
-a kalolo(8).
of skin. A native of light color is
said to be mukunz6(red), the
European is mutoke( white).
Fairness, w. (honesty), kalolo, 8;
buimpe, 6; buakane, 6;
buleng^ele, 6.
(color), butoke, 6.
Faith, n. Perhaps best to use the
infin. kuitabuxa, to believe.
(have faith in one), vt., teke-
mena.
Faithful, arf/. (diligent). Use some
such ph. as -a muctma(2)
wa iiiudimu(2); the neg. v.
with bufuba(6) or bukata(6).
Faithfulness, w., kalolo, 8.
Fall, v., bona, kuluka, xlmbuka,
xinda(the Reflexive form, dl-
xinda, is generally used of per-
sons tripping and falling).
(as rain), loka, m&ta.
backwards, dixinda bualama.
by accident, flnuka.
in, cave in, bumbuka.
in price, hueka, teketa.
out, see quarrel.
over, topple, tbkoka.
overboard, bona mu ml.
(sink, as river), bueka.
to pieces, tangalikka, tanga*
dika.
Falls, «. (cataract), cibila, 7.
From bila, to boil.
False, be, 2;., xima, dinga, dimba.
Falsehood, «., dlxima, 5; didin-
ga, 5. PI. maximl and ma-
dingi.
tell a, v.y xima, dinga, dimba
(Buk.).
(tell falsehood on one), vt., use
the Applied Form ximinyina,
dingila, dimbila.
Falsely, accuse, v/., banda.
Falter, vi.^ bumbakana, tata-
kana, di ne micima Ibidi,
nema with mucima as subj.
Fame, «.(report), lumu, 4.
(to have fame or be famous), v.,
tumba.
Familiar, be, v. (accustom to),
ibidlla, lobokela.
Familiarize with, vf., ibldixa.
Family, w., see tribe.
Famine, n., ciole, 7; lukota, 4.
Famish, v.y fua ns&la(pl. of 3 or
4), ns&la as subj. of xlba with
the person as obj.
Famous, adj., nine, tumbe(p.p.
of tumba, to be famous).
Fan, v., uba(as one's self), heba.
(blow away, as chaff), vt., be-
bula, buxa, bublxa.
Fancy, T;.(think, imagine), amba;
as, wakuamba ne "Ncintu
cia kudla,** he fancied that it
was something to eat.
(wish), v.f sua, nanga, Inyixa.
Fang, n., dinu, 5; luz&di, 4;
luz&la, 4; luala, 4.
Far, adv., use the locatives insep-
arably with le, giving mule,
kule and hale. Also the
forms kuakua, muamua,
baba', § 163, Note 3; we may
also have kuntu kule, muntu
mule and bantu bale, § 423
(2) (a),
(as far as), ku.
(be far apart), vi., di with the
locatives inseparably connected
with le.
-famed, adj., see famous.
(how far?), bule(6) withmunyi?
or bixi?
Farewell, see adieu.
Far-famed, adj., see famous.
Farm, n., budimi, 6; cibidi(Buk.),
7-
Farther, adv., use compai-ative
construction with tamba or
bita; as, mulumi wakutamba
mukikxi kuela mucl, the man
threw the stick farther than the
woman.
Fashion, «. (custom), cilele 7;
cibilu, 7; cienzedl 7.
i88
FASHION— FELLOW.
Fashion (cotUinued).
in this, thus, adv,, niinku(nenku,
nanku).
Fast, aJv.(quickly), use the noun
fonns lubllu(4) and lukfl-
8a(4).
(tightly), blkftle.
v., Jila bidla(pl. of 7).
Fasten, vt.{as axe, hoe, etc., in
handle), banglza.
box, lid, cover, etc., bangika.
(lock), ela or xlblka followed by
n8&h!(3).
(nail), kumlna or hohela fol-
lowed by muloiida(2).
(strengthen), kiUexa.
(tie), sulka.
Fat, n., of an animal, dilnyl, 5;
the pi. mlnyl is used after the
fat has been rendered; or to
represent a quantity of fat.
(oil), mlnylCpl. of dUnyl, 5).
grow, vi.f diunda, lunda.
Father, n., tatu, i ; nylsu, i ; x'«
The last two words always
have the poss. pro. enclitic.
§§ 138; 42, Note I.
Father-in-law, n., tatu-nmenu,
§42, Note 3; x^-(poss. pro. as
enclitic) -muenu. $§ 42, Note
2; 138.
The husband may also call his
father-in-law iimku(i), not so
the wife.
Fathom, n., of cloth, lubandu, 4.
(two fathoms, half a piece of eight
yards), dlfunka, 5.
Fatigue, v/., hanglxa, tekexa.
(be fatigued), vi,, hanga, te-
keta.
fi., butekete, 6; dlhangu, 5.
Fatten, vi.y dlundlxa, lundlxa.
Fault, n.^ bualu, 6; muanda, 2.
Favor, n. (mercy), luse, 4.
show to, v., ha luse.
(have favor with one), dt ne
dlkftsa(5) kndl (muntu) ; as,
ndl ne dlkflsa kudl make-
lenge, I have favor with the
chief.
Fear, n., baowa, 6.
(of animals), mb&xlb&xi, pi. of
3 or 4.
v., clna.
(of animals), v., bftxa.
Fearfxtl, be, v., clna, dl ne
buowa(6).
(as animals), v., b&xa, di ne
mb&xlb&xl(3).
Fearless, see brave.
Feast, n., bldla, pi. of 7.
marriage, bldla bla dlbanil-
xa(5).
Feather, n., lus&Ia, 4.
Features, n. No distinct word,
use mp&la(3), the forehead.
See FACE.
February, n., febluale(£ng.).
Fecund, be, v. (have power to bear
young), dl ne followed by
lalela(4) or dlmlnu(5) or
buledl(6). ,
Fecundate, i//.(cause to conceive)
Imlclxa.
FECTTNDiry, n., lulelu, 4; dlmlnn,
5; buledl, 6.
Federation, n., bnlunda, 6; bun-
yana, 6.
Fee, n., dlfntu, 5.
Feeble, adj., tekete(p.p. of teke-
ta, to be feeble).
Feebleness, n., butekete, 6.
Feed, vt,, dlxa.
Feel, v., after, to grope, bubuta.
(be conscious of), unva, ufua.
Clakadl mnnve kabua8a(8)
kansuma, I did not feel the
jigger biting me,
(touch), v., lamblla, lamba,
lenga.
Feign, v., xlmlxa, dinglxa, dim*
blxa(Buk.).
Fell, vt., xumbula, uhula.
Fellow, fi.(person), muntu, i.
citizen, one of same tribe or
family, muan*etu, etc.;muena
kuetu, etc.; mukuetu, etc.
§§ 138, Rem. 5; 141, Rem. i;
142.
FELLOWSHIP— FINGER.
189
Fellowship^ n.(friendship), bu-
lunda, 6; bunyana, 6.
break off, vt., xlha.
form with one another, kuatan-
sana followed by bulunda or
bunyana.
Female, n., mukflxl, i.
adj.y kflxl, mukjixl wa or mu-
kjlxi'a.
Feminine, adj., -a bakthxi(pl. of
I).
Fence, n., lumbu, 4; luhangu, 4;
cihangu, 7.
Ferment, t;. (effervesce), s&ba.
Fern, n., clxllnxtlu, 7; Inlelelele,
4-
Ferocious, adj.y -a clxl(7).
(as a biting animal), -a laoxl(4).
Ferocity, n.(anger), clxl, 7.
(the biting of an animal), luoxt,
4-
Ferry, n., clsabu, 7; dllobo, 5;
clsabukllu, 7.
across, v/., sabula; vi.(go
across), sabuka.
Fertile, adj. {as soil), impe, len-
gele, akane, kftle, -a luiya(4).
(producing young), v., di ne
followed by dtmlna(5) or
lulelu(4) or buledl(6).
Fetch, vt.^ lua ne.
back, aluklxa, hlngftxa, hin-
glxa, tuclxa.
(carry), tuala.
water from stream, suna.
Fetid, be, vph., nunka muhu-
ya(2) mubl.
Fetidness, n., kahambu, 8; ma-
huya(2) mubl.
Fetish, n., see medicine.
Fetter, vt., ela mu lukanu(4).
Fetters, n., lukanu, 4.
Fever, n., kahla, 8.
have, vph., use mubldl(2) as
subject of dl with kahla as
predicate noun.
Few, adj., nya-nya, b&le, kise,
Ibl.
Fewness, n., bunyabunya, 6;
bub&le, 6; buklse, 6.
Fibre, »., of palm leaves, used for
making cloth, luhiku, 4;
munyanga, 2.
Fickle, be, vi., humbakana, nema
with mucima(2) as subj.,
tatakana, di ne miclma
Ibidl.
Fidgety, be, vi., sasakata.
Field, n., budiml, 6; clbldl(Buk.),
7.
clear a, vt.y sola, sengula.
old deserted, n., lububa, 4.
(open place, plain), »., mpata, 3.
Fierce, oJ;. (angry), -a clxl(7).
(as a biting animal), -a lu 0x1(4).
Fierceness, ».(anger), clxl, 7.
(as of a biting animal), Inoxl, 4.
Fifth, ard. num., Itanu. § 99.
Fight, n., nvlta(nflta), 3.
v., luangana nvlta.
(call to fight , v.y kobola.
File, v/., to a point, songa.
n.(row), mulongo, 2.
Fill, vt., uxa, knmb&xa, vudixa;
Vf.(be full), ula, vula, knm-
bana.
up, as a hole, xlblklla.
Filth, see dirt.
Filthiness, «. (untidiness about
ones' person or house), bu-
koya, 6.
Filthy, see dirty.
Fin, n., on back, mualala, 2.
(tail fin), clhehe, 7.
Find, vt., mona, tangila, xoxa.
(be found, appear), vi., mue-
neka, mueka.
(find and pick up), vt., angula.
(meet up with), sangana.
something hidden, vt., sokolola.
Fine, «., dlfutu, 5.
adj.{gpod), Impe, akane, len-
gele.
(sharp, as point), tue(p.p. of tua,
to be sharp).
(small), kIse, b&le, nya-nya.
(be powdered), vi., beta.
Finery, n., bilenga, pi. of 7.
Finger, n., munu, 2.
(additional or sixth), kanene, 8.
IQO
FINGER— FLASH.
Finger {continued).
little, kantengenene, 8.
(thumb), ciala, 7.
Finger-ring, n., kakana(8) ka ku
munu(2).
Finish, f/., mfina, mdnylxa, xl-
klxa, huixa; v«.(be finished),
hua, xlka, mana.
(cease), v., lekela.
Fire, n., kahia, 8; kadilu, 8.
a gun, vt.f ela cliigoma(7).
(be fired or burnt), v*., hia.
-brand, torch, w., cimunyl, 7.
extinguish, vt,^ Jlma.
(flame), n., ludinii(4) lua kahia.
(make, to burn), vt.^ temexa,
hixa; (by blowing), huxa.
(make with sticks by friction), v.,
vlnga kahia.
miss, not go off, v.y funga.
-place, n., dlku, 5. PI. is meku.
set on, bum, z//., oxa.
stir the, vt.^ son sola.
-wood, «., lukunyi, 4. Gener-
ally use pi.
Firebrand, n., cimunyl, 7.
Firefly, «., kamunyimunyi, 8;
kankenyenkenye, 8.
Fireplace, n., dlku, 5. PI. is
meku.
Fire-wood, w., lukunyi, 4. Gen-
erally use pi.
break up, vt.^ caba.
cut, vt.y kuota.
Firm, ^^/.(hard), klile(p.p. of k&la,
to he firm).
(be steady), vi.y kanana, kan-
damana, xindama. Jama,
k&ia; vt.y kanfixa, kanda-
mixa, Jamixa, k&lexa.
Firmament, «., dlulu, 5.
Firmly, adv., biklile.
Firmness, «., bukille, 6.
First, adj., in place or time, -a
kumiidllu, -a ku mp&la(3),
bedi, -a diambedi(5), -a ku
mutu(2).
(be or do first in time), v., dian-
Jila followed by infin.
(be, to excel), vi.y tamba, hita.
First {continued).
-born, n., muan*a bute(6); (of
twins), clbuabu, 7.
adv.y kumudilu, ku mp&la(3),
ku mutu(2).
Fish, n., munylnyl(2) wa mu ml.
electric, nyixi, 3.
(fisherman), cilembi, 7.
-hook, ndoho, 3.
-trap, mukinda, 2.
net, bukuondo, 6.
v.y with hook, loha.
Fisherman, «., cilembi, 7.
Fish-hook, «., ndoho, 3.
Fish-trap, «., mukinda, 2.
Fist, «., cisusu, 7; disundu, 5.
clench the, vt.y tony a mlnu.
strike with, vt.y tua or kuma or
tuta followed by cisusu or
disundu.
Fit, V*. (agree), akana, akanan-
gana, dieleka, fuanangana,
kelemena; v«.(make to), akft-
xangana, akikxa, elekexa,
fuanyikixa, kelemexa.
flrf;. (proper, good), impe,akane,
lengele.
w.(spasm), cis^ke, 7, tungu-
lungu, pi. of 8; nkoyi, 3.
be unconscious from, v.y fua with
any one of the above words,
to have a, v.y haluka followed
by one of the above words.
Five, card, num.y tanu. Takes
Secondary Prefixes. In ab-
stract counting use i tanu. §97.
Fix, v. (appoint, as a day), amba.
(after being broken or disar-
ranged), vt.y enza bimpe, lon-
golola, akfixa.
(fixed firmly), see immovable.
Flag, n., nfuele, 3; dibandala, 5.
Flame, n., ludimi(4) lua kahia(8).
Flap, v/.(as bird in flying), haha*
la.
about, vi.y dikuha.
in the wind, vi.y hehuka.
Flash, w., of lightning, see light-
ning.
v.{as lightning), henya, kenya.
FLAT— FOOLISH.
191
Flat, be, vi., batama, butama,
landakana.
Flatten, vL, batamixa, butamixa,
landaktixa, bacika.
Flavor, «.(good smell), muhu-
ya(2) muimpe, n8uiiga(3).
(good taste), nse(3), kutua(in-
fia.) kuimpe.
Flaw, «.(crack), mutanta, 2.
Flea, n., mukenya, 2.
Flee, vi., nyema, cimuka.
Flesh, w., munylnyi, 2.
(fat), dllnyl, 5.
(lean), ngulunge, 3.
Flexibility, n.,muxobo(muJobo),
2.
Flexible, be, vi., xoboka, nyen-
gabala, di ne muxobo(2).
Flight, put to, vL, Ih&ta, nye-
mexa, cimuna.
take, as bird in act of flying, v.,
buka, tuhuka.
Flint, «., dibue, 5.
Flint-lock, gun, nph., ciiigoma(7)
cia mutengu(2).
Float, vi., lelema, lelemuka.
P^LOCK, »., clsumba, 7.
Flog, vL, kuma, tuta, kengexa.
Flood, be, a, v., use ml as subj. of
Yulangana or tuntumuka.
Floor, n., use generally the prepo-
sitional form hanxi ha; as,
hanxi ha nsubu, the floor of
the house.
Flour, n., bakula, 6.
Flow, vi., down, hueka.
into each other, as two streams
meeting, sambakana, sangi-
la, tuangana.
Flower, n., cllongo, 7; clsu, 7.
of palm, musik^l^ke, 2.
vi., vunguluka, baluluka.
Flute, n., luxiba, 4.
Fly, v. (rise in flight), buka, tu-
huka.
(flap the wings in flight), hahala.
«., clxi, 7.
horse-, cibanda, 7.
(which blows meat), lujljl, 4.
Foam, n., lututu, 4; lukende, 4.
Foe, «., muena(i) lukuna(4).
Foetus, »., immature, kana(dimia
of muana) kabixe.
Fog, n., dibungi, 5.
Fold, vt., bunya.
arms, divunga.
back, cibulula.
(embrace), uhukila.
legs, in sitting position, ditonya,
divunga, konya(as women),
(roll up), vunga, vungila; (by
bending), tonya, konya.
up, kuta, i.e., to wrap up.
n., see enclosure.
Folk, n., baiitu(pl. of muntu, i.)
Folk-lore, n., muanu, 2; lusu-
muinu, 4; luximinyinyu, 4.
Follow, vt., londa, ya ku nyl-
ma(3).
(as attendant), l&m&ta.
Follower, w. (attendant), mul&-
m&ci, I.
Folly, n. (acting foolishly), bu-
cimbe, 6; bucimbakane, 6;
buhumbakane, 6.
(stupidity), buhote, 6; buxib&le,
6.
Fondle, vt., hotela, lambakana,
bohiba.
Food, n., bidla, pi. of 7; nxlma,
pi. of 3 or 4; bia kudia.
Fool, n., muhale, i ; mubuluke^ i ;
mutomboke, i. These words
are noun derivatives from the
verbs hala, buluka and tom-
boka, which mean to he crazy,
etc.
(one acting foolishly), muelmbe,
I ; mucimbakane, i ; muhum-
bakane, i. These words are
derived from the verbs cimba,
cimbakana and humbakana,
meaning to act foolishly.
(a stupid person), muhote, i;
muxib&le, i. These words
are from the verbs hota and
xtb&le, to he stupid.
vt., cimbixa, humbixa.
Foolish, adj.(craizy), hale, buluke,
tomboke. These words are
192
FOOLISH— FORETELL.
Foolish {continued),
p.p. from the verbs hala and
buluka and tomboka, to he
crazy.
(of one acting foolishly), clmbe,
clmbakane, humbakane.
These words are p.p. of the
verbs clmba, cimbakana,
humbakana, to act foolishly.
(stupid), bote, xib&le. These
words are p.p. of beta and
zlb&la, to he stupid.
Foolishly, to act, v., cimba, cim-
bakana, humbakana.
Foolishness, «. (acting foolishly),
buctmbe, 6; bucimbakane, 6;
buhumbakane, 6.
(dementia), butomboke, 6; bu-
bal e, 6; bubuluke, 6.
(stupidity), bubote, 6; baxl-
b&le, 6.
Foot, n., dikflsa, 5.
cloven, iniikono(2) muhandlke.
(hoof), mukono, 2.
(paw), dikama, 5.
sole of, munda mua dlkAsa.
FoOTPRiNT,n.,cldiacllu, 7; dlktksa,
5; dikama, 5; mukono, 2.
For, prep.(do for), use Applied
Form of verb.
-ever, see ceaselessly.
(price in trading), ku; as,
waktila cllulu ku lukama
lua mlbela, I hought the clpth
for 100 cowries.
(purpose), generally use the infin.
preceded by -a; as, blntu bla
kudla, things for eating. §
239 (6).
(space of time), simply state
length of time without any
prepositional word; as, naku-
lalamu matuku abldl, I staid
there for two days.
this reason, therefore, ka.
(too . . . for), use the verbal
construction with tamba or
hita; as, muz^te udl un tam-
ba bujitu, the hox is too heavy
forme.
For (continued).
(what for? why?), use Applied
Form of verb followed by
the interrogatives clnyl, etc
5420.
suh. conj., see because.
Forbear, v., lekela.
Forbid, vt.y hldla, benga, kanda.
(taboo), Jidlka, Jlla.
(thing forbidden), n., cljlla, 7.
Forbidden thing, n., cljlla, 7.
Force, ft.(strength), bukftle, 6;
ngulu, pi. of 3; dlkanda, 5.
(by force), ku bukHle.
v.(compel), use Causative Form
of verb.
Ford, n., dllobo, 5; clsabn, 7;
clsabukllu, 7.
v., sabuka.
Forefather, n., kaku, i; nyln-
k(a), i; muena(i) kale.
Forehead, n., mp&la, 3.
Foreign, adj.^ -a kule, -a cl«
8amba(7) clkuabo.
country of the white Inan, «.,
mputu, 3. See note under
mputu in B.L.-£ng.
Foreigner, n., muena(i) kule,
muena cl8ambu(7) clkuabo,
muena mputu(3).
Foreleg, n., diboko, 5.
Foremost, adj.^ bedl, -a kumu-
dllu, -a ku n]p&la(3), "^ ku
mutu(2), -a dlambedi(5).
(be foremost in doing), v., dlan-
Jlla.
Forenoon, n. There is no special
word for the entire forenoon,
use some such ph. as dlnda(5)
to ne ku munda munya(2).
about middle of, mlsasa, pi. of 2.
Foreordain, vph.y sungula dlam-
bedl.
Foreskin, «., musundu, 2; mu-
SO80, 2; bukutu, 6.
Forest, »., dltw, «:. PI. ismetu.
(coDse on a olain), dbnka, 7.
Foretell, vph.^ amba dlambedl
bua]u(6) kabul buania(e)ku-
lua.
FOREVER— FRAGMENT.
193
Forever, adv,^ see ceaselessly.
Forewarn, vi.^ dimuxa.
Forfeit, v. (pay), futa.
(lose in gambling). The person
losing is the obj. of the v. t&ha.
Forge, vL, tula,fula.
Forget, v. Use any one of the
following constructions:
(i) ]IIuoyo(2) as subj. of the v.
hua with the person forgetting
as the obj.
(2) Use the verb hua with the
person forgetting as subj. and
maoyo following the verb.
(3) Use bulla(6) or kafule-
meiie(8) as subj. of the v.
kuata with the person forget-
ting as the obj.
(4) Use V. hanga, especially
when forgetting a person is
meant.
Forgetful, adj,y -a c!hua(7)
maoyo(2), -a balla(6), -a
kafalemene(8). The last
word is Buk.
Forgetfulness, n.y clhua(7)miio-
yo(2); builu, 6; kafnle-
meiie(Buk.), 8.
Forgive, see pardon.
Fork, n.(for table), nkalafa, 3.
of river, path, dlsangu, 5. PI. is
generally used,
of stick or tree, clhanda, 7;
mpandakanya, 3.
(forked stick), maci(2) wa cl-
handa, muci wa mpanda-
kanya.
Form, n. (shape), mubidl, 2.
v/. (create), fuka.
(cut or carve), songa.
(forge), tula, fula.
friendship with one another,
kuatangana followed by bu-
landa(6) or bun7aiia(6).
(make), enia, osa, klxa.
pots, fumba, flmba(fuimba).
Fornication, n., masandl, pi. of
5 or 6.
commit, v., enda masandl,
sanda.
Fornicator, n., maena(i) ma-
sandl(pl. of 5 or 6).
Forsake, vL^ (leave), xia, lekela.
(refuse), hldia, benga.
Forth, adv. This is generally ex-
pressed in the verb root; as,
luhuka and umaka and h&-
taka, to go forth from.
(go back and forth), vi,, tamba-
kana.
Forthwith, adv,, katataka, die-
dlono, mpindeu.
Fortitude, n.,dlkima, 5; bukitu,
6.
Fortunate, be, v., dl ne followed
by dlkasa(5) dimpe or mu-
abl(2) or dle8e(5) or mubi-
di(2) mulmpe.
Fortune, n., bad, dlktksa(5) dlbl,
miibidi(2) mubl.
good, dikjisa dimpe, miiabl(2),
dle8e(5), mubidl mulmpe.
(wealth), blntu, pi. of 7; bluma,
pi. of 7; luhetu, 4.
Forward, adv., ku mp&la(3), ku*
mudilu, ku mutu(2).
(be forward or first in doing), v.
dlanjila followed by infin.
Forwards, adv., see forward.
(go backwards and forwards), v.,
tambakana.
Foul, see dirty, bad, rotten.
Foulness, «.(of person), bukoya,
6; manyanu, pi. of 5 or 6;
mblndu, pi. of 3 or 4.
Fountain, ». (spring), mpokolo» 3.
Four, card, num., nl. Takes Sec-
ondary Prefixes. In abstract
counting use inf. § 97.
Fourth, ord. num,, Inl. § 99,
Fowl, «., nsolo, 3.
(cock), citlla, 7.
guinea-, dikangala, 5.
(hen), clkukue, 7.
Fracture, v/., cibula; w.(be frac-
tured), clbuka.
Fragile, adj.y tekete(p.p. of te-
keta, to be fragile.)
Fragment, w., of anything broken
or cut off, cltuha, 7.
194
FRAGMENT— FROTH.
Fragment (continued).
of anything split, cih^su, 7.
Fragrance, »., muliuya(2) mu-
impe, nsuiiKa(3).
Fragrant, adj., -a muhuya(2)
muimpe, -a nsunga(3).
Frail, adj.^ tekete(p.p. of teketa,
to be frail).
Franc, w., nfuIanka(French), 3.
Fraud, «.(a lie), dixima, 5; di-
dinga, 5. PI. of these words
generally used, which is ma-
ximi and madlngi.
Fraudulent person, «.(liar),
inuena(i) ludimi(4), muxi-
ml(i), mudiiigi(i), muena fol-
lowed by maxlmi(pl. of 5) or
madingi(pl. of 5) or inafl(pl.
of 5). The sing, of maximl
and madlngi is dixima and
didinga, respectively,
(thief), muibi, i; muivl, i;
muena mucima(2).
Free, v/. (acquit), binglxa.
(let loose), lekela, kuhola, su-
lula, kutula; vi.(get free),
tuka, suluka, kuhoka(ko-
hoka).
-man, w., muntu(i) wa bende,
muana(i) mulela, muntu
mudixikamine.
(redeem from slavery), vt., hl-
kula.
adj.{ioT nothing), -a hatuhu,
-a cinana.
Free-born person, «., muana(i)
muiela, muntu(i) mudixi-
kamine, muntu wa bende.
Freedom, n., budixikamine, 6.
to give, see free.
Freeman, n., muana(i) mulela,
m u n t u( i) mudixikamine,
muntu wa bende.
Frequently, adv. Use pi. of
musangu(2) or cikondo(7) or
musunsu(2) followed by any
word meaning many. This
idea may sometimes be ex-
pressed by the Repetitive or
Habitual tenses of the verb.
Fresh, adj. (as palm wine, not
strong), tekete(p.p. of teketa,
to be fresh).
become, vi., blxika.
(green or uncooked), bixe.
(new), bla-hia.
Fret, v., nyingabala*
Fretful, be, vi.y nyingabala.
Friction, make fire by, v., ylnga
kahia(8).
Friday, w., dituku(5) dltann.
Friend, n., mulunda, i ; nyan(a),
I.
Friendship, n., bulunda, 6; bun*
yana, 6.
break, vt., xlha.
form, vt., kuatangana.
Fright, n., buowa, 6.
(as of frightened animals), mb&-
xib&xi, pi. of 3 or 4.
Frighten, vt., cinyixa, bandixa
mucima(2), zakikxa mucima;
vi.{he frightened), handika
mucima, cina, zakala, kan-
ka, buowa as subj. of kuata
with the person as obj.
(be timid, as wild animal), vi.,
b&xa, di ne mb&xib&xi(pl. of
3 or 4)-
(startle), vt., tabuluxa; w.,
tabuluka.
Frivolous, adj., -a tus«ku(pl. of
8).
(be always laughing for nothing),
lembakana.
Frog, «. (large), mbondo, 3.
(small), ludimba, 4.
From, prep., ku.
(from ... to, until), ku . . . to
ne ku, ku . . . ne ku, or
sometimes simple ne connect-
ing the two parts.
Front, «., end, ku mutu(2), ku
mp&la(3).
in, ku mp&la, kumudilu, ku
mutu.
(in front of), ku mp&la kua,
kumudilu kua, ku mutu kua.
leg, diboko, 5.
Froth, n., lututu, 4; lukende, 4.
FROWN— GAMBLE.
195
Frown, v,, nyenga or fudika with
mp&la(3).
Fructify, v. (cause to conceive),
imicixa.
Fruit, «., dimoma, 5. This word
is not applied to bananas,
plantains, or pineapples; it
has reference only to such
fruits as grow on trees or
shrubs,
bear, vL, kuama.
Some of the more common fruits
are as follows:
banana, dibote, 5.
lime, dilala, 5.
mango, nsafu, 3. See note under
nsafu.
papaw, dlhahl, 5.
pineapple, kangajiiigajl, 8; dl-
kaka, 5; cikakakaka, 7.
plantain, dikuonde, 5.
small yellow fruit growing on the
plains, dixonde, 5.
Fruitful, be, vf (female), dl ne
with lulelu(4) or diminu(5) or
baledi(6).
Fruttfulness, w. (power to bear
young), lulelu, 4; diminu, 5;
buledl, 6.
Frustrate, vi., humbixa, kosexa,
ela makosa(2).
(be frustrated), vi., humba.
Fry, vt., kanga.
Frying-pan, »., clvuadl, 7; luesu,
4; nylngu, 3.
Fuel, »., lukunyl, 4. Generally
use pi.
Fugitive, »., munyemi, i.
Fulfil, v/., xikixa; vi.(he ful-
filled), xika.
Full, be, vi.^ ula, vula.
(after eating), vi., ukuta.
-grown, vi.y kS,la.
measure or quantity, w., kum-
bana, vula; 2;^(make full
measure), kumb&xa, vudixa.
moon, vpk.y ngondo(3) followed
by the v. lua clb&la(7);
ngondo may also be subj. of
tentama.
Full, be {continued) .
adj. Use the indeclinable tente
(from tentama, to be fulf); as,
mulondu udi ml tente, the
jar is full of water.
Fun, w. (laughter), kas^ku, 8.
have with, to play with, vt.y s&ba
ne, 8&bila, naya ne, s&bixa,
nayixa, s^kexa.
(joke), »., cltedt, 7. PL gener-
ally used,
(make fun of), vt., s^ka.
(to joke), v., ela bltedi, hunga.
Funny, be, -z;. (producing laughter),
sCkexa.
Furious, be, v»*.(angry), di ne or
nfua or unva with cixi(7);
or cixi as subj. of kuata with
the person as obj.
Furnace, n.(for smelting iron ore),
clkutu, 7.
Fury, w.(anger), ctxl, 7.
Fuss, »., diyoyo, 5; mutSiyo, 2.
Future, nph., use matuku(pl. of
5) followed by -a ku mp&la(3)
or -a kumudilu. The words
ng:ondo(moon) and cidimu
(season) may . be substituted,
according to sense, for matuku.
The future idea in the verb is
expressed by future tense.
6.
Gabble, v., akula blakulakula(pl.
of 7), labakana.
Gain, v., a bet or cause at court,
binga.
by trading, vph.y endulula mu-
xing:a(2) muimpe.
at gambling, v., taha. The per-
son losing is the obJ. of the v.
Gale, «.(wind), luhehele, 4.
a strong, clhuhu, 7.
blow a, v.y huha.
Gall, n., nyongangandu, 3; ka«
bululu, 8.
Gamble, v. (gain at), t&faa. The
person losing is the obj. of the
196
GAMBLE— Gil :)INESS.
Gamble {coniintiecl),
(lose at), V. The person losing
is the obj. of the V. t&ha; as,
bakunt&ha bintu bUnyt, /
fiave lost my things.
(tossing flat seeds or other ob-
jects), v., ela nzobo(pL of
luzobo, 4, which is one of the
pieces tossed).
See BET.
Game, n., dls&ba, 5; dlnaya, 5.
Gape, v., ela niuau(2).
»., muau, 2.
Garbage, n., bilii(7), bison8o(7).
Garden, n.(field), budlml, 6;
ctbldl(Buk.), 7.
(small patch in swamp in dry
season), clsenze, 7.
(small patch near house), ci-
bunda, 7.
Garment, 9i.,cllalu, 7; cllamba,7.
Gash, n., mputa, 3.
v.y t&ha.
Gate, «., clbt, 7.
Gather, v/.(as com, fruit), huola,
kuola.
(as leaves of the matamba), aka.
(as millet), nowa.
together, vt., tutakanya, tata-
kAxa, sangrlxa, sangakanya,
sangakflxa, sambakanya,
sambakflxa, kunglxa, san-
glla, sanga; vi.y tutakana,
sangakana, sambakana,kuii-
gakana, disanga, dlungulxa.
up, as tra^, boya.
Gaze, v., fixedly, mona or tangila
or xoxa followed by talala
(adv.).
Gender, see § 56.
Generate, v. (beget), tmtctxa.
(give birth), lela.
Generation, «.(line of descent),
cilongo, 7.
Generosity, w., diha, 5.
Generous, adj., -a dlha(5).
person, «., cihahl, 7.
Genius, ». (knowledge), langensi,
4; mext, pi. of 5. or 6; lu-
kanyl, 4.
Gh:ntile, nph.^ miiiitii(i) kal
]IIayuda(i).
Gentle, be, vt., hola, talala, -a
kaloIo(8), -a latulu(4).
Gentleness, n., lutnlu, 4.
(attractiveness), kalolo, 8.
Gently, adv,^ bitekete, bimpe,
bltulu.
Germ, »., in seed, dlsn, 5; muoyo,
2.
Germinate, v.(sprout), m«na.
Get, v., accustomed to, w., Ibidlla.
angry, w., dl ne clxl(7).
anything done for another, use
Applied Form of Causative,
away, to escape, w., tuka, ongo-
loka, handuka.
(become), see become.
(bring), vt,, lua ne.
down, T/t., tuluka, Ika.
drunk, v., kuaclxa maluTii.
dry, vi.y uma.
fat, vi,y diunda, Imida,
hot, vi.y lua kahla.
in, into, vi., buela.
loose, untied, w., tnka, suluka,
kuhoka.
mad (crazy), vi., buluka, hala,
tomboka.
out, vi.y luhuka, mnuka, b&-
taka.
out of the way, w., sesuka,
ehuka, nmuka.
palm wine, v.y ema.
(take up), vt.y angata, ambula,
rnSma.
up, vi.y bika, Juka.
up a tree, to climb, v.y banda.
water from spring or stream, vt,,
suna.
well, convalesce, v»., sang&la,
kflsa inubldl(2), sanguluka.
worse, v.y nemenena, nema.
Ghost, n., see spirit.
Gibberish, «., clakulakula, 7.
§356(^).
Giddiness, «., dinyungu, 5; kan-
tetu, 8; lunyungu, 4; kan«
yungunyunga.
GIDDY— GO.
197
GroDY, BE, v^/t. (dizzy), di ne fol-
lowed by dliiyungu(5) or
kantetu(8) or lunyungu(4) or
kanyanBunyun8:a(8).
Gift, »., clha, 7; also the infin.
kuha. Jisus nkuha kua
Mzambi kuakutuheye, Jesus
is the gift of God which he
has given to us.
(extra amount given to conclude
trade), matabixa, pi. of 5 or 6;
nsekididl, 3; ntentekedi, 3.
Giggle, vph.y dl ne ka8«ku(8).
PL generally used.
Giggling, n., kasdku, 8. PL gen-
erally used.
Gird, v., up the loin, ela mukl-
ya(2).
(wrap around), Jingila, Jinga,
nyengela, vunga, vungila.
Girdle, n., mukftba, 2.
Girl, n., muana(i) mukaxi(i).
(lass), muxikankunde, 2; son-
Bakttxi, I.
Girlhood, n., buxikankunde, 6;
bunsongakflxi, 6.
Give, v., ha, ambika(Buk.).
a name, v.y idlka, inylka.
birth to, v.y lela.
(hand to, pass to), hetexa,
hetela.
light, z/.,ditemena,teinena, toka.
permission, see permission.
suck to, vt.y amutxa.
to drink, 2;/., nulxa.
to eat, vt.y dtxa.
up, hanga, lekela.
Gizzard, n., dinkldinglla, 5;
dintumbu, 5.
Glad, be, vi.y sanka.
Gladden, vt,y sankixa.
Gladness, n., disanka, 5.
Glance, v.y oflf, tuya, sesuka,
ehuka.
Glass, n. (looking-), ludlmuenu, 4;
lumuenu, 4.
(tumbler), ngIas(Eng.), 3.
Gleam, 2;. (glisten), engelela, bala-
kana.
(shine), dltemena, temena.
Glisten, 2;., engelela, balakana.
Glitter, v., enselela, balakana.
Globe, »., clbulunge, 7; dibu-
lunge, 5.
Gloominess, n.(darkness), mldi-
ma, pi. of 2; muflta, 2.
Glorify, vt.^ tumblxa, meneka,
menekela, nemeka, neme«
kela, tendelela.
Glorious, arf;., nine, tunibe(p.p.
of tumba, to he glorious).
Glory, ^.(greatness), bunlne, 6.
Glow, v., ditemena, temena.
Glutton, ?t^/t.,muena(i) followed
by Iumpuku8u(4) or clhu-
sa(7) or mudiu(2).
Gluttonous, adj.y -a lumpn-
kusa(4), -a, clhasu(7), -a
madiu(2).
Gluttony, n., lumpukusu, 4;
cihusu, 7; mudlu, 2.
Gnash, v.y diangana menu.
Gnat, n., kixl, 8. Dimin. of ctxi.
Gnaw, v., kunya.
Go, v.y ya, enda.
about, ffom place to place, vi.y
endakana.
across a river, vi.y sabuka.
across a path, vi.y sambuka.
after, to follow, vt.y londa, ya ku
nyima(3) kua.
ahead of, vt.y ya with ku mp&-
la(3) kua or kumudtlu kua,
hlta, tamba.
around, vi.y cimbakana, nyun-
guluka.
away, vi.y umuka, ya.
back, to return, vi.y aluka,
alukila, hingana, hingila,
tuta, tucila, andamuka,
hinguluka.
back and forth, vi.y tambakana.
backwards, vi.y ya cianyima.
bad, vi.y bola, onoka, nyan«
guka.
down, vi.y hueka, huekela,
uhuka.
first, vi.y dianjila kuya.
in, into, vi.y buela.
let, vt.y lekela.
198
GO— GRANDPARENT.
Go {continued).
mad, vi.j buluka, hala, tom-
boka.
off accidentally, as gun, vi.,
flnukila, sohoka, disoho-
kela.
on a journey, vi., ya ku luen-
du(4).
out, vi.^ luhuka, h&tuka, umu-
ka, tambuka.
out, as fire, vi.^ JIma.
past one, vt., taita, tamba.
up, vi.^ banda.
with, to accompany, vt., flla.
Goat, w., mbuxi, 3.
(half-grown), lutumbatumba, 4.
he, mpumbu, 3.
she, dixina, 5. Has borne young.
Gq-betvveen, «., in marriage,
cibanjl, 7.
God, »., Nzambi, i. While this is
not the word native to the
Baluba and Bena Lulua, yet
it is very extensively used and
has been adopted for use in
the literature and preaching.
It comes from the Lower
Congo.
No worship is paid to God,
though there is everywhere
a distinct idea and a name
for the Supreme Being, who
at least creates if he does
not afterwards direct affairs
by his providence. For the
Supreme Being the Bena
Lulua use Nfldi Mukulu, the
Baluba use Nfldi Mukulu or
Muloho or Muloho Muowe-
xananglla.
Gold, nph.^ lukanu(4) lukunze.
Goliath-beetle, «., kababu, 8.
Good, adj., impe, lengcle, akane.
(attractive), -a kalolo(8).
keep, as salt preserving meat,
vt.y lengexa.
make, beautify, vt., lengexa.
(taste good), v., xemakana.
Good-bye, see adieu.
Goodness, n.y buimpe, 6; bulen-
gele, 6; buakane, 6.
(attractiveness), kalolo, 8.
Goods, n.y bintu, pi. of 7; biuma,
pi. of 7; luhetu, 4.
Gospel, nph.y bualu(6) bua
Nzambi.
Gourd, «., dried, ciloa, 7; cibu-
lubulu, 7.
green, clloaloa, 7.
(split crosswise), clhulu, 7; ci-
tonga, 7; cihundu, 7.
(split lengthwise), lub&lu (for
water), 4; cib&Iu (for bread),
7-
neck of, cikolokolo, 7.
Govern, v. {as chief his people).
Perhaps best expressed by the
ph. muke]enge(i) wa, chief
of; as, Lukengu udi muke-
lenge wa Bakuba, Lukengu
governs the Bakuba, i.e., is
their chief.
(as mother her child), buluklla,
samina, bila, nanga.
Government, w., bukelenge, 6;
bunfumu, 6.
Governor, w., mukelenge, i;
nfumu, I.
Grab, vt., bakula.
Grace, n.(mercy), luse, 4.
Gracious, adj., -a luse(4).
be to, vph., ha luse.
Grain, w., of corn, ditete, 5; mu-
tonda, 2; ditungu, 5.
of sand, kasoka, 8; kasenga, S;
kasele, 8. These words are
dimin. of lusoka and lusenga
and lusele, respectively.
See SEED.
Grandchild, «., muikilu, i.
Grandfather, w., kaku(i) mu-
lumi(i), nylnk(a)(i) mulu-
mid).
Grandmother, w., kaku(i) mu-
ktixl(i), nylnka(a)(i) mu-
kuxl(i).
Grandparent, «., kaku, i; nyin-
k(a), I.
GRANT— GROUP.
199
Grant, v/.(give), ha, ambika.
permission, see permission.
Grapes, nph,, mamoma(sing. di-
moma, 5) a kuenza n'& fol-
lowed by vinyo or maluvu a
mputu.
Grape-vine, nph.y muoxi(2) wa
mamoma a kuenza n*ft fol-
lowed by vinyo or maluvu a
mputu.
Grasp, vt., kuata, angata, flekela.
Grass, »., dlxlnde, 5.
tall, as on plain, clsuku, 7; bicici
(Buk.), pi. of 7.
(used in covering houses), luan-
yi, 4; cisoso, 7; lusono, 4.
PI. generally used,
(very tall and coarse), disele, 5.
Grasshopper, n., luh&su, 4.
Grateful, adj.y -a cinemu(7).
be to, v.f sekelela, ha muoyo(2),
Inyixa.
See note under thank.
Gratefulness, «., cinemu, 7.
Gratis, n.y hatuhu, cinana. These
are really adverbial words.
Gratitude, »., cinemu, 7. From
V. nemeka.
Gratuitously, adv., cinana, ha-
tuhu.
Grave, »., lukita, 4; ciduaya, 7.
Graveyard, see cemetery.
Gravy, »., musoxi, 2; mukele-
kele, 2.
Gray, d^i;.(color), tokoloke(^.p. of
tokoloka, to be gray). There
is no distinct name,
hair, n., lungufu, 4; luvi, 4.
Graze, v. (eat grass), dla ma-
xinde(pl. of 5).
Grease, »., see fat.
V.J laba mlnyi(pl. of 5).
Great, ai;. (famous), nine, tnm-
be(p.p. of tumba, to be great).
(large\ nine.
make, vt.^ tumbixa.
Greatness, »., bunlne, 6.
Greediness, n., lumpukusu, 4;
cihusu, 7; mudlu, 2.
Greedy, adj.^ -a lumpukusu(4), -a
cihusu(7), -a mudlu(2).
Green, a<f;. (color) , flke(p.p. of flka,
to be green), ilku]uke(p.p. of
ilkuiuka, to be green).
(new), hia-hia.
(not ripe), bixe.
(unripe, be), vi., bixika.
Greens, «. (leaves of cassava), ma-
tamba, pi. of 5; kalexi, 8.
Other varieties: citekuteku, 7;
mulengalenga, 2; mutete, 2;
nsampu, 3.
Greet, see salute.
Gree ing, see salutation.
Grief, w., clxi, 7; kanylngan-
yinga, 8.
Grieve, v., dlla, ufua or unva
followed by cixi(7), muoyo(2)
or mucima(2) as subj. of
nylngala, cixi as subj. of
kuata and the person as obj.,
di ne with cixl or kanylngan-
yinga(8).
for, inga.
Grin, v., tua mimuemne(pl. of 2).
n.f mumuemue, 2.
Grind, v. {as corn between two
stones), hela.
fine, vt.y botexa.
(grit the teeth), diangana or
zekexa with menn(pl. of 5).
(sharpen), nuona.
Grindstone, n., dibue(5) dla ku-
nuona.
Grip, vt., kuata.
Gripe, v., nyenga with mnnda as
subj.
Grit, v., the teeth, diangana or
zekex with menn(pl. of 5).
Groan, v., huma, tuamuk£ma(2).
n.(as of pain), muk^ma, 2.
Grope, vi., bubuta.
Ground, «.(loose dirt), malobo,
pi. of bulobo(6).
on the, the loc. word hanxl.
(world), bnlobo, 6.
Group, »., cisumbu, 7; dlsanga,'
5-
200
GROVE— GUN.
Grove, n. (copse on a plain),
cihuka, 7.
Grow, v., kttle, landa.
(grow large), v., diunda.
(grow tall), v.f leha.
(grow thin), v., nyana.
Growl, v.(as a dog), ela ma-
kanda(pl. of 5), kanga.
(grumble), v., tontolola, tonto-
n., dlkanda, 5.
Grown, be, vi.^ kttla.
person, n., muntu(i) mukttle.
Grub, n.(a worm), dikubu, 5;
lu]iose(found in the palm), 4.
Both kinds are eaten,
up, vi., Jula.
Gruel, n., mus&bu, 2.
Grumble, v., tontolola, tonto-
mona.
(mutter in low tone), nungana.
(with a click of the throat),
sodia.
Grunt, v. (expressing surprise),
kftma, taa eik£ma(7).
(groan in pain), huma, tna
inukima(2).
n.(of astonishment), eikftma, 7.
(of pain), mnkima, 2.
Guarantee, «.(pawn), cleya, 7.
to leave as, vt.y eyeka.
Guard, v/.(watch), l&ma.
be on one's, vi.y dimaka.
put on one's, vt,, dimuxa.
n., mul&mi, i.
Guess, v., clnka.
Guest, n., mueDyi, i.
Guide, v., lombola.
n., niulombodi(i) wa nxlla,
mudlanjldi(i).
Guilt, n., bualu(6) bubl, muan-
da(2) mubl, bubl(6). We
often hear simply the pi. of
the adjectives mabl and mibi.
Guiltless, (wf;.(good), Impe, len-
sele, akane.
(be acquitted), vt., binga.
declare, v/., bingixa.
Guilty, be condemned as, vi., htla.
declare, zrf., hixa.
Guinea-fowl, »., dtkangala, 5.
Gully, n., mutubu, 2; nkoka, 3;
muexi, 2.
Gun, »., ctngoma, 7; bnta, 6.
This last word originally
meant bow.
cannon, n., dttende, 5.
cap gun, n.y ctngoma cia lufa-
tocl(4).
flint-lock, n., etngoma cia mu-
tengu(2).
pistol, n., kahambala, 8.
rifle, ff ., cingoma cia lutende(4).
shotgun, n., cingoma cia tun-
dlniba(pl. of 8).
barrel, n., mulonda, 2; maxlba,
2.
bullet, n., lutende, 4; mute-
lenge(2) wa lutende.
cap, n.f lufatacl, 4.
cartridge, n., mutelenge(2) wa
lutende(4).
flint, n., dlbue, 5.
hammer, n., dikdsa, 5.
muzzle, n.j maxuku, 2.
nipple, n., disu, 5.
powder, n., kahla, 8; dlfuanda,
5- ^
ramrod, n., nfukite, 3.
shell, n., mutelenge(2) wa tun-
dimbaCpl. of 8).
shot, n., kandimba, 8.
trigger, ft., mulemu, 2.
wadding, »., dihusa, 5; clnyu-
ka, 7.
aim, v., dingila, l&ma, ludikila,
Idlkixa.
click (when cocked), vi., aba.
cock, vt,f bangnla.
fire, vt., ela cingoma.
go off accidentally, vi., sohoka,
disohokela, flnukila.
hit, vt.y lonza, kuma.
load, vL, soma.
miss aim, v., ela eingoma
hanxl, hanga.
miss fire, not go off, W., funga.
GUNPOWDER— HARD.
20I
Gunpowder, «., kahia, 8; di-
fuanda, 5.
Gut, n., dila, 5.
Habit, n., cllele, 7; ctenzedi, 7;
cibllu, 7.
bad, use any of the above words
with the adj. bl. For habitual
action use ' Pres. Habitual
tense.
Habitually, see ceaselessly.
Habituate, vL, tbidixa.
(be habituated), vi., ibidila,
lobokela.
Haggard, be, 9t'., nyana, dl ne or
uma followed by cionda(7) or
clnyanu(7).
Haggardness, n., cionda, 7; cin-
yanu, 7.
Hail, v/.(call), blkila.
from, vi., fiima.
(greet), see salute.
-stone, w., dibue(5) dia nvula(3).
Hair, ». (beard or hair on head of
person), lusuki, 4; lunyonyi,
4-
gray, »., luvi, 4; lungufn, 4.
(on body of person or animal),
luoso, 4. Note that pi. is
mloso(2). § 45, Rem.
Half, n. There is no word ex-
pressing this idea exactly. If
anything is cut into two parts,
whether they be equal or not,
each part is called cituha(7);
if the thing is split, each piece
is called cih£su(7).
(cut half in two), v., kosa or kala
followed by hanktkci or kun-
kOct.
-way, the loc. words hanktkci
and kunkfkci.
Hallow, v/.(to honor), tumbixa,
. nemeka, nemekela, meneka,
menekela, tendelela.
Halt, v. (be lame), l£ma.
(limp), zobela, tebuka.
Halt {continued).
(stand), Imtkna.
(stop), lekela.
Hammer, n., lukonko, 4.
of gun, diktksa, 5.
T;.(drive a nail), kumlna, hohela.
(forge), v., tula, fula.
Hammock, »., buanda, 6.
Hand, «., cianza, 7.
in the, ku minu(pl. of 2).
left, clanza cla baktixi, cianza
cla luboko(4), cianza cia
munyinyl(2).
(left-handed person), mnena(i)
with ciboko(7) or lamo8a(4).
of banana or plantain, cisangri, 7.
palm of, munda mua cianza.
right, cianza cia with balumt or
bukftle or bidia.
(sleight-of-hand trick), dljimbu,
5; dialu, 5.
(to pass to), vL, hetexa, he tela.
(writing), »., cifundidi, 7.
Handful, n., difuka, 5.
Handle, «., of knife or hoe, cil&bi,
7; cikuacilu, 7; mnl&bi, 2.
of cup, mnkolokolo, 2.
(fasten handle in axe, hoe, etc.),
vt., bangixa.
V. (examine), lenga, lamba, lam-
bila.
Handsome, adj., impe, akane,
lengele, -anipoGi(slang).
Handsomeness, »., buimpe, 6;
buakane, 6; bulengele, 6;
mpoci(slang), 3.
Hang, v., a person, owa.
down, vi., lembelela.
one's self, diowa.
up, vt., kudika.
Happen, vi., lua.
Happiness, n., disanka, 5.
Happy, be, vi., sanka, generally
with muoyo(2) or mucima(2)
as subj.
make, vt., sankixa with muoyo
or mucima as obj.
Hard, adj., to the touch, kaie(p.p.
of kfila, to he hard).
make, vt., kftlexa.
202
HARDEN— HEADLONG.
Harden, vt.j kttlexa.
(accustom to), vt., tbidixa; v».(be
accustomed to), Ibidlla, lobo-
kela.
Hardness, n., bukttle, 6.
Harlot, nph.j muktkxi(i) wa ma-
sand i (pi. of 5 or 6).
Harm, n. (danger, trouble, palaver),
bnalu, 6; muanda, 2.
vt.f enzela bibi.
Harmless, adj. This idea may
generally be expressed by the
sentence ena mua kuenza
cintu, (it) can do nothing.
Harmonium, n., cisanji, 7.
Harmonize, v/.(put in tune), sOka.
.(put out of harmony or tune),
vt., stikula.
(tune instruments to each other),
sflklla or aktixa with hamue.
(sing, in harmony), aktkxame(pl.
of 5) hamue.
(be out of harmony or tune), vf,
stkkuka.
Harmony, see harmonize.
Harp, w., clsanJi, 7. This is made
by fastening small pieces of
iron of dififerent lengths amd
sizes to a hollow piece of wood.
Harvest, «.(time). There seems
to be no word expressing the
idea of harvest time. Use
some explanatory ph., such as
cidlmu(7) cia, season of, or
nsondo(3) wa, month of; as,
cidlmu cla kukuola manva
clakulua, the corn harvest
time has come. There being
no general word for harvest it
is necessary to mention the
name of the thing harvested.
vt.{2J& com), huola, kuola.
(as millet, rice), nowa.
(as peas), aka.
Hash, vt.{a& meat), zaz -.
Haste, n., lubllu, 4; luktksa, 4.
See note under lubilu.
Hasten, vi.j generally use the spe-
cific verb with lubilu or
lukflsa.
Hasten (continued).
(hurry up, make to do in a hurry).
vt.y endexa or enzexa followea
by lubilu or luktksa.
Hat, «., cifulu, 7.
Hatch, v/., totobula, taya(toya).
Hatchet, «., kasui, 8. Dimin. of
eisui(7).
Hate, v.y kina, dl ne lukuna(4),
neg. of sua or nanga or
Inyixa.
(loathe, as bread), vt.^ tonda.
Hateful, adj.y toward, -a lu-
kuna(4).
Hatred, n., lukuna, 4.
Haughtiness, n., disanka, 5.
Haughty, be, vi.y disua, sanka.
Have, v. (possess). Use one of the
verbs meaning to he followed
by ne.
not, ena ne.
to, must, see must.
For have or had as auxiliary in
formation of compound tenses
see § 205, Rem.
To have something done for one,
use Applied Form of the
Causative. § 335 (a).
Hawk, n., nkumbikumbi, 3.
He, pers. pro.
(i) Simple Disjunctive form,
yeye. § 105.
(2) Compound Disjunctive form,
blandl. .§§ 108, no.
(3) Conjunctive forms used as
(a) Pro. prefix. §§113,114.
(h) Pro. suflSx. §§ 120, 123.
Head, n., mutu, 2. Some say
mutue.
-ache, »., mutu followed by
mubele or musame.
bald, n., dib&la, 5.
crown of, lubombo, 4.
-long, mutu munxl.
of millet, muehu, 2.
of stream, mutu, 2.
Headache, nph., mutu(2) followed
by mubele or musame.
Headlong, adv., use ph. mutu(2)
munxi.
HEADMAN— HENCEFORTH.
203
Headman, »., kahita, 8. From
Portuguese.
Heal, v., see cure.
Health, n. There is no definite
word. For good health use
such expressions as bukftle(6)
or n8:ulu(3) or inubidl(2)
mukftle. For had health use
disama(5) or dlbedi(5) or
bubedi(6) orinubidi(2) mute-
kete.
Healthy, adj.y -a bukftle(6), -a
nsu]u(3), -a mubidi(2) mu-
kftle.
Heap, n.(a large pile), muxiki, 2.
(a small pile, such as can be held
in two hands), difuka, 5.
up, pile one on top of the other,
vt.y tentektkxa, tenteka, ten-
tekanya, ambakanya, amba-
k&xa; v*.(be ona on top of the
other), tentaxna, ambakana.
Hear, v., unva, ufua. Note that
the obj. of this verb is di(5),
word^ ciona, sound of rain, etc.,
and not a person; as, nakun-
Ta dl diandi, I heard him, lit.,
his word. We may also use
the form nakunvamuaknam-
beye, / heard him, lit., what he
sjii.
each other, understand, unvan-
grana.
listen to, vt.y telexai
Hearken, v., see heed.
Hearsay, n., lumu, 4.
Heart, n., dl, 5. PI. is me.
lose, v., clna.
take, v., kftlexa, with muoyo(2)
or muctma(2). In the figura-
tive sens2 of heart, muclma(2)
and muoyo(2) are often used
interchangeably. See these
two wordfe in B.L.-Eng.
Hearth, »., diku, 5. PI. ismeku.
Heartless, see merciless.
He\rtlessvess, «., luklnn, 4;
cinyanqru, 7.
Heat, »., of fire, kahla, 8.
of sun, munya, 2.
Heat {continued).
(warmth of body or fire or air),
luiya, 4; ciyuya, 7.
vt.i hixa; z;i.(be heated), hia.
over again, as food, vt., bab&xa;
7/2*. (be heated again), bab&la.
Heaven, nph., musoko(2) wa
Xzambl.
(firmament), diulu, 5.
Heavenly, adj.{pi the firmament),
-a diu]u(5).
Heaviness, n., bujitu, 6.
Heavy, be, v., di bujitu(6), dl ne
bujitu, nema, nemenena.
Heed, i;.(obey), tumikila, enza
mu- followed by proper tense
and person of amba, itabuxa
mu di(5), unva, ufua.
take, be warned, vi., dlmnka.
Heedless, see obstinate.
Heedlessness, see obstinacy.
Heel, n.*, dkankanyl, 7; ciken-
klbu, 7.
He goat, n., mpumbu, 3.
Height, »., bule, 6.
Heir, n., muhianyl, i.
(be heir to, inherit), v., hlana.
Hell, n., Dgena, 3. From Greek
Xecvva.
Helmet, »., cifulu, 7.
Help, v. This idea is generally
expressed by the, Causative
Form of the verb. In a gen-
eral sense we may use the
Causative Form ensexa. Ya
umudimixe, go and help him
to work', wakumueuBexa, he
helped him to do it.
Hemp, Indian, n., dlamba, 5.
Smoked by the natives.
Hen, «., cikukue, 7.
Hence, adv.(irom here), emu, eku,
aha, munemu, kuneku, ha*
naha. § 163, Note 3. Use
also the Locative Suffixed con-
struction. § 320.
(therefore), ka, bu- with Applied
Form of verb. § 419.
Henceforth, see hereafter.
204
HER—HINDRANCE.
Her, pers, and poss. pro.
(i) As pers. pro. see him, remem-
bering that there is no dififer-
ence in the rendering of her
and him. § 105, Rem. a.
(2) As poss. pro., andi. §§ 132,
133-
Herald, n. (messenger), muena(i)
mukenjl(2), maloho(2).
Herd, n., cisumbu, 7.
Herdsman, n., mulftml, i.
Here, adv. Use the proper Loca-
tive with demonstrative sign e,
denoting near objects, thus
giving emu, eku, aha. § 163,
Note 3. Note also the doubled
forms munemu(munomu),
kuneku(knnoku), hanaha.
§ 163, Note 2.
(from here, hence), use the Loca-
tive Forms as indicated above;
as, wakuluhnka munemu, he
has gone otU from here.
(here and there, hithei^ and
thither), use Intensive Form
of verb,
(here it is, etc.), use the particle
ka-. § 159.
Sometimes the Locative Suffixed
construction furnishes the
idiom; as, udihu, he is here.
§320.
Hereafter, <idv. ph., matukn(p1.
of 5) followed by -a ku
mp&la(3) or -a kumudllu.
The words Dgondo, moon, or
eldlmu, season, may be sub-
stituted, according to sense for
matnku.
Heritage, n., buhianyl, 6; blntu
bia bnhlanyi.
Hers, poss. pro., see his. § 132.
Herself, pers. pro., see himself.
The forms for herself and him-
self are identical. § 105, Rem .
4.
Hesitate, v. (vacillate), lemba-
kana, humbakaDa, nema
with muclma(2) as subj., ta-
takana dt ne micima ibidi.
HicxX)UGH, n., einsukuDsnku, 7.
Hide, vt., sokoka.
one's self, vi., sokoma.
n.(skin), ctaiba, 7.
High, adj., le.
on, adv., killu, millu, henlu.
§ 4»3 (2) (»)•
voice, n., dt(5) dtklse.
High priest, nph., mukulenge(i)
wa bambl(pl. of i) ba bua-
lu(6) buaNzambl.
Highway, n., Dxila(3) munlne,
musesu(2).
robber, n., munyengl, i.
Highwayman, n., munyengt, i.
Hill, n., mukuna, 2.
ant-, mutunda(made by the
btntunte), 2 ; dttna(small
black in the forests), 5.
down-, kumanda. § 423 (2) {h).
Him, pers. pro.
(i) As direct or indirect otj. use
the pro. infix mu. §§ 116,
117. Note the use of pronomi-
nal suffixes (§ 123), under cer-
tain circumstances, as direct or
indirect obj. § 124 {h) (c).
(2) For use with prepositions, see
§§ 106 {c) and 107.
Himself, pers. pro.
(i) Compound Disjunctive form,
nklyandl. §§ 108, 109.
(2) When reflexive, use the re-
flexive prefix of the verb, -dl-.
Note that this construction may
be used either as subj. or obj.
§ 118.
(3) See B.L.-Eng. under ine.
Hind leg, «., lower part of, mu-
kolo, 2.
upper part of, cibelu, 7.
part, citaku, 7; nylma, 3.
Hinder, vt., humbixa, humba-
ktkxa, lekexa, kosexa; vi.Q^e
hindered), humba.
Hindermost, adj., -a ku nyiina(3).
•a kiinxlkidiln,«a haxixe.
be the, v., xixa.
Hindrance, n., mukosa, a.
HIP— HORSE-FLY.
atS
Hip, n.f lukundu, 4; cikundu-
kundu, 7.
Hippopotamus, »., nsuvu, 3.
Hire, v., see engage.
His, poss. pro,, andl. When used
as predicate adj., see § 135.
Hit, vt.y kuma, tuta.
(in shooting), lonsa, kuma.
with arrow, asa.
with fist, kuma or tuta or tua
with ctsn8u(7) or dtsundu(5).
withknuckl s, tua lukonyl(4).
with open hand, kuma with
dlhtCs) or luhi(4).
Hither, adv., see here. Use some-
times the Locative Suffixed
construction, § 320.
(hither and thither), use Inten-
sive Form of verb.
Hoarse, be, v. use dl(5) as subj.
of v. xtb&la or h&ta.
Hobgoblin, n., muklxi, 2; mu-
xanst(Buk.), 2.
Hoe, n., lukAsu, 4.
handle of, mul&bt, 2; cikua-
ctlu, 7; cil&bl, 7.
v., d ma, ihlla.
put handle in, v., bangrixa.
Hog, n., ngnilube, 3.
Hoist, v/., bandixa, btxa.
Hold, v/., kuata.
out hand, olola elansa(3).
Hole, n., in the ground, dlna(pl.
mena), 5; cina, 7.
key-, dlsu(5) dia nsftht(3).
make a. to dig, imba, umbula.
of rat, buina, 6. P . is mena.
(pierce through), v/., tubula di-
soso.
through something, n., disoso, 5;
dikela, 5.
Holiness, n., buimpe, 6; bua-
kane, 6; bulengele, 6.
Hollow, «.(in tree), mulundu, 2.
(low ground), cibanda, 7; lu-
hongo, 4.
Holy, adj.(gpod), Impe, akane,
lengele.
Spirit, see SPmiT.
See SACRED.
Homage, pay to, vL, see honor.
Home, n.(house), nsubu, 3.
at, mu nsubu, ku nsubu, mu or
ku used inseparably with the
poss. pro., § 140.
Honest, adj,(gqod), impe, akane,
lengeie, -akatolo(8).
(one not stealing), use neg. of
Pres. Habitual tense of v. Iba,
or ena ne with buibl(6) or
bulvl(6) or blanBa(pl. of 7)
bile.
Honesty, ». (goodness or fairness),
kalolo, 8; buimpe, 6; bua-
kane, 6; bnlengele, 6.
Honey, «., bnlci(butki), 6.
-comb, dihula, 5; dikaci, 5.
Honey-bee, n., lubulubulu, 4;
lunyeke, 4.
Honeycomb, «., dikaci, 5; dihula,
5-
Honor, vt.y nemeka, nemekela,
meneka, menekela, tum-
btxa, tendelela.
Honorable, <k/;. (great), nine.
(honored), tumbe(p.p. of tumba,
to be honorable).
Hoof, n., mukono, 3.
Hook, n., fish-, ndofao, 3.
wooden, lukobo, 4.
fish with, vt., loha.
Hop, v., tuhika.
(as flea), tuloka.
(as frog), Boloka.
Hope, v. (look for, expect), teke-
mena, elamuoyo(2).
n., the infin. kutekemena is
suggested.
Horn, n., lusensu, 4.
(for blowing), mpungt, 3.
Horrify, vt., cinylxa, handixa
mucima(2), zaktixa mucima.
(be horrified), vi., cina handika
or lakala followed by muci-
ma.
Horror, n., buowa, 6.
Horse, n., kabftlu, 8. From
Portuguese.
Horse-fly, n., cibanda, 7.
2o6
HOST— HUNGER.
Host, ».(crowd), cisumbu, 7.
(great number), »., bungi, 6.
Hostage, nph,, muntu(i) wa
lukole(4). PI. is bantu ba
nkole. A person of same vil-
lage or family as the debtor
who is held for the debt.
Hostile, adj., -a lukunaU).
Hostility, »., lukuna, 4.
Hot, adj., -a kahia(8).
be, vi., hia, lua kahia.
make, vt., hixa.
Hour, see time.
House, »., nsubu, 3.
batten, lubambalu, 4. These are
tied crosswise on top of the
rafters,
door, clbl, 7.
door-post, cilua, 7; cixikl, 7.
doorway, muxuku(2) wa mbe-.
lu(3), mbelu(3), cibuedelu
(7).
-fly(insect), lujljl, 4.
grass for covering, luanyl, 4;
bisoso, pi. of Gisoso(7); lu-
sono, 4.
palm leaves for covering, malaia,
pi. of dllala(5).
partition, cididi, 7.
post in the wall, cilua, 7; cixiki,
7.
post to support veranda, dl-
kunxl, 5.
rafter, lusokolo, 4; dihilu, 5.
ridge-pole, mutandala, 2; mu-
tamba, 2.
roof, clmtinu, 7.
side, wall, clmtknu, 7.
space in front of door, ku
mbelu(3).
to cover a, vt., flnga, kuma.
top of roof, musonsa, 2.
to tie the battens, vt., bambala.
Household, see tribe.
Hover, z;.(as hawk), lembelela.
How, interrog. adv., munyi 7 bixi 7
mua( indirect question),
(i) For the expression, in what
way?, see § 411.
(2) As modifying adjectives of
How {continued),
quantity or quality, see § 411,
Note I.
(3) For use in indirect questions,
see § 472 {d).
(4) How many is sometimes ex-
pressed by the interrogative
adj. nga, which takes Second-
ary Prefixes.
Hubbub, «., diyoyo, 5; mutiiyo, 2.
Hug, vt., uhukila, akidila.
Hull, «. (shell), cihusu, 7; cl-
Kubu, 7.
v/.(aspcanjts), b61a, bula, bosa,
totobula, taya(toya).
(as peas, by beating), xuhula,
suanga.
Humane, adj., -a kaloIo(8), -a
luse(4), inipe, akane, len-
gele.
Humanity, n., buntu, 6.
(kindness), luse, 4; kalolo, 8.
Humble, be, vi., use neg. of dlsua,
ena ne with dikamakama(5)
or cikama(7) or dintaiita(5),
dl ne or ufua or unva with
bundu(6), di ne with muci-
ma(2) mutekete or kaloio(8).
make, vt., tekexa, kehexa.
Humid be, vi., talala, hola, dl ne
with cltelele(7) or ciaxlma(7).
Humidity, n., cltelele, 7; claxl-
ma, 7.
Humiliate, vt., kehexa, tekexa,
kuaclxa or ufulxa with bun-
. du(6).
(be humiliated), vi., ufua or
unva with bundu.
Humility, »., bundu, 6; bunvu, 6;
kalolo, 8.
Humor, n., bad, clxl, 7.
be in good, vi., sanka.
(joke), »., citedl, 7.
Humpbacked, adj., -a dlkoko(5),
dltonte, kobame.
Hundred, n., lukama, 4.
Hundred thousand, n., clxlkllu,
7-
Hunger, n., ns&la, pi. of 3 or 4.
HUNGRY-— IGNORANT.
20.7
Hungry, be^ v., use nsaia(pl. f 3
or 4) as subj. of suma or sama
with the person as obj., di ne
ns&la.
Hunt, v., for, k6ba, keja, teta.
with dogs, ta.
Hunter, w., cilembi, 7; cihinda,
7-
Hunting, »., bute from ta, to
hunt), 6.
net, muxinsa(2) wa bute.
Hurricane, n., cihuhu, 7.
Hurriedly, adv., use the noun
forms iubilu and lukusa.
Hurry, v., generally use specific
verb with lubiiu or lukAsa.
be in a, restless, vi., sasakata.
up, make to do in a hurry, vt.,
endexa or ensexa with lubiiu
or lukAsa.
n., lubiiu, 4; lukQsa, 4.
Hurt, v. (ache), sama.
(bum, smart), suma, oxa, su-
suma, hiakana.
(as stomach), nyenga.
Husband, n., muiumi, i; mbl(pl.
bambi), i. For mbl, see § 42,
Note I.
Hush, vt., huxa or talflxa or
hoi xa or x kixa or kosexa
with muaku(2) or mutftyo(2)
or dIyoyo(5).
(stop talking), lekela followed by
muaku(2) or mutftyo(2) ^^
the infin. kuakula; hoa.
Husk, «., cihusu, 7; cizubu, 7.
v.(as com), uvula.
(as peas by beating), xuhula,
suanga.
Hymn, n., musambu, 2.
Hypocrisy, »., see lie.
Hypocrite, »., see liar.
I, pers. pro,
(i) Simple Disjunctive Form,
meme. § 105.
(2) Pro. prefix, n(m). §§ 113,
. 114.
I {continued).
(3) CompoundDisjunctiveFonn,
bilnyl, etc. §§ 108, no.
Identical, aaj., o-umue, muomu-
mue.
(very), mene. Teye mene, the
identicaliyery) one. See same.
Identity, »., buobumue, 6.
Idiocy, n., buhale, 6; bubuluke, 6;
butomboke, 6.
Idiom, n., ciakuilu, 7.
Idiot, see pool.
Idle person, »., mufuba, i. This
word seems to be used only a a
noun, not as an adj.
aJj. ph., -a bufuba(6), -a bu-
kata(6).
Idleness, n., bufuba, 6; bukata, 6.
Idol, n. There are no idols stric tly
speaking, only charn.s, which
are supposed to exert a good
influence in behalf of the owner,
and sometimes an evil in-
influence o 1 an enemy. If it is
carved to represent a person
it is called luhiiisu(4); if
made of anything else, it is
called buansa(6). No special
worship, apart from certain in-
cantations(tendelela),isshown
to these charms,
make an, vt., hfika, songs.
maker of, w., mptkka(i) nanga,
musonsi(i) wa mpingru, mu-
hCiki(i) wa manga.
If, sub. conj., hv, bl-. For full dis-
cussion of Conditional sen-
tences, s e §§459, 460.
Ignite, vt., oxa.
by friction with sticks, vt., vfnga
kahia(8).
Ignoramus, »., muhote, i ; muxi-
b&le, I.
Ignorance, «. (stupidity), buhote,
6; buxib&le, 6.
Ignorant, adj., hote(p.p. of hota,
to be ignorant), xib&le(p.p of
xib&la, to be ignorant).
(not to know), v., use neg. of
mtknya.
2o8
ILL— IMPLORE.
Ill, be, v., see sick.
treatment, clhendo, 7; ma-
tandu, pi. of 5 or 6; ctn-
jangu, 7.
(wish ill to), 7;., ela mulau(3).
Illegal, something forbidden, n.,
cijila, 7. This word generally
has a superstitious idea.
Illegitimate c ild, n., inuana(:)
wa ina8andi(pl. of 5 or 6).
Illness, see sickness.
Ill-treat, see abuse.
Illustrate, ^/.(compare), Idl-
klxa, elekexa.
(show), lexa.
Illustration, n. (example), cl-
fuanytkixa, 7.
(sample, copy, mark), cimon-
yinu, 7; cidlkixilu, 7; cile-
xilu, 7.
(story, fable), luxlmtnytnyu, 4;
muanu, 2; lusumutnu, 4.
Illustrious, see famous.
Image, »., see idol.
(likeness), clfuanyt, 7; cifuan-
yikixa, 7.
(reflexion, photograph), mundl-
dimbi, 2; mudlngldi, 2.
Imagination, ^.(thought), lun-
geayi, 4; mexi, pi. of 5 or 6;
lukanyi, 4.
Imagine, v.( fancy), amba. Wa-
kuamba ne cinfii cia kndia,
he imagined that U was some-
thing to eat.
Imbibe, v., nua.
Imitate, v., tdlkixa, elekexa.
(do as another), see § 465.
Immature child, ».(fGetus), kana
(dimin. of muana) kablxe.
Immediately, adv.^ katataka,
mpindeu, diodiono.
Immense, adj., nine.
Immerse, vt., Ina, Inyixa.
Imminent, adj. This idea is gener-
ally expressed by the Future
Imminent tense of the verb.
Immodest, be, v. (indecent), di
ume(p.p. of u Jia, to be dryj mu
Immodest, be (continued).
disu(5), di ne batuatafl(6),
ena ne bundu(6).
(saucy), ena ne bundu(6), di ne
with cikama(7) or dikama-
kama(5) or dintanta(5), dt-
8ua, tbidiJa.
Immodesty, ^., cikama, 7; dika-
makama, 5; dintanta, 5.
(slovenliness in dress), bulua-
tafl, 6.
iBiMORAL, adj.{ha,d)j bl.
(adulterous), -a masandi(pl. of
5 or 6).
Immorality, n.(adultery),masandl,
pi. of 5 or 6.
Immortal, adj., -a matuku onso,
•a i&halftha, -a cendelele, -a
. kaxidi.
be, vi., use neg. of fua, to die.
Immovable, be, v., ki&la, xindama,
kandamana. Jama, kanana.
Impair, vt., ona, nyanga; vi.(be
impaired), onoka, nyanguka.
Impatience, »., disasakata, 5.
Impatient, be, w*. (restless), saia-
kata.
Impede, i;^.(cause to fail, to miss),
humbixa, lekexa, kosexa.
Impediment, n., in speech, stutter-
ing, cikukumlna, 7; dlkaku-
mina, 5.
have, to stutter, v., kukumina.
Impend, v., use generally Future
Imminent tense of the verb
lua.
Impenitent, adj., -a mucima(2)
muk&le.
Imperfect, be, vi., use neg. of
forms under perfect.
Impertinence, »., dintanta, 5;
eikama, 7; dikamakama, 5.
Impertinent, be, vi., disua, ibi-
dila, ena ne bandu(6), di ne
with dlntanta(5) or dikama-
kama(5) or cikama(7).
Implement, n., clama, cinta(7)
cia kuenza n'aci.
See note under machine.
Implore, v., sengela, sengelela.
IMPOLITE— INDIAN.
209
Impolite, be, vi.j ena ne kalolo 8),
dl ne with dikamakama(5) or
cikama(7) or dintaiita(.5).
Impoliteness, n.,cikama,7; dlka-
makama, 5; dintanta, 5.
Importance, n., bualu(6) bunlne,
inuanda(2) munlne.
Important, ai//., nine, tumbe (p.p.
of tumba, to be important).
Importunate, adj,y in begging, -a
lulombo(4).
See persevere.
Impossible, be, v., use neg. of con-
structions mentioned under
§230-
Impotent, adj., tekete(p.p. of
teketa, to be impotent).
Impoverish, vt., helexa, luixa with
buhele(6) or bulanda(6), xixa
mu with buhele or bulanda.
Impregnate, v/. (cause concep-
tion), tmlcixa.
Imprison, vph., buexa mu nsubu
wa maxlka.
Improve, v., in health, ironvalesce,
sans&la, kftsa mubidt(2),
sanguiuka.
Impudence, n., dintanta, 5; ci-
kama, 7; dikamakama, 5.
Impudent, be, see saucy.
Impure, «<//. (adulterous), -a ma-
sandl(pl. of 5 or 6) .
(bad), bi.
Impurity, n.(adultery), masandi,
pi. of 5 or 6.
(badness), bnbl.
(trash), cllu, 7; cisonso, 7
In, prep.f mu.
front, ku mp&la(3), kumudllu.
order that, use Purportive Mood
without any subordinating
word. § 461.
the hand, ku mlnu(pl. of 2).
the midst of, see midst.
the same place, hamue, hoha-
In some cases the in is contained
in the verb root.
Inadequate, vi.j use neg. of forms
under enough.
Inattentive, be, vi., hungakana,
humbakana, neg. of unva or
ufua.
be toward, vt., humbakfixa,
hunsakilxa.
Incantation, do before fetish or
charm, v., tendelela, sekelela.
Incapable, be, vi., use neg. of
form under capable.
Incessantly, see ceaselessly.
Incite, v., generally use Causative
Form of verb,
dog to bite, k£ba luoxl(4).
Incline, vi., intkma, sendama; vt.,
sendeka, sendemexa, tnyika.
against, vi., eyema; vt., eye*
mexa, eyeka.
Inclose, vt., see encircle.
Incoherently, speak, v., akula
biakulakula(pl. of 7).
Incompetent, be, v., use neg. of
forms under § 230.
Incomplete, be, vi.{not finished),
use neg. of mtkna or xika or
hua.
Incorrect, adj., use neg. v. with
impe or o-umue or muomu-
mue.
Increase, i;^(enlarge), diundixa,
lundixa; vi., dlunda, lunda.
in number or quantity, vi., vula;
vt.f vudixa.
(lengthen), vt.^ lungaktlxa, lun-
gakanya, lehexa, innga; vi.,
Inngakana, leha.
price, vt., kttlexa or bandixa with
muxinga(2); vi., muxinga
as subj. of kftla or banda.
Incur, v., a debt, enza dibanza(5).
Indecency, see immodesty.
Indecent, see immodest.
Indeed, a^?;. (truly), bulilela, bu-
xua, buiktkxa, bualabuala,
buinabuina. These are really
nouns of class VI.
(very, absolutely), mene.
Indian corn, «., see corn.
Indian hemp, n., dlamba, 5.
Smoked by the natives with
injurious effect.
2IO
INDIA-RUBBER— INNUMERABLE.
India-rubber, n., ndundu, 3.
ball of, dlbulu, 5.
(fruit of rubber vine), lubulu, 4.
Indicate, v. (show to), lexa, tan-
gldixa, muenexa.
(point with finger), funkuna.
Indifferent, be, v»., see inatten-
tive.
Indignant, see angry.
Indignation, »., elxl, 7.
Indistinctly, adv.^ to see, use neg.
of V. mona followed by bimpe.
to hear, use neg. of v. unva or
ufua followed by bimpe.
to speak, use neg. of v. akuia
followed by bimpe; also akuia
with cidimi(7) or cil&fl(7).
Indolence, n., bufuba, 6; bu-
kata, 6.
Indolent, adj.^ -a bufuba(6), -a
bukata(6).
person, »., mufuba, i.
Induce, v/. (cause to assent), tta-
buxixa.
from doing, liumbixa.
Industrious, see diligent.
Industry, ». (occupation), mudi-
mu, 2.
Infancy, n., baana, 6.
Infant, see child.
Inferior, adj. {pi no consequence),
-a cinana, -a hatuliu, -a b£.
Infinite, be, v., use the verbs
tamba or liita with the proper
adj. or V.
Infirm, adj., tekete(p.p. of teketa,
to he infirm).
Infirmity, n. (weakness), buteket ,
6.
Inflate, vt.^ tantamixa. tuntu-
muxa, uxa; vi.^ one's self,
tantajnika, tuntumuka, ula.
Inlfexible, be, vi.y kayabaia,
tantamana, tandabala.
Influence, vt.y itabuxixa.
(greatness), n.^ bun In e, 6.
(have influence with one), vph.y
di ne dikflsa(5) kudi mun-
tu(i).
(strength), n., buki&ie, 6.
Influential, adj., nine.
(famous), tumbe(p.p. of tumba,
to be influential).
Inform, v/.(teach), iyixa, mtln-
yixa, longexa, tftyila, iubu-
kixa.
(tell to), ambila.
(warn), dimuxa.
Information, w.(news), lumu, 4.
(word), di, 5. PI. is me.
Ingenious, see clever.
Ingeniousness, see ingenuity.
Ingenuity, n., iungenyi, 4; mexi,
pi. of 5 or 6; iukanyi, 4.
]IIahongo(2) and buloxi(6)
come to have a secondary
meaning corresponding lo in-
genuity.
Ingratitude, »., dikamakama, 5;
cikama, 7; din tan ta, 5.
Inhabit, v., ik&la mu.
Inhabitant, w., of, use maena(i)
or mukua(i) followed by
name of the place. §§ 84 (6),
357, Rem.
Inhale, ^.(drawing in the breath),
kokaor liuta withmuhuya(2),
eyeia.
Inherit, vt., hiana.
Inheritance, n., buhianyi^ 6;
bintu bia buliianyi.
Inhuman, adj.{cT\xei)y -a cinyan-
gu(7), -a lukina(4).
Inhumanity, n., cinyangu, 7;
iukinu, 4.
Inio-tity, see guilt.
Injur", ^/.(accuse falsely), banda.
(do wrong to one), enzela bibl.
(make to go bad), ona, nyanga.
Injustice, «. (dishonesty), buivi, 6;
bulbl, 6.
(wrong), bnbt, 6; baalu(6)
bubi; muanda(2) mubi.
Ink, nph. ml a mikanda(pl. of 2)
Innocent, be, v.(be acquitted),
binga.
pronounce, vt.y bingixa.
Innumerable, adj.y use neg. of
mtknya or mona or ena with
mua kub&ia, to count.
INQUIRE— INTERCESSO R
211
Inquire, vt.j ebexa, konka.
Inquisitive, be. v., dl ne with
iuebexixa(4) or lukonkono
(4).
Inquisitiveness, »., luebexlxa, 4;
lukonkono, 4.
Insane, adj.y buluke, hale, tom-
boke. These are p.p. of bu-
Inka, hala and tomboka
respectively, meaning to be
insane.
Insanity, n., butomboke, 6; bu-
haie, 6; bubuluke, 6.
Insect, »., clxl, 7.
Insensibility, ».(from fall or blow
or smothering), clfuidlxe, 7;
clhuka, 7.
(from fit or spasm), cIsSke, 7;
tunsulungu, pi. of 8; nkoyt,
3-
Insensible, be, v. (from fall or blow
or smothering), fna with ci-
fuldixe(7) or cihuka(7).
(from fit or spasm), fua wi h
cis£ke(7) or tungulungu(pl.
of 8) or nkoyi(3).
(not to feel), neg. of unva or
ufua.
(not to know), neg. of m&nya.
Insert, vt., buexa ma.
Inside, adv. Use generally mu
and Locative Suffixed con-
struction; as, buelamu, go
inside. § 320.
o , prep, ph.y mu, munda mua.
n., munda. § 423 (2) (6).
Insipid, be, vi.(be without salt or
other seasoning), talala,
hola.
Insolence, n., dlntanta, 5; ci-
kama, 7; dikamakama, 5.
Insolent, see impertinent.
Inspect, vt.Qook at), mona, tan-
gila, xoxa.
R^STANTLY, see immediately.
Instigate, vt., generally use Causa-
tive Form of verb.
Instruct, vt., lylxa, mtknyixa,
longexa, ambila, lubukixa.
(show), lexa.
Instructor, «., muiyixi, i; mu-
mCinylxi, i; muambldl, i;
muambi, t.
Instrument, n. Some of the dif-
ferent kinds of musical instru-
ments are: cisanji, 7; lun-
zenze, 4; lunkombe, 4;
ngoma, 3; ciondo, 7; luxlba,
4; lunkunvu, 4; madimba,
pi. of 5 ; , lumembo, 4; ludibu,
4; musakCici, 2; diktksa, 5;
musul, 2.
play on, vL, imba.
play on by blowing, vt.j ela.
See machine.
Insubordinate, adj.y -a cica(7),
-a clxlku(7), -a buhidla(6),
-a cibengu(7).
Insubordination, «., ctcu, 7;
cixiku, 7; buhldia, 6; ct-
bengu, 7.
Insufficient, be, v., use neg.
of forms mentioned under
enough.
Insult, vt., henda, tuka.
n.f cihendo, 7.
Intact, adj.{v/ho\e)y onso, xlma.
Integrity, n.( goodness), kalolo, 8;
bufmpe, 6; buakane, 6;
buiengele, 6.
Intellect, n., lungenyl, 4; mexl,
pi. of 5 or 6; lukanyi(Buk.), 4.
Intellectual, adj.j -a lungen-
yl(4), -a mexi(pl. of 5 or 6),
-a lukanyi(4).
Intelligence, ^.(intellect), lun-
genyl, 4; mexi, pi. of 5 or 6;
lukanyl(Buk.), 4.
Intelligent, adj, -a lungenyi(4),
-a mexi(pl. of 5 or 6), -a
lukanyl(4).
Intend, v., amba followed by infin.
Intently, look, v., talala with any
verb meaning to see.
Inter, v/.(bury), Jika.
Intercede, vt.y for, akuila, am-
bidlla, lumbululla.
Intercessor, «., muakuldi. i;
muambldidi, i; mulumbu-
luldi, I.
213
INTERCOURSE— IRON.
Intercourse, have with one an-
other in travelling, v., endan-
gana.
have sexual with, vL, luma,
lumlxa, tentemexa, lala ne.
Interdict, v/.(as food, etc.), Jila.
Jtdlka.
(the interdicted thing), n., ctjtla,
7-
See note under Jldtka.
Interest, n. (business), bualu, 6;
muanda, 3.
on something borrowed, kasom-
beln, 8; matabtxa, pi. of 5
or 6; nsekidldt, 3; ntente-
k- M, 3.
pay, v., tentekela.
Interfere with, vL, humblxa,
hambakftxa.
in one's business or friendship
with another, ela mukosa(2),
kosexa, dt ne iiiucaudl(2).
Interference, f»., mukosa, 2;
mucaudi, 2.
Interior, n,, munda. § 423 (2)
{b),
Inter&iarry, v., b&kangana.
Intermediary, n,, in marriage,
cibanji, 7.
Intermingle, v/., sangixa, sanga-
kAxa, sangakanya, samba-
kanya, sambaktixa, tuta-
ktkxa, tutakanya, sala, sala-
kana, baelaktkxa, buexa-
kaaa; vi,^ sanga, sangakana,
sambakana, tutakana, bue-
lakana.
Internal, adj., -a munda. § 423
(2) {b).
Interpret, t;/. (translate), kudl-
muna or andamuna with
muaku(2).
Interrogate, vLj ebexa, konka.
Interrupt, v/., humbixa, hum-
baktlxa, lekexa, kosexa.
(be interrupted), v»., humba.
Interruption, n., mukosa, 2.
Intervene, v. (come between), lua
with the locative words han-
kflol or kunkflcl or munkCici.
Intervene (continued),
in quarrel, sunga.
See elapse.
Intestine, n., dila, 5.
Intimidate, vLy ctnylxa.
Into, prep., mu.
See IN.
Intoxicate, vt., hadixa.
(be intoxicated), see drunk.
Intoxication, «., buhale(6 or
bubuluke(6) or butomboke(6)
followed by maluvu.
Intractable, be, vi., use neg. of
tumika or tumtkila, di ne
with ctcu(7) or ctbengu(7)
or buhldia(6) or clxiku(7).
Inveigle, vt.y teya.
Invent, vL, fuka, dianjilakuenza.
Invert, v/., andamuna, kudimuna,
cingulnla.
Invisibility, n., the state of,
ns&mu, pi. of 4.
See invulnerable.
Invisible, be, vt., neg. of mueneka
or mueka.
(a medicine or charm which is
said to make one invisible),
n., buanga bua ns&mu(pl. of
4).
(to become invisible in battle),
v., sftma.
See invulnerable.
Invoke, 7;/.(call), blkila.
(implore), sengela, sengelela.
(worship), tendelela, tumblxa,
Inylxa.
Invulnerability, n., ntutxa, pi.
of 4.
Invulnerable, be, tulxa. May
come from tuya, to glance off.
(a charm to make one invulner-
able), n., buanga bua ntul*
xa(pl. of 4).
See invisible.
Inward, adv. Generally use Loca-
tive Sufl&x construction with
mu. § 320.
adj. (interna}), -a munda.
Iron, n., ciama(7) ciflke.
clothes, vt.f hela.
IRON— JOINT.
213
Iron {continued),
(laundry), n., mpelu, 3.
ore, kabanda, 8.
(when made into crosses), ».,
clombo(7) ciflke.
See note under copper.
Irreverence, ft., cikama, 7;
dikamakama, 5; din tan ta, 5.
Irreverent, adj.^ -a cikama(7),
-a dikamakania(5), -a din-
tanta(5).
Irritable, be, v.y di ne or unva or
ufua with cixi(7), nyinga-
bala, cixi as subj. of kuata
with the person as obj.
Irritate, vt.^ kuacixa or ufuixa
with cixi(7), tacixa or flkixa
with munda, hotela, lobola.
Is, see BE.
Island, n., cisang^a, 7.
Issue, v., a decree, amba lollowed
by di(5) or mukenji(2).
(come forth), vi., luliula, umu-
ka, h&tuka.
n.(offspring), muana, i.
It, pers. pro. The agreement is
always made with the class of
the noun to which the pronoun
refers,
(i) Simple Disjunctive Forms.
§105-
(2) Compound Disjunctive
Forms. §| 108, no.
C3) Conjunctive Forms:
(a) As prefixes. §§ 113, 114.
lb) As infixes. §| 116, 117.
{c) As suflSxes. §§ 120, 123,
12^ {h){c). _ -
(4) The use with prepositions.
§§ 106 (c), 107.
Itch, vi.y sasakana, salala.
Itinerate, vi., endakana.
Its, poss. pro. Use the sing, forms
of classes II-VIII, as indicated
under § 133.
When used as predicate adj., see
§135-
Itself, pers. pro.
(i) Compound Disjunctive Form.
J§ loiS, log. Agreement is
Itself {continued),
made with the class of the
noun to which the pronoun
refers.
(2) When reflexive, use the re-
flexive prefix of verb, -di-.
§ 118. Note that this con-
struction may be used either
as subj. or obj.
(3) See B.L.-Eng. under ine.
Ivory, n., mubanga, 2.
J.
Jabber, v.. akula biakulakula(pl.
of 7)-
Jackal, n., mubuabu, 2.
Jail, »., nsubu(3) ^a maxika.
Jailor, n., mukelenge(i) or mu-
l&mi(i) with wa nsubu(3) ^^
maxika.
Jam, »., Jam(Eng.).
January, «., Januale(Erig.).
Jar, ».(for water), mulondo, 2.
Jaw, «., lower, lubanga, 4.
Jealous, adj.y -a mukau(2).
Jealousy, n., mnkau, 2.
Jest, see joke.
Jesus, n., Jisus.
Jew, w., Muyuda, i. Perhaps a'so
Mujuda(i).
Jigger, n., kabuasa, 8; dile-
bcIe(Buk.), 5.
Join, v.(as rivers, paths, etc.), san-
sakana, sambakana, sanglla.
(become one of a party), buele-
kana, buela.
(be next to), kuatakana, tuan-
sana.
(cause to come together), vt.^
sangaktkxa, sangakanya,
bambaktkxa, bambakanya,
sambakAxa, sambakanya,
kuatakanya, kuataktixa,
tuangOxa, tuanganya.
to, lengthen, add one to another,
vt.j lungakanya, lungaktkxa,
lunga, lehexa.
Joint, »., dinungu, 5.
214
JOKE— KING.
Joke, v/.(play on one), s&blxa,
naylxa.
(pretend not to know), v., hunga.
with, ela bltedl(p]. of 7), cim-
bixa, humbixa.
«., citedl, 7. PI. generally used.
Journey, n., luendu, 4.
go on a, vph.^ ya ku luendu.
Joy, n., disanka, 5.
Joyful, see happy.
Judge, n., mulumbuludi, i.
v.y lumbulula, kosa nsainbu(3).
JUDGSiENT, n.(damnation), mulau,
2.
* pronounce, vt.^ lumbulula, kosa
nsambu(3).
(trial), cllumbu, 7.
(wisdom), lungenyl, 4; mexi,
pi. of 5 or 6; lukanyl, 4.
Jug, ».(jar), mulondo, 2.
(pitcher), mpica(Eng.), 3.
Juice, »., ml, pi. of 5 or 6.
July, »., Jull(Eng.).
JusiP, v.y tuhlka.
(as flea), tuloka.
(as frog), soloka.
»., cldi, 7.
Junction, »., of paths or rivers,
dlsangu, 5. PI. generally
used.
June, »., Junyl(Eng.).
Junior, see younger.
Just, adv. {to have just done), use
the verb anza and infin. § 228,
adj.^ see honest.
as conj. mu- (insep.) with the
verb. § 465.
See §§ 4i8» 421.
Justice, »., see honesty.
Justified, be, v«.(be acquitted),
binga.
Justify, vt.y binglxa.
K.
Keep, v., awake, tab&la, lala
cItabWa(7).
doing, use Pres. Habitual tense,
(feed), vt., dixa.
Keep {continued).
for, tekela.
from, abstain, hidia, benga, Jlla.
(look after for), muenena.
silence, lekela muaku(2), hua.
(watch flocks, etc.), vt.^ l&ma.
Keeper, n., mulftml, i; mutan-
gldl, i; mumonyl, i; mu-
muenenyl, i.
Keepsake, «., cimonyinu, 7.
Kernel, «.(germ of the kernel),
muoyo, 2; dlsu, 5.
Kettle, «., civuadi, 7; luesu, 4;
nketel(Eng.), 3.
Key, n., muan*a ns&hi(3), luvun-
gula(4).
Keyhole, n., disu(5) dians&hl(3).
Kick, v., tua with dik<ksa(5) or
mus<^ba(2).
M., musfiba, 2.
Kid, n., muan*ambuxi(3), lutum-
batumba(4).
Kidney, n., kamoma, 8.
Kill, v/., xlha.
by hanging, owa.
Kind, »., of same, this idea may be
expressed in several ways:
(i) By the verbs fuanangana,
kelemena, fuana, dleleka.
(2) By the words bu or buina.
(3) By the words muomumue or
o-umue.
(4) By the ph. muan*abo ne.
of different, use neg. with above
forms,
(of one kind ... of another
kind), ha bu- ... ha bu-.
§186.
(what kind of a ?), kl7 § 176.
a(2y. (gentle), -a kalolo(8).
(good), Impe, -a lu8e(4), len-
gele, akane.
Kindle, vt., temexa; v«., tema.
Kindness, «.(love, mercy), luse, 4.
(attractiveness), kalolo, 8.
Kindred, w., use some such ex-
pression as bana betu, etc.
§ 138, Rem. 5.
King, n., mukelenge, i; nfumu,
I.
KINGDOM— LANCE.
215
Kingdom, n. (country), misoko, pi.
Knuckle, w., dlnungu(5) dia
of 2.
munu(2).
(kingly power), bukelenge, 6;
(knuckles exposed to strike with),
bunfumu, 6.
n.j lukonyi, 4.
Kingship, n., bukelenge, 6; bun-
strike with the, vt.y tua lukonyi.
fumu, 6.
Kola nut, n,, dlku, 5.
Kiss, v.^ tuangana mixuku(pl. of
2).
Kitchen, »., clkuku, 7. From
L.
Eng. through the Lower
Congo.
Labor, v. It is doubtful if there
Kitten, ». (young of domestic cat),
is a single word having refer-
ence to all forms of labor or
mpus(3). The last word is
work, though the expressions
from Eng.
dima, kuata or enza or osa
(young of wildcat), muan*a mb&-
with mudlmu(2) are so used
libaia(3).
about Luebo. They are, ow-
Knee, «., clnu, 7.
ever, more than likely cor-
Kneel, v., tua blnu(pl. of 7)
ruptions. It is best to specify
hanxl.
the kind of labor; as, dlma.
Knife, »., muele, 2.
to work with a hoe) Ibfika, to
back of, muongo, 2.
build) etc.
blade of, muele, 2.
w., mudimu, 2. See remarks
for table or pocket, use the dimin.
above.
kele(8).
be in, v., Pres. tense of lela.
handle of, cllibi, 7; mul&bl, 2;
Laborer, »., muena(i) mu-
cikuacllu, 7.
dimu(2). See remarks under
sheath for, clbubu, 7; luhaha, 4;
LABOR.
clmanga, 7.
Lack, v., x&la, ena ne.
Knit, v., the brows, nyenga or
, Lad, »., songaluml, i; muhlan-
fudika with mpaia(3).
kunde, 2.
Knock, v/.(beat), kuma, tuta.
Ladder, w., cibandilu, 7.
out, as a t x)th, ehula, huola.
Lag, vi., xixamuka.
(tap), kuokola, kumina, ku-
Lake, w., dixlba, 5.
muna.
Lamb, »., muan*a mukoko(2).
Knot, «., bow-, nflnina, 3; nflnu, 3.
, Lame, be, vL, l<^ma.
hard, dIJIta, 5.
(limp), vi.y zobela, tebuka.
of wood, dihu, 5; dlhondo, 5.
person, one unable to walk, w..
v., sulka.
muena(i) with njeku(3) or
untie a, vL, sulula.
kaneke(8) or cibombo(7),
untie a bow-knot, v/., flnuna.
muntu muiema.
Know, v., mtinya.
walk, vi., enda followed by the
(hear, understand, feel), unva.
pres. part, of zobela or te-
ufua.
buka.
(not know, fail to recognize a
Lament, v. (cry), dila.
person), hanga.
Lamentation, «., muadi, 2.
(not know the way, be lost).
Lamp, tr.. mulnda(muendu), 2.
hambuka.
Perhaps from Lower Congo.
Knowledge, n., lungenyl, 4;
Lance, «., difuma, 5; kabendi, 8.
mexl, pL of 5 or 6; lukanyi, 4.
v., asa.
2l6
LAND— LEAN.
Land, n. (earth), bulobo, 6.
(region), see country.
V}., lua followed by kukala kua
ml or ku mpata(3).
Landing, ».(feiTy), dilobo, 5;
clsabukllu, 7; clsabu, 7.
Language, see dialect.
Lap, v. (as dog), ICkka.
njfh.f ha blbelu(pl. of cibelu, i).
Lard, n., mafuta, pi. of 5 or 6;
iiilnyl(pl. of 5) a ii8ulube(3).
Large, adj., nine.
Largeness, »., bunlne, 6.
Lascivious, a(2;. (adulterous), -a
ma8andi(pl. of 5 or 6).
be, vph.(man), sua bakftxl;
(woman), sua baluml.
Lasciviousness, n.(adultery), ma-
sandi, pi. of 5 or 6.
Lash, v^.(to whip), koma, tuta.
eye-, »., lulavl, 4; lukofla, 4.
Lass, n., muxika kunde, 2; son-
gakAxI, I.
Last, adj.y -a kunxikldllu, -a ku
nylma(3), -a haxlxe.
(be last to do, etc.), v., xixa.
bom child, »., muan*a muka-
la(2).
Latch, n., ns&hl, 3; luobo, 4.
v., bangika.
Late, be or do last, v., xixa.
Laugh, v.y sika.
Laughable, be, .^.(producing
laughter), g^&kexa.
Laughter, n., kas^ku, 8. PI.
generally used,
produce, vt., s4^kexa.
Law, n.(custom), cllele, 7; clen-
sedl, 7; clbilu, 7.
(make a prohibition), vt., ela
makandu(2).
(prohibition), n.\ mukandu, 2.
(something prohibited), »., ci-
Jila, 7.
Lawful, be, v. (not tabooed), use
neg. V. ena with cljlla(7).
(right), adj., Impe, akane, len-
gele.
Lawyer, »., mulumbululdl, i;
isuakuldl, i; muambldidi, i.
Lay, vt.f blame on falsely, banda.
crosswise, vt., clamakdxa.
down, vi., ladika, tokola.
egg, vt., ela with dik£la(5) or
di(s).
head on pillow, vt., sama.
hold of, vt., kuata.
one thing on top of another, to
pile, vt., tenteka, tentekanya,
tentekikxa, ambakanya, am-
bakdxa.
over, to cover, vt,, bulkila.
waste, vt., haula.
Lazily, adv., fue, nyorganyonga,
do, v., xlxamuka.
Laziness, n., bufuba, 6; bnkata, 6.
Lazy, adj., -a bufuba(6), -a bu-
kata(6).
person, n., mufuba, i.
Lead, vt., a tune, tuma.
astray, entice, Ibidlxa or mfln-
ylxa or lylxa with bualu(6)
bubi.
(go before), ya with ku mp&la(3)
or kumudilu, dlanjila.
(show the way), lombola.
(show wrong path), hambuxa.
Leader, ff.(guiae), mulombodl, i;
mudlanjidi, i.
of tune, mutuml, i.
Lead-pencil, n., mucl(2) wa
mukanda(2). Suggest also
mpencila(Eng.), 3.
Leaf, n., of book or tree, dllnyi, 5 ;
dibexi, 5.
of cassava, matamba, pi. of 5;
kalexl, 8. The pi. of first
word is generally used, and the
sing, of second word is most
commonly found,
of palm, dilala, 5.
put forth, v., samplla, tempela.
shed, v., hohoka.
Leak, n. (crack), mutanta, 2.
(hole), disoso, 5; dlkela, 5.
spring a, v., tubuka with dikela
or disoso or mutanta.
Lean, be, vi., nyana, di ne or
uma fgllowed by cionda(7) or
cinya|^-u(7).
LEAN— LEVEL.
217
Lean, be (continued).
meat, n., ngulunge, 3.
on, against, vt., eyeka, eyemexa;
vi.j eyema.
over, be not perpendicular, vi.j
sendama, intlma; vt., sen-
deka, sendemexa.
Leanness, n., clonda, 7; cin-
yanu, 7.
Leap, v., tuhika.
Learn, v., lya, lylla.
(be accustomed to), v., ibldila,
lobokela.
I-.EARNED, adj.y -a luiigenyi(4), -a
mexl(pl. of 5 or 6), -a lu-
kanyl(4).
Learner, w., mulyidi, i.
Learning, n., lungenyl, 4; mexl,
pi. of 5 or 6; lukanyi(Buk.),
4-
Leather, «., cis£ba, 7.
Leave, vL, behind, xla.
(bequeath), ha buhlanyl(6).
(go), vi.j ya, amuka.
off, vi.f lekela.
(permission), «., see permission.
Leaven, »., yl8lta(Eng.).
Lecherous, at/y.( adulterous), -a
masandl(pl. of 5 or 6).
be, v.(man), sua bakξ (wo-
man), sua baluml.
Lecherousness, ».(adultery), ma-
sandi, pi. of 5 or 6.
Leech, «., musundu, 2.
Left, be, v., x&la.
hand, n., clanza(7) cia followed
by baktixi or luboko or mun-
ylnyl.
-handed person, »., muena(i)
with clboko(7) or ]umosa(4).
Left-handed p( rson, ».,muena(i)
with ciboko(7) or Iamosa(4).
Leg, n.f calf of, difu(5) dia mu-
kolo(2).
front, arm, dlboko, 5.
hind, lower part, mukolo, 2.
hind, upper part, clbelu, 7.
of table or chair, dikunxi, 5.
Legacy, n., butalanji, 6; bintu
blabuhianyi. ^
Legend, »., luximlnylnyl, 4; lu-
sumuinu, 4; muanu, 2.
Lend, 2;/. (with idea of returning
the exact article), hanzixa.
(with idea of no returning the
exact article but its value in
kind), sombexa.
Length, »., bule, 6; mu bule;
iitaiita(3) mule.
Lengthen, vt.y lungakAxa, lun-
gakanya, lehexa, lunga.
Leopard, n., nkaxama, 3.
Leper, n., muena(i) cinduinbl(7).
See remark under leprosy.
Leprosy, n. Leprosy is not known,
but cindumbl(2) seems to be a
contagious venereal disease
breaking out on face and
arms, and is perhaps the best
word at hand for leprosy.
Less, grow, vi.j keha.
make, vt., kehexa, Ihlhixa.
than, see § 90 (/).
Lessen, vt., kehexa, ihltalxa.
Lesson, «., dilesona(Eng.), 5.
Lest, sub. conj., use neg. of Pur-
portive Mood. § 461, kem.
Let, v., alone, lekela.
down, vt., huekexa, tulula,
tula.
(give permission), see permis-
sion.
(Hortative Imperative), see § 237
(c).
vt.y loose, lekela, kutaola, sulula,
kutula.
out, see LEND.
Lethargy, «., bufuba, 6; bukata,
6.
Letter, w., mukanda, 2.
of alphabet, dll«ta(Eng.), 5.
Level, be, vi.j hunga, hunga-
kana, Jalama, kelemena.
(be even), vi., akanangana,
lamakana.
(be flat), vt.y landakana^ ba-
tama, butama, langakana.
(flatten), 7;/., landaktixa, baeika,
butamixa, batamixa, langa*
kfixa.
2l8
LEVEL— LIGHTNING.
L£V£L, BE (continued).
make, vt., hungakCkxa, Jadlka,
kelemexa, ludlklla.
Levity, n., kas^ku, 8. PI. is gen-
erally used.
Lewd, (^//.(adulterous), -a ma-
sandi(pl. of 5 or 6).
be, i;.(man), sua bakAxl:
(woman), su^ baluml.
Lewdness, ».( adultery), masandi,
pi. of 5 or 6.
Liar, »., muxlml, i; mudlngl, i;
muena(i) followed by ludi-
mi(4) or maxiiiil(sing. is
dixima, 5) or madingiCsing.
is dldinga, 5) or mafl(pl. of 5).
Liberal, adj., -a dlha(5).
person, n., clhahl, 7.
Liberality, »., diha, 5.
LiBERAiE, 7;^. (let loose), lekela.
(set free from slavery), hlkula.
(untie), kuhola, sulula, kutula.
Liberty, n , budlxlkamlne, 6.
to give, vL, lekela, hlkula,
kuhola, sulula.
Licentious, o^/;. (adulterous), -a
ma8andi(pl. of 5 or 6).
be, t/.(man), sua bakflxi;
(woman), sua balumi.
Licentiousness, ».(adultery), ma-
sandi, pi. of 5 or 6.
Lick, v., ittka.
n.(a blow), mukumu, 2; mu-
tutu, 2.
Lid, »., cibuikilu, 7; clbuikn, 7;
cixlbiku, 7.
of eye, cilavinyu, 7; cllabuidl, 7.
Lie, n.y dixlina(pl. maximl), 5;
didlnga(pl. madlngi), 5; ma-
hl, pi. of 5. PI. of these words
most frequently used,
tell a, v.y xlma, dinga, dimba
(Buk.).
tell on one, v/., use Applied Form
of above verbs, giving ximin-
yina, dinglla and dlmbila.
tell to one, vt., xlma, dinga,
dimba.
across, vi., clamakana.
Lie {continued).
(cause to lie down), ladlka.
down, vi.y lala.
in wait for, v/., alamina.
on top of, vi.f tentama, amba-
kana.
with in sexual intercourse, vt.,
luma, lumlxa, tentemexa,
lala ne.
Life, n., muoyo, 2.
(cause one to come to life), vt,,
handlxa.
(come to life or sensibility), vi.,
handa.
See resuscitate.
Lift, vt. blxa, m6ma, angata,
Jula, takula, ambula, ban-
dixa, kakula.
(help one to lift a load to the
head or shoulders), vt., ambu-
luixa.
Light, vt., a fire, temexa; vi.ifyt
lighted), tema.
become, at dawn, vph., cla with
butuku(6) as subj.
be, from moon or fire, vi., toka,
kenka, kenena.
give, v., temena, ditemena,
toka.
(in color), adj., toke(p.p. of
toka, to he light).
in weight, be, vi., huh&la,
hehela. The p.p. huh&le
and hehele are used as simple
adjectives,
(lamp, candle), »., mu nda
(Lower Congo), 2.
(natives of light color), adj.,
kunze.
of fire or moon, n., dikenka, 5.
of sun, n., munya, 2.
Lighten, v/.(in weight), hehexa,
huh&xa.
(as lightning), vi., henya, kenya.
Lightning, n., mukenyl(2) or
muhenyl(2) or muele(2) fol-
lowed by wa nvula(3).
If the lightning strikes it is called
nkuba(3) or nza 1(3), which
is supposed to be some kind
LIGHTNING— LOCK.
219
Lightning (continued).
of animal or bird which attacks
the person or thing,
the flashing of, v., henya, kenya.
Like, vi.j sua, nanga, Inylxa.
(as, adv. and sub. conj.)^ mu-
insep. with the verb. § 465.
be, vi.y fuana, di with muomu-
mue or o-umue or bu or
buina or muan'abo ne.
make, v/., fuanylklxa, kele-
mexa, elekexa.
Liken, v^ (compare), Idiklxa, ele-
kexa.
Likeness, n., clfuanyi, 7; cifuan-
yiklxa, 7.
(photograph), mundidlmbi, 2;
mudlngidi, 2.
(sameness), buobumue, 6.
Likewise, adv., nunku(nenku,
nanku).
Limb, n.( branch), ditamba, 5.
Lime, n. (fruit), dilala, 5. From
Lower Congo.
Limit, n. (border), kukala, mue-
lelu(2), musala(2), buci-
ka(6), kusula, kunfudllu,
kusala. For the Loc. words,
see § 423 (2) (6).
(destination), clxikidllu, 7.
(dividing line), mukalu, 2.
Limp, v.j sobela, tebuka, enda
with the present participles of
sobela and tebuka.
Line, n.(cord), muoxl, 2; mu-
xinga, 2.
be in a, v., di mu mulongo(2).
dividing, n., muk lu, 2.
(mark on ground, paper, etc.),
n., mufunda, 2.
of descent, n., ciloogo, 7.
put in a, v., teka mu mulongo,
longa.
put in a straight, vt.j ludika.
(row), n., mulongo, 2.
stand in a, v., ImAna mu mu-
longo.
Lion, n., ntambue, 3.
Lip, w., muxuku, 2; mulemu (mu-
lomo), 2.
Lip {continued).
move without speaking, v.y dlan-
gana mukana(2).
Listen, v., telexa or teya with
macu(pl. of 5).
understand, hear), v., unva,
ufua.
Listless, be, vi.^ hungakana,
humbakana, neg. of unva or
ufua.
be toward, vt., humbak&xa,
hungakAxa.
Little, adj., kise, b&le, nya-nya.
This idea is often expressed by
the dimin. prefixes (ka and tu)
of class VIII. In expressing
a small quantity of, or small
amount of, the pi. is generally
us d. § 50, Rem. 2.
become, w., keha.
make, vt.j kehexa.
too, see § 90 {h).
Littleness, n., buklse, 6; bu-
b&le, 6; bunyabunya, 6.
Live, v., ik&la, xlkama, lala. In
inquiring where one lives, it is
generally best to use the forms
kuetu, kuenu, etc.; as, kuenu
liv ? kunyl? where do you
kudi § 140.
(be alive), vph., dl ne muoyo(2).
Liver, n., mucima, 9.
LizzARD, n.y musodi, 2.
Load, n. It is necessary to be
specific: mvL\^ieybox\ clsCkka,
basket, etc. Occasionally bu-
Jltu(6) is used,
boat, etc., v., teka or buexa with
mu.
a gun, vt.y soma.
Loaf, n., mutanda, 2; muima, 2.
Loan, v., see lend.
Loathe, v,{as food), tonda, tua.
"The person loathing becomes
obj. of the verb; as, bid la bidi
blntcnda, / locUhe the bread.
Lock, n., nsfthl(Portuguese), 3;
mama, i.
v., xlblka or ela followed by
ns&hl.
220
LOCUST— LUCKY.
Locust, n., mukumbl, 2.
LoQUA lODS, adj., -a lutilyltft-
L FT, »., cisasa, 7.
y*(4).
Log, »., mucl, 2.
Loquaciousness, w., Iqtttyltilyl, 4.
Loins, gird up, v., ela mukl7a(2).
Loquacity, »., lutftyitttyi, 4.
Long, adj., le.
Lord, n., mukelenge, i; nfumo.
ago, aiii;., kale, bangabanga,
I.
dlambedi.
Lore, n., folk-, muana, 2; Insa-
all day, nph., dinda(5) to ne
muinu, 4; luximlnylnyu, 4.
dllolo(5).
Lose, vt., Jimixa; (b lost), vi.,
•all night, nph., butuku(6) to ne
JImlna.
lankelu(4).
a bet, luhiku(4) as subj; of
become, vi., leha, nenga.
kuata with the person as obj..
for, to covet, v., muoyo(2) or
hila.
mucima(2) as subj. of samina
at gambling, the person losing is
the secondary j. of* the v.
or kumina, ela muclma,
endela.
t&ha; as, bakuntftha bintu
how?, use as may be best suited
bilnyl, / have lost my things.
to sense, the words cldlmu,
in trading, vt., ona nyanga;
v».(be lost), onoka, nyan-
season, ngindo, moon, dlt il u,
day, followed by bungimunyi?
guka.
or the adj. word nga?
Lost, be, vi.{not able to find), see
(t^ long time), v., lunguluka.
lose.
time, n., musangu(2) mule,
(not know the way), vi., ham-
matuku(pl. of 5) male, also
buka.
the adv. to.
Loud, adj. kftle.
Look, v., about from side to side,
speak, v., taylka, akula, bikille.
kenzakana.
Louse, n., nkusu, 3.
after, to care for, l&ma.
Love, vt., sua. nanga, Inyixa.
after for, muenena.
n., use above infinitives.
(appear), see seem.
(affection), dinanga, 5 ; disua, 5.
at, mona, tangila, xoxa.
(pity), luse, 4.
fixedly, tangila or mona with
Lovely, adj., Impe, akane, len-
talala.
gele.
for, to expect, tekemena.
Low, adj., Ibi, -a ci:uha(7).
for, to seek, k«ba, keja, teta.
(bass voice), nph., di(5) dlnlne.
like, to resemble, fuana.
(be short), vi., xunguka.
out, to be cautious, dlmuka.
speak, vi., nungana.
out for, to lie in wait, alamlna.
Lower, vt., huekexa.
(XX)KING-GLASS, »., ludimuenu, 4;
end, locative word kumanda.
lumuenii, 4.
§423 (2) (6).
Loom, »., mbungu, 3.
part of hind leg, n., mukolo, 2
shuttle of, mundongo, 2.
price or voice, vt., tekexa, bue-
Loos ', get, vi.y tuka, flnuka,
kexa.
kuhoka(kohoka), suluka.
(to threaten rain), v., flnda.
let, vt.y lekela, kuhola, sulula,
Luck, w., bad, dlka8a(5) dlbi,
kutula:
mubidl(2) mubl.
make, not taut, vt., tekexa.
good, diese, 5, muabi, 2;
(not be taut), vi., teketa
dlk<ksa(5) dlmpe; mubidi(2)
Loosen, vL, see loose.
mulmpe.
Loot, vt., haula.
Lucky, see fortunate.
LUDICROUS— MALADY.
22Z
Ludicrous, be v.(producing
laughter), s4&kexa.
Lukewarm, adj., -a clyaya(7), -a
lulya(4).
LUi EWARM ESS, »., clyuya, 7;
luiya, 4.
Lump, n., of earth dlbu, 5.
of salt, etc., dibulu, 5.
(swollen place), dlbuba, 5.
Lunacy, n., bubuluke, 6; buhale,
6; butomboke, 6.
Lunatic, n., mubuluke, i; mu-
hale, i; mutomboke, i. These
words are derived from the
verbs buluka, bala, tomboka,
to be crazy.
Lung, n., clsulusulu, 7.
Lure, v/. (teach to do evil), mtko-
ylx > or iylxa or Ibldlxa with
bualu(6) bubl.
(tempt), teya.
Lust, n. (adultery), masandl (pi.
of 5 or 6).
Lustful, ae^;. (adulterous), -a ma-
8andl(pl. of 5 or 6).
be, vph. (man), sua bakAxi;
(woman), sua baluml.
Machine, n., clama, 7. This
general name is applied to all
tools, implements, and ma-
chines made of iron. Natu-
rally there are few native
names for such imported
articles. We may also use
the indefinite ph. cintu cla
kuensa n'acl.
Mad, arf;., see angry, crazy.
Madness, ».(anger), clxl, 7.
(dementia), bubale, 6, bubu-
luke, 6; butomboke, 6
Maggot, n., clkusu.
Magic, ».(sleight of hand), dl-
Jlmbu, 5; dlalu, 5.
Magician, n., muena(i) followed
by dialu(5) or dijlmbu(5).
Magnify, v/., balulula, vundixa.
(honor), tumbixa, nemeka, ne-
mekela, meneka, menekela,
tendelela.
Magnitude, n., bunlne, 6.
Maid, Maiden, fi. (young), muxi-
kankunde, 2; songakflxi, i.
(unmarried woman), mujlke,
I.
Maidenhood, n., buxlkankunde,
6; bunsongakflxi, 6.
Maize, n., see corn.
Make, vt., ensa, osa, kIxa(Buk.).
(appoint to office), ha mu or
buexa mu followed by ab-
stract name of office,
ashamed, ufulxa bundu(6).
aware, dimuxa, miknylxa.
basket, mat, etc., luka.
bed, longolola.
(build), ibdka, asa (see note
under asa in B.L.-Eng.).
(carve), songa.
(cause to do or be), use Causative
Form of verb,
cloth, weave, kuma didiba(5).
(compel), generally use Causative
Form of verb,
(create), fuka.
disturbance, noise, teka with
diyoyo(5) or mutilyi(2).
fire, temexa.
friendship, kuatangana bu-
lunda(6).
fun of, s^^ka.
hole, imba with dina(5) or
cina(7).
like, fuanyikixa, kelemexa.
medicine, charm, hftka buan-
Ka(6).
out of, with, use ne with the
proper verb; s. wakuluka
cifulu ne mp^^ku, he made the
hat with strings from the palm
leaf.
pottery, fumba, flmba.
string, JInga muxinga(a).
water, urinate, sukula, sukunya.
Malady, m., dlsama, 5; bubedl, 6;
dibedi, 5.
222
MALE— MARRY.
Male, n., mulumi, i.
adj., lumi, mulumi wa, mu-
luml'a.
Malefactor, »., muena(i) lu-
kuna(4).
Malice, n., lukuna, 4.
Malicious, adj., -a lukuna(4).
Malt, vt., enga.
Maltreat, vi., see abuse.
Maltreatment, n., clhendo, 7;
matandu, pi. of 5 or 6; cin-
janffu, 7.
Mammon, n., use pi. of cliima(7)
or cintu(7); lnhetu(4).
Max, n.(generic), muntu, i.
(male), mulumi, i.
young, songalumi, i; muhian-
kunde, i.
(one who owns or belongs to a
certain class or is from a cer-
tin own), muena, i; mu-
kua, I. §§ 84 {b); 87 (rf).
Rem. 2.
(a big man, generally used
ironically), cilumiana, 7. §351.
Manage, 2;/.(as child), buluklla,
gamina, b4&ia, nanga.
Mango, n., nsafu, 3. This v.ord
has come from the Ix)wer
Congo and is there applied to
a fruit not the mango.
Ma>^hood, n., bulumi, 6.
(humanity), buntu, 6.
(young manhood), bunsonga^
lumi 6; buhiankunde, 6.
Manioc, »., see cassava.
Manis, w. (scaly ant-eater), nkaka,
3-
Mankind, n., banta(pl. of muntu,
I).
Manner, ». (habit), cibilu, 7;
cienzedi, 7; cilele, 7.
(t us, in this manner), adv.,
nunku(nan u, nenk ).
(customary action), use Pres.
Habitual tense.
Mansion, n., nsubu, 3.
Manure, n. (excrement), tftfl
(tuinvi), pi. of 8. See note
under tCkfl i B.L.-Eng.
Many, adj., -a bunKi(6); ngi; ngia
-ngi.
ohw, bungi munyi? or bungi
bixi? or -nga with Secondary
Prefixes,
too, hita or tamba with bungi.
Mar, vt.y ona, nya ga; vi.,
on oka, nyanguka.
March, n., luendu, 4.
go on a ya ku luendu.
(the month), Malasa(from Eng.).
Margin, n., muelelu, 2; musala.
2; mubangru, 2; bucika, 6;
also the locative words ku-
kala, kusula, kunfudilu, ku-
sala.
Mark, n. (dividing line), mukalu,
2.
(made by anything dragged),
dkoka, 7.
(scar) cibangu, 7.
(sign), cimonylnu, 7
(tracng on the ground or else-
where), mufunda, 2.
(track of foot, paw, hoof),
cidi cilu, 7; dikflsa, 5; dl-
ka '*a, 5; mukono, 2.
(tribal, tattoo), lus&lu, 4.
(to make the tattoo marks),
t&ha.
v., funda, tftha.
Market, n., cis&lu, 7.
attend a, v., sakula.
Marriage, n., dibAka, 5.
(dowry given by groom to parents
of the bride), luselu, 4; bintu
bia buku(6).
(to pay the marriage dowry), v.,
sela.
feast, bidla b'a dibanzixa(5).
intermediary in, clbanji, 7.
give in, bftklxa.
arrow, n.y bvongo, 6.
Marry, v., bCkka. This word is
used only of the man. When
the woman is referred to, use
the passive forms, or the verb
banza, or the ph. ya ku
dibfika.
MARRY— MEAN.
223
Marry (continued).
(bring the bride to the home of
the grooTi), vt.^ banzlxa.
(be brought to the home of the
groom), vi.j banza.
(give in marriage), vt , bukixa.
Marsh, n., blt&hikidi, blntampi,
bit&hi, blntoci. All are pi.
of 7.
(a place which is dry in the dry
season), clsese, 7.
Marvel, v. kima.
Marvelous, adj., -a kukima.
Masculine, adj.y -a baliimi(pl.
of I).
Mash, v/. (crush between the
hands), kama.
(down flat), bacika, batamlxa,
butamlxa, landakCkxa.
(grind between stones), bela.
in mortar, tua.
(rubbing with hands), vlnga.
Mask, n., muadi(Buk.), 2; mu-
klxi, 2.
Mason, n., nfuena(i) taxola(pl.
of 8); kaplta, 8.
Master, n.. mukelenge, 2; nfu-
mu, i; tatu, i.
v/. (overcome), hlta or tamba
with bukftle(6) or ngulu(3)
Masticate, v., botexa.
(as bones or dried corn), bele-
keta.
(with unpleasant noise), tan-
funya.
Mat, «,(made of papyrus), data,
7; clkanga, 7.
(made by the Bakuba from the
palm), clxaxi, 7.
Match, w.(lucifer), muci(2) wa
kahla(8); dincesc(from Eng.
match), 5.
(of same kind), this idea may be
expressed in several ways:
(i) By the words bu and bul-
na.
^2) By the words muomumue
and o-umue.
(3) By the ph. muan'abo ne.
vi,, fuanangana, akana, aka-
Match (continued).
nangana, kelemena, fuana,
dieleka.
vt., fuanylkixa, kelemexa, akA-
xa, elekexa.
Matchet, «., muele, 2.
Mate, ».(fr end\ mulunda, i;
nyana, i.
(of same kind), expressed in
several ways:
(i) By the verbs fuanangana,
kelemena, fuana.
(2) By thew ords bu and
buina.
(3) By the words muomumue
and o-umue.
(4) By the ph. muan'abo ne.
Material, ». (thing), cintu, 7.
Matrimony, n., dibfika, 5.
Matter, «. (affair), bualu, 6;
muanda, 2.
no, kakuena bualo.
(pus), tuflna, pi, of 8.
(what is the matter?), clnyi?
bualu kI7 clnganyl?
Mature, be, vi., killa.
May, v.y see permission.
(month), lllaya(Eng.).
Maybe, adv., ne.
Me, pers. pro.
(i) Simple Disjunctive, meme.
§ 105-
(2) As direct and indirect obj.
use pronominal infix n(m).
§§116,117.
(3) With prepositions, see §§ 106
(c), 107.
Meal, «.( flour of corn or cassava),
bukula, 6.
(food), bidia(pl. of 7); bla
kudia.
Mean, v. (intend), amba followed
by infin.
be, vi., kina.
adj., -a lukinu(4); -a cln-
yangu(7).
(of low birth), -a cinana, -a
hatuhu.
(stingy), -a buimlnyi(6); -a
cUu(7).
224
MEANDER— MERCIFUL.
Meander, vi., endakana.
Meanness, n., luklnu, 4; cln-
yangu, 7.
(stinginess), buimlnyl, 6; citu,
7- ;
Means, n.( riches), luhetu, 4; and
the pi. forms from class VII,
biuma and bintu.
(by means of), ne.
Measles, n., kantembele, 8.
Measure, w.(rule or other imple-
ment for measuring), cidlki-
xllu, 7; lueiekexl, 4; cldl-
klxu, 7; luldi, 4; luedi, 4.
vt.y idikixa, elekexa.
(be full measure), vi., kumbana,
▼ula.
Meat, n., munyinyl, 2.
fat, dllnyl, 5.
lean, ngulunge, 3.
Mediate, 1;/. (separate when fight-
ing), sunga.
(deliver, save), sunglla, bandl-
xa, sungidila.
Mediator, n., musungidi, 1 ma-
handixl, i.
Medicine, »., buaoga, 6. In the
native mind this is only a
charm or fetish, into which
some supernatural spiritual
power has been put by the
maker. If the object is carved
it is called luhlngu, 4.
(charm before which divination is
done), lubuku, 4.
destroy the power or influence of,
vt.j talCkxa or xlha.
do incantations before, vL, ten-
delela.
make, vL, hilka, songa(if wood),
maker of, mpAka(i) manga;
muhaki(i) wa manga; mu-
songi(i) wa mpingu.
See divine, bewitch, doctor.
Meditate, v., see think.
Meek, be, vi., tumlkila, dl ne
kaloIo(8).
Meekness, n., kalolo, 8.
Meet, it. (assemble), tutakana,
kungakana, sangakana.
Meet {continued),
sambakana, disanga, diun-
guixa.
go to, to welcome, akldlla,
uhuklla, akana.
(meet and pass), sembakena,
kumankana.
(persons, paths, rivers, etc.),
sambakana, sangakana, san-
gila.
up with, sangana.
Meeting, ».(crowd), clsumbu, 7.
(of rivers or ways), dlsangu, 5.
Generally use pi.
Melancholy, »., cixl, 7; kanyin-
ganylnga, 8.
adj.t di ne cixl or kanyingan-
yinga; muoyo(2) or mu-
clma(2) as subj. of verb
nylngala; clxi as subj. of
kuata and person as obj.;
ufua or unva with cixl.
Melt, vi., enguiuka, flngaluka;
Member, »., of thp body, name the
specific part,
of the church, muntu(i) wa
Nzambi.
(one of a party or company),
muena, i.
Memory, n., muoyo, i.
call to, vi.f vuluka; vt, vnlnla,
▼uluxa.
Menace, vt.y funyina.
Mend, v/., tuanganya, tuangflxa,
longolola.
(patch), Iftmika, bamba, tenta-
k&xa, bambakanya, bamba-
kCkxa, tenteka.
Menses, n., kaceci, 8; ku mb&la
(perhaps 3). MukAxi udi ku
mb&la, the woman is at her
menstrual period.
Menstruate, v., mtina(mona)
kaceci(8).
Mention, 1;., amba.
Merchant, »., ngenda(i) wa
muxinga(2)^ muena(i) ci-
siimba(7).
Merciful, adj.^ -a Iu8e(4).
be to, v.y ha luse; samba.
MERCILESS— MIRACLE.
22c
Merciless, adj.y ena ne luse(4);
-a luklnu(4); -a cinyan-
8«(7)-
Mercy, »., luse, 4.
give to, v., ha luse; samba.
Merit, v. (be fit), fuana.
(be right or best to do), see
DESERVE.
Merry, be, vi., sanka.
Message, w., dl, 5; mukenji, 2.
deliver a, v.j amba or ambila
with di or mukenJl.
Messenger, n., muena(i) mu-
kenjl(2); muloho, 2.
Metal, ». (generic), clama, 7.
See COPPER, IRON, etc.
Metempsychosis, «.(the thing into
which a person is changed by
metempsychosis or transmi-
gration), cilengulengu, 7.
(the act of thus changing), v.,
lenguluka, sanguka, tanda.
Meteor, n., niutoto(2) mutuke
(act. p.p. from v. tuka).
Method, »., see manner.
Metropolis, n., clmenga, 7; ci-
hunda, 7.
Midday, nph.y diba(5) dia han-
kftci, munda munya(2), diba
dlakujalama.
Middle w., see centre.
Middleman, w.(in arranging mar-
riage), clbanjl, 7.
Midnight, n., mundankulu. § 423
(2) (b).
Midrib, n., mukuolo, 2; ]ub&-
xe(Buk.), 4.
(hard outside part of midrib
of the dlbue palm), lusele,
4-
(hard outside part of midrib of
the dlkadi or dlbondo), lu-
b&le, 4.
Midst, »., see centre.
Midwife, n., mulelexi, i.
(to act as for), v/., lelexa.
Might, «.(strength), buk&le, 6,
ugulu, pi. of 3 or 4; dlkanda,
5-
Mighty, adj., see great.
Migrate, v. (scatter, move to an-
other place), muangaia.
Mildew, «., see mould.
Milk, »., mabele, pi. of dibele,
breast,
v.y kama(/0 squeeze).
Mill, »., see Machine.
MiLLEPED, «.(long black worm
found in forest), dinyongeie,
5-
Millet, w., mponda, pi. of 3 or 4.
head of, muehu, 2.
Mimic, vL^ idikixa, elekexa.
Mince, vt.(cut into small pieces),
zaza.
Mind, n. (intellect), lungenyi, 4;
lukanyi(Buk.), 4; mexl, pi.
of 5-
(the will), muclma, 2; muoyo, 2.
call to, vt.f Yulula, Tuluxa; vi.,
vuluka.
change the, vt.j kudlmuna or
andamuna with mucima or
muoyo.
(nevermind), kakuenabualu(6).
(obey), unva, tumikila, tumika,
enza mu- followed by proper
form of amba (§ 465), ufoa.
(watch, tend), l&ma.
Mine, poss. pro., Inyl. See § 135.
Mingle, vt.(mix)j sanglxa, sanga-
ktixa, sangakanya, samba-
kanya, sambakAxa, tuta-
kfixa, tutakanya, sala, sala*
kana, buelakfixa, buexa-
kana; vi., sanga, sangakana,
sambakana, tutakana, bue-
lakana.
(stir around), vundula.
(stir up together), buandulula,
buandakilxa, vuandulula, so-
ha.
Minister, «., see missionary,
PREACHER, evangelist, SERV-
ANT.
to, vi.y l&mjkta.
Minute, n.(short time), cltuha, 7.
adj.f kise, b&le, nya-uya.
Miracle, nph.j bualu(6) bua ku-
k^ma.
226
MIRACULOUS— MOON.
Miraculous, adj., -a kuk4^ma.
Mire, n., see mud.
up, v.f Jama.
Mirror, n., ludlmueou, 4; lu-
muenu, 4.
Mirth, n., kas<^ku, 8. PI. gener-
ally used.
Miscarry, v., tula with iiiuana(i)
or difu(5); lela kabixe(8).
Misfortune, n., baalu(6) with
bubl or bukttle.
(bad luck), dikttsaCs) <llbi; mu-
bldi(2) mubl.
Misguide, vL^ hambuxa.
Mishap, n.(bad luck), dlkasa(5)
dlbl; mubidf(2) mubi.
Mislead, t;/., hambuxa.
Miss, v., aim, hanga, ela cln-
8oma(7) hanxl.
(fail), hanga.
fire, not go off, funga.
(in looking for something), muo-
yo(2) with the verb hua.
(omit, not do as intended), hum-
bixa.
Missionary, nph.y mukelenge(i)
wa Nzambl; muambl(i) wa
bualu(6) bua Nsambl.
Mist, n.(fog), dlbungi, 5.
Mistake, make, v. (take wrong
path), hambuka.
in counting, etc , tuhakana,
hanga.
Mistress, n.(female chief), muke-
lenge(i) mukaxi(i).
(slave in speaking of mistress),
mamu(i), baba(i).
Mix, vt.f sangixa, sangakAxa,
sangakanya, sambakanya,
sambakftxa, tutakOxa, tuta-
kanya, tuhakanya, tuha-
kAxa, sala, salakana, buela-
kftxa, bnexakana; vi.^ sanga,
sangakana, sambakana, tu-
takana, buelakana, buanda-
kana, tuhakana, vuanduluka.
(stir around), vundula.
(stir up together), buandulula,
buandaktixa, soha, vuandu-
Ittla.
Moan, v.j huma, tuamuk£ma(2).
n.y mukima, 2.
Mock, v/.(mimic), Idikfxa, ele-
kexa.
Mode, n.(custom), cllele, 7; cien-
sedi, 7; cibllu, 7.
in this, thus, adv., nunku(nan-
ku, nenku).
Model, n., cimonyinu, 7; cidikl-
xllu, 7; luedi, 4; luidi, 4;
cidlklxu, 7.
Modest, be, vph., dl ne or ufua
or unva with bundu(6); ena
ne dlkama(5); ena ne cl-
kama(7) ; ena ne dintanta(5);
dl ne kalolo(8); dl ne mu-
cima(2) mutekete; also neg.
of dlsua.
Modesty, n., bnnvu, 6; bundu, 6;
kalolo, 8.
Moist, arf;., see damp.
Moisten, vt., see dampen.
Moisture, n., cltelele, 7; claxlma,
7-
Moment, »., cltuha, 7.
Monday, nph , dltuku(5) dla
mp&tukllu(ornduhukllu) wa
Lumingu.
Money, ».(coin), mpalata, 3.
Monkey, n. There is no generic
name, some of the different
species are: nklma(nclma),
3; nsoko, 3; nflndu, 3;
mb<^le, 3; ntombolo, 3.
Month, ».(moon), ngondo, 3;
muenxl, 2.
Moon, n., ngondo, 3; muenxl, 2.
(the appearing of the new moon),
b&la.
be full, v., lua clb&lu(7), ten-
tama.
shining of the, v., toka, kenena,
kenka.
waning of, v., nyana.
waxing of, v.y dlunda.
The size of the moon in waxing
and waning; is shown by com-
parinfij with the fingers; as,
ngondo udl bu minu Is&tu, ihe
moon is the size of three fingers.
MOONLIGHT— MUCUS.
227
Moonlight, n., dikenka, 5.
Mope, z/.(due to sickness), bun-
gama, humpama.
Morbid, be, vi.^ bungama, oyin-
galaor sama with muclma(2).
More, o^;. (other), kuabo, nga.
a4v. To express Comparative
Degree of adjectives or ad-
verbs, use verbs tamba and
hita. § 89.
Morning, n.(about sunrise), dinda,
5; lunkelu, 4.
(about 9 a.m.), mlsasa(pl. of 2).
(at daybreak), haciacia. § 423
(.^) (*)• .
(cockcrowing), ha bitlla, hadl
hasama nsolo(3).
(to break day, the coming of the
morning), vph., butuku(6) as
subj. of V. cla.
Mortal, be, v»., use Pres. Habitual
tense or Second Pres. Actual
of fua, to die.
Mortar, n.(for pounding in), clnu,
7-
(mud), blt&hikldi, bintampi,
blntocl, blt&hl. All are pi.
of 7.
mix, vt.y soha.
Mortified, be, v»., di n« or ufua
or unva with person as subj.
and bundu(6) as obj.; bundu
as subj. of kuata and the
person as obj.
Mortify, i/. (cause shame), ufulxa
or kuaclxa with bundu(6).
Mosquito, n., kamue, 8; kamem-
bele, 8.
Most, adv. To express Superla-
tive Degree, use the verbs
tamba and hIta. § 89.
Moth, »., clblylblyl, 7.
Mother, n., mamu, i; baba, i;
nyoku, i; nylii(a). For
nyln(a) see § 138.
(mother who has recently given
birth), muvlele, i; muadl-
kdxi, I.
Mother-in-law. tr..inuku(i), used
only by husband; baba-
Mother-in-law {continued),
inuenu(i) andnia'-muenu(i),
see § 42, Note 3.
Mould, n., butu, 6; lutu, 4.
2;., kuata with butu or lutu.
Mount, v., banda.
Mountain, n., mukuna, 2.
(peak), dilunda, 5.
Mourn, v., dila.
for, Jinga.
Mourning, n., muadi, 2.
Mouse, «. (generic), mpuku, 3.
Some of the more common
varieties are: cibaka]a(7),
ngongo(3), dltambue(5),
nkose(3), clbende(7), mu-
landa(2).
hole of, bulna(6), pi. is mena.
Moustache, nph.^ iiiuedl(2) or
muevu(2) with the ph. wa ha
muxuku (2).
Mouth, n., mukana, 2.
of river, lusongo, 4.
Move, v., back and forth, vi.^
lemba, lembelela, dlkuha.
cut of the way, vi.^ ehuka(ahu-
ka), sesuka, umuka; vt.^
umuxa.
(shake), v/., taklxa, clkfxa,
kuha, nyunglxa, saxa, nyun-
ga, senga, salakanya; vi.^
taka, nyunga, sala, clka,
cikakana.
sidewise, vi., senrena, sela; vt.^
semexa, sexa (seja).
slowly, xlxamuka.
stealthily, onguela, tcbela,
bombelela.
to another place, scatter, m.,
muangala.
Much, adj.j -a buiigl(6), ng',
-ngla-Dgi.
how? bungi muoyi? bungi
blxl? nga? For the last
word, see § 78. ,
too, the verbs hIta or tamba
with bungi.
Mucus, «.(from eye), luhota 4,
luhoca, 4
228
MUCUS—NATION.
Mucus (continued).
(from the nose), tuminu, pi. of
8; lusole, 4.
blow from the nose, v.j hemba.
Mud, n.y blt&hl, bit&hlkidi, bln-
toci, bintampl. All pi. of 7.
Muddy, be, vi.{as water stirred up
with mud), vuanduluka; vt.,
Yuandulula.
Mug, n., lutaanza, 4.
Multiply, v. (by generations), le-
langana.
Multitude, n., cisumbu, 8;
bungi, 6.
Murder, vt., xlha.
Murderer, n., muxlhlangan-
yl(i), muxlhl(i).
Murmur, v.^ uungana, tontolola,
tontom na.
n.(whisper), dinunganyi, 5.
Muse, t;., ela or elangana with
iiiucima(2) or inexi(5) or
lukanyl(4) or lungenyl(4).
Mush, n., mus&bu, 2
Mushroom, n., buowa, 6.
Music, n.(tune' or hymn), mu-
sambu, 2.
Musical instruments, see instru-
ment.
Must, v. No satisfactory word
has been found to express the
idea must or necessary or ne-
cessity. The unsatisfactory
bualu(6) buk&le with the
Causative Form of the verb is
the best that can be suggested.
Mute, n., a, kamama, 8.
be, especially when righ ly ac-
cused, hua.
Mutter, v., nungana, tontolola,
tontomona.
Muzzle, n., of gun, muxuKu, 2.
My, poss. pro.y Inyl. § 133.
Myself, psrs. pro.
(i) Compound Disjunctive Form,
nkljinyl, etc. §§ 108, 109.
(2) When reflexive use reflexive
prefix of verb, -dl-. Note that
this is subj. or obj. § 118.
(3) See B.L.-Eng., under ine.
Mysterious, adj.^ -a musokoko
(musoko). 2. The neg. form
of mauya t^o know, may some-
times be used in this sense.
Mystery, ».(secret), musokoko
(musoko), 2.
N.
Nail, n., mulonda, 2; lusonso, 4.
(brass chair nail, tack), lufiima,
4
of finger, luz&la, 4; lus&di, 4;
luala, 4.
drive a, vt., kumlna, hohela.
Naked, be., vi., di bataka(6).
Nakedness, n., butaka, 6.
Name, n., dlna(5), pi. is mena;
cibikidllu, 7.
call by, vt., biklla.
call one's name behind the back,
vt.j tela.
give a, vt., Inyika, Idlka.
-sake, n., xakeoa, i.
what is its name? dlna dlacl
nclnyl?
what is your name? dlna diebl
nganyi?
Namesake, «., xakena, i. Gener-
ally followed by poss. pro.
enclitic. § 42, Note i.
Nap, z;.(nod), bunga tulu(pl. of 8).
n., use kalu, the sing, o: tulu.
Napkin, n. (serviette), citamba-
la(7) cia ha mesa, dit a-
ya(5) dia muxuku(2).
Narrate, v., amba.
a fable or story, ela with
muana(2) or lu8umuinu(4)
or luxlmlnylnyu(4).
Narrative, n., bualu, 6; muanda,
2.
Narrow, adj.y kise, b&le, nya-
nya.
be, vi.f bulukana(?).
Narrowness, «., buklse, 6; bu-
bble, 6; bunyabunya, 6.
Nasty, adj,, bl.
Nation, »., see tribe.
NATIVE— NET.
229
Native, «. There is no distinct
word to distinguish the native
from the foreigner. Occa-
sionally we hear bena Kasai,
meaning the native people in
the Kasai regions as distinct
from the foreigners,
(one from, or one of), muena, i ;
mukua, 7. §§ 84 (6), 87 (d).
Rem. 2.
Nature of, n.(custom, habit),
cilele, 7; dense 1, 7; cl-
bUu, 7.
Naughty, aJ/.(bad), bl.
Nausea, nph.. muendi(2) ku
muoyo(2).
Nauseate, vL, endexa ku muo-
yo(2).
Nauseous, be, vph.y usemuoyo(2)
as subject of the verb enda,
with the person as object; or
di ne muendi(2) ku muoyo;
or ku inuo^^o kudi kuenda.
Navel, n., muofo, 2; mututu, 2.
Near, adv. Use the locatives (mu,
ku and ha) with the stem ihl,
short, thus giving muihl, kul-
hi, hehi(hihl), § 79.
We may also have the forms ha
bulhi(6), ku, kunxi, ha
buihi ne.
(be near together), vi., kuata-
kaiia, tuangana, di ne kaba
(dimin. of muaba) kamue.
• to, hehl ne.
Nearly, adv., see almost.
Nearness, »., buihi, 6.
Neat, adj., -a niankenda(pl. of
5 or 6).
Neatness, n., mankenda, pi. of
5 or 6.
Necessary, see must.
Necessity, see must.
Neck, n., nxingu, 3.
of gourd, cikolokolo, 7.
Need, i/.(lack), x&la, neg. of en a
ne.
n.(poverty), buhele, 6; bulanda,
6.
be in, poor, adj., hele, landa.
Needle, n., kaxingl, 8.
eye of, dlsu(5) dla kaxingl.
EEDY, adj., hele, landa.
Negative. Methods for forma-
tion of, see §§ 196, etc.
Neglect, v. (leave), lekela or xia
with cinana or hatuhu.
(disown), hidia, benga, nyoka,
diula.
Neglectful, adj., see disobe-
dient.
Neglectfulness, fi., see disobe-
dience.
Negligence, n., see disobedience.
Negligent, adj., see disobedient.
Neighbor, fi.(of same tribe or
village), mukuetu(i), muena
kuetu, muan'etu. See §§
142; 141, Rem. i; 138, Rem. 5.
Neither . . . nor, correlative
conj,, see § 433, Rem.
Nephew, n., muana(i) wa muan-
'etu.
(child of a man's older or younger
sister), muihu, i.
(child of a younger brother or
sister), muana wa muakun-
yi(i).
(child of an older brother or
sister), muana wa mukulu(i).
Some say that the last two
phrases, muana wa mua-
kunyi and muana wa mu-
kulu, can be used by the man
and the woman in speaking of
the children of older or younger
brothers or sisters, while
others claim that muihi is the
only proper term for the man
to use in speaking of a sister's
children, whether she be older
or younger.
Nervous, be, vt. (restless), sasa-
kata.
Nest, »., of birds, rats, etc., disua, 5
of fowl, cisua, 7.
of wasps, nsaho, 3; dibui, 5.
Net, n., bukuondo, 6; mu-
xinsa(2) wa bute(6); mu-
xinga(2) wa ndadika(3).
230
NEVER -NOTHING.
Never, adv.{ne\er again), use neg.
of verb with cendeleleor l&ha-
l&ha or kaxldi or matuku
onso.
mind, kakuena bualu(6).
New, adj.y hla-hia. § 76.
(green, not ripe), blxe.
New-born babe, »., katoto, 8.
News, n.(fame, report), lumu, 4.
(word,) dl(s).
(spread), vt.y endexa lumu; vi.j
endakana with lumu as subj.
Next, adj., time, kabidl(adv.),
musansu(2) mukuabo, cl-
kondo(7) clkuabo.
month, ngrondo walua. § 306
(c). Rem. I.
(next after), -a ku iiyima(3).
(be next to each other), vi.,
kuatakana, tuangrana, di
kaba (dim. of muaba) kamue.
Niece, n. Use exactly the same
constructions as for nephew,
the diflFerence in sex is not
considered.
Night, »., butuku, 6; bufuku, 6.
(all night long), butuku to ne
with lunkelu(4) or dinda(5).
at, butuku, bufuku.
last, butuku or bufuku with the
ph. bua lelu.
mid-, mundankulu. § 423 (2)
(6).
the approaching of, vph., butuku
or bufuku as subj. of the verb
Ua.
the disappearance of, daybreak,
vpk.y butuku or bufuku as
subj. of the verb cla.
Nine, card, num., citema, 7.
Nipple, »., of breast, lusongo(4)
or mutu(2) followed by the
adj. ph. -a dlbele.
of gun, dlsu. 5. PI. mesu.
No, aiv.(neg. answer to a question),
uaxa, buala, nanyl, bl(Buk.).
ai;.(not any, none), use neg. v ;
as, mu nsubu kamuena ml,
there is no water in the house.
Sec §469.
Noble, aJy.(good), impe, lengele,
akane.
(famous), nine, tumbe(p.p. from
tumba).
Nobleman, n.(chief), mukelenge,
i; nfumu, i; muntu)i)
munlne.
Nobody, «., use neg. of the verb.
See no.
Nod, v., assent, xukula mutu(2).
dissent, kuha mutu.
(in sleeping), bungatulu(pl of 8)
Noise, n., of crying, muadl, 2.
(low murmuring), dinunganyl,
5. Generally use pi.
of human voices, dlyoyo, 5;
mutftyo, 2; muaku, 2.
of wind or rain, clona, 7.
(report of gun, etc.), mukuma, 2.
Noisy, adj., -a dlyoyo(5); -a
mutftyo(2); -a muaku(2).
None, adj. or pro., use neg. verb.
See NO.
Nonsense, n. (gibberish), claku-
lakula, 7. § 356 {g).
Noon, nph., munda munya(2),
diba(5), dia hankticl, dlba
dlakujalama.
Noose, n., dlsoko, 5. Used in
catching rats.
Nor, see neither.
North, n., nftta(Eng.).
Nose, n., dllu(pl. melu), 5; dlulu,
5-
blow the, v., hemba.
Nostrils, n., muxuku(2) followed
by the ph. wa dlulu(5) or wa
dllu(s).
Not, adv. For formation of neg.,
see §§ 196, etc.
any, see NO.
See § 415 and Rems.
Notch, n., dlhoko, 5.
Note, «.(letter), mukanda, 2.
Nothing, n. Use neg. of the verb;
as, mu nsubu kamuena
cintu, there is nothing in the
house.
for, cinana, hatuhu.
See no.
NOTICE— OFF.
231
Notice, v. (see), tangUa, xoxa
mona.
Nourish, v^.(feed), dlxa.
(bring up), k&Iexa.
Nourishment, ». (bread), bidia, pi.
of 7; nxima, 3.
(food), bia kudia.
November, «., Novemba(Eng.).
Now, adv.^ katataka, mpindeu,
diodiono.
Nude, be, v., di butaka(6).
Nudity, »., butaka, 6.
Number, v.(count), b&Ia.
n., a great, bungi, 6.
the same, bun8:i(6) bumue.
Numerals, see §§91, etc.
Numerous, adj., -a bunsi(6), ngi,
ngia-ngl.
Nurse, ^/.(attend), l&ma.
(suckle), amuixa.
n, mul&mi, I.
Nut, n. There is no generic name.
See peanut, palm nut, cola
nut, etc.
O.
Oar, n., mubambu, 2; cihu, 7.
pull an, vt.^ ita, uba.
(stick used in pushing a boat),
musangu, 2.
Oath, »., take an, v., clha. The
reflexive diciha is most com-
monly used.
Obedience, «., kalolo, 8.
Obedient, adj., -a kalolo(8).
be, v., tiimlka.
be to, T//., tumikila; enza mu-
foUowed by proper tense and
person of amba, to tell; ita-
buxa mu dl; ufua-; unva.
Note that the obj. of this last
verb is dl(5), not the person
obeyed.
Obeisance, «., do before one, vt.,
meneka, menekcia, nemeka,
nemekela, tendelela.
Obey, v/., tumikila: tumika;
enza mu- followed by proper
Obey (continued).
tense and person of amba, to
tell; itabuxa mu di; afua;
unva. Note that the obj.
of this last word is di(5), not
the person obeyed.
Object, ». (cause, reason), buaiu,
6; muanda, 2.
(thing), cintu, 7.
I/, (forbid), hidia, benga.
Obligation, «., see duty.
Oblige, v^ (cause to do) use Causa-
tive Form of verb.
Obscene, adj., see immodest.
Observe, v., see look, obey.
Obstinacy, «., cieu, 7; cibengu,
7; buhidia, 6; cixiku, 7.
Obstinant, adj.y -a cicn(7); -a
cibengu(7); -a buhidla(6);
-a cixiku(7).
be, v.f use neg. of tumikila,
tumika, ufua, unva, itabuxa
mu di, enza mu- followed by
proper tense and person of
amba, to tell.
Occupation, »., see employment.
Occur, v., lua.
Ocean, nph.y ml(pl. of 5) manlne.
O'clock, see time.
OCRA, »., cingombo, 7. (Perhaps
this may be origin of Eng.
"gumbo soup.")
October, »., Okotoba(Eng.).
Odor, ».(good or bad), muhuya, 2;
dihembu, 5 ; nsunga, 3 ; muen-
yi, 2.
bad, mukuhu, 2; lusu, 4; mu-
huya(2) mubi; kahambu, 8.
detect the, to smell, v., unva,
ufua.
emit an, good or bad, v., nunka.
smell in order to detect the, v.,
nunkila.
Of, prep., -a. This prep, is used
in adj. phrases to indicate pos-
session or quality, and takes
the Secondary Prefixes. § 425.
Off, adv The adverbial idea is
most often expressed in the
root of the verb; as, l&muka
232
OFF— OPEN.
Off {continued),
come off, as of something ad-
hering; nyema, run off, flee,
prep. Generally use the loca-
tives ka or ha; as» umaxe
malonga ha mesa, take the
plates off the table.
Offend, vt,, henda, taka
(with a click of the throat), sodia.
Offer, v.(give), ha, amblka.
(hold out to, hand to), heteza,
hetela.
Offering, ».(gifi:), clha, 7; also
the infin. kuha, to give,
make as a due or tribute, v/.,
lambula.
Office, n. The name of the office
is made by prefixing bu-(6) to
the root of the title; as, muke-
lenge, bakelenge, chiefship,
appoint to, v., see appoint.
Offspring, n., muana, i.
Often, adv., see frequently.
Oil, n., minyl, pi. of danyl(5), fat,
coal, petroleum, mpitoIo(Eng.).
from kernel of palm nut, mu-
xinda, 2.
palm, mlnyi a iigaji(iig&xl).
purified palm, lumbidl, 4.
render, vt., enga.
Ointment, n., mlnyi, pi. of
dUnyI(5), fat.
Old, adj.f kulu, kulukulu, -a
kale.
(as old person), nunu, kulu-
kaxe(p.p. from kuIukAxa),
-a bukulumpe(6), -a buku-
lukaxe(6) ; kulumpe(p.p.
from kulumpa).
age, »., bukulu, 6; bukulukulu,
6; bunanu, 6; bukulukftxe,
6; bukulumpe, 6.
(be or become an old person), v*.,
kulukftxa, kulumpa, lata.
times, adv., kale, bangabanga,
dlambedl.
Older, adj., -a ku mp&la(3).
brother or sister, n., mukulu, i.
Generally followed by poss.
pro. § 138, Rem. 2.
Older (continued),
of twins, n., cibuaba, 7.
Oldest child, n., mukulu, z;
muan'a bute(6).
Omit, v. (leave), lekela, xia.
(miss or fail to do), hombixa.
(overlook), hua muoyo(2)y
hanga.
Omnipresent, be, vph., dl kuonso.
Omniscient, be, vph,, mftnya
mala onso.
On, prep., ha.
top of, ha muta(2) ha.
(up on high), heulu.
Once, €idv., at, katataka, mpin-
deu, dlodiono.
(long ago), kale, bangabanga,
diambedi.
(one time), mu8anffa(2) nmue,
mu8an8a(2) umue, cikon-
do(7) cimue, ciakamue(7),
diakamue(5).
One, adj., numeral, mue(mo).
For abstract counting use
omue. Mue takes Secondary
Prefixes. §§ 92, Rem. i; 97.
any, onso.
(at one time, at the same time),
dlacimae(5), ciahamue(7).
(distributive), the one . . . the
other, kuabo . . . kuabo,
nga . . . nga.
(one another), use Reciprocal
Form of v. in -angana.
As indefinite pronominal subj.
of verb, see § 189.
As indefinite pro., see §§ 189,
Rem.; 105.
Onion, n., nsahola, 3.
Only, adv., ne ine, or the Com-
pound Pronoun forms nkl-
ylnyl, etc. § 109.
See § 418.
Open, v/.(as bracelet, etc.), ban-
gula.
(as door), unsulula.
(as eyes), handa, bulula; vi,,
tab&la.
(as flower), balulula; vi., balu-
luka.
OPEN— OUT.
^33
Open {continued),
(as mouth), bulula.
(as tin can or box), xibula,
cibula.
(as wings), olola, bulala; w.,
ololoka, buluka.
out, as piece of cloth, vungu-
lula; vi.f vunguluka.
Opener, nph.(as can-opener),
cintu(7) cia kuxibula n'aci
mpansa(pl. of 4).
Oppose, vph.y ela mukosa(2).
(forbid), hidia, bengra.
Opposite, adj.j side, n., dixia, 5.
(be facing each other), v., tangrl-
xangrana mp&la(3).
Opposition, «. (interference), mu-
kosa, 2.
Oppress, v/., nyanga, taclxa, ona.
Oppression, n., clnyangu, 7.
Oppressive, adj., person, -a cin-
yanfiru(7).
Or, canj.f see either.
(whether . . . or), ne . . . ne.
(in asking questions), Inyi.
§434.
Ordain, v., see sanctify.
Ordeal, n. The person against
whom a real or imaginary
wrong has been done by an
unknown person goes to a
medicine man(inuena(i) bu-
ang:a(6) or muena lubuku(4)
to inquire (tempa or buka).
The accused, in order to prove
his innocence or guilt, is made
to submit to certain ordeals or
tests. One accused of witch-
craft is made to drink a poison-
ous concoction called cl-
haha(7). One accused of
theft or other small crime has
a small piece of iron (clala, 7)
thrust into his eye. Some-
times the accused is made to
put his hands and arms into
boiling water.
Order, ;;. (command), di, 5; mu-
kenji, 2.
(neg. command), mukandu, 2.
Order {continued),
V. (command), amba, ambila,
tumina di.
(command not), kanda.
put in, arrange, longrolola.
put out of, disarrange, v/., tanga-
dlxa, tuhaktixa, tuhakanya,
tangral&xa, buexakana, san-
SakAxa, sangakanya, muan-
sa, muangalAxa, buela-
kftxa; vi.^ tangadika, tanga-
Iftka, buelakana, sangakana,
tuhakana, muangralAka.
Ordinal numerals, see §§ 98, etc.
Ordinance, n., see commandment.
Ore, n.y iron, kabanda, 8.
Organ, ». (musical instrument),
cisanji, 7.
Ornament, «. (articles for wear-
ing), cilensa, 7.
Orphan, nph.^ muan'a nxi(3).
Orphanhood, «., nxl, 3.
Oscillate, vi., lembelela, dl-
kuha, hehuka.
Other, adj.^ kuabo, ngra.
(distributive), the one . . . the
other, kuabo . . . kuabo,
nga . . . nga.
each, use Reciprocal Form of v.
in -angrana.
(of another one), -a bende.
Otherwise, adv.^ see different-
ly.
Ought, v. Thns far no satisfac-
tory word h^j been found.
Suggest bualu(6) buimpe or
bimpe(adv.) followed by infin.
Our, poss. pro., etu. § 133.
Ours, poss. pro., etu. § 135.
Ourselves, pers. pro.
(i) Compound Disjunctive form,
nklyetu, etc. §§ 108, 109.
(2) When reflexive, use reflexive
prefix of v., -dl-. Note that
this form may be used either
as subj. or obj. § 1 18.
Out, adv. This idea is generally
expressed in the verb, even
though a prep, may be re-
quired at the same time; as.
234
OUT— PACE.
Out {continued)
luhuka, go otU; tula, pull
oui; Simak, blifw OtU, etc. §377.
(be out, exhausted), vi., hua,
xika.
(be out of, have not), v., ena
ne.
(get out of the way), v»., ehuka,
ainuka mu nxila(3).
prep. {out of), mu.
Outside, nph., ha iiyima(3); k"
nylma. See § 377.
Oven, «., uvum(Eng.).
Over, prep.{ahovt), ha mutu(2)
ha.
(across), dixia(5) dia.
adv. As an adv. this idea is
oftenest expressed in the verb;
as, kudlmuna, turn over; x&la,
be left over; sabuka, go over;
hiclxa, throw over; etc.
(do over and over), v., use the
Repetitive tenses,
(overhead), use proper locative
with the insep. -ulu, giving
mCklu, kCklu, heulu.
OVERABDUND, vi.y sambuka, tam-
ba or hita with bunffi(6).
Overboard, adv., fall, vph., bona
mu ml.
OVERGOME, vt., cimuna, tamba or
hlta with bukiile(6) or ngu-
1»(3)-
Overflow, v».,(run over as water
in jar), humuka, iclklla.
Overhead, adv., ha mutu(2);
proper locative with the insep.
-ulu, giving mCklu, kAlu,
heulu.
^Overlook, v. (oversee), tanglla,
mona, xoxa, ^&ma. ,
(not to see), use neg. of any of
the above verbs,
(omit, miss), hanga, hua muo-
yo(2).
Oversee, vt., tangrila, mona,
xoxa, l&ma.
Overseer, n., mul&mi, i; mu-
tantrfdi, i; mumonyi, i.
Overt AKfc, vt., beta.
Overthrow, ^/.(conquer), hlta or
tamba with bukftle(6) or
iisulu(3), cimuna.
(throw down, as house), xlm-
bula.
Overturn, vt., tokola.
Owe, v. Use the forms dl ne
dlbanKa(5) dia, angata dl-
banza, dibanza as subj. of
kuata and the person as obj.
Hence we say ndi ne di-
banza diandi dia lukama
lua mibela, / owe him 100
cowries; nakuangata dibanza
diandl dia lukama lua mi-
bela, / have taken his debt for
100 cowries, i.e., / owe him,
etc.; dibanza diakunkuata,
/ owe a debt, lit., a debt has
caught me.
Owl, »., cihungrulu, 7.
Own, v.(possess), use any of the
verbs meaning to be (di, cldi,
tadi, ik&la, etc.) followed by
ne. § 426, Rem. 2.
up, confess, sokolola, sokola,
tonda, disonsuela.
The emphatic use of own after
poss. pro. may best be ex-
pressed by the Simple Dis-
junctive Pers. Pro. following
the noun; as, bualu buebi
we we, your own affair. § 106
(ft).
Owner, «., of, nfumu(i) wa,
mukeleng:e(i) wa, muena(i).
§84(6)-
Ox, n., ngombe, 3.
Oyster, n., cinyAmankole, 7.
Pace, n., at rapid, lubilu, 4;
lukftsa, 4. These words -are
nouns in form but have the
force of adverbs.
at slow, bitekete(adv.).
v.f to and fro, tambakana.
PACIFY— PARDON.
23S
Pacify, vt., a child when crying,
kosexa or ahuixa with mua-
dl(2).
(make quiet), holexa, tal&xa.
(separate people who are fight-
ing), sunga.
Pack, ».(bale), dikutu, 5.
(bundle), mubombo, 2; cisum-
• bu, 7.
(roll), muvungu, 2.
vt.j down, as dirt, beta, xindlka,
kuma, tua.
Package, «., see pack.
Pad, «.(for head in carrying load),
nkata, 3.
Paddle, ».(oar), mubambu, 2;
cihu, 7.
v.(to row), ita, uha.
Padlock, »., ns&hl, 3.
Page, »., dlbexi, 5; dUnyi, 5.
Pain, n., disama, 5; dibedl, 5;
bubedi, 6.
i;.(ache), sama, bela.
(smart), oxa, hiakana, susuma.
Palatable, be, v. (be pleasant to
taste), xemakana.
Palaver, n., bualu, 6; muanda, 2,
no, kakuena bualu.
settle a, to judge, v., lumbulula
with bualu or clluinbu(7).
Palm, »., of hand, munda mua
clansa(7).
tree. There are several varieties,
such as dlbue(5), dlkadl(5),
dlbondo(5), dlku(5), dl-
handa(5).
flower of, mus£k£l£ke, 2.
leaf of, dilala, 5.
(fiber of leaf, used in making
cloth), luhiku, 4; munyan-
Ka, 2.
midrib of mukuolo, 2; lub&xe
(Buk.), 4.
(hard outside part of midrib of
the dibue palm), lusele, 4.
(hard outside part of midrib of
the dikadi and dlbondo
palms), lub&le, 4.
(pith of the midrib), dbubu, 7.
nut, lunsfljl(lunsaxl), 4.
Palm (continued).
(bunch of nuts), clngrAJl(cin-
Kfixi), 7.
(kernel of nut after outside oily
skin has been taken off), musa,
2.
oil, mlnyi(pl. of 5) a ngttji
(ngttxi).
(the rendered oil), lumbldi, 4.
(oil of the kernels), muxlnda, 2.
wine, maluvu, malua. These
words are pi. of 5 or 6,
(man who climbs the tree for
wine), mueml, i.
(the rope with which he climbs),
luku(Buk.), 4.
(chisel for making incision),
munyonga, 2.
(to make incision), v., ema.
Palsy, n.y lukanku, 4; lusakalu, 4.
Pan, n.f dilongra, 5.
frying-, civuadi, 7; luesu, 4;
nylnsu, 3.
Pang, n. (mental), kanylngan-
ylngra, 8.
(pain), disama, 5; dibedl, 5;
bubedi, 6.
Pant, v.^ huyakana, eyakana.
Pants, ». (pantaloons), muh&nu, 2;
muklya, 2. PI. generally used,
put on, v., ela.
Papaw, «., dihahl, 5. This is cor-
ruption of papaw.
Paper, n., mukanda, 2.
Papyrus, «.(with which mats are
made), lutuhu, 4; lumuDyu,
4.
Parable, »., see fable.
Parallel, be, vi., lulAma.
make, vt., ludika.
Paralytic, w., see paralyzed.
Paralyzed person, n.(one unable
to walk), muena(i) iijeku(3),
muena kaneke(8).
Parch, v., kangra.
Pardon, v. There is no satisfac-
tory word. We would suggest
tokela or tokexila or tokexa
followed by munda or mu-
clma(2); also Jimlxa malu
23^
PARDON— PEACE.
Pardon (cofUinued).
mabi. Tokela seems to have
reference to pardoning one who
has done the wrong, while
tokexa, has more reference to
the person wronged ceasing
from the anger in his heart.
Pare, vL, nails, bengula.
Parent, n. There is no distinct
word, use the words for
FATHER and MOTHER.
Parrot, »., nkusu, 3.
Parsimonious, adj., -a cltu(7);
-a buiminyl(6); -a die-
ma(7); -a cianza(7) cikftle.
Parsimony, «., citu, 7; bulmlnyi,
6; cUema, 7; clansa(7) cl-
kttle.
Part, v., among, abanya, aban-
yina, abuluxa.
(as hair), handa, henga.
(separate, divide), v/., abuluxa,
handulula, sungulula, t&hu-
lula; vi.y abuluka, handu-
luka, t&huluka.
those fighting, sungra.
(some of), use the adjs. kuabo
and nga.
«.(of anything cut oflF), cltuha, 7.
(of anything split), clhisu, 7.
(side), lus«ke, 4.
hind, citaku, 7; nylma, 3.
Partition, »., of house, cidldi, 7.
Partridge, »., kalumbu, 8.
Party, «. (company, crowd), cl-
siimbu, 7.
(of the party of), muena(i)
followed by the distinguishing
noun. § 84 (b).
Pass, v., by, on by, when going in
the same direction, tamba,
hita, dika.
by, elapse, see elapse.
(go around one in order to pass),
sesuka, ehuka.
(going in different directions),
sembakena, kumankana.
in, buela.
let, hicixa, tambixa, diklxa.
on, go, ya, enda.
Pass (carUinued).
out, luhuka, umuka, h&tuka.
over, as river, sabaka.
Passage, «.(fording), dilobo, 5;
clsabu, 7; cisabukilu, 7.
Passion, ». (anger), clxl, 7.
get into, v.f di ne or ufua or
unva with clxi; also clxi as
subj. of V. kuata with the
person as obj.
throw into, vL, kuacixa or
ufuixa with clxi.
Past, go, vt., hlta, tamba.
Paste, vL, together, l&m&cixa.
Patch,!/., l&mlka, bamba, bamba-
kanya, bambaktixa, tente-
ktixa, tenteka.
(small plat of garden near house)
n., cibunda, 7.
(small place in swamp planted in
dry season), n., clsense, 7.
Path, »., nxlla(iijila), 3.
Patience, n., lutulu, 4.
Patient, adj., -a lutulu(4).
Patiently, adv., bitulu, bitekete.
Patriarch, n., kaku, i.
Pattern, n., cidikixllu, 7; luedi,
4; luldi, 4; luelekexi, 4;
cidlklxu, 7.
Paw, n., dikama, 5.
Pawn, v. (leave in), eyeka.
(take out of), redeem, hikula.
n., cleya, 7.
Pay, vt., futa.
attention, telexa.
dowry, sela.
homage to, tumblxa, nemekela, *
nemeka, meneka, menekela,
tendelela.
interest, tentekela with kasom-
belu(8) or matabixa(pl. of 5
or 6) or nsekididi(3) or nten-
tekedl(3).
over to, flia.
taxes to, lambula.
n., difutu, 5.
Payment, «., difutu, 5.
Pea, »., black-eyed, lukunde, 4.
Peace, be at, v., talala, hola, dt
with talala or hola.
PEACEFUL—PERPENDICULAR,
237
Peaceful, be, vi., talala, hola, dl
wi|h talala or hola.
Peacefully, adv., talala, hola.
Peacemaker, »., musungri, i.
Peak, n., of mountain, dllunda, 5.
Peanut, n., kambele, 8.
Pebble, »., lusoka, 4.
Peck, v. (as fowl), sokola, tua
muinu(2).
Peel, vt., ubula.
n., cihusu, 7; cisubu, 7.
Peer about, v., kensakana.
Peevish, be, w'., nylnsabala.
Pen, ». (enclosure), clkumbl, 7.
(for writing), suggest mpena
(Eng.), 3; muci(2) wa ml a
mlkanda.
Penalty, «.(fine), difutu, 5.
Pencil, n. The name mpenct-
la(Eng.) is suggested,
lead-, mucl(2) wa mukanda.
slate-, mucl wa with dibue(5) or
dltadl(5).
Penetrate, v. (pierce), tubula.
(go in), baela.
Penis, n., lubola, 4.
Penitence, ». (shame), bundu, 6;
bunva, 6.
(sorrow), dxl, 7; kanylnsan-
ylngra, 8.
Penitent, be, v., muoyo(2) or
iiiucima(2) as subj. of the
verbs nyingala or sama;
ufua or unva with cixi(7) or
bundu(6); dl ne muclma
mutekete.
Pensive, be, vi., bungrama.
Penury, n., buhele, 6; bulanda,
6.
People, »., bantu(pl. of muntu, i.)
(people of), bena(pl. of muena,
i), bakua(pl. of mukua, i).
§§ 84 («, 87 ((0, Rem. 2.
Pepper, »., lulungu, 4.
Peradventure, adv.y ne.
Perceive, v.(feel), unva, ufua.
(know), mftnya.
(see), mona, xoxa, tangrila.
Perch, v., Ikila.
Percussion cap, n., lufataci, 4.
Perfect, be, v».(be completed),
hua, xlka; vt., mttna, mAn-
ylxa, xikixa, hulxa.
(exact number), vi., ula, xlka;
also the adj. forms xlla and
kanda.
a^;.(good), Impe, lengele,
akane.
(whole, complete), onso, xima.
I Perforate, v/., tubula.
^ Perforation, n., dlsoso, 5; dl-
kela, 5.
Perform, i;.(do), ensa, osa,
kIxa(Buk.).
on an instrument, Imba.
Perfume, »., mananaxi, pi. of 5
or 6. Doubtless an imported
word.
Perhaps, adv., ne.
Perish, vi., fua.
Permission, n. The idea of grant-
ing permission is perhaps best
expressed by the v. Itabuxa
with the verbal noun in lu-
as obj.; as, wakultabuxa
luendu lulnyl, he gave me
permission to go. Asking per-
mission may be expressed by
the v. lomba with a verbal
noun in lu- as obj. ; as naku-
lomba luendu, / asked per-
mission to go. Sometimes this
idea is expressed by the Pur-
portive Mood and is then gen-
erally to be translated by may
[§312 (P)]' Often the Causa-
tive Form of the v. will express
the idea; as, wakumpicixa,
he let me {gave me permission
to) pass. Refusing per-
mission is expressed by the v.
kanda.
Permit, v., Itabuxa. See per-
mission.
(not tabooed, permitted), neg: of
V. with cijlla(7).
Perpendicular, be, v»., lulAma,
Jalama, ImAna; vt., make,
ludika, Jadlka, Jalamlxa,
ImAnyika.
238
PERPETUALLY— PINCH.
Perpetually, adv., see cease-
lessly.
Perplex, vt (confuse), buanda-
kAxa, buandakanya, tuha-
kfixa, tuhakanya; vi., buan-
dakana, buhakana.
Persecute, vt.^ nyanga, ona,
tacixa, kengexa, enzela bibl.
Persecution, n., clnyangru, 7.
Persevere, v., use neg. of lekela
or of hangra or the Pres.
Habitual tense.
See also §356 (rf). Rem. i.
Persistent, be, vj*., see perse-
vere.
Person, »., muntu, i.
(person of or belonging to a cer-
tain party), muena, i; mu-
kua, I.
Perspiration, «., cisululu, 7;
luanga, 4.
Perspire, v.^ tuka or h&tuka with
clsululu(7) or luanga(4).
Persuade, ^.(induce to do), Ita-
buxixa.
(induce from doing), humblxa,
kosexa.
(implore by caressing), sengela,
sengrelela.
Pestle, »., muinxi, 2; musau, 2.
Petroleum, »., mpltolo(Eng.).
Petulant, be, vi.^ nyingrabala.
Phlegm, w., dikodl, 5. Generally
use pi.
Photograph, »., mundidlmbi, 2;
mudingridi, 2; cifuanyi, 7.
The indefinite mukanda(2) is
perhaps most often used. .
take a, v., kuata mu mukanda.
Physician, ». (medicine maker),
mpaka(i) mangaCpl. of buan-
sa, 6); muhaki(i) wa
manga.
Pick, v/. (choose), sungula.
(gather, as maize, fruit, etc.),
huola, kuola.
(gather up, as trash), boya.
oflF. as feathers, tukula, tula.
out, as something imbedded,
tubula, tundula.
Pick (continuecC) .
up, ambula, m£ma, angata.
up in the way, find, angula.
up, as fowls in eating, zokola.
Picture, ». (likeness), cifuanyi,
7.
(photograph), mundidlmbi, 2 ;
mudlngidi, 2; mukanda, 2.
take a, v/., kuata mu mukanda.
draw a, v., idlkixa kufunda.
Piece, »., of anything cut oflF,
cituha, 7.
of anything split, cihisu, 7.
of cloth, mpesa, 3. From
French,
of cloth, less than a fathom,
cltambala, 7.
(one fourth of a piece of cloth,
one fathom), lubandu, 4.
(one half of a piece of cloth),
difunka, 5.
come to, vi.f tuka, tulakana.
cut in pieces, vt.^ kosa bituha(pl.
of 7). Kosa muci bltuha
bis&tu, cui the stick in three
pieces.
(cut into small pieces, to hash),
iU.y zaza.
(take to pieces), vt.^ tula, tula-
kanya.
(tear to pieces), vt.^ tuanyan-
Sana, tuanyakanya, handa-
kanya.
Pierce, vt.y tubula; vi.^ tubuka.
Pig, «., muan'a ngulube(3).
Pigeon, »., nkudimba, 3; mpu-
tu(3) nyunyu(3).
Pile, v. and «., see heap.
Pilgrim, n., muendakanyi, i.
Pill, n., kamoma, 8.
Pillage, v^., haula.
Pillar, »., dlkunxl, 5.
Pillow, »., musamu, 2.
lay head on, v., sama.
Pimple, »., luhusu, 4.
Pin, »., kaxing:l(8) ka kab^a-
sa(8).
Pinch, v., tua or i^sa with Iuk&-
di(4) or luK&la(4) or luala^4).
PINE— POCKET.
239
Pine, v., bungama, nyingala
inucima(2), unva or ufua
with clxl(7).
(cry), dlla.
Pineapple, n., kangrajingruji, 8;
cikakakaka, 7; dikaka, 5.
Pinnacle, »., mutu, 2.
Pipe, »., muxiba, 2.
bowl of, nsuku, 3.
gourd used as, cihuba, 7; ciloa,
7-
Pistol, «., kahambala, 8.
Pit, ».(hoIe), dina(5), pi. is mena;
cina, 7.
for trapping animals, dijimba,
5-
sharpened stick in, disongo, 5.
Pitch, n.(used in mending pots),
kamonyi, 8.
V. (throw), ela.
Pitcher, ».(jug), luhanza, 4;
mplca(Eng.), 3-
Pith, »., of palm ribs, cibubu, 7.
Pitiless, adj., see merciless.
Pity, »., luse, 4.
v.y ha luse, samba.
feel, v.y ufua or unva with luse.
Place, n., muaba, 2; mb&di, 3;
mb&du, 3.
at, in or on the same, adv.,
kumue, mumue, hamue,
kaba kamue. § 79.
fire-, n., dlKU, 5. PL is meku.
v., see PUT.
Placenta, w., nkixiabendi, 3.
Plain, «. (treeless space), mpata,
3-
Plait, vL, luka.
«., eihia, 7.
Plan, v. (intend), amba followed
by infin.
in private conference, v., ela
clfufu(7).
interrupt one's, v., humbixa,
ela mukosa(2).
Plane, vt., kuona, langa.
Plank, »., diWya, 5.
Plant, v. (transplant), tentula,
ximika.
(as corn, etc.), v/., kuna.
Plantain, m. (bunch or single fruit),
dikuonde, 5.
hand of, cisangi, 7.
stalk of, cikuondekuonde, 7.
Plantation, «., see farm.
Planter, «., mukunyi, i.
Plaster, 2;.(daub), m^ta, bua.
Plate, »., dilongra, 5. Perhaps
from Lower Congo.
Plateau, w. (treeless plain), mpa-
ta, 3.
Play, v., s&ba, naya.
on an instrument, v., imba.
with, amuse, sdkexa, s&bixa,
s&ba ne, naya ne, nayixa.
».(game), dis&ba, 5; dinaya, 5.
Plead, v., for, akulla, lumbuluila,
ambldila.
with, implore, sengrela, senge-
lela.
Pleasant, be, w., to the taste,
xemakana, di ne nse(pl. of 3
or 4).
Please, v/.(make happy), sanklxa.
(be pleased), vi. sanka.
(implore, in sense of "please
do"), sengela, sengelela.
Pleasure, »,, disanka, 5.
Pledge, see pawn.
Plentiful, adj., -a bungl(6),
ngia-ngi, ngi.
Plenty, «., bungl, 6.
of, abundant, adj., -a bungi,
ngla-ngi, ngi.
Pliability, Pliableness, n., mu-
xobo(mujobo), 2.
Pliable, be, vi., xoboka, nyenga-
bala, di ne muxobo(2).
Pliant, see pliable.
Plot, «., cifufu, 7.
v., ela cifufu.
Plough, v., imba is suggested.
Pluck, v. (as feathers), tukula,
tula.
(as fruit or com), huola, kuola.
Plunder, vL, a village, haula.
Plunge, v».(dive), dlna.
Pock mark, see scar.
Pocket, «., cibombo, 7; luhlya,
4-
240
POINT— POWDER.
Point, v., at, funkuna.
at the, or end, the insep. locative
words kusala, kusula, kun-
fudllu. §423(2)W.
of needle, etc., »., lusongo, 4.
out to one, cause to see, vL, tan-
grldixa, muenexa, lexa.
sharpen to a, v/., songa.
Poison, vt., lunga.
n., mulangru, 2.
(given to witches), »., clhaha, 7.
(on arrows), lulengu, 4.
Poke, vL, the fire, sonsola.
Pole, n.(stick), mud, 2.
ridge-, mutandala, 2; mutam-
ba, 2.
Polite, adj., -a kaloIo(8).
Politeness, n., kalolo, 8.
Pollute, v/., ona, nyanga.
Pompous, be, v., dlsua, dllexa,
sanka.
Pond, »., dixlba, 5.
Ponder, v., ela or elangana fol-
lowed by lungenyi(4) or
mexi(pl. of 5 or 6) or lu-
kanyl(4)
Poor, adj., hele, landa.
become as of land, w., atuka.
Pop, v.(as corn parching), tudika,
taylka.
Population, see people.
Porch, ». (veranda), cltadllu, 7;
mbalanta(doubtlessfrom Eng.
veranda), 3.
Porcupine, «., nkSse, 3.
quill of, muanga, 2; muso-
mono, 2.
Porridge, »., mpoIuJ(Eng.), 3.
Porter, nph., matuadi(i) wa
bintu.
Portion, n.(inheritance), bahl-
anyl, 6.
(piece of an3rthing cut off),
cituha, 7.
(piece of anything split), cihSsu,
.7-
(side), lus£ke, 4.
Portuguese, ».( native from the
Portuguese territory on the
West Coast), clmb&di, 7.
Position, n. (place), muaba, 2;
mb&dl, 3; mb&du, 3.
Possess, see save.
Possessions, «., biiita(pl. of 7),
biama(pl. of 7), lul&eta(4).
Possessor, see owner.
Possible, be, v., use dl or mona or
mftnya followed by mua and
infin. § 230.
Possibly, o<f v. (perhaps), ne.
Post J «.(for holding up veranda),
dikunxl, 5.
(for wall or door), cUua, 7;
cixikl, 7.
(stick), muci, 2.
Posterior, adj., -a ku nytma(3).
Posterity, n., bana, pi. of muana.
Postpone, v., humblxa.
Pot, n., clvuadl, 7; luesu, 4;
nylngu, 3.
a small, kasamba, 8.
make a, vL, flmba, fumba.
water-, mulondo, 2.
Potato, n.(sweet), cUunga, 7;
cinsenga, 7.
Potter, »., muflmbi(mufuimbl),
i; mufumbl, i.
Pottery, make, vL, fumba, flmba
(fuimba).
Pouch, »., of monkey or crop of
fowl, dlbodio, 5.
Pounce, v., upon, tuhlklla, uhu*
kila.
Pound, v/. (crush between stones),
heia.
(beat), kuma, tutsi.
down, as loose dirt, beta.
in a mortar, tua.
into powder, botexa; W.(be
powdered), beta.
Pour, vt., homuna, Iclkixa.
Pout, v., bungama.
Poverty, n., buhele, 6, bulanda,
6.
Powder, n.(an3rthing fine), mu-
senga, 2.
gun-, kahia, 8; difuanda, 5.
vL, botexa; w'.(be powdered),
beta.
POWER— PRICE.
241
Power, ». (strength), bukftle, 6;
ngulu, pi. of 3.
have, be able, v., see able.
Powerful, adj., kttle.
Practice, ». (custom), cilele, 7;
clbllu, 7; clensedi, 7.
(customary action), use Pres.
Habitual tense.
Praise, v.(honor), tumbixa, ten-
delela, meneka, menekela,
nemeka, nemekela, Inylxa.
(not to praise, condemn), v/.,
dlula, nyoka.
Prattle, v., akula biakula-
kula [§ 356 (g)]y labakana.
Pray, v. (act of prayer), tendelela
is perhaps best word,
(ask for), lomba.
Prayer, »., mutendelelu, 2.
Preach, vph., amba bualu(6) bua
Nsambl.
Preacher, nph., muambi(i) wa
Nzambi, muambi wa bua-
lu(6) bua Pfzambl.
Precaution, «., budimu, 6.
take, v.y dfmuka.
Precede, v.^ ya with ku mp&la(3)
or kumudllu, dianjila.
Precipice, »., see cliff.
Precious, adj., -a muxinsa(2)
muk^le.
make, vL, bandlxa or klllexa
with muxlnga.
Predestinate, vph., sungrula di-
ambedl.
Predict, vph., amba diambedi
bualu kabul buansa(e) kulua.
Prefer, v^.(choose), sunguia.
(like), sua, nanga, Inylxa.
Pregnant, be, vi., di ne with
dlfu(5) or dlmi(s).
(be pregnant by, cause to be),
vt., imieixa.
(to conceive), v., imita difu.
Prematurely, bring forth, see
MISCARRY.
Prepare, 2;/.(make), enza, osa,
klxa.
(arrange), longolola.
(be prepared), vi., hua, xlka.
Preposition. For treatment of,
see §§ 422, etc.
Presence, «.( before the face of),
ku mesu kua, ku mp&Ia kua.
Present, be, vi., use generally dl
with Locative Suffixed con-
struction. § 320.
(give), vt., ha, ambika.
n. (extra amount added to con-
clude trade), matabixa, pi. of
5 or 6; nsekldidi, 3; nten-
tekedl, 3.
(gift),ciha, 7; also the infin.kuha.
Presently, aQV.(aX once), kata-
taka, mpindeu, dlodlono.
Preserve, v.{sls salt), lengexa.
(guard), l&ma.
Press, vL, down, buekexa.
in hands, to squeeze, kama.
in hands, to throttle, flekela.
(push against), s£klla, semexa,
sexa.
together into smaller space, bam-
bila, nyemenena, xindlka,
kamata.
Pretend, to v., dinglxa or ximixa
or dimbixa followed by infin.;
as, udl udlngixa kulala, he
ts pretending to sleep.
Pretty, adj., impe, lengele,
akane, -a mpocl(s]ang.)
Prevail, see overcome.
Prevent, v. (forbid), hidla, benga.
(interrupt, hinder), humbixa,
humbakftxa, kosexa. Nvula
wakutuhumblxa mua kuya,
the ainr prevented us from going.
Previously, do, v., dianjila fol-
lowed by infin.
Price, n., muxinga, 2.
beat down the vt., buekexa or
tekexa or tentulula with
muxinga.
of cheap, adj., -a muxinga mute-
kete.
of dear, adj., -a muxinga mu-
kttle.
raise the, vt., bandixa or kftlexa
with muxinga.
talk the, vt., tua muxinga.
242
PRIDE— PROPHESY.
Pride, »., dlsanka, 5.
Priest, «.(in Biblical sense), sug-
gest muainbl(i) wa NEambi or
muambl wa buaiu(6) bua
Pfzambi.
high, iiiukelense(i) wa bambi
ba Nzambl, mukelengre wa
bambi ba bualu bua Nzambi.
Prince, n.(son of king), muana(i)
followed by wa mukelense(i)
or wa nfuinu(i).
(chief), mukelenge, nfumu.
Print, v. (write), funda.
foot-, n., diklsa, 5; cidlacilu,
7; dikama, 5; mukono, 2.
Prison, nph.y nsubu(3) wa ma-
xika.
Prisoner, nph., muntu(i) wa mu
n8ubu(3) wa maxlka.
Probably, adv., ne.
Proboscis, n., muilu, 2.
Procedure, n., cienzedi, 7.
Proceed, v., see go.
Procession, n., mulongo, 2.
Proclaim, v., amba.
Proclamation, n., dl, 5; mu-
kenji, 2.
issue a, ^., amba followed by di
or mukenjl.
(prohibitive command), «., mu-
kandu, 2.
Procrastinate, t;., humba, xlxa-
muka.
Prodigal, nph.{one spending reck-
lessly his substance), mutan-
saiaxi(i) or matangadixl(i)
or manyang:i(i) followed by
wa bintu.
Prodigally, spend, vL, nyanga,
tangadixa, tangalftxa, muan-
galfixa, dia, ona. These may
all be followed by bintu as obj.
Produce, 7;.(bear), tela, kuama,
ika.
(make), enza, osa, klxa.
Productive, adj., soil, impe,
akane, kSle, -a luiya(4).
(have power to bear young), vph.,
di ne followed by luleiu(4) or
diminu(5) or buledi(6).
Propane, adj., bi.
vt.y ona, nyang^a.
Profess, v.(accept), Itabuxa.
(pretend), dinglxa or dimblxa
or xlmixa followed by infin.
Profession, ^.(calling), mudlmu,
2.
(make profession of faith), vph.^
itabuxa (bualu bua Nzambi).
Profit, v.(make by trading), endu-
iula muxinga(2) muimpe.
Progenitor, n., kaku, i; nyln-
k(a). I.
Progeny, n.,bana, pl.of muana(i).
Progress, v. (go), ya, enda.
Prohibit, ^.(forbid), hidia, benga,
kanda.
(prevent), bumblxa, bumba-
kAxa.
(prohibited thing), n., cijila, 7.
(taboo), v/., Jidika, Jila.
Prohibition, n.(law), mukandu, 2.
Prolific, be, v.(have power to
bear young), di ne followed by
lulelu(4) or dlminu(5) or
buledi(6).
Prolong, v., lunguluka.
Prominent, arf;. (important), nine,
tumbe(p.p. of tumba, U) be
prominent).
Promise, v., laya.
n., mulayi, 2.
Pronounce, v., badly, akula
cidiml(7) or akula cll&fl(7).
innocent, vL, bingixa, hixa.
judgment, v., lumbulula, kosa
nsambu(3).
Proof, ».(sign), cimonyinu, 7.
Prop, n., dikunxi, 5; cihanda, 7;
cikuacixi, 7.
Propagate, v., lelangana.
Proper, adj. (good), impe, akane,
lengele.
be, to fit, v., akana, akanangana,
fuanangana, kelemena, die*
leka.
Property, see goods.
Prophesy, vph., amba diambedt
bualu kabul buanza(e) ka«
lua.
PROPHET— PUSH.
243
Prophet, »., suggest ph. muam-
bi(i) wa malu kai manza(e)
kulua.
Proprietor, «., see owner.
Prostitute, «. (adulterer), mu-
ena(i) inasandi(pl. of 5 or 6);
muki:ixi(i) wa masandi.
Protect, v. (guard), I&ma.
Protract, 2;. (as one speaking a
long time), lunguluka.
Protrude, v., h&tuka, tuka.
Proud, be, v., disua, dilexa,
sanka, alakana.
Proverb, see fable.
Provide, v., for, dfza, kUlexa.
Provoke, v^(anger), kuacixa or
ufuixa with cUi(7), tacixa,
flkixa munda.
(be provoked), vi.j tata, kuata
cixi, ufua or unva or dl ne
with cixi, di ne munda mu-
flke.
dog or other animal to bite, v.,
k«ba luoxi(4).
Prudence, «. (craftiness), budimu,
6.
(wisdom), lunecnyi, 4; lukanyi
4; mexi, pi. of 5 or 6.
Prudent, adj., -a lung:enyi(4),
-a iukanyi(4), -a mexl(pl. of
5 or 6), -a budimu(6), dimu-
ke(p.p. of dimuka, to be pru-
dent).
Publish, v. (tell), amba.
Pull, vt., huiumuna, koka,
huta.
an oar, to row, ita, uha.
apart, as anything sticking,
iJlmuna.
down, as a house, sasula.
off, as clothes, kuhola, vula.
off, as fruit, huola, kuoia.
out, tula, hulula, uhula.
to pieces, tulakanya.
up, xomuna, Jula.
Pulsate, v. (as heart), kuma
munda.
Pulverize, vt., botexa.
Pumpkin, »., dioxi(dioji), 5;
kabanga, 8.
Punch, v., at, tua.
(make a hole through), vt.^
tubula; vi., tubuka.
Punish, vt., kuma, kengexa, tuta,
nyanga, ona.
Punishment, n., dikengexa, 5.
Pup, n.y kabua(dimin. of mbua, 3),
8.
Pupil, «., of eye, lumAnyl, 4.
(scholar), muiyidi, I ; muena(i)
mikanda(pl. of 2).
Purchase, v/., ula, sumba.
Pure, fl^/.(good), impe, akane,
lengele.
(be, vi.y chaste), ena ne ma-
sandi(pl. of 5 oi- 6).
(transparent), toke(p.p. of toka,
to be pure).
Purge, v/.(as medicine), uhixa
munda.
(make good), lengexa.
(wash), uvua, sukula(Lower
Congo),
(whiten), tokexa.
Purify, see purge.
Purity, n., buimpe, 6; buakane,
6; bulengele, 6; butoke, 6.
Purple, adj., kunze, kunzubile,
kunzuluke. These are p.p.
from the verbs kunza and
kunzubila and kunzuluka,
respectively.
Purpose, ^.(intend), amba with
infin.
interrupt one's, vt., humbixa, ela
mukosa(2).
Sometimes the simple Purportive
Mood is the construction to be
used. §461.
ff.(cause), bualu, 6; muanda, 2.
for what ? see why.
Pursue, v. (drive away), ihftta.
(follow), londa.
Pus, w., tuflna, pi. of 8.
(in comer of eye), luhoca, 4,
luhota, 4.
Push, vt., semexa, sSkila, sexa.
down, to press down, huekexa,
xindikixa, bambila, nyeme-
nena, kamata.
244
PUSH— QUENCH.
Push {continued).
over, to upset, tokola(tonkola).
Put, vt.f teka.
across a river, v/, sabula.
back, vt.f alulza.
by, to lay by, v/., teka, tekela,
l&mina.
down, to lay down, vt.y ladlka,
tokola.
down, to let down, vt.^ tulula,
teka or tula followed by
hanxl.
fire to, vt.y oza.
forth leaves, to bud, vi,y samplla
in, vt.y buexa.
in a line, vt.y lonira» teka mu
mulonffo(2).
in mind, to remind, vt.y vulula,
▼uluxa.
in order, vt.y lonffolola.
off clothes, vt.y Tula, kuhola.
off, to postpone, vt.y humblxa.
on a patch, vt.y bamba.
on clothes, vt.y luata, vuala.
on cover, vt.y bulkila.
one on top of the other, vt.y ten-
tekflxa.
on top, vt.y ten teka, amblka,
bamba.
out, vt.y luhula, umuxa, hft-
tula.
out, as hand, vt.y olola.
out, to distinguish, vt.y Jima.
to death, vt.y xlha.
to flight, vt.y ih&ta.
together, vt.y teka hamue, san-
fflxa, tutakflxa, bambakan-
ya, bambaktkxa, kunglxa,
sanga, sambakanya, samba-
kflxa, sangakanya, sanga-
kflxa, tutakanya, sangila.
together, to join, vt.y kuataktkxa,
tuangaxa, tuaoganya, kua-
takaoya.
under, vt.y buexa or teka fol-
lowed by munxi mua.
up, as price, vt.y bandixa or
klllexa with niuxinga(2).
up on, vt.y teka ha..hayika.
up, to build, vt.y asa, Ibflka.
Putrefy, vt.y bolexa; v»., bola.
Putrid, be, w., bola.
Puzzle, n., dljlmbu, 5; dlalu, 5.
vt.y hanglzangana.
Pygmy, n., kay«ke, 8. The ta-
y£ke are said to live in the
dense forests and are regarded
with superstititious awe. They
are doubtless only creatures of
the imagination.
Quake, vi.y lakala, kanka, clka-
kana, clka, taka.
(as earthquake), vi.y use ba-
lobo(6) as subj. of taka or
clka.
Qualified, be, vi.^ dl ne ormona
or mflnya followed by mua
and infin. § 230.
Quality, «., see kind.
Quantity, n., great, bungl, 6.
(what quantity ?), bungl followed
by munyl? or bizl?, also nga
(I 178).
Quarrel, n.(dispute), luh&ta, 4.
(row), n.y dlyoyo, 5; mutftyo, 2. ■
v.(to dispute), ela or elangana
or dl ne with mp&ta(pl. of
luhftta).
(to fight), v., luangana.
Quarrelsome, adj.y -a dlyoyo(5),
-amutilyo(2), -aniuaku(2).
Queen, n., mukelenge(i) mu-
kflxl(i).
Quell, v/. (conquer), tamba or
hlta with bukille(6) or ngu-
lu(pl. of 3 or 4).
(to quiet), vt.y talflxa or holexa
or huxa or kosexa or xlklxa
followed by dlyoyo(5) or
mutayo(2) or muaku(2) or
nvlta(3).
Quench, T;/.(as fire), Jlma.
(as thirst), mtkna or hulxa with
nilota(nyota), talfixa or ho-
lexa with ha dlinlnu(5) or ha
mumlnu(2).
QUESTION— RAT-HOLE.
245
Question, v/.(ask about), ebexa,
konka.
n. (dispute), luh&ta, 4.
Quickly, Quickness, adv. and «.,
lubilu(4)> lukfisa(4).
Quiet, vt.y talfixa or holexa or
huza or koseza or zikixa
with diyoyo(5) or mutllyo(2)
or inuaku(2). •
be, vi.j talala, hola, di followed
by the adverbial words talala
or hola.
(be not able to speak when ac-
cused), vi.y hua.
(stop noise), v., lekela followed
by diyoyo(5) or niutttyo(2) or
muaku(2) or the infin. of
akula.
Quietly, adv., talala, hola, bite-
kete.
Quill, n., of porcupine, muansa,
2; musomono, 2.
Quit, v. (leave off), lekela.
Quite, see very.
Quiver, vi.y lakala, kanka.
Rabble, nph.^ bantu ba cinana.
Race, «., see tribe.
run a, vph.^ Idikixa or elekexa
with Iubilii(4), lit., compare
the speed.
Radiate, vi.^ abuluka.
Rafter, n., dihilu, 5; lusokolo;4.
Rag, n.(small piece of cloth),
cihSsu, 7; citambala, 7.
(small piece of cloth worn in front
and behind), lubondla, 4.
(worn-out cloth), cilulii(7) cisu-
suke.
Rage, w., clxl, 7.
v.(be angry), dl ne or ufua or
unva with cixl, cixl as subj.
of V. kuata with the person as
obj.
Ragged, be, vi., susuka.
Railway train, nph.^ dikumbi(5)
dia bulobo(6).
Railway {continued).
(track), nxlla(3) wa dikumL!
dia bulobo.
Rain, w., nvula, 3.
v.f loka, m&ta.
-bow, n., muazankoiiffolo, 2.
(cease raining), v., use nvula rs
subj. of V. tangadlka or tan -
galAka.
continued, n., mudlnibl(niu-
dumbi), 2; muvumbi, 2.
(to threaten), v., flnda.
Rainbow, »., muazankongolo, 2.
Rainy season, «., nvula, pi. of 3;
mayowa, pi. of 5 or 6.
Raise, vL, blxa, bandixa, bungu-
luxa, takula, kakula, am-
bula, Jula.
the voice, bandixa or ambuluxa
or ambulula or killexa with
dl(5).
to life, fululula.
Ram, n.(male of sheep), clmpanga,
7-
v.(as a gun), soma.
Ramble, vi.^ endakana.
Ramrod, n., nfuk«te, 3.
Rank, «.(of high, chiefship), bu-
kelenge, 6; bunfumu, 6.
(row), 9f., mulongo, 2.
Ransom, z'/.(redeem), hlkula.
Rape, commit, vph.^ kuata mu-
kflxi(i) ku bukaie(6).
Rapidity, «., lubllu(4), Iuk1&sa(4),
ka1ubilubi(8). This last word
has also the idea of careless-
ness.
Rapidly, adv., lubllu, lukflsa.
These are really nouns of
class IV.
Rapids, w. (falls), clbila, 7.
Rascal, n., muntu(i) mubl.
Rascality, n., bubl, 6.
Rat, n., mpuku, 3. The dimin. is
kahuku.
For varieties of, see mouse.
-hole, buina, 6. PI. is mena.
-trap, n., buteyi, 6; luklnda, 4.
Rather, had, t;. (prefer), sungula.
Rat-hole, »., see under rat.
246
RATTLE— REDEEM.
Rattle, «. (gourd with seeds in-
side), diktksa, 5; musul, 2;
musaktkcl, 2.
(for dogs in hunting), cidibu, 7.
v.y imba.
Rat-trap, «., see under rat.
Ravage, v/. (plunder), haula.
Ravish, v., see rape.
Raw, adj.f blxe.
Razor, n., dihl, 5; nteula, 3.
Reach, v. (arrive at), flka.
out, as hand, olola.
to, to extend to, tua ku.
to, as with hand, beta.
to, to hand something to one, v/.,
hetela, hetexa.
Read, z'., b&la, luida(Eng.).
Ready, be, vi.(be finished), muna,
hua, xlka.
Real, ai;.(true), lilela, IkOxa, -a
buxua(6), -a bulllela(6), -a
buioabulna(6), -a bulktkxa
(6), -a bualabuala(6).
Sometimes the postpositive mene
is used.
Reality, n., bulllela, 6; buxua, 6;
buinabuina, 6; bualabuala,
6; buiktixa, 6.
Really, arfv. (truly), use the noun
forms bulilela, buxua, buina-
buina, bualabuala, buikflza.
Sometimes the adv. mene is
used.
Reap, v^. (gather com), huola,
kuola.
(gather millet), nowa.
(gather peas), aka.
See harvest.
Rear, n., at the, ku nyima(3),
haxixe.
be in the, be last, vi., xlxa.
part of, kumanda, ku citaku(7),
kuntaku. See § 423 (2) (b).
vLj dixa, kftlexa.
Reason, n. (cause), buala, 6;
muanda, 2.
for this, therefore, adv.^ ka.
for what ?, see why.
(intelligence), lunnrenyl, 4; mexl,
pi. of 5 or 6; lukauyl, 4.
Reason (continued).
(think), v.y ela or elangrana \^'ith
lungenyi or mexl or lukanyl.
Rebel, against, vL, hidla, benga.
Rebound, vi., lundumuka.
(jump), tuhlka.
Rebuke, v/., beia, samina, bulu-
klla, nanga.
Recall, v/. (cause to return), luixa,
alukixa, hinglxa, tucixa,
hinsflxa.
(remember), vi., vuluka.
Receive, ^/.(accept), Itabuxa.
(get), angata.
Rbckless, adj.{wi\d)y bale, bu-
luke, tomboke. These are
p.p. from hala and buluka
and tomboka respectively,
meaning to be reckless.
Recklessly, spend, vt., nyanga,
tangradlxa, tangaldxa, muan-
galfiza,dla,ona. These words
are generally followed bybintu.
Recklessness, n., bubal e, 6;
bubuluke, 6; butomboke, 6.
Reckon, v.(count), b&la.
(suppose), amba.
Recline, vi., lala.
Recognize, vt.{know), mflnya.
(not to recognize), hanga.
Recollect, ^.(recall to mind),
vuluka.
Recommence, v., tuadixa, anga-
clla kabldi.
Recompense, vt., futa.
n., dlfutu, 5.
Reconcile, vt., tokexa munda,
alukixa bulunda(6).
(pacify people who are fighting),
vt., sunga.
Reconciler, w., musungl, i.
Reconnoiter, v., tentekela.
Recover, v. (after a fainting spell),
tuya.
(get better), v., sang&la, ktksa
niubidi(2), sangaluka.
Red, adj., kunze(p.p. of v. kunia,
to be red).
Redeem, T;/.(free from slavery or re-
deem things in pawn), hikula.
REDEEMER— REMEMBER.
247
Redeemer, n., musungrldl, i;
muhlkudi, i.
Redemption, n., price of, buhlo
kudl, 6.
Redness, n., bukunze, 6. Some-
times the infin. kukunza, to be
red, is used in Comparative
constructions.
Reduce, see decrease.
Reed, ». (papyrus, used in making
mats), lutuhu, 4; lumungu,
4.
(used in making fence), clnkSte,
7-
Reel, vt*. (stagger), lenduka, ten-
kakana, nyungakana, takan-
kana.
Refine, v/., lengexa.
Reflect, vt.{as mirror), monexa.
(think), ela or elangana with
lungenyl(4) or mexl(pl. of 5
or 6) or lukaiiyl(4).
Reflection, n.(as in mirror),
mundidimbi, 2; mndingldl,
2.
(likeness), clfuanyi, 7; cifuao-
yikixa, 7.
(thought), lungenyi, 4; mexl,
pi. of 5 or 6; lukanyl, 4.
Refractoriness, w., cixlku, 7;
cicu, 7; buhidia, 6; cl-
bengu, 7.
Refractory, orf;., -a cixiku(7), -a
clcu(7), -a buhidla(6), -a
elbeiigu(7).
Refrain from, v., lekela.
Refresh, v/., k&lexa.
Refuge, take, v., nyema, ongo-
loka.
Refugee, w., munyemi, i.
Refusal, »., mukanda, 2; buhi-
dia, 6; cibengru, 7.
Refuse, v., hidia, benga.
to give, vL, imina, h&la.
to let do, vL, kanda.
(trash, rubbish), «., bilii, bi-
sonso.. These are pi. of 7.
Regard, v. (honor), tumbixa,
nemeka, nemekela, meneka,
menekela.
Regard {continued).
(look at), mona, xoxa, tahgila.
(reckon), amba.
Regards, n.(compliments), muo-
yo, 2.
give, vt.f ela or ha or ebexa
with muoyo.
Regenerate, vt.f fuka or lela
wdth kabidl.
Region, see country.
Regret, «., cixi, 7.
v.y di ne kanyinganyinsa(8), di
ne or unva or ufua with
cixi(7), muoyo(2) or mu-
cima(2) as subj. of nyingala
or sama, cixi as subj. of kuata
with person as obj.
Regulation, see law.
Reign, vph., di niukelenge(i).
over, see govern.
Reject, t//., hidia, benga.
Rejoice, vi.f sanka.
Relate, v. (as a fable or story),
ela.
(tell), amba.
Relative, «., use some such ex-
pression as muan'etu, etc.
§ 138, Rem. 5.
Relax, v/., bulula, lekelela.
Release, v/., lekela.
Reliable, adj., -a di(5) dimue.
Relieve, v. (carry for), tuadila.
(help), enzexa. Use Causative
Form of v.
of pain, talflxa, holexa.
of, take off from, tentulula.
Religion, tt. The Gospel is called
bua]u(6) bua Nzambl.
Rely on, vt., tekeinena(?).
Remain, v., x&la, ikftla.
over, x&la.
Remainder, nph.^ cintu(7) ci-
x&le.
Remarkable, adj., -a kuk^ma.
(great), nine.
Remedy, n. (medicine), bnanga, 6.
Remember, vi., vuluka.
cause to, to remind, vt., vulula,
vuluxa.
(recognize), mtknya.
248
REMIND— RESIST.
Remind, v/., vulula, vuluxa.
Reminder, n.(mark), elmonylmif
7-
Remorse, »., kanyinsanyinffa, 8;
cUl, 7.
Remote, adj.(in distance), use the
proper locative inseparably
with le. Most often kale is
correct. We may also have
the forms kuakua, muamua,
haha. § 163, Note 3.
(in time), kale, bangabansa,
diambedi.
Remove, v., a covering, bulula.
from one place to another, to
scatter, vi.y muanffala.
(take away), vt.y umuxa.
Remunerate, v/., futa.
Remuneration, n., dlfiitu, 5.
Rend, z;/., handa, tuanya; vL*
handlka, tuanylka.
Render, v. (give), ha, amblka.
oil, en^a.
Renounce, t;/., hidla, benga,
nyoka, diula.
Renowned, adj.f nine, tiimbe(p.p.
of tumba, to be renowned).
Rent, n.(hole), disoso, 5; dikela,
5-
(the pay for use of an article), w.,
matabixa, pi. of' 5 or 6; nse-
kldldl, 3; ntentekedl, 3.
Repair, vL, longolola.
Repeat, i;. (begin again), tuadlxa,
bangila, angacila kabidl;
the Pres. or Past Repetitive
tenses; the verbal suffixes
-ulula and -ununa. § 346.
Repent, v.(change one's mind),
kndlmuna or andamnna with
mucinia(2) or muoyo(2).
(feel sorry), see sorry.
Repentance, n.(shame), bundu,
6; bunvu, 6.
(sorrow), clxi, 7; kanylngan-
yinga, 8.
Reply, v. (answer when called),
itaba.
to question, amba.
Report, n.(fame), lumu, 4.
(noise of crying), »., muadl, 2.
(noise of gun), it., mukuma, 2.
(noise of human voice), «., dl-
yoyo, 5; mntttyo, 2; muaku,
2.
(noise of wind or other distant
sound), n.f elono, 7.
v.(tell about), amba.
(tell to), amblla.
Repose, v. (lie down), lala.
(rest), v., iklxa, eya.
n. (sleep), tuln, pi. of 8.
Represent, v.(act for), generally
use Applied Form of v.
to, tell to, vt.y amblla.
Representation, ». (likeness), cl-
fuanyl, 7.
(picture), mnndldlmbl, 2; mu-
dlngldl, 2.
Reproach, vt., b£la, nanga, sa-
mina, bulnkila.
n.(shame), bnndu, 6; bunvu, 6.
Reproduce, v.(by generations), le-
langana.
Reprove, vt.y b£la, nanga, samlna,
buluklla.
Reptile, »., be specific. Use
words for snakey lizsardy etc.
Repudiate, vt.y hldia, benga.
Repugnant, adj.y bl.
Repulse, v/. (defeat), tamba or
hlta with bukttle(6) or ngu-
1«(3).
Repulsive, adj. {bad) y bl.
Request, v/.(beg), lomba.
Rescue, vt.y sunglla, handixa,
sungidlla; vi.y handuka.
Resemblance, ». (likeness), cl-
fuanyl, 7; cifuanylklxa, 7.
Resemble, vi.y fuanangana, kele-
mena.
(be like), fuana, fuanangana,
kelemena, dl with muomu-
mue or o-mue or bu or buina.
Reside, vi.y Ik&la, xlkama, lala.
Residence, n.(housc), nsubu, 3.
Resin, n., kamonyi, 8.
Resist, v.(fight), luangana.
(refuse), hidla, benga.
RESOLUTE— RICH.
249
Resolute, be, see persevere.
Resolve, see coNCLtJDE.
Respect, v/.(honor), tumbixa, ne-
meka, nemekela, meneka,
menekela.
Respects, »., muoyo, 2.
give to, v.y ha or ela or ebexa
with muoyo.
give to for another, v/., hela
muoyo.
to a chief, vt., sekelela, mene-
kela, meneka, nemeka, ne-
mekela.
Respire, v., eyela.
rapidly, to pant, v.^ huyakana.
Respond, v., to a question, amba.
when called, v., itaba.
Responsibility, n., bualu, 6;
muanda, 2.
Responsible, be, vph.y di bua-
lu(6) bua, di muanda(2) wa.
Rest, vi.y ikixa, eya, xikama.
(be rested), vi.y kankamtkna.
«. (remainder), clntu(7) clx&le.
Restless, be, vi.y sasakata.
Restlessness, »., disasakata, 5.
Restore, t'/. (return to), alukixa,
hlnglxa, hlngflxa, tucixa.
to health, to cure, vt.y ondaha,
when used of the person cur-
ing; umlxa or talAxa or
holexa, when used of the
medicine.
Restrain, i//. (correct, as a child),
bSla, buluklla, samina, nan-
(forbid), hldla, benga, kanda.
(hold), kuata.
(interrupt, hinder), humblxa,
lekexa, kosexa, humbakflxa.
Result, n., bualu, 6; muanda, 2.
Resurrect, vt.y bixa ku lufu(4),
fululula.
Resuscitate, vt.y sanguluxa, fu-
lulula, tuyixa (i.e., cause
sickness to glance off),
(be resuscitated), vi.y sanguluka,
sangftla, tuya, fululuka,
ktksa mubldi(2).
Retainer, n., mul&mftci, i.
Retard, vt.y humblxa, lekexa.
Reticent, be, hua.
Retinue, n., baUm&cl, pi. of i.
Retire, vi.{go back), hingila,
hingana, aluka, alukila,
tuta, tucila.
Retreat, vi.y clmuka.
(run away), vi., ya or nyema
with lubllu.
Retribution, n., lukuna, 4.
(punishment), dikengexa, 5.
Return, vi.y aluka, alukila,
andamuka, tuta, tuella, hin-
glla, hingana, hinguluka;
vt.y alukixa, andamuxa, tu-
cixa, hingixa, bingtkxa.
Reveal, vt.y a secret or something
hidden, sokolola; sokola,
ton da.
(uncover), bulula.
Revenge, w. (enmity), lukuna, 4.
Revengeful, adj.y -a lukuna(4).
Revere, vt.y tumbixa, nemeka,
nemekela, meneka, mene-
kela, tendelela.
Reverence, vt.y see revere.
n.y kalolo, 8.
Reverent, adj.y -a ka]olo(8).
Reverse, v/.(turn over or around),
andamuna, kudimuna, cln-
gulula.
Revile, vt.y henda, tanda, tan-
dixa, tuka.
Revive, vt.y one fainting, etc.,
fululula, sanguluxa, tuyixa;
vi.y fululuka, sanguluka,
sang&la, tuya, kflsa mu-
bldi(2).
Revolt, vt.y from, hldia, benga.
Revolve, vi.y einguluka.
Reward, w., difutu, 5.
v.y futa.
Rib, n.y lubale, 4; lubafu, 4.
(bone of fish), dleba, 5. PI. is
meba.
Rice, w., luoso, 4. Perhaps from
Portuguese.
Rich, adj.y banji, -a biuma(pl.
of 7), -a bintu(pl. of 7), -a
luhetu(4).
250
RICH— ROD.
Rich (continued).
soil, lengele, impe, akane, kttle,
-a lulya(4).
Riches, n.(goods), bubanjl, 6;
biuma, pi. of 7; blntu, pi. of
7; luhetu, 4.
Richness, n,, bubanjl, 6.
Riddle, n., dijimbu, 5; dialu, 5.
Ride, vph., in hammock, enda mu
buanda(6).
on horse, enda mubande ha
kab^lu(8).
Ridge, n.(hill), mukuna, 2.
>pole, mutandala, 2; mutamba,
2.
of house, musongro, 2.
Ridge-pole, n., mutandala, 2;
mutamba, 2.
Ridicule, vL, s«ka.
Ridiculous, be, ^.(producing
laughter), sSkexa.
Rifle, »., cingoma(7) cia lu-
tende(4).
Right, n., bulmpe, 6; buakane, 6;
bulengele, 6.
all, vph.y kakuena bua1u(6).
be, to fit, vi.y akanangana,
fuanangana.
(good), adj., impe, akane, len-
gele.
hand, nph., cianza(7) ela with
baluml or bukllle or bidia.
(it is right to do), bualu bulmpe
or bimpe followed by infin.
not, vph., use neg. with impe or
akane or lengele.
adv.f blmpe, biakane, bilengele.
Righteous, adj.(g(ood), impe,
akane, lengele.
Righteousness, ». (goodness),
buimpe, buakane, 6; bur
lengele, 6.
Rightly, adv., bimpe, biakane,
bilengele.
Rigid, be, vj. (inflexible), tanta-
mana, tandabala, kayabala.
Rim, n.y muelelu, 2; mubangu, 2;
muzuku, 2; mulemu, 2.
Rind, n., clhusu, 7; clzubu,
7-
Ring, ».(circle), cljingu, 7;
clfundu, 7; citanga, 7.
for finger or ear, kakanu, 8.
v/.(as church bell), ela.
(if a musical instrument), Imba.
Riot, «., dlyoyo, 5.
Rip, vt.y handa, tuanya.
Ripe, adj., hle(p.p. of hia, to be
ripe).
Rise, v>.(ascend), banda.
(as dough), vi.f tuntumuka,
tantamika.
(as price), vi.y banda, kttla.
(as sun), vi.y banda, h ft tula,
luhuka.
from a sitting posture, vi., bika,
Juka.
from the dead, vi., bika ku
lufu(4), fululuka.
sun-, about, n., dinda, 5; lun-
kelu, 4.
RrvER, n.y musulu, 2.
up-, nph.y ku mutu(2).
ROAD; n.y nxila, 3.
Roam, vi.y endakana.
Roar, vi.{as cataract), blla.
(as lion), dila.
9f.(as of animal), muadl, 2.
(as of wind or falls), clono, 7.
See note under onona.
Roast, v/., in fire, oxa.
in pot, as peanuts, kanga.
on a spit, nanga(nana), Inylka
(anylka).
Rob, i;/. (pillage), haula.
(steal), Iba.
(take by force), nyenga.
Robber, n.(on highway), mun-
yengi, i.
(thief), mulvl, i; muibi, i;
muena(i) muclma(2).
Robbery, n., buibi, 6; bulvi, 6;
bunyengi, 6.
Robust, adj.y kttle(p.p. of kttla,
to be robust).
Rock, »., dibue, 5.
about, as canoe, vi., tankakana;
vt.y tankakfixa.
Rod, «. (brass, used as money),
mutaku, 2.
ROD— RULE.
25^
Rod {continued).
Round {continued).
ram-, nfukSte, 3.
(go round about), v., cimba-
(switch), mulangala, 2; mu-
kana, nyunsruluka.
xoxo, 2; munyasu, 2; kan-
(go round anything in the way),
yanzu, 8.
v.y sesuka.
Rogue, «., muibi, i; inulvl, i;
(spherical), adj., -a clbulunge
muena(i) muciina(2).
(7), -a dlbulunge(5); (be).
Roguish, adi.^ -a niuGima(2), -a
vi., bulunga; (make), v/..
buibl(6)', -a bulvi(6), -a
bulunguxa.
blanza(pl. of 7) bile.
Rouse, i'/.(as from sleep), blxa.
RoGursHNESS, ft.,bulbi, 6; buivl, 6.
Rout, vt.y ihftta, cimuna.
Roll, «., muvungu, 2.
Route, «., nxlla, 3.
along, away, down, vi.^ bungu-
Row, n.(line), mulongo, 2.
luka.
be in a, m., dl mu mulongo.
(as a boat), vi., tankakana;
put in a, vt.y longa, teka mu
vt.^ tankakflxa.
mulongo.
(bale), n., dikutu, 5.
stand in a, vi.^ imflna mu mu-
(bundle), «., mubombo, 2; cl-
longo.
siimbu, 7.
vt.y a boat, ita, uha.
into a string, vt.^ Jlnga, JingUa.
(quarrel), «., dlyoyo, 5; mu-
of twine or string, w., cikata, 7.
tftyo, 2.
up, vt.y vunga, nyengela, kuta.
Rub, v/. (grind between stones),
Yunslla.
hela.
Roof, n., cimtknu, 7.
off, kuhula, hulula.
put on, vt., flnga, kuma.
on, laba.
top of, n., musongo, 2.
out, Jlma, Jimixa.
Room, ».(in house), use nsubii(3)
(scrape), kuona, heya.
with part, of v. handulula, to
the hand over, lamba, laba,
split open] as, nsubu udi
lenga.
muhandulula nsubu Is&tu,
up, as dried tobacco in the hands,
the house has three rooms.
vinga, sunsula.
(place), muaba, 2; mb&di
Rubber, n., ndundu, 3.
(Buk.), 3; mbftdu, 3.
ball of, ff., dibulu, 5.
Rooster, n., cltila, 7.
(fruit of rubber vine), »., lu-
Root, »., muxl, 2.
bulu, 4.
(exposed so that the foot can
to cut the vines for, vt., benda.
strike it), n., clkuku, 7.
t&ha.
v.(as pig), funkuna.
Rubbish, n.(trash), bilu, bisonso.
Rope, »., muoxi, 2; muxinsa, 2;
Both pi. of 7.
mukudi, 2.
place for throwing, «., diala, 5.
Rot, V*., bola.
Rule, n.(authority), bukelenge, 6;
Rotate, vi.y clnsuluka.
bunfumu, 6.
Rotten, be, vi., bola.
(custom), cllele, 7; cienzedl, 7;
Rough, be, v. (as surface), tftha.
clbllu, 7.
Roughly, a^/v. (handle or carry).
(law), dl, 5; mukenjl, 2; mu-
bibi.
kandu(negative), 2.
(to speak), v., buluka dl(5).
(measure), w., luelekexi, 4;
Round, aJ;. (circular), -a cljen-
cidlklxilu, 7; luedl, 4; luidi.
jpu(7), -a cifundu(7), -a
4; ddiklxu, 7.
cltaiiga(7).
v.(be chief), dl mukelenge(i).
25^
RULE— SALUTATION.
Rule (continued).
over, v.y see govern.
Ruler, n., mukelenge, i; nfumu,
I.
(for measuring), »., luelekexl, 4;
eidikixilu, 7; eldiklxu, 7;
lued), 4; luldl, 4.
Rumor, n., lumu, 4.
Run, v., ya or nyema with lubilu.
against, dltuta, dianda.
a race, idikiza or elekexa with
lubilu.
(as water), v.y hueka.
away, ya or nyema with lubilu,
onffoloka.
off at the bowels, v.y uha or ela
or huya with munda.
over, as water in vessel, Iclklla.
rapidly, nyamuka.
Runt, n., njeku, 3; dhlndl, 7;
cituha, 7.
be a, vi.y zunguka.
Runty, adj.y -a njeku(3), -a
clhlndl(7), -a cltuha(7),
xunsuke(p.p. of xunsnika, to
be runty).
Rust, n., dimoma, 5.
v.y kuata dimoma.
Rusty, be, v., kuata dlmoma(5).
Rut, »., (in ground), nkoka, 3;
muezl, 2; mutubu, 2.
Sabbath, n., Lumln8ni(LubliiKu),
4. From Portuguese.
Sack, ft., clbombo, 7; luhlya, 4.
T/.(piIlage), haula.
Sacred, adj. ph.y -a bualu(6)
bukaie.
(interdicted), -a cijlla(7).
Sacrifice, v/.(kilJ), xlha.
(offering as a due or tribute), vt.y
lambula.
to, vt.y xlhela.
Sad, be, v.y di ne kanylngan-
ylnsa(8), dl ne or ufua or
unva with elxl(7), muoyo(2)
or muclma(2) as subj. of
nylnsrala, dxl as subj. of
kuata and the person as obj.
Sadden, vt.y ufulxa or kuaclxa
with clxl(7).
Sadness, »., kanylnganylngra, 8;
dxl, 7.
Safe, be, vi.(he escaped from
danger), handuka.
Safety, »., luhandu, 4.
Sagacious, adj. dlmuke(p.p. of
dlmuka, to be sagacious), -a
budlmu(6).
Sagacity, »., budlmu, 6.
Sail ho, interjec.y selo.
Sake, n. (cause), bualu, 6; muan-
da, 2.
Salad, »., nsalata, 3. Doubt-
less from Portuguese through
Lower Congo.
Salary, n., dlfutu, 5.
Sale, ».(market), ds&lu, 7.
Saliva, »., lute, 4. PI. is mate. §51.
Salt, ft., lueho, 4; mukele, 2;
ns&la(Bukuba), 3.
coarse in sacks, lueho lua
iisoka(sing. lusoka, lump).
(native salt made from a kind of
grass), lueho lua mbanda.
This is not sodium chloride.
Saltless, be, vi.y hola, talala.
Salutation, w., muoyo, 2.
give, v.y ela or ha or ebexa
followed by muoyo.
give to a chief, vt.y sekelela,
menekela, nemekela, me-
neka, nemeka.
Among the Baluba the first per-
son speaking says Inylxaku
(sing.) or Inylxl(pl.), the per-
son responding says ndl muln-
ylxe. These forms are from
the verb Inylxa, to adore.
Among the Bena Lulua both
persons say muoyo.
Among the Bakfite the first p)er-
son speaking says wlblka, the
one responding says diblka.
Among the Bakuba the first
person says wlnung, the one
responding says dinung.
SALUTATION— SAYING.
253
Salutation (cotiHnued).
Sometimes the Baluba are heard
to say Ixaku(sing.) and
Ixl(pl.), as if from a verb Ixa.
Salute, vt.^ ela or ha or ebexa,
followed by muoyo(2).
a chief, vt., sekelela, meneka,
menekela, nemeka, neme-
kela.
(go out to meet and embrace), v/.,
akldila.
Salvation, «., luhandu, 4.
(life), muoyo, 2.
Same, adj.{pi same kind). Ex-
pressed in several ways:
(i) By the verbs fuanangana,
kelemena, fuana, dleleka.
(2) By the words bu or bulna.
(3) By the adj. o-umu6 or the
?.dv. muomumue.
(4) By the ph. muan*abo ne.
(at, in, or on the same place),
adv., kumue, mumue, hamue,
kaba(dimin. of muaba) ka-
mue.
length, size, number, adj.^ mue
(mo),
make the, v/., fuanylkixa, kele-
mexa, elekexa.
(the very same), adv.y mene.
Sameness, n. (likeness), cifuanyl,
7; buobumue, 6.
Sample, ft., clmonylnu, 7; cile-
xUu, 7; cldlkixilu, 7.
Sanctification, ». (cleanness), bu-
toke, 6.
(goodness), buimpe, 6; buakane,
6; bulengele, 6.
Sanctify, v/. (interdict), Jlla.
(make clean), tokexa.
(make good), lengexa.
(set apart), tekela.-
Sand, n.y grain of, kasoka(dimin.
oflusoka), 8; kasensa(dimin.
of lusenga), 8; ka8ele(dimin.
of lusele), 8.
loose, difukenya, 5; pi. of
lusenga(4) and lusele(4).
Sand-bank, n., lusenga, 4; lu-
sele, 4.
Santa Claus, n., Santa Kltts.
Satan, n., Satana.
(demon or devil), mul&mftcl(i)
wa Satana.
Satchel, n. (scrip), nsftho, 3.
Satiate, be satiated, v»., dlfu(5)
as subj. of ukuta.
Satisfied, be., v., after eating,
dlfu(5) as subj. of ukuta.
(content), adj., -a muclnia(2)
with the participial words mu-
talale or muhole.
with, v.f Itabuxa.
Satisfy, vt.y with food, ukucixa.
with water when thirsty, talfixa,
or holexa with ha dlmlnu(5)
or ha mumlnu(2), ml&na or
hulxa with miota(nyota).
Saturday, n. dituku(5.) dlsam-
bombo.
Saucer, n., dUonga, 5.
Sauciness, n., clkama, 7; dlka-
makama, 5; dlntanta, 5.
Saucy, be, v., ena ne bundu(6),
dl ne with cikama(7) or di-
kaniakama(5) or dintanta(5),
dlsua, Ibldila.
Save, v/., sunglla, handlxa, sun-
gldlla; (be saved), handa,
handuka.
up, v/., l&mlna, teka.
Savior, ft., musungldl, i; mu-
handlxl, i.
Savor, v>., of, tua.
n., use infin. kutua as noun.
See taste.
Savory, be, vi.y xemakana, dl ne
with nse(3) or kutua ku-
Impe.
Saw, n., cikuaka, 7.
v/., crosswise, kosa, kala.
lengthwise, handa.
Sawyer, »., niuena(i) with ma-
blya(pl. of 5) or blkuaka(pl.
of 7).
Say, v., amba, taya(Buk.).
to, amblla.
Saying, n. (proverb), muanu, 2;
lusumulnu, 4; luxlminyin-
yu, 4.
254
SCAB— SEARCH.
Scab, n., cUtkmuM&mu, 7.
tear off a., vt., l&muna; (come
off), vi., l&muka.
Scabbard, n., luhaba, 4; cf-
manga, 7; clbubu, 7.
Scald, vt.^ hlxa(?) mumi a kahla;
v}*.(be scalded), hla(?) mu ml
a kahla.
Scale, n., of fish, dlbamba, 5.
(scrape off), v/., hulula, kuhula;
vi.y huluka, kuhuka.
Scar, »., clbangu, 7.
Scarce, adj.j kise, b&le, nya-nya.
Scarcity, n., buklse, 6; bubftle,
6; bunyabunya, 6.
Scare, z;^., clnyixa; vt. (be scared),
cina.
(be much scared), vi., mucima(2)
with the verbs handlka or
lakala; v/., handlxa, or
lakflxa with inuciina(2) as
obj.
Scarlet, adj.y kunxe(p.p. of kun-
za, to he scarlet).
Scatter, v/., tangalAxa, tanga-
dlxa, muanga, muangaltkxa;
vi.y tangalflka, muangalflka,
tangadlka, muangala.
(as a coatagious disease), vi.y
sambulukila, tampakana,
ambuluklla.
(as clouds after a rain), vi.y
sanguluka.
Scent, ».(bad smell), mahuya(2)
mubi, mukuhu(2), kaham-
bu(8), lu8u(4).
(detect the odor), v., unTa,
afua.
emit a, v., nanka.
(odor, good or bad), n., muhuya,
2; dihenibu(pl. generally
used)» 5; nsunga, 3; muen-
yl, 2.
(perfume), n., mananaxl, pi. of
5 or 6.
v.(to smell), ounkila.
Scholar, »., niuena(i) mikanda
muiyldi(i).
School, »., mu mlkandafpl. of 2);
suggest also suku1u(Eng.).
Scissors, n., luxola, 4. The
dimin. pL, tuxola, is generally
used.
Scoff, at, v/., s«ka.
Scold, vt.y b£la, nanga, samina,
bulukila.
Scorch, 7;/.(as food), xldixa, lun-
guxa,babula; vi.{\x. scorched),
xila; lungula, babuka.
Scorn, i;/.(deny), hidia, benga.
show, by clicking with the
tongue, vt.y sodla.
Scorpion, n., kaminyi(kamlnyl-
minyi), 8.
Scour, ^//.(scrape), kuona, heya.
(scrape off), vt.y kuhula, hulula.
Scourge, ^//.(beat), kuma, tuta.
Scowl, v., nyenga or fudlka with
mpftla(3).
Scrape, vt.y kuona, heya.
off, vt.y kuhula, hulula.
Scratch, v. (as fowls), kala.
(in case of itching), kulnya.
make a, vt.y flta.
out, to erase, Jlma, Jlmlxa.
with nails or claws, v., tua or
asa with luK&di(4) or lu-
zftla(4) or luala(4). PI. of
these words generally used.
n.y mufunda, 2.
Scream, v. (to cry loud), taylk.a.
(in terror), v.y handalala.
Screw, n.y mulonda, 2; lusonso,
4-
vt.y around, Jekexa, nyenga.
Scribe, n., mufundi, i.
Scrip, n.(bag), luhlya, 4; €l-
bombo, 7.
(large open), ns&ho, 3.
Scriptures, nph.y mukanda(2)
wa Nzambl.
Scrotum, n., cibudl, 7.
Scrub, v/. (scrape), kuona heya.
(scrape off), kuhula, hulula.
Scum, «.(froth), lututu, 4; lu-
kende, 4.
Sea, ». (ocean), ml manlne.
(lake), dlxiba, 5.
Seal, «.(mark), clmonyinu, 7.
Search for, vt.y kfiba, keja, teta.
SEASON— SENSELESS.
255
Season, w., cldimu, 7.
Seer, see prophet.
dry, muxlhu, 2.
Seize, vt., kuata, flekela.
rainy, mayowa, pi. of 5 or 6;
(embrace), uhuklla.
nvula(pl. generally used), 3.
(pounce upon), tuhlkila, uhu-
There is no divis on of the
klla.
seasons into spring, summer,
(snatch, grab), bakula.
autumn and winter. See sum-
things by force, nyenga.
mer, WINTER.
Select, v/.(choose), sungula.
v., luoga.
Self, when emphatic use:
Seat, ff.(chair), nkuasa, 3.
(i) The compound disjunctive
(made with palm ribs), ditanda, 5.
pro. forms nklylnyl, etc.
§ 109.
vL, xlkika.
take a, vi., xlkama.
(2) The adjective ph. ne Ine.
Second, ord. num., ibidl. § 99.
§80.
Secret, n., musokoko(musoko), 2.
When reflexive use the reflexive
keep a, vt., sokoka.
prefix -dl-. § 118.
tell a, v/., sokolola.
Selfish, be, v. (conceited), disua.
Secretary, fi., mufundl, i.
(stingy), -a cltu(7), -a bulmln-
Secrete, vt., sokoka; v».(one's
yl(6), -a clanKa(7) clkille, -a
self), sokoma.
cUema(7).
Section, w., see part, country.
toward one, vt., Imlna, h&la.
Security, w., for debt, cleya, 7.
Selfishness, «. (stinginess), cltu.
give, vt., eyeka.
7; buimlnyl, 6; clanxa(7)
(safety), n., luhandu, 4.
clkille; cllema, 7.
Sediment, n., see dregs.
Sell, vt., hana, leka.
Seduce, v/. (entice), mflnylxa or
(buy and sell, trade), enda or
iylxa or Ibidixa with bua-
endululu followed by mu-
Iu(6) bubl.
xlnga(2).
(to commit adultery with one),
to one, udixa.
v., enda n'andl masandl(p].
Semen, «., bana, pi. of muana(i);
biluml, pi. of cnumi(7).
of 5 or 6).
See, vt., mona, tansila, xoxa
Send, vt., tuma.
(Joxa). (know), mtknya.
away, to dismiss, vt., ffila,
Seed, ».(for planting), dimlnu, 5;
umuxa.
buhu, 6.
back, vt., aluklxa, hinstkxa,
germ of, dlsu, 5; muoyo, 2.
hlngrlxa, tucixa.
of corn, ditete, 5; mutonda, 2;
to, tumlna.
dltungru, 5.
Senior, ».(elder brother or sister),
(offspring), «., muana, i.
mukulu, I.
of millei, ditete, 5.
of twins, clbuabu, 7.
of pumpkin, lutete, 4.
(oldest child), muan'a bute(6).
Seek, vt., k«ba, keja, teta.
Sense, n.(wisdom), lungenyl, 4;
Seem, t/^'. (appear), mueka, mue-
mexl, pi. of 5 or 6; lukanyl, 4.
neka.
Senseless, be, m. (unconscious),
(seem what :t is not), use the ph.
fua followed by any word
ku mesu; as, cilulu cidi
meaning spasm or iU or faint-
clmpe ku mesu, the cloth
ness.
seems good, i.e., to the eye.
(stupid), adj., hote, xlb&le.
Seen, be, v/. (appear), mueneka.
These are p.p. from hota and
mueka.
xlb&la, to be stupid.
2S6
SENSIBLE— SHAKE.
Sensible, oi/. (smart), -a lunsen-
yl(4); -a mexl(pl. of 5 or 6),
-a lukan7t(4).
Sentinel, sentry, »., sentedi, i.
From Eng. or French,
(watchman, keeper), mul&mi, i;
mutanffidi, i; mamonjl, i.
Separate, i;l. (divide among),
abaaya, abanylna, abuluza.
into parts, v/., t&hulala, abu-
luza, handulula, sungrulala;
vi., t&hulaka, handaluka,
abulaka.
mediate in quarrel, v^., sungra.
Separately, adv,{one at a time),
mue ne mue.
Septe&iber, n., Sepetemba(Eng.).
Sepulchre, n., lukita, 4; ci-
duaya, 7.
Series, »., malonso, 2.
Serious matter, n., bualu(6) or
muanda(2) followed by adj.
kiUe.
Sermon, n. Perhaps the most sat-
isfactory word is the infin.
kuamba used as a noun.
Serpenf, n., nyoka, 3.
Servant, n., muana, i.
(laborer), muena (i)mudlmu(2).
(slave), muhika, i; muntu, i.
Serve, v/. (attend, as slave his
master), l&m&ta.
(work for), enzela or cniexa or
kuaclla followed by mudl-
ma(2).
Service, M.(work), mudlmu, 2.
Serviette, n., see napkin.
Set, vt.y teka, xlkika.
against, vt., eyeka.
apart, aside, v/., teka, tekela,
l&mlna.
(as th3 sun), vi.^ buela.
down, vt.y xlkika.
fire to, v/., oxa.
free, vL, hlkula, lekela, ku-
bola, sulula, kutula.
in line, vL, tonga,
in order, vt., ionsolola.
out, to depart, vi.^ ya, nmuka,
bika.
oEr {continued),
out, to plant, vUy tentula,
ximika.
table, vt.y longolola. The
Lower Congo word sala is
generally used,
trap, vt.j teya ndende(3).
up, to erect, vt.y ima.iyika.
Settle, i/. (become calm), dl hola,
dl talala, hola, talala.
debt, to pay, vt., fata.
dispute, v., tulxa.
down, as sediment, vt., hueka,
butama, batama.
palaver, vt.^ lumbalula, kosa
nsambu(3), xambula(Buk.).
Sevzn, ciri, num. J muanda(i)
mutekete(muakunyi).
Sever, t;/.(cut), kosa, kala.
Several, adj.{many), -a bangl(6),
ngl, ngrla-ngi.
(others), kuabo, nga.
(some, distributive), kuabo . . .
kuabo, nga . . . nga.
Severe, a^;.(strong), kllle.
Sew, v., tungra, tuma, fuma,
tela.
on patch, vt.y l&mlka, bamba.
Sexual intercourse, have with,
vt.y lama, lamlxa, tente«
mexa, lala ne.
Shade, n.(coolness), cltelele(clta-
lele), 7.
(shadow), n., mudlngldl, 2;
mandldlmbl, 2.
Shake, vt,y taklxa, nyunglxa,
saxa, clklxa, salakanya,
kuha, lakflxa, kanklxa, tu-
tala, nyukala, nyunga,
senga; vi.y taka, nyunga,
gala, clka, sakala, kanka,
eikakana.
(as in the wind), vi.y hehaka;
vt.y hehula
hands with one another, kuatan-
gana ku blanza.
one's self, dlnyangixa.
(vibrate), vi. lemba, lembelela,
dlkuha.
up, vt.y bukankonya.
SHALL— SHOCK.
2S7
Shall, v., use simple future tense
of verb.
See MUST.
Shallow, adj,, ihl.
Shame, n., bunda, 6; bunva, 6.
cause, vLj kuaciza or ufuixa
with bundu.
have, v., di ne or ufua or unva
with bundu; bundu as subj.
of kuata and. the person as
obj.
have no, to be immodest, v.,
ena ne bundu, uma mu
dlsu(5).
Shameful matter, n., bualu(6) bua
bundu(6).
Shameless, see immodest.
Shamelessness, see immodesty.
Shape, n. and v., see form..
Share, v. (divide among each
other), abanyangana.
(divide into shares), vt., abanya,
abanyina.
Sharp, adj.y -a budimu(6), di-
muke(p.p. of dimuka^ to be
sharp).
edge or point, tue(p.p. of tua,
to be sharp); to be, v., di ne
menu(pl. of 5).
Sharpen, vt.{hy beating, as black-
smith), stkklxa.
(by grinding), nuona.
to a point, v/., songa.
Sharpness, »., menu, pi. of 5;
ntendu, 3.
(cunning), budimu, 6.
Shave, v/., beya.
off all hair on head, vt.^ kungula
mutu(2).
(scrape off), heya, kuona, ku-
hula, hulula.
She, pers. pro., see he. There is
no distinction between he and
she. § 105, Rem. 4.
Sheaf, m., clsumbu, 7.
Shear, vt., kosa, kala.
Shears, «., luxola, 4. The dimin.
pi., tuxola, is generally used.
Sheath, n., cibubu, 7; luhaha, 4;
clmansa, 7.
Shed, n., citanda, 7.
hair, feathers, tears, vi., hfttukaj
tuka.
leaves, vi.y hohoka.
Sheep, n.^ mukoko, 2.
(ram), clmpanga, 7.
Sheet, n., of bed, nxitl(Eng.), 3.
of paper, n., dibezi, 5; dilnyl,
5
She goat, n., dlxina, 5.
Shell, ». (cartridge loaded with
shot), mutelense(2) wa tun-
dlmba(pl. of 8).
(cowry), mubela, 2; lubftzl
(Buk. and Bukuba), 4.
of egg or seed or nut or terrapin,
clhusu, 7; clzubu, 7.
of snail, nyonso, 3.
vt.{as corn), kombola, tunguia.
(as peanuts), bosa, totobula,
b£la, bula, taya(toya).
(as peas by beating), xuhula,
suanga.
Shelter, z;/.(cover), buikila.
ff.(thrown up hastily on the
road), clsambusambu, 7.
Shepherd, n., mul&nii(i) wa
mikoko.
Shield, n., ngabu, 3.
Shin, n., muongo(2) wa muko-
10(2).
Shine, v. (as fire, light, sun), toka,
temena, dltemena.
(as stars, moon), kenena, toka,
kenka.
(glitter, glisten, gleam), engelela,
balakana.
sun-, n.j munya, 2.
Ship, ^.(propelled by oars), buatu,
6.
(steamer), dikumbi(5) dia ml.
Shirt, n., clkowela, 7; clnku-
tu(Lower Congo), 7; nsu-
mixa(from French), 3.
Shiver, v.^ kanka, zakala.
Shock, vt., with fear, grief, etc.,
handlxa or zaktkxa with
mucima(2); vi.(he shocked),
handika or zakala with mu-
cima as subj.
258
SHOE— SICKNESS.
Shoe, n., clsabatu, 7; clkono, 7.
Clsabatu is from Portuguese
and clkono is now seldom
used.
Shoot, vt., one with arrow, asa.
one with gun, vt.^ kuma, lonza.
(to bud, to sprout), v»., mSna,
sampUa, tempela.
with arrow or gun, ela.
n. (sprout), lutonira, 4.
Shop, n., blacksmith, cltudlla, 7.
Shore, n.(beach), mue]ela(2) or
musala(2) or buclka(6) or
kukala or kusala or kunfu-
dllu or kusala followed by -a
ml.
on the, n., mpata, 3.
Short, adj., ihi.
be or become, vi., ihlha.
(be not enough), vL, use ena
-a bunsl(6); neg. of kam-
bana or vula.
time, »., matuka(pl. of 5) mlhl,
musansa(2) mulhl, cUu-
ha(7).
Shorten, vL, ihihlxa.
(make smaller), vt., keheza.
Shortness, n., bulhl, 6.
Shot, »., for shot-gun, kandlmba,
8.
-gun, clngoma(7) ^^^ tundimba.
Should, v. To express the idea
of recommendation, use im-
perative mood or one of its
equivalent constructions.
In Future Conditions use the
constructions indicated in
§ 459 W-
Shoulder, »., diaha, 5; dlklya, 5.
-blade, clklyaklya, 7; dlkeha, 5.
Shoctt, v., by a crowd in expression
of surprise or joy, btngila, ela
blla(pl. of 7).
Shove, v/., see push.
Show, v/., lexa, tansldlxa, mue-
nexa.
by pointing, v., funkuna.
off one's self, v., dllexa.
one's self, appear, vi., mueneka,
maeka.
Show {continued).
the eye by pulling down the lower
lid, intended as insult, v.y
tonkena or ondela with mu
disu.
the way, v/., lombola.
Shrewd, adj.^ dlmuke(p.p. of dl-
muka, to be shrewd), -a bu-
dliiiu(6).
Shriek, v., taylka, handalala.
Shrimp, »., luxixa, 4; luxoza,
4-
Shrink, i;.(become smaller), fuata,
ihi ha, keha
(as from fear), v., dikuonya.
Shrivel up, vi., fuata, fuba.
Shrug the shoulders, v., sftka with
malclya or malia.
Shuck, n., cihusu, 7; cizubu, 7.
v/.(as corn), uvula.
(as peas by beating), xuhuia,
suansa.
Shudder, v., handika or sakala
with muciina(2).
Shut, v., door, inxila, zibilca.
eyes, buika.
in or out, nxidila(?).
with lid, as box or book, bulkila.
Shuttle, »., mundonga, 2.
Shy, see timid.
Shyness, see timidity.
Sick, be, 7;}.(ill), sama, bela.
make, nauseate, vt., endexa ku
muoyo(2).
(nauseous, be), v., use muoyo(2)
as subj. of enda with the person
as obj., or di ne inuendi(2) ku
muoyo, or ku muoyo kadi
kuenda. Note that two con-
structions may be used when
parts of the body are men-
tioned; as, mutu udi unsama,
or ndi nsama mutu, my head
is sick.
Sicken, t;/.( nauseate), endexa ka
muoyo(2).
Sickness, n., disama, 5; bubedl,
6; dibedi, 5.
at stomach, nausea, n., muen-
di(2) ku muoyo(2).
SIDE— SISTER.
259
Side, n., lusdke, 4.
(be side by side), v»., tuansana,
imAnangana, kuatakana.
of body, just above hip, ».,
lub#se, 4.
of house, »., cimilna, 7.
of path, field, etc., n., muele-
la(2), inasala(2) bacika(6),
kukala.
(put side by side), v/., ImAn-
ylka hamue, taanstlxa,taan-
sanya, kuatakOxa.
SroEWAYS, go, v., enda with the
pres. part, of semena or sela.
Sidle, vL, semena, sela.
Sieve, n., munyungu, 2; kascn-
sulu, 8.
Sift, z;/., senga, nyanga.
Sifter, n.(sieve), munyunsa, 2;
kasengulYi, 8.
SiFTiNGS, »., of corn, nsdke, pi. of
4; bikahakaha, pi. of 7.
of manioc, mlxl, pi. of 2.
Sigh, vi., hum una.
Sight, come into, vi., mueka,
mueneka.
Sign, n.(mark), clmonyinu, 7.
Silence, «., see silently.
keep, vt., lekela with mutftyo(2)
or muaku(2) or the infin. kua-
kula; vi.j hua.
Silent, be, v., talala, hola, dl
with the advs. hola or talala.
(not speak when accused), vi.,
hua.
(stop noise), v/., lekela with
mutftyo(2) or muaku(2) or
the infin. kuakula.
Silently, adv., hola, talala.
Silk, n., of corn, munyanvudi, 2.
Silly, see foolish.
Silver, nph., lukanu(4) lutoke.
Similar, adj. (of same kind). This
may be expressed in several
ways:
(i) By the verbs fuanani^ana,
kelemena, fuana, dieleka.
(2) By the words bu or bulna.
is) By the wordsmuomumueor
o-umue.
Similar (continued).
(4) By the ph. muan*abo ne.
make, vt., fuanyikixa, kele-
mexa, elekexa.
length, size, number, adj., mue
(mo).
Similarity, n., clfuanyi, 7; buo-
bumue, 6.
Similarly, adv., nunku(nanku,
nenku).
Similitude, n., clfuanyi, 7; buo-
bumue, 6.
Simple, see foolish.
Simpleton, n., muhote, i; muxl-
b&le, I.
Simultaneously, adv., dlacimue,
5; ciahamue, 7; clamumue,
7; diakamue, 5. Note these
nouns used as adverbs. § 95
{b) and Rems.
Sin, n., bualu(6) bubi, muanda(2)
mubl, bubl(6). We often
hear simply the pi. of the ad-
jectives mabl and mibi.
v., enza blbl.
Since, adv. and sub, conj.Qye-
cause), see § 466.
(long ago), adv., kale, bansa-
banga, dlambedl.
Sinful, adj., bi.
Sinfulness, »., bubl, 6.
Sing, v., imba.
in harmony, vL, akflxa me
hamue.
Singe, vi., babuka; vt., babula.
Single, adj. (one), mue(mo). This
takes Secondary Prefixes.
Sink, vi., dlna, hueka.
(as sediment), vi., batama,
butama.
vt., inylxa, ina.
Sinner, n., muntu(i) mubl,
muena(i) malu mabl.
Sister, n. There is no speci6c
word, use the indefinite muan*-
etu mukflxl, etc. § 138, Rem.
eider, n., mukulu. i.
younger, n., muakunyl, i.
The words mukulu and mua-
26o
SISTER— SLEEPY.
Sister (continued).
kunyi are generally followed
by poss. pro. enclitic. § 138,
Rem. 2.
Sister-in-law, ». (sister of hus-
band), mbI-(poss. pro.)-cina.
§§ 138, Rem. 3; 42, Note 2.
(sister of wife), bukonde, i.
(wife of brother), inaktlxi(i) wa
muan'eta.
Sit, vi., xikama.
(as hen on eggs), ladlla.
on the haunches, lonsama,
sasamana.
tailor fashion, vangala. *
Site, n., of deserted village, dlkolo,
5; dkulu, 7.
Situation, n.(place), muaba, 2;
mb&di, 3; mb&du, 3.
Six, c<ird. num., sambombo. Takes
Secondary Prefixes. In ab-
stract counting use Isambom-
bo. 5 97.
Sixth, ard. num.y isambombo.
Size, n. (largeness), bunlne, 6.
(smallness), buklse, 6; bub&le,
6; bunyabunya, 6.
Skeleton, »., use pi. of words
meaning bone.
Skilful, flrf;. (clever, ingenious), -a
mahonso(2), -a baloxl(6),
-a langenyl(4), -a mexl(pl.
of 5 or 6), -a lukanyl(4).
(crafty), dlmuke(p.p. of dl-
muka, to be skilftd)^ -a bu-
diinu(6).
Skilfulness, «. (cleverness), lan-
genyl, 4; mexl, pi. of 5 or 6;
lukanyl, 4; muhongo, 2;
baloxi(maloxi), 6.
(craftiness), budimu, 6.
Skill, »., see skilfulness.
Skim, t;/., engula.
Skin, n., of animals, cls^ba, 7.
of persons, dikoba, 5.
(peel), n., clhusu, 7; clzubu, 7.
vt.^ ubula.
Diseases of : (an eruption on arms,
legs and buttocks), luhusu, 4;
(an eruption mostly on face.
Skin {continued),
perhaps venereal), clndumbi,
7; (white hands), nkenyu, pi.
of 4; (whitish spots on neck,
arms and chest), lubiki(4),
dloto(5).
Skull, n., kabalabala(8) ka
inatu(2). /
Sky, «., diulu, 5.
Slack, adj.^ tekete(p.p. of teketa,
to be slack).
Slacken, vt.^ tekexa.
Slackness, n., butekete, 6.
Slake, vt., see quench.
Slander, vt.^ songuela, banda.
n.y bunsonse, 6; mukosa, 2.
Slanderer, n., muena(i) with
ban8onse(6) or mako8a(2),
ma8onguedi(T).,
Slant, T;/.(lean against), eyeka,
eyemexa; vi., eyema.
(not perpendicular), vt., sen-
deka, sendemexa; vi., sen-
Slap, n., dihl, 5; luhl, 4.
vt., tua or kuma or tuta with
dihl or luhi.
Slate, n., dlbue, 5; dltadt(from
Lower Congo), 5.
-pencil), »., muci(2) wa with
dlbue or dltadi. Suggest also
mpenclla(Eng.).
Slaughter, vt., xlha.
Slave, »., mahlka, i. The slave
is generally called maana(i)
or muntu(i) by his master.
Slavery, n., buhlka, 6.
Slay, vt., xlha.
Sleek, be, vi., senena, teketa ku
bianza, di ne with basena(6)
or buselu(6) or baflnu(6).
Sleekness, n., busenu, 6; buselu,
6; buflnu, 6.
Sleep, w., tulu, pi. of 8.
v., lata tulu.
(dose), v., bunfca tulu.
Sleepless, be, v., lala cltabftla(7).
Sleepy, adj. Use tulu(pl. of 8)
as subj. of kuata with person
as obj.
SLEEVE— SMELL.
261
Sleeve, n., dlboko(5) dia with
cikowela(7) or cinkuta(7).
Sleight of hand, n., dijlmbu, 5;
dialu, 5.
do, vi.f enza dljimbu.
Slender, a^7.(tall and slim), -a
lu8eleseie(4), -a insake-
8eke(4).
Slenderness, n., luselesele, 4;
lusekeseke, 4.
Slice, n., lubensu, 4.
vi., benga, handa.
Slide, vi.^ hulumuka, selemuka.
Slim, ai;.(tall and slim), -a luse-
lesele(4), -a lasekeseke(4).
Slimness, n., luselesele, 4; luse-
keseke, 4.
Slip, vi.y selemuka, hulumuka.
away anything secretly, v/., on-
solola.
by accident, vi., halamuka,
flnuka.
».(an accident by slipping),
buflnu, 6.
Slipperiness, n., buselu, 6; bu-
finu, 6; busenu, 6.
Slippery, adj., -a buselu(6), -a
buflnu(6), -a busenu(6).
Slope, vi., sendama.
Sloth, n., bufuba, 6; bukata, 6.
Slothful, adj., -a bufuba(6), -a
bukata(6).
Slovenliness, »., bukoya, 6; bu-
luatafl, 6.
Slovenly, adj., -a bukoya(6), -a
buluatafl(6).
Slow, be or do slowly, v., enza
with the adverbs fue fue and
nsonyangonya, xlxamuka.
(lazy person), »., mufuba, r.
Slowly, adv., fue, nsonyan-
Sonya.
be or do, v., onguela, xlxamuka.
(carefully), adv., bltekete, bl-
tulu.
Slowness, »., butekete, 6.
(laziness), bufuba, 6; bukata, 6.
Sluggard, »., mufuba, i.
Sluggishly, adv., fue, ngonyan-
gonya.
Sluggishness, «.(Iaziness), bu-
fuba, 6; bukata, 6.
Slumber, v. and «., see sleep.
Sly, adj., dlmuke(p.p. of dimuka,
io be sly), -a budlmu(6).
Slyly, move, vi., onguela, tobela,
bombelela.
Slyness, n.(cunningness), budlmu,
6.
Smack, T;.(as lips), kumanganya
mukana(2).
^'/., tua or tuta or kuma with
dlhl(5) or']uhl(4).
n., dlhl, 5; luhi, 4.
Small, adj., kise, b&le, nya-nya.
This idea is often expressed by
the dimin. prefixes of class
VIII. A small quantity is
generally expressed by the
dimin. pi.
become, I't., keha.
make, vL, kehexa.
too, see § 90 (6).
Smallness, ».. buklse, 6; bub&le
6; bunyabunya, 6
Smallpox, tt., mbalanga, 3.
Smart, adj., -a lungenyl(4), -a
mcxi(pl. of 5 or 6\ -a lukan-
yl(4), -a ludlml(4) with the
adjs. luhehele or luhuh&le.
v., oxa, hiakana, susuma.
Smartness, n., lungenyl, 4; mexl,
pi. of 5 or 6; lukanyi, 4; lu-
dlml(4) with the adjs. luhe-
hele or luhuh&le.
Smash, vt., xlha.
Smear, vt.(8LS oil on body), laba.
(be smeared over with, as clothes
with mild), v., t&hakana.
Smell, ».(goodor bad), muhuya, 2;
dlhembu, 5; nsunga, 3;
muenyl, 2.
bad, mukuhu, 2; lusu, 4; mu-
huya mubl; kahambu, 8.
emit a, good or bad, v., nun-
ka.
v., unva, ufua.
(in order to detect the odor), v.
nunkila.
26a
SMELT— SOFTLY.
Smelt, v^., omba. This word
doubtless has reference only to
the blowing of the bellows.
SsfiLE, v.^ tua mimuemueCpI. of 2).
n.y mtunaemae, 2.
Smite, v/.(kill), xlha.
(make a wound), v/., t&ha.
(strike), vi.^ kuma, tuta, tua.
Smith, n., mutudl, i; mufudi, i;
nsenda, 3.
Smithy, n., cltudllu, 7.
Smoke, n., muinxl, 2.
v.(as burning wood), fuima
muinxl.
tobacco, hemp, vt., nua.
Smooth, be, vi.^ senena, teketa
ku bianza, di ne with bu-
8enu(6) or buselu(6) or bu-
flnu(6).
out, as folds, vt.y olola.
over, as a mud wall, vi.y xun-
suila.
over, to level down, vt.^ langa-
kftxa, langa; vi., langakana.
(smoothing iron), »., mpelu, 3.
Smoothness, n., busenu, 6; bu-
flnu, 6; buselu, 6.
Smother, vt.{as clothes over the
head), Jlka clfuldixe(7);
7^'.(be smothered), dl ne cl-
fuidixe.
Smuggle, vt.^ away, ongolola.
Snag, w.(a stick or root causing one
to trip up), clkuku, 7.
Snail, »., dllandi, 5.
shell of, »., nyongo, 3.
Snake, n., n^oka, 3. Kinds of:
muma, 2; ntoka, 3; cianga,
7; ditula, tj, ludiabula, 4.
Snap, v., the finger, tuta clxon-
du(7). Done to express re-
gret.
Snare, n., buteyl, 6; luklnda, 4.
v.f teya.
set a, V.J teya ndende(3).
Snarl, v.^ kanga.
(as dog), v.y ela makanda(pl. of
5)-
n., dlkanda, 5.
Snatch, vt.^ bakula.
Sneak stealthily, vt., tobela, on-
suela, bombelela.
Sneeze, »., nyaci, 3.
v.y ela nyael, kacUa.
Snigger, n., kasdku, 8.
v.f dl ne kas^ku.
Snore, v., onona blono(pl. of 7).
»., ciono, 7. PI. generally used.
Snout, n., of pig, cibondo, 7.
Snuff, 7;/.(as tobacco), koka, huta.
So, adv. {in thi£ way, thus), nunka
(nanku, nenku).
(not so . . . as), see § 90 («).
that, so as to, see § 461.
(therefore), ka, bu- insep. with
Applied Form of verb,
(very). This is expressed in
several ways:
(i) By the post positive word be.
(2) By the verbs tamba and hlta
followed by the abstract qual-
ity of the adj.
(3) By elongating the last sylla-
ble of the adj.
(4) By repeating a syllable or
syllables of the adj.; as, toke
to, kunze kunzu.
Soak, v/., bombeka, tohexa.
(as cassava), vt., Ina, zablka.
(be wet or soaked), vt., bola,
toha, bombama, talala, hola.
Soap, »., nsabanga, 3. From
Portuguese.
Soar, vf.(as bird), lembelela.
Sober, be, vph.y ena ne maluvu
mu mesu.
Society, w.(company), cisumbu, 7.
Sock, n., eimenyi, 7.
Soft, be, 7^*.(as dough), hoteta.
The p.p., hotete, is used as
simple a(lj.
(as something rotten), vi.y bu-
yuka.
(sleek), vi.y teketa ku blanza,
senena, di ne busenu(6).
Soften, vt.y tekexa.
Softly, adv., bltekete, hola, ta-
lala, bltulu.
move, vi.y onguela, tobcia,
bombelela.
SOFTNESS— SOUND.
263
Softness, w., butekete, 6.
(sleekness), busena, 6.
Soil, vL, flkixa.
(soiled), flrf/., bl, flke(p.p. of
flka, to be soiled),
n.j balobo, 6.
Sojourn, vi.^ Ik&la, lala, xikama.
Solace, vL^ samba, bomba, kll-
lexa muciina(2).
Soldier, n., maena(i) nvita(3);
disoladi(froin Portuguese), 5.
Sole, n., of foot, munda mua
dlkasa(5).
(one only), use the compound
disjunctive pers. pro. nkl-
ylnyi, etc.; also ne with the
adj. Ine.
Solemn, be, v.y bungama, nyin-
sala muclina(2).
Solicitous, be, v.y nylngala mu-
clina(2).
Solicitude, n,, kanyinganylnga,
8.
Solid, be, vi.{Bim), kanana, kan-
damana, xindama. Jama.
(hard), adj.y kftle(p.p. of k&la,
to be solid).
Solidify, vi., kuatakana.
Solidness, n.y bukllle, 6.
Solitary, adj., use the compound
disjunctive pers. pro. nklylnyl,
etc.; also ne with the adj. ine.
Some, adj., one, muntu, i.
one else or something else, adj.,
kuabo, ngSL.
(some . . . others), kuabo . . .
kuabo, nga . . . nga.
Often this word is left unex-
pressed; as, lua ne ml, bring
some water.
Somebody, n., muntu, i.
Something, »., cintu, 7.
Somewhere, a/f v. (anywhere). By
using the locatives inseparably
with ntu and onso we have
kuntu, muntu, hantu, and
kuonso, muonso, honso.
else, adv. By using the locatives
inseparably with kuabo and
nga we have kukuabo, mu-
Somewhere {continued).
kuabo, hakuabo, and kunga,
munga, hanga.
Son, n., muana(i) muluml(i).
real, muana mulela.
Song, n., musambu, 2.
Soon, adv.{dc& soon as), see § 458 (a)
(early in the morning), dinda/
lunkelu, haciacia.
(immediately), katataka, mpln-
deu, diodiono.
Soot, n., mlxila, pi. of 2; mifila,
pi. of 2.
Soothe, v/. (comfort), samba, bom-
ba, kftlexa muclma(2).
one crying, vt., kosexa or huixa
with muadi(2).
Sorcerer, »., muena(i) with
muhongo(2) or muloxl(2)
or buloxl(6) or ]ubuku(4)
or clala(7), mutempexl(i),
mpAka(i) manga, muhtlki(i)
wa manga.
Sorcery, n., buloxl, 6; muhongo,
2; muloxi, 2.
Sore, «., mputa, 3.
Sorrow, n., cixl, 7; kanylngan-
ylnga, 8.
for, to grieve for, vt., Jlnga.
(pity), n., luse, 4.
Sorrowful, see sad.
Sorry, be, vi., dl ne kanyingan-
yinga(8), dl ne or ufua or
unva with cixi(7), muoyo(2)
or muclma as subj. of nyln-
gala, cixi as subj. zi kuata
and the person as obj., mu-
clma or muoyo as subj. of
sama.
for, to pity, vt., ha luse(4).
Sort, vt., t&hulula, sungulula.
».(kind), see kind.
Soul, n., muclma, 2; muoyo, 2.
Sound, v., an alarm, kubola, ela
blla(pl. of 7), blngila.
a trumpet, vt., ela.
low, whisper, n., dtnunganyl, 5.
PI. is generally used,
of crying, n., muadl, 2.
of human voice, generally in rase
964
SOUND— SPILL.
Sound (continued).
of quarreling or making a
noise, n., diyoyo, 5; mutftyo,
2; muaku, 2.
of musical instrument, n., di(pl.
me), 5.
of wind or rain or distant noise,
n., ciono, 7.
(report of gun), n., mujcuma, 2.
the depth of water, v., saunde
(Eng.).
Sour, n., nsapuCEng.), 3.
(gravy), musoxi, ,2; mukele-
kele, 2.
Sour, be, vi., dl ne baanjl(6),
sasa, aya.
Source, n.(cause), bualu, 6; mu-
anda, 2.
of stream, mutu, 2; mpokolo, 3.
Sourness, n., buanji, 6.
South, w., 8auta(Eng.), 3.
Souvenir, n.^ cimonyinu, 7.
Sow, vt.{as millet), miamlna.
(plant, as com), vL, kuna.
n.y mukOxI'a nsalube(3).
Sower, n.,-miimiamlnyl, i; mu-
kanyij i.
Space, n. (place), muaba, 2; mb&-
dl, 3; mb&du, 3.
Spade, n., lukAsa, 4.
Spank, vt.y tua or tata or kuma
with dlbl(5) or luhl(4).
Spark, n., lasase, 4; lutolokela,
4.
.Sparkle, vt*. (glisten), engelela,
balakana.
Spasm, n., cisftke, 7; tungulungu,
pi. of 8; Dkoyi(used only of
children), 3.
be unconscious from, vi., fua with
any of the above words,
to have, v., baluka with any of
the above words.
Speak, v., akula, amba, tftya
(Buk.).
against, vi.^ songuela.
badly, v., akula with cidiml(7)
or cll&fl(7).
(converse together), v., somba.
louder, vt.^ bandlxa or kHleza
Speak {continued).
or ambulula or ambuluza
with dl(5).
rapidly, v., labakana, dl ne
kalabUabi(8).
roughly or loudly, v., buluka
d«(S)-
softly, to whisper, vi., nungana.
to, vt.y amblia.
Spear, n., dlfuma, 5; kabendl, 8.
vLy asa.
Species, see kind.
SPEaMEN, n., cimonyinu, 7; clle-
xllu, 7; cidiklxllu, 7.
Speck, n., dltoba, 5; dib&xl, 5.
Speckled, be, v»., dl ne with the
pi. of ditoba(5> or dib&xl
(5).
Spectacles, i»., muenu(2) is sug-
gested.
Spectre, n.(spirit), muklxi, 2.
SPEECH,n. (language, dialect), mua-
ku, 2; clakuilu, 7; mua-
kullu, 2.
(word), dl, 5. PI. is me.
Speechless, be, vi., when ac-
cused, hua.
Spell, 1;., 8ohela(Eng.).
Spend, vt., carelessly, nyanga, tan-
gadixa, tangalAxa, muanga-
lAxa, dia cinana, on a.
(be spent or exhausted), v».,
nyanguka, tangadika, hua,
xlka, tangalAka, muanga-
lAka, onoka.
Spendthrift, n., mutangaltlxi(i)
or mutangadlxl(i) or mun-
yangl(i) followed by -a bin-
tu.
Spew, v., luka.
Sphere, n., cibulunge, 7; dibu-
lunge, 5. Cf. V. bulunga.
Spherical, adj., -a clbulunge(7),
-a dibulunge(5).
be, vi.y Lulunga.
Spider, n., ntande, 3.
web of, n., buntate, 6; buta-
tande, 6; bukuondo, 6.
Spill, vt., icikixa; vi., icikila,
bumuka.
SPIN— STAKE.
a6s
Spin, vL(as spider), luka.
around, vt., clnsulula; vi., cln-
guluka.
Spine, n., of body, muongo, 2.
Spirit, w.(Holy Spirit), nyuina, 3.
From Greek,
(life, soul), muoyo, 2; mucima,
2.
of the dead, muklxi, 2; muzan-
gl(Buk.), 2.
Spit, t;., tuila or ela with lute.
For lute see § 51.
Spite, n., lukuna, 4.
Spittle, »., lute, 4. PI. is mate
of class V. § 51.
Splinter, w., kacl(dimin. of muci),
8.
Split, vL, handa; vi., handlka,
taylka.
(burst), vL, handlxa, taylxa.
Spoil, z;/.(as a child), ibidlxa or
mtlnylxa or lylxa with bua-
lu(6) bubl.
(become worthless), vi., onoka,
nyanguka; v/., on a, nyanga.
(pillage), vt.y haula.
(rot), vi.y bola; vt., boleza.
Spool, w., cinu, 7.
Spoon, n.^ nkutu, 3.
Sport, v., make of, sCka.
(play), v.f s&ba, naya.
Spot, n., ditoba, 5; dib&zl, 5.
Spotless, be, v., ena ne with pi.
of dltoba(5) or dlb&zi(5).
(white), adj.f toke(p.p. of toka,
to be spotless).
Spotted, be, v., dl ne with pi. of
ditoba(5) or dib&zt(5).
Spout, «., of teapot, etc., muxuku,
2.
Spread, v. (as contagious disease),
tampakana, sambuluklla,
ambuluklla.
(as news), vi., endakana; vt.,
endexa.
(as wings), vt., olola.
on, as butter, oil, etc., vt., laba.
out, to expand, vi., tuntumuka,
tantamika; vt., tuntumuxa,
tantamixa.
Spread {continued^
out, to open out, vt,^ vxaigQ\vL\9,;
vi., Tungruluka.
over, to cover, vt., bulkila.
Spring, v., a leak, tubuka with
dikela(5) or disoso(5) or
mutanta(2).
(fountaiii), n., mpokolo, 3.
of trap, n., ndende, 3.
Sprinkle, v., miamina, sanxlla.
Sprout, n., lutonga, 4; musele, 2.
vi., mftna, sampila, toloka,
tempela.
Spur, n., of cock, lukela, 4.
Spurn, vt., hldia, benga.
Spy, v., tentekela.
n., muena(i) lusoko(4), mu-
tentekedl(i).
Spying, n., lasoko, 4.
Squall, z^'.(as child), handalala,
tayika.
n.(strong wind), cibuhu, 7.
Squander, vt., nyanga, tanga-
dlxa, tangalAxa, muanga-
lAxa, ona, dia cinana.
Squat, vi., on haunches, zonsama,
susamana.
Squeal, vt'.(as pig), dila.
Squeeze, vt., in hands, kama.
in order to hurt, vt., flekela.
together, down, vt., bamblla,
nyemenena, xlndlka, ka-
mat a.
Squirm, vi., nyenga, Jeka.
(wriggle), vi., sala, salakana,
Jongoloka, lundamana.
Stab, vt., tua, tftba.
Stability, n., buk&le, 6.
Stable, be, vi., kanana, kanda-
mana, killa.
Staff, n., clbangu, 7.
walk with, vi., zindamlna, en-
dela ku clbangu.
Stagger, vi., lenduka, tenka-
kana, nyungakana, takan-
kana.
Stairs, n., clbandilu, 7.
Stake, n., mucI, 2.
(pointed and fastened in a pit
trap),.n., dlsongo, 5.
266
STALK— STERN.
Stalk, n., of banana or plantain,
cfkuondekaonde, 7.
of corn, clkolakola, 7; lubala-
bala, 4; musengeleke, i.
Stammer, vi.^ kakuinina.
Stammerer, n., maena(i) with
clkukamlna(7) or dikuku-
mina(5).
Stammering, n., cikokumiha, 7;
dikakumlna, 5.
Stamp, v., heavily with foot, tua
ma84ba(2) banxl.
Stamping, n.(a kick), musdba,
2.
Stand, vi.^ imfina; vt.^ Imttnyika.
close together, vi., imftnangana.
erect, vi., jalama.
in line, vi.^ Imflna mu mulon-
go(2).
Steady or firm, v/., kftla. Jama,
kanana, kandamana, xin-
dama.
up, to rise up, vi.f Juka, bika.
Star, n., mutoto, 2.
Starch, n., sltaci(£ng.).
Stare, v., at, tanglla or zoxa or
mona with adv. talala.
Start, v.(begin over), taadlxa,
angacila kabidi, banga, ban-
glla.
(from fright), vi., tabuluka.
out, to depart, vi., umuka, 7a,
bika.
Startle, vt., tabuluxa; 7^*.(be
startled), tabuluka.
Starvation, ». (famine), ciole, 7;
lukota, 4.
(hunger), nsftia, pi. of 3.
Starved, be, vi., fua n8&ia(3),
nsftia as subj. of xiha and the
pers. as obj.
State, n., see country.
(condition), suggest infin. kul-
kftla.
(Congo Free State government
and officers), Bala Matadl.
From Lower Congo,
(declare), v., amba.
to, vt., amblla.
Statement, »., di(pl. me), 5.
Stay, vi., behind, to remain, x&la.
(reside), w., Ikftla, xikama, lala.
(stop), vt., kosexa, humbixa.
Stead, n. Such expressions as in
one's stead are generally ex-
pressed by the Applied Form
of the verb.
Steadfast, aJ;., kille(p.p. of killa).
be, vi., kftla, kanana, kanda-
mana, xindama, Jama.
Steadfastly, behold, v., use adv.
talala with any verb meaning
to behold.
Steady, adj., kaie(p.p. of kftla).
be, vi., kftla, kanana, kanda-
mana, xindama, Jama,
make, vt., killexa, Jamixa, ka-
ntkxa, kandamixa.
Steal, vt., iba.
Stealthily, move, vi., onguela,
tobela, bombelela.
Steam, n., Iai7a(4) or ciyuya with
-ami.
Steamboat, n., see steamer.
Steamer, n., dlkambl(5) dla ml,
maxua(pl. of 5 or 6). Dl-
kumbl and maxua are im-
ported words.
Stem, n., of banana or plantain,
clkuondekuonde, 7.
of pipe, maxiba, 2.
(stalk of corn), clkolakola, 7;
labalabala,4; mu8engeleke,2.
Stench, n., muhaya(2) mubl, ka-
hambu(8), mukuhu(2), lasu
(4).
emit a, vi., nanka followed by
any of the above words.
Step, v., down, tuluka, Ika.
on, v., dlata mu dlktt8a(5).
(stairs), clbandllu, 7.
take a, v., dlata.
over, v., sambuka.
Sterile p)erson or animal, 9>.,
nkumba, 3. Refers only to
female.
Stern, n., citaku, 7; ku n7lma(3)
and the locative words ku-
manda,kuntaku. iA^3(^)(py
adj., -a muclma(2) muk&le.
STEW— STOVE.
267
Stew, v.y tumpa, s&bula.
Stick, n., mucl, 2.
for leading a dog, n., luobo, 4.
in, vL, asa, tua, xlmika.
(in animal pit), n., disonso, 5.
in, as mud, vL, kandamana,
Jama, kanana; vt.y kanda-
mlxa, Jamlxa, kanAxa.
out, vi., h&taka, tuka.
through, as needle through
cloth, vi.f sompoka; vL, som-
pola.
through, to punch hole through,
vt.y tubula.
to, to adhere, v/., I&m&ta, kua-
takana; v/., PAmlka, l&in&-
clxa, kaatakAxa, kaata-
kanya.
together, z;^'., Iftm&tansana, kua-
takana, Iftmakana.
walking-, n., clbangu, 7.
Stiff, be, w. (inflexible), tanta-
mana, tandabala, kayabala.
Stifle, vt.y Jika clfuldlxe(7).
(be stifled), v., di ne clful-
dlxe(7).
Still, be, vi.y hola, talala, di with
hola or talala.
make to be, to quiet, vt.y talflxa,
holexa, kosexa or xiklxa
followed by dlyoyo(5) or mu-
tllyo(2) or maaka(2).
(stop noise), v.y lekela with dl-
yoyo or matilyo or muaku or
the infin. kuakula.
Still-born child, »., kana(8) ka-
blxe.
Stimulate, v<.(strengthen), kft-
lexa.
Sting, vt.y suma.
Stinginess, n., eltu, 7; bulminyl,
6; cilema, 7; cianza(7) cl-
kftle.
Stingy, adj.y -a cita(7), -a bul-
tninyi(6), -a cilema(7), -a
clanKa(7) clkftle.
toward, vt.y imlna, h&la.
Stink, n., muhuya(2) mubl, mu-
kaha(2), lasa(4), kaham-
ba(8).
Stink (continued).
v., Dunka followed by any of the
above words.
Stir, vt.(as mud in water), yuan-
dulula, baandulula, buanda- '
kAxa, soha.
fire, vt.y sonsoia.
pot, vt.y vundula.
together, to mix, vt.y sangixa,
sangakAxa, sangakanya,
sambakanya, sambakAxa,
tutaktixa, tutakanya, sala,
salakanya, saxa.
Stockade, see enclosure.
Stocking, «., cimenyl, 7.
Stocks, n., muomba, 2; clkunyl,
7.
Stomach, »., difu, 5; the locative
word munda.
Stone, «., dlbue, 5.
for grinding corn, millet, etc., «.,
mpelu, 3. This is held in the
hand,
hail-, n.y dlbue dia iivula(3).
Stool, n., nkuasa, 3.
go to, v.y nyina.
Stoop, vi.y InAma.
(squat), vi.y sonsama, susa-
mana.
Stop, v. (abstain from, to cease),
lekela.
(come to end, as path), vi.y zlklla.
one from doing, vt., kosexa,
humblxa, lekexa.
(stay), vi.y Ik&la, xlkama, la-
la.
(wait), to stand, vi.y Imflna.
Stopper, n., cixlblku, 7; elbulku,
7; clbulkllu, 7.
Store, »., -room, nelto(Eng.), 3;
nsabu(3) wa blntu.
away, vt.y teka, l&mlna.
Storm, n., dhuho, 7.
Story, n.(fable), muanu, 2; lusu-
mulnu, 4; laxlmlnyinyu, 4.
tell a, v.y ela.
Stout, adj.y nine.
grow, vi.y diunda, fund a.
Stoutness, »., bonlne, 6.
Stove, n.. uviim(Eng.), 3.
268
STRAIGHT— STUMBLE.
Straight, be, vi.^ lul&ma, ololo-
ka; vLf olola(ololola), ludl-
klla, lul&miza, ladlka.
stand up, make perpendicular,
vi,f Jadtka; vi., Jalama.
Straighten, vt.y iai&mlza, lu-
dika.
(bend straight, as wire), v^.,
olola(ololola).
(put in line), vL, ludika.
(stand up straight, make per-
pendicular), vLf Jadika.
Strain, vi.(as in travail), tanta-
mana.
Strange, oJ/. (foreign, one from
a distance), -a kule.
(new), hia-hia.
(wonderful), -a kakema.
Stranger, ^.(visitor), muenyl, i.
Strangle, v/. (throttle), flekela
nxlngu(3).
(be strangled, have something in
the throat), v., kuata with ha
miimina(2) or ha dlinina(5).
Strap, n., mukQba, 2.
Straw, »., use any of the words for
grass, according to sense.
Stray, v., about, endakana.
(get lost), vi.y hambuka.
Streaai, n.y musulu, 2.
down-, the locative word ku-
manda. § 423 (2) (6).
up-, the ph. ku matu(2).
Street, n., nxlla, 3.
Strength, n., buk&le, 6; dikan-
da(pl. generally used), 5;
nguia(nsuda), pi. of 3 or 4.
Strengthen, vt., kftlexa.
(make steady), vt., kantkxa.
Stretch, vt., koka, kUlexa, huta,
huiumuna.'
one's self, v., dinana, diolola.
out, as hand, vL, olola; vi.y
ololoka.
out, to unfold, vt.y vungulula.
Strew, vt., tangaltkxa, tanga-
dixa, muanga, muangaltkxa.
Strike, vL, kuma, tuta.
against, as foot in walking, vL,
kuma dlkusa(5).
Strike {continued).
so as to cut, vt.j t&ha.
with fist, vt.y kuma or tua or
tuta with cisasa(7) or dlsan-
du(5).
with knuckles, vt., tua lukon-
yi(4).
with open hand, v/.,.kama with
luhl(4) or dihi(5).'
n., mukumu, 2; mututu, 2.
String, n., mouxi(creeper), 2;
maxlnga, 2.
Strip, n.(band, bordering), luhola,
4.
of cloth, n., mulensa, 2; ci-
tambala, 7.
off, as bark, vt.y ubula.
off, as clothes, vt.^ kahola^ vula.
Stripe, n., muhola, 2.
Striped, be, vi., dl mihola(pl. of
muhola).
Strive, v., and fail, hanga.
by measuring or lifting, vt.y
idlkixa, elekexa, lablla, teta.
Stroll, vi., endakana.
Strong, adj., kllle(p.p. of kftla,
to he strong), di ne with
bakftle(6) or nsalu(pl. of 3).
(be steady), vi., kanana, kanda-
mana, xlndama. Jama.
Strongly, adv., bikftle.
Strut, v.(to show off), dllexa.
Stubborn, adj., -a clcu(7), -a
cixlka(7), -a buhidia(6), -a
eibensu(7).
Stubbornness, n., cicu, 7; clxiku,
7; bqhidia, 6; cibensu, 7.
Student, «., muiyldi, i; mue-
na(i) mikanda(pl. of 2).
Study, v. (learn), lya, lylla.
Stuff, vi.. Any a.
».(goods), biiima(sing. ciuma),
7; bintu(sing. cintu), 7;
luheta(4).
(rubbish), n., bilu(sing. clln), 7;
bisonso(sing. cisonso), 7.
Stuffiness, »., clfuidixe, 7.
Stumble, v. (strike foot against),
kuma diktlsa(5).
STUMP— SUFFERINC.
269
Stump, »., cihidlkldi, 7.
v., the foot, kuma diktl8a(5).
Stunned, be, vi., fua with cifui-
dlxe(7) or cihuka(7).
'Stunt, v/., humbaktlxa.
(be stunted), vt., xunguka,
xauka; also the adj. forms -a
nJekuCa), -a cihindi(7), -a
cituha(7).
Stupefy, v/.(as drink), malavu as
subj. of kuata with the person
as obj. Sometimes the verb
xiha is used,
(as medicine), vt., leula.
(be stupefied, stunned), v»., fua
with clhuka(7) or cifal-
dixe(7).
(be stupefied, as from drink),
vi.j kuacika maluvu.
Stupid, see foolish.
Stupidity, see folly.
Stutter, vi., kukumlna.
Stutterer, »., muena(i) with
clkakamina(7) or dlkuka-
mlna(5).
Stuttering, «., clkukumlna, 7;
dikukumina, 5.
Sty, ».(pen), clkumbl, 7.
Style, w. (custom), cilele, 7; cien-
ledl, 7; clbilu, 7.
See KIND.
Subdue, vt.y hlta or tamba with
bakftle(6) or ngulu(pl. of 3),
cimuna.
Subject, v^. (conquer), tamba or
hita with bukftle(6) or
ngalu(pl. of 3), cimuna.
(matter), n., bualu, 6; muanda,
2.
of a chief, n., muana, i; mu-
hlka, I.
Subjection, ». (slavery), buhlka, 6.
bring into, see subjugate.
Subjugate, vt., hita or tamba with
bakille(6) or ngulu(pl. of 3),
tekexa.
Submit, w.(be subjugated), te-
keta.
Subside, vi., uma, kama, hue-
kela.
Subsist, v.(be, live), ik&la.
on, to eat, vt.^ dia.
Substance, n. (goods), biuma(sing.
ciuma), 7; bintu(sing. clntu),
7; luhetu, 4.
Substitute, 1;/. (exchange one for
another), xintakdxa, xinta,
xintakana, xintakanya.
Sometimes the idea may be ex-
pressed by the Applied Form
of the verb.
Subtle, adj.^ dimuke(p.p. of
dimuka, to he subtle), -a
budimu(6).
Subtlety, n., budimu, 6.
Subtract, v/.(take away), umuxa,
fdla.
Succeed, v., to chiefship, dia
bukelenge(6).
Succor, v/.(to help), use eniexa
or Causative Form of any verb,
(to save), vt.y sungUai ban*
dixa, sungldlla.
n., luhandu, 4.
Succumb, z;i., teketa, hanga.
Such, adj. Use the proper de-
monstrative adj.; as, ciena
musue cllulu eci, / do not
want such cloth ^ i.e., this cloth.
(in such a way), adv., nunku
(nanku, nenku).
(like, such as), the indeclinable
words bu and buina.
Suck, v. (as child or young of
animals), amua.
(as pip)e, etc.), vt., huta, koka.
give to, vt.f amnlxa.
Suckle, vt.^ amulxa.
Suddenly, adv.y luktlsa, lubllu.
Suffer, vi.(be punished), kenga.
(be sick), vi., sama, bela.
cause to, vt., kengexa.
See PERMIT.
Suffering, ».(mental), kanyin-
ganyinga, 8.
(punishment), ft., dikengexa,
5-
(sickness), n., dlsama, 5; bu*
bedi, 6; dibedi, 5.
2;o.
SUFFICE— SWEAR.
Suffice, vi., fuanansana, akan-
angana, dieleka, vula, kum-
bana, di -a bungl(6), xika.
Sufficient, be, see suffice.
Suffocate, vt.^ Jlka clfaidixe(7).
(be suffocated), vi.y fua or di ne
with cifuidixe.
Suffocation, «., cifuidixe, 7.
Sugar, »., nsugidl(pl. generally
used), 3. From Portuguese,
-cane, muenge, 2; cllengelele, 7.
Suicide, commit, v.^ dixllia.
by hanging, v., diowa.
Suit, vi.^ akana, akanangana,
dieleka, fuanangana. kele-
mena; vt.y akAxangana, ele-
kexa, fuanyikixa, kelemexa.
Suitable, be, vi.f akana, akanan-
gana,. dieleka, fuanangana,
kelemena.
(proper, good), adv., impe,
akane, lengele.
Sulk, vi., sunuka, bungama.
Sulky, be, vi., sunuka, bungama.
Sullen, be, vi.y sunuka, bun-
gama.
Summer, nph., cidlmu(7) cla
munya(2).
Since the rainy season is also the
warm season we may say
nvula(3) or mayowa(pL of
5 or 6).
Summersault, turn a, vi.^ hlluka.
Summit, n., mutu, 2.
Summon, v/., blklla.
Sun, n., diba, 5. PL is meba.
-rise, »., dinda, 5; lunkelu, 4.
-set, vph.y dlba(5) dikadi di-
buela.
-shine, n., munya, 2.
Sunday, n., Lumlngu(IiUbingu),
4. From Portuguese.
Sunrise, n.(about), dinda, 5;
lunkelu, 4.
Sunset, vpk., diba(5) dikadi di-
buela.
Sunshine, n., munya, 2.
Sup, v.(to drir.k), nua.
Superintend, vt., tangila, mona,
xoxa, l&ma.
Superior, be, v. (better), tamba or
hita with buimpe(6).
Supper, nph., bidia bia with bu-
tuku(6) or diloIo(5).
Lord's, bidia bia Nzambi.
Supple, be, vi., xoboka, nyenga-
bala, di nemuxobo(mujobo).
Suppleness, n., muxobo(mujobo),
2.
Supplicate, v^. (implore), sengela,
sengelela.
(pray to God), vt., tendelela.
Support, v/. (strengthen), kftlexa.
Suppose, t;. (imagine), amba.
Surely, c^v.y bulilela, buxua,
buiktixa, bualabuala, buina-
buina. These words are really
nouns.
Surety, »., cieya, 7.
leave as, v/., eyeka.
Surfeited, be, v., ukuta.
Surpass, vt., tamba, liita.
Surprise, vt.y k^mexa.
exclaim in, vi.y k#ma, tua %i-
k«ma(7).
(startle), 1;/., tabuluxa.
Surrender, vi., Iianga, teketa.
Surround, vLy nyungulula, cim-
bakana, nyengela.
(wrap around), vt.y Jinga, Jin-
gila, vunga, vungila«
Suspend, v».(hang down), lembe-
tela.
Suspenders, n., mikjlba(pl. of 2)
ya mili&nu(pl. of 2).
Swallow, v., mina.
n.(a bird), kandindl, 8.
Swamp, see marsh.
Swarm, n., cisumbu, 7. .
Sway, w.(as cloth swinging in the
wind), lembelela, hehuka,
dikuha.
Swear, v. (take an oath), clha.
The reflexive, diciha, is gener-
ally used. From the Congo
State officials is also derived
the expression (uma munu(2)
mftlu, put the finger up.
at, vt.y henda, tuka.
(take God's name in vain), v.
SWEAR— TAKE.
271
Swear {continued).
tela dina(5) dia Nzambi.
Malicious swearing is un-
known.
Sweat, w., luanga, 4; clsululu,
7.
v.y h&tuka or tuka with luanga
or clsululu as subj.
Sweat-bee, w., kambulnkidl, 8.
Sweep, vt., komba.
Sweet, adj., -a dimeme(5), -a
nse(pl. of 3 or 4).
(be pleasant to the taste), vi.,
xemakana.
potato, »., cilunga, 7; cinsenga,
7.
Sweetness, «., dimeme, 5; nee,
pi. of 3 or 4.
Swell, 2/t*. (expand), tuntumuka,
tantamika, ula; vt.y tuntu-
muxa, tantamixa, uxa.
(decrease of swelling), vi.y fuba,
huh&la.
Swelling, «., disungu, 5.
Swiftly, adv., lubilu, lukilsa.
Swiftness, »., lubilu, 4; lukiisa,
4; kalubilubl, 8.
Swim, v.{aj& fish), enda mu ml.
(as person), v., ombela, owe-
la.
Swine, «., ngulube, 3.
Swing, vi.(sway as in wind), lem-
belela, dikuha, hehuka.
Switch, »., maxoxo, 2; munyasu,
2; mulangala, 2; kanyanzu,
8.
vt., kuma, tuta.
Swollen, be, vt.(as some part of
body), ula.
Swoon, vi., fua followed by cl-
8dke(7) or tungulunsu(pl. of
8) or cifuidixe(7).
Sword, nph., inuele(2) wa nvl-
ta(3).
Syllable, «., dlsi]abeI(Eng.), 5,
Symbol, »., cimonyinu, 7.
Sympathize, v., with, ha luse(4).
Sympathy, w., luse, 4.
Table, n., mesa(from Portuguese).
Regarded as pi. of 5.
clear the, vt., umuxa bintu ha
mesa.
leg of, »., dikunxl, 5.
set the, vt., longolola bintu ha
mesa, sala( Lower Congo).
Taboo, vt., Jidlka, Jila.
(one not eating with others), «.,
mueDa(i) mb&la(3).
(tabooed things), w., cljlla, 7.
Tack, ». (brass chair nail), lufuma,
4.
Tail, «., of animal or reptile,
mukila, 2.
of bird, fowl, etc., mulundu, 2.
of fish, cihehe, 7.
Taint, vt., bolexa; z;/.(be tainted),
bola.
Take, v., aim, dingila, l&ma,
ludikila, Idikixa, elekexa.
a seat, vu, xikama.
away, vi., umuxa.
back, vt.y alukixa, andamuxa,
tucixa, hingixa, hlngAxa.
by, vt., kuata ku.
care of, to look after, vt., l&ma.
(carry), v/., tuala.
down, vt., tulula, tula.
from by force, vt., nyenga.
heed, to be warned, vi., dimuka.
heed, to listen, v., unva, ufua.
hold of, vt., kuata.
in, into, v/., buexa.
oath, v., clha.
off, vt.f umuxa.
off, as anything sticking, v/.,
l&muna.
off, as clothes, vt., vula, kohola.
off from, vt.y tentulula.
out, vt., umuxa, h&tula, luhula.
out, as jigger, vL, tubula, lu-
hula.
photograph, v/., kuata mu mu-
kanda(2).
pity, v/., ha lu8e(4).
to, vph., ya ne kudi (Locative
Prefixed, § 321).
272
TAKE— TEAR.
Take (continued).
to pieces, vt.y tulakanya.
up, vt., ang^ata, m^ina, ambula,
boya.
up by roots, vL^ Jula, xomuna.
up something found, vL, angula.
Tale, »., muanu, 2; lusumuina,
4; luxlmlnylnyu, 4.
tell a, vt.y ela.
Talk, v., akula.
about, z/., amba.
against behind one's back, i;/.,
songuela.
angrily, v., tanda, tandangana.
a trade, vt.y taa mazliiga(2).
behind one's back, vf.y tela.
briefly, v., kosexa lublla.
in one's sleep, v., Ifttakana.
long time, v., lunguluka.
louder, v/., bandlxa or killexa
or ambuluxa or ambulula
with dl(5).
loudly or roughly, v., baluka
dl(5).
lowly, to whisper, vi.y nungana.
rapidly, vi., labakana, dl nc
kalubllubl(8).
to, vt.f ambila.
together, to converse, v»., somba.
Talkative, adj., -a lut&ylt&yl, 4.
Talkativeness, »., lutttyltftyl, 4.
Talking, »., muaku, 2; mutilyo, 2.
Tall, adj., le.
become, w., leha.
(slender), adj.^ -a Ia8ele8ele(4),
-a lasekeseke(4).
Tallness, w., bale, 6.
(tallness and thinness), lusele-
sele, 4; lusekeseke(4).
Talon, »., luz&di, 4; luz&la, 4;
luala, 4.
Tame animal, w., cimuna, 7.
Tangle, v/., Jtnsakflxa; vi.y
Jlnsakana.
Tantalize, vi.^ kuaclxa or ufuixa
with clxl(7), flklxa munda,
lobola, tacixa.
Tap, z/. (knock), kuokola, ku-
muna, kumina.
palm for wine, v/., ema.
Tape, »., mukflba, 2.
line, n., cldlklxilu, 7; cidiklxa,
7; luedi, 4; luldl, 4; luele-
kexl, 4.
Tarry, w'., x&la.
for, to wait for, 7;/., Indlla, kuba.
Task, n., mudlmu, 2.
Tassel, n., of corn, luzeba, 4.
Taste, 1;., lablla.
be pleasant to the, vi.f xema-
kana; also the adj. forms -a
iise(pl. of 3 or 4) and -a
kutua kuimpe.
(have the taste of), v., tua.
Clntu eel cldl cltue bu
lueho, ihis thing tastes like salt,
lose for, grow tired of, v., tonda,
tua.
n., use infin. kutua. Eel clntu
cldl kutua kuimpe, this thing
has a good taste.
Tasteless, be, T;/.(be without
seasoning), talala, hola.
Tasty, be, z;.(be pleasant to the
taste, as something sweet),
xemakana; also the adj.
forms -a nse(pl. of 3 or 4)
and -a kutua kuimpe.
Tattoo, »., lus&lu, 4.
vt.y t&ha nsftlu(pl.).
with burnt rubber, v/., tua..
Taunt, vt.^ s6ka.
Taut, be, vi., tantamana, tanta-
mlka.
Tax, n., mulambu, 2.
pay a, vt.^ lambula.
Tea, w., iitl(Eng.), 3.
Teach, ut., lylxa, mtknylxa, lon-
Kexa, ambila, tftylla, lubu-
klxa(Buk.).
a child bad manners, vt.^ Ibldlxa
bualu(6) bubl.
(show), vt.y lexa.
Teacher, n., mulylxl, i; mu-
mflnylxl, i; muambldl, i;
muambl, i.
Tear, t;/., handa, tuanya; vi.,
handlka, tuauylka.
a hole in, as cloth by a stick,
vt.f tubula.
TEAR— THANKFULNESS.
273
Tear (continued).
down, as house, vt., sasula.
off, as anything adhering, v/.,
l&muna.
off, as meat from bone, vt.y tula.
off one's loin cloth, vL, dlula.
up by roots, vt.y tula, Jala.
to pieces, vt.j tuanyansana,
tuanyakanya, handakanya.
w.(from the eye), clnsonxi, 7.
shed, v.y h&tuka or tuka with
clnsonxi as subj.
Tease, vt.^ taelxa, lobola, kua-
dxa or ufulxa with clxl(7),
flklxa munda.
(joke), vi.y hunga.
(play joke on), vL, s&blxa,
naylxa.
(provoke an animal to bite), v/.,
kdba laoxl(4).
Teat, «., dlbele, 5.
Tell, v.y amba, tllya(Buk.).
about, v.y amba.
adieu, vt.y laya.
a lie, v.y xlma, dlnga, dlmba
(Buk.).
a lie on one, vt.y xlmlnylna,
dlnglla, dlmblla.
a secret, vt., sokololo muso-
koko(2).
a story, fable, etc., vLy ela with
niaanu(2) or luximlnyln-
yu(4) or la8amalnu(4).
each other, v.y ambllangana.
on, vt.y songuela.
to, vt.y amblla.
Temperate, be, vph.(not given to
strong drink), use neg. Pres.
Habitual tense of nua, io
drinky with maluvu as obj.
Tempest, see tornado.
Temple, n., nsuba(3) wa Nzambl.
Tempt, vt.{Xo try, to test), teta or
baela with munda.
(entice), vt.y mtlnyixa or lylxa
or Ibldlxa with buala(6)
bubl.
with desire to entrap, vt.y teya.
Ten, card, num.y dlkuml, 5.
Tend, v/.(look after), l&ma.
Tent, npk.y n8ubu(3) wa cllu-
lu(7).
Ten thousand, n., lubombo, 4.
Tepid, be, vt.y dl ne with lulya(4)
or ciyuya(7).
Tepidness, »., lulya, 4; clyuya, 7.
Terminate, v/. (finish), mflna,
mflnylxa, hulxa, xlklxa.
Termination, «. (destination), cl-
xlkldllu, 7.
Terminus, n., clxlkldilu, 7.
Termite, «. (white ant), mueuasu,
2.
Terrapin, »., nkadu(nkuyu), 3.
Terrify, vt.y clnylxa, sakAxa or
handlxa with muclma(2);
z;}.(be terrified), clna, kanka,
handlka or lakala with mu«
clma.
Terror, »., buowa, 6.
Terrorize, vt.y see terrify.
Test, vt.y lablla.
(make trial, as of one's faith),
vt.y teta or buela with knunda.
(try by measuring or lifting), vt.y
Idlklxa, elekexa, teta, la-
blla.
(with view to entrap, vt., teya.
«. (ordeal), see ordeal.
Testament, »., New, clfufu(7)
clblaclhla.
Old, clfufu clkulu.
(will), n.y makanda(2) wa bu-
htanyl(6).
Testicle, w., musa, 2; muh^sa, 2.
Testify, v., amba.
Than, conj.y use the verbs tamba
or hita as indicated in § 464.
Thank, vt. The natives have
little or no idea of thanking.
The words ha muoyo(2) and
sekelela and Inylxa are used
in this way about Luebo.
Thankful, adj.y -a elnemu(7).
From v. nemeka.
be to, vt.y ha maoyo(2), seke-
lela, Inylxa.
See note under thank.
Thankfulness, n., clnemu, 7.
From V. nemeka.
274
THAT— THINNESS.
That, demon, and rel. pro.^ sub.
conj.
(i) As demon, pro., see §§ 152,
153.
(2) As rel. pro., see § 164.
(3) As sub. conj., see §§ 463;
461, and Rem.; 455 (6) (2).
Thatch, v/., flngra, kuma.
Thaw, v., engruluka, flngraluka.
Thee, pers. pro.y see you.
Theft, ff.(thievishness), bulbl, 6;
bulYl, 6.
Their, poss. pro,^ use the pi. forms
of third pers. as indicated
under § 133.
Theirs, poss, pro., see § 135.
Them, pers. pro.
(i) As direct or indirect obj.,
use pronominal infixes. §§ 116,
117. Note the use of pro-
nominal suffixes (§123), under
certain circumstances, as direct
or indirect obj. § 124 {b) (c).
(2) For use with prep., see §§
106 (c), 107.
Themselves, pers. pro.
(i) Compound Disjunctive
Forms. The agreement is
made with the class of the
noun to which the pro. refers.
§§ 108, 109.
(2) When reflexive, use the re-
flexive prefix of verb -dl-.
Note that this construction
may be used either as subj.
or obj. § I r8.
(3) See BX.-Eng. under Ine.
Then, am/v. (therefore), ka, bu-
insep. with Applied Forms of v.
Thence, adv.^ use the Locative
Suffixed construction. § 320.
We may also have the usual ad-
verbs meaning there: kuakua,
muamua, haha; aku, amu,
aha; kuokuo, muomuo, hoho.
§ 163, Notes 3 and 4.
There, adv., kuakua, muamua,
haha; aku, amu, aha; kuo-
kuo, muomuo, hoho. §§163,
Notes 3 and 4.
There {continued).
When used in place of the subj.
before the v., see § 441 (rf).
Rem.
Therefore, adv., ka, bu- insep.
with Applied JForm of v. § 419.
These, see this.
They, pers. pro. Agreement is
always made with the class of
the noun to which the pro.
refers,
(i) Simple Disjunctive Forms.
§105.
(2) Compound Disjunctive
Forms. §§ 108, no.
(3) Conjunctive Forms used as
(a) Pronominal Prefix. §§113,
114.
{b) Pronominal Suffix. §§ 120,
123.
Thick, a^;.(large), nine.
(be dense), vi.^ xltakana.
be, not flow well, vi.^ kuata-
kana.
Thicket^ n., clhuka, 7.
Thickness, n., bunlne, 6.
Thief, n., mulbl, i; mulvi, i;
muena(i) muclma(2).
Thievish, adj.^ -a mucima(2), -a
buibl(6), -a buivi(6), -a
blaiiia(pl. of 7) bile.
Thievishness, n., bulbl, 6; bulvl,
6.
Thigh, ».(upper leg), cibelu, 7.
Thin, be, vt.(lean), nyana, dl ne
or uma followed by clonda(7)
or clnyanu(7).
(not thick), adj., kise, b&Ia,
nya-nya.
(slender), adj., -a luselesele(4),
-a luseke8eke(4).
Thine, see yours.
Thing, n., cintu, 7.
Think, v., ela or elangana fol-
lowed by mucima(2) or lun-
Kenyl(4) or mexi(pl. of 5 or
6) or lukanyl(4).
(imagine), v., amba.
Thinness, n. (leanness), clonda, 7;
clnyanu, 7.
THINNESS— TIDY.
275
Thinness (continued).
(littleness, not thick), w., buklse,
6; bub&le, 6; bunyabunya,
6.
(tallness and thinness), n., luse-
lesele, 4; lusekeseke, 4.
Third, ord. num.y Is&tu. § 99.
Thirst, n., mlota(nyota), pi. of 2.
quench, vt.y mtkna or hulxa with
miota, taltkza or holeza with
ha dlmlnu(5) or ha mumlnu
(2).
Thirsty, be, vi^^ dl ne mlota(nyo-
ta), mIota as subj. of kuata
with the pers. as obj.
This, demon, pro., see §§ 149, 150.
Thither, adv., generally use the
Locative Suffixed construc-
tion. § 320.
We have also the usual adverbs
meaning there : kuakua, maa-
mua, haha; aka, amu, aha;
kuokuo, muomuo, hoho. §
163, Notes 3 and 4.
Thorn, n., dieba, 5. PI. ismeba.
Thoroughly, adv.(we\\), blmpe.
Those, see that.
Thou, see you.
Thoughtless, be, vi., hala, tom-
boka, buluka, clmba, clmba-
kana, humbakana.
adj.y hale, tomboke, buluke.
Thoughtlessness, n., buhale, 6;
bubuluke, 6; butomboke, 6.
Thousand, »., clnuna, 7.
Thrash, vt., out, as beans, tua.
(beat), vt., kiima, tuta.
Thread, «., buanda, 6.
Threaten, v., funylna.
(be about to), v., amba with
infin. of following verb,
rain, v., flnda.
Three, card, num., s&tu with Sec-
ondary Prefixes. In abstract
counting use Is&tn. § 97.
Threshold, n., mbelu, 3.
Thrice, adv.y blakas&tu, pi. of 7;
ml8anffu(p1. of 2) is&tu;
blkondo(Dl. of 7) bls&tu;
]nl8iuisa(pl. of 2) is&to.
Thrice (continued).
(third time). Use sing, of above
forms with the ordinal numeral.
Throat, n., mumlnu, 2; dimlnu,
5- ^
Throb, v., kuma.
Throne, nph., nkuasa(3) wa
bukelenge(6).
Throng, n., cisumbu, 7; bungri,
6.
Throttle, v/., flekela iixinsu(3).
Through, prep., mu. § 429 (i)
and Notes.
Throughout, adv., to.
Throw, vt., ela.
away as useless, vt., im&xa,
sumbula, nytkka.
back and forth, vt., sambulu-
xangana.
down, as house, vt., ximbula.
in wrestling, vt., flna, xlnda.
Thrust, vt., at, tua.
out, vt., umuxa, h&tula.
(push), vt., semexa, s^kila,
sexa.
Thumb, n., clala, 7.
Thunder, n., clap of, dlkuba-
kuba, 5.
rolling, n., mukungula, 2.
v., use nYula(rain) as subj. of
kungula; or nvula as subj.
of kuma with dlkubakuba as
obj.
Thxtrsday, n., dltuku(5) dlnl.
See WEEK.
Thus, adv., nunku(nanku, nen«
ku).
Thwart, v., ela muko8a(2),
kosexa, humbixa; vi.(he
thwarted), humba.
Thy, poss. pro., see your.
Thyself, see yourself.
Tick, ».(on dog), lukuha, 4.
v.(as watch), dlla.
Tickle, v., afunya.
Tidiness, n., mankenda, pi. of 5
or 6.
Tidy, adj., -a mankenda(p1. of 5
or 6).
. make, vt., longa, longolola.
276
TIE— TO.
Tie, vt.f suika, zlka, Inya.
down on top of, as battens, vt.y
bambala.
Tight, be, vt'.(taut), tantamana,
tantamlka.
Tighten, i;/.(strengthen), killeza.
(make taut), vL, tantamlza,
tuntumuxa.
Tightly, adv., bikille.
Till, conj., see until.
2/. (cultivate), dima, Ihlla.
Time, n., at same, dladmue, 5;
clahamue, 7; ciamumue, 7;
dlakamue, 5. These are
really nouns used as adverbs.
§ 95 (b) and Rems.
(be time for), vph.y use dlba(5)
as subj. of kumbana.
day-, n.y munya, 2.
long, inu8ansu(2) mule, ma-
tuku male, nsondo ya bungl,
to.
(long time ago), adv., kale,
bangabangra, dlambedl(5).
next, musangu mukuabo.
night-, n., butuku, 6.
(old times), adv., kale, banga-
banga, dlambedi(5).
plenty of, be, vph., dlba(5)
dicldlku.
(repetition, as once, twice, thrice,
etc.), see §S 394, 395- We
may also nave the words
clkondo(7), mu8an8ru(2) and
mu8unsu(2) followed by ord.
num.
Time of day:
(dawn), haclacia, butuku or
bufuku as subj. of v. cla.
(sunrise), dinda, 5; lunkelu, 4.
(about 9 a.m.), mlsasa, pi. of 2.
(noon), munda munya, diba
hanklkcl, dIba as subj. of v.
Jalama.
(afternoon), dllolo, 5; dlba as
subj. of V. uhuka.
(about sunset), vph., dlba dl-
kadl dlbuela.
(midnight), mundankulu, a loc.
word.
Time (continued).
(what hour? what o'clock?),
dlba dldl hanyl? dlba kl?
Timid, be, v., ufua or unva or
dl ne with bundu(6).
(as wild animal), v., b&xa, dl ne
mb&xlb&xl(pl. of 3 or 4).
(be frightened), vt., dl ne
buowa(6), cina.
Timidity, »., bundu, 6; bunvu, 6.
(as of animals), »., mb&xlb&xl,
pi. of 3 or 4.
(fright), »., buowa, 6.
Tin, ».(iron), dama, 7.
can, n., luhanxa, 4.
opener, nph., clntu cla kuxl-
bula n*acl mpansa.
Tire, vt., hanglxa, tekexa, 8U-
8Ula; vi.(be tired), hangra,
Busuka, teketa.
(be tired of, to loathe), vt.,
tonda, tua. The thing of
which one is tired is the subj.,
the person is the obj.
Tiredness, n., butekete, 6; dl-
hanKu(dlliunsl) 5.
Titter, v., dl ne kas«ku(8). PI.
of kas^ku generally used.
To, prep.f use the locatives mu, ku
or ha, according to sense. Ku
is the most common,
(i) When home of or village of
is meant, use mua or kua or
ha. § 87 {d). Rem.
(2) Sometimes the to is expressed
in the verb; as, tulakanya,
take to pieces.
(3) As sign of the infin. ku is
used, but it is always written
as part of the verb.
(4) For clauses expressing pur-
pose, see § 461.
(5) From . . . to(till), ku . , .
' to ne ku, ku . . . ne ku;
sometimes we have simple ne
connecting the two parts.
(6) Often the Locative Prefixed
construction is used especially
with dl and other verbs mean-
ing to be; as, ya kudl Ka-
TO— TRACE.
277
To (continued),
songOy go to Kasongo. §321
and Rem. 9.
Toad, n., clula, 7; cilua, 7.
Toast, T//.(as bread), nanga, In-
ylka.
Tobacco, n., makanya, pi. of 5;
nfuanka, 3.
To-day, adv., lelu.
(this very day), lelu eu.
Toe, n., muan'a nktlBa(pl. of 4),
munu(2) wa dlkAsa(5).
great, n., muan'a nktisa munlne,
munu munlne wa diktisa,
ciana(7) cla nktksa.
Together, adv. This idea is gen-
erally expressed in the verb;
as, sanKlza, gather together;
kuatakana, he close together \
etc. There may, however, be
the more distinctly adv. forms,
mumue, kumue, hamue;
muomumue, kuokumue, ho-
hamue; kaba kamue.
Toil, see labor.
Token, «., cimonylnu, 7.
Tomato, n., matamata. From
Portuguese. Same form is
used for sing, and pi. Per-
haps may be regarded as pi.
of 5, for we sometimes hear
the sing, ditamata.
Tomb, n.(grave), lukita, 4; cl-
duaya, 7.
To-morrow, adv.y makelela, ma-
laba.
day after, adv.^ maihi.
Tone, «., bass, low, dl(5) dinlne.
high, di(5) diklse.
Tongs, ».(a split stick used by
blacksmiths), mpandu, 3.
Tongue, »., ludiml, 4.
To-night, flrfv.(the night following
to-day), butuku, 6; bufuku, 6.
Too, o</v.(also), kabldl.
(excess), use verbs tamba and
hita.
Tool, n., ciama, 7; clntu(7) cia
kuenia n*aci.
See note under machine.
Tooth, n., dinu, 5. PI. is menu.
-ache, nph.f dlsama(5) dia dInu.
cut, as a young child, vi.y m£na.
grit the, v.y dlangana or sekexa
with menii.
knock out, vt.y ehula, tauola.
Top, n., mutu, 2.
of head, n., lubombo, 4.
of house, n., musonga, 2.
(pile one on top of the other), v/.,
tentektixa, tenteka, tente-
kanya, ambakanya, amba-
ktlxa; vi.y tentama, amba-
kana.
Torch, n., clmunyl, 7.
Torment, vt.y taclxa, flklxa
munda, ufuixa or kuaclxa
with clxl(7).
(punish), vt.y kengexa.
Torn, be, vi.y handlka, tuanylka.
Tornado, n., cihuhu, 7.
blow as a, vi.y hutaa.
Tortoise, »., nkudu(nkuvu), 3.
Torture, vt.y kengexa, nyanga,
ona.
Total, adj.y onso, xlma.
Totality, n., buonso, 6; buxima,
6.
(the totality of them, all of them),
use buonso followed by poss.
pro.; as, buonso buabo ba-
kuya, all of them {people) have
gone. § 182, Rem.
Totter, vi.y tenkakana, nyunga-
kana, lenduka, takankana.
Touch, v/.(feel), lamba, lenga,
lamblla.
together, vi.y kuatakana, I&-
m&ta, tuangana.
Tough, adj. (as meat), ki&le ku
menu(pl. of dInu).
be, vi.y nyengabala.
Tour, n., luendu, 4.
Towards, prep.y ku.
Towel, «., cltambala, 7; dl-
tuaya(from Portuguese), 5.
Town, n., musoko, 2; ditunga, 5.
(large collection of villages), «.,
clmenga, 7; clhunda, 7.
Trace, see track.
ayS
TRACK— TREAD.
Track, vt., londa with maktksa
(sing, diktksa) or maka-
ma(sing. dikama) or mlkon-
no(sing. mukono).
(any marking or tracing on the
ground), n.f mufunda, 2.
(footprint), »., cidlacilu, 7; di-
ktksa, 5; dikama, 5; mu-
kono, 2.
of snake, tr., clkoka, 7.
of railway, nph., nzlla(3) wa
dikumbl (5)dia bulobo(6).
Tractable, be, v., tumlkila,
tumika.
adj., -a kalolo(8).
Tractableness, n., kalolo, 8.
Trade, ^//.(exchange), xintaklkxa,
xlnta, xintakana, xlntakan-
ya, flngakana, flngakanya,
hlnsaktkxa, sombak1kxa(witb
view of returning exact arti-
cles).
(go about buying and selling), v.,
enda or endulula with mu-
xlng:a(2).
(price), n., muxinga, 2.
talk a, vt.f tua muxingra.
to close a trade by breaking a
stick), vt., kosa clci(7).
Trader, n., nsenda(i) wa mu-
xln8:a(2), muena(i) clsum-
ba(7).
Traduce, vt., songruela, banda.
Trail, vt.(io drag), koka, huta>
hulumuna.
(to track), v., londa with ma-
k1ksa(sing. diklksa) or ma-
kama(sing. dikama) or mi-
kono(sing. mukono).
(track), n., cidlacilu, 7; diktksa,
5; dikama, 5; mukono, 2;
clkoka, 7.
Train, n.(line), mulongo, 2.
railway, n., dikumbl(5) dia
bulobo(6).
v/.(teach), iyixa, mtknylxa, lon-
srexa, ambila, Ibidixa.
Traitor, n., musongruedl, i.
be to, v.y songueia, banda.
Tramp, v., dlata.
heavily, v., tua mus£ba(2).
on, v., diata mu dlktk8a(5).
n.( vagabond), muena(i) cien-
denda(7). § 356 (g).
Trample, vt., upon, dlata mu
diktksa(5).
Tranquil, be, vt., talala, hola,
di with hola or talala.
Transfigure, vt., kudlmuna,
andamuna; vi., kudlmuka,
andamuka.
Transform, vt., kudimuna, anda-
muna; vi., kudimuka, anda-
muka.
Transgress, v., enia bUbi.
Transgression, n.(sin), bualu(6)
bubl, muanda(2) mubt,
bubl(6). We often hear sim-
ply the pi. of the adjectives
mabi and mibl.
Transgressor, nph., muntu(i)
mubi, muena(i) malu(pl. of
6) mabi.
Translate, vt., andamuna or
kudimuna with muaku(2).
Transmigration, see metempsy-
chosis.
Transparent, adj., toke(p.p. of
toka, to be transparent).
Transpire, vi., lua.
Transplant, vt., ten tula, xlmika.
Transport, v/. (carry), tuala.
Trap, n., buteyi, 6; lukinda, 4.
for fish, n., mukinda, 2.
(pit for animals), n., dljlmba,
5.
set a, vt., teya nd«nde(3).
trigger of, n., ndende, 3.
Trash, n., bllu, bisonso. Both
are pi. of 7.
Travail, v., to strain in, tanta-
mana.
Travel, vi., enda, endakana.
Traveller, n., muena(i) luenda
(4), muendakanyi(i).
Treacherous, be toward, vt^
songuela, banda.
Tread, v., dlata.
on, vt., dlata mu diktksa(5).
TREAD— TRUTH.
279
Tread (continued).
(tramp heavily), v., tua mu-
8£ba(2).
Treasurer, n., mul&ml(i) wa
with mpalata(3) or bintu(pl.
of;).
Treat, v<.(conduct toward one),
eniela.
disease, vi., ondaha.
ill-, see ABUSE.
Treatment, «., ill, cihendo, 7;
cinyangu, 7; matandu, 7,
pi. of 5 or 6.
Treaty, »., cifufu, 7.
make a, vt., ela.
Tree, «., muci, 2.
Tremble, i/t., sakala, kanka,
clkakana.
(quake, as earth), vi., taka,
cika.
Trench, n., mutubu, 2.
Trial, «., cilumbu, 7.
make a, to attempt, v., see try.
Tribe, n. The tribe or c/an or
nation may be expressed by
cl8amba(7), cloto(7), mul-
lu(2); the family can be ex-
pressed by such phrases as -a
muzuku(2) wa mbe]u(3) and
-a mu dlfu(5). The indefinite
iiiiuan*etu, etc. (§ 138, Rem.
5), though generally meaning
brother or sister ^ may also mean
one of the same tribe or clan
or family. The people of the
different tribes or clans are
generally expressed by giving
the simple name of the people;
as, Bak^te, Baluba, Bakuba.
But sometimes we have the
qualifying words bena(sing.
muena) or bakua(sing. mu-
kua); as, Bena Lulua,
Bakua Mbuya. §§ 84 (b);
87 (rf), Rem. 2.
Tribulation, «., bualu(6) with
bubl or bukftle.
Tribute, n., mulambu, 2.
pay to, vt., lambula.
Trick, v^.(conjure), Iowa.
Trick (continued),
(deceive), vt.y zima, dlnga,
dlmba(Buk.).
ft. (sleight of hand), dijimbu, 5;
dialu, 5.
Trickle, vi., down, m&ta.
Trifle, v. (not to do one's work
well), lenga, leni^akana.
Trifling person, w., mufuba, i.
adj.j -a bufuba(6), -a buka-
ta(6).
Trigger, n., of gun, mulemu, 2.
of trap, n.f ndende, 3.
Trip, go on a, vi.y ya ku luen-
du(4).
(stumble), v., kuma dikAsa(5).
». (journey), luendu, 4.
Trouble, v/.(annoy), taclxa, flk-
ixa munda, kuaciza or ufu-
ixa with clxi(7).
(disturbance), «., dlyoyo, 5.
make, vt., teka dlyoyo.
(misfortune), «., bualu(6) with
bubi or bukftle.
Trough, «., for feeding dogs or
beating corn, etc., luvu, 4.
Trousers, n., muh&Qu, 2; mu-
klya, 2. The pi. of these
words generally used.
True, adj.y lllela, ikflxa, -a
buxua(6), -a bulllela(6), -a
buinabuina(6), -a bulktk-
za(6), -a bualabuala(6).
Sometimes the word mene is
used postpositive.
Truly, adv., bulilela, buina-
bulna, buxua, bulktixa, bua-
labuala, and sometimes the
word mene.
Trumpet, «., mpunKi, 3.
Trunk, n.(box), mux^te, 2.
of elephant, »., muilu, 2.
of human body, «., mubldl, 2.
Trust, vt., itabuxa, tekemena(?).
Trustworthy, arf;/.(truthful), -a
di(5) dimue.
Truth, n., bulilela, buik&xa,
buxua, bualabuala, bulna-
bulna. These words all be-
long to class VI.
28o
TRUTHFUL— UGLY.
Truthful, adj., -a dl(5) dlmue.
Truthfully, see truly.
Try, v.f a law case, lumbulula.
by measuring or lifting, vt.j Idi-
klxa, elekexa, lablla, teta.
(to attempt and fail), vi., han-
g&.
(to taste), vt., lablla.
(to test one), vt., teta or buela
with munda.
Tube, ». (barrel of gun), mulonda,
2.
(pipe stem), muxiba, 2.
Tuck up, v/.(gird up the loin), ela
muklya(2).
Tuesday, n., dltaku(5) dibidl.
Tuft, »., of hair, clsuba, 7.
Tumbler, n. (glass), nglas(£ng.)
3-
Tumult, w., dlyoyo, 5.
make a, v/., teka dlyoyo.
Tune, n., musambu, 2,
be out of, vt.f sAkuka; vt.{put
out of), stikula.
instruments to each other, at-
tune, vLf. stkklla hamue, akti-
xa.
put in, vLf sAka.
Turn, v., aside, susuka, ehuka.
back, to return, vi., aluklla,
aluka, andamuka, tuta, tu-
clla, htngila, hlngana, hln-
Kuluka.
handle or anything in a circle,
vt.f nyungixa, nyunguluxa.
inside out, vL, andamuna, kudl-
muna.
into, to enter, vi.y buela.
into, to become, vt., andamuka,
kudimuka, lua; vt., kudi-
muna, andamuna.
loose, vt.f lekela.
oflF, to discharge, vt., umuxa,
ftila.
one's back on, v., ela nylma(3).
out, to drive out, vt., h&tula,
luhula, umuxa.
over, vt., andamuna, kudimuna.
over, to upset, vt., tokola; vi.,
tokoka.
Turn (continued),
(revolve), vi., clnguluka; vt.,
clnguiula.
round, vi., kudimuka, anda-
muka; vt., kudimuna. anda-
muna.
round and round, vt., nyungu-
lula; .vi., nyunguluka.
summersault, vi., hlluka.
(twist), vt., nyenga, Jekexa.
Turtle, »., nkudu(nkuyu), 3.
Tusk, »., of ivory, mubansa> 2.
Twice, adv., biakabidl(pl. of 7),
ml8ansu(pl. of 2) ibidl, bl-
kondo(7) bibldi, mi8unsa(2)
Ibldl. §§ 394, 395-
(second time), use sing, of above
expressions with ord. num.
Twig, n., cis&kl, 7.
Twin, n., muana(i) wa maha-
sa(pl. of 5).
the older, n., cibuabu, 7.
the younger, n., nkanku, i.
Twine, vi., around, Jingra, JlnsUa,
nyengela.
ball of, n., cikata, 7.
(string), n., muxlnga, 2.
Twist, v., nyenga.
(as string), v/., JIngra, jinfflla.
off, vt., nyengabaxa.
(wriggle), vi., nyenga, Jeka.
Two, card, num., bid! with Second-
ary Prefixes. In abstract
counting use ibidl. § 97.
Type, ». (printing), dil^ta, 5. From
Eng. word letter.
Tyrannical, adj., -a cinyangu, 7.
Tyrannize over, vt., nyanga, ona.
Tyranny, »., cinyangu, 7.
Tyrant, n., muena(i) cinyan-
«u(7)-
Udder, n., dibele, 5.
Ugliness, n., bubi, 6; nkunyi
(slang), 3.
Ugly, adj., bi, -a nkunyi(3). This
last word is slang.
ULCER— UNEQUAL.
281
Ulcer, »., cluxa, 7; mputa, 3.
(large swelling), dlsung^u, 5.
Umbrella, »., dikumbl, 5.
Unable, be, v., use neg. of forms
indicated under § 230.
Unaware, be, v., use neg. of
mtinya, to know.
Unbelief, n., buhidia, 6.
Unbeliever, n., muena(i) bu-
hldia(6).
Unbend, v/.(bend straight), olo-
la(ololola); vi., ololoka.
Unbending, be, vLy kayabala,
tantamana, tandabala.
Unbind, vt.^ kutulula, Jingrulula,
sulula.
(unroll), vt.j vungrulula.
Unbolt, vt.^ haula.
Uncertain, be, v». (vacillate), lem-
bakana, humbakana, nema
with mucima as subj., tata-
kana, dl ne mlclma ibidi.
See DOUBTFUL.
Unchaste, adj., -a ma8andi(pl.
of 5 or 6).
Unchastity, »., masandi, pi. of
5 or 6.
Uncircumcised, be, v., di ne with
musundu(2) or muso8o(2) or
bukutu(6); also neg. of v.
tengula with pass, forms.
Uncivilized person, »., musenxi,
I. This is an imported word.
Uncle, n. (maternal), mans^ba, i.
PL is bamansdba.
(paternal), tatu(i) mukulu (if
older tiian the father); tatu
muakunyl (if younger than the
father).
Unclean, adj. {us clothes), bl,
flke(p.p. of flka, to he uip-
clean).
in person, -a manyanu(pl. of
5 or 6), -a inbindu(pl. of 3 ol
4).
(unchaste), -a ina8andl(pl. of 5
or 6).
(untidy), -a bukoya(6).
Uncleanness, n., buflke, 6; bubl,
6.
Uncleanness {continued).
on person, many an u, pi. of 5 pr
6; mblndu, pi. of 3 or 4.
(unchastity), masandi, pi. of 5
or 6.
(untidiness), bukoya, 6.
Unconscious, see insensible.
Unconsciousness, see insensi-
bility.
Uncontrollable, be, v., use neg.
of tumika or tumlklla.
Uncooked, adj., blxe.
be, vi., bixika.
Uncover, v/., bulula.
Under, prep., munxi. This is
rjnerally followed by mua.
423 (3)-
Underneath, see UNDEit.
Undersized, adj., -a cituha(7),
xunsuke(p.p. of xunguka, to
be, undersized).
(dwarfed person), »., njeku, 3;
kaneke, 8; cihlndl, 7.
Understand, v., each other, un-
vangana.
(hear), unva, ufua.
(know), mflnya.
Understanding, w. (knowledge),
lungenyl, 4; mext, pi. of 5
or 6; lukanyl, 4.
Undertone, »., dinunganyi, 5.
PI. generally used,
speak in, v., nungana.
Undo, vt., a knot, sulula, Jingu-
lula, flnuna.
(as stitching), vt., kutula, kutu-
lula.
(take to pieces), vt., tula, tula-
kanya.
(unfasten, as bolt), vt., haula.
Undone, come, vi., kutuka, su-
luka, flnuka.
Undress, vt., vula, kuhoIa(lio-
hola).
Uneasy, be, w. (restless), sasa-
kata.
Unequal, be, vi., use neg. of fuan-
angana or fuana; also ena
followed by bu or buina or
muomumue or o-umue.
282
UNEVEN— UNLOCK.
Uneven, be, vi. (rough to touch),
t&ha.
(unequal), use neg. of fuanan-
sana or fuana; also ena fol-
lowed by bu or bulna or
muomumue or o-umue.
Unfasten, vL, a bolt, haula.
a knot, vL, sulula, jlnsulula,
flnuna.
(as wristlet or latch), v/., ban-
gula.
(open, as box), v/., xibula.
(be unfastened), vi., suluka,
Jinguluka, flnuka, hauka,
bansuka, zibuka.
Unfinished, be, vi., use neg. of
hua or xlka or mflna.
Unfold, vL(sls cloth), vungulula;
vi.f vungruluka.
(as flower), vt,, balulula; vi.y
balnluka.
(as wings), vL, olola(ololola) ;
vi.f ololoka.
Unfortunate, be, vi.y use neg. of
forms under fortunate.
Unfriendliness, n., lukuna, 4;
lukina, 4.
Unfriendly, adj., -a lukiuia(4),
-a lukinu(4).
Unfruitful person or animal, «.,
nkumba, 3. Used only of
females.
Ungrateful, adj., -a clkama(7),
-a dlkamakama(5), -a din-
tan ta(5).
Ungratefulness, »., clkama, 7;
dlkamakama, 5; din tan ta, 5.
Unhappiness, n., kanylnganyin-
8ra, 8.
Unhappy, be, vi., use neg. of sanka
with muoyo(2) or mucima(2)
as subj.; also di ne kanyin-
sanyinKa(8).
Unhide, vL, sokolola, sokola.
Unholiness, n., bubl, 6.
Unholy, <Kf/.(bad), bl; also neg.
V. with akane or impe or len-
Sele.
Unimportant, adj., -a cinana, -a
hatuhu, -a b«.
Uninhabited place, nph., ma
muaba(2) kamuena bantu.
Unintentionally, see acciden-
tally.
Unison, sing in, vL, aktixa me
hamue.
Unit, n.(one), omue.
Unite, i^'.(as rivers), sambakana,
sangakana, ganglia; vL^
sangakAxa, sangakanya,
sangixa, sambaktkxa, samba-
kanya, sanga.
(join, to become one of a party),
v., buela, buelakana.
(put against), vt., tuangttxa,
tuanganya, kuataktixa, kua-
takanya; vi., tuangana,
kuatakana.
Unity, n. (sameness), buobumue,
6.
Unjust, o<f;.(bad), bi; neg. v. with
impe or akane or lengele.
(be dishonest), v., iba, di ne
followed by buivl(6) or bui-
bi(6) or bianBa(pI. of 7)
bile.
Unkind, adj., bi; neg. v. with impe
or akane or lengele; -a lu*
kuna(4), -a lukinu(4), «•
clnyangu(7).
to, vt.f nyanga, ona.
Unkindness, n., lukuna, 4; In*
kinu, 4; cinyangu, 7.
Unknown, adj., -a mu8okoko(2);
also neg. of mtknya, to know.
Unlatch, vi., bangula; w.(come
unlatched), banguka.
Unlawful, make, v/.(taboo), Ji-
dika cijila(7).
thing, n., cijlla, 7.
Unless, sub. conj.(ii not), use neg.
of usual conditional form as
indicated in §§ 459, 460.
Unlike, be, vi., use neg. of fuana
or fuanangana or kelemena
or dieleka; ena followed by
bu or buina or muomumue or
o-umue or muan*abo ne.
Unload, vt., h&tula, umuza.
Unlock, vt., xibula.
UNLOOSE— UNTRUTHFUL.
283
Unloose, vL, sulula, kutula,
flnuna.
a bolt, vL, haula.
(set free), vL, lekela, kuhola,
ktttula.
Unlucky, adj., use neg. of forms
under fortunate.
Unmanageable, be, v»., use neg.
of tumlkaor tumikila; also di
ne with cicu(7) or clbengu(7)
or buhidla(6) or cizlku(7).
Unmarried person, n., mujike, i.
Unmerciful, aJ;., -alakinu(4),-a
cinyangu(7), also the neg. ph.
ena ne lu8e(4).
Unmercifulness, n., lukinu, 4;
cinyansu, 7.
Unmindful, be, vi., hanKaka-
na, humbakana, clmbakana,
clmba.
Unmovable, see immovable.
Unpalatable, be, vi.y use neg. of
xemakana, also ena followed
by nse(3) or kutua kulmpe.
Unproductive, be, vj.(as land),
atuka.
Unravel, vt., kutula, kutulula,
jingulula; vi., kutuka, Jingu-
luka.
Unreliable, adj., -a niaxlnii(sing.
dixtma), -a mafl(pl. of 5), -a
mad IngI (sing, didlnga).
Unreliableness, «., dixlma(pl.
generally maximl), 5; didln-
8ra(pl. generally madlngi), 5;
mafl, pi. of 5 or 6.
Unrighteous, adj., bi.
Unrighteousness, n., bubl, 6.
Unripe, adj., bixe.
be, vi., bixika.
Unroll, vt., vungulula, Jlngn-
lula; vi., vunguluka, Jlngu-
luka.
Unruly, be, vi., use neg. of tnmlka
or tumikila; also dl ne with
clcu(7) or cibengu(7) or
bulildla(6) or clxlku(7).
Unsavory, be, vi., use neg. of
xemakana; also ena followed
by nse(3) or kutua kulmpe.
Unseasoned, be, vi., hola, talala;
also neg. of lunga.
Unselfish, arf;. (generous), -a
dllia(5).
person, n., clhahl, 7.
Unselfishness, ^.(generosity),
dlha, 5.
Unspotted, be, vi., ena ne with
matoba^sing. dltoba), 5; or
mab&xl(sing. dlb&xl, 5).
(white), adj., toke(p.p. of toka,
to be unspotted).
Unstable, be, vi., takankana,
nyungakana, tenkakana.
Unsteady, be, vi., see unstable.
Unsuitable, be, vi., use neg. of
akanangana or fuanangana.
Untangle, vt., Jlngulula, kutula,
kutulula; i;«.(become un-
tangled), Jlnguluka, kutuka.
Untidiness, »., bukoya, 6.
Untidy, adj., -a bukoya(6).
Untie, vt., sulula, kutula.
a bow knot, vt., flnuna.
(set free), vt., kuhola(kohola),
kutula.
(become untied), vi., suluka,
kutuka, flnuka, kulioka(ko*
hoka).
Until, sub. conj., see § 458 (c).
prep., ku.
(from . . . until), ku . . . to
ne ku, ku . . . ne ku, some-
times simple ne connecting the
two parts.
Unto, prep., see to.
Untrue, be, vi., ena with the adj.
forms lUela, Ikflxa, -a bu-
xna(6), -a bulilela(6), -a
bulnabulna(6), -a bulk A-
xa(6), -a bualabuala(6).
Untruth, n., dlxima, 5; dldinga,
5; mafl, pi. of 5. The pi. of
dixlma and dldinga is maximl
and madlngi.
tell an, v., xlma, dlnga, dlm-
ba(Buk.).
UNTRUTHFUL,<K/;.,-a maximl (sing.
dixlma, 5), -a madlngi (sing.
dldinga, 5), -a mafl(pl. of 5).
284
UNTRUTHFULNESS— VARIEGATED.
Untruthfulness, n., see un-
truth.
Unwell, be, vi,, sama, bela.
•Unwholesome, adj., bl.
Unwilling, be, vi.y benga, hidia;
also neg. of Itabuxa.
Unwind, ?;/., Jingulula,vungulula;
. JInguluka, vunguluka.
Unwrap, vL, Jlngulula, yungu-
lula; vi,f JInguluka, vungu-
luka.
Up, adv.{on high), ktklu, mlilu,
heulu. § 364.
to, prep,, ku.
See up-stream, up-river.
Upon, prep., ha, heulu.
Upper part of hind leg, n., cibelu,
7
Upright, be, vi., imikna, Jalama,
lul&ma.
(good), adj., Impe, lengele,
akane.
make, vt., Imtknyika, Jadlka,
Jalamlxa, ludika.
Uprightness, w. (goodness), buim-
pe, 6; buakane, 6; bulen-
gele, 6.
Up-river, prep, ph., ku mutu(2).
Uproar, w., diyoyo, 5.
Upset, v/., tokola; vi., tokoka.
Up-stream, prep, ph., kumutu(2).
Upwards, adv., ktklu, mtiln.
§364.
Urge on, vt., endexa, enzexa.
The Causative Form of any
verb may be used accord-
ing to the connection.
Urinate, vi., sukula, sukunya.
Urine, n., inenya(inenyu), pi. of
5 or 6.
Us, pers. pro.
(i) Simple Disjunctive, tuetu.
§105-
(2) As direct or indirect obj.,
use pronominal infix tu.
§§ii6, 117.
(3) With prepositions, see §§ 106
(c), 107.
Usage, n., cilele, 7; cieniedi, 7;
cibilu, 7.
Use, vt., kuata.
of no, adj. ph., -a hatuhu, -a
cinana.
Used to, vt., ibidila, lobokela.
up, be no more, vi., xika, hua.
Useless, adj., -a hatuhu, -a
cinana, -a b£.
become, vi., nyanguka, onokc.
Utter, v., amba, akula.
Vacant, see empty.
Vacate, •z;.(go out), umuka, lu-
huka, h&tuka.
Vacillate, v., lembakana, hum-
bakana, di ne micima Ibldl,
nemawith mucinia(2) as subj. ,
tatakana.
Vagabond, w., muena(i) cien-
denda(7). § 35^ ig)-
be a, vph.y enda ciendenda.
Vagabondage, «., ciendenda, 7.
§ 35^ (^)-
Vagina, n., cisuna(7), 7; mun-
fl(?), 2.
Vagrancy, n., ciendenda, 7. § 356
Vagrant, see vagabond.
Vain, be, v. (proud), disua, -di
lexa, sanka, alakana.
take name in, vi., tela.
(try in vain), v., hanga.
Vale, n., luhongo, 4; mu ci-
banda(7).
Valiant, see brave.
Valley, n., luhongo, 4; mu cl-
banda(7).
Valor, n., dikima, 5; bukitu, 6;
mucinia(2) muk&le.
Valuable, adj., -a niuxinga(2)
mukftle.
Value, w. (price), muxinga, 2.
Vanish, vi., ximlna.
Vanity, «., disanka, 5.
Vanquish, vt., hita or tamba
followed by buk&le(6) or
ngulu(3), cimuna.
Variegated, be, v., di with
matoba(pl. of 5) or mab&-
xi(pl. of 5).
VARIETY— VILE.
28s
Variety, see kind.
Vary, v., use neg. of fuana or
fuanangana or kelemena or
dieleka; also neg. v. with
muomumue or o-uinue.
Vast, arf^.(large), nine.
number, many, -a bun8:i(6),
ngl, ngla-ngl.
Vastness, ». (largeness), bunlne, 6.
in number, bungi, 6.
Vaunt, t;., disua, sanka, alakana.
Vegetable, tr., mudioko(2) may
perhaps be used as general term.
Vein, n., mujilu(muxilu), 2.
Velocity, »., lubilu, 4; luklksa, 4.
Venerate, vt., nemeka, neme-
kela, meneka menekela,
tumblza, tendelela.
Vengeance, »., lukuna, 4.
Venom, n., for poisoned arrows,
lulengu, 4.
Veracity, n., bulilela, bulkfixa,
buxua, bualabuala, bulna-
buina. These words all be-
long to class VI.
Veranda, «., citadllu, 7; mba-
lanta, 3.
(long pole resting on the support-
ing posts), n., mutandala, 2;
mutamba, 2.
post supporting the, »., dikunxl,
5-
Verily, adv,, bulilela, buina-
bulna, bulklkxa, buxua,
bualabuala. These are really
nouns belonging to class VI.
Very, adv.{the very one), mene.
As modifying adjectives there are
several methods of expres-
sion:
(i) The word be postpositive.
§ 90(c).
(2) The verbs tamba and hita
followed by the abstract
quality of the adj. § 90 (c).
(3) By elongating the last
syllable of the adj.
(4) By repeating a syllable of
the adj.; as, toke to,
kunze kuniu.
Vessel, «.(pot), clvuadl, 7; luesu,
4; nyingu, 3; kasamba, 8.
(ship), n.j dikumbi(5) dia ml.
Vest, n., nkuldtu, 3.
Vex, vLf kuacixa or ufuixa with
cixi(7), tacixa, flkixa mun-
da; vi.(be vexed), tata,
kuata or ufua or unva or
di ne with clxl, dt ne munda
muflke.
Vexation, »., cixi, 7.
expression of, by clicking the
throat, V.J sodla.
Vibrate, vi.^ lembelela, dikuha,
hehuka.
Vice, ».(bad habit), cllele(7) or
clbilu(7) or cienzedi(7) fol-
lowed by adj. clbl.
(sin), n,y bualu(6) bubi, muan-
da(2) mubi, bubi(6).
Vicious, adj.{haid), bl.
be, as animal, vph., di ne
luoxi(4).
(wild, reckless), hale, buluke,
tomboke. These are p.p. of
hala and buluka and tom-
boka^ to be vicious,
ViciouSNESS, n.(as animal), luoxi,
4.
(badness), bubi, 6.
(madness), buhale, 6; bubu-
luke, 6; bu tomboke, 6.
Victorious, be, over, vi., tamba or
hita with bukftle(6) or
nsulu(3).
Victuals, w., bldla, pi. of 7; bia
kudia.
View, v.(look, see), mona, tan-
gila, xoxa.
come into, vi.y mueneka, mueka.
pass out of, vi.f Jimina.
Vigilant, adj.y dimuke(p.p. of
dimuka, to be vigilant).
Vigorous, adj., kaie(p.p. of kftla,
to be vigorous) y di ne with
bukftle(6) or ngulu(3).
Vigorously, adv., bikftle.
Vigor, n., bukille, 6; ngulu, pi.
of 3 or 4.
Vile, adj.y bi.
286
VILENESS— WAKE.
ViLENESS, n., bubl, 6.
Vilify, vt., songuela, banda.
ViLLAG£,n., mu8oko, 2; ditunga,5.
large collection of, metropolis,
n., cimenga, 7; clhiinda, 7.
Villain, n., mantu(i) mubi,
muena(i) lukinu(4).
Vindicate, v/., bingixa; w.(be
vindicated), binga.
Vine, n., muoxi, 2.
grape-, nph.^ muoxl wa ma-
moma a kuenia ii*ft followed
by yinyo or maluvu a mputu.
Vinegar, »., nvliilke(Eng.), 3.
Vineyard, nph.f budtmi(6) bua
mioxl ya followed by maluvu
a mputu or vlnyo.
Violence, n., bukille, 6; ngulu,
pi. of 3 or 4.
(dementia), n., buhale, 6; bu-
buluke, 6; butomboke, 6.
do to, to rape, vL, kuata mu-
k«xl ku bukille.
take by, vt.^ nyenga.
Violent, adj. (demented), hale,
buluke, tomboke. These
words are p.p. of- hala and
buluka and tomboka, to be
violerUf crazy.
(strong), k&le(p.p. of kilia, to
be violent).
Violently, adv., ku buki&le(6),
bikille.
Virgin, ». No word for virgin as
such,
(girl), lass, muxikankunde, 2;
songaktixl, i.
(unmarried person), mujlke, i.
Virginity, ff.(girlhood), buxikan-
kunde, 6; bunsongaktkxi, 6.
(state of being unmarried), ».,
bujike, 6.
Virtue, n.(goodness), bulmpe, 6;
buakane, 6; bulengele, 6.
Virtuous, adj., Impe, akane,
lengele.
(be chaste), vi.y ena ne ma-
sandi(pl. of 5 or 6).
Visage, n., mp&la, 3; mesu, pi.
of dlsu, eye.
Viscera, n., mala, pi. of dila,
gut.
Viscid, be, vi., kuatakana.
Visible, become, vi., mueneka,
mueka.
Vision, «.(dream), mutu, 2; d-
lilta, 7; dilu, 5.
have a, vt., li&ta.
Visit, 7/.(go visiting), enda buen-
yi(6).
n., buenyt, 6.
Visitor, »., muenyl, i.
Vocation, n., mudimu, 2.
Voice, n., dl, 5. PI. me.
bass, di dinlne.
high, di dlklse.
lower the, vt., tek xa or hue-
kexa with di.
raise the, vt., ambuluxa or
bandixa or ambulnla or
kftlexa with di.
Void, see empty.
Vomit, v., luka.
Vow, v., clha. The reflexive dl-
clha is generally used.
Voyage, n., luendu, 4.
w.
Wadding, n., for gun, dihusa, 5;
cinyuka, 7.
Wag, vt., Jixa(xixa).
Wage, v., war, luangana nyita(3).
«.(pay), difutu, 5.
Wager, n., luhiku, 4.
v., dia luhiku.
put up anything as a, vt., hikila.
Wages, n., difutu, 5.
advance, vt., bandixa difutu.
decrease, vt., huekexa difutu.
Wagon, see carrlage.
Wail, v., dila.
n., muadi, 2.
Waist, n., cimono, 7; cituka, 7.
Waistcoat, n., nkul£tu, 3.
Wait, v., for, await, indila, kuba.
on, attend, vt. l&ma.
(stand), vi., imtkna.
(stop), v.y lekela.
Wake, vt., bixa ku tulu(pl. of 8),
katamuxa.
WAKEFUL—WAVE.
287
Wakeful, be, vph.^ lala clta-
b&la(7).
Wakefulness, n., citab&la, 7.
Walk, vt.^ enda.
about, vi.f endakana.
lame, vt., enda followed by pres.
part, of zobela or tebuka.
slowly, vi.f onguela, xixamuka.
with a staff, vi.y enda ku ci-
bangu(7), xindamina.
Walking-stick, »., clbangu, 7.
Wall, ». (fence), lumbu, 4; lu-
hangu, 4; cihangu, 7.
of house, n.y cimtknu, 7.
Wallow, vi., bunguluka.
Wander, vi.y about, endakana.
in mind, talk in delirium, v.,
akula biakulakula(pl. of 7).
Wanderer, n., muendakanyl, i.
(vagabond), muena(i) cien-
deRda(7).
Wane, vi.{a^ moon), nyana.
(when the moon is almost ready
to disappear), vi.y nyingala.
Want, vU, sua, nanga, Inylxa.
(desire), n., cisuasua, 7. Udi
ne bisuasua, he has (many)
wants,
in, poor, adj.y hele, landa.
(lack), vi.y x&la, ena ne.
(need), n., buhele, 6; bulanda
6.
War, n., nyita, 3.
v.y luangana nvlta.
Warm, be, vi.y hla, dl with lui-
ya(4) or clyuya(7).
one*s self in sun or by fire, v.,
ota with munya(2) or ka-
hla(8).
over again, as food, v/., bab&xa;
vi.y bab&la.
vt.y hixa.
Warmth, w., of body or water or
air, lulya, 4; etyuya, 7.
of the sun, w., munya, 2.
of fire, n.y kahia, 8.
Warn, vt.y dimuxa; v».(be warn-
ed), dimuka.
Warning, w., budimu, 6.
Warrior, see soldier.
Wary, adj.y dimuke(p.p. of di-
muka, to be wary).
Wash, vt.y uvua, sukula(Lower
Congo),
(bathe), vi.y owa; vt.y owexa.
Wasp, ». (making nests of mud),
ntotonyi, 3; (the nest of),
dlbul(5).
(making nests of wood paste), «.,
ditetembue, 5; dingulunge,
5; (the nest of), nsaho, 3.
Waste, vt.{Qs goods), tangalOxa,
tangadixa, nyanga, ona,
muangaliixa, dia cinana.
away, grow thin, vi.y nyana, di
ne with cIonda(7) or cin-
yanu(7).
go to, vi.y onoka(oneka), nyan-
guka.
lay, vt.y haula.
n. (trash), bilu, bisonso. Both
pi. of 7.
Watch, v. (as thief for chance to
steal), tentekela.
(look after), vt.y l&ma, tangila,
mona, xoxa.
out, be warned, vi.y dimuka.
n.(time piece), dlba(pl. meba),
5.
Watchman, »., mul&mi, i; mu-
tangldi, i; mumonyi, i;
mumuenenyl, i.
(sentry), w., sentedl, i. From
French or Eng.
Water, «., ml(mal), pi. of 5 or 6.
cold, nph.y ml matalale.
fetch, vi.y suna.
hot, nph.y ml a kahla(8).
make, to urinate, v., sukula,
sukunya.
-pot, n.y mulondo, 2.
small amount of, n., tul(tuai),
tulna. Both pi.* of 8. See
under ml.
Waterfall, »., cibila, 7.
Water-pot, »., mulondo, 2.
Wave, «., divuala, 5.
to and fro, vt.y nyunglxa, kuha.
(vibrate), vi., lembelela, dlkuha,
hehuka.
288
WAX— WEIGH.
Wax, ». (honeycomb), dikaci, 5;
dlhula, 5.
of ear, n., tufl(pl. of 8) tua
nyongo'a dicu(5).
vi.{as moon), diunda, lunda.
Way, »., iixlla(njila), 3.
(custom), »., cllele, 7; clen-
sedl, 7; cibilu, 7.
door-, n., muxuku(2) wambelu,
mbelu(3), cibuedelu(7).
get out of the, vi.f sesuka,
umuka, ehuka(ahuka).
half-, locative words hanktkcl,
kunkticl.
high-, n., nzlla munlne, mu-
sesu(2).
in this, thus, adv.^ nunku(nanku,
nenku).
lead the, vi., ya with ku mpft-
la(3) or kumudtlu, dianjlla.
not know the, be lost, vi., ham-
buka.
show the, vt.f lombo^a.
the way to, nzlla wa ka.
Wayfarer, »., muendakanyl, i.
We, pers. pro.
(i) Simple Disjunctive, tuetu.
§ 105-
(2) Compound Disjunctive, ble-
tu. §§ 108, no.
(3) Pro. prefix, tu. §§ 113, 114.
Weak, adj.^ tekete(p.p. of teketa,
to be weak),
(weary, be), vi.f hanga, susuka.
Weaken, vL, tekexa, hangixa.
Weakness, «., butekete, 6; dl-
hangu, 5.
Wealth, n., bubanji, 6; biuma
(sing, ciuma), 7; bliitu(sing.
cintu), 7; luhetu, 4.
Wealthy, o^f;., banji, -a biuma(pl.
of 7), -a bliitu(pl. of 7), -a
lulietu(4).
Wean, vL, kandixa or lekexa or
kanyina or jidlka followed by
muana(i) mabele(pl. of 5).
Wear, v/., luata, vuala.
out, as clothes, vt.y susula, ona,
nyanga.
Wear {continued).
out, to make tired, vt.y hanglxa.
See worn.
Weariness, w., dlhangu, 5; bu-
tekete, 6.
Weary, be, vi.y hanga, susuka,
teketa.
of, v.y tonda, tua. The thing
making weary is the subj., the
person is the obj.
Weather, n. No satisfactory
word has been found.
Weave, vt.y kuma didlba(5).
Web, n., of spider, buntate, 6;
butatande, 6; bukuondo, 6.
Wed, vt.y bAka. See marry.
Wedding, n., dibtkka, 5.
feast, »., bidia bla dlbanil-
xa(5).
See MARRIAGE, MARRY.
Wedlock, n., dlbtika, 5.
Wednesday, »., dltuku(5) dis&tu.
See WEEK.
Weed, n.(wild grass), dlxlnde, 5.
(trash), n., bilu, bisoidbo. Gen-
erally use pi.
v.(cut out with hoe)j Ihlla.
Week, n. There is to succession
of days corresponding to the
term week. In the vicinity of
Luebo and other places where
Sunday is known we have the
following:
Sunday, n., Liumingu(LiUbiiigu),
4. From Portuguese.
Monday, nph., dltuku(5) dia
mp&tukllu(nduhukilu) wa
Liumingu.
Tuesday, nph., dituku dibidi.
Wednesday, nph.y dituku dls&tu.
Thursday, nph.y dituku dlnl.
Friday, nph.y dituku ditanu.
Saturday, nph.y dituku dlsam-
bombo.
Weep, vi.y dila.
for, vt.y JInga.
Weeping, «., muadi, 2.
Weevil, w., lubumbu, 4.
Weigh, vt.y Idlkixa or elekex»
with bujltu(6).
WEIGHT— WHICH.
2S9
Weight, w. (heaviness), bujitu, 6.
Weighty, adj., -a bujitu(6).
be, vi., nema, nemenena.
Welcxdme, vL, akadila, uhukila,
akana.
Weld, vt., bambakanya, bamba-
ktixa.
Well, adv., bimpe, biakane, bi-
lengele.
adj., kaie(p.p. of kftla, to be
well), -a bukaie(6).
become, to convalesce, vi., san-
g^la, sanguluka, ktisa mu-
bidi(2).
(be cured), vi., talala, hola, uma.
w.(spring), mpokolo, 3.
West, nph., kutu diba(5) dia-
buela, kutu kuabuela diba.
For convenience is also sug-
gested wesita(Eng.), 3-
Wet, be, vi., talala, hola, toha,
bola, bombama; the adj. phs.
-a citelele(7) and -a cia-
xlma(7).
make, vt., talCixa, tohexa, bo-
lexa, bombeka.
WETNESS,w.,citelele, 7; ciaxima,7.
What, interrog. pro., cinganyl?
cinyi? ci? munyi? blxl?
bualu(6) kl? The first three
words are noun forms belong-
ing to class VII, munyi ?^and
bixi? are indeclinable.
for? why? § 420.
is its name? dina(5) diaci
ncinganyi? See § 1 75, Rem. 3.
is the matter? munyi? bixi?
cinyi? cinganyl? bualu kl?
is your name? dlna dlebi
nganyi? § 174, Rem. i.
kind? kl postpositive. § 176.
For use in Indirect Questions, see
§ 472 (a).
For use as Relative Pro. with
antecedent omitted, see § 169.
It is to be noted that the inter-
rogative words are nearly
always at the end of the sen-
tence.
inter jec, kia!(cia!).
I
Whatever, whatsoever, pro., the
adj. onso with prefix of the
noun indicated.
Wheat, n. This grain is unknown
in Central Africa. It might
not be far wrong to use the
word mponda(millet), which
is grown and harvested in much
the same way as wheat.
Wheel, n., dikalu, 5 . This is used
of the stern wheel of the
. steamer and is from the
Portuguese.
When, interrog. adv. There is no
definite word. Use dituku
kl? what day? ngondo kl?
what moon ? cldimu kl ? what
season? diba kl? (or diba
hanyi?), what o'clock ?
sub. conj., ha- insep. with v.
For use in Indirect Questions, see
§ 472 (&).
Whence, interrog. adv., kunyi?
hanyi?
For use as sub. conj., see
§ 472(0.
Where, interrog. adv., kunyi?
hanyi ?
For use as sub. conj., see § 472(c).
Wherefore, adv., ka, bu- insep.
with Applied Form of v. See
THEREFORE.
Wherein, adv. {in which), see § 168
(o) (6).
Wherever, Wheresoever, adv.,
use locatives insep. with adj.
root onso.
Wherewith, adv. {wiih. which), see
§ 168 {c).
Whet, vt., nuona.
Whether, conj., ne.
(whether . . . or), ne . . . ne.
Which, interrog. pro. and rel. pro.
(i) As interrog., use kl? follow-
ing the noun. § 176.
(2) For use in Indirect Questions,
see § 472 (a).
(3) As rel. pro., see § 164, etc.
(4) As rel. pro. with preposi-
tions, see § 168 {a)-{c).
290
WHICHEVER— WICKEDNESS.
Whichever, Whichsoever, pro.^
the adj. onso with prefix of the
noun indicated.
While, sub. conj.y ha- insep. with
V. 1458(d)(2).
n., long, inatuku(pl. of 5) male,
ngondo(pl. of 3) ya bungi(6),
masangu(2) mule, to (adv.).
short, matuku mihl, musangu
mulhl, cltuha(7).
Whine, vi., dila.
Weup, n., muxoxo, 2; munyasu,
2; kanyanzu, 8.
vt.f kuma, tuta.
Whirlpool, w., dlnyangu(5) dia
ml.
Whirlwind, n.^ nvunde, 3; cin-
funde, 7.
(tornado), cihubu, 7.
Whiskers, n., muevu, 2; muedu,
2.
hair of the, w., lusukl, 4; lun-
yonyi, 4.
Whisper, vi.^ nungana.
n., dlnunganyi, 5.
Whistle, «., luxlba, 4; clxlba, 7.
v., through the mouth, ela
muo8a(2).
through the hands, ela with
clhoto(7) or clbobo(7).
Whistling, «.(of the mouth),
muosa, 2.
(through the hands), »., clhoto,
7; clbobo, 7.
White, adj., toke(p.p. of toka,
to he white).
of egg, n., mllembulembu, pi.
of 2.
very, toke with the adv. words
kubo or ze ze or to.
Whiteness, w., butoke, 6. Some-
times the inifin. kutoka is used
in Comparative constructions.
Whitewash, «.(a white earth),
luhemba, 4. PI. is generally
used.
vt.y laba mpemba.
Whither, interrog. adv., knnyi?
hanyi?
For use as sub. conj., see § 472(c).
Whitish, adj., tokoloke(p.p. of
tokoloka, to be whitish).
Who, interrog. and rel. pro.
(i) As interrog. pro. use:
(fl) Nganyi ? (pi. banganyi 7)
See § 174.
(b) KI following the noun.
§ 176.
(2) As rel. pro., see § 164, etc.
(3) As rel. pro. with antecedent
omitted in Indirect Questions,
see § 472 (fl).
Whoever, pro., the adj. onso with
prefix of the noun indicated.
Whole, adj., onso, xima.
n., buonso, 6; buxlma, 6.
Whom, interrog. and rel. pro,
(i) As interrog. use
(a) Nganyi ? (pi. banganyi ?)
See § 174.
(b) KI following the noun.
§176.
(2) As rel. pro., see § 164, etc.
(3) As rel. pro. with antecedent
omitted in Indirect Questions,
see 472 (a).
(4) As rel. pro. governed by prep-
ositions, see § 168 {a)-{c).
Whore, n., muena(i) masandl(pl.
of 5 or 6), mukikxl(i) wa
masandi.
Whoredom, «., masandi, pi. of 5
• or 6.
Whoremonger, n., muena(i) ma-
sandi (pi. of 5 or 6).
Whose, interrog. and rel. pro.
(i) As interrog. pro., use -a
nganyi ?(pl. -a banganyi?).
(2) As rel. pro., see § 167.
(3) As rel. pro. with antecedent
omitted in Indirect Questions,
see § 472 (a), Rem. i.
Whosoever, see vfoever.
Why, adv. For different construc-
tions, see § 420.
For use in Indirect Question
constructions, see § 472 (e).
Wick, «., mukudl, 2.
Wicked, adj., bl.
Wickedness, «., bubi, 6.
WIDE— WISE.
291
Wide, adj.{laxge)y nine.
Widen, vL, diundixa, iundixa.
Widow, »., makaxi(i) wa lufuila
(4).
Widower, »., maiami(i) wa lu-
fuila(4).
Widowhood, Widowerhood, w.,
lufuila, 4.
Width, n., mu or ku followed by
builii(6) or buklse(6), ntan-
ta(3) muihi, bunlne(6) iscrften
used when there is no com-
parison between length and
breadth.
Wife, n., mukikxi, i.
the first, »., muadi, 2; mutu(2)
wa lubanza(4).
the second, »., cilonde(7)
muadi.
Wiggle, vi.,, sala, salakana.
Wild, o</;. (reckless, crazy), hale,
buluke, tomboke. These are
p.p. of the verbs hala, buluka
and tomboka, to be wild.
(as animals), -a muitu(2), -a
mpata(3), -a cisuku(7).
be, timid, vi., b&xa, di ne mb&-
xib&xi(pl. of 3 or 4).
Wildcat, n., mb&lab&la, 3.
WiLDNESS, «.(craziness), buhale,
6; bubuluke,6; butoniboke,6.
(fright), buowa, 6.
(timidity, as of animals), mb&xi-
b&xi, pi. of 3 or 4.
Wile, ».(trap), buteyi, 6.
Wilful, a<f;. (stubborn), -a cicu(7),
-a cixiku(7), -a buliidia(6),
-a cibengu(7).
Wilfulness, «., clcu, 7; cixiku,
7; buhidia, 6; cibengu, 7.
Wiliness, n., budimu, 6; luklnu,
4-
Will, v., as sign of future tense,
see § 295.
n.(mind), muoyo, 2; mucima, 2.
(testament), mukanda(2) wa
buhianyi(6).
(wish not, to reject), v/., hidia,
benga.
Willing, be, v. (agree to), itabuxa.
Wilt, vi.y fuba; vt., fubixa.
Wily, adj.y dimuke(p.p. of di-
muka, to be wily)y -a budi-
mu(6), -a lukinu(4).
Win, v., a bet or at lawsuit, binga.
at gambling, v., tftha. The per-
son losing is the obj. of the
verb; as, nakut&ha Kasongo
blntu biandi, / won Kasongo' s
things.
(conquer), vt.y hita or tamba
with buk&le(6) or ngala(pl.
of 3).
Wind, n., lubehele, 4.
break, vt., ela muxa(2).
(hurricane), »., cihuhu, 7.
whirl-, w., nvunde, 3; cin-
funde, 7.
7;/.(wrap around), Jinga, Jin-
gila, vunga, vungila, nyen-
gela.
Window, »., dikela, 5.
Wine, »., for the communion, ml a
Nzambi.
imjxjrted, vlnyo(from Portu-
guese), maluvu a mputu.
palm, from, the millet or com,
ma]uvu, pi. of 5 or 6; malua,
pi. of 5 or 6.
Wing, n., dlhahu, 5 ; luhambn, 4*
Wink, v., hodla.
at, v., bunga disu(5).
Winnow, f/., hehula, huxa, hn-
hixa.
Winter, «., cidimu(7) cia ma-
xika, maxlhu(2).
Wipe, vt., off, kuhula, hulula.
out, vt. Jima, Jimixa.
Wire, «., lukanu, 4.
large brass, cut into short pieces
and used as currency, «.,
mutaku, ^.
small, n.y kala, 8. PI. is tuala
Wisdom, w., lungenyl, 4; mexi,
pi. of 5 or 6; lukanyl, 4.
Wise, adj.y -a lungenyi(4), -a
mexi(pl. of 5 or 6), -a lu-
kanyi(4).
(cunning), dimuke(p.p. of di-
muka, to be wise).
292
WISH— WORK.
Wish, vL, sua, nanga, Inyixa.
an ill, n.f mulau, 2.
ill to, vi., ela mulau.
n., cisuasua, 7. Generally with
idea of uncertainty as to what
one does want.
Witch, n., muena(i) with mu-
hongo(2) or bnloxi(6) or
muloxi(2).
(bewitch), v/., Iowa.
bring from under influence of,
vL, hongola.
-craft, n., muhongo, 2; buloxly
6; muloxi, 2.
doctor, one who prepares the
poison test, n., muena(i)
cihaha(7).
Witchcraft, n., mubongo, 2;
buloxi, 6; muloxi, 2.
With, prep.^ ne. Sometimes the
idea is expressed in the verb;
as, flla, go wilh; etc.
(be with child), v., dl ne with
dtfu(5) or diml(5).
Withdraw, vi.{go out), umiika>
h&tuka, luhuka.
Wither, vi., fuba; vL^ fubixa.
Withhold, v/. (restrain), humblxai
lekexa, kosexa.
Within, prep. Use mu when the
noun which it governs is ex-
pressed; use the Locative Suf-
fixed construction with mu
when the noun is not ex-
pressed. § 320.
Without, prep. Use mu when the
noun which it governs is ex-
pressed; use the Locative Suf-
fixed construction with mu
when the noun is not ex-
pressed. § 320.
Without in sense of not being or
not doing is best expressed by
the simple neg. of the verb.
be, vi.y ena ne.
Withstand, vph.^ ela mukosa(2).
(forbid), vt., hidla, benga.
Witness, «.(one knowing), mu-
miknyi, i.
Witness (continued).
(one seeing), »., mutangidi, i;
mumonyl, i.
to bear false, v., xlma, dinga,
dimba(Buk.).
to bear false witness against, vt.,
xlminyina, dingila, dimblla,
banda.
(to see), vt.f mona,tangila, xoxa.
Wizard, see witch.
Woe, w., mulau, 2.
Woman, n., mukOxi, i.
(a large woman, generally used
ironically), n., cikflxiana, 7.
§351-
(a woman recently confined), ».,
muviele, i; muadikflxi, i. .
(a woman who has borne chil-
dren), n.y muledi, i.
a young, n., muxikankunde, 2;
songakikxi, i.
childless, barren, n., nkumba, 3.
Womanhood, n., bukAxi, 6.
young, n.f buxikankunde, 6;
bunsongankAxi, 6.
Womb, n., difu, 5; dimi, 5; cile-
lelu(?), 7; cibutuilu(7), 7.
(the inside), munda. § 423 (2)
(b).
Wonder, v. (expressed by grunt-
ing), k£ma, tua cik£ma(7).
n.j bualu(6) bua kukftma.
Wonderful, adj., -a kuk^ma.
Woo, vt.y endela.
Wood, «. (copse), cihuka, 7.
fire-, lukunyl, 4. PL generally
used,
(forest), ditu, 5. PI. metu.
(stick), muci, 2.
Wooden, adj.^ -amuci(2).
Wool, n., mioso ya mukoko(2).
Sing, of mioso is luoso; see
§ 45, Rem.
Word, «., dl, 5. PI. is me.
Work, see labor.
for, to serve, vt.f kuacila or
ens ela or enzexa with mu-
dimu(2).
(not to work well, to trifle), vi.,
lenga, xlxamuka.
WORKMAN— WRITE.
293
Workman, n., muena(i) mudi-
inu(2).
World, n. There seems to be
no distinct word. Bulobo(6)
means more properly the land
as distinguished from the
water, though it seems to be
the best word to use in the
sense of world,
(figurative, in sense of people),
n.j inisoko(pl. of 2) yonso.
Worm, «., clxl, 7.
(caterpillar), dixl, 5; clxl, 7.
PI. of dlxl is mexl.
earth-, munyenga, 2.
grub, dlkubu, 5; luhose, 4.
Both kinds are eaten,
intestinal, musanda, 2.
large green, nyoka*a bundu.
This is edible.
Worn out, be, v.(as clothes),
susuka, onoka, nyanguka.
(tired), vi.^ hanga.
Worry, see annoy.
Worse, get, v. (in health), nema or
nemenena with disama, sick-
ness ^ as subj.
Worship, vt., tendelela.
(extol), vt.f tumblxa, Inylxa.
Worth, ». (price), muxlnga, 2.
Worthiness, w.(goodness), bu-
Impe, 6; buakane, 6; bulen-
gele, 6.
Worthless, a(f;. (cheap), -a mu-
xlnga(2) mutekete, -a cl-
nana, -a hatuhu, -a b6.
(lazy), -a bukata(6), -a bu-
fuba(6).
person, ».(lazy), mufuba, i.
to become,, v*., nyanguka,
onoka.
See § 356 (g).
Worthlessness, «. (laziness), bu-
fuba, 6; bukata, 6.
(of no value), cinana, hatuhu.
These are indeclinable.
Worthy, a<i;.(good), Impe, akane,
lengele.
Would, auxiliary v.
(i) In ^ Direct Discourse con-
WouLD {continued),
structions use the exact words
of speaker. § 455 {b) (2)
(2) In Past Conditions, see §§
459 {c), 460 (c).
(3) As past tense neg. of will use
the past tense of hidla or
benga; as, wakuhldia kuya,
he would not go.
Wound, vt., t&ha mputa(3).
n.y mputa, 3.
Wounded, adj.y tftha(p.p. passive
of t&ha, to wound).
Wrangle, ». (dispute), luh&ta, 4.
(row), »., diyoyo, 5; mut&yo, 2.
v., tandangana, ela or elan-
gana or dl ne followed by
mp&ta(sing. luh&ta).
Wrangling, n., luh&ta, 4; di-
yoyo, 5; mutS,yo, 2; ma-
tandu, pi. of 5 or 6.
Wrap, vt.y Jinga, Jlngila, vunga,
vunglla, nyengela.
up in, vt.f kuta mu.
Wrapper, w. (canvas of bales),
dlkutu, 5.
Wrath, »., clxl, 7.
Wreck, vt., a village, haula.
(tear down a house), v/., sasula.
Wrestle, v., luangana bibu-
Ia(sing. clbula 7), flnan-
gana.
(throw in wrestling), vt.y flna,
xlnda.
Wrestling, «., clbula, 7. PI.
generally used.
Wretch, w.(bad person), mun«
tu(i) mubl.
Wriggle vi.^ sala, salakana.
(as caterpillar), lundamana.
(as snake), vi.y Jongoloka.
(as worm), vi.^ vunguluka.
(twist), fi., nyenga, Jeka.
Wring, v/.(as wet clothes), nyenga,
off, vt.j nyengab&xa.
Wrinkle, w., mufudl, 2.
Wrist, w., kansanke, 8.
Wristlet, w., lukanu, 4.
iWrite, vt.y funda. Sometimes
t&ha has this meaning.
294
WRITER— YOUNG ER.
Writer, n., mufundi, i.
Writing, n,, manner of, cifundidi,
7-
Wrong, n., bubi, 6; bnalu(6)
bubi; muanda(2) mubi.
be in the, vi.^ hila.
do, vt.j enza blbl.
do to one, v/., enzela bibi.
judge to be in the, v/., hixa.
arf;.(not right), use neg. with
impe, akane, lengele.
adv., blbi.
Wrongly, adv., bibi.
Xylophone, n., madimba, pi. of 5.
Yam, »., wild, cisambn, 7; ci-
mftna, 7.
Yard, n., lubansa, 4; bula, 6;
also mu with one of the words
meaning fencCy iuhansu(4),
cihangu(7), lumbu(4).
Yawn, v., ela muaa(2).
n., muau, 2.
Ye, pers. pro., see you.
Year, n. There is no term for the
complete circle of the year.
Cidimu(2) means season, ei-
ther wet or dry. Of course,
by doubling this we have the
years.
See season.
Yearly, adv., ku cidiinn(7) ku
cldimu, lit., season by season.
Yearn, for v/., inuoyo(2) or mu-
cima(2) as subj. of samina or
kumina, ela mucima.
Yeast, w., yisita(Eng.).
Yell, vi., bandalala.
Yellow, adj., kunzuluke, kunzu-
bile, kunze. These are p.p.
of kunzuluka, kunzubila,
kunza, to be yellow.
Yes, adv., e.
See §469.
Yesterday, adv., makelela, ma-
laba.
Yet, not yet to have done, v., use
neg. of anza followed by infin.
§228.
Yield, v. (as potatoes, cassava,
etc.), ika.
(as trees), vt., kuama.
(surrender), vi., hanga, teketa.
Yolk, it., bukulukulu, 6.
Yonder, adv., kuakua, muamua,
haha; aku, amu, aha; kuo-
kuo, muomuo, hoho. § 163,
Notes 3 and 4.
You, pers. pro,
(i) Singular:
(a) As Simple Disjunctive,
wewe. § 105.
(b) Pronominal prefix as subj.,
uorw. §§113,114.
(c) Pronominal infix as direct
or indirect obj., ku. §§ 1 16,
117.
(d) With prepositions, see §§
106 (c), 107.
(e) As Compound Disjunctive,
biebi. §§108,110.
(2) Plural:
(a) As Simple Disjunctive,
nuenu. § 105.
(b) Pronominal prefix as subj.*
nu. § 114.
(c) Pronominal infix as direct
or indirect obj., nu. §§ 1 16,
117.
(d) With prepositions, see §§
106 (c), 107.
(e) As Compound Disjunctive,
bienn. §§ 108, no.
Young, man, n., songaluml, i;
muhiankunde, 2.
of living creature, n., muana, i.
woman, n., songaktkxi, i; mu-
xikankunde, 2.
Younger, adj., -a ku nylina(3).
brother or sister, n., muakunyl, .
I.
of twins, n., nkankn, i.
YOUNGEST— ZIGZAG.
29s
Youngest child, n., muan*a mu-
kala(2).
Your, poss. pro,
(i) Singular, ebl. § 133.
(2) Plural, enu. § 133.
Yours, foss, pro., sing, and pi.
See § 135.
Yourself, pers. pro,
(i) Compound Disjunctive
form, nklyebi. §§ 108, 109.
(2) When reflexive use the re-
flexive prefix of the v., -dl-.
Note that this construction
may be used as subj. or obj.
§118.
(3) See B.L.-Eng. under Ine.
Yourselves, pers. pro.
(i) Compound Disjunctive form,
nklyenu. §§ 108, 109.
(2) When reflexive use the re-
flexive prefix of the v., -di-.
Note that this construction may
Yourselves {continued).
be used either as subj. or obj.
(3) See B.L.-Eng. under ine.
Youth, «. (young man), songa-
lumi, I, muhiankunde, 2.
(young manhood), «., bunsonga-
lumi, 6; bubiankunde, 6.
YOUTHHOOD, n., bunsongalumi, 6;
bubiankunde, 6.
Zealously, adv., bik&le.
Zenith, n., hanktkci ha diulu(5).
Zero, n., cinana, hatuhu. These
are indeclinable.
Zigzag, w.(be crooked), nyon-
goboka, henguluka, kon-
yangala; v/., make, nyongo-
boza, henguluxa.
IL BUHJBA-LULUA-ENGLISH DICTIONARY.
BULUBA-LULUA-ENGLISH DICTIONARY.
-a, ffrep., of. This is the gen^
eral construction for expressing
the English Possessive Case.
§ 87 (<»)•
When foUowed by the infin. it
expresses the idea of purpose
and may be translated by to
^for. |87(/).
This prepostttonal word has the
construction of an adj. and
takes the Secondary Prefixes.
Aba, w., to click (gun).
Abanya, v/., to distribute or divide
up or share among, apportion,
part or separate among.
Abanyansana, v/., to distribute or
divide into shares among each
other.
Abanyina, vt.y to distribute or part
or apportion to, divide up or
separate into shares for.
Abo, poss. pro.y their, theirs. This
refers only to nouns of doss I.
§§133.135- ^ . ,
muan'abo ne, mate, match, 01
same kind or sort or quality or
character or species or variety,
like or similar.
ena muan'abo, to be unlike,
dissimilar.
Abuluka, vi.y to separate (as crowd),
part, divide, branch into dif-
Abuluka (Continued).
ferent directions, diverge, ra-
diate.
Abuluxa, vt.f to separate, divide,
part, apportion, cause to
branch into two parts.
Afunya, vt.y to tickle.
Agusite, n.(Eng.), August (the
month).
Aha, adv.y here (on), yonder, there,
hence, hither, thither, thence.
§ 163, Note 3.
Aka, vt., to gather the leaves of
the cassava or other plants,
also peas; hence to harvest
(peas), reap.
Akana, w., to agree, match, corre-
spond to, be adapted to, be
suitable, be even, to fit, to
suit, be proper; go to meet
and welcome.
Akanangana, v., to agree together,
fit or match or conform to each
other, correspond to, be enough
or adequate or sufficient, suf-
fice, suit, be suitable, be even
or level or exact, be adapted
to, be proper or right.
di diakuakanangana dimue, to
conclude agree, decide, deter-
mine.
The neg. of this word means to
be insufficient, unsuitable.
See note undivt emanagana.
299
300
AKANE— AMBA.
AJcane, adj.(p.p. of akana, to be
fit, etc.), beautiful, pretty,
lovely, fine, good, pure, chaste,
guiltless, virtuous, elegant, ex-
cellent, worthy, fair or hand-
some, fair or just or honest,
correct, fit, suitable, right,
kind, humane, noble, holy,
perfect, righteous, upright,
lawful, rich or fertile or pro-
ductive (soil).
WUh neg. verb: unjust, unkind,
unholy, wrong, not right.
Akidila, vt., to catch or clasp in the
hands or arms, go to meet and
hug or embrace; hence, to
welcome, salute, greet.
Aku, adv., there (at), thence,
thither, yonder. § 1 63, Note 3.
Akuila, v/., to intercede for, advo-
cate for, speak for, plead for.
Akula, v., to speak, talk, utter.
a. biakulakula, to talk nonsense
or incoherently, talk in delir-
ium, wander in mind, babble,
gabble, jabber, prattle.
a. with cidimi(7) or cll&fl(7),
to pronounce or speak badly
or indistinctly.
lekela kuakula, stop talking, be
silent, hush, be quiet, keep
silence, be still.
neg. with bimpe, to speak in-
distinctly.
Note: akula means to speak or
talk, while amba means to
tell, tell about, narrate.
Akaxa, vt., to make to agree, make
to fit, make to match, make
equal or even or exact, fix,
mend, harmonize or tune or
attune, adapt to.
a. me, to resolve, conclude, de-
cide, determine.
a. me hamue, to sing in har-
mony or unison.
Akikxangana, vt., to make to agree
to each other, match each other,
fit each other, make even or ex-
apt, make to suit, adapt to.
Alakana, vi., to be proud, haughty,
vain; vaunt one's self.
Alamanaka, 3, n.(£ng.), almanac.
Alamina, vt., to expect, look for,
lie in wait for.
Aluixa, vt., to recall (cause to re-
turn), put back.
Aluka, vi., to come back, turn
back, go back, retire, return.
Alukila, vi., to come back, turn
back, return, go back, retire.
Alukixa, vt., to send back, bring
back, return, fetch or take
back, recall, restore.
a. bulunda(6), to atone, recon-
cile.
Amba, v. When followed by the
in fin. this word means to be
about to, become, get, intend,
mean, plan, purpose, reckon,
suppose, regard, resolve, con-
clude, decide, determine,
threaten. Hence we have udi
wamba kuya, he is about to
go; cilulu cikadi ciamba
kuflka, the cloth is getting or
becoming black.
a with in fin. and kaba kab&le,
nearly, almost.
Amba, v., to speak, tell, state, say,
command or order, bid, de-
dare, announce, certify, ex-
, claim, explain, think in sense of
fancy or imagine, appoint or
fix a day, talk about, tell about,
narrate, testify, define, de-
scribe, proclaim, publish, re-
late, reply (to a question),
report, respond, utter, assert,
mention.
a. bualu(6) bua Nsambi, to
preach.
a. diambedi bualu kabni
buanza kulua, to foretell,
prophesy, predict.
a. with di or mukenji, to deliver
a message, issue a proclama-
tion or decree.
enza followed by mu- insep.
with proper form of a., to
AMBA— ASA.
301
Amba {Continued).
obey, mind, be obedient, heed,
hearken, observe. § 465.
• neg. and mu- insep. with proper
form of a., to disobey, be dis-
obedient, be heedless, be ob-
stinate, be stubborn, be negli-
gent, be neglectful.
The in fin. kuamba is sometimes
used for sermon, discourse.
Ambakana, v»., to lie on top, be
piled or heaped on top.
Ambakanya, vt., see ambakikza.
Ambakikza, vt.y to add one on top
of the other, lay or put or pile
or heap one on top of the
other.
Ambidila vt., to intercede for,
plead for, speak for.
Ambika, vt.(Buk.), to give, endow,
bestow, grant, offer, present
with, render to.
a. ha, to put on, place on.
Ambila, vt.y to advise, command,
order, bid, counsel, deliver a
message to, direct, discipline,
teach, train, tell to, instruct,
explain to, educate, exhort,
inform, report to, represent to,
say to, speak to, talk to, state
to.
Ambilansana, v., to tell each other.
Ambula, vt., to pick up, get, lift
up, raise up, take up.
Ambuluixa, vt., to help to lift.
Ambulukila, vi.y to scatter or
spread (as contagious dis-
ease).
Ambulula, vt., to raise.
a. di(5), to raise the voice, talk
or speak louder
Ambuluxa, vt.y see ambulula.
Ameleka, n., America.
muena A., an American.
Amu, adv.f there (in), thence,
thither, yonder. § 163, Note 3.
Amua, v., to suck (as child).
Amulxa, vt., to suckle, give suck
to, to nurse.
Andamuka, vi., to change, be
Andamuka (Continued).
changed, turn over or around,
be turned, be transformed, or
transfigured, get or become
(different), come back, be con-
verted, be changed in mind,
return, go back, turn back,
turn into (become).
Andamuna, vt., to change, turn
over or around or inside out,
convert, invert, reverse, trans-
form, transfigure, turn into.
a. muaku(2), to translate, in-
terpret.
a. with m.ucini&(2) ormuoyo(2),
to change one's mind, repent.
Andamuxa, vt., to take back, re-
turn.
Andi, poss. pro., yd pers. sing, of
classes I and III, his, her or
hers, its. §§ 133, 135.
Angacila, v., to begin again, start
over, repeat, recommence.
This word is usually foUowed
by the adv. kabidl.
Angata, vt., to get, lift up, take,
pick up, grasp, receive, ac-
quire, apprehend.
a. dibanKa(5) dia muntu(2), to
be in debt to a person, to owe.
a. difutu, to earn.
Angula, vt., to find by accident and
pick up, take up.
Anza, V. This verb is always fol-
lowed by the in fin. and means
in the a^rmitive to have just
done; the neg. means not yet
to have done. § 228.
amba bualu kabui buansa(e)
kulua, to foretell, predict,
prophesy. Doubtless the p.p.
form buanze would be better
here, also in the following ex-
pression.
muambl wa malu kai mansa(e)
kulua, n.ph., a prophet, seer.
Apila, n.(Eng.), April.
Asa, vt., to hit or shoot one (as with
an arrow), stick into, lance,
spear.
302
ASA— BANGABANGA.
Asa {Continued).
a. with lus&di or lus&la or
luala, to pinch, scratch.
Asa, vt.y to build, construct, erect,
make (as house). This word
means primarily only the driv-
ing of the sticks into the ground^
hut it seems to have the second-
ary and general meanings given
above.
Atuka, vi.y to become poor (as
land), be unproductive.
Aya, vi.y to be sour, be acid.
Baba, i, n., mother, mistress.
baba-muenu, n., mother-in-law
(used either by husband or
wife). PI. is bababa-mnenu.
§ 42, Note 3.
Bab&la, vt., to be warmed or
heated over again (as food).
Baba-muenn, i, n., mother-in-law
(used either by husband or
wife). PI. is bababa-muenu.
§ 42, Note 3.
Bab&xa, vt., to warm or heat over
again (as food).
Babuka, vt.y to be singed or burnt
or scorched.
Babula, v/., to singe, burn, scorch.
Bacika, vt., to mash down flat,
flatten down, level down.
Bakula, vt.^ to seize, grab, snatch.
B&la, vt.y to count, enumerate,
number, read, reckon. This
word also has a figurative
sense to elapse, pass by, in-
tervene.
ena or neg. oj miknya and mona
followed by mua knb&la,
countless, innumerable.
ngondo(3) wakub&la, the moon
has come, has appeared.
Balakana, vi., to be bright, glisten,
glitter, shine, gleam, sparkle.
Balakaxa, vt., to brighten, make to
glisten or shine.
B&le, adj.y !ew, small, little,
minute, diminutive, fine,
scarce, thin, narrow.
See kise.
Baluluka, vi.y to open out, unfold;
hence to bloom, flower.
Balulnla, vt., to magnify (as mi-
croscQpe), lit., to open out,
unfold.
Bamba, vt., to mend, patch, sew
on or put on a patch; lit., to
put on top.
Bambakanya, vt., to join together,
put together, mend, patch,
weld.
Bambakikxa, vt., see bambakanya.
Bambala, vt., to tie down on top
of (as battens on the rafters).
Bambila, vt., to compress, press or
push or shove or squeeze down
upon, cram down together.
Banda, vt., to accuse falsely, blame
or lay blame on falsely, injure,
slander, defame, traduce, be
traitor to, be treacherous
toward, vilify, bear false wit-
ness against, calumniate.
Wakum banda buibi, he ac-
cused me (falsely) of stealing.
Banda, v., to ascend, climb, go up,
rise, arise, mount.
Bandixa, vt., to hoist, lift up, raise
up, elevate.
b. di(5), to talk or speak louder,
raise the voice.
b. difutu(5), to advance wages.
b. muxinga(2), to advance the
price, make the price dear,
increase or put up the price,
make costly or expensive or
precious.
Banga, v., to commence or start cr
begin to do; hence to be be-
trothed to or engaged to or
espoused to. In betrothal the
active forms of this verb refer
to the man, the passive to the
woman.
Bangabanga, adv., long ago, in old
times, once upon a time, re-
BANGABANGA— BI.
303
Bangabanga {Continued) .
mote or distant times, long
since, long time ago.
See kale.
Bangika, vL^ to close or fasten or
latch (as bracelet, lid, etc.).
Bangila, v., to begin at, begin here
or there, commence at, begin
to repeat at, start at.
Bangiza, vt.y to fasten axe, hoe,
etc., in the handle.
Bangaka, vi., to come unfastened
or unlatched.
Bangula, vt.y to cock a gun, open
a bracelet, unlatch, unfasten.
Banji, adj., rich, wealthy.
Banza, vi., to be married, be
brought to home of the groom.
This word is used only by the
bride.
Banzixa, vt., to marry (the rites at
the home of the groom).
See dibansixa.
Batama, vi.y to be flat or level,
crouch, settle or sink down (as
sediment).
Batamixa, vt., to flatten, make
flat, level down, mash down
level.
Batiza, vt., to baptize. Introduced
from Greek.
B&xa, vi.f to fear, cringe, cower,
be frightened or afraid or
fearful or timid or shy or wild.
Generally used of animals.
Be, adv. {postpositive), exceedingly,
very, extra, extremely, exces-
sively, quite, so.
Be, adv. See cinana.
-a b., worthless, inferior, com-
mon, unimportant, useless.
Bedl, adj., first, foremost.
citlla cibedi, first cock to crow
in the morning.
Bela, v.y to ache, hurt, pain, suffer,
be sick or ill or unwell.
inutu(2) mubele, headache.
See sama.
Beia, vt., to warn, admonish, re-
prove, control, correct, man-
Bftla {Continued).
age, discipline, rebuke, scold,
reproach, restrain, govern.
Beia, vt., to crack (as nuts), burst,
shell, hull.
Beleketa, vt., to chew or masticate
or crunch with back teeth.
Benda, vt., to cut the vines for
rubber, make rubber.
Bendama, vi., to have the edge of a
knife bent or made dull.
Bendamixa, vt., to bend the edge
of a knife, hoe, etc.
Bende. An indeclinable nounal
word, apparently pi. of class I.
It is always used in such ex-
pressions as muntu wa bende,
cintu cia bende, etc., mean-
ing the person or thing of
some one else, not one's own,
of some other one, another's.
muntu wa b., a freeman, free-
bom person.
Benga, vt., to abandon, abstain
from, decline, discard, deny,
disapprove of, disobey, rebel
against, revolt, forbid, forsake,
renounce, scorn, spurn, ex-
clude, keep from, neglect,
disown, dissent, object, pro-
hibit, refuse, reject, repudiate,
resist, restrain, be unwilling,
will not, oppose, withstand,
prevent. The past tense, with
following in fin., means would
not.
Benga, vt., to cut in slices, slice.
Bengula, vt., to cut or pare (the
finger nails).
Beta, vt., to pack down, beat down,
pound down (as loose earth
with a stick).
Beula, v., to belch.
Beya, vt., to shave.
Bl, adj., bad, dirty, foul, unclean,
soiled, filthy, immoral, impure,
disreputable, nasty, naughty,
base, vicious, corrupt, wicked,
evil, unkind, unjust, profane,
repulsive, repugnant, sinful,
3^4
BI— BITULU.
Bl {Continued).
vile, ugly, unholy, unrighteous,
unwholesome.
muntu mubl, sinner, trans-
gressor, rascal, villain. The
plurals mabl and mlbl, with pi.
of bualu and muanda under-
stood, mean guilt, sin, iniquity,
evil, transgression.
B1-, insep. verbal prefix with force
of sub. conj., if; with neg. the
meaning is if not, unless, ex-
cept. §§ 459» 460.
Bl, neg. adv.{B\ik.)y no.
Bl- (followed insep. by poss. pro.),
Compound Disjunctive pers.
pro. See § no.
Blakane, adv., well, correctly, dis-
tinctly, carefully, right, rightly.
See blmpe.
Blbl, adv., badly, carelessly, rough-
ly, wrongly, wrong.
enza or osa or klxa with b., to
err, sin, transgress, do wrong.
enzela, b., to injure, harm, do
wrong to.
Blclcl, pi. of 7, «.(Buk.), tall grass.
Bldl, adj., two. Takes Secondary
Prefixes.
Bidla, pi. of 7, »., bread, food,
*'chop," feast, meal, nourish-
ment, victuals. This word
generally refers only to bread,
but it may also have a wider
significance, as above indi-
cated.
b. bla with butuku or dilolo,
supper.
b. bla dlbanzlxa, marriage or
wedding feast.
b. bla dlnda, breakfast.
b. bla mampa, light bread
(made from wheat flour).
b. bla with munda munya or
hankucl, dinner.
b. bla Nzambl, communion.
Lord's Supper.
clanza cla. b., right hand.
Blka, vi., to get up, arise, rise, stand
up, depart, start out, set out.
Blka (Continued).
b. ku lufu, to arise or rise from
the dead.
b. ku tulu, to arise or awake
from sleep.
Blkftle, adv., firmly, strongly, fast,
tightly, vigorously, violently,
zealously, carelessly, loud
(speaking).
Blklla, vt., to call, name, hale, in-
voke, summon.
Blla, vi., to boil (as water), roar
(as cataract).
Bllengele, adv., well, correctly, dis-
tinctly, carefully, right, rightly.
See blmpe.
Blmpe, adv., carefully, gently, cor-
rectly, earhestly, well, thor-
oughly, right, rightly, dis-
tinctly (to speak).
h.' followed by in fin., ought, be
under obligation to do, be
right to, be duty to do, de-
serve, merit.
Blnga, vi., to be acquitted, be de-
clared guiltless or innocent, be
justified, be vindicated, gain
or win a bet.
Blnglla, v., to cry out in amaze-
ment or astonishment, give
alarum, shout, cheer, sound an
alarm.
Blnglxa, vt., to acquit, let go
free, declare guiltless, justify,
pronounce innocent, vindi-
cate.
Blntampl, pi. of 7, n., marsh, mud,
Inortar, mire, swamp.
Blntocl, pi. of 7, n., mud, marsh,
mire, swamp, mortar.
Blola, v., to belch.
Blt&hl, pi. of 7, n., mud, marsh,
swamp, mortar, mire.
Blt&hlkldl, pi. of 7, «., mud,
marsh, swamp, mortar, mire.
Bltekete, adv., carefully, gently, at
slow pace, quietly, slowly,
softly, patiently.
Bltulu, adv., carefully, gently,
patiently, slowly, softly.
BIXA— BUALU.
30s
Blxa, vt., to lift up, raise up, ele-
vate, hoist, rouse up, arouse.
b. ku lufu, to resurrect (from the
dead).
b. ku tulu, to awake, awaken,
wake.
Blxe, adj., green, raw, unripe, new,
fresh (as uncooked meat), un-
cooked.
lela kabixe, to miscarry, give
birth to immature or still-born
child or foetus, abort.
Note the word bixika.
Bixl? interrog adv., how? what?
what is the matter? for what
cause or reason or purpose?
why? §§ 177, 420, 411.
bule b.7 how far ? how long?
bungi b.7 how many? how
much?
Bixika, vi., to be green or unripe or
fresh or uncooked.
Bobo, pers. pro., yd pi. of class I,
they. § 105.
Bola, vi.j to rot, go bad, decay,
decompose, be corrupt, be
rotten, be foul or spoiled or
tainted or putrid, putrefy, be
damp or wet or moist or
soaked.
Bolexa, v/., to putrefy, taint, cor-
rupt, spoil, cause to rot or
decay, dampen, wet, moisten.
Bomba, z^., to comfort, to caress,
fondle, apologize, console,
cheer up, soothe, solace. This
word is used when one has
accidentally struck another and
wishes to comfort him so he will
not fight.
Bombama, vi., to be wet or damp
or moist or soaked.
Bombeka, vt.y to wet, dampen,
moisten, soak.
Bombelela, vi., to creep or move
stealthily or slowly or softly,
sneak.
Bosa, vt., to crack (as nuts), burst,
shell, hull.
Bota, vi.y to be fine or powdered.
Botexa, vt.y to powder, pulverize,
grind or pound or crush or
beat fine; hence to chew, mas-
ticate.
Boya, vt.j to cake up or gather up
in the hand and put in an-
other place (as trash), clear
away.
Bu, prep.y like to, such as, equal
to, of same or similar kind or
sort or quality or character or
species or variety; hence used
in expressing such ideas as
mate, match.
dl b., to correspond to, resemble,
match.
ena b., to be unlike or uneven or
different or dissimilar or un-
equal, differ.
Bu, sub. conj.y if; in neg. construc-
tions it has the meaning of if
not, unless, except. §§ 459 (c),
460 (c).
Bu-, insep. subordinating particle
used with Applied Form of verb,
therefore, consequently, hence,
for this reason, so, then, where-
fore, why. Bualur6) is doubt-
less understood. §§472 (e)(3),
419.
Bua, sub. conj., because, since, for.
Doubtless bualu(6) is under-
stood. § 466.
Bua, vt.j to daub, plaster.
Buakane, 6, n., goodness, excel-
lence, purity, holiness, ele-
gance, handsomeness, beauty,
fairness (in color or in honor),
honesty, integrity, justice,
righteousness, sanctification,
uprightness, virtue, worthi-
ness, right.
Buala, neg., adv. no.
Bualabuala, 6, n. (Buk.), see buli-
lela.
Bualama, adv., backwards. Used
only in sense 0) fall backwards.
Bualu, 6, »., affair, business, care,
concern, responsibility, case
(law), cause, purj)ose, reason,
3o6
BUALU— BUBT.
Bualu (Continued).
matter, object, effect, result,
sake, subject, circumstance,
source, fault, palaver, danger,
harm, difficulty, deed, doctrine,
fact, account, narrative, dis-
course.
-a b. bukftle, sacred, holy,
serious.
b. bua or bua, because of, on
account of, concerning.
b. bua kukfima, miracle, wonder.
b. bua Nzambi, Christianity, the
Gospel, the Christian religion.
b. bubi, guilt, sin, iniquity,
transgression, injustice, wrong,
vice, trouble, tribulation, mis-
fortune, disaster, affliction,
calamity, evil.
b. bulmpe followed by infin.y
ought to, be under obligation
to do, it is right to do, duty to
do, deserve, merit.
b. bukftle, a serious matter.
b. buk&le with Causative Form
of verb, must, have to, had to,
be necessary, be a necessity.
b. bunlne, importance.
b. W? what is the matter ? what
is the palaver? why? what
for?
dl b. bua, to be responsible for.
dl ne muntu b., to have a com-
plaint against one.
kakuena b., it is no matter, no
palaver, never mind, no con-
sequence, all right.
lumbulula b., to settle a palaver,
to judge.
muambl wa b. bua Nzambi,
priest, preacher, minister, mis-
sionary.
muena inalu(pl.) mabl, sinner,
transgressor.
mukelenge wa bambi ba b. bua
Nzambi, high-priest.
mAnylxa or lylxa or ibldlxa with
b. bubl, to entice, lead astray,
lure, allure, tempt, seduce.
Buana, 6, n., childhood, infancy.
Buanda, 6, n., thread, cotton;
hence hammock.
Buandakana, vi.y to be confused or
perplexed or bewildered or
confounded or disconcerted, be
mixed up, be deranged, be in
disorder.
Buandakanya, vt., see buanda*
kOxa.
Buandakaxa, vt., to confuse, per-
plex, bewilder, confotind, mix,
stir together, mingle up to-
gether, derange, put in dis-
order.
Buandulula, vt., to stir together,
mingle, mix up together.
Buanga, 6, n., medicine, remedy,
charm, fetish, idol or image in-
tended as a charm.
b. bua mulungu, poison.
b. bua ns&mu, a charm for
making one invisible.
b. bua ntulxa, a charm for
making one invulnerable.
mpQka manga(pl.) or mubtkkl
wa manga, a doctor, medicine
man, diviner, physician, sor-
cerer, conjurer, charm • or
fetish or idol or medicine
maker.
xiha or talQxa with b., to destroy
the power of a medicine or
charm or fetish.
Buanjl, 6, n., acidity, sourness.
dl ne b., to be acid or sour.
Buatu, 6, n., boat, canoe, ship.
Bub&le, 6, »., littleness, scarcity,
dearth, fewness, smallness,
small size, thinness, narrow-
ness.
See buklse
Bubanjl, 6, n., riches, wealth,
richness.
lulxa b., to enrich.
Bubedl, 6, n., sickness, illness,
malady, disease, affliction,
pain, bad health, pang, sufifer-
ing.
See disama.
Bubl, 6, n., badness, corruption.
BUBI— BUFUBA.
307
Bubi (continued)
evil, impurity, guilt, sin, viae,
iniquity, transgression, wicked-
ness, injustice, wrong, sinful-
ness, vileness, ugliness, un-
cleanness, dirtiness, unholiness,
urrighteousness, viciousness,
rascality.
Bubidi, 6, n.{derived from num.
Ibidi, two), both, a couple, two
and two, double, all too.
§ 95 (»)•
Bubuluke, 6, ra., craziness, insanity,
dementia, madness, lunacy,
idiocy, viciousness, violence,
wildness, foolishness.
b. maluvu, drunkenness, intoxi-
cation, dissipation.
Bubuta, v.y to feel after, grope
(as one blind).
Buclka, 6, 1 edge, border, limit,
margin, boundary, side, bank
or beach or shore or coast.
Bucimbakane, 6, n., see bucimbe.
Bucimbe, 6, »., stupidity, folly,
foolishness, acting foolishly.
Budlml, 6, n.y farm, Seld, garden,
plantation.
b. bua mioxl ya followed by
maluvu a mputu or vinyo,
n.ph., vineyard.
Budimu, 6, ra., craftiness, cunning-
ness, slyness, prudence, warn-
ing, shrewdness, sharpness,
wiliness, sagacity, subtlety,
skill, skilfulness, precaution.
-a b., crafty, cunning, prudent,
shrewd, sharp, sagacious, sly,
subtle, wily, artful, skilful.
Budlxikamine, 6, »., liberty, free-
dom, the state of being free.
Buela, vi.f to enter, pass in, pene-
trate, unite with, join, come
or go or get in or into.
b. munda, to test, try, tempt,
make trial of.
diba dikadl dlbuela, the sun
is about to set, be sunset.
kutu kuabuela diba or kutu
diba diabuela, west.
Buel&fl, 6, ra., bad aim (gun).
Buelakana, vi., to be mixed, be
intermingled, be mingled, in-
termingle, commingle, mingle,
be joined together (of same
party), unite with, join, crowd
together, be disarranged, be
out of order, be in disorder, be
deranged.
BuelakQxa, vt., to mix up, min-
gle, put out of order, crowd
together, intermingle, disar-
range.
Buenyi, 6, n., a visit. .
enda b., to visit, go visiting.
Buexa, v/., to drive in, put in,
place in, take in.
b. ku mudlmu, to hire, engage,
give work, employ.
b. mu, to load (as boat), insert.
b. mu buhika, to enslave.
b. munxl mua, to put or place
under.
b. mu nsubu wa maxika, to
imprison.
b. mu followed by name of officey
to appoint or give an office to,
make, elect, confer office on.
Bakumubuexa mu buke-
lenge, they made him chief.
Buexakana, vt.y to mix up, mingle,
intermingle, crowd together,
derange, put out of order, put
in disorder, disarrange.
Buflke, 6, n.f blackness, unclean-
ness, dirtiness, darkness
(color).
Buflnu, 6, «., slipperiness, sleek-
ness, smoothness, a slip by
accident.
-a b., slippery, sleek, smooth.
Bufofo, 6, n.y bHndness.
Bufuba, 6, n.f idleness, laziness,
indolence, sluggishness, slow-
ness, lethargy, sloth, worth-
lessness.
-a b., idle, lazy, indolent, trifling,
slothful, worthless.
ena ne b., to be diligent or indus-
trious or energetic or faithful.
3o8
BUFUKU— BUINA.
Bufuku, 6, n., night, at night, by
night, to-night, night-time.
See butuku.
Buhale, 6, n., craziness, insanity,
dementia, madness, lunacy,
idiocy, viciousness, violence,
wildness, foolishness.
b. maluvu, drunkenness, intoxi-
cation, dissipation.
Bubele, 6, n., poverty, destitution,
need, want, penury.
lulxa or xixa with mu b., to
impoverish.
Buhlankunde, 6, n., youth, young
manhood, boyhood, youth-
hood, adolescence.
Buhianyi, 6, n., inheritance, legacy,
portion, heritage.
ha b., to bequeath, endow, leave
(for heir).
mukanda wa b., will, testament.
Sometimes the ph. blntu bia
buhianyi is used with same
meaning as buhianyi ahne.
Buhidla, 6, n., insubordination,
disobedience, disapproval, re-
fusal, obstinacy, stubbornness,
refractoriness, wilfulness, un-
belief, negligence, neglectful-
ness.
-a b., insubordinate, disobedient,
obstinate, stubborn, refrac-
tory, unmanageable, unruly,
intractable, wilful, negligent,
neglectful.
muena b., unbeliever.
Buhika, 6, n., slavery, bondage,
subjection.
ha or buexa mu or luixa followed
by b., to enslave.
Buhikudi, 6, n., the goods with
which one is redeemed, re-
demption price.
Buhote, 6, »., stupidity, ignorance,
folly, foolishness.
Buhu, 6, n.y seed (for planting).
Buhumbakane, 6, n., stupidity,
foolishness, folly, acting fool-
ishly.
Buibi, 6, »., theft, thievishness,
Buibi (continued).
roguishness, robbery, dishon-
esty, injustice.
di ne b., to be thievish or
roguish or dishonest or unjust.
ena ne b., to be honest or just.
Buici, 6, n.y honey. Sometimes
spelled buiki.
Buihi, 6, n., nearness, short dis-
tance, closeness, sharpness, di-
mension or extent or extension
(in breadth).
ha b. ha (or ne), beside, near to,
close to.
mu (or ku), b. breadth, width.
Buika, vt.y to dose or shut (the
eyes).
Buikila, vt.f to cover, close or shut
(as lid of box or book), lay
something over, shelter by
covering, put cover on, spread
over.
BuikQxa, 6, n., see bulilela.
Buila, 6, n., forgetfulness.
-a b., forgetful.
b. as suhj. o) kuata, to forget.
Buiminyi, 6., n, stinginess, parsi-
mony, selfishness, meanness as
result of stinginess.
-a b., stingy, selfish, parsimo-
nious, mean.
Buimpe, 6, n., goodness, excel-
lence, purity, holiness, elegance,
handsomeness, beauty, fair-
ness (in color or in honor),
honesty, integrity, justice,
righteousness, sanctification,
uprightness, virtue, worthi-
ness, right.
Buina, prep.f like to, such as, equal
to, of same or similar kind or
sort or quality or character or
species or variety; hence used
in expressing such ideas as
mate, match.
di b., to correspond to, resemble,
match.
ena b., to be unlike or uneven
or different or dissimilar or
unequal, differ.
BUINA— BUKULUKUXE.
309
Buina, 6, «., hole of rat or mouse,
den. FL is mena.
Buinabulna, 6, n., see bulilela.
Buivl, 6, n., theft, thievishness,
roguishness, robbery, dishon-
esty, injustice.
dl ne b., to be roguish Or thievish
or dishonest or unjust.
ena ne b., to be honest or just.
Bujlke, 6, «., the unmarried state,
bachelorship, maidenhood, vir-
ginity.
Bujitu, 6, ra., heaviness, weight;
sometimes used for load, bur-
den,
-a b., heavy, weighty.
Idlkixa or elekexa wilh b., to
weigh.
Buka, v.f to consult a medicine
man, divine, enchant, conjure.
Buka, vi., to fly, take flight or rise
in flight (as bird).
BAka, vt.y to marry, wed. This
word is used only by the man.
See note under marry.
Buk&le, 6, n., strength, ability,
energy, firmness, force, hard-
ness, influence, might, power,
vigor, stability, solidness, so-
lidity, violence, health.
-a b., healthy, strong, vigorous,
well.
cianza cia b., right hand.
ena ne b., to be delicate, be not
strong.
hita or tamba with b., to con-
quer, beat, defeat, overcome,
overthrow, excel, win, master,
prevail, be victorious, quell,
repulse, subdue, subject, sub-
jugate, vanquish.
kuata mukjlxl ku b., to commit
rape, ravish, do violence to.
ku b., by force, violently.
Bukanda^ 6, n., enema. A small
gour d is used for this pur-
pose,
ela b., to give an enema.
Biikansana, v., to intermarry.
Bukankanya. vt., to shake up.
Bukata, 6, «., idleness, laziness,
indolence, sluggishness, slow-
ness, lethargy, sloth, worthless-
ness.
-a b., idle, lazy, indolent, trifling,
slothful, worthless.
ena ne b., to be diligent or in-
dustrious or energetic or faith-
ful.
Bukelenge, 6. »., kingship, chief-
ship, high rank, kingdom,
government, dominion, rule,
authority
dia b., to become chief, succeed
to chiefship.
dtxa b., to elect or appoint to
chiefship, confer chiefship on.
Buklse, 6, »., littleness, smallness,
scarcity, dearth, fewness, thin-
ness, narrowness, small size.
mu {or ku) b., breadth, width.
Bukltu, 6, w., bravery, courage,
fortitude, boldness, valor.
See dlkima.
Btlklxa, vt.f to give in marriage,
marry one to.
Bukonde, i, n., brother-in-law,
sister-in-law. This word al-
ways means the brother or
sister of the wife^ never the
brother or sister of husband,
PL is babukonde.
Bukoya, 6, n., dirtiness, filthihess,
untidiness, unclean ness, foul-
ness, slovenliness.
-a b., dirty, filthy, untidy, un-
clean, foul, slovenly.
Buku, 6, »., the state or condition
of being a mother-in-law or '
father-in-law.
blntu bia b., dowry given at
marriage by husband to pa-
rents of bride.
Bukula, 6, »., flour, meal.
Bukulu, 6, n., old age.
Bukulukulu, 6, n., yolk of an
egg.
Bukulukulu, 6, n.y old age.
BukulukQxe, 6, n,, old age.
-a b., old, aneient.
3IO
BUKULUMPE— BULUKANA.
Bukulumpe, 6., n, old age.
-a b., old, ancient.
Bukunze, 6, n., redness.
Bukuondo, 6, n., net for catching
^h or animals, cobweb.
Bukutu, 6, n.y foreskin.
dl ne b., to be uncircumcised.
Bukaxl, 6, »., womanhood.
Bula, 6, «., yard, enclosure, court,
fold, stockade.
nyama wa ku b, domestic
animal.
Bula, vL, to crack (as nuts), burst,
shell, hull.
Bulalu, 6, n., bed, couch.
Bula Mutadi, n. (Lower Congo),
the Congo Independent State
and all government officials.
Bulanda, 6, »., poverty, need, want,
penury, destitution.
luixa or xixa mu wUh b., to
impoverish.
Bule, 6, n., length, deepness, depth,
hcijht, altitude, tallness, dis-
tance (long), dimension or ex-
tent or extension in length or
height or depth.
b. bumue, equal or even length.
b. munyl ? how far?
Buledl, 6, «., the power or capacity
to give birth to or bear young,
child-bearing, fruitfulness, fe-
cundity.
dl ne b., to be fruitful or fertile
or prolific or fecund or pro-
ductive (as male or female in
producing young).
Bulengele, 6, n., goodness, excel-
lence, purity, holiness, elegance,
handsomeness, beauty, fair-
ness (in c6lor or in honor),
honesty, integrity, justice,
righteousness, sanctification,
uprightness, virtue, worthiness,
right.
Bulllela, 6, n., truth, fact, cer-
tainty, correctness, exactness,
reality, veradty.
-a b., real, true.
This word has an adv^bicU use
BuIUela (continued).
of certainly, correctly, indeed,
absolutely, truly, truthfully,
exactly, really, surely, verily.
With neg. verbs we have the mean-
ing to be in doubt, be doubtful
or uncertain or untrue.
Bulobo, 6, n., earth, land, ground,
soil, world.
b. budl with butaka or bucika,
ph. used jor earthquake.
dikumbi dia b., railway train.
nxila wa dikumbi dla b., rail-
way track.
The pi. is generally used to ex-
press loose earth or dirt -
ground. This word has rr. e
properly the meaning o) land
a5 distinguished from water.
Buloxi, 6, n.f witchcraft, sorcery.
This word has a secondary
meaning of cleverness, ingen-
iousness, dexterity, ingenuity,
skill, skilfulness.
dl ne b., clever, ingenious,
:iLilful.
muena b., witch, wizard, demon,
devil, conjurer, sorcerer.
Sometimes this word is pro-
nounced muloxi(2).
Buluatafl, 6, n., slovenliness or
immodesty or shamelessness or
indecency in the wearing of
one's clothes. § 356 (^).
-a b., slovenly or mdecent or
immodest or shameless or
obscene in the wearing of one's
clothes.
Buluka, vi., to bark (as dog).
b. dl(5), to speak or talk loudly
or roughly.
Buluka, vi.y to get or become or go
or be crazy or deranged or
insane, be demented, be foolish,
be mad, be wild, be reckless,
be vicious, be violent, be
thoughtless.
b. maluvu, to be drunk or in-
toxicated.
Bulukana(?), vi., to be narrow.
BULXJKE— BUNINE.
3"
Buluke, adj.{p.p. of buluka, to be
crazy), crazy, deranged, de-
mented, foolish, mad, in-
sane, wild, reckless, thought-
less, vicious, violent.
Buluklla, 'z;/., to scold; hence second-
arily to govern, control, re-
buke, admonish, discipline,
correct, manage, reprove, re-
proach, restrain.
This word is sometimes pro-
nounced kubulukila.
Bulula, vt., to open, expose to
view, relax, remove cover, un-
cover, reveal.
Bululu, 6, «., bitterness.
dl b., to be bitter.
Bulumi, 6, n., manhood.
Bulunda, 6, »., friendship, fellow-
ship, companionship, federa-
tion.
aluklxa b., to reconcile.
kuatangana b., to form a friend-
ship with one another.
xiha b., to break off friendship.
Bulunga, vi., to be round or
spherical.
Bulunguxa, vt.y to make into a
ball, make round.
Bumbuka, vi., to cave in, fall in.
Bundu, 6, n., shame, bashfulness,
timidity, shyness, diflfidence,
modesty, humility, chagrin, re-
pentance, penitence, reproach,
disgrace.
bualu bua b., a shameful matter.
di ne or unva or ufua with b.
05 ohj.y or b. as suhj. of kuata,
to be ashamed, be bashful,
be diffident, be modest, be
humble, be mortified, be
humiliated, be abased, have
chagrin, be penitent, be shy,
qe timid.
ena ne b., to be immodest, be
shameless, be impertinent, be
saucy, be impudent, be in-
decent, be obscene, be arro-
gant, be audacious.
ufulxa or kuaclxa with b., to
Bundu {continued).
disgrace, mortify, chagrin, hu-
miliate, cause shame, abase'
Bufumu, 6, »., chiefship, king-
ship, high rank, kingdom,
government, dominion, rule,
authority.
See bukelenge.
Bunga, vt.iwith tulu, sleep, as
obj.), to doze, nod, nap, be
drowsy.
b. disu, to wink at.
Bungama, vi., to mope, despond,
be depressed, be despondent,
brood over, pine, pout, be
sulky, be sullen, sulk, be
morbid, be solemn, be pen-
sive.
Bungi, 6, n.ijrom adj. ngl, many),
abundance, a great deal, mul-
titude, throng, great number,
plenty, host, crowd, great
quantity, vastness in number.
-a b., much, numerous, many,
abundant, plentiful, divers,
enough, plenty of, several,
vast number.
b. bumue, the saine or even or
equal number.
b. munyl? (or blxl?), how
many? how much? what
quantity ?
dl -a b., to abound, suffice, be
enough, be sufficient, be ade-
quate.
ena -a b., to be insufficient, be
short of.
tamba or hita with b., to be in
excess, over- abound, be too
much, be too many.
Bunguluka, vi.f to roll along or
over, wallow.
Bunlne, 6, n., largeness, magnitude,
great size, vastness, greatness,
stoutness, breadth, width,
thickness, dimension or ex-
tension or extent in breadth,
influence, importance, glory.
b. bumue, even or equal or the
same size.
3"
BUNINE— BUTOMBOKE.
Bunlne (continued).
mu b.) in among, in the middle,
in the midst, in the center.
Bunsongakiixl, 6, n., girlhood,
maidenhood, virginity, young
womanhood.
Bunsongaluml, 6, n., young man-
hood, youth, boyhood, youth-
hood, adolescence.
Bunsonge, 6, ra., slander, back-
biting, calumny. From son-
guela, to slander.
muena b., slanderer, backbiter,
calumniator.
Buntate, 6., n., cobweb.
Buntu, 6, ra., humanity (human
nature), manhood.
Bununu, 6, n., old age.
Bunvu, 6, »., shame, bashfulness,
timidity, shyness, diffidence,
modesty, humility, chagrin, re-
pentence, penitence, reproach,
disgrace.
See bundu.
Bunya, v/., to bend, fold.
Bunyabunya, 6, n.()rom nya-nya,
small), smallness, littleness,
thinness, small size, fewness,
scarcity, dearth.
See buklse.
Bunyana, 6, w., friendship, fellow-
ship, companionship, federa-
tion.
kuatangana b., to form a friend-
ship with one another.
xlba b., to break off friendship.
Bunyengi, 6, n., robbery.
Buobumue, 6, n., sameness, simi-
larity, identity, likeness, unity,
similitude. § 96.
Buongo, 6, n.y brains, marrow.
Buonso, 6, w., totality, entirety, full
amount, altogether, the whole
of, all of or every one of or
each one of them (followed by
poss. pro. § 182, Rem.)
Buowa, 6, n.y awe, dread, fear,
fright, horror, terror, wildness,
shyness, timidity. Hence
secondarily cowardice.
Bouwa (continued),
b. CLS sub. of kuata with person
as obj.y to be frightened, be
scared, be timid, be shy,
afraid, be fearful.
muena b., a coward.
Buowa, 6, n.y mushroom.
Buselu, 6, n.y sleekness, slipped-
ness, smoothness.
-a b., sleek, slippery, smooth.
Busenu, 6, n.(jrom senena, to be
sleek), sleekness, smoothness,
slipperiness, softness to touch.
-a b., sleek, slippery, smooth,
soft.
Buta, 6, n.y bow (for shooting
arrows). This word is some-
times used for gun.
Butaka, 6, n., nakedness, nudity.
dl b., to be naked or nude.
Butama, vi.y to crouch, be flat,
settle or sink or level down.
Butamixa, vt.y to flatten, make flat,
level down, mash down level.
Butatande, 6, n., cobweb.
Bute, 6, n.y used with muan*a
to mean' first-bom or oldest
child, senior. PI. is bamuan'a
bute.
bintu bia muan*a b., birthright.
Bute, 6, n.(from ta, to hunt),
hunting (of animals).
muxlnga wa b., a hunting net,
net for catching animals.
Butekete, 6, n., weakness, exhaus-
tion, feebleness, fatigue, in-
firmity, weariness, tiredness,
slowness, slackness, softness.
Buteyi, 6, w., trap or snare for
catching animals; secondarily
wile, allurement, enticement.
Butoke, 6, n.y whiteness, bright-
ness, fairness, purity, clean-
ness, sanctification.
Butomboke, 6, n.y craziness, in-
sanity, dementia, madness,
lunacy, idiocy, viciousness,
violence, wildness, foolishness.
b. maluvu, drunkenness, intoxi-
cation, dissipation.
BUTU— CIANYIMA.
313
Butu, 6, n., mould, mildew.
kuata b., to mould, mildew.
Butue, 6, n.y ashes.
Butuku, 6, n.y night, at night, by
night, to-night, night-time.
bldia bla b., supper.
b. bua lelu, last night.
b. to ne wUh lunkelu or dlnda,
all night long.
b. as st3)j. of cla, to break day,
be dawn, become light, the
coming of the morning, the
going of the night.
b. as subj. of 11a, the coming
of the night.
Buxlb&le, 6, n.y stupidity, folly,
foolishness, ignorance.
Buxlkankunde, 6, »., maidenhood,
girlhood, virginity, young
womanhood.
Buxlma, 6, ra., totality, entirety,
the whole.
Buxua, 6, n.y see bulUela.
Buyuka, vi.j to be soft (as some-
thing rotten).
Busevu, 6, n.y at, swelling in feet
and legs, dropsy, elephantiasis.
This word is derived from
nsevu, elephant.
C.
Caba, vt.y to break up firewood.
Cendelele, adv.y always, cease-
lessly, constantly, continually,
endlessly, eternity, ever, for-
ever, perpetually, eternally, in-
cessantly, habitually.
-a c, immortal, eternal, ever-
lasting.
with neg. v., never again.
Cly interrog, pro. y see cinyi? §175,
Rem. 2.
Cla, vi.y used with butuku as subj.
to mean the disappearing of
the night at dawn, break day,
dawn, become light, the com-
ing of the morning.
Cladl, 7, n.y chest, bosom, breast.
Clahamue, 7, n., used as adv.y at
one time, at the same time,
simultaneously. § 95 (6),
Rem. 2.
Clakabldl, 7, n.y second time.
§ 95 W.
blakabldl(/>/.), twice.
Clakamue, 7, n. used as adv.y once,
one time. §95 {b).
Clakas&tu, 7, n., third time.
§95(6)-
blaka8&tu(/>/.), thrice.
Clakullu, 7, n.y language, idiom,
dialect, speech.
Clakulakula, 7, n., chattering,
gibberish, nonsense. §356(^).
akula blakulakula, to talk in
delirium or incoherently, wan-
der in mind, babble, gabble,
jabber, prattle.
Clala, 7, n.y a small piece of iron
put in the eye as test of guilt,
ordeal.
muena c., diviner, doctor, sor-
cerer.
nua c, to consult or divine by
this ordeal, enchant.
Clala, 7, n.y thumb.
Clama, 7, »., a general term
applied to any kind of metallic
substance; also a general
name for any kind of machine
or mill or tool or implement
or instrument.
c. clflke, iron.
c. clkunze, copper, brass.
See note under cx)PPER.
Clamakana, vi.y to cross (as one
path another), lie across.
ClamakCkxa, vt.y to put or lay
one thing across another,
cross.
Clamumue, 7, n., used as adv.y at
at one time, at same time,
simultaneously. § 95 (6),
Rem. 2.
Clana, 7, n.y used in ph. c. cla
nkCksa, great toe.
Clanga, 7, n., a species of snake.
Clanylma, adv.y backwards.
3U
CIANZA— CIB UEDELU.
Clansa, 7, n., hand.
-a c. clkille, selfish, stingy,
parsimonious.
c. cla with bakaxl or luboko or
munylnyl, left hand.
c. cia with balumi or bldia or
bukftle, right hand.
c. cikftle, selfishness, stinginess,
parsimony.
dl ne bianza bile, to be dis-
honest, be unjust, be thievish,
be roguish.
ena ne blansa bile, to be honest,
be just.
Ciata, 7, »., mat made of papyrus.
Ciaxima, 7, n., chilliness, coldness,
coolness, dampness, moisture,
wetness, humidity.
di ne c., to be chilly, be cold,
be cool, be damp, be moist,
be wet, be humid.
Cibakala, 7, n., a small rodent.
Cib&lu, 7, w., a gourd split length-
wise and used for holding the
cooked bread.
ngondo wakulua c., to be full
moon.
Cibanda, 7, »., valley, vale, hollow.
Cibanda, 7, »., large horse-fly.
Cibandilu, 7, n., ladder, stairway,
steps.
Cibansa, 7, »., chin, lower jaw.
Cibangu, 7, n., walking-stick, cane,
staff.
endela ku c, to walk with a
staff.
Cibangu, 7, n., scar, mark left
from sore, pock-mark, cica-
trice.
Clbanji, 7, w., intermediary or
middleman or go-between in
arranging a marriage.
Clb&sa, 7, »., a piece of board put
under a long basket to support
it.
Cibelu, 7, «., upper leg (from hip
to knee), upper part of hind
leg of animal, thigh.
ha blbelu, lap.
Cibende, 7, n., a small rodent.
Cibengu, 7, n., insubordination,
disobedience, disapproval, re-
fusal, obstinacy, stubbornness,
refractoriness, wilfulness, neg-
ligence, neglectfulness, heed-
lessness.
-a c, insubordinate, disobe-
dient, obstinant, stubborn, re-
fractory, unmanageable, un-
ruly, intractable, wilful, negli-
gent, neglectful, heedless.
Clbi, 7, «., door, gate.
Cibidi, 7, n.{th€ Bakite say kibidi),
farm, field, garden, planta-
tion.
See budlmi.
Ciblkidilu, 7, »., the name of
anything.
Clbila, 7, n.ifrom blla, to boil),
cataract, falls, rapids,* water-
falls.
CibllO) 7, n., custom, habit, manner
or method of doing, mode,
nature of, conduct, law, fashion,
way, practice, regulation, rule,
style, usage.
c. clbi, vice, bad habit.
Ciblylblyl, 7, «., butterfly, moth.
Cibobo, 7, n.y whistling through the
hands.
ela c., to whistle through the
hands.
Clboko, 7, «., left-handedness.
muena c., a left-banded person.
Cibombo, 7, n.y bag, pocket, sack,
scrip.
Cibombo, 7, n., lameness in the
legs of children, deformed
person.
Cibondo, 7, n., snout.
Cibuabu, 7, n., the older or first-
bom of twins.
Cibubu, 7, n., scabbard, sheath,
case for knife.
Cibubu, 7, n.y pith of palm rib.
Cibubu, 7, n.y clapping of the hands
crosswise to express regret.
Cibudi, 7, n.y scrotum.
Clbuedelu, 7, »., entrance, door-
way.
CXBUIKILU— CIFU.
31s
Clbulkllu, 7, n.y a cover, lid, cork
or stopper.
Clbuiku, 7, n.y see clbulkllu.
Cibuka, vi.y to be broken, de-
molished, destroyed, fractured,
to explode.
Cibula, vL, to break, break up or
open, demolish, destroy, frac-
ture, open (a tin).
Ctbula, 7, «., wrestling. PI.
generally used,
luangana bibula, to wrestle.
Clbulubulu, 7, n.y a dried gourd.
Clbulula, vt., to double back, fold
back.
Cibulunge, 7, n.(Jrom bulunga, to
be round), ball, globe, sphere.
-a c, round, spherical.
Cibunda, 7, «., garden or small
patch about the house in
which vegetables are planted.
This is the proper word for
garden as generally used by
Europeans and not budiml or
clbidl.
CibungubunflTU, 7, n., high bank or
cliff or precipice near to stream,
brink.
Cibutuilu, 7, w., womb(?).
Cibuyubuyu, 7, »., high cliff or
precipice due to landslide.
Cicl, 7, n., used in ph. kosa del,
to close a trade by breaking a
stick.
Clcu, 7, n.y insubordination, dis-
obedience, obstinacy, heed-
lessness, refractoriness, stub-
bornness, wilfulness, neglect-
fulness, negligence.
-a c, disobedient, obstinant,
heedless, refractory, stubborn,
unmanageable, unruly, intract-
able, wilful, insubordinate,
neglectful, negligent.
Cldl, vi.y to be, exist. See § 212.
c. ne, to have, own, possess.
Cldl, 7, n.y a jump (with both feet
generally).
Cidlacila, 7, «., footprint, track,
trace, trail, mark, made by foot.
Cidibu, 7, »,. a wooden rattle tied
around the dog's body in
hunting.
Cldldl, 7, «., division or partition
in house.
CidlkixUa, 7, n.y example, sample,
specimen, copy, model, pat-
tern, illustration; hence a rule
or ruler or measure or tape
line, i.e., something to go by
in doing.
CIdiklxu, 7, n.y pattern, copy,
model; measure, rule, ruler,
tape line.
Cldimt, 7, n.y used as ohj. of akula
meaning to speak or pronounce
indistinctly.
Cidlmu, 7, «., season (rainy or dry).
Two such seasons make a
year.
c. cia maxlka, winter, cool
season.
c. cia munya, summer, warm
season.
c. kl 7 when ? wh^t season ?
ku c. ku c, yearly, season by
season.
Clduaya, 7, «., grave, sepulcher,
tomb. Use pi. for graveyard,
cemetery.
Ciendenda, 7, »., vagabondage,
vagrancy. § 356 (g).
enda c, to be a vagabond or
vagrant or tramp.
muena c, vagabond, vagrant,
tramp, wanderer.
Clenzedl, 7, n., custom, habit,
manner or method of doing,
mode, nature of, conduct, way,
law, fashion, practice, regula-
tion, rule, style, usage, pro-
cedure.
c. cibi, vice, bad habit.
c. cikuabo, a different way
of doing, differently, other-
wise.
Cieya, 7, n., guarantee, pawn,
pledge, Security, surety. See
V. eya.
Cifu, 7, n.y see dfufu.
3i6
CIFUANYI— CIHUKA.
Clfuanyi, 7, n., likeness, image,
reflection as in mirror, picture,
photograph, representation, re-
semblance, sameness, simi-
larity, similitude.
Clfuanyiklxa, 7, n., likeness, im-
age, resemblance, reflection as
in mirror, example, illustra-
tion.
Cifufu, 7, »., a secret consultation
or conference, plot, agreement,
covenant, contract, treaty, de-
liberation.
c. clbl, conspiracy.
c. cihiacihia, New Testament.
c. cikulu. Old Testament.
ela c, to hold a consultation or
conference or deliberation,
plan secretly, plot.
This word may also he spelled
cifu.
Clfuidixe, 7, »., faintness, insensi-
bility, unconsciousness, stufl5-
ness.
di ne c, vi.f to smother, be
stifled, be suffocated.
fua c, vi.y to faint, swoon, be
stunned, be stupefied, be in-
sensible, be unconscious.
Jika c, vt.f to smother, stifle,
suffocate.
Though the words cisike and
tungrulunsu and cifuidixe
are used interchangeably some-
times^ yet the general difference
seems to he that the two first-
named words have the idea oj
convulsion or fit, while the last
word means faintness or un-
consciousness.
Clfulu, 7, n., hat, cap, helmet.
Clfundidi, 7, w., writing, manner
of writing, hand, chirography.
Cifundu, 7, n.y circle, ring.
-a c, circular, round.
Clha, 7, «., gift, offering, present.
CIha, vi.y to take an oath, swear,
vow. Done hy striking the
hand on the ground. The re-
flexive dlclha is often used.
Clhaha, 7, n., the poison cup or
ordeal or test given to witches
or wizards.
muena c, witch doctor.
Cihahl, 7, n., a generous or liberal
or unselfish or benevolent per-
son.
Cih&la, vi., to be dull (as knife).
Clhanda, 7, n., fork of stick.
mucl wa c, a forked stick.
Clhangu, 7, »., fence, wall.
With mu this word means en-
closure, yard, fold, court,
stockade. See enclosure.
Cih&tu, 7, w., chip.
Cihehe, 7, n.,. tail fin of fish.
Cihendo, 7, n., abuse, curse, insult,
maltreatment, ill treatment.
Cihfisu, 7, n., any small piece or
division or part or fragment or
portion or section or bit split
off.
Contrast with cltuha.
Cihia, 7, »., anything braided or
plaited.
Cihidikidi, 7, n., stump of tree.
Cihlnda, 7, »., hunter (with gun).
Cihindi, 7, n.f a dwarf, under-
sized person, runt.
-a c, runty, dwarfish, under-
sized, stunted.
Cihoto, 7, n.f whistling through the
hands.
ela c, to whistle through the
hands.
Clhu, 7., «., oar, paddle.
Clhua, 7, n., combined with the
word muoyo to mean forget-
fulness.
-a c. muoyo, forgetful.
Clhuba, 7, «., gourd used as pipe.
Cihuekelu, 7, n., place of descent.
Cihuhu, 7, n.j hurricane, tornado,
squall, storm, tempest, whirl-
wind, strong wind, gale.
Cihuka, 7, »., copse, small bush
or forest on a plane, grove,
thicket, small wood.
Cihuka, 7, n., unconsciousness, in-
sensibility.
CIHUKA— CIKUKUE.
317
Clhuka {continued).
fua c, to be unconscious, be
insensible, be stunned, be
stupefied.
Cihulu, 7, w., gourd cut crosswise.
Cihunda, 7, n., large town or village,
capital, city, metropolis,
Cihundu, 7, n.f gourd cut crosswise.
Clhunsulu, 7, n.f owl.
Clhusu, 7, n.f bark, husk, shuck,
huU, peel, rihd, shell of egg or
seed or nut or terrapin, skin
of fruit.
Clhusu, 7, »., greediness, gluttony.
-a c, gluttonous, greedy.
muena c, a glutton.
ClhAxa, vL, to dull (as knife),
make dull.
Cljenffu, 7, n., circle, ring,
-a c, circular, round.
Cijlla, 7, n.f anything forbidden or
tabooed or interdicted or
illegal or prohibited or against
the law or against the regula-
tion or unlawful.
-a c, holy, sacred.
ena c, to hs lawful, be right,
be permitted.
Cika, w., to move, shake, quake,
tremble.
Clkataakaha, 7, »., siftings (of
corn).
Clkakakaka, 7, n., pineapple.
Clkakana, vi., to shake, move,
quake, tremble.
Cikama, 7, n., shamelessness,
effrontery, immodesty, imperti-
nence, sauciness, arrogance,
impudence, indecency, ingrati-
tude, ungratefulness, audacity,
impoliteness, disrespect, irrev-
erence,
-a c, arrogant, saucy, immodest,
shameless, impertinent, dis-
respectful, impudent, indecent,
ungrateful, audacious, impo-
lite, irreverent.
ena c, to be modest, be humble.
Clkampanda, 7, n., a thing the
name of which you have for-
Cikampanda {continued).
I gotten or do not know or do not
care to trouble with mention-
ing. § 353» Rem.
Cikanga, 7, ra., mat made of
papyrus.
Clkankanyi, 7, n., heel.
Clkata, 7, n.f ball or roll of twine
or string.
Ciki&ma, 7, n.f exclamation of
surprise or astonishment or
amazement expressed by grunt-
ing.
tua c, to exclaim in surprise,
wonder, be amazed, be aston-
ished.
Cikenge, 7, n., axe.
Clkenklbu, 7, »., heel.
Cikixa, vt.f to move, shake, cause
to quake.
Clklyaklya, 7, w., shoulder-blade.
Clkoka, 7, n.f mark or trail or
track or trace of something
which has been dragged.
Cikolakola, 7, n., stalk or stem of
corn. .
Clkolokolo, 7, n.f neck of gourd.
Clkondo, 7, n.f time.
bikondo blbldi, twice.
bikondo bls&tu, thrice.
bikondo bla bungi, frequently,
often, many times.
c. clkuabo, next time.
c. cimue, once, one time.
See musangu.
Cikono, 7, n.f shoe. This word is
now nearly obsolete as meaning
shoe. See mukono.
Cikowela, 7, w., coat, dress, shirt.
dlboko dia c, sleeve.
Cikuacilu, 7, n., place for holding;
hence handle.
Clkuacixi, 7, n.f a prop.
Clkuaka, 7, ra., a saw.
muena bikuaka, sawyer.
Cikuku, 7, n. {from Eng. cook),
kitchen, cook-house.
Cikuku, 7, n.f an exposed root or
snag causing one to stumble.
Cikukue, 7., w., hen.
3i8
CIKUKUMINA— CILUMBU.
Clkukumlna, 7, n.y stuttering,
stammering, impediment in
speech.
muena c, a stutterer, stammerer.
Clkulu, 7, n., site of deserted vil-
lage.
Cikumbl, 7, n., pen, enclosure, sty,
cage.
Cikumbukumbu, 7, n., cob.
Cikumbuzl, 7, n., cob.
Cikundekunde, 7, n., a large native
bean.
Clkundukundu, 7, n., hip.
Cikunyl, 7, n., stocks.
Cikuondekuonde, 7, n., stalk or
stem of plantain or banana.
Cikusu, 7, »., maggot.
ela bikusu, to blow (meat).
Clkutu, 7, »., furnace for smelting
iron ore.
ClkQxlana, 7, n., a large woman.
Generally used in irony. §351.
Clla, 7, »., cry of amazement or
astonishment, alarum, shout of
crowd, cheer.
ela blla, to cheer, shout, give
cry of alarum.
Cll&bi, 7, n., handle.
Cllabuidi, 7, n., eyelid.
Ciladilu, 7, n., bed.
Cil&fl, 7, n., M^ei oj ohj. of akula
meaning to speak ^ pronounce
indistinctly. J'/tw word may
perhaps also mean the doing
of anything badly or incon-
gruously. § 356 {g).
Cilamba, 7, n., cloth, garment.
bllamba(^/.) , clothes, apparel.
Cilamba, 7, n., bridge made of logs.
Cilanda, 7, n., bridge tnade of
logs.
Cilftta, 7, «., dream, vision.
Iftta c, to dream, have a vision.
Cilavlnyi, 7, »., eyelid.
Cilele, 7, n., custom, habit, law,
manner, mode, nature of, con-
duct, fashion, way, method,
practice, regulation, rule, style,
usage.
c. cibi, vice, bad habit.
Cilelelu, 7, n., womb(?). Perhaps
placenta.
€ilema, 7, n., stinginess, parsi-
mony, selfishness,
-a c., stingy, parsimonious,
selfish.
Cilembl, 7, n.y fisherman, hunter
(by trapping or with bow and
arrow).
Cilenga, 7, n., adornment, finery,
ornament, decoration.
luata or yuala with bilenga, to
wear ornaments, be adorned,
be dressed up.
Cilengelenge, ^j n., sugar-cane.
CUengulengu, 7, n., the thing into
which a person is changed by
transmigration or metempsy-
chosis.
Cilexilu, 7, »., example, sample,
specimen, illustration, brand,
copy.
CUoa, 7, »., dried gourd, often used
as pipe.
Coloaloa, 7, n., a green gourd.
Cilonda, 7, n., large battle-axe
made by Zappo Zapps.
Cilonde, 7, n.(always jolUrwed by
muadi, first wife), the second
wife of polygamist, concubine.
Cilongo, 7, n.y bloom, blossom,
flower.
Cilongo, 7, »., generation, line of
descent to.
Cilu, 7, n.(pl. generally used)j dirt,
trash, filth, d€bris, impurity,
refuse, rubbish, stuff, waste,
weeds.
Cilua, 7, n., post in wall of house,
door-post.
Cilua, 7, w., toad.
Cilulu, 7, «., cloth, garment.
c. cisusuke, a worn-out piece of
cloth, rag.
bilulu(^/.), clothes, apparel.
Sometimes pronounced cidudu.
Cilumbu, 7, «., council, court,
trial, judgment.
lumbulula c, to settle a palaver
at court.
CILUMI— CINGOMBO.
319
Cllumi, 7, n.f semen. PI. generally
used.
Cilumiana, 7, «., a large man.
Generally used in irony. § 35 1.
Ciiamuiamu, 7, »., crust, scab.
Cilunga, 7, »., sweet potato.
CImanga, 7, n.j scabbard, sheath,
case for knife.
Clmaza, 7, n., a strong European
cloth.
Cimba, vi.f to be stupid, be foolish,
be silly, be simple, be thought-
less, be careless, be unmindful,
act foolishly.
Clmb&di, 7, n., a native from the
Portuguese territory on West
Coast.
CImbakana, vi.y to go around, go
round about, encircle, sur-
round. There is a secondary
meaning of to be stupid, bie
foolish, act stupidly or foolish-
ly, be silly, be simple, be un-
mindful, be thoughtless, be
careless.
Cimbakane, adj. {p. p. of clmba-
kana), foolish, stupid, silly,
simple, thoughtless, careless.
Clmbe, adj.(p. p. of cimba), foolish,
stupid, silly, simple, careless,
thoughtless.
Cimbixa, vL, to fool, joke with.
Cim^na, 7, »., yam (wild).
Cimenga, 7, »., large village or
town, city, capital, metropolis.
Cimenyl, 7, w., sock, stocking.
Cimono, 7, »., the waist.
Cimonytnu, 7, n.{from mona, to
see), token, example, sample,
earnest, specimen, copy, mark,
model, brand, sign, illustra-
tion, keepsake, proof, remin-
• der, seal, souvenir, symbol,
badge, emblem.
Cimpanga, 7, n., ram, male of
sheep.
Cimpulu, 7, n., cricket.
Cimpumpu, 7, »., cold (catarrh).
Cimuka, vi.y to retreat, to flee.
Cimuna, 7, »., a tame animal.
Cimuna, vt., to rout, put to flight,
defeat, overcome, vanquish,
beat, conquer, subdue.
Cimunu, 7, »., roof or wall or side
of house.
Cimunyi, 7, »., firebrand, torch.
CIna, vi.y to be afraid, dread, be ex-
cited, fear, be frightened, be ter-
rified, be fearful, be horrified,
be scared, be timid, be shy, be
terrorized, be dismayed.
Cina, 7, n.y hole in the ground,
pit.
Cina, insep. indecUnahle word used
with mbl and poss. pro. to
mean brother-in-law. § 42,
Note 2.
CInana, indeclinable wordy empty,
blank, vacant, void, worthless-
ness, without cause, for noth-
ing, greatest, gratuitously, zero.
-a c, of no account, worthless,
common, of no consequence,
inferior, mean (of birth), un-
important, of no use, useless.
Cindumbi, 7, n., a skin disease,
leprosy.
muena c, a leper.
See note under leprosy.
Clnemu, 7, n.(Jrom nemeka),
gratitude, thankfulness, grate-
fulness,
-a c, grateful, thankful.
Cinfunde, 7, »., whirlwind.
Cinganyi, interrog. pro., what?
what is the matter? what for?
why? for what reason? for
what cause? for what pur-
pose?. § 175.
Clngoma, 7, n., gun.
c. cia lutende, rifle.
c. cia mutengu, flint-lock gun.
c. cia tundimba, shotgun.
ela c, to fire or shoot a gun.
ela c. hanxl, to miss aim.
kuma or lonza with c, to shoot
one with a gun.
Cingombo, 7, »., ocra. Note that
this is doubtless root of Eng.
gumbo soup.
320
CINGUJI— CIONDA.
CingtkJI, 7, n.f bunch of palm nuts.
Clnguluka, vi., to turn around,
revolve, rotate, whirl, spin
around, be inverted, be turned
around.
Clngulula, vt.j to invert, turn
around, reverse, whirl around,
spin around.
CInka, v.f to guess.
Cink<^te, 7, n., a kind of bamboo
or reed found in the forest and
used for making fence.
Cinkutu, 7, n. (Lower Congo),
coat, djress, shirt.
diboko dia c, sleeve.
CInsanki, 7, n., native cloth made
from the fibre of palm leaves.
The cinsanki means several
single pieces of the didlba
sewed together.
Clnsenga, 7, »., sweet potato.
Cinsonkela, 7, »., cricket.
Cinsonxi, 7, »., a tear (from the
eye).
c. as subj. of h&tuka or tuka, to
shed a tear.
Cinsukunsuku, 7, w., hiccoUgh.
Cintlnyl, 7, »., a thing the name of
which you have forgotten or
do not know or do not care
to trouble with mentioning.
§ 353, Rem.
Cintu, 7, n., thing, something,
object, article, material,
-a bintu, rich, wealthy.
bliitu(p/.), goods, stuff, riches,
possessions, wealth, property,
substance, means, mammon.
blntu bia buhianyi, inheritance,
legacy.
bintu bia buku, dowry.
bintu bionso, everything.
c. cia kuenza n'aci, tool, im-
plement, machine, instrument.
Cintumblndi, 7, n., a kind of ante-
lope.
Cintunte, 7, n., an ant making
large hills. These are edible.
Cinu, 7, «., knee.
tua binu hanxi, to kneel.
CInu, 7, n., mortar (in which com,
cassava roots, etc., are beaten).
Cinu, 7, »., spool.
Cinunu, 7, n., thousand.
Cinyangu, 7, n.{from nyanga, to
abuse), abuse, cruelty, tyranny,
brutality, despotism, inhuman-
ity, affliction, oppression, ill-
treatment, mailtreatment, mean-
ness, heartleasness, merciless
ness, pitilessness, unkindness,
unmercifulness, persecution,
-a c, cruel, mean, merciless, in-
human, pitiless, heartless, op-
pressive, despotic, tjrrannical,
unkind, unmerciful, brutal.
muena c, tyrant, brute, despot.
Cinyanu, 7, n., emaciation, thin-
ness, leanness, haggardness.
di ne or uma followed by c, to
be emaciated, be lean, be thin,
be haggard, waste away.
Cinyenga, 7, n., constipation, cos-
tiveness.
dl ne c, to be constipated, be
costive.
Cinyl, interrog. pro.^ what? what
is the matter? what for?
why? for what reason? for
what cause? for what pur-
pose? § 175, Rem. I.
Cinyindanyinda, 7, n.(pl. gener-
ally used) J dregs, sediment.
Cinyixa, vt., make afraid, frighten,
terrify, alarm, excite, horrify,
intimidate, scare, terrorize,
dismay.
Cinyu, 7, »., bladder.
Cinyuka, 7, n., wadding for gun.
CinyAmankole, 7, w., oyster.
dole, 7, »., famine, starvation.
Ciombe, 7, »., cassava root, manioc.
c. cia mpete, dried but unsoaked
cassava root.
Ciombo, 7, «., copper or iron made
into crosses.
See note under copper.
Cionda, 7, »., emaciation, leanness,
thinness, haggardness.
di ne or uma followed by c, to
CIONDA— CISUMBU.
321
Cionda {continued).
be emaciated, be lean, be thin,
be haggard, waste away.
Clondo, 7, n., a drum made by
hollowing out a log.
Clono, 7, n., a snore, sound or
noise or roar or report of wind
or rain or falls.
Cioto, 7, n., clan, tribe, nation,
race.
See TRIBE.
Cisabatu, 7, n.(Jrom Portuguese),
shoe, boot.
Clsabu, 7, n., ford, ferry, crossing,
passage, place where landing
is made for ferry.
Clsabukllu, 7, »., ford, ferry,
passage of a stream, crossing,
place where landing is made
at a ferry.
Cis&ki, 7, n.f twig.
CIsaku, 7, n,y comb (for hair).
Cisala, 7, n., brushwood, brush.
Cls&iu, 7, w., market, sale.
Cisamba, 7, n., clan, nation, tribe,
race.
-a c. c;ikuabo, foreign, of another
tribe.
muena c. clkuabo, a foreigner
See TRIBE.
CIsambu, 7, w., yam (wild).
Clsambusambu, 7, n., a shelter
thrown up hastily.
Cisamuinu, 7, »., comb (for hair).
CIsanga, 7, n., island.
CIsangI, 7, »., bunch or hand of
bananas or plantains.
Cisanji, 7, »., harp, organ, harmo-
nium, a musical instrument.
The common native instru-
ment bearing this name is
made by fastening small pieces
of iron of different lengths to a
piece of wood which has been
hollowed out.
Cisasa, 7, n., loft.
Cisasa, 7, »., crawfish.
CIsasankala, 7, n., crawfish.
Cis<^ha, 7, n., skin, hide, leather.
Cls^ke, 7, «., convulsion, fit,
epileptic fit, spasm, insensi-
bility or unconsciousness from
fit or convulsion.
fua or haluka with c, to faint,
have a fit <w convulsion or
spasm, be unconscious or.
insensible from fit or con-
vulsion, swoon.
See note under cifuidlxe.
Cisenze, 7, »., a garden or patch
made in the swamp or marsh
in dry season.
CisI, 7, ».(Eng.), cheese.
Cislkit, 7, n.(Eng.), biscuit.
Cisonso, 7, n.{pl. generally used),
dirt, trash, filth, impurity,
refuse, debris, rubbish, stuff,
waste, garbage, weeds.
CIsoso, 7, n.{pl. generally used)^ tall
grass used in covering houses.
Cisote, 7, »., chaff.
Clsu, 7, w., blossom, bloom, flower.
CIsua, 7, »., nest of fowl.
Cisuasua, 7, »., want, wish, desire.
There is generally the idea of
being uncertain as to what
one really wants. § 356 {g).
Cisuba, 7, n., tuft of hair.
Cisui, 7, n., axe.
ka8ul(</iwj».), hatchet.
Cisaka, 7, n., a long basket.
Cisuku, 7, »., tall grass.
-a c, wild (as animal).
CIsululu, 7, »., sweat, perspiration.
h&tuka or tuka 'Z£;ii//t c, to sweat,
perspire.
CIsulusulu, 7, n., lung.
Cisumba, 7, »., trading (buying
and selling).
muena c., trader, merchant.
CIsumbu, 7, «., crowd, assembly,
concourse, congregation, band,
bunch, sheaf, bundle, pack,
package, roll, company, class,
group, drove, flock, herd,
host, meeting, multitude,
swarm, throng, party, society.
lua c., to assemble, come to-
gether, congregate.
322
CISUNA— CIXT.
Cisuna, 7, n., vagina(?).
CIsunsukila, 7, n., crumb.
CIsusu, 7, n.f fist.
kuma or tua or tuta wi/^ c, to
strike or hit a blow with fist.
Citab&la, 7, n., wakefulness.
lala c, not to sleep well, keep
awake, be sleepless, be wakeful.
CItadilu, 7, »., porch, veranda.
Citaku, 7, n., base, bottom, butt
end, rear end, hind part, stern.
CIt&lu, 7, n., corpse, dead body of
person, carcass.
Citambala, 7, n., a small piece or
strip of cloth less than a
fathom, towel, rag.
c. cia ha mesa, napkin, serviette.
CItanda, 7, n., an open shed.
Cltandl, 7, n., a child about three
or four years old.
Citanga, 7, n., a circle or ring (as
dancers).
CItedl, 7, ».(^/. generally used)y
joke, jest, humor, fun.
ela bitedi, to joke, have fv.n
with, jest with.
CItekuteku, 7, n., a kind of greens.
Cltelele, 7, n., chilliness, coldness,
coolness, shade, dampness,
moisture, wetness, humidity.
di ne c., to be chilly, be cold, be
cool, be damp, be moist, be
wet, be humid.
Some say citalele.
CUema, 7, n., used as card, num.y
nine.
Citlla, 7, n., cock, rooster, male of
fowl.
c. eibedi, first cock to crow in the
morning.
ha bitlla, at cockcrowmg, early
morning.
Citokatoka, 7, n., albino. § 365 (gS .
Citonga, 7, »., gourd cut crosswise.
Citu, 7, n.y stinginess, parsimony,
selfishness, meanness as- result
stinginess.
-a c., stingy, parsimonious,
selfish, mean.
Some say citue.
Citudilu, 7, n., blacksmith shop,
smithy.
Cituha, 7, n., a bit or small piece
or division or part or fragment
or portion or section cut off,
a short time, minute, moment,
short while, before long,
•a c., low, short, runty, stunted.
kosa bituha, to cut into pieces.
' muntu wa c., a^ dwarf, under-
sized person, runt.
Contrast with elhfisu.
Cltuka, 7, n., the waist.
Clula, 7, n., toad.
Clululu, 7, n., cloud (not dark or
heavy).
Clui. a, 7, n.(pl. generally used)y
;^cods, fortune, wealth, stuff,
possessions, property, means,
riches, substance, mammon.
-a biuma, rich, wealthy.
Ciuxa, 7, «., abscess, boil, ulcer,
hubo.
Civundi, 7, n., pot, kettle, vessel,
frying-pan.
CixaxI, 7, n., mat made by the
Bakuba.
Clxl, 7, «., anger, wrath, indigna-
tion, bad humor, vexation,
passion, fierceness, ferocity,
rage, fury, madness, grief,
melancholy, sadness, sorrow,
penitence, regret, remorse.
di ne e. or nnva c. or ufua c. or
kuaeika c. or c. as subj. of
kuata, to be angry, be mad,
be aggravated, be indignant,
be irritable, be ferocious, be
fierce, be raging, be furious,
be vexed, be worried, be an-
noyed, be provoked, be in a
passion, be sad, be melan- .
choly, be sorry, be sorrowful,
regret, repent, pine.
kuacixa or ufuixa with c., to
make angry or mad or indig-
nant, displease, enrage, anger,
annoy, exasperate, aggravate,
worry, provoke, throw into a
passion, irritate, tease, tanta-
CIXI— DIA.
325
Cixl {cofUinued).
lize, torment, trouble, vex,
sadden.
Ctxi, 7, »., insect, bee, fly, bug,
caterpillar, worm, creeping thing.
}Li^i{dimin.)y gnat.
Clxiba, 7, w., whistle, flute.
Clxibiku, 7, »., anything used to
stop up or shut up, cork, cover,
lid, stopper.
CixikI, 7, »., door-post, post in wall
of house.
Clxlkidllu, 7, n., destination, end,
limit, termination, terminus.
ClxIklxikI, 7, »., dregs, sediment.
P/. generally used.
Cixiku, 7, n., disobedience, insub-
ordination, stubbornness, ob-
stinacy, heedlessness, refrac-
toriness, wilfulness, negligence,
neglectfulness.
-a c, disobedient, insubordinate,
stubborn, obstinate, heedless,
refractory, unmanagable, un-
ruly, intractable, wiBul, negli-
gent, neglectful.
Cixiluxilu, 7, n., fern.
Clxondu, 7, »., snapping of the
finger.
tuta c., to snap the finger.
Clyuya, 7, «., warmth, heat, tepid-
ness, lukewarmness.
c. cla ml, steam.
dl ne c, to be warm, be tepid,
be lukewarm.
Cizubu, 7, »., bark, shuck, hull,
husk, peel, skin, rind, shell of
egg or nut or seed or terrapin.
I>1» 5> n.(pl. is me), word, direc-
tion, message, command,
order, ordinance, command-
ment, exhortation, informa-
tion, news, proclamation, dis-
course, statement, assertion,
sound of music, speech voice,
echo (with the verbs elekexa or
Idikixa).
Di (continued).
-a d. dimue, reliable, trust-
worthy, truthful, consistent.
amba d., to deliver a message,
issue a proclamation or decree.
ambuluxa or ambulula or ban-
dlxa or k&lexa with d., to
raise the voice, talk louder.
d. diklse, high tone or voice.
d. dinlne, low tone, bass voice.
d. as subj. of h&ta or xlb&la, to
be hoarse.
hunga d., to make an agreement
or covenant or contract.
tekexa or huekexa w^iih d., to
lower the voice.
tumina muntu d., to send a
person a message.
Di, inter jec.y see § 437 (h).
!>*> 5» n.(pl. is me), heart.
Di, vi.y to be, exist. -
d. ne, to have, possess, own,
contain.
d. ne with bundu or bunvu, to
be ashamed, be bashful, be
mortified, etc.
d. ne cixi, to be angry, be mad,
etc.
d. ne with dlfu or dimi, to be with
child.
d. ne luoxi, to be vicious (as dog) .
d. ne muoyo, to be alive, be
living.
d. with mua and in fin., to be
able, can, be capable, be possi-
ble, be qualified, be compe-
tent, have power to.
d. with Locatives Suffixed , to
be alive, be present. § 320.
The neg. is ena.
Di> 5, n.(pl. is mai), egg.
ela d., to lay an egg.
The dimin. is kai.
Dia, vt., to eat, consume, devour,
subsist on.
-a kudia, edible.
bia kudia, food, victuals, nour-
ishment, meal.
d. bukelenge, to become chief,
succeed to chiefship.
324
DTA— DIBEXI.
Dla (continued).
d. cinana, to squander, to ex-
haust, to spend, to waste.
d. luhiku, to bet, wager.
d. maxinde, to graze.
Diacimue, 5, n., used as adv.^ at one
time, at the same time, simulta-
neously. § 95 (ft), Rem. 2.
Diaha, 5, n., shoulder.
Diakamue, 5, n., used as adv.j
once, one time, at the same
time, simultaneously. § 95
(6), Rem. I,
Diala, 5, n., place for throwing
rubbish, dunghill.
Dialu, 5, «., magic, riddle, puzzle,
enigma, sleight-of-hand trick.
muena d., magician.
Diamba, 5, n., Indian hemp. This
is snAoked by the natives with
injurious effect.
Diambedl, 5, n., used as adv.^ long
ago, before, in advance, first,
foremost, beforehand, in old
times, once upon a time, re-
mote or distant times, long
since, long time ago.
amba d. bualu kabui buanze
kulua, to foretell, prophesy,
predict.
Bungula d., to foreordain, pre-
destinate.
Dianda, z;., to run against.
DIangana, v.(withmenUf teeth), to
grit or grind or gnash the teeth.
d. mukana, to move the lips
without speaking.
DianJIla, v., to be or do or go in
advance or before, anticipate,
come or do first or previously,
be forward or foremost in
doing, lead the way, precede.
d. kuenza, to invent.
d. kumona, to discover.
This word is jollowed by in fin.
May also be spelled dianxila.
Dianva, 5, «., an ear of Indian corn
or maize. The pi. is used to
express quantity either oj ears
or shelled corn.
DIata, v., to step, tread, tramp.
d. mu diktksa, to step on, tread
on, tramp on, trample on.
Diba, 5, n.{pl. is meba), sun; has
secondary meaning oj clock,
watch.
d. dla hanktkci or A. as subj. of
Jalama, noon, midday.
d. dicidiku, there is plenty of
time.
d. with kl? 0r hanyl? what
time ? what o'clock ? when?
what hour ?
d. as subj. oj uhuka, afternoon,
evening.
d. as subj. oj kumbana, to be
time for.
Dib&la, 5, n., bald head.
Dibamba, 5, n., scale of fish.
Dibandala, 5, n., flag.
Dibansa, 5, n., debt, account.
d. as subj. oj kuata, to owe a
debt, /»/., a debt has caught one.
di ne or angata with d. dia, to
be in debt to, owe.
ensa d., to incur a debt.
f ueila d., to make atonement for.
ha d., to credit.
Dibanzixa, 5, ft., the act of bring-
ing the bride to the home of
the bridegroom.
bldia bia d., marriage or wedding
feast.
Dib&xi, 5, fi., spot, speck, dot.
di ne mabftxi, to be spotted, be
speckled, be variegated.
ena ne mab&xl, to be spotless,
be unspotted.
Dibedi, 5, «., sickness, disease,
malady, illness, pain, affliction,
bad health, pang, suffering.
See disama.
DIbele, 5, n., breast, udder, teat.
mutu wa d. or lusongo lua d.,
nipple of breast.
Note that the pi. means milk as
well as breasts.
Dlbexi, 5, «., leaf of tree or book,
page, sheet of paper, blade of
grass.
DIBIKA— DIFUNKA.
32s
DIbika, v.(Buk., 1st pers. sing.),
used in greeting and salutation.
See SALUTATION.
Diblya, 5, n., board, plank.
muena mablya, carpenter, saw-
yer.
Dibodio, 5, n.y pouch of animal,
crop of fowl.
Diboko, 5, n., arm of person,
fore leg or front leg of quad-
ruped.
d. dia baktkxi, left arm.
d. dIa balumi, right arm.
d. dia with clkowela or cio-
kutu, sleeve.
Dibondo, 5, »., a kind of palm.
Dibotc, 5, »., banana, either whole
bunch or single fruit.
DIbu, 5, n., lump, clod.
Dibuba, 5, n., blister or lump made
by fire or hot water.
Dibuba, 5, n.j cloud.
Dibue, 5, «., stone, rock, flint,
bead, slate.
d. dIa kunuona, grindstone.
d. dIa nvula, hailstone.
m-jcl wa d., slate-pencil.
Dibue, 5, n , the most common
species of oil palm.
Dibui, 5, »., wasp-nest (made of
mud).
Dibaka, 5, marriage, matrimony,
wedding, wedlock.
d. as subj, of f ua, to be divorced,
lit., the marriage is dead.
ziha d., to divorce, to break the
marriage.
ya ku d., to marry (used only of
the woman).
Dibulu, 5, »., ball (of rubber),
lump (of salt, earth, etc.).
Dibulunge, 5, n., ball, globe,
sphere,
-a d., round, spherical.
From bulunga, to be round.
Dibumba, 5, »., clay or earth for
making pots.
Dibungi, 5, n., fog, mist.
Did, 5, n.(pl' is meci), day.
See dituka.
Dicu, 5, »., ear.
nyongo'a d., drum of ear.
telexa macu, to attend, listen,
be attentive.
Didiba, 5, «., native doth made .
from the fibre of palm leaves.
kuma d., to weave.
Didinga, 5, n.{pl. is madingi), lie,
falsehood, untruth, hypocri-
sy, untruthfulness, unrelia-
bleness.
-a madlngi, unreliable, untruth-
ful.
muena madingi, liar, hypocrite,
fraudulent person.
Dieba, 5, ft., thorn, bone of fish
(generally the rib).
Dieleka, vi., to agree, match, con-
form to, correspond to, be
adapted to, be suitable, be
alike, be even, be proper, be
similar, be same kind, or
species or variety, fit, suit, be
enough or adequate or suffi-
cient, suffice, be exact.
neg. means to be unlike, differ,
be different, be divers, be
diverse, vary, be insufficient or
inadequate.
Diese, 5, «., fortune, good luck.
di ne d., fortunate, lucky.
ena ne d., Unfortunate, unlucky.
Difu, 5, «., abdomen, stomach,
belly, perhaps womb.
-a mu d., the family of.
d. dia mukolo, calf of le^.
di ne d., to be with child, be
pregnant.
imita d., to conceive.
tuia, d., to abort, miscarry.
Difuanda, 5, n., gunoowder.
Difuka, 5, n., handful, a small
pile or heap (such as can be
held in the two hands).
Difukenya, 5, n., loose sand, dirt
Difuku, 5, n.y day.
See dituku.
Difuma, 5, »., spear, lance.
Dif unka, 5, n., two fathoms of cloth
(4 yds.), one half of a piece.
326
DIFUTU— DIKANDA.
Difutu, 5, n., pay, salary, pay-
ment, remuneration, reward,
compensation, earnings, wage,
wages, anything due, bribe, fee,
fine, penalty, expense.
angata d., to earn.
bandixa d., to advance wages.
huekexa d., to decrease wa^es.
Diha, 5, «., benevolence, chanty,
liberality, generosity, unselfish-
ness,
-a d., liberal, generous, un-
selfish, benevolent.
d. dia luse, alms.
Dihaha, 5, w., deafness. // person
is deaf in one ear use sing.,
if in both ears use pi.
-a mahaha, deaf.
Dihahl, 5, «., papaw. From Eng.
Dihahu, 5, n., wing.
Dihanda, 5, n., a kind of palm.
Dihangu, 5, w., exhaustion, fatigue,
weakness, tiredness, weariness,
faintness.
Sometimes spelled dihungi.
Dihasa, 5, n., used in ph. muana
wa mahasa, to mean twin.
Dihembu, 5, n.{pl. is generally
used), smell, odor, scent. May
be good or bad odor.
Dihl, 5, n., a blow with open hand,
slap, smack.
tua or kuma or tuta with d., to
stri e or hit with open hand,
slap, smack, spank.
Dihl, 5, w., razor.
Dihilu, 5, «., rafter.
Dihoko, 5, »., notch.
Dihondo, 5, w., knot of stick.
Dihu, 5, «., knot of stick.
Dihula, 5, n., honeycomb, bees-
wax, wax.
Dihusa, 5, n., wadding for gun.
Dilnyi, 5, «., leaf of tree or book,
page, sheet of paper, blade of
grass.
Dilnyi, 5, n., fat or grease of animal,
oil.
laba minyi, to grease.
mlnyi a ngombe, butter.
Dilnyi (continued).
The sing, is used to express
either a small quantity of fat
or the unrendered fat, whereas
the pi. expresses the idea either
of a large quantity of fat or
the rendered oil or grease.
Dijimba, 5, n., pit for catching
animals.
Dijimbu, 5, n., magic, riddle, puz-
zle, enigma, sleight-of-hand
trick.
muena d., magician.
May be spelled diximbn.
Dijinga, vt., to be entangled, i.e.,
to entangle one's self.
Dijita, 5, n., knot of string (gener-
ally a hard knot).
Dika, vi.y to pass or go by or ahead
of.
Dikaei, 5, «., honeycomb, beeswax,
wax.
Dikadi, 5, ft., a kind of palm.
Dikaka, 5, n., pineapple.
Dikala, 5, «., charcoal, coal of fire.
Dikalu, 5, n.{from Portuguese),
wheel. Generally used of the
stem -wheel of steamers.
Dikama, 5, n., paw or foot of
animal, such as dog, cat, etc.;
track or trace or trail or print
of the paw; footprint.
londa makama, to track, trace,
trail.
Dikamakama, 5, n., impoliteness,
shamelessness, effrontery, im-
modesty, impertinence, sauci-
ness, arrogance, impudence, in-
decency, ingratitude, ungrate-
fulness, audacity, disrespect,
irreverence.
-a d., arrogant, saucy, immodest,
shameless, impertinent, disre-
spectful, impudent, indecent,
ungrateful, audacious, impolite,
irreverent.
ena d., to be modest, be humble.
Dikanda, 5, «., strength, energy
force, might, ability.
PI. generally used.
DIKANDA— DILA.
327
Dikanda, 5, »., a snarl, growl.
ela makanda, to growl, snarl.
PL generally used.
Dlkangala, 5, n., guinea-fowl.
Dikeha, 5, n., shoulder-blade.
Dlkela, 5, n., a hole through some-
thing, a leak, rent, perfora-
tion; hence a window.
tubuka d., to spring a leak.
Dik«la, 5, »., egg.
ela d., to lay an egg.
DIkengexa, 5, n., punishment, chas-
tisement, suffering, retribution.
Dikenka, 5, n., light or brightness
of fire or moon, moonlight.
From V. kenka.
DIkiki, 5, M., eyebrow.
Dikima, 5, «., bravery, courage,
fortitude, boldness, valor.
dine or teka with d. to be brave,
be fearless, be courageous, be
daring, be bold, be valiant.
DIkixa, vLf to let pass by.
Dlklya, 5 n., shoulder.
DIkoba, 5, n.y skin of human body.
Dikodi, 5, »., phlegm. PL gener-
ally used.
Dikoko, 5, n., deformity in the
back, humpback.
Dikolo, 5, n., site of deserted
village.
DIkoyabolo, 5, n., ankle bone.
Dlku, 5, n.y cola nut (eaten with
palm wine).
Dlku, 5, n.{pl. meku), fireplace,
hearth.
Dlku, 5, n., a kind of palm.
Dikubakuba, 5, »., clap of thunder.
nvuia as subj. of kuma and d.
as obj.y to thunder (clap).
Dikubu, 5, n.y a kind of grub worm
(edible).
Dikuha, vi., to flap about (as cloth
in the wind), swing, sway,
vibrate, wave to and fro,
oscillate.
Dikukumina, 5, n., stuttering,
stammering, impediment in
speech.
muena d., stammerer, stutterer.
Dikumbi, 5, ft, umbrella.
d. dia bulobo, railway train.
d. dla ml, steamer, steamboat,
vessel, ship.
nxlla wa dikumbi dia bulobo,
railway track.
Dikumbu, 5, n., large basket with
top made by Zappo Zapps.
Dlkuml, n.y used as card, num.,
ten.
Dikunga, vi.y to assemble, come
together, congregate.
Dikunxl, 5, n.y leg of table or chair,
pillar, posts for support of
veranda.
Dlkuonde, 5 n., plantain (whole
bunch or single fruit).
Dikuonya, vLy to shrink as in fear.
Diktksa, 5, »., foot, hammer of
gun, trail or trace or mark
made by foot, footprint.
d. dibl, bad fortune, bad luck,
misfortune, mishap.
d. dimpe, fortune, good luck.
dl ne d. dibi, to be unfortunate,
be unlucky.
di ne d. dimpe, to be fortunate,
be lucky.
di ne d. kudi muntu, to have
favor or influence with a
person.
kuma d., to stumble, trip, stump
the foot.
londa maktksa, to track, trace,
trail.
munda mua d., sole of foot.
munu munlne wa d., great toe.
munu wa d., toe.
tua d., to kick.
DlkAsa, 5, n.y a rattle used as
musical instrument.
Dikutu, 5, n.{from kuta, to bale),
bale, iDundle, large package or
pack or roll, the canvas or
wrapper around a bale.
Dlla, v.y to cry, grieve, wail, weep,
lament, mourn, pine for, be-
wail, bemoan, bawl, bellow,
bleat, croak, whine, roar (lion),
bray, squeal, tick (watch).
328
DILA— DIMUKA.
Dila, 5, »., intestine, entrail, gut;
the pi. means bowels, viscera.
DUala, 5, »., lime (fruit). From
Lower Congo.
DUala, 5, n., leaf of palm (dlkadi
and dibondo). These are
sewed together and used for
covering houses.
Dllandi, 5, »., snail.
Dllebele, 5, ».(Buk.), jigger.
DUesa, 5, »., a kind of European
cloth.
Dilesona, 5, n.(Eng.), lesson.
Dll«ta, 5, «.(Eng.), letter of alpha-
bet, type.
Dilexa, v., to show ofiF one's self, be
pompous, be proud, be haugh-
ty, hi vainj strut.
Dilobo, 5, n., ford, ferry, passage
or crossing of stream, place
where landing is made at a
ferry.
Dilolo, 5, »., afternoon, evening.
bidia bia d., supper.
dinda to ne d., all day long.
Dilonga, 5, n.{perhaps from Lower
Congo) y dish, plate, pan, basin,
bowl, saucer.
Dllongexa, 5, «., catechumen class.
muena d., catechumen.
mukanda wa d., catechism.
Dilu, 5, n,{pl. ts melu), nose.
muxuku wa d., nostril.
Dilu, 5, «., dream, vision.
iftta d., to dream, have a
vision.
Dlliinda, 5, n., mountain peak.
Dlma, 5, n.{pl. is mema), clay
or earth used in making
pots.
Dima, v.f to hoe, cultivate, dig or
cut up grass with hoe, work,
labor, toil, till.
See note under labor.
Dim&ta, 5, «., drop of water.
Dlmba, v^(Buk.), to tell a lie or
falsehood or untruth, be false,
deceive, beguile, trick, bear
false witness, fabricate, entice
by lying.
Dimbila, i;/.(Buk.), to tell a false-
hood or lie on one, bear false
witness against, accuse falsely.
Dimbixa, i;.(Buk.), to feign, pre-
tend, profess.
Dime, 5, n., dew.
DImeme, 5, n., sweetness to taste.
-a d., sweet.
Dimi, 5, n.{pl. f'5memi), womb(?).
Perhaps same meaning as dif a.
di ne d., to be with child, be
pregnant.
imita d., to conceive.
Diminu, 5, w., seed; hence second-
ary tneaning of fruitfulncss,
fecundity.
dl ne d., to be fertile, be pro-
ductive (as male or female in
producing young), be fruitful,
be prolific, be fecund.
This word generally has the idea
of seed for planting:
Diminu, 5, n., throat.
kuata ha d., to choke (as food),
strangle.
taiaxa or holexa with ha d., to
satisfy or slake or appease or
quench thirst.
DImoma, 5, n., fruit.
mamoma a kuenza n'& followed
by vinyo or maluvu a mputu,
grapes.
This word is used only with ref-
erence to such fruits as grow on
trees or shrubs, it can therefore
not be applied to bananas or
plantains or pineapples.
Dimoma, 5, n., rust, corrosion.
kuata d., to rust, be rusty, cor-
rode.
DImpompo, 5, »., drop of water.
Dimuka, vi.^ to be on one's guard,
be wary, be warned, be cau-
tioned, beware, take heed, take
precaution, be prudent, be cun-
ning, be wily, be sagacious, be
sharp, be shrewd, be skilful, be
sly, be subtle, be vigilant,
watch out, look out, be wise,
be on the alert, be artful.
DIMUKE— DIOLOLA.
329
Dimuke, adj. {p. p. from dimuka),
crafty, cunning, sly, wily, wary,
prudent, sagacious, sharp,
shrewd, skilful, subtle, vigilant,
wise, artful, cautious.
DImuxa, vt.y to caution, warn, put
on one's guard, inform, ad-
monish, counsel, make aware,
forewarn.
Dina, vi., to dive, sink, plunge
down in.
Dina, 5, n.{pl. is mena), hole in the
ground, pit.
Dina, 5, n.(pl. is mena), name.
d. diacl ncinganyi ? what is its
name?
d. diebi nganyi ? what is your
name?
Dtnana, v., to stretch one's self.
Dinanga, 5, n., affection, love, de-
votion.
Dinaya, 5, n., game, play.
Dincese, 5, n., match. This word
is coUoq, from Eng. match.
§ 55, Rem. 2, Note 2.
Dinda, 5, n., early in the morning,
about sunrise, little after dawn,
soon in the morning.
bidia bia d., breakfast.
butuku to ne d.. all night long.
d. to ne dilolo, all day long.
d. to ne ku munda munya,
forenoon.
Dinga, vt.y to tell a lie or falsehood
or untruth, be false, deceive,
beguile, trick, bear false wit-
ness, fabricate, entice by lying.
Dingila, vt.y to tell a lie or false-
hood on one, bear false witness
against, accuse falsely.
Dingila, z/., to aim (gun).
Dinsixa, v., to feign, pretend, pro-
fess.
Dingonge, 5, n., a large beetle.
Dingulunge, 5, n., a wasp.
Dinkidingila, 5, n., gizzard.
Sometimes pronounced dinku-
lungila.
Dintanta, 5, n., impertinence, im-
politeness, sauciness, impu-
Dlntanta {continued).
dence, immodesty, shameless-
ness, indecency, ingratitude,
ungratefulness, disrespect, ar-
rogance, effrontery, audacity,
irreverence.
-a d., immodest, shameless, im-
pertinent, saucy, impudent,
impolite, indecent, ungrateful,
disrespectful, arrogant, auda-
cious, irreverent.
ena ne d., to be modest, be
humble.
Dintonya, 5, «., bend, crook,
curve.
Dintumbu, 5, »., gizzard.
Dinu, 5, n.{pl. menu), tooth.
diangana or zekexa with menu,
to grit or grind the teeth.
dl ne menu, to be sharp (as
knife).
disama dia d., toothache.
fua menu, to be dull.
ku menu, the sharp edge of a
knife.
xiha menu, to make dull.
DInung, z;.(Bukuba, istpers. sing.),
used in greeting or salutation.
See SALUTATION.
Dinunganyl, 5, n.{pl. generally
used), whisper, undertone, a
low noise, murmur, faint
sound.
Dlnungu, 5, n., joint.
d. dia munu, knuckle.
Dinyongele, 5, n., milleped (long
black worm found in forests).
Dinyungixa, v., reflex., to shake
one's self.
Dinyungu, 5, n., dizziness, faint-
ness, giddiness.
di ne d., to be dizzy, be faint, be
giddy.
d. dia ml, whirlpool.
Diodiono, adv., at once, directly,
immediately, instantly, before
long, now, presently, soon,
forthwith.
Dtoiola, V. reflex., to stretch one's
self.
330
DIOTO— DITAMBA.
Dioto, 5, n., a skin disease which
appears as whitish patches on
the neck, arms and chest.
Diowa, v., reflex.y to hang one's self,
to commit suicide by hanging.
Dioxl, 5, n., pumpkin.
May be spelled dioji.
Dis&ba, 5, n., game, play.
Disama, 5, n., sickness, disease,
malady, illness, pain, affliction,
bad health, pang, suffering.
d. dia dlnu, toothache.
Disanga, vi.y to assemble, come
together, congregate, meet to-
gether, gather together.
Disansu, 5. n.(pl. generally used),
fork or meeting place of rivers
or paths, junction, confluence.
Disanka, 5, n., pride, haughtiness,
conceit, vanity; we have also
another class of meanings such
as contentment, happiness, joy,
pleasure, gladness.
Disanza, 5, n., class, group, crowd,
assembly.
DIsasakata, 5, n., impatience
restlessness.
Dis^ke, 5, n., bridge made of
creepers.
Disete, 5, n., a tall coarse grass.
Disemba, n.(Eng.), December.
DisUabel, 5, n.(Eng.), syllable.
Dlsohokela, vi.j the accidental or
unintentional discharging of a
gun or springing of a trap.
Sometimes pronounced disuhu-
kila.
Disoka, 5, »., noose for catchinjr
rats.
Disotadi, 5, n.(Jrom Portuguese),
soldier.
masoladl(/>/.)» army.
Dlsongo, 5, n., sharpened stick or
stake fastened in pit to impale
animals.
Disonguela, v., to confess, own up,
acknowledge one's guilt.
Dlsoso, 5, w., hole punched through
something, a leak, rent, per-
foration.
Disoso {continued),
tubaka d., to spring a leak,
tubula d., to bore a hole, pierce
through.
Disu, 5, n.{pl. mesu), eye of body
or of needle, germ or embryo
of seed, nipple of gun.
d. dia mbote, buttonhole.
d. dia ns&hl, keyhole.
di ku mesu, to look, appear, seem
to be before one's face; aSy
cilulu cidi cimpe ku mesu,
the cloth appears to be good.
ku mesu kua, in the presence of.
mesu (/>/.)» visage.
tonkena or ondela with mu d.,
to show white of the eye as
insult.
uma mu d., to be immodest, be
shameless, be indecent, be
obscene.
Disua, vi.f to boast, brag, be
haughty, be proud, be con-
ceited, be impertinent, be im-
pudent, be insolent, be immod-
est, be shameless, be saucy, be
selfish, be vain, vaunt one's
self, be arrogant, be auda-
cious, be egotistical, be pomp-
ous.
neg. means to be humble, be
modest.
DIsua, 5, n., love, affection, devo-
tion.
Disua, 5, n., nest of birds, rats etc.
DIsundu, 5, n., fist.
kuma or tua or tuta with d., to
strike or hit a blow with fist.
DIsungu, 5, n., abscess, boil,
swelling, ulcer.
Ditadi, 5, ». (Lower Congo), slate.
muci wa d., slate-pencil.
Ditaku, 5, n., buttock.
DIt&la, 5, »., an ear of Indian com
or maize. The pi. is used to
express quantity either of ears
or shelled com.
Ditama, 5, »., cheek.
Ditamba, 5, ft., arm of tree, branch,
bough, limb.
DITAMBUE— DIXIBA.
331
Ditambae, 5, n., a small rodent.
Ditanda, 5, n., bench or seat made
of palm ribs.
Ditemena, m.y to give forth light,
gleam, shine, glow.
Ditende, 5, n., cannon.
DItenge, 5, n., buttock.
Ditete, 5, n., grain of corn or
millet or salt, seed.
Ditetembue, 5, «., wasp.
leiitoba, 5, n., spot, speck, dot.
dl He matoba, to be spotted, be
speckled, be variegated.
ena ne matoba, to be spotless,
be unspotted.
DUonte, adj.{p.p. of tonta, to
bend), to be deformed or bent,
be humpbacked.
DItonya, v., to fold or bend (as one's
legs in sitting man -fashion).
Ditu, 5, n,{pl. metu), bush, forest,
wood or woods.
nyOma wa multu (§ 47, Rem.),
wild animal.
Ditu, 5, n., ear.
See dicu.
DItua, 5, n., small black ant-hill.
Dituaya, 5, n.(Jrom Portuguese),
towel.
Dituku, 5, n., day.
-amatuka onso, immortal, ever-
lasting.
d. dia Santa Kl&s, Christmas
Day.
d. kl ? when ? what day ?
matuku followed by a ku mp&la
or a kumudilu, hereafter,
henceforth, future.
matuku bungl munyi? what
age? how old? how long?
matuku male, long time, long
while.
matuku mihl, short time, short
while.
matuku onso or ku d. ku d.,
always, ceaselessly, constantly,
continually, endlessly, eternity,
eternally, ever, forever, in-
cessantly, perpetually, daily,
day by day, habitually.
Dituku (cofUinued).
matuku onso with neg. v., never
again.
For days of the week see Eng.-
B.L, under week.
Ditula, 5, n., a species of snake.
Dltumba, 5, n., corner of house,
angle.
Ditunga, 5, n., village, town, city.
See musoko.
Dltungu, 5, n., grain of com, seed.
Dltuta, V. reflex.y to run against.
Dltutu, 5, n., cloud.
Diula, vt.y to condemn, denounce,
censure, not to praise, re-
nounce, deny, disown, neglect.
Diula, v., to tear off one's loin
cloth.
DIulu, 5, n., sky, firmament,
heavens.
-a d., celestial, heavenly.
hankjici ha d., zenith.
DIulu, 5, n., nose.
muxuku wa d., nostril.
Diunda, vi.^ to grow, grow large or
stout, get fat or corpulent,
increase in size, develop, wax
(moon).
Diundlxa, v/., to add to, broaden,
widen, enlarge, fatten, in-
crease, exaggerate.
Dlungulxa, vi.y to assemble, come
together, congregate, meet to-
gether, gather together.
DIvuala, 5, n., wave (water), billow.
DIvunga, v. reflex., to fold or bend
one's arms or legs.
Dtxa, vt., to feed, nourish, keep,
rear, give to eat, bring up.
This word when followed by the
abstract name oj the office has
the idea oj elect, appoint to
oflfice, confer ofl&ce on, make.
DIxi, 5. n.{pl, mexi), caterpillar,
worm. These are edible.
DixIa, 5, n., generally used as prep,
across, opposite side of, over.
// is generally preferable to add
the ph, dIa muamua.
Dixiba, 5, n., lake, pond, inland sea.
332
DIxThA— ELA.
Dlxlha, V, reflex.f to commit
suicide.
Dixlkamlna, vi.^ to sit alone. The
p.p, means free, not a slave;
aSf muntu mudixikamine, a
freeman, free-bom person.
Dlzima, 5, n.{pL is maxlmi), lie,
falsehood, untruth, fraud, hy-
pocrisy, untruthfulness, umre-
Uableness.
-a mazlml, unreliable, untruth-
ful.
maena maziml, liar, hypocrite,
fraudulent person.
Dixina, 5, n., she-goat. One
which has borne young.
Dixinda, vi.^ to fall down (as per-
son tripping the foot).
Dlxinde, 5, n., stalk or blade of
grass (the common short va-
riety), weed.
dla maxinde, to graze.
Dlxindl, 5, n., large black ant.
They move in a line two or
three yards in length.
Dixonde, 5, n., small yellow fruit
growing on the plain.
Diyoyo, 5, »., trouble, tumult, dis-
turbance, noise, report, quar-
rel, row, wrangle, wrangling,
sound of noise, uproar, commo-
tion, fuss, hubbub, riot.
-a d., noisy, quarrelsome.
kosexa or xikixa wUh d., to
quell, hush, quiet, still.
lekela d., to stop the noise, be
quiet, be still.
teka d., to disturb, make trouble
or palaver, raise a tumult.
E, adv.y yes.
Ebexa, vt.^ to ask a question, con-
sult, enquire, examine, inter-
rogate, question, demand (ask
a question).
e. muoyo, to give compliments
or regards or salutation or
greeting or respects, salute.
Ebexa {continued).
greet, hail, say adieu or fare-
well or good-bye.
Ebi, poss. pro.y your, yours, thy,
thine. §§ 133, 135.
Ehela, v., to dodge.
Ehaka, vi., to get or move out of
the way, turn aside or out of
the path in order to pass or to
permit another to pass, glance
ofiF.
Some say ahuka.
Ehula, vt.y to pull out, knock out
(as tooth).
Some say ahula.
Eku, adv., here, hence, hither.
§ 163, Note 3.
Ela, vt.y to cast, throw, pitch, blow
(any wind instrument).
e. bila, to cheer, shout, cry oi
alarum.
e. bitedi, to joke, have fun with,
jest with.
e. bukanda, to give an enema,
e. cifufu, to plot or plan secretly,
have secret consulation ot
deliberation or conference.
e. cingoma, to fire or shoot a
gun.
e. cingoma hanzl, to miss aim
(gun).
e. dik«la, to lay an egg.
e. luhftta, to argue, disagree,
have a controversy or discus-
sion or contention, differ in
view, dispute, quarrel, wrangle,
debate.
e. with lungenyi or mexi or
lukanyi or muclma, to think,
conceive, muse, consider, de-
liberate, meditate, reason, re-
flect, ponder.
e. with luxlminylnyu or lusu-
muinu or muanu, to tell or
narrate a fable or story or
parable.
e. makanda, to growl or snarl
(as dog).
e. mate (or the sing, lute), to
spit, expectorate.
ELA— ENDA.
333
Ela (continued).
e. minyi, to anoint.
e. muau, to yawn, gape.
e. mucima, to covet, long for,
yearn for, think about.
e. wUh muh&nu or muklya, to
put on pants or trousers.
e. muhuya, to blow the breath,
expire.
e. mukandu, to make a pro-
hibitive law.
e. mak<^te, to shoot an arrow.
e. muklya, to gird up the loins,
tuck up the cloth.
e. mukosa, to interfere in one's
business, oppose, withstand.
e. mukuekue, to cackle.
e. mulau, to curse, doom, damn,
wish ill to, anathematize.
e. mu lukanu, to fetter, chain,
put in chains.
e. manda, to run off at the bowels,
have diarrhoea.
e. muosa, to whistle.
e. muoyo, to expect, look for,
hope for, give respects or com-
pliments or salutation or greet-
ing, salute, greet, hail, say
adieu or farewell or good-bye.
e. muxa, to break wind.
e. ngonga, to ring a bell.
e. ns&hi, to lock.
e. nxobo, to gamble by tossing
seeds or other objects.
e. nyaci, to sneeze.
e. nyima, to turn one's back on
one.
Elangana, v.{derived from ela).
e. luh&ta (or pi. mp&ta), to
argue, disagree, have a con-
troversy or mscussion, differ in
view, dispute, quarrel, wran-
gle, debate.
e. with lungenyi or mexl or
lukanyi or mucima, to think
about, consider, deliberate,
conceive, meditate, reason, re-
flect, muse, ponder.
Elekexa, vt.y to try, test, attempt,
strive, make an effort or trial.
Elekexa (continued).
endeavor, compare, illustrate,
liken, make even or exact or
the same or similar or like or
alike, make to fit or suit, adapt
to, match, take aim, aim (gun),
measure, take dimension, copy,
emulate, imitate, mimic, mock,
examine.
dl(5), as subj. of e., to echo.
e. bujitu, to weigh.
e. kafunda muntu, to draw a
picture of a person.
e. lubilu, to run a race.
Elele, interjec.f see § 437 (/).
Ema, vt.j to cut incision in palm
tree so that the sap can flow
out, tap, get wine.
Emu, adv.f here (inside), hence,
hither. § 163, Note 3.
Ena, vi.f not to be. This word is
the common neg. of di and
other verbs meaning to be.
§ 206, Rem.
Only a few of the more com-
mon expressions with ena are
here given:
e. mua kub&la, to be countless,
be innumerable.
e. mua followed by in fin. y to be
impossible, be unable, be in-
competent, be incapable.
e. mua kuenza clntu, to be
harmless.
e. ne, not to have, be out of,
lack, be destitute of, be with-
out, be wanting, need, be de-
ficient, be inadequate, be in-
sufficient.
e. with buk&le or ngulu, to be
delicate, be not strong.
e. ne Tvith matoba or mab&xi,
to be spotless.
e. with Locatives Suffixed^ to be
absent, be away. § 320;
Enda, vi., to advance, go, pass on,
proceed, progress, travel.
e. buenyi, to visit, go visiting.
e. clendenda, to be a tramp or
vagabond or vagrant.
334
ENDA— ENZEXA.
Enda (continued),
e. masandl, to commit adultery
or fornication.
e. mubande ha kab&lu, to ride
on horse.
e. mu buanda, to ride in a
hammock.
e. mu ml, to swim (as fish).
e. muxlnga, to barter, buy and
sell, trade, deal in.
e. n*andl masandl, to seduce
one.
e. ne mukolomo, to hop on
one foot, go with one knee
bent.
e. usemena, to go sidewise.
e. wUh the pres. part, of sobela
or tebuka, to walk lame, limp.
muoyo as subj. of e. with the
pers, as obj. (or ku muoyo
kudl kuenda), to be nauseous,
be sick at stomach.
Endakana, vi.t to walk about,
wander about, go about from
place to place, roam, stray
about, stroll, travel about,
itinerate, meander, ramble.
e. with lumu as subj., to spread
(news).
Endangana, v., to have inter-
course one with another as in
trading, etc.
Endela, vt,, to court, woo, long
after.
e. ku clbangu, to walk with a
staff.
Endexa, vt., to hurry up, hasten,
expedite, urge on, make to go.
// the idea of haste is implied
use also the words lublla or
\ukXkS9.,
e. ku muoyo, to nauseate, sicken,
make sick at the stomach.
e. lumu, to spread news.
Endulula, v/., when followed by
muxlngra this word means to
go about buying and selling,
trade, barter.
e. muxinga mulmpe, to gain by
trading, profit.
Enga, vt,y to brew, boil or render
oil, evaporate (for salt).
e. malua, to malt.
Engelela, vi.f to be bright, glisten,
glitter, shine, gleam, sparkle.
Engelexa, vt.y to brighten, make to
glisten or shine.
Engula, vt.f to skim off.
Enguluka, vi.y to dissolve, melt,
thaw.
Enu, poss. pro., your(^/.), yours
iP^')' §8 i33» 135-
Ensa, vt.f to do, make, form,
shape, construct, act, per-
form, effect, prepare, produce,
accomplish, commit.
dlanjlla kuensa, to invent.
e. blbl, to err, do wrong, trans-
gress, sin.
e. bimpe, to fix.
e. dlbansa, to incur a debt.
e. dljlmbu, to do sleight of hand
trick, conjure.
ena mua kuensa cintu, to be
harmless.
e. mudimu, to work, labor, toil.
e. with mu- followed insep. by
proper form of amba, to obey,
mind, observe, heed, hearken
to, be obedient to, § 465.
neg. of e. with mu- followed insep,
by proper form of amba, to
disobey, be disobedient, be
heedless, be obstinant, be neg-
lectful, be negligent.
Ensela, vt., to do for, treat (well
Of ill).
e. blbl, to injure, harm, perse-
cute, do wrong to.
e. mudimu, to serve, work for.
Ensexa, vt., to help to do, assist,
aid, reUeve, succor, urge on,
hurry or hasten one in doing.
// the idea of haste is understood
use also the words lubllu or
lukiksa.
e. mudimu, to serve, work for.
Note that the idea of helping is
generally expressed by the Cat^
sative Form of the verb.
ETU— FUA.
33S
Etu, poss. pro.y our, ours. §§ 133,
135-
Eya, vi.y to rest, be at ease, repose.
Eyakana, vi.y to breathe rapidly,
pant.
Eyeka, vt., to leave in pawn, pawn,
pledge, to leave as guarantee
or pledge or security or surety.
Eyeka, vt.^ to lean something
against, to incline or slant
against, to set against.
Eyela, vi., to breathe, inhale, re-
spire, draw the breath.
Eyema, vi.y to lean against, incline
against, slant against.
Sometimes pronounced eyama.
Eyemexa, vt.j to lean against, in-
cline against, slant against.
Sometimes pronounced eyamexa.
Eyo, interjec., see § 437 (c).
Febluale, «.(Eng.), February.
Fiekela, vL, to squeeze, press.
f. nxlngu, to choke, throttle,
strangle.
Fika, vi.t to arrive, come to, ex-
tend to, reach.
f. ha buihi, to draw near to,
approach.
Fika, vi., to be or become black or
blue or dark or green or soiled
or dirty.
Fike, adj. (p. p. of fika, to be black),
black, blue, green, unclean,
dirty, soiled, filthy.
Fiklxa, vt., to blacken, darken, de-
file, soil.
f. munda, to annoy, aggravate,
displease, anger, worry, en-
rage, exasperate, irritate, pro-
voke, tease, tantalize, torment,
trouble, vex.
Flkuluka, w., to become green or
blue or any color approaching
black.
Flkuluke, adj.{p.p, of flkuluka),
green, blue, any color ap-
proaching black.
Fila, vt.j to accompany, go along
with, attend, bring one on the
way, come with, conduct,
escort.
Flla, vt.f to pay over to.
Fimba, vL, to make or form or
shape (as pots, jars, pottery).
Sometimes pronounced f uimba.
Flna, vt., to throw down in wrest-
ling.
Flnangana, v., to wrestle.
Flnda, vi.f to be cloudy, threaten
rain, lower.
Flnga, vt.y to cover a house, put
on roof, thatch.
Fingaluka, vi.^ to dissolve, melt,
thaw.
Finuka, vi.f to fall or slip acci-
dentally or unintentionally,
escape (as animal when held
with the hands), come untied,
slip loose, come undone or un-
fastened.
Finuklla, vi., the accidental or un-
intentional discharge of a gun,
go oflf accidentally.
Flnuna, vt.y to untie or undo (as a
bow knot), unfasten, unloose.
Finya, vt., to stuff.
Fita, vt.y to scratch, make a
scratch.
Fofa, vi.y to he or become blind.
Fua, vi.y to die, perish, expire, be
broken, be unconscious, be
insensible, be senseless.
f. with clfuldlxe or cihuka, to
be insensible, be unconscious,
faint, swoon, be stunned, be
stupefied, smother.
f. with cls^ke or tungulungu or
nkoyi, to have convulsion or
spasm or fit, convulse, faint,
be insensible or unconscious
from convulsion, etc. The
word nkoyl is used only of
children.
t. menu, to be dull (as knife).
f. mu ml, to drown.
f. mutanta, to be cracked.
336
FUA— FUNGA.
Fua (continued),
t. ns&la, to be starved, be fam-
ished, be faint from hunger.
f. with dlbftka as subj,, to be
divorced, lit,, the marriage is
dead.
pres. habitual tense or second
pres. actual of f., to be mortal.
neg, of above tenses^ to be im-
mortal.
Fuana, vi., to be like, correspond
to, be the same, be of same
kind or sort or quality or
character or species or variety,
be similar, be a mate or
match, resemble, be equal,
look like, deserve, merit.
^' o) '•> to differ, vary, be un-
like, be different, be unequal,
be uneven, be divers, be di-
verse.
Fuanangana, vi.^ to agree, be the
same, be alike, conform to,
correspond to, be suitable, be
adapted to, suit, fit, be mates,
match, resemble, be similar, be
equsd, be even, be proper, be
right, be the same kind or
sort or quality or character or
species or variety, be enough
or adequate or su^cient, suffice.
, neg. of f., to differ, vary, be un-
like, be dissimilar, be (Ufferent,
be divers or diverse, be un-
equal, be uneven, be unsuit-
able, be inadequate or insuffi-
cient.
Note that t. has chiefly the idea
of likeness or similarity, while
akanangana has preferably
the idea of fitness or adapta-
bility. The same holds good
with reference to fuana and
akana.
Fuanyikixa, vt.y to make sdike or
even or equal or like or the
same or similar, make to agree
or to fit Of to suit, match,
adapt to.
Fuata, vi.f to shrink, shrivel up.
Fuba, 7;i., to dry up, wither, wilt,
shrivel up, decrease or dimin-
ish or reduce in size (as swell-
ing).
Fublxa, v/., to wither, wilt, dry up.
Fuella, vt.y to atone for, pay for.
f. dlbansa, to make atonement
for.
Fudlka, v., used wUh mp&la,
meaning to frown, scowl, knit
the brows.
Fae, adj.{p.p. of faa, to die), dead.
Fae, adv.f slowly, sluggishly, lazily.
This word is generally re-
peated,
Falla, vt.y to die for as substitute,
atone.
Fuima, vi,,usedwithxavAniAj mean-
ing to smokeas( burning wood).
Fuka, vt,, to create, form, make,
shape, invent.
f. kabldl, to regenerate.
Fala, vt.y to forge, form or shape
or make by hammering iron,
beat out iron.
FAla, vt,f to degrade, discharge,
depose, exclude, expel, turn off
or dismiss from employ, send
away, subtract.
Some say fula.
Fulama, vi.y to contract, draw up
(as cloth when washed).
Falaluka, vi.^ to rise or arise (as
from the dead), come to (after
fainting, etc.), be resuscitated or
revived after unconsciousness.
Fululula, vt,y to resurrect, raise to
life, bring to, revive or resus
citate (after fainting).
Fumia, vi., to come from, hail from.
Fuma, vt., to sew.
Fumba, vt.y to make or form or
shape (as pots, jars, pottery).
Funda, vt., to write, print, mark.
Iblklxa kuf unda muntu, to draw
a picture of a person.
Fundllangana, v., to correspond
with or write to one another.
Funga, v., to miss fire (gun), not
go off.
FUNKUNA— HANDA.
337
Funkuna, vL^ to point at with
finger, indicate, show, root
(as pig).
Funylna, v/., to threaten, menace.
Futa, vt.y to pay, remunerate, re-
ward, recompense, compen-
sate, pay a forfeit, settle a
debt, bribe, expend.
Ha-, insep, sub, conj,, after, when,
as soon as, as, while, directly,
tiU, until. § 458-
Ha, loc. prep.f on, down on, off
from, upon. § 424 (3).
ha bu- (joined insep, with poss.
pro., § 186), of its kind, by
one's self, alone, of one kind
... of another kind.
ha mutu ha, on top of, above,
over, overhead.
Compare with mu, kn, mua, kua.
Ha, v/., to give, grant, ofifer, be-
stow, present with, render to.
h. buhianyl, to bequeath, endow,
leave for heir.
h. lungenyi or mexl, to advise,
counsel.
h. luse, to pity, to take pity on,
to show mercy or favor or
compassion to, be gracious to,
be sorry for, sympathize with,
care for.
h. mudimu, to hire, engage, em-
ploy, give work.
h. muoyo, to give compliments
or regards or respects or salu-
tation or greeting, greet, salute,
hail, thank, be thankful to,
be grateful to, say farewell or
adieu or good-bye.
h. followed by name of office, to
appoint, give an office to, make,
confer office on, elect, enslave;
as, bakuinuha bukelenge,
they made him chief.
The in fin. kuha means gift,
offering, present.
Haciacla, adv.{from v. cla), very
early in the morning, at dawn,
daybreak, soon.
Hadlxa, vt,, to make drunk, intoxi-
cate. Maluvu is understood.
Haha, adv., there, far away, far,
yonder, remote, distant,Wience,
thither, beyond. § 163, Note 3.
Hahala, v., to flap (as bird its
wings in flying).
Hakaabo, adv., elsewhere, some-
where else. § 370.
Hakula, vt., to cut, castrate.
Hala, vi., to get or become or fp or
be crazy or deranged or insane,
be demented, be foolish, be
mad, be wild, be reckless, be
vicious, be violent, be thought-
less,
h. maluvu, to be drunk or in-
toxicated.
H&la, vt., to refuse to give to, be
selfish or stingy toward.
Halumuka, vi., to slip accidentally
or unintentionally.
Hale, adv., see kule. § 372.
Hale, adj.{p.p. of hala, to be
crazy), crazy, deranged, de-
mented, foolish, mad, in-
sane, wild, reckless, thought-
less, vicious, violent.
Haluka, vi., to have a convulsion or
fit or spasm, convulse.
Hambuka, W., to be lost, not know
the way, go astray, stray, be
confused Of bewildered or make
a mistake about the path.
Hambuxa, vl., to lead astray, mis-
guide, mislead.
Hamue, adv.{li& insep. with mue,
one), in or on Of at the same
place, one place. § 79.
Hana, vt., to sell, barter.
Hanaha, adv., here (on), hence,
hither. § 163, Note 2.
Handa, vL, to split, cut open,
cleave, part (as hair), open (as
eyes), tear, rend, saw length-
wise, rip, slice, break into (as
thief into house).
338
HANDA— HATUHU.
Handa {continued).
h. mutanta, to crack (as bottle,
etc.).
Handa, vi., to come to life or con-
sciousness, be saved.
Handakanya, vt., to split up, cut
up, tear to pieces, demolish
(as house).
Handalala, vi., to scream (as one
in terror), squall, yell, shriek.
Handlka, vi., to be broken, be rent
or torn, split, burst.
h. mueima, to be excited, be
frightened, be terrified, be
horrified, be terrorized, be
scared, be shocked, be anxious,
shudder.
h. mutanta, to be cracked.
mukonomuhandlke, cloven foot.
Handlxa, vt., to split, burst.
h. muclma, to frighten, horrify,
alarm, scare, shock, terrify,
terrorize.
Handlxa, vt., to deliver, defend, res-
cue, save, succor, mediate in be-
half of, cause to come to life or
to consciousness after sickness.
Handuka, vi.y to escape (as from
captivity or from danger), get
away, be safe, be saved, be
rescued.
Handuluka, vi.y to branch out,
separate, divide, part, diverge.
Handulula, v/., to cause to branch
into parts, divide, separate,
part.
Hanga, adv., elsewhere, somewhere
else. § 370.
Hanga, v., to attempt or make an
efiFort or try or endeavor or
strive and then fail, break
down, be exhausted, be weak,
be fatigued, be tired, be faint,
be weary, be worn out, fag,
miss aim (gun), forget a per-
son, make a mistake in count-
ing, omit, overlook, not recog-
nize or know a person^ give up,
succumb, yield, surrender, try
in vain.
Hanga {continued).
neg. oj h., not to give up, perse-
vere, be persistent, be importu-
nate, be resolute, continue.
Hanglxa, vt., to make tired, fatigue,
break down, tire, weaken, wear
out.
h. muclma, to dishearten, dis-
courage.
Hanglxangana, vt.^ to puzzle (with
enigmas) .
HankAcl, loc. adv. or prep., among,
in among, the middle, between,
half-way, center, midst. § 423
(2) (6).
dlba dla h., noon, midday.
h. ha dlulu, the zenith.
kosa or kala followed by h., to
cut half in two.
When used as a prep, it is followed
by ha. § 423 (3).
Hantu, loc. adv., see kuntu.
Hanxl, loc. adv., down on the
ground, downward. § 423 (2)
h. ha, at the bottom of, down on ;
sometimes has the sense of floor
(w bottom. §423(3)-
Hanyl, loc. interrog. adv., where?
whither ? whence ? § 381.
dlba hanyl? what time? what
hour? when? what o'clock?
Hansa, vt., to borrow (with the in-
tention of returning the exact
article).
Contrast with somba.
Hanslxa, vt., to lend or loan or let
out (with the idea of returning
exact article).
H&ta, vi., used with dl(5) as subj.
meaning to be hoarse.
Hatuhu, indeclinable word, free,
for nothing, gratuitously, with-
out cause, worthlessness, zero,
-a h., inferior, of no account,
worthless, conmion, of no con-
sequence, mean of birth, uh-
important, of no use, useless.
This word is derived from the
adj. tuhu, empty, blank.
HATUKA— HIDIA.
339
H&tuka, vi.y to get out, go or come
forth or out, pass out, protrude,
stick out, emerge, issue, rise or
arise (as sun), be dislocated,
vacate, withdraw, evacuate,
shed (as tear, feather, hair).
h. wiih clsululu or luanga, to
perspire, sweat.
kutu dlba dlah&tuka or kutu
kuah&tuka dlba, east, i.e.,
where the sun rises.
H&tula, vt.y to cast out, drive out,
turn out, eject, chase out, put
out, expel, bring out, exclude,
thrust out, take out, unload,
discharge, excommunicate.
Hauka, vi., to become unfastened.
Haula, vt.y to lay waste, wreck,
desolate, destroy, loot, pillage,
plunder, despoil, devastate,
ravage, rob, sack, spoil, un-
bolt, undo, unfasten.
Haxlxe, loc. adv. {made up of loc.
and V. xlxa, to be last), after,
behind, at the rear,
-a h., the one behind, the one
last, hindermost.
Haylka, vt.y to put on, place on.
Heha, v., to fan.
Hehela, vi.y to become light in
weight.
Hehele, adj. {p. p. of hehela), light
in weight.
-a ludlml luhehele, smart, one
who answers quickly.
ludlml luhehele, smartness.
Hehexa, vt.y to lighten in weight.
Hehl, loc. adv. and prep, (combina-
tion of ha and adj. Ihl, short),
near to, close to, beside, by.
o S 7?-
Somettmes pronounced hlhl.
Hehuka, vi.y to flap about or be
blown about in the wind,
sway, swing, vibrate, wave to
and fro, shake about, oscil-
late.
Hehula, vt.y to blow away, winnow,
fan, shake about by wind.
Hela, vt.y to crush or grind or mash
or pound or rub between two
stones, iron (clothes).
Hele, adj.y poor, needy, destitute,
in need or want.
Helexa, vt.y to impoverish.
Hemba, v., to blow the nose,
Henda, vt.y to abuse, curse, insult,
offend, revile, swear at, mal-
treat, ill-treat.
Henga, vt.y to part (as the hair).
Henguluka, vi.y to be crooked, be
bent, be curved, be zigzag.
Henguluxa, vt.y to bend, curve,
make zgzag.
Henya, vi.y to lighten, flash Used
only of lightning.
Heta, vt.y to overtake, come up
with, reach to.
Hetela, vt., to hand to, pass to,
offer to one (as the hand), give
or reach something to one.
Hetexa, see hetela.
Heulu, he. adv. {formed with ha
and the insep. ulu), above,
over, on high, upon, up over-
head, up. § 364.
Heya, vt.y to scrape, scour, scrub,
rub, shave off.
Hla, vi.y to be burnt, be consumed,
be fired, be wanned, be hot, be
heated, be afire, be scalded( ?).
Hla, vi.y to be ripe.
Hla-hla, adj.y new, fresh, green,
strange. § 76.
Hlakana, vi.y to burn, smart, ache,
hurt, pain.
Hlana, vt.y to inherit, be heir to.
Hlclxa, vt.y to permit one to pass,
to throw over or through or past
Hldla,?;^, to abandon, abstain from,
decline, discard, deny, dis-
approve of, disobey, rebel
against, revolt, forbid, forsake,
renounce, scorn, spurn, ex-
clude, keep from, neglect, dis-
own, dissent, object, prohibit,
refuse, reject, repudiate, resist,
restrain, be unwilling, will not,
oppose, withstand, prevent.
340
mDIA— HONA.
Hldla (continued).
The past tense, with following
infin.y means would not.
Hie, adj. (p. p. of hia, to be ripe), ripe.
Hlklla, vt., to put up anything, as
a bet or wager.
Hlkula, vt., to redeem or deliver
from slavery, liberate, set at
liberty, free, give freedom,
ransom, emancipate, take out
of pawn.
Hlla, v., to be guilty, be convicted,
be in the wrong, be culpable,
be condemned, lose a bet.
Hlluka, vi., to turn a summersault.
Hlngakana, vt., to change, ex-
change, trade.
Hlngakanya, vt., to change, ex-
change, trade.
Hingak^lxa, 74., see hlngakanya.
Hingana, vi., to go or come back,
turn back, return, retire.
Hinglla, vi., to return, go or come
back, retire, turn back.
Hlngixa, vt., to bring back, send
back, fetch or take back, re-
turn, recall, restore.
Hlniniluka, vi., to come or go
back, turn back, return.
Hlngaxa, vt., see hinglxa.
Hlta, v., to pass on ahead of or by,
go on before, come or go past,
be beyond, be first, go over or
through or by, surpass, exceed.
h. bulmpe, to be better, be su-
perior.
h. with bukftle or ngulu, to beat,
excel, conquer, win, defeat,
overcome, master, overthrow,
prevail, quell, repulse, subdue,
subject, subjugate, vanquish,
be victorious.
In Comparative construction,
there is often the idea of very,
too, excessively, exceedingly,
extremely, farther, too much
for, more, most, quite, so.
In the Comparative Degree with
this verb we have the construc-
tion for the Eng. than. § 89.
Hlta (continued).
When used with proper adj. or
verb this word expresses the
idea of infinite.
Hixa, vt., to condemn, convict,
judge or pronounce guilty,
judge to be in the wrong.
Hlxa, vt., to heat, warm, make hot,
bum, scald( ?).
Hodla, vi., to wink.
Hohamue, loc. adv., in or on the
same place, together. § 96,
Rem. 2.
Hohela, vt,, to drive a nail, fasten
with a nail, hammer.
Hoho, loc. adv., there, thence,
thither, yonder. § 1 63, Note 4 .
Some say hoha.
Hohoka, vt., to cast or shed (as
leaves).
Hola, adv., calmly, quietly, peace-
fully, silently, in silence,
softly.
dl h., to be peaceful, be at peace,
be quiet, be settled, be calm,
be silent, be still, be tran-
quil.
Hola, vi., to be calm, be at peace,
be peaceful, be gentle, be
quiet, be settled, be silent, be
still, be tranquil, be cold, be
chilly, be cool, be damp, be
moist, be wet, be soaked, be
humid, be insipid, be saltless,
be tasteless, be unseasoned, be
distasteful, be cured, be healed,
be well.
-a muclma muhole, content,
satisfied.
Holexa, vt., to pacify, make quiet,
quiet,, quell, hush, still, make
cold, cool, dampen or wet or
moisten, quench or slake or
satisfy or appease thirst, cure
or heal or restore to health, re-
lieve or ease pain.
Hona, vi., to fall, drop down,
descend.
h. mu ml, to fall overboard.
HONGOLA— HUMBAKANA.
341
Hongola, vL, this ward seems to
mean to disenchant, exorcise,
bring from under influence of
witch or wizard.
Honso, he. adv, {made up of ha
arid adj, onso, all), anywhere,
everywhere, somewhere, where
soever. § 371, Rem.
Hota, vi.f to be foolish, be stupid,
be ignorant, be dull, be sense-
less, be silly, be simple.
Sote, adj. (p. p. of hota, to be
stupid), stupid, foolish, igno-
rant, dull, senseless, silly,
simple.
Hotela, vLj to annoy or anger by
caressing or fondling, exasper-
ate, irritate, aggravate, bother.
Doubtless rubbing or caressing
is the original meaning.
Hoteta, vi.y to be soft (as dough).
Hotete, adj,{p.p. of hoteta, to be
soft), soft (as dough).
Hua, vi.y to be silent, keep silence,
be mute, be quiet, hush, be
reticent, be speechless. The
idea is distinctly that of being
speechless in the face of proved
guilt.
Hua, vi.y to be completed, be
finished, be ready, be prepared,
be perfect or perfected, be
consumed or done or out (not
any more), be exhausted, be
spent, be expended, be used
up.
h. muoyo or muoyo as subj, of
h., to forget, overlook, miss,
omit.
neg. of h., to be incomplete, be
unfinished.
Hueka, vi.^ to go down or run
down (as stream), descend, flow
down, sink, settle (as sedi-
ment), fall (as price).
Huekela, vi.y to go down (as water
sinking), abate, subside.
Huekexa, vt., to let down, lower
price or voice, depress, press
down, shove or push down.
Huekexa (continued).
h. dlfutu, to decrease or reduce
wages.
h. muxinga, to beat down the
price, cheapen, decrease or
reduce or lower the price.
Huha, vi.y to blow (as wind or tor-
nado or tempest or gale).
Huh&la, vi., to become light in
weight, decrease or diminish
or reduce (as swelling).
Huh&le, adj.ip.p. of huhftla),
light in weight.
-a ludimi luhuh&le, smart.
ludlml luhuh&le, smartness.
Huh&xa, vt.j to lighten in weight.
Huhixa, vt., to blow the fire, win-
now, fan.
Hulxa, vt.y to complete, finish, ter-
minate, conclude, have done,
perfect, bring to an end.
h. miota, to quench or satisfy or
slake or appease thirst.
h. muadl, to comfort, console,
soothe, cause to stop crying.
HIkka, vt., to make a charm or
medicine or fetish or idol or
image (to be used as fetish).
Huluka, vi.f to scale off, come off.
Hulula, vt., to scrape off, scale
off, pull off, draw off, scour
off, scrub off, rub off, shave off,
wipe off.
Hulumuka, vi.y to slide, slip.
Hulumuna, vt.y to drag, draw,
stretch, pull, trail.
Huma, vi.y to groan or grunt in
pain, moan.
Humba, vi., to fail to do, be de-
tained, be interrupted, be dis-
appointed, be hindered, be
frustrated, be thwarted, be
bothered, be constrained, de-
lay, procrastinate. Uuendu
luakuhumba, the going has
been interrupted.
Humbakana, vi.y to be stupid, be
listless, be foolish, be inatten-
tive, be indifferent, act fool-
ishly or stupidly, hesitate.
342
HUMBAKANA— IBIDIXA.
Humbakana {continued).
vacillate, be fickle, be uncer-
tain about, falter, be thought-
less, be careless, be umninaiul.
Humbakane, adj. {p. p. of humba-
kana), stupid, foolish, list-
less, inattentive, indifferent,
thoughtless, careless, unmind-
ful.
Humbak^lxa, vt., to interfere with,
interrupt, bother, stunt in
growth, prevent, prohibit, re-
strain, constrain, hinder, de-
tain, deter, be listless or in-
attentive or indifferent toward.
Humblxa, v.y to be disappointed,
fail to do as anticipated or
arranged, to disturb or inter-
rupt one's plan or purpose,
bother, hinder, delay, prevent,
prohibit, interfere with, de-
tain, miss, omit, persuade or
induce from doing, frustrate,
postpone, put off, restrain,
stop or stay one from doing,
deter, dissuade, retard, impede,
withhold, thwart, constrain,
fool, or joke with.
Humpama, vi.f to mope.
Humuka, vi.^ to spill, run over,
overflow (as water in jar).
Humuna, vLj to pour out, empty;
hence to sigh, i.e., pour out the
breath.
Hunga, vt.f to jest with, joke, tease,
have fun with.
Hunga, vi.y to be even, be level.
h. di(5), to make an agreement
or covenant or contract.
Hungakana, vi.y to be even, be
level, agree after consultation.
Cf. kungakana.
Hungakana, vi.j to be listless, be
inattentive, be indifferent, be
unmindful.
Fungakfixa, v/., to make even or
level.
h. dl(5), to agree. Cf. kunga-
kana.
Hungak<lxa, v/., to be inattentive
or listless or indifferent toward.
Hunguluxa, vt.y to conclude, de-
cide, determine, agree, resolve.
The word dl(5) is generally
understood as ohj.
Huola, vt.y to gather or pull or pick
or pluck (as com, fruit, etc.),
harvest, reap, pull out or
knock out (as tooth).
Huta, vt.y to draw, drag, stretch,
trail, pull; hence to snuff (as
tobacco), suck up.
h. muhuya, to draw the breath,
inhale.
Huxa, vt.y to blow the fire, winnow,
fan.
May he spelled huja.
Huxa, vt.{Causative of hua, to be
silent), to hush up, cause to be
silent, quiet, quell.
Huya, vi.y used in the ph. h. mun-
da meaning to run off at the
bowels, have diarrhoea.
Huyakana, vi.y to pant, breathe
or respire quickly, blow the
breath quickly.
I, v.y neg. auxiliaryy not to be.
See § 225.
Iba, vt.y to steal, cheat, defraud,
rob, be dishoonest, be unjust.
neg. of 1, to be honest, be just.
Ibldi, card, and ord. num., two,
second. §§ 97, 99.
Ibldlla, vi.y Xohe or get or become
assustomed to, be experienced,
be familiar with, be habituated,
be hardened to, be used to,
leam by experience.
Ibidlla, vi.y to be impertinent, be
saucy, be impudent, be inso-
lent, be immodest or shameless
(saucy), be spoiled, be arro-
gant, be audacious.
Ibldlxa, vt.y to habituate, accustom,
train, familiarize, harden to.
IBIDIXA— IMPE.
343
Ibldixa {continued).
i. bualu bubl, to lead astray,
entice, allure, tempt, corrupt,
lure, seduce, spoil, teach bad
manners.
lb Aka, vLf to build, construct, erect,
make a house.
Iclklla, vi., to capsize, overflow,
run over, spill out.
Iclklxa, v/., to pour out, capsize,
empty, spill out.
Idika, vL, to name, call, give a
name.
Idlklxa, v/., to try, test, attempt,
strive, make an efifort or trial,
endeavor, compare, illustrate,
liken, take aim, aim (gun),
measure, take dimension, emu-
late, copy, imitate, mimic,
mock, examine.
dl(5) as subj. of 1., to echo.
i. bujitu, to weigh.
1. kuf unda muntu, to draw pic-
ture of a person.
i. lubllu, to run a race.
Ih&ta, vt.y to drive away, chase
away, put to flight, beat away,
pursue, rout.
Ihl, adj.y short, low, shallow.
matuku mihl, a few days, a
short time.
i. combined insep. with the loca-
atives, gives muihl, kuihl,
hehl(hlhl), near, close to.
§ 376.
Ihlha, vi., to be short, shrink in
length.
Ihlhlxa, vt.y to shorten, abbreviate,
contract, lessen, make less,
abridge.
Ihlka, vt.f to cook.
Ihlla, vt.j to hoe, cultivate, till, cut
out or dig out weeds (from
corn or other crops).
Ika, vi., to bear, bring forth, 3rield,
produce. Used only of cas-
sava, potatoes, peanuts, and
other ground products.
Contrast with kuama.
Ika, vUf to come down or descend
(from a tree), step down, get
down.
Ik&la, vi., to be, exist, abide, dwell,
Uve, remain, reside, continue,
sojourn, stay or stop at, subsist.
i. mu, to inhabit.
The infin. kuik&la is suggested
for state, condition, existence.
Ikila, vi,, to perch.
Ikixa, vi., to rest, be at ease, repose.
Iklkxa, adj., true, real.
ena 1., to be untrue.
Ila, vi., used with butuku as subj.,
meaning to grow dark, the
night is coming.
Imftxa, vt., to cast or throw away
as useless.
Imba, vt., to beat a drum, play or
perform on any musical instru-
ment, sing a song.
1. with mudua or mubanse, to
blow bellows.
Imba, vt., to dig, excavate, make a
hole in the ground, plow, bur-
row.
Imlelxa, vt., to cause to conceive,
cause to be with child, beget,
generate, impregnate, cause to
be pregnant, fructify, breed,
fecundate.
Imina, vt., to decline or refuse to
give something to one, deny
one something, be selfish or
stingy toward.
Imita, v., to conceive, be with child,
be pregnant.
This word is generally foUowed by
dlfu or diml.
Impe, adj., beautiful, pretty, lovely,
fine, good, pure, chaste, guilt-
less, virtuous, elegant, excel-
lent, worthy, fair or handsome,
fair or just or honest, correct,
fit, suitable, right, kind, hu-
mane, noble, holy, perfect,
righteous, upright, lawful, rich
or fertile or productive (soil).
with neg. verb: unjust, unkind,
unholy, wrong, not right.
344
IMUNA— IXAKU.
ImOna, vi,, to stand erect or up-
right, be perpendicular, wait,
halt, stop, be on end, stand on
end.
L mu malonso, to stand in line
or row.
Imflnangana, vi,, to be side by
side, be or stand close together.
ImOnylka, v/., to make to stand
erect or upright, stand on end,
set up, make perpendicular.
L hamue, to put side by side.
Ina, v/.. to put the cassava root to
soak prior to drying, immerse,
dip or sink in water.
Indlla, vt., to wait for, tarry for,
await.
Ine, adj.ialways preceded by ne),
alone, sole, solitary, by one's
self, only, self. § 80.
Ingelexi, n., used in ph, muena I.
meamn^ Englishman. Usedoj
all English-speaking people.
Inl, card, and ord. num., four,
fourth. §§ 97, 99.
Jntkma, vi., to stoop, bow down,
crouch, incline, lean, bend.
Inxlla, vt., to close or shut the door.
Inya, vt., to tie, bend.
Inyi? interrog.y adv. or conj,, or.
§ 434. 1 1 sometimes has the
jorce of or not.
Inyl pass, pro., my, mine. §§ 133,
135-
Inyika, vt., to name, give a name
to, call.
Inyika, vt., to cause to incline.
_ 1. mutu, to bow the head.
Inyika, vt., to dry (as meat before
a fire on a spit), cook, roast,
toast.
Inylxa, vt., to sink in, immerse.
Inylxa, vt., to love, prefer, want,
wish, desire, fancy, fain, Uke.
Sometimes there is a secondary
meaning to praise, adore,
glorify, bless, compliment,
commend, esteem, be grateful
to, exalt, extol, worship, invoke,
be thankful to, thank.
Inylxa (conUnued).
i^g' of '•> to despise, hate, detest,
disUke.
Note the imperative forms inyi-
xaku(^n^.) and Inyixl(^/.),
used only in salutation.
Inylxaku, v.(sing. imperative from
Inylxa, to esteem), used in sal-
utation or greeting, also in ex-
pressing adieu or farewell or
good-bye. §237 (a). 5«« salu-
tation.
Inyixl, v.(pl. imperative from
Inylxa, to esteem), used in
salutation or greeting, also in
expressing adieu or farewell or
good-bye.
Isambombo, card, and ord. num.,
six, sixth. §§ 97, 99.
Is&tu, card, and ord. num., three,
tlurd- §S 97, 99-
Islta, n.(£ng.), east. Regarded as
belonging to class III.
Ita, vt., to row, paddle, pull an oar.
Itaba, v., to answer or reply or
respond when called.
Itabuxa, vt., to accept, agree to,
acquiesce, accede to, approve,
believe, concede to, consent,
receive, be satisfied with, be
willing, make profession of;
confess, profess.
1. mu dl(5), to obey, be obedient
to, heed, hearken, observe the
word of.
neg. of 1., to disobey, be dis-
obedient, be heedless, be ob-
stinant, be stubborn, be neg-
lectful, be negligent, be un-
willing.
The infin. is used as noun to
express the idea of faith, be-
lief, trust.
May also be speUed Itablja.
Itabuxlxa, vt., to convince, per-
suade, induce, influence.
Itanu, card, and ord. num., five,
. fifth. §§ 97, 99.
Ixa, v., see salutation.
Ixaku, v., see Ixa and salutation.
lYA— JINGULULA.
34S
lya, vi.y to learn, study.
lyila, v., see iya,
lyixa, vL, to teach, educate, ex-
plain to, inform, instruct,
train, discipline.
i. bualu bubi, to lead astray,
entice, lure, allure, tempt,
seduce, spoil.
J.
Jadlka, vf., to stand up erect or
upright, make perpendicular,
make level, straighten (make
to stand straight).
Jalama, vi.y to stand erect or up-
right, be perpendicular, be
level, stand up straight; used
with diba as subj. meaning to
be noon, be midday.
Jalamixa, vt.y to make perpen-
dicular or upright.
Jam, n.(Eng.), jam. Regarded as
class III.
Jama, vi.y to be immovable, be
steady or steadfast, be fixed,
be firm or solid, stand firm or
steady, be strong, be mired up,
bs fast stuck in (as mud).
Jamlxa, vt.y to stick fast in, make
steady or firm.
JaniMtle, n.(Eng.), January. Re-
garded as class III.
Jeka, vi.y to crawl (as child),
creep; the primary meaning of
this word is to twist, squirm,
wriggle.
Jekexa, vt.y to twist, to screw, to
turn around.
Jidlka, vt.y used with cijila mean-
ing to forbid the use of, taboo,
interdict, prohibit, make un-
lawful, wean.
Note that Jlla has reference to a
person abstaining from or
tabooing something, while Ji-
dlka has reference to a person
who thus tabooes something
Jndlka (continued).
for some one else. In both
words there is a superstitious
idea.
May also be spelled xldlka.
Jlka, vt.y to bury, inter.
J. clfuidlxe, to smother, stifle,
suffocate.
Jlkuka, vi.y to explode, blow out
(as stopper from bottle).
Jlkula, vt.y to cause to explode.
Jila, vt.y to abstain from, fast, keep
from, sanctify, ordain, conse-
crate, interdict, forbid, taboo,
prohibit.
See note under Jldika.
May also be spelled xlla.
Jima, vt.y to blow out, extinguish, put
out, quench, erase, eradicate,
rub out, blot out, cancel, scratch
out, wipe out, go out (as fire).
Jlmlna, vi.y to be lost, disappear,
vanish, pass out of view.
Sometimes pronounced xlmina.
Jimlxa, vt.y to erase, eradicate, blot
out, lose, cancel, rub out,
scratch out, wipe out.
J. mala mabl, to forgive, pardon,
absolve, excuse.
Sometimes pronounced xlmlxa.
Jinga, vt.y to grieve for, sorrow for,
bemoan, bewail, mourn for,
weep for, cry for.
Jinga, vt.y see JlngUa.
Jingakana, vi.y to be tangled.
Jlngaklkxa, vt.y to tangle.
JlngUa, vt.y to encircle, surround,
enclose, inclose, entangle, en-
twine, bind up, wrap around,
gird up, coil, roll into a string,
twist, twine around, wind
around.
Jlnguluka, vi.y to become un-
tangled, be unfastened, be un-
wrapped, be unraveled, unroll,
unwind.
Jlngulula, vt.y to disentangle, ex-
tricate, unbind, undo, un-
fasten, unroll, unravel, un-
tangle, unwind, unwrap.
346
JISUS— KAKU.
Jlsus, I, n.f Jesus.
Jixa, vL, to wag (tail).
May also be spelled zixa.
Jongoloka, vi., to squiim, wriggle,
crawl (as snake).
Juka, vi., to ^t up from sitting
position, nse, arise, stand up.
See bika.
Juia, vt.y to lift up, raise up, take
up, elevate, cut up or dig up
or tear up or pull up or grub
up by the roots.
Jull, n.(Eng.), July. Class III.
Junyl, ».(£ng.), June. Class III.
Ka, demonstrative particle^ here it is,
there it is. Generally insep,
§§159,161.
Ka, adv.y therefore, consequently,
for this reason, hence, so, then,
wherefore. § 419.
Kaba, 8, n.{dimin. of muaba,
place), used with v. amba and
any adj. meaning small to
express the idea of almost,
nearly.
Kababu, 8, ft., goUath-beetle.
Kabalabala, 8, n., used in the ph.
k. ka mutu, ^uU.
Kabftlu, 8. n.(from Portuguese),
horse, ass, donkey.
Kabanda, 8, n., iron ore.
Kabansa, 8, «., pumpkin.
Kabendl, 8, n., spear, lance.
Kabldi, adv.y again, next time,
also, beside. Really means
second time. §95 (i), Rem. i.
Kabuasa, 8, n., jigger.
kaxlnsi ka k., pin.
Kabuluku, 8, n., a species of ante-
lope.
Kabululu, 8, n., gall.
Kacecl, 8, n., menses.
mana(mona) k., to menstruate,
be at the menstrual period.
Kaclla, v., to sneeze.
Kadi, conj,y but.
Kadi, vi.f to be, be about to.
An auxiliary used in the
formation of Future Imminent
and Present Imminent tenses,
§§ 218, etc.
k. ne, to have, own, possess.
Sometimes pronounced tadl.
Kadlbu, 8, n., small European bell
with rattles.
Kadllu, 8, ft., fire.
See kahla.
Kafl, ft.(Eng.), coffee. Class III
or VIII.
Kafulemene, 8, n.(Buk.), foiget-
fulness,
-a k., forgetful.
k. as subj. of kuata with pers.
as obj.f to forget.
Kahaha, 8, ft., a blue bead.
Kahambala, 8, ft., pistol.
Kahambn, 8, ft., bad smell or
odor or scent, stench, stink,
fetidness.
nunka k., to emit a stench, stink.
Kahla, 8, ft., fire, heat or warmth
of fire, fever, candle, gun-
powder.
-a k., hot.
ml a k., hot water.
mubldl udi k., to have fever,
mucl wa k., a match (lucifer).
Ota k., to warm one's self by the
fire.
vinsa k., to make fire by friction,
ignite by friction.
Kahlta, 8, ft., headman, a West
Coast carpenter or mason.
The word comes through the
Lower Congo from Portuguese,
Kahombo, 8, ft., ankle bone.
Kahuluknsu, 8, ft., a small bat.
Kahumbn, 8, ft., elephant.
Kakansala, 8, ft., a Jdnd of Euro-
pean cloth.
Kakanu, 8, n.{dimin. o/lukanu).
k. ka ku dlcu, earring.
k. ka ku munu, finger-ring.
Kakn, i, ft., grandparent, ancestor,
progenitor, forefather, patri-
arch
KAKU— KAMA.
347
Kaku {continued),
k. mukfixl, grandmother.
k. muluml, grandfather.
Kakula, 8, »., a stick of camwood.
Kakula, vL^ to raise up, lift up.
Kakuluku, 8, »., a small bat.
Kala, vl.f cut ofif, chop ofif, ampu-
tate, saw off, sever, shear
off.'
See kosa.
Kala, v., to scratch (as fowl).
Kala, 8, n.{pL is tuala), a small
wire.
Killa, vi.y to be strong, be well, be
vigorous, be arduous, be full-
grown, be mature, be firm, be
steady, be stable, be solid,
develop, grow.
k. with muxlnsa as subj., to in-
crease (as price), rise.
Kalaba, vi., to crawl or creep (as
child).
Kftle, adj.ip.p. of killa, to be
strong, etc.), strong, well,
vigorous, arduous, firm,
steady, stable, solid, hard,
immovable, fixed, steadfast,
powerful, robust, tough (as
meat), violent, severe, serious
(matter), fertile or rich or
productive (soil), loud (voice).
-a bualu buk&le, sacred, holy.
-a miubidi muk&le, healthy.
-a mucima muk&le, brave, fear-
less, of strong heart, coura-
geous, daring, bold, valiant,
stern, impenitent.
-a muxlnga mukllle, dear,
costly, expensive, precious,
valuable.
mubidi mukille, good health.
muntu mukille, an adult, grown
person.
Kale, adv.f long ago, long time ago,
in old times, remote or distant
times, long since, once upon a
time.
-a kale, old, ancient, aged.
bena k., forefathers.
Sometimes we hear kalekale.
Kftlexa, vt., to strengthen, make
strong or steady or firm or
hard, fasten, harden, stretch,
tighten, nourish, bring up,
rear, provide for, support, re-
fresh, stimulate.
k. di, to raise the voice, speak or
talk louder.
k. mucima, to console, com-
fort, solace, cheer, encourage,
soothe, strengthen one's heart.
k. muxlnga, to increase price,
make dear or expensive or
precious, put up the price.
Kalexl, 8, »., leaves of the cassava
beaten and used as greens.
Kalolo, 8, n., goodness, amiability,
kindness, attractiveness, obe-
dience, fairness, justice, hon-
esty, integrity, faithfulness,
gentleness, humanity, humil-
ity, modesty, reverence, trac-
tableness, meekness, docility,
deference, civility, decorum,
politeness, courtesy,
-a k., good, amiable, kind,
attractive, obedient, fair, just,
honest, faithful, gentle, hu-
mane, humble, modest, rever-
ent, tractable, meek, docile,
deferential, decorous, cour-
teous, polite, civil.
Kalu, 8, n.(sing. of tulu, sleep), a
nap.
Kaluaci, 8, n., a kind of bead.
Kalubllubi, 8, n., rapidity, swift-
ness. Generally with the idea
of carelessness.
dl ne k., to do or talk rapidly.
Kalumbu, 8, n., partridge.
Kamia, vt.y to squeeze or compress
or mash or crush or press be-
tween the hands; hence to
milk.
Kama, vi.., to abate, evaporate, dry
up, decrease, diminish, sub-
side.
Kama, v.^ used in the ph. k. ku
mesu, meaning to distort the
face.
m
KAMAMA— KANYINGANYINGA.
Kamama, 8, n., a dumb person, a
mute.
Kamata, vt,, to press or push or
shove down, squeeze together,
compress, cram. tl^K* ,
Kambele, 8, n., peanut.
Kambixl, 8, n., cat.
muaii*a k., Idtten.
Kambulnkidl, 8, n., small sweat-
bee.
Kamelo, 8, n.(£ng.), camel.
Kamembele, 8, n., mosquito.
Kaminyl, 8, »., scorpion.*
Sometimes pronounced kamiiijri-
mlnyl.
Kamlxa, vt., to absorb, dry.
Kamoma, 8, n.y kidney.
Kamoma, 8, n., pill.
Kamonyl, 8, »., pitch, resin. Used
in mending pots.
Kampanda, i, n., a person whose
name you have forgotten or
do not know or do not care to
bother with mentioning. § 353,
Rem.
Kamue, 8, n., mosquito.
Kamiunyiinunyl, 8, n., firefly.
Kanana, taj., to be immovable or
fast stuck in, be steadfast, be
stable, be fixed, be strong,
stand steady or firm or solid.
Kanda, v/., to refuse permission,
forbid, prohibit, restrain, com-
mand or order not to do, dis-
approve.
Kanda, used as adj. with numerals
expressing the idea of exact,
perfect, complete.
Kandamana, vi., to be immovable
or fast stuck in, be steadfast,
be stable, be fixed, be strong,
stand steady or firm or solid.
Kandamixa, vt.^ to make steady or
firm, stick fast in.
Kandangama, 8, n., a kind of
European cloth.
Kandlmba, 8, n., shot used in shell
of shotgun.
clngoma cia ^undlmba, shot-
gun.
Kandimba (continued).
mutelenge wa tundimba, a shell
for shotgun.
Kandlndl, 8, n., swallow.
Kandixa, vt., to wean (child).
Kandolo, 8, n., a kind of European
cloth.
Kaneke, 8, n., a lame or deformed
or dwarfed or paralyzed or
undersized person, a paralytic.
Muena generally precedes this
word.
Kanene, 8, n., the additional or
sixth finger.
Kanga, v/., to roast or parch as
corn, etc*.; fry.
Kanga, vi., to growl or snarl (as
dog).
Kangam<lna, vi,, to be rested.
Kangenene, 8, n., a small red ant
(troublesome about the house).
Kangajlngajl, 8, n., pineapple.
May be spelled kangfixingfixl.
Kanka, vi., to shake, quake,
tremble, quiver, shiver, be
excited, be frightened, be terri-
fied.
Kankenyenkenye, 8, n., firefly.
Kankixa, vt., to shake, cause to
tremble or quake.
Kansanke, 8, n., wrist.
Kantembele, 8, n., measles.
Kantengenene, 8, n., the little
' finger.
Kantetu, 8, n., dizziness, giddiness,
faintness.
dl ne k., to be dizzy, be faint, be
giddy.
KanOxa, vt.^ to make steady or
firm, strengthen, stick fast in.
Causative of kanana.
Kanyanzu, 8, »., switch, rod, whip.
Kanyina, vt.f to wean (child).
Kanyinganyinga, 8, «., grief, sor-
row, sadness, melancholy,
pang, penitence, regret, re-
pentance, unhappiness, anxi-
ety, solicitude, distress, re-
morse, mental agony or suffer-
ing or anguish.
KANYINGANYINGA— KEMA.
349
Kanyinganyinga (continued),
dl ne k., to grieve, be melan-
choly, be sad, be sorrowful, be
sorry, be unhappy, regret,
repent.
Kanyungunyangu, 8, n., dizzi-
ness, giddiness, faintness.
di ne k., to be dizzy, be giddy,
be faint.
KapHen, n.{from French or Eng-
lish), captain of steamer or
soldiers.
.Perhaps should be spelled kahl-
ten.
Kasamba, 8, n., a small pot or
vessel.
Kas^ku, 8, n.{pl. generally used),
laughter, levity, mirth, de-
rision, fun, giggling, snigger.
-a tus^ku, frivolous.
dl ne tus^ku, to giggle, snigger,
titter.
Kasengulu, 8, n., sieve, sifter.
Kasombelu, 8, n., interest (on
something borrowed).
tentekela k., to pay interest.
Katamuka, vi.y to be awake, be
up, be arisen from sleep.
Katamuxa, vL, to awaken, wake,
awake from sleep.
Katataka, adv,, at once, directly,
immediately, instantly, before
. long, now, presently, soon,
forthwith.
Katoto, 8, »., a new-born babe,
infant, child.
Kavuku, 8, n., crumb.
Kaxldl, adv.y always, ceaselessly,
constantly, continually, end-
lessly, eternity, ever, forever,
perpetually, eternally, inces-
santly, habitually.
-a k., immortal, eternal, ever-
lasting.
with neg. v., never again.
Kaxlngl, 8, n., needle.
k. ka kabuasa, pin.
Kaxola, 8, n., brick.
muena tuxola, mason.
Kayabala, vi.y to be stiff, be rigid,
be inflexible, be unbending.
Kay6ke, 8, »., dwarf, pygmy.
See note under pygmy.
Kazaku, 8, n., coat, dress.
Kiba, vt.y to hunt for, look for,
search for, seek.
k. luoxi, to annoy or tease or
provoke or incite an animal to
bite; as, udl uk6ba mbua
luoxi, he is provoking the dog
to bite.
eha, vi,y to decrease or diminish
or reduce in size or quantity,
become smaller or less, shrink
up.
Kehexa, vt.y to shorten, contract,
abridge, abbreviate, decrease,
diminish, reduce, cause to be-
come smaller or less, lessen, be-
little, abase, degrade, disgrace,
debase, dishonor, disobey, be
disrespectful, humble, humili-
ate.
Keja, vt.y to hunt for, look for,
search for, seek.
Kelemena, i'^.(Buk.), to agree, be
alike, be the same, be even, be
equal, be same kind or quality
or character or species or
variety, suit, be adapted to,
be suitable, be level, be similar,
be proper, be mate for, match,
resemble.
neg. of k., to be unlike, be dis-
similar, differ, vary.
Kelemexa, v/.(Buk.), to make even
or alike, make to fit or suit,
make level, match, make the
same or similar or equal or
like, adapt to, make to agree.
K^ma, v.y to exclaim in surprise,
marvel, wonder, be amazed or
astonished. Generally ex-
pressed by grunting.
-a kukfima, miraculous, remark-
able, extraordinary, wonderful,
strange, marvelous.
bualu bua kuk^ma, miracle,
wonder.
3SO
KEMEXA— KU.
K^mexa, v/., to astonish, amaze,
surprise.
Kenena, vi., to shine brightly or
give light (as moon when full).
Kenga, vi., to suffer (as under
pnnishment).
Kensexa, vL, to punish, flog, beat,
cause to suffer, chastise, chas-
ten, discipline, persecute,
annoy, exasperate, irritate,
Kentorment, torture, afflict, aggra-
vate.
Kenka, vi., to shine or give light
(as moon).
Kenya, vi.^ to lighten, flash.
Spoken only of lightning.
Kensakana, v., to look about from
side to side, peer.
KI 7 inierrog. word^ what ? what kind
or sort or quality or character ?
which ? who ? whom ? See §176.
bualu kl ? why? what for?
diba kI7 when? what o'clock?
what hour ? what time ?
Perhaps may also he spelled kai.
Kia, inter jec.y what!
Some say cla.
Kina, vt.^ to hate, be mean to.
KIse, adj.y small, little, minute,
diminutive, fine, thin, narrow,
scarce, few.
dl(5) dlklse, high voice or tone.
Klxa, vt.(Buk.)y to do, make, ac-
complish, act, commit, effect,
form, shape, perform, prepare,
produce, construct.
See ensa.
Kobama, vi.j to be crooked, be
bent, be curved.
Kobame, adj.(p.p. of kobama, de-
formed, bent, humpbacked.
Kobeka, vt.y to bend, curve.
Kobola, V.J to raise a shout or cry
of alarm, call to fight by slap-
ping the hand rapidly over the
mouth while uttering the cry.
Koka, vt., to draw, drag, stretch,
pull, trail, suck up, snuff (as
tobacco).
Koka {continued),
k. muhuya, to inhale, draw the
breath.
cintu cikoka kudi tub&lu, sug-
gested ph. for carriage, wagon,
chariot.
Koko, n.(Eng.), cocoa.
Kola, v.y used with maluva to mean
to be drunk, be intoxicated.
Kolus, n.(Eng.), chorus. Regarded
as class III.
Komba, vt.y to sweep, brush.
Kombola, vt., to shell (com).
Konka, vt.y to ask a question, in-
quire, examine by questioning,
interrogate, question, consult,
demand in sense of asking a
question.
May also be spelled kaonka.
Kenya, vt.y to bend, curve, fold.
Konyansala, vi.y to be crooked,
be bent, be curved, be zigzag.
Kosa, vt.y to cut off, chop off, saw
off, shear off, sever, amputate.
k. bituha, to cut into pieces.
k. cici, to close a trade by break-
ing a stick.
k. hanktkci, to cut half in two.
k. mutu, to behead.
k. nsambu, to settle or decide a
dispute, pronounce judgment,
judge between.
May also be spelled knosa.
Kosexa, vt.y to stop or stay one
from doing, deter, detain,
hinder, impede, interfere with,
prevent, restrain, withhold,
thwart, frustrate, interrupt,
bother, persuade from doing,
dissuade.
k. with diyoyo or muti&yo or
muaka or nvita, to quiet,
quell, hush up, still.
k. lubila, to talk or do quickly.
k. muadi, to comfort, console,
cause to cease crying, pacify,
soothe.
Kosola, vi.y to cough.
Ku, loc. prep.y at, to, unto, direc-
tion towards, as far as, near to.
KU— KUATAKANA.
351
Ku {continue!).
close to, up to, towards, by,
beside, around, against, about,
for (price), from, oflF from.
§ 424 (2)-
k. minu, in the hand.
k . . . to ne k., or k . . . ne
k., from ... to or till or
until.
Compare with mu and ha.
Kua, loc, used as adv., to or as or
unto the house or village of.
§ 87 (g) Rem.
Kuabo, adj., another, some one or
something else, more, other, a
part (some), several.
k . . . k., the one . . . the other,
some . . . others, several . . .
several.
k. wUh locatives prefixed insep.,
elsewhere, somewhere else.
Kuaclka, vi., to be caught.
k. maluvu, to be or get drunk,
be intoxicated, be stupefied
from drink.
Kuaclla, vt., to hold for.
k. mudimu, to work for, serve.
Kuacixa, vt., to help one to hold.
k. bunda, to make ashamed,
disgrace, humiliate, mortify,
cause shame, abase.
k. cixl, to make angry or indig-
nant or mad, annoy, displease,
anger, enrage, exasperate, irri-
tate, throw into passion, pro-
voke, worry, tease, sadden,
tantalize, torment, trouble,
vex, aggravate.
Kuakua, loc. adv., far away, far,
yonder, beyond, remote, dis-
tant, there, thence, thither.
§ 163, Note 3.
Kuama, vt., to bear or yield or
bring forth or produce fruit.
Used only of trees or shrubs or
plants.
Contrast with Ika.
Kuata, vt., to hold, take hold of,
lay hold of, catch, capture,
Kuata {continued).
arrest, grip, restrain, seize,
grasp, apprehend, use.
buowa as subj. and pers. as obj.
of k., to be frightened, be
scared, be afraid, be timid.
dlbansa as subj. oj k. and pers,
as obj., to be in debt, owe.
k. bulunda, to make friendship
with.
k. clxl, to be angry, be enraged,
indignant, be mad, be aggra-
vated, be raging, be furious,
be grieved, be melancholy, be
sad, be sorrowful, be vexed,
be sorry, be in a passion, be
provoked, be worried, be an-
noyed, regret, repent. .
k. dlmoma, to rust, be rusty,
corrode.
k. ha muminu, to choke (as
food), strangle.
k. ku, to take by (as the hand).
k. mudimu, to work, labor, toil.
k. mu mukanda, to take a pho-
tograph or picture.
k. mukflxi ku buk&le, to com-
mit rape, ravish, do violence
to.
k. with bundu as subj. and per-
son as obj., to be ashamed, be
mortified.
k. with tulu as subj. and person
as obj., to be sleepy.
kafulemene or builu as subj. cf
k. wUh person as obj., to ior-
get.
luhlka as subj. oj k. and person
as obj., to lose a bet.
maluvu as subj. oj k. and person
as obj., to be drunk or intoxi-
cated, make cfrunk, stupefy.
maxika as subj. of k. and person
as obj., to be cold, be chilly.
miota as subj. of k. with person
as obj., to be thirsty.
Kuatakana, vi., to adhere, stick
together, cleave together, be
close together, be next to, be
contiguous, be adjacent, touch
352
KUATAKANA— KULU.
Kuatakana (continued). .
each other, join, be near to-
gether, be side by side, con-
geal, be viscid, coagulate,
unite, be thick, solidify (as
liquids).
Kuatakanya, vt.y see kuatakflxa.
KaatakCkxa, vL, to put or place
side by side, unite, join on to,
stick together, cause to adhere.
Kaatansana, v., to catch or hold
each other.
k. with bulunda or bunyana, to
form a friendship with one
another.
k. ku blansa, to clasp each othet
by the hands, shake hands.
Kuba, vt.. to wait for, tarry for,
await.
Kubola, v., see kobola.
Kudl, prep.y used with agent in
passive voice constructions
meaning by. § 202 (a).
Kudlka, vt.j to hang up.
Kudlmuka, vi.j to become (differ-
ent), be changed, be trans-
figured, be turned over or
around, be transformed, be
converted, get (become), turn
into, turn around.
Kudimana, vt.y to change, turn
over or around, convert, invert,
reverse, transform, transfig-
ure, turn into.
k. muaka, to translate, interpret.
k. with muclma or muoyo, to
change one's mind, repent.
Kuetu, loc. adv., at our home or
village. § 140.
k. kudi kunyl? where do we
live?
muena k., our or my. fellow
citizen or countryman or
neighbor. § 141, Rem. i.
Kuha, vt.f to shake, move, wave'
back and forth.
k. mutu, to nod dissent.
Kuhoka, vi., to get free or loose,
get untied.
May be spelled kohoka.
Kubola, vt., to let loose, set free,
loosen, liberate, give freedom
or liberty, pull off (as clothes),
strip off, undress, untie, take
off, unloose, put off.
May be spelled kohola.
Kuhuka, vi., to scale off.
Kubula, vt., to scale off, shave off,
wipe off, dust off, clean off by
rubbing or brushing or scrap-
ing or scouring or scrubbing,
dry (with towel).
Kula, «.(Eng.), choir.
Kulhl, loc. adv. and prep, {made up
oj ku and Ihl, short), near to,
close to, by. § 376.
Kulnya, v., to scratch (in case of
itching).
Kuka, vi., to come out of handle
(as hoe or knife).
Kukala, loc. adv. or prep, {made up
0} ka and the insep. kala), at
or on the border, edge, bound-
ary, beach or shore or bank or
coast, limit, margin, side.
§ 423 (2) (&).
lua k. kua ml, to land, come to
beach.
Kukampanda, loc. adv. {made up
oj ku and kam panda), to or
at a place the name of which
you have forgotten or do not
know or do not care to mention.
§ 423 (2) {h).
Mu or ha may be substituted jor
ku, according to sense.
Kuku, ».(Eng.), cook. Regarded
as belonging to class I.
Kukuabo, adv., elsewhere, some-
where else. § 370.
Kukumina, vi., to stutter, stammer,
have impediment in speech.
Kule, loc. adv. {made up of ku and
adj. le, long), far, far away,
distant, remote. § 372.
-a kule, foreign, strange.
muena k., a foreigner, stranger.
KCIlu, loc. adv. {made up oj ku and
the insep. ulu), up, overhead.
KULU— KUNFUDILU.
353
Ktilu (continued).
OQ high, above, upwards, over.
§ 423 (2) (6).
Kulu, adj., old, ancient, aged.
muanda mukulu, eight.
Kuluka, vi., to fall, drop down,
descend.
Kuluklxa, v., see kulukjkxa.
Kulukulu, adj.y old, ancient, aged.
Kulukjkxa, vi., to be or become old
or ancient or aged.
Kulukaxe, adj.{p.p. o/kulukjkxa),
old, ancient, aged. Generally
used only of persons.
Kulumpa, vi.^ to be old, be aged.
Generally applied only to per-
sons.
Kalampe, adj.(p.p. 0/ kulumpa, to
be old), old. Generally used
only of persons.
Kama, vt.y to beat, pound, strike,
thrash, chastise, chasten, whip,
discipline or punish, scourge,
flog, hit, knock, lash, switch,
pack down, crush down.
k. cingoma, to shoot one with a
gun.
k. dldlba, to weave or make
native cloth.
k. dikilsa, to stumble, stump the
foot, trip.
k. luktkxi, to clap the hands.
k. munda, to beat (heart), pul-
sate, throb.
k. with clsusu or dlsundu, to hit
or beat or strike with the fist.
k. with luhi or dlhi, to slap,
spank, smack, beat or strike
with open hand.
nvula as subj. of k. with dlku-
bakuba as ohj.^ to thunder.
Kama, vt.y to cover a house, put
roof on, thatch.
Kumanda, loc, adv. or prep, {made
up of ku and the insep. manda) ,
at the base, bottom, down,
down-stream, down-country.
§ 423 (2) (&).
k. kua, at the base of, at the rear
end or lower end of, the stern.
Kumangana, v., to collide, strike
each other.
k. mukanu, to smack the lips.
Kumankana, t/., to meet or pass
in the way.
Kumbana, vi.y to be full amount or
quantity or measure, be enough
or adequate or sufficient, suf-
fice, be filled, be complete,
be exact.
dlba as subj. of k., to be time for,
time has* arrived for.
neg. of k., to be insufficient, be
inadequate, be short of.
KumhSLxvLfVt.y to make full amount,
make full or complete measure,
make exact, fill.
Kumlna, vt.y Used with muoyo or
muclma as subj. meaning to
covet, long for, yearn for.
Kumina, vt.y to drive in (as nail),
fasten with a nail, hammer,
knock on, tap on.
Kumudllu, loc. adv. or prep, {made
up of ku and the insep. mu-
dllu), in advance, ahead, be-
fore, first, foremost, forward,
forwards, in front, after (in
time). § 423 (2) (6).
k. kua, in advance of, ahead of,
before, in front of.
matuku a k., the future (days in
front), henceforth, hereafter.
ya k., to go in front, lead the
way, precede.
Kumue, loc. adv. {made up of ku
and mue, one), at the same
place, at one place, together.
§79-
Kumuna, vt.y to knock on, tap on.
Kuna, vt.y to sew, plant (corn).
Kuneku, loc. adv., here, hither,
hence. § 163, Note 2.
Sometimes pronounced kunOku.
Kunfudllu, loc. adv. or prep, {madfi
up of ku and the insep. nfu-
dllu), at the end of, the point
of, at the limit of, at the
boundary, at the border, at
the edge or margin, at the
354
KUNFUT)ILU~KUSA.
Kunfudllu (continued),
banl^ or beach or coast or
shore. § 423 (2) (6).
Kunga, he. adv. {made up of ku
and the adj. nga, other), else-
where, somewhere else. § 370.
Kungakana^vi., to assemble, come
together, gather together, con-
gregate, meet together. Cf.
hungakana.
Kungixa, vt., to collect, put to-
gether, gather together, assem-
ble. Cf. hungakiixa.
Kungula, vL, to shave the head
bare. Mutu is obj.
Kunguia, vi., used with nvula as
suhj, meaning to thunder.
KunkAcl, loc. adv. or prep. {made
up of ku and the insep. nkAci),
between, half-way, in the
midst, in the middle, at the
center. § 423 (2) (6).
kosa or kala followed by k., to
cut half in two.
Kunoku, see kvinek.i.
Kuntaku, loc, adv. used as n.{made
up of ku nd the insep. ntaku
which is jrom the root of cl-
taku, bottom), butt end, rear
end, stern. § 432 (2) (6).
Kuntlnyl, loc. adv., see kukam-
panda.
mu and ha may be substituted for
ku, according to sense.
Kuntu, loc. adv. {made up of ku
and the insep. ntu), some-
where; as, kuntu kunyaya
kudi kule, the place where I
am going is far. § 423 (2) (b).
k. kule, far.
mu and ha may be substituted for
ku, according to sense.
Note that the ntu of k. is the
same root as muntu (person)
and cintu(thing).
Kunxi, loc. adv. or prep. {made up
of ku and the insep. nxi), at
the base, by, near to, beside,
close to,down ward. §423(2)(6).
k. kua, at the base 01, down at
Kunxikldllu, loc. adv.^ or prep,
{made up of ku and the insep.
nxikldilu, the root of the word
meaning end or terminus), at
the hind end. § 423 (2) (6).
-a k., the last one, the one be-
hind, hindermost.
Kunya, v/., to gnaw, bite oflF with
the front teeth.
Kunyl 7 loc. interrog. adv. {made
up of ku and nyl, the same
root as cinyl), where? whith-
er? whence? §§423 (2) (6).
Kunsa, vi., to be or become red or
yellow or brown or crimson or
scarlet or purple.
Kunse, adj,{p.p. of kunza, to be
red, etc.), red, yellow, brown,
purple, crimson, scarlet; used
• also of the natives who are
light colored.
Kunsublla, vi., to he or become
reddish or yellow or brown or
purple.
Kuiizubile,a^7.(/>.^.o/kunsubila),
reddish, yellow, brown, purple.
Kunsuluka, vi., see kunsublla.
Kunzuluke, adj.{p.p. of kunsu-
luka), see kunsubile.
Kuokola, vt., to knock on, tap on.
Kuokuo, loc. adv.y there, thence,
thither, yonder. § 163, Note 4.
Kuola, vt., to pick or pull or pluck
ripe fruit or corn, gather, har-
vest, reap.
Kuona, vt., to scrape, scrub, scour,
rub, shave ofif, plane (boards).
Kuonso, loc. adv. {made up of ku
and the adj. on so, all), any-
where, everywhere, somewhere,
wheresoever. § 79.
dl k., to be omnipresent.
Kuota, vt.y to chop or cut (as fire-
wood).
KCksa, v.f used with mubidl as obj,,
meaning to amend, be better,
convalesce, get or become
better or well, improve in
health, recover, be resuscitated
or revived.
KUSALA— LaMUKA.
355
Kusala, loc. adv. or prep. (made up
oj ku and insep. sala), at the
end of, the point of, limit of,
at the boundary of, at the
border, at the edge, at the
margin, at the bank or beach
or shore or coast. § 423 (2) (b) .
Kusula, loc. adv. or prep. (made up
oj ku and the insep. sula).
see kusala.
Kuta, vt.y to wrap up or roll up or
fold up into a bale or bundle,
bale.
Kutuka, vi.j to come undone or
untied, be untangled, be un-
ravelled.
Kutula, vt.y to loosen, untie, ex-
tricate, set free, liberate, let
loose, give liberty or freedom,
undo, unloose, unravel, un-
tangle.
Kutulula, vt.y to disentangle, un-
bind, undo, unravel, untangle.
Laba, vt., to rub on, rub hand over,
smear on, spread on, coat with.
1. minyl, to grease.
1. mpemba, to whitewash.
Labakana, vi.y to speak or talk
rapidly, chatter, babble, gab-
ble, prattle.
Lablla, v/., to try, test, taste, ex-
amine, attempt, strive, en-
deavor, make effort or trial.
Ladika, vt.y to lay down, put down,
cause to lie down.
f%adlla, vi.y to sit (as hen on eggs),
brood.
L&hal&ha, adv., always, ceaselessly,
constantly, continually, end-
lessly, eternity, ever, forever,
perpetually, eternally, inces-
santly, habitually.
-a I., immortal, eternal, ever-
lasting.
with neg. v., never again.
Lala, vi.y to lie down, recline, re-
pose, slumber, live, sojourn,
stay or stop at, be old.
1. cltabS^la, to keep awake, not
to sleep well, be sleepless, be
wakeful.
1. ne, to cohabit with, lie with,
copulate, have sexual inter-
course with.
I. tulu, to be asleep, sleep,
slumber.
L&ma, v.y to attend to, tend, wait
on, look after, care for, guard,
keep, preserve, mind, nurse,
overlook, oversee, protect,
watch after, take care of,
superintend, aim (gun), take
aim.
La,md>cixa, vt.y to paste or stick
together.
Ii&makana, vi.y to Stick together.
Li&makana, vi.y to be even or level.
L&m&ta, vi.y to adhere, stick to,
touch together, attend, cleave
to, follow after (as attendant),
minister to, serve.
Ld^mfttang^ana, v.y to stick together.
L&mba, vi.y to climb (as vine),
creep.
Lamba, vt., to cook.
Liamba, vt., to handle, examine by
handling, rub hand on, feel,
touch.
Lambakana, vt., to annoy, anger,
vex, exasperate, irritate, ag-
gravate, bother. The word
really means to rub or caress
or fondle.
Lambila, vt.y to touch, feel, handle.
Lambula, vt.y to pay tax or tribute
or duty to, to give an offering
or sacrifice to a superior.
Ld^mlka, vt.y to cause to adhere or
stick together; hence to patch
or mend or sew on a patch.
Ld,mina, vt.y to save up, put away,
lay by, store away, set away.
LS^muka, vi., to come off or apart
(as tilings adhering).
3S6
LAMUNA— LEMBELELA.
L&muna, vt.j to pull apart or off,
tear ofiF, take off.
Landa, adj., poor, destitute, needy,
in need or want.
Landakana, vi.j to be flat or level.
Landaktkxa, vt.y to flatten, mash
down level, level down.
Landala, vi.y to crawl (as cater-
pillar).
Langa, vt., to make smooth,
plane(?).
LAngakana, vi.y to be smoothed or
even or level.
Langaktlxa, vi., to smooth over,
make even or level.
Lftta, vt.y to dream, have a vision.
Generally followed by mutu or
cll&ta or dllu.
lii&takana, vi.y to talk in one's
sleep.
Laya, vt., to tell one adieu or fare-
well or good-bye.
Laya, vt.y to promise.
Le, adj.y long, tall, high, deep,
extent.
1. with the locatives prefixed
insep.y far, far apart, far away.
§79-
Leha, vi.y to grow, develop, in-
crease, become long or tall,
expire or elapse or intervene
(as duration of time). Ha-
leha cituha, nendue, when a
short time has expired, I shall
come.
Lehexa, vt.y to lengthen, add to,
deepen, increase, join to.
Leka, vt.y to sell.
Lekela, vt.y to stop, cease, desist,
discontinue, leave off, halt,
wait, delay, give up (stop), quit,
refrain from, abandon, ab-
stain from, desert, neglect,
fDrsake, omit, set free, unloose,
give freedom, turn loose,
loosen, let loose, let go or
alone, liberate, release, come
to end, finish i^leave off), for-
bear.
1. followed by muaku or mutftyo
Lekela {continued),
or kuakula, to keep silence,
stop talking, hush, be quiet or
silent, be still.
neg. ofy not to give up, perse-
vere, be persistent, be importu-
nate, be resolute, continue.
Lekelcla, vt.y to relax, let go.
Lekexa, vt.y to check, delay, stop
one from doing, detain, deter,
retard, hinder, impede, inter-
rupt, restrain, withhold, wean.
Leia, vt.y to give birth to, bear,
bring forth, produce, deliver
(as child), beget or generate
(male).
1. kabidi, to regenerate.
1. kabixe, to miscarry, give birth
to foetus or immature ch Id,
abort.
muana mulela, a freeman, free-
born, an own child or son or
daughter.
Any verb meaning to be followed
by p.p. passive of 1. means to
be born.
Lelangana, vi., to multiply by
generations, propagate, repro-
duce.
Lelema, vi.y to float.
Lelemuka, vi.y to float.
Lelexa, vt.y to act as midwife or
accoucheuse for, deliver, cause
to give birth.
Lelu, adv.y to-day.
butuku bua 1., last night.
L£ma, vt.y to put string on bow,
put on bowstring.
Lema, viy to be lame, be halt.
muntu mul6ma, a lame person.
Lemba, vi.y to shake or move back
and forth.
Lcmbakana, vi.y to be always
laughing for nothing, be frivo-
lous, be uncertain about, hesi-
tate, vacillate.
Lombelela, vi., to hang down,
dangle, suspend, sway, swing,
vibrate, move to and fro,
LEMBELELA— LUA.
357
Lembelela (coniinued).
oscillate, soar or hover over
(as bird).
Lenduka, vi.y to stagger, totter, reel.
Lenga, v/., to handle, examine by
handling, feel, touch, rub
hand on.
Lenga, vi., not to do one's work
well, trifle.
Lengakana, vi., see lenga (to
trifle).
liongele, adj.^ beautiful, pretty,
lovely, fine, good, pure, chaste,
guiltless, virtuous, elegant, ex-
cellent, worthy, fair or hand-
some, fair or just or honest,
correct, fit, suitable, right, kind,
humane, noble, holy, perfect,
righteous, upright, lawful, rich
or fertile or productive (soil).
with neg. verb: unjust, unkind,
unholy, wrong, not right.
Ijengexa, vt., to make good, pre-
serve goad (as meat with salt),
sanctify, ordain, consecrate,
purge, purify, refine, adorn,
decorate.
Lengaluka, vi.y to change into
something else, the act of
transmigration or metempsy-
chosis, be born again. The
same word is used of the re-
versible pictures in the magic
lantern.
Leula, vt.y to stupefy (as medicine),
anaesthetize.
Lexa, vt.j to show to, exhibit,
direct, expose to view, instruct,
explain to, point out to, illus-
trate, indicate to, teach by
showing.
Lilela, adj., true, real.
ena 1., to be untrue.
Loba, v/., to beckon to or call by
motioning with the hand.
Lobokela, vi.y to be accustomed to,
be experienced or familiar
with, be habituated, be hard-
ened to, be used to, learn by
experience.
Lobola, vi.y to annoy, exasperate,
irritate, tantalize, tease, aggra-
vate, bother.
Loha, vt.y to catch fish with hook,
fish with hook.
LiOka, vi.y to rain, fall as rain.
LiOmba, vt.y to ask for, beg for, pray
for, request, demand, ask the
price.
1. followed by a verbal noun in
lu- means to ask leave or per-
mission to do.
Lombola, vt.y to guide, lead the
way for, conduct, direct, show
the way to.
Lionda, vt.y to follow, pursue, come
or go after.
1. with makfksa or makama or
mikono, to track, trace, tra'l.
Longa, vt., to put or set or place in
line, make tidy.
Longexa, v/.(Buk. or Lower
Congo), to teach, educate, ex-
plain to, instruct, d scipline,
inform, train.
LiOngolola, vt.y to arrange, adjust,
assort^ fix or mend, put or
place or set in order, prepare,
repair, make tidy, make up
bed, set the table.
Lionza, vt., to hit or shoot (as with
bullet fired from a gun).
LiOwa, vt.y to bewitch, conjure,
enchant, trick, charm.
Liua, vi.y to come, become, get
(become), happen, transpire,
come to pass, occur, impend,
turn into, be converted.
1. clsumbu, to assemble, come
together, congregate.
1. ne, to bring, come with, carry,
fetch, get.
1. ha buihi, to come near, ap-
proach, draw near.
1. kahia, to become or get hot.
1. followed by kukala kua ml or
ku mpata, to land, go to the
beach.
1. wUh cidimu or dituku, to
elapse, pass by, intervene.
358
LUA— LUBUKU.
Lua {continued).
1. with hankficl or kunkCkcl or
munkCkcl, to intervene, come
between.
1. joUowed by proper locative^ to
come from.
Sometimes the word is pronounced
dua or vua.
Luacika, vi,{jrom Ipata), to dress,
clothe.
1. bllenga, to adorn, dress up.
Luaclza, vt.{jrom luata),to clothe,
dress.
1. bllensa, to adorn, dress up.
Liuala, 4, »., finger-nail, claw,
talon, fang.
tua or asa with 1., to scratch,
pinch.
Luanda, 4, n., sweat, perspiration.
, hd,tuka or tuka with 1. as subj.j
to sweat, to perspire.
Luangana, v., to fight, quarrel,
resist, wage war, engage in
war. Generally followed by
nvlta.
1. bibula, to wrestle.
Liuanyl, 4, n., tall grass (used in
covering houses).
Luata, vt.y to dress, wear, put on
clothes.
1. bilenga, to be adorned, be
dressed up.
Lubaf u, 4, n., rib of body.
Lubalabala, 4, n., stalk of corn.
Lubale, 4, »., rib of body.
Lub&le, 4, n., hard outside part of
the midrib of the dikadi and
dibondo pabns, arrow without
iron point.
Lub&lu, 4, n., a small gourd cut
lengthwise and used for dip-
ping water.
Lubambalu, 4, w., the batten tied
crosswise on the rafters in
house building.
Lubandu, 4, »., a fathom of cloth
(one fourth of a piece).
Lubanga, 4, w., chin, lower jaw.
Lubanza, 4, n., yard, court, fold,
stockadci enclosure.
Lubansa .{continued).
mutu wa 1., the first wife.
nyOma wa mu 1., domestic
animal.
See ENCLOSURE.
LubAxe, 4, ».(Buk.), midrib of
palm.
Lubengu, 4, n., slice.
Lubftse, 4, «., side of the body.
Lublkl, 4, n., a skin disease which
appears as whitish patches on
the neck, arms and chest.
Lubilu, 4, n.y generally used as adv.,
quickly, hurriedly, rapidly,
suddenly, swiftly, with quick-
ness or rapidity, at rapid pace,
in haste, in hurry, fast, with
expedition, carelessly. As a
noun it means haste, swiftness,
velocity, rapidity, quickness.
endexa or ensexa wUh 1., to
expedite, hurry up, hasten.
Idiklxa or elekexa with 1., to
run a race.
ya or nyema wUh 1., to run away,
retreat.
When the subject is pi., sometimes
1. is made pi. also; as, bakuya
mbllu, they ran away.
Lubinga, 4, »., cave(?).
Luboko, 4, n., used in ph. ciansa
cla 1. meaning left hand.
Lubola, 4, n., penis.
Lubombo, 4, n., crown or top of
head.
Lubombo, 4, n., ten thousand.
Labombo, 4, n.{from v, bomba),
apology.
Lubondia, 4, n., small piece of
cloth worn in front and behind,
a rag.
Lububa, 4, n., an old deserted field.
Lubue, 4, »., a cave.
Lubuklxa, T'/.(Buk.), to teach, in-
struct, educate, inform, explain
to, discipline.
Lubuku, 4, »., a fetish or charm
with which divination is done,
muena 1., diviner, doctor, sor-
cerer, conjurer.
LUBULU— LUHI.
359
Lubula, 4, n., fruit of the rubber
vine.
Liubulabula, 4, n., honey-bee.
Lubumbu, 4, n., weevil.
Labuyl, 4, »., high cliflF or preci-
pice made by landslide.
Ludlabula, 4, »., a species of snake.
Ladlbu, 4, n., small bell with
clapper.
Ladika, v/., to make even or paral-
lel or perpendicular or up-
right or straight, straighten,
put in straight line.
Note that vi. is lul&ma.
Ladiklla, vt.y to make level or even
or straight, aim (gun), take
aim.
Ladimba, 4, n., a small frog.-
Ludlmt, 4, n., tongue, dialect,
language, flame of fire, blaze.
There is also a figurative
sense of deceit.
muena I., liar, hypocrite, fraudu-
lent person.
Ladimuenu, 4, n., mirror, looking-
glass.
Luebexixa, 4, n., inquisitiveness.
dl ne 1., be inquisitive.
Laedi, 4, n., rule, measure, ruler,
tape line, pattern, model, copy.
Lueho, 4, n., salt.
1. lua mbanda, native salt made
from kind of grass.
1. lua nsoka, coarse salt.
Luelekexl, 4, n., rale, ruler, meas-
ure, tap: line, pattern, model,
copy.
Luendu, 4, n., journey, march,
tour, trip, voyage, expedition.
muena 1., a traveler.
ya ku I., to go on a journey or
march or trip.
Luesu, 4, n., pot, frying-pan,
vessel, kettle.
liufatacl, 4, »., percussion cap.
cinKoma eta 1., a cap gun.
Liufu, 4, n.y death.
blxa ku 1., to resurrect, bring to
Ufe,
Liufulla, 4, »., widowhood, widow-
erhood.
Liufuma, 4, n., brass tack, brass
chair nail.
Liuhaha, 4, n., scabbard, sheath,
case for knife.
Luhambu, 4., n., wing.
Luhandu, 4, »., deliverance, salva-
tion, succor, safety, security.
Luhangu, 4, »., fence, wall.
mu 1., yard, enclosure, fold, court,
stockade.
See ENCLOSURE.
Luhansa, 4, n., cup, mug, can,
pitcher.
LiUh&su, 4, n., grasshopper.
Liuh&ta, 4, »., argument, dispute,
controversy, difference, ques-
tion, debate, disagreement,
quarrel, wrangle, wrangling,
discussion, disputation, con-
tention.
ela or elangana or dt ne with
1., to argue, dispute, have a
controversy or discussion or
contention, disagree, differ in
view, quarrel, wrangle, debate.
The pi, is generally used in all
these cases.
Luh&xl, 4, n.(Buk. and Bukuba),
cowry shell.
Luhehele, 4, »., wind, gale, move-
ment of air by fanning.
Luh^ku, 4, n., fibre of palm used in
making cloth.
Liuhemba, 4, »., a white clay or
earth, chalk, whitewash.
laba mpemba, to whitewash.
Luhensu, 4, »., cockroach.
Luhete, 4, n., dried but unsoaked
cassava root.
Luhetu, 4, n.f goods, fortune,
possessions, property, riches,
stuff, substance, we^th, means,
mammon.
-a 1., rich, wealthy.
Liuht, 4, n.{pl. is maht, cf. dihi),
a blow with open hand, a slap,
a smack.
tua or kuma or tuta with 1., to
36o
LUHI— LUKINU.
Luhl {continued),
strike or hit with open hand,
slap, smack, spank.
Luhlka, 4, n., a bet.
dla 1., to bet, wager.
1. as suhj. of kuata and the person
as obj., to lose a bet.
Liuhlnsu, 4, n., fetish, medicine,
charm, idol or image made in
the form of a person. The lu-
hlnffu is generally carved out
of wood.
Luhlya, 4, n., bag, pocket, sack,
scrip.
Luhoca, 4, n.y mucus or pus in
corner of the eye.
Liuhola, 4, n., strip or border or
edge or band sewed around the
margin of a piece of cloth.
Lahongo, 4, n., valley, vale, hollow.
Liuhose, 4, n., a species of grub
worm (edible).
Liuhota, see luhoca.
Luhote, 4, n., sl kind of bead.
Luhuka, vi.f to get out, pass out,
go forth, come out, vacate,
withdraw, evacuate, emerge,
issue, rise or arise (sun), be
dislocated.
kuta kaaluhuka diba or kutu
diba dialuhuka, where the
sun rises, east.
Luhula, vt.y to cast out, drive out,
turn out, eject, chase out, put
out, take out, bring out, expel,
empty.
Luhambe, 4, n., driver ant.
LiUhusu, 4, »., small boil or pimple,
a kind of eruption appearing
mostly on legs and arms.
Luhuxl, 4, n.j dust in the air.
Luida, i^.^Eng.), to read.
Liuidi, 4, w., rule, ruler, measurer,
tape line, pattern, model, copy.
Lulla, v.^from lua, to come), to
come around on this side or
this way, come for; aj, naku-
lulla bintu blwakundaya, I
have come for the things which
you promised me.
Luitabuxu, 4, n., credulity.
-a 1., credulous.
Luixa, vt.y to cause to become.
I. bubanjl, to enrich.
1. buhele, to impoverish.
1. with buhlka or muhtka, to
enslave.
Lttlya, 4, »., warmth, heat, luke-
warmness, tepidness.
-a I., rich or productive or tertile
(soil).
dl ne 1., to be warm, be luke-
warm, be tepid.
1. lua ml, steam.
Sometimes pronounced luya.
Lujljl, 4, w., fly which blows meat,
house-fly.
Lujilu, 4, «., eggplant, aubergine.
Luka, vt,y to braid, plait, spin
(as spider), make (baskets,
mats, strings, etc.).
Laka, v., to spew, vomit.
Ltlka, vt.f to Uck, lap with tongue.
Lukama, 4, n., one hundred.
Lukanku, 4, n., palsy.
Lukanu, 4, n., anklet, wristlet,
bracelet, chain, fetters, bonds,
wire.
elamu 1., to put in chains, chain,
fetter.
1. lukunze, gold.
1. lutoke, brass, silver.
Lukanyl, 4, w.(Buk.), intellect,
intelligence, sense, cleverness,
knowledge, learning, ingenuity,
dexterity, smartness, bright-
ness, mind, ability, discretion,
genius, imagination, judgment,
prudence, reason, reflection,
skill, skilfulness, understand-
ing, wisdom, advice, counsel.
See lungenyi.
Lukela, 4, «., spur of fowl.
Lukende, 4, n.y bubble, froth,
foam, scum.
Luklnda, 4, «., trap, snare.
Lukinu, 4, »., craftiness, wiliness,
meanness, cruelty, inhumanity,
heartlessness, unmercifulness,
unkindness, unfriendliness.
LUKINU— LUMBULUILA.
361
Luktnn {continued),
-a 1., crafty, wily, mean, cruel,
inhuman, merciless, pitiless,
heartless, unfriendly, unkind,
unmerciful.
muena 1., a villain.
Luklta, 4,».,grave, sepulchre,tomb.
The pi. means cemetery, grave-
yard.
liukobo, 4, n., a wooden hook used
in hanging up baskets.
Liukodt, 4, »., a creeper -used ex-
tensively in making houses,
fences, mats, nets, baskets, etc.
Lakofla, 4, n., eyelash.
Lukole, 4, n., the act of taking a
person as a hostage.
munta wa 1., a hostage. A per-
son of same village or family as
the debtor, held for the debt.
Lakombo, 4, n., broom, brush.
Lukongeba, 4, n., elbow.
Lttkonko, 4, n., hammer.
Lukonkono, 4, n.{from konka, to
ask), inquisitiveness.
dl ne 1., inquisitive.
Lukonyi, 4, w., knuckles exposed
to strike with.
taa 1., to strike or hit with
knuckles.
Lukosolo, 4, n., a cough.
Lukota, 4, n.y famine, starvation.
Lukototo, 4, n.j crumb, crust.
Laku, 4, w.(Buk.), the loop or rope
with which to climb the palm
for the wine.
Lukuha, 4, w., tick (on dog).
Lukuna, 4, w., enmity, hatred,
malice, revenge, unfriendliness,
unkindness, vengeance, bru-
tality, retribution, despite, ani-
mosity, disgust, abhorrence,
detestation, hostihty, spite.
-a 1., hateful, malicious, hostile,
revengeful, unfriendly, unkind,
brutal.
dl ne 1., to abhor, despise, detest,
hate, dislike.
This word is used only with
reference to persons.
Lukunde, 4, n., a small bean, black-
eyed pea.
Lukundu, 4, n., hip.
Liukunyi, 4, n., stick of firewood,
fuel. PI. generally used.
Lukflsa, 4, n.y generally used as
adv.y see labllu.
LukCksu, 4, n.y hoe, spade.
LukAxt, 4, n.y clapping of the hands*
tuta or kuma with 1., to clap the
hands.
Lula, vi.y to be bitter.
Liul&ma, vi.y to be even or parallel
or straight or perpendicular or
upright. The vt. form is
ladlka.
Lul&me, adj.{from lul&ma),
straight, direct.
Lul&mlza, vt., to make straight,
straighten.
Lalavi, 4, n.y eyelash.
Lulelelele, 4, n.y fern.
Lulelu, 4, n.y the power or capac-
ity to give birth to or bear
young, fruitfulness, fecundity-
child-bearing.
di ne 1., to be fruitful or fertile or
prolific or fecund or produc-
tive (as male or female in pro-
ducing young).
Lulengu, 4, n., the poison put on
arrows, venom.
Lulombo, 4, n.y beggary.
muena 1., a beggar.
Lulunffu, 4, n.y pepper.
Liuna, vt.y to cohabit with, copu-
late, lie with, have sexual in,
tercourse with. Used only of
males.
Lumbldl, 4, n.y palm oil rendered
or purified; also a kind of
bead.
Liunbu, 4, n.(pl. is ngumbu), fence,
wall.
mu I., yard, fold, court, stockade,
enclosure.
See ENCLOSURE.
Lumbuluila, vt.y to be advocate
for, intercede for, plead for.
36a
LUMBULULA— LUNKOMBE.
Lumbulula, vt., to judge or settle
or decide a trouble or palaver,
arbitrate, hold a court or
council, pronounce judgment,
try.
Liumembo, 4, n., a native bell made
of iron, a drum made of wood.
Luminsu, 4, n.{from Portuguese),
Sunday, Sabbath. The pi, is
generally mbinga.
ditaku dta mp&tuklla {or nda-
hukilu) wa L., Monday.
Sometimes pronounced Lubinsu.
Lumlnylminyi, 4, ft., centip>ede.
Liumixa, vt., see luma.
Liumosa, 4, n., left-handedness.
muena 1., a left-handed person.
Lumpukusu, 4, n., greediness,
gluttony.
-a 1., greedy, gluttonous.
maena 1., a glutton.
Luma, 4, n., fame, report, news,
rumor, hearsay, information.
endexa 1., to spread news.
1. as subj. of endakana, the news
spreads.
Luma, 4, n.{jrom uma, to be dry),
drought, dryness.
Lumuenu, see ludlmuenu.
Lumtknyl, 4, n., pupil of eye.
Lumunyu, 4, »., papyrus or reed
(used in making mats).
Lunda, vi., to grow, develop, get
stout or corpulent cr fat, in-
crease in size, wax (m«K)n).
Lundamana, vi., to squirm, wrig-
gle, crawl (as caterpillar).
Lundlxa, v/., to add to, enlarge, in-
crease, exaggerate, broaden,
widen, fatten.
Lundumuka, vt ., to bounce, bound,
rebound, spring.
Lunsa, vt.y the act of giving a
present of something to eat to
one accidentally wounded by
the person who inflicted the
wound, in order to cure the
sore.
Lunga, vt.y to poison.
Lunsa, vt.y to season, cook with
seasoning.
neg. of 1., to be unseasoned.
Lunsa, vt.y to lengthen, add to,
join to, increase.
Lunsakana, vt.y to increase in
length.
Lungakanya, vt.y see lungakfiza.
Lungakflxa, vt.yto add to, lengthen,
increase, join on to.
Lunganya, vt.y see lungakAxa.
Lunsenyl, 4, n., intellect, intelli-
gence, sense, cleverness, knowl-
edge, learning, ingenuity,
dexterity, smartness, bright-
ness, mind, ability, discretion,
genius, imagination, judgment,
prudence, reason, reflection,
skill, skilfulness, understand-
ing, wisdom, advice, counsel.
di ne 1., to be smart, be wise, be
learned, be intelligent, be in-
tellectual, be bright, be sensi-
ble, be skilful, be expert, be
clever, be ingenious, be pru-
dent.
ela or elangana with 1., to think,
deliberate, consider, meditate,
conceive, reason, reflect, muse,
ponder.
ha 1., to advise, counsel, give
advice.
Lungonyonyl, 4, n., chameleon.
Lunsufu, 4, n.y white or gray hair.
Lunstljl, 4, n.y palm nut.
minyi a nsAJi, palm oil.
Lungula, vi.y to be burnt or
scorched.
Lunffuluka, vi.y to prolong, pro-
tract, talk a long time.
Lunguxa, vt., to bum or scorch (as
food).
Lunkelu, 4, n., used as adv.y soon,
early in the morning, about
sunrise, little after dawn.
butuku to ne 1., all night long.
See dinda.
Lunkombe, 4, »., a musical instru-
ment of one string.
LUNKUNVU— LUSUKI.
363
Lunkanvu, 4, n.j a drum made by
hollowing out a log.
Liunyeke, 4, «., honey-bee.
Lunyonyl, 4t^n.f a hair of bead or
head.
Lunyungru, 4, n., dizziness, giddi-
ness, faintness.
dl ne 1., to be dizzy, be giddy,
be faint.
Lunsense, 4, n., musical instru-
ment of three strings.
Liuobo, 4, n., a stick to which a dog
is tied for leading, a latch.
Luoso, 4, n., a hair on the body of
person or animal, wool. PL is
mioso. § 45, Rem.
liuoso, 4, »., rice. Perhaps from
Portuguese.
liuoxl, 4, n., fierceness, ferocity,
viciousness.
-a 1., vicious, ferocious, fierce,
biting.
kftba 1., to provoke or excite or
incite or tease an anmial to
bite.
Lius&la, 4, n., feather.
Lius&lu, 4, n., tribal or tattoo mark.
t&ha, 1., to tattoo, make tattoo
mark.
liUsase, 4, n., spark.
liUse, 4, n., affection, compassion,
sorrow for, favor, mercy, love,
grace, kindness, pity, devotion,
humahity.
•a 1., merciful, compassionate,
humane, gracious.
dlha dia 1., alms.
ena ne 1., to be merciless, be
pitiless, be heartless, be un-
merciful.
ha 1., to pity, show mercy or com-
passion or favor to, take pity
on, be gracious to, be sorry for,
S3rmpathize with, care for.
unva or ufua wiih 1., to feel pity
or compassion.
Liusftke, 4, n., side, division, part,
portion, section.
Lusekeseke, 4, n., slenderness,
slimness, tallness, thinness.
Liusekeseke {continued).
There is always the idea of
tallness and slenderness at the
same time.
-a 1., slender, slim, tall, thin.
Lusele, 4, n., hard outside part of
the midrib of the dlbue palm.
Lusele, 4, n., sand-bank. The pi.
is generally used for loose sand
or dirt. The dimin. kasele
means a grain of sand.
Luselesele, see lusekeseke.
Luselu, 4, n.ijrom sela, to pay the
dowry), dowry given at mar-
riage- by the groom to parents
of the bride.
Liusensa, 4, n., sand bank. The
pi, is generally used for loose
sand or dirt. The dimin.
kasenga means a grain of
sand.
Luseuffu, 4, n.y horn of animd.
Lusoka, 4, n.y pebble. The dimin.
kasoka means a grain of sand.
Lusoko, 4, «., evesdropping, spy-
ing.
muena 1., evesdropper, spy.
Liusokolo, 4, n.y rafter of house.
Lusole, 4, n.y mucus from nose.
PI. generally used,
hemba 1., to blow the nose.
Lusouffo, 4, n.y point, end, mouth
of river.
ena ne 1. lutue, to have a dull
point.
1. lua dibele, nipple of the breast.
Luflongo, 4, n.y a disease of the
eye in which the pupil becomes
white, resulting in blindness.
Lusono, 4, n.y a grass used in cover-
ing houses.
Lusonso, 4, n.y nail, screw.
Lusu, 4, n.y bad odor or smell or
scent, stench, stink.
nunka 1., to stink, emit a stench.
Lusua, 4, n.y a winged ant used as
food.
Lusuki, 4, n.y a hair of beard or
head.
3^4
LUSUMBI— MALUA.
Lusumbi, 4, n., a species of ante-
lope.
Lusomu, 4, n.y a small gourd used
in bleeding or cupping.
Lusomuinu, 4, «., fable, parable,
folk-lore, legend, story, saying,
proverb, tale, illustration, ex-
ample.
ela 1.) to tell or narrate a fable,
parable, etc.
Lutttyltilyi, 4, «., talkativeness,
loquacity, loquaciousness.
-a 1., talkative, loquacious.
Lute, 4, «.(^/. is mate, § 51),
spittle, saliva, expectoration.
ela or tuila with 1., to spit, ex-
pectorate.
Lutende, 4, »., ball, bullet.
cingoma cia 1., rifle.
mutelenge wa 1., cartridge (with
ball).
Lutete, 4, n., seed of pumpkin, etc.
liutolokela, 4, n., spark.
Liutonga, 4, n., bud, sprout, shoot.
Lutu, 4, «., mould, mildew.
kuata 1., to mould, mildew.
Iiutuhu, 4, n.y papyrus or reed used
in making mats.
Iiutulu, 4, n.y patience, gentleness.
-a 1., patient, gentle.
Iiutmnbatainba, 4, n., a half-
grown goat, a kid. May be
male or female.
Lututu, 4, «., bubble, froth, foam,
scum.
LuTi, 4, »., gray or white hair.
Luvu, 4, »., trough in which dogs
are fed or corn beaten.
Luvungula, 4^ «., key.
Luxiba, 4, »., whistle, flute.
Iiuximlnyinyu, 4, »., fable, para-
ble, folk-lore, legend, story,
saying, proverb, tale, illustra-
tion, example.
ela 1., to tell or narrate a fable,
parable, etc.
This word seems to be derived
from ximinyina, to lie to.
Luxixa, 4, »., a small crawfish,
shrimp.
Luxobo, 4, «., small seed or other
object used for tossing in
gambling.
Luxola, 4, »., scissors, shears. The
pl. is generally ditnin, form
tuxola.
Luxoxa, 4, n., a small crawfish,
shrimp.
Luz&di, 4, n.y finger nail, claw,
tallon, fang.
tua or asa with 1., to pinch or
scratch.
Luzakalu, 4, n., palsy.
Luz&la, see luz&dl.
Luz6ba, 4, n.y tassel of corn.
Mabele, pl. of 5, n.(pl. of dibele,
breast), milk.
Jldika or kandixa or lekexa or
kanyina followed by muana
m., to wean.
Madlmba, pl. of 5, n., a musical
instrument made by fastening
gourds of different sizes to flat
sticks, and played by beating
on the sticks, xylophone.
Madingi, pl. of 5, n., see didlnga.
Ma'fi, pl. of 5 or 6, »., a lie, falsehood,
untruth, fraud, hypocrisy, un-
reliableness, untrufhfulness.
-a m., unreliable, unthithful.
muena m., a liar, fraudulent
person, hypocrite.
Mafuta, pl. of 5 or 6, »., lard.
Maihl, adv.y day after to-morrow.
Makanya, pl. of 5, n., tobacco.
Makelela, adv., to-morrow, yester-
day.
i Malaba, adv., to-morrow, yester-
day.
Malasa, n.(£ng.), March (the
month).
' Malua, pl. of 5 or 6, w., beer made
from brewing corn or millet
or cassava; sometimes used for
palm wine. Rarely the sing.
bualua is heard.
MALUVU— MAXIKA.
36s
MaluYU, pi. of 5 or 6, «., palm wine.
May also he used far the beer
made from corriy etc.
budlmi bua mloxi ya follt/wed by
maluYU a mputu, vineyard.
ena ne m. mu mesu, to be sober.
hola or tomboka or buluka or
kola or kuaclka followed by
m., or m. as subj. of kuata wilh
person as obj.y to be drunk,
be intoxicated.
m. a mputu, wine (imported).
mamoma a kuenza n*& m. a
mputu, grapes.
muoxi wa mamoma a kuenza
n'A followed by vlnyo or
maluvu a mputu, grape-vine.
m. as subj. of hadixa and the
person as obj.y to intoxicate,
make drunk.
Mam pa, pi. of 5 or 6, n., European
bread made from wheat flour.
Mamu, I, n.y mother, mistress;
lock of door.
m. ' mukulu, aunt (older than
mother).
m. muakunyi, aunt (younger
than mother).
Ma'-muenu, i, n.{pl. is bama-
muenu), mother-in-law. § 42,
Note 3.
May be used by husband or wife.
Mananaxi, pi. of 5 or 6, n., per-
fume, scent. Doubtless an im-
ported word.
Mankenda, pi. of 5 or 6, n., tidiness,
cleanliness, neatness, dainti-
ness.
-a m., clean, neat, tidy, dainty.
Some say makenda.
Mankfixl, i, n.{pl. is bamanktkxl),
aunt (on father's side).
Mansftba, i, n.{pl. is bamans^ba),
uncle (maternal).
Manteke, pi. of 5, n., butter. An
imported word.
Manyanu, pi. of 5 or 6, n., dirt or
filth or uncleanness or foulness
of person.
-a m., dirty, filthy, unclean, foul.
Masandl, pi. of 5 or 6, «., adultery,
fornication, impurity, licen-
tiousness, carnal knowledge,
whoredom, lust, lasciviousness,
lewdness, unchastity, unclean-
ness, immorality. Refers either
to mule or female.
-a m., adulterous, immoral,
licentious, impure, lustful,
lewd, unchaste, unclean, las-
civiousness.
ena ne m., to be pure, chaste,
virtuous. «
enda m., to commit adultery or
fornication.
enda n'andl m., to seduce one.
muana wa m., bastard, illegiti-
mate child.
muena m., fornicator, adulterer,
harlot, prostitute, whore,
whoremonger.
mukfixi wa m., harlot, whore.
M&ta, vi.y to fall or descend (as
rain), drop, drip, trickle.
Matabixa, pi. of 5 or 6, n., the
extra amount given to con-
clude trade, gift, present, in-
terest, rent, ** dash."
tentekela m., to pay interest.
Matamata, pi. of 5, n., tomato.
From Portuguese. The same
form is generally used for sing,
and pl.y but sometimes in sing,
we hear ditamata.
Matamba, pi. of 5, «., leaves of the
manioc or cassava beaten and
used as greens.
Matandu, pi. of 5 ' or 6, n.(from
tanda, to abuse), abuse, mal-
treatment, ill treatment,
wrangling.
Maxa, pi. of 5 or 6, «., a dance,
dancing.
xa m., to dance.
Maxi, pi. of 5 or 6, n., blood.
tuka m., to bleed.
Maxika, pi. of 5 or 6, n., coldness^
chilliness, coolness.
-am., cold, chilly, cool.
366
MAXIKA— M-EMA.
Maxika (continued).
buexa mu nsubu wa m., to im-
prison.
cidimu cla m., winter, cool
season.
m. as subj. of kuata and person
as obj.y or unva m., to be cold
or chilly, feel cold.
mukelenge or mul&ml with wa
nsubu wa m., jailor.
muntu wa nsubu wa m., pris-
oner.
nsubu wa m., jail, prison.
Maximi, pi. of 5, n., see dixima.
Maxua, pi. of 5 or 6, «., steamer,
steamboat. An introduced
word.
Maya, «.(Eng.), May (the month).
Mayowa, pi. of 5 or 6, «., rainy
or warm season, summer.
South of the equator this ex-
tends from September to May.
Sometimes is heard the sing.
clowa(7).
Mb&di, 3, w.(Buk.), place, posi-
tion, situation, room, space.
See muaba.
Blb&du, see mb&di.
Blb&la, 3, »., menses. This word
is also sometimes used with
reference to those who, on
account of some superstition,
will not eat with others.
mukfixi udi kum., the woman is
having her menses, i.e., is at
the menstrual period.
Mb&lab&la, 3, n., wildcat, bush
cat.
muan'a m., kitten.
Mbanda, n.{douhtless class IV, hav-
ing sing, lubanda), used in ph.
lueho lua m., the native salt
made from a kind of grass.
It is not sodium chloride.
Mbalanga, 3, n., smallpox.
Mbalanta, 3, n.Qrom Eng. ve-
randa) y veranda, porch.
Mb&xib&xi, pi. of 3 or 4, «., fright,
fear, timidity, shyness, wild-
Mh&xlb&xl {continued).
ne?3. Generally used only oj
animals.
di ne m., to be fearful, be timid,
be shy, be frightened, be
afraid, be wild, fear, cringe.
Mbdle, 3, n.y a species of monkey.
Mbelu, 3, n.f threshold, entrance,
doorway.
-a muxuku wa m., of same
family.
ku or ha with m., the space just
in front of the door of house.
Mbl, I, n.{pl. is bambi), husband.
This word is always jcllowed
insep. by the proper poss. pro.,
having the separating consonant
y. § 42, Note I.
Mbl-clna, i, n.{pl. is bambl-clna),
brother-in-law or sister-in-law.
Always means the brother or
sister oj the husband only.
This word always has the poss.
pro. inserted between mbl and
clna, with y as a separating
consonant. §§42, Note 2; 138,
Rem. 3, and Note.
Contrast with bukonde and se^
mbl.
Mblndu, pi. of 3 or 4, «., diri «•
filth or uncleanness or foulneca
on the person.
-am., dirty, filthy, unclean, foul.
Mboi, I, n.(Eng.), attendant of
foreigner, "boy." May be
male or female.
Mbondo, 3, n., a large frog.
Mbote, 3, n.f button.
dlsu dia m., buttonhole.
Mbowo, 3, n., buffalo.
Mbua, 3, «., dog.
muktkxi*a m., bitch.
dimin. kabua, pup.
Mbulankete, 3, n.(£ng.), blanket.
Mbumbu, 3, «., borer (insect).
Mbungu, 3, n., loom.
Mbuxl, 3, n., goat (male or female).
muan'a m., kid.
M£ma, v/., to lift up, pick up, take
up, get.
MEME— MIXILA.
367
Meme, Simple Disjunctive pers. pro.
I, me. § 105.
Mftna, vi.j to bud, sprout, germi-
nate, shoot, cut teeth (as young
child).
Mene, aiv. {derived from adj. root
ine, alone), alone, very, actual,
just, exactly, indeed, absolute-
ly, identical, really, real, very
same, true, truly. This word
is always postpositive.
Meneka, v/., to glorify, adore, do
obeisance to, honor, praise,
pay homage to, esteem, hallow,
magnify, regard, respect, re-
vere, reverence, venerate, give
salutation or respects or greet-
ing to a chief, salute or greet a
chief.
Menekela, vt.y see meneka.
Menya, pi. of 5 or 6, »., urine.
Sometimes pronounced menyu.
Mesa, pi. of 5, n., table. From
Portuguese.
longolola blntu ha m., to set
the table.
umuxa bintu ha m., to clear the
table.
Bfftta, vt., to daub, plaster.
Mexl, pi. of 5, w., intellect, intelli-
gence, sense, cleverness, knowl-
edge, learning, ingenuity, dex-
terity, smartness, brightness,
mind, ability, discretion,
genius, imagination, judgment,
prudence, reason, reflection,
skill, skilfulness, understand-
ing, wisdom, advice, counsel.
di ne m., to be smart, be wise,
be learned, be intelligent, be
intellectual, be bright, be sen-
sible, be skilful, be expert, be
clever, be ingenious, be pru-
dent.
ela or elangana with m., to
think, deliberate, consider,
meditate, conceive, reason, re-
flect, muse, ponder.
ha m., to advise, counsel, give
advice.
MI, pi. of 5 or 6, «., water; juice
of cane, fruit, etc.
hona mu m., to fall overboard.
luiya or ciyuya with -a m.
steam.
m. a kahia, hot water.
m. a mikanda, ink.
m. a Nzambi, communion wine.
m. manlne, ocean, sea.
m. matalale, cold water.
muci wa m. a mikanda, pen
(writing).
munyinyi wa mu m, fish.
Note that the dimin. is tiil(tuai)
or tulma.
Perhaps it is best to spell this
word mai.
Mlamina, v., to sprinkle, sow (as
millet).
m. ml, to baptize.
Midima, pi. of 2, n., darkness,
gloominess. Has no reference
to color hut only to lack of light.
Pronounced as if written mi-
dima.
Miflla, pi. of 2, n., soot.
Mlluluba, pi. of 2, n.f blood or
bleeding from the nose.
Mina, v., to swallow.
MInyi, pi. of 5, n.{sing. is dllnyl,
fat), oil, ointment.
ela m., to anoint.
m. a ngombe, butter.
m. a ngtiji, palm oil.
m. a ngulube, lard.
Miota, pi. of 2, «., thirst.
dl ne m.f or m. as subj. of kuata
with pers. as obj.y to be thirsty.
mfina^hulxaTf'i/Am., to quench
or satisfy or slake or appease
thirst.
The common Lulua form is
nyota. § 43, Rem.
Misasa, pi. of 2, n., middle of
forenoon or morning (about
nine o'clock).
Misele, pi. of 2, n., a discharge
(perhaps venereal).
Mixl, pi. of 2, n., siftings of manioc.
Mixlla, pi. of 2, n., soot.
368
MONA— MPUALALA.
Mona, vt.^ to see, behold, look at,
observe, notice, regard, view,
witness, examine by looking
at, find, inspect, overlook,
oversee, superintend, perceive,
watch after.
dianjlla kumona, to discover.
m. kaceci, to menstruate.
m. talala, to look at or behold
steadfastly, gaze at, stare
at.
m. followed by mua and in fin,,
to be able, can, have power,
be possible, be competent, be
capable, be qualified.
neg. of m. followed by mua and
in fin. J to be unable, be im-
possible, be incompetent, be
incapable.
neg. of m. with bimpe, to see
indistinctly.
neg. of m. with mua knbftla, to
be innumerable, be countless.
This word may perhaps be spelled
mtkna or mana.
Monexa, vt.y to cause to see, to
reflect (as mirror).
Contrast with muenexa.
Mpaka, 3, n., hard excrement as
result of constipation.
Mpftla, 3, n.j brow, forehead,
sometimes used in sense of face
or features or countenance or
visage.
ku m., in advance, ahead, before,
at front end of, before one's
face, in presence of, first, fore-
most, forward, forwards, in
front, in front of, after (in
time).
matuku a ku m., hereafter,
henceforth, the future (days in
front).
nyenga or fundika with m., to
frown, knit the brow, scowl.
tanglxangana m., to face each
other.
ya ku m!, to go in front, lead the
way, precede.
Mpalata, 3, n., coin, money.
mul&mi wa m., treasurer.
MpandakaDya, 3, n., fork (of
stick).
mucl wa m., a forked stick.
Mpandu, 3, n.(Jrom handa, to
split), tongs. This is a split
stick and used by blacksmiths.
Mpata, 3, n.y a plain, a treeless
plateau, beach or shore,
-a m., wild (as animal).
lua ku m., to land, come to
beach.
Mpatu, 3, n.{from Portuguese),
duck.
Mpfttukilu, 3, n.(Jrom hfttuka, to
go out), used in the ph. dltaku
dla m. wa liuminsu meaning
Monday.
Mpelu, 3, n., stone for grinding
grain (the one held in the
hands), smoothing iron.
Mpena, 3, n.(Eng.), pen (writing'.
Mpencila, 3, «.(Eng.), pencil.
Mpesa, 3, n.{from French), a piece
of cloth eight yards long.
Mpete, 3, n., used in ph. clombe
cla mpete meaning the dried
but unsoaked cassava root.
Mpica, 3, n.(Eng.), pitcher, jug.
Mpindeu, adv.y at once, imme-
diately, directly, instantly, be-
fore long, now, at once, pres-
ently, soon,*forthwith.
' Mpitolo, 3, n.(Jrom Eng. petro-
leum), petroleum, coal oil.
Mpoci, 3, n., a slang expression
meaning beauty, handsome-
ness.
-a m., beautiful, handsome,
pretty.
Mpokolo, 3, n.f spring, fountain,
source of stream, well (though
wells are unknown).
MpoluJ, 3, «.(Eng.), porridge.
Mponda, pi. of 3 or 4, «., millet.
See note under wheat.
Mpualala, 3, n., native cloth made
from fibre of palm leaves.
MPUKA— MUAKUNYI.
369
Mptkka, I, n.(pl. is bamptkka),
doctor, medicine man, chann
or fetish or idol maker, physi-
cian, diviner, sorcerer, con-
jurer. Note thai the word
m&nga, generally follows mptk-
ka.
This word is derived from hfika,
to make medicine.
Mpuku, ^jH.f a generic word mean-
tng rat or mouse.
Mpumbu, 3, n.f he goat.
Mpungi, 3, n., trumpet, bugle,
cornet, horn.
Mpus, 3, n.(Jrom Eng. puss), do-
mestic cat.
muan'a m., kitten.
Mputa, 3, n., sore, ulcer, cut, gash,
wound, boil, abscess.
tftha m., to wound.
Mputu, 3, n.y the unknown foreign
country of the white man.
Perhaps this word is derived
from a corruption of the
name Portugal, for the Portu-
guese were the earliest white
settlers near the mouth of the
Congo River. Hence the word
might begin with a capital
letter.
maluvu a m., imported wine.
m. nyunyu, pigeon (tame).
muena m., a foreigner.
Mtt-, insep. verb prefix used as
sub. conj.y as, just as, like.
§465.
Mu, loc. prep.f in, into, inside,
inside of, inward, among,
through, within, out of, with-
out. § 424 (i).
mu nxlla, along the path.
Contrast with ku and ha.
Mua, loc. word used as adv.y to or
at or unto the house or village
of. § 87 (<f), Rem.
Mua, adv.j used in indirect question
constructions y followed by in fin.,
meaning how. § 472 {d).
Muaba, 2, n., place, situation,
position, room, space.
di ne kaba (dimin.) kamue, to
be near together, be next to
each other, be in the same
place.
mu m. kamuena bantu, an un-
inhabited place, desert.
The cimin. kaba is used with the
adjs. kab&le and kaklse
meaning almost, nearly.
Muabi, 2, n., good luck, fortune.
di ne m., to be fortunate, be
lucky.
ena ne m., to be unfortunate, be
unlucky.
Muadl, 2, n., the first wife married.
cllonde, m., the first concubine,
i.e., the second wife taken.
Muadl, 2, n.f crying, wail, mourn-
ing, weeping, lamentation,
noise or sound of crying, roar
(as lion),
kosexa or hulxa ?£;}//( m., to com-
fort, console, cheer up, cause
to cease crying, pacify, soothe.
Muadl, 2, n.(Buk.), large orna-
mented mask used in dancing.
Muadiktixl, i, n., mother of new-
bom babe.
Muaku, 2, n.f language, dialect,
conversation, speech, talking,
noise or report of human
voices, sound of noise.
-a m., noisy, quarrelsome.
andamuna or kudlmuna with
m., to translate, interpret.
kosexa or xiklxa with m., to
hush, quiet, quell, still.
lekela m., to keep silence, stop
talking, hush, be quiet, be
silent, be still.
Muakuldl, i, «., advocate, attorney,
intercessor, lawyer, councillor.
Muakullu, 2, n., language, dialect,
speech, manner of speaking.
Muakunyl, i, n., younger brother
or sister, junior.
mamu m., aunt (maternal aunt
younger than the mother).
370
MUAKUNYI— MUANDA.
Muakunyl {continued).
muana wa m., nephew or niece
or child of a younger brother
or sister.
muandam., seven.
tatu m., uncle (paternal and
younger than the father).
This word, when meaning brother
or sister, is usually followed by
the poss. pro. enclitic. § 138,
Rem. 2.
Mualala, 2, n., comb of cock, back
fin of fish.
Muambi, i, «., teacher, instructor.
m. wa bualu bua Nzambi,
priest, minister, preacher, mis-
sionary.
m. wa malu kai manse kulua,
prophet, seer.
mukelenge wa bambi ba bualu
bua Nzambi, high priest.
Muambldi, i, n., teacher, instruc-
tor.
Muambldidi, i, n., advocate, attor-
ney, lawyer, intercessor, coun-
cillor.
Muamua, loc. adv. far, far away,
beyond, remote, distant, there,
thence, thither, yonder. There
is always the idea of in or into.
§ 163, Note 3.
dlxia dia muamua, across, on
the other side of.
Muana, i, n., child, infant, off-
spring, descendant, baby, the
young of, seed, issue, servant,
slave, subject, attendant, min-
ister.
ena muan*abo ne, to be unlike,
be dissimilar.
muan*abo ne, mate, match, of
same kind or sort or quality or
character or species or variety,
of like or similar kind.
l^a.nsi(dimin.) kabixe, foetus, im-
mature child, still-bom child.
muan'a bute, first-bom child,
eldest, senior.
muan*a with mbftlabftla or
mpus or kambixl, kitten.
Muana (continued).
muan'a mbuxl, kid.
muan*a mukala, last-bom of
youngest child.
muan'a mukoko, lamb.
muana muktixl, girl, daughter,
female child.
m. mulela, an own son or
daughter or child, free/ an,
free-born person.
m. muluml, boy, son, male child.
muan'a ngombe, calf.
muan'a ngulube, pig.
muan'a nktksa, toe.
muan'a nkflsa munlne, great
toe.
muan'a nsfthl, key.
muan'a nxl, orphan.
m. wa masandl, bastard, illegiti-
mate child.
m. wamuan'etu (§ 138, Rem. 5^,
nephew, niece.
m. wa muakunyl, child of a
younger brother or sister,
niece, nephew.
m. wa with mukelenge or
nfumu, prince.
m. wa mukulu, child of an
. elder brother or sister, niece,
nephew.
tula m., to abort, miscarry.
The pi. has sense of posterity,
progeny; also semen.
The possessive enclitic forms
muan'etu, etc., mean brother,
sister, cousin, fellow citizen,
neighbor, of same family or
clan or tribe, relative, com-
panion; the pi. bana betu,
etc., means kindred, relatives,
etc. § 138, Rem. 5.
For the ph. muan'a see § 87 (i)
and Rem.
Muanda, 2, n., affair, business, care,
concem, responsibility, case
(law), cause, purpose, reason,
matter, object, effect, result,
sake, subject, circumstance,
source, fault, palaver, danger,
harm, diflficulty, doctrine, fact.
MUANDA— MUCIMA.
371
Bfuanda {continued).
account, narrative, discourse,
deed.
m. mutekete(inuakunyi), seven.
m. mukulu, eight.
See bualu.
Muanga, 2, »., quill of porcupine.
Muanga, v/., to scatter, strew, dis-
perse, put in confusion or dis-
order, disarrange, derange, put
out oJF order, confuse, exhaust
(spend).
Muangala, vi.j to scatter, migrate,
move, remove, abandon or
desert old village and move to
another.
Muansaltlka, vi., to be scattered
or confused or deranged or
disarranged, be in confusion or
disorder, be out of order, be
exhausted or spent or expended
carelessly.
Muangalfixa, vt.y to scatter, strew,
disperse, confuse, put in con-
fusion or disorder, derange,
disarrange, put out of order,
exhaust or spend or expend
recklessly, waste or squander.
Muanjelo, i, n.(Jrom Greek),
angel.
Bfuanu, 2, n., fable, parable, folk-
lore, legend, story, saying,
proverb, tale, illustration, ex-
ample.
ela m., to tell or narrate a fable,
etc.
Muau, 2, n., a yawn, gape.
ela m., to yawn, gape.
Muazankongolo, 2, n., rainbow.
Mubambu, 2, »., oar, paddle.
Itlubanga, 2, n., tusk of ivory.
Mubangu, 2, n., brim, edge (of
cup, plate, boat, etc.), margin,
bank, rim.
Mubanze, 2, n., bellows.
Mubela, 2, «., cowry shell.
Mubeyl, i, n., barber.
Mubldi, 2, »., body, form, shape,
color.
-a m., mukille, healthy.
Mubidi {continue:^).
di ne m. mubl, to be unfortunate,
be unlucky.
di ne m. muimpe, to be fortunate,
be lucky.
ktksa m., to amend, grow better,
convalesce, improve ii.' health,
recover or revive, become well,
be resuscitated.
m. mubl, bad luck, misfortune,
bad fortune, mishap.
m. muimpe, good luck, fortune.
m. mukHle, good health.
m. mutekete, bad health.
Mubombo, 2, n.j small bundle,
pack, package, roll.
Mubuabu, 2, n., jackal.
Mubtkki, I, »., bridgeroom. This
word is generally joUowed by
ph. wa mukfixi.
Mubfikibui, i, n.()rom the passive
form btlkibua, to be married,
from bfika, to marry), bride.
This word is generally followed
by ph. kudi mulumi.
Mubuluke, i, n.{from buluka),
lunatic, idiot, fool.
Macaudi, 2, n., interference in
another's business.
dl ne m., to interfere with.
Muci, 2, n., stick, tree, stake, log,
post, beam, wood.
-a m., wooden.
^&ci(dimin.), splinter.
m. muciamakane, cross (made
by naiUng or fastening two
sticks across each other).
m. wa with cihanda or mpanda-
kanya, a forked stick.
m. wa with dibue or ditadi,
slate-pencil.
m. wa kahia, match (lucifer).
m. wa ml a mlkanda, pen
(writing).
m. wa mukanda, lead pencil.
Mucima, 2, «., liver; used figu-
ratively to mean heart, disposi-
tion, soul, mind, will, spirit,
breast.
372
MUCIMA— MUE.
Muclma {continued).
-am., dishonest, covetous, fraud-
ulei^t, roguish, thievish.
-a m. mukttle, brave, fearless,
courageous, daring, bold, val-
iant, of strong heart, stern, im-
penitent.
-a m. with mutalale or muhole,
content, satisfied.
-a m. mutekete, humble, mod-
est, penitent.
-a m. wa mudlmu, diligent, in-
dustrious, energetic, faithful.
ela m., or tn. as subj. of samina
or kumina, to covet, long for,
yearn for.
ela or elangana with m., to
think, deliberate, muse, pon-
der, consider, think about,
conceive.
handlka or lakala with m., to
be frightened, be shocked,
shudder, be anxious, be ex-
cited, be terrified, be horrified,
be terrorized.
handixa or laktkxa with m., to
frighten, horrify, alarm, scare,
shock, terrify, terrorize.
killexa m., to comfort, console,
cheer up, encourage, soothe,
take heart.
kudimuna or andamuna with
m., to change one's mind, re-
p«>nt.
m. mubl, carnal mind.
m. mukille, bravery, courage,
valor.
muena m., thief, rogue, robber.
muena m. mutekete, coward.
m. as subj. of nyingala or sama,
to be grieved, be sorrowful, be
melancholy, be sorry, be sad,
be solicitous, be solemn, be
penitent, be anxious, be mor-
bid, regret, pine, repent.
nema with m. as suhj.^ or di ne
micimi ibidl, to hesitate, be
uncertain about, falter, be
fickle, vacillate, be double-
minded.
Mucimbakane, i, n., a fool, one
acting foolishly.
Mucimbe, i, n., ^eemadmbakaDe.
Mudianganyl, i, n., a cannibal.
Mudianjidl, i, n., guide, conduct-
tor, leader.
Mudlma, 2, »., a large bat.
Mudlmbl, 2, n., a continued rain.
May he spelled mudumbi.
Mudlmu, 2, n., work, occupation,
vocation, calling, craft, busi-
ness, profession, employment,
service, task, labor, industry,
toil,
-a muclma wa m., diligent, in-
dustrious, energetic, faithful.
dl ne m., to be busy.
ha or buexa ku with m., to hire
give work, engage, employ.
k£ba m., to seek employment.
kuaclla or eniela or enzexa
with m., to work for, serve.
kuata or enia or osa with m.,
to work, labor, toil.
muena m., workman, laborer,
servant.
Mudlnga, 2, n., used in ph. nyun-
yu wa m., meaning a crane
(bird).
Mudlngl, I, n., liar, hypocrite,
fraudulent person.
Mudlngldl, 2, n., shadow, shade,
likeness, picture, representa-
tion, photograph, image (re-
flection).
Mudloko, 2, n., any kind of vege-
table or field product, such as
corn, millet, rice, peas, Dota-
toes, manioc, etc.
Mudlu, 2, «., greediness, gluttony.
-am., greedy, gluttonous.
muena m., a glutton.
Mudua, 2, «., bellows.
Imba m., to blow bellows.
Mue, declinable cardinal num.
taking Secondary PrefixeSy one,
single. § 92.
m. ne m., separately, one at a
• time.
When modifying bunlne or bule
MUE— MUHANDIXI.
373
Mue {continued).
or bungly it means equal or
same or even.
Sometimes pronounced mo.
Muedi, 2, »., beard, whiskers.
m. wa ha muxuku, mustache.
Muehu, 2, n., head of millet.
Mueka, vi.y see mueneka.
Muele, 2, n.j knife, blade of knife,
matchet.
kele(<f*/»t».), pocket knife, table
knife.
m. wa nvita, sword.
m. wa nvula, flash of lightning.
Muelelu, 2, »., edge, limit, margin,
boundary, border, rim, side,
beach, shore, bank, brink,
coast.
Mueml, I, n.y one who makes the
palm wine.
Muena, i, n.{this word always pre-
cedes the noun or some wo d
used CLS a noun and comes to
have an adjective force [§84
{b)\ person, citizen of, native
of, countryman or inhabitant
of, member of, of the nation
or tribe or clan of, of the party
of, people of, owner of, pos-
sessor of, proprietor of.
bena kale, forefathers.
m. buowa, coward.
m. dilongexa, a catechumen.
m. kuetu, etc., neighbor, fellow
citizen, fellow countryman.
§ 141, Rem. I.
m. mablya, carpenter, sawyer.
m. mikanda, pupil, scholar.
m. mudimu, workman, laborer.
m. tuxola, a brick mason.
Muendakanyl, i, n.y a wanderer,
wayfarer, pilgrim, traveler.
Muendl, 2, n., used with the ph. m.
ku muoyo meaning nausea,
sickness at stomach.
di ne m. ku muoyo, to be
nauseous, be sick at stomach.
Mueneka, vi.^ to appear, come into
view or sight, emerge from
hidden or secluded place, be
Mueneka {continued).
exposed to view, be visible,
be found, be conspicuous, be — '
seen, seem, show one^s self.
neg. of m., to be invisible.
Muenena, vt., to l^k after for,
keep for. /
Muenexa, vt., to shjbw to, point out
to, indicate to:
Muenge, 2, n., sugar-cane.
Muenu, 2, n., suggested word for
spectacles.
Muenxi, 2, »., moon'^ month.
See ngondo.
Muenyl, i, »., gu^t, visitor,
stranger.
Muenyl, 2, n., smell, scenL odor.
Muenie, 2, n., cricket (edih^le).
Muetu, loc. adv., in our village or
town. § 140.
Muevu, 2, «., beard, whiskers.
m. wa ha muxuku, mustache.
Muexl, 2, «., ditch, rut, gulley.
Muflmbl, I, n., a potter.
May also be spelled mufulmbl.
Muflta, 2, »., darkness, gloomi-
ness.
Mufuba, 2, n.y bone.
ialfuha.{pl.), carcass, skeleton.
Mufuba, I, n.y an idle or trifling
or slow or worthless or sluggish
or lazy or indolent person,
sluggard. This word is used
as noun, not as adj.
Mufudl, I, n.{from fula), black-
smith.
Mufudl, 2, «., wrinkle, crease.
Mufufa. 2, n.y bone.
mlfufa(/>/.), carcass, skeleton.
Mufumbl, I, n.y a potter.
Mufunda, 2, n., a line or mark or
scratch or trace or track made
on the ground or on paper.
Mu fundi, I, n., scribe, writer, secre-
tary.
Muhala, 2, n., a species of antelope.
Muhale, i, »., a fool, idiot, lunatic*
Muhandlxl, i, »., savior, mediator.
374
MUHANU— MUKANA.
Muhftnu, 2, n., trousers, pants,
pantaloons, breeches. PL
generally used.
ela m., to put on trousers.
mikftba ya m., suspenders,
braces.
Muhenyl, 2, »., see mukenyl.
Muh^sa, 2, n., testicle.
Muhiankunde, 2, n., young man,
youth, boy, lad.
Muhlanyl, i, n.{jrom hlana), heir.
Muhlka, I, n., slave, servant, sub-
ject; attendant.
lulxa m., to enslave.
muhikudi, I, n.{from hikula), re-
deemer.
Muhola, 2, n., stripe, band.
dl mihola, to be striped.
Muhongo, 2, n.y witchcraft, sor-
cery. There is also a second-
ary meaning oj cleverness, in-
geniousness, dexterity, inge-
nuity, skill, skilfulness.
dl ne m., clever, ingenious, skil-
ful.
muena m., witch, demon, devil,
sorcerer, conjurer, wizard.
Muhote, I, n., a fool, stupid per-
son, idiot, ignoramus, simple-
ton, dunce. Cf. hota.
MuhCkl, I , n., doctor, medicine man,
maker of medicines or charms
or fetishes, diviner, physician,
sorcerer, conjurer. This word
is followed by -a mangra.
Muhumbakane, i, n., a fool, one
acting foclishly.
Muhuya, 2, n., breath, smell or
scent or odor (good or bad).
-a m. mulmpe, fragrant.
ela m., to blow the breath, ex-
pire.
huta m., to draw the breath.
m. xnabl, bad smell or odor,
stench, stink, fetidness.
m. muimpe, good odor or smell,
flavor, fragrance, aroma.
MuibI, I, n.(from Iba), thief, rogue,
robber, dishonest or fraudulent
person.
Mulhi, loc. adv. or prep.{made up
of mu and ihl, short), near
(in). § 79-
Mulhikl, I, n.f cook.
Mulhu, I, »., nephew, niece. Re-
fers only to child of a man*s
older or younger sister.
See note under nephew.
Mulkilu, I, n.y grandchild.
Mulla, 2, n.y proboscis, trunk.
Muilu, 2, n.y clan, tribe, nation,
race.
See TRIBE.
Mulma, 2, n.y loaf of bread.
Muinda, 2, n.{doubtless from Lower
Congo), candle, lamp, light.
May be spelled muendu.
Mttlnu, 2, n.y beak, bill.
tua m., to peck.
Muinxi, 2, n., pestle.
Mulnxl, 2y n.y smoke.
fulma m., to smoke (as burning
wood).
Multu, he. word made up of mu
and the root of ditu, forest,
meaning in the forest. § 47,
Rem. ,
-a m., wild (as animal).
Muivi, I, n.y thief, rogue, robber,
dishonest or fraudulent person,
Mulyidl, I, n.{from lylla), pupil
scholar, student, disciple,
learner.
muiyixi, i, «., teacher, instructor,
Mujike, I, n.y unmarried or single
person, maid, virgin, bachelor.
Mujllu, 2, n.y artery, vein.
May be spelled xnuxllu.
Mukala, 2, n.y used in the ph»
xnuan'a m. meaning last Vom
or youngest child.
Mukalu, 2, n.y dividing line or
boundary line between two
fields, border, mark, limit.
Makana, 2, n.y mouth. .
diangana m., to move one's lips
without speaking.
kumansana m., to smack the
lips.
MUKANDA— MUKOSA.
375
Mukanda, 2, n., book, letter, note,
epistle, contract, photograph,
picture, paper. Doubtless from
Lower Congo.
kuata mu m., to take a photo-
graph or picture.
ml a mlkanda, ink.
muci wa ml a mlkanda, pen
(writing).
mucl warn., lead-pencil.
muena mlkanda, pupil, scholar,
student.
m. wa buhlanyl, will, testament.
m. wa dllongexa, catechism.
mu mlkanda, to school.
Mukandu, 2, »., a neg. command or
commandment or ordinance or
proclamation or regulation or
law or rule, disapproval, re-
fusal, prohibition. This word
is jrom v. kanda.
ela m., to issue or make a neg.
command, etc.
Mukau, 2, n.y envy, jealousy.
-a m., jealous, envious.
Mukele, 2, n., salt.
Mukelekele, 2, n., gravy, broth,
soup.
Mukelenge, i, n., chief, lord, king,
master, nobleman, governor,
prince, ruler.
dl m., to reign, rule, be chief.
dl m. wa, to reign over, rule
over, govern. Lukengu udl
m. wa Bakuba, Lukengu
reigns over the Bakuba.
muana wa m., prince.
m. wa, owner, possessor, pro-
prietor.
m. muktixl, queen, mistress,
female chief.
m. wa bambl ba bualu bua
Nzambi, high priest.
m. wa nsubu wa maxlka,
jailor.
m. wa Nzambi, missionary, min-
ister.
JHukfima, 2, n., a groan, moan,
grunt of pain.
tua m., to groan, moan, grunt.
Mukenji, 2, »., message, command-
ment, order, ordinance, direc-
tion, command, proclamation.
amba m., to deliver a message,
issue a decree or proclamation.
muena m., messenger, herald,
ambassador.
Mukenya, 2, n., flea.
Mukenyl, 2, n., flash of lightning.
The ph. wa nvula generally
follows this word.
Mukete, 2, «., arrow with iron
point.
Muklla, 2, n., tail of animal or
reptile.
Muklnda, 2, n., fish-trap made in
shape of basket.
Muklxl, 2, n., bank of earth piled
up.
Muklxl, 2, »., bogie, spectre, ghost
or spirit of the dead, appari-
tion, hobgoblin, demon, devil,
large ornamented mask used
in dancing.
Muklya, 2, n., a mode of wearing
the cloth by drawing it up be-
tween the legs; hence trousers,
pants, pantaloons, breeches.
ela m., to gird up the loins, tuck
up loin cloth, put on pants.
Mukoko, 2, n., sheep.
muan*a m., lamb.
Mukolo, 2, «., lower part of leg
from knee down, lower part of
hind leg of animals.
dlfu dla m., calf of leg.
muongo wa m., shin.
Mukolokolo, 2, n., handle of cup.
Mukono, 2, «., hoof, mark or print
or trace or trail or track of
hoof, footprint.
londa mlkona, to track, trace,
trail.
m. muhandlke, cloven foot.
Mukosa, 2, «., hindrance, inter-
ruption, interference, opposi-
tion, slander, backbiting, cal-
umny.
ela m., to interfere with the
business or friendship of two
376
MUKOSA— MULaMI.
Mukosa (continued).
persons, oppose, thwart, with-
stand, frustrate.
muena m., backbiter, calumnia-
tor, slanderer.
Muku, I, n.y father-in-law, mother-
in-law. Used only by the hus-
bandy never by the wife.
Mukua, I, n.(derived from the loc.
word kua and always precedes
the noun or some word used <is
a noun and comes to have an
adj. force), one from a certain
village, one from a certain
tribe or nation or clan, people
of, inhabitant of, countryman
of, man or woman of, native
of, person of. Compare with
muena. § 87 (J), Rem. 2.
Mukuabo, loc. adv. (made up of mu
and adj. kuabo), elsewhere,
somewhere else. § 370.
Muktkba, 2, H., belt, girdle, strap,
tape.
mlktkba ya mih&nu, suspenders,
braces.
Mukudl, 2, »., rope, wick.
Mukuekue, 2, n., cackling.
tuta or ela with m., to cackle.
Mukuetu, I, n., our or my neighbor
or fellow countr3mian or fellow
citizen. § 142.
Mukuha, 2, n., bone.
iiilkuha(^/.), carcass, skeleton.
Mukuhu, 2, n., bad odor or smell
or scent, stench, stink.
nunka m., to emit a stench,
stink.
JHukulu, I, w., elder <>r oldest brother
or sister, a senior, an elder.
When meaning elder brother
or sister the word is generally
combined insep. with the poss.
pro. enclitic. § 138, Rem. 2.
muana wa m., nephew, niece.
Mukuliunpe, i, n., elder, an old
person.
Mukuma, 2, «., report or noise or
sound of gun.
Mukumbl, 2, n., locust.
Mukumu, 2, n., a blow, a strike,
a lick.
Mukuna, 2, n., hill, mountain,
ridge, eminence.
Mukungrula, 2, n.ijrom knnsula),
rolling thunder.
Mukunyi, i, n., planter, sower.
Mukuolo, 2, n.y midrib of palm,
bamboo.
Mukflxl, I, n., woman, wife, con-
cubine,
-a bakflxl, feminine.
clania cia bakftxl, left hand.
mukelenge mukfixl, mistress,
queen, female chief.
m. wa lufnlla, a widow.
m. wa masandi, harlot, whore,
prostitute.
m. wa muan'etu, sister-in-law
(wife of brother).
tattt m., aunt (on father's side).
This word sometimes follows the
noun with the force of an adj.
meaning femaie. The same
idea may often be expressed by
the ph. mukAxl'a preceding
the noun. Hence we have
[§ S6 (*)]:
muana m., girl, daughter.
inukfixl*a mbua, bitch.
inukfixi*a mbuxi, a she goat.
muktlxl'a ngombe, cow.
muktkxi'a ngulube, sow.
Muktkxlana, i, n., a woman whose
name you have forgotten or
do not care to trouble with
mentioning. § 353.
Mul&bi, 2, «., handle of hoe, etc.
Mul&m&cl, I, n., attendant, ad-
herent, retainer, follower.
bal&m&cl(^/.), retinue.
m. wa Satana, devil or demon
(in Biblical sense).
Mulambl, i, n., cook.
Mulambu, 2, «., tax, tribute, duty.
Mulftmi, I, n.f watchman, guard,
keeper, shepherd, herdsman,
overseer, sentry, sentinel,
nurse.
m. wa bantu baNzambl, bishop.
MULaMI— MUMINU.
377
Blul&mi {continued).
m. wa with mpalata or bintu,
treasurer.
m. wa nsubu wa maxlka, jailor.
Mulanda, 2, n.y a species of rodent.
Mulangala, 2, n., switch, rod.
Mulau, 2, «., doom, woe, curse,
damnation, judgment, ill wish,
condemnation, anathema.
ela m., to doom, curse, wish ill
to, damn, anathematize.
Mulayl, 2, n., promise.
Mule, loc. adv. (made up o/mu and
adj le, long), see kule.
Muledi, I, n.(Jrom lela), a woman
who has borne children.
Mulelexi, i, n., midwife, accou-
cheuse.
Mulembulembu, 2, n., white of an
egg. PI. generally used.
Mulemu, 2, n. (sometimes pro-
nounced mulomo), lip, brim,
rim, edge (of cup, etc.), spout
(of kettle).
See muxuku.
Mulemu, 2, »., trigger of gun.
Mulemu, 2, n., bowstring.
Mulenga, 2, n., a strip of cloth.
Mulengalenga, 2, n., a kind of
greens.
Muloho, 2, n., messenger, herald,
apostle, disciple, ambassador.
m. muowexananglla, God.
See note under God.
Mulombl, I, »., beggar.
Mulombodl, i, n., guide, leader,
conductor.
Mulonda, 2, n., barrel of gun,
tube.
Mulonda, 2, n., nail, screw.
Mulondo, 2, n.j water-pot, jar,
bottle, jug.
Mulonga, 2, n., winged ant (edi-
ble).
Mulongo, 2, n.y row, file, rank,
line, train, procession, series.
-a m. umue, of same age.
dl mu m., to be in line.
Imfina mu m., to stand in line.
teka mu m., to put in line.
Muloxl, 2, n., see note under
buloxi.
Mtllu, loc. adv. (made up ofmu and
the insep. ulu), up, overhead,
on high, above, over, upwards.
§ 423 (2) (b).
Mulumbuludi, i, n.y a judge, arbi-
trator.
Mulumbululdl, i, n., attorney, law-
yer, advocate, intercessor,coun-
cillor.
Mulumi, I, «., man, husband, the
male of.
-a baluml, masculine.
cianza cia balumi, right hand.
muanam., boy, son.
m. wa lufuila, a widower.
m. wa ngombe^ bull.
m. wa ngulube, boar.
This word sometimes follows the
noun with the force of an adj.
meaning male. The same idea
may he expressed by the
phrases muluml*a and mu-
lumi wa preceding the noun.
§ S6 (ft).
Mulumlana, i, n., a man whose
name you have forgotten or
do not care to bother with
mentioning. §353.
Mulunda, i, w., friend, companion,
mate.
Mulundu, 2, n.y hollow in tree.
Mulundu, 2, n.y tail of bird.
Mulunga, 2, n.y the inside of an
egg (white or yolk).
Mulungu, 2, n.y poison. Generally
preceded by the ph. buanga
bua.
Muma, 2, n.y a species of snake.
Mumanda, loc. adv. or prep. (made
up of mu and the insep. man-
da), down in a bottom (val-
ley). § 423 (2) (b).
Mume, 2, n.y dew.
Mumlamlnyl, i, n.y sower.
Mumlnu, 2, n., throat.
kuata ha m., to choke (as food),
strangle.
taldxa or holexa with ha m,,
378
MUMINU— MUNTU.
Mamlna (^continued).
to satisfy or slake or quench or
appease thirst.
Mumonyi, i, n., watchman, senti-
nel, sentry, keeper, overseer,
witness.
Momue, loc. adv. {made up of ma
and mue, one), in same place,
in one place, together. \ 79.
Mumuemue, 2, n., smile, grin.
tua mimuemue, to smile, grin.
Mmnuenenyi, i, n., watchman,
keeper.
MtunOiiyi, i, n., witness, one
knowing.
Mmnflnyixl, i, n., instructor,
teacher.
MOna, vt., to finish, bring to end,
complete, terminate, perfect,
conclude, be done, be ready.
m. kacecl, to menstruate.
m. miota, to quench or satisfy or
slake or appease thirst.
neg. of m., to be incomplete, be
unfinished.
May he spelled mana.
Munanga, 2, n., drought, dryness.
Munda, U>c. word{made up of mu
and the insep. nda), abdomen,
belly, the inside of, the interior,
stomach, womb. §423(2) (6) .
-a m., internal, inward.
flka m., or dl ne m. muflke, to
be annoyed, be vexed, be wor-
ried, be aggravated, be en-
raged, be provoked.
flkixa m., to annoy, vex, worry,
aggravate, anger, enrage, exas-
perate, displease, irritate, pro-
voke, tease, tantalize, torment,
trouble.
huya or ela or uha with m., to
run off at bowels, have diar-
rhoea.
kuma m., to beat (heart), pul-
sate.
m. mua clanza, palm of hand.
m. mua dlkfisa, sole of foot.
m. munya, midday, noon.
MuDda {continued).
m. as subj. of nyenga, to be con-
stipated.
tokexa m., to apolog^ize.
Some seem to say mundu for
inside, etc., and munda for
abdomen, tfelly, etc.
Mundankulu, loc. adv., midnight.
Made up of munda and the
insep. nkulu. § 423 (2) (6).
Mundldlmbl, 2, n., shadow, shade,
photograph, likeness, picture,
representation, image (reflec-
tion).
Mundongo, 2, n., shuttle of loom.
Munemu, loc. adv., in here, herein,
hence, hither. § 163, Note 2.
Sometimes pronounced muno-
mu.
Munfl, 2, n., vagina(7).
Munga, loc. adv. (made up of mu
and adj. nga), e&ewhere,
somewhere else. § 370.
Mungulumungu, 2, n., a kind of
European cloth.
Munkflci, he. adv. or prep. {made
up of mu and the insep.
nktkci), among, in the midst,
in amorg, in the middle, be-
tween, in the center. § 423
(2) (i).
Munkulu, loc. adv. {made up of mu
and the insep. nkulu), midst,
middle. This word has much
the same use and construction as
munktkci. §423(2) (6). Com^
pare mundankulu.
Munomu, he. adv., see munemu.
Muntlnyl, i, n., a person whose
name you have forgotten or do
not know or do not care to
trouble with mentioning. §353,
Rem.
Muntu, I, «., person, somebody,
man (generic) ; sometimes used
also as slave or person,
bantu (/>/.), people, population,
mankind, folk.
bantu ba Niambl, the church
(members of).
MUNTU— MUNYINYI.
379
Miintu (continued).
bantu bonso, everybody.
m. kal Muyuda, a Gentile.
m. mubl, sinner, transgressor,
villain, rascal.
m. mudlxikamine, a freeman,
free-born person.
m. muk&le, an adult, grown
person.
m. muldma, a lame person.
m. wa bende, freeman, free-
born person.
m. wa cituha, dwarf, deformed
person.
m. wa mu nsubu wa maxika, a
prisoner.
m. wa Nzambi, Christian, mem-
ber of church.
Muntu, loc. adv., see kuntu.
Muntuntu, 2, n., cricket (edible).
Munu, 2, n., finger.
dlnungtt dia m., knuckle.
ku minu, in the hand.
m. munlne wa dikAsa, great
toe.
m. wa dikftsa, toe.
tony a minu, to clench the fist.
This word is used in indicating
the size of the moon. See
MOON.
Munxi, loc. adv. or prep. (made up
of mu and the insep, nxi),.
below, beneath, under, under-
neath, down under, downward,
to or on the bottom of. § 423
(2) (&).
m. mua, down in.
mutu m., headlong.
Munya, 2, «., daylight, daytime,
light of sun, sunshine, heat or
warmth or brightness of sun.
cidimu cia m., summer, warm
season.
dlnda to ne ku munda m., from
early morning till noon, all
the forenoon.
munda m., noon, midday.
Ota m., to bask, warm one's self
in the sunshine.
Munya, v., to be able, can, know,
comprehend, have experience,
perceive, be conscious of, be
aware of, recognize or remem-
ber a person, understand,
apprehend, see.
m. maltt onso, to be omniscient.
neg. of m.y to be ignorant, be
unaware, be insensible or un-
conscious of, be unknown, be
mysterious.
m. mua followed by infin.y be
able to do, can do, know how
to do, be capable or competent
of doing, be qualified for, be
possible.
neg. of m. followed by mua and
infin., to be impossible, be
unable, be incompetent, be
incapable.
neg. of m. followed by mua
kttb&la, to be innumerable or
countless.
Perhaps this word can also be
spelled manya.
Munyanga, 2, n., fibre of the palm
leaves used in weaving cloth.
Munyangl, i, «., spendthrift, prodi-
gal. Generally followed by wa
bintu.
Munyanvudi, 2, n., the silk of com.
Munyasu, 2, «., switch, rod, whip.
Munyeml, i, «., fugitive, refugee.
Munyenga, 2, «., earthworm.
Munyengi, i, «., highway robber,
highwayman, brigand.
Munyi? interrog. adv., how?
what? what is the matter?
for what cause or reason or
purpose? why not? § 177.
buie m.? how far? how long?
bungl m.? how many? how
much?
Munyinyi, 2, «., meat, flesh.
clanza cia m., left hand.
m. wa mu ml, fish.
m. wa n gem be, beef.
m. wa ngulube, bacon.
38o
MUNYIXA— MUSAKUCL
MAnylxa, vi.f to finish, complete,
terminate, bring to end, per-
fect, conclude, be done.
Perhaps this word can also he
spelled manytxa.
MAnyixa, vt., to teach, instruct,
inform, educate, explain to,
discipline, make aware of,
train.
m. buala babl, to lead astray,
entice, lure, allure, tempt,
seduce, spoil.
Perhaps this word can also he
spelled manyixa.
Munyonira, 2, n.(Buk.), chisel
with which the palm is tapped
for wine.
MunyunKu, 2, n., sieve, sifter.
Mttofo, 2, n.y navel.
Mttomba, 2, n., stocks.
Muomunitte, loc. adv., in the same
place, together. § 96, Rem 2.
di m., to be equal, be like or
alike or identical, be the same
as, be correct, be of same or
similar sort or kind or quality
or character or species or
variety, be mate or match, re-
semble, agree.
ena m., to differ, vary, be differ-
ent or unlike or unequal or
uneven, be diverse.
Compare with hohamue.
Muomuo, loc. adv.y there (in),
thence, thither, yonder. § 163,
Note 4.
Maongo, 2, n., back of knife blade,
backbone or spine of body.
m. wa mukolo, shin.
Mttonso, loc. adv. {made up of mu
and adj. onso, all), everywhere,
anywhere, somewhere, where-
soever. § 371, Rem.
Compare with kuonso and hon-
so.
Muosa, 2, n.f whistling (with the
mouth).
ela m., to whistle.
Muoxl, 2, n., string, vine or creeper
used for tying, cord, line, rope.
Maoyo, 2, n., life, kernel, or germ or
embryo of seed, salvation, salu-
tation or compliments or greet-
ing or respects or regards, used
in figurative sense to express
heart or breast or conscience or
memory or mind or will or
soul or spirit.
dl ne m., to be alive, be living.
ela m., to hope.
endexa ka m., to nauseate, make
sick at stomach, sicken.
ha dr ela with m., to thank, be
grateful or thankful to.
ha or ela or ebexa with m., to
give compliments or respects
or regards or salutation or
greeting, salute, greet, hail, say
adieu or farewell or good-bye.
hela m., to give respects for
another.
hua m., or m. wakohna, to for-
get, miss, overlook, omit.
kftlexa m., take heart.
kudimuna or andamuna with
m., to change one's mind, re-
pent.
muendi ka m., nausea, sickness
at stomach.
m. as subj. of enda with the per
son as ohj.y or di ne muendi
kum., or ku m. kudi kuenda,
to be nauseous, be sick at
stomach.
m. as subj. of nyingala or sama,
to be grieved, be melancholy,
be sad, sorrowful, be sorry, be
penitent, regret, repent.
samlna or kumina with m., to
covet, long after, yearn for.
Musa, 2, w., hard part of palm nut
after the oily skin has been
taken ofif, testicle.
Mtts&bu, 2, n.y mush, gruel. This
word is doubtless from s&ba, to
boU.
Mttsakftci, 2, n.y a musical instru-
ment made by putting seeds
into a gourd, a rattle.
MUSALA— MtTTANGALUXI.
381
Musala, 2, «., edge, border, limit,
margin, boundary, side of, bank
or beach or shore or coast.
Musambu, 2, n., hymn, song, tune,
music.
Musamu, 2, n., pillow.
Musanda, 2, n., intestinal worm..
Musangu, 2, n., time.
misangu ibidi, twice.
mlsangtt Is&tu, thrice.
misangu ya bungl, often, fer-
quently.
m. mnibidl, second time.
m. muihl, short time, short while.
m. mukuabo, next time.
m. mule, long time, long time
ago, long while.
m. umue, once, one time.
Musangu, 2, n., long stick with
which boat is pushed along.
Mus&sa, 2, n., basket or cage in
which fowls are carried.
Musau, 2, n.j pestle.
Museba, 2, n.y a kick, stamping.
tua m., to kick.
tua m. hanxl, to stamp or tramp
or tread heavily.
Musekei^ke, 2, n., flower of the
palm.
Musele, 2, n., bud, sprout.
Musenga, 2, «., powder (anything
fine).
Musengeleke, 2 n., stalk of corn.
Musenxl, i, n., a bushman, bar-
barian, uncivilized person.
This is an imported word,
Musesu, 2, n.y highway.
Musodl, 2, n.y lizard.
Musoko, 2, n.y village, town, city.
misoko yonso, the world (figu-
fcUive).
m. wa Nzambl, heaven.
The pi. of this word may be used
to express the idea of country,
land, region, section, district,
dominion, kingdom.
Musokoko, 2, n.y secret, mystery.
-a m., mysterious, unknown.
Sometimes pronounced musoko.
Musomono, 2, n., quill of porcu-
pine.
Musonga, 2, »., top or ridge of
roof.
Musongi, I, n.y a carver (of wood).
m. wa mpingu, a maker of
charms, fetishes, etc.
Musonguedl, i, w., traitor, back-
biter, slanderer.
Musoso, 2, n,, foreskin.
dl ne m., to be uncircumcised.
Musoxl, 2, n.y gravy, soup, broth.
Musuasu, 2, n.y white ant, termite.
Musul, 2, n.y a rattle (used as
musical instrument).
Musulu, 2, n.y river, brook, creek,
stream.
Musundu, 2, n.y see musoso.
Musundu, 2, n.y leech.
Musungi, I, n.y peacemaker, recon-
ciler.
Musungidi, I, n.y defender, de-
liverer, mediator, savior, re-
deemer.
Musunsa, 2, n., time.
misunsa ibidi, twice.
misunsa is&tu, thrice.
misunsa ya bungl, often, fre-
quently.
m. mulbldi, second time.
m. umue, once, one time.
See musangu.
Mutaku, 2, n.y brass rod, wire cut
into short pieces and used as
money.
Mutamba, 2, «., ridge-pole of house,
long pole supporting veranda.
Mutanda, 2, n., loaf of bread.
Mutandala, 2, n., ridge-pole of
house, long pole supporting
veranda.
Mutangadikl, i, »., name appHed
colloquially to the native
Christian evangelist; may per-
haps also be used for apostle,
disciple, minister.
Mutangadlxl, i, n.y spendthrift,
prodigal. Generally followed
by wa blntu.
MutangalAxl, see mutangadlxl.
3^2
MUTANGIDI— MUXIHU.
Mutang^ldl, i, n., watchman, sen-
try, sentinel, keeper, overseer,
witness.
Mutanta, 2, n., crack, crevice,
flaw, leak.
tubuka m., to spring a leak.
Mtttliyo, 2, n.(Jrom tftya), talking,
hubbub, disturbance, noise,
fuss, palaver, wrangle, wrang-
ling, row, sound of noise, quar-
rel, trouble.
•am., noisy, quarrelsome.
kosexa or zikixa with m., to
quell, quiet, still, hush.
lekela m., to be silent, stop talkr
ing, hush, be quiet, keep
silence, be still.
tekam., to disturb, make trouble,
or palaver.
Mntelenge, 2, n., loaded cartridge
or shell for gun.
m. wa lutende, a loaded car-
tridge for rifle, a bullet, ball.
m. wa tundimba, loaded shell
for shotgun.
Mutempexi, i, «., diviner, doctor,
sorcerer, conjurer.
Mutendelelu, 2, n., prayer (as to
divinity).
Mtttengu, 2, n., used in the ph.
clngoina cla, m. a flint-lock
gun.
Mutentekedl, i, «., eavesdropper,
spy.
Mutete, 2, n., a kind of greens.
Mtttomboke, i, n., a fool, idiot,
lunatic.
Mutonda, 2, n., grain of corn, seed.
Mutoto, 2, n., star.
m. mutuke, meteor.
Mtttu, 2, «., head, source of stream,
summit, top, pinnacle, dream,
vision.
-a ktt m., the first, the foremost.
ha in. ha, on top of, over the top
of, above, overhead.
kabalabala ka m., skull.
ku m., first, forward, forwards,
at the head of, at the front of,
at the front part of, at upper
Mutu {continued).
"end or front end, up-river, up-
stream.
ku m. kututau, bareheaded.
Iftta m., to dream, have a vision.
m. with mubele or musame,
headache.
m. munxl, headlong.
m. wa dibele, nipple of breast.
m. wa iubansa, first wife taken.
Mutuadl, I, n.y a carrier, por-
ter. Generally jollowed by wa
bintu.
batuadl, caravan.
Mutubu, 2, «., ditch, rut, trench,
gully..
Mutudi, I, n., blacksmith.
Matumi, I, n.y leader of a tune.
Mtttunda, 2, n., ant-hill made by
the bintunte.
Mtttungula, i, n.(Jrom tungula), a
eunuch.
Mututu, 2, n.y a blow, a kick.
Mututu, 2, n.y navel.
Muviele, i, «., mother of new-born
babe.
Muvumbi, 2, n.y a continued rain.
Muvungu, 2, «., a roll or bundle or
pack or package made by roll-
ing up.
Muxa, 2, n.y wind from bowels.
ela m., to break wind.
MuxangI, 2, «.(Buk.), corpse, dead
body of person, spirit or ghost
of the dead, apparition, hob-
goblin, bogie, demon, devil.
Muxete, 2, n., box, trunk, chest,
case.
Muxl, 2, n.y root.
Muxiba, 2, n.y barrel of gun, stem
of pipe, tube.
Mttxib&le, I, n.y a fool, idiot, ig-
noramus, simpleton, dunce.
Muxlhi, I, n.y murderer.
Muxltaianganyl, i, n., murderer.
Muxltau, 2, n.y the dry season
(lasting, south of the equator,
from May to September),
winter, drought.
MUXIKANKUNDE— NDOHO.
383
Muxikankunde, 2, n.y lass, maid,
maiden, damsel, young wo-
man, virgin, girl.
Bfuxlkl, 2, n., pile or heap of earth.
Muximi, !,«., liar, hypocrite, fraud-
ulent person.
Muxinda, 2, n., oil from the kernel
of palm nut.
MuxinKa, 2, »., price, value, worth,
bargain, cost, expense, trade.
•a m. muk&le, costly, dear, ex-
pensive, precious, valuable.
-a m. mutekete, cheap, worth-
less, of little account.
bandlxa or kUlexa with m., to
put up the price, make costly
or precious or dear or expen-
sive.
enda m., to trade, buy and sell,
barter, deal in.
endulula m. muimpe, to gain
by trading, profit.
huekexa or tekexa or tentulula,
wUh m., to beat down or lower
or reduce or decrease the price.
ngenda wain., trader, merchant.
tua nu, to drive a bargain, talk
a trade*
Muxinfi^a^ 2, «., string, cord, line,
rope, twine.
m. wa bute, net for catching
animals, a hunting net.
m. wa ndadika, net for catching
fish (it lies in the water, hence
the name ndadika from lala,
to lie).
Sometimes pronounced mujinga.
Bfuxobo, 2, w., pliability, pliable-
ness, flexibility, suppleness.
-a m., pUable, pliant, bendable,
flexible, supple.
May he spelled mujobo.
Muxoxo, 2, n.y switch, rod, whip.
JHuxuku, 2, n.y lip, edge of cup or
plate, brim, rim, spout of
kettle.
-am. wambelu, of the family of.
dituaya dia m., napkin, servi-
ette.
m. wa cingoma, muzzle of gun.
Muxuku (conlinued).
m. wa diulu, nostril.
m. wa mbelu, entrance, door-
way.
tuangana m., to kiss.
Muyuda, i, n.y a Jew. Perhaps
also Mujuda(i).
N.
Nana, vLy to dun, ask one to pay a
debt.
Nanga, v/., to cook or roast by
drying before a fire on a spit,
toast.
Some say nana.
Nanga, vt.y see sua.
Nanga, vLy to admonish, rebuke,
correct, discipline, reprove, re-
proach, scold, restrain, govern,
control, manage.
Nanyi, neg. adv.y no.
Nata, 3, n.y north(Eng.).
Naxa, neg. adv.y used as follows:
(i) As neg. answer to question;
aSy neuye kumusoko? Naxa,
are you going to the village?
No.
(2) Occasionally to strengthen a
neg. sentence; aSy ciena nya
naxa, I am not going, no.
(3) To express the idea of
either ... or. § 433.
Nay a, vi.y to play, sport.
n. ne, to play with, have fun with,
amuse.
Nayixa, vt.y to play with, have fun
with, jest or joke with, amuse,
teas'e.
Ncito, 3, w.(Eng.), store.
Ndadika, 3, n7{jrom lala, to lie),
used in ph. muxinga wa n.
meaning a kind of net left in
the water to catch fish.
Ndende, 3, «., trigger or spring of
trap or snare.
teya n., to set a trap or snare.
Ndoho, 3, n.y fish-hook.
Some say luloho.
384
NDUDI— NGOMBE.
Ndudi, 3, n.f good aim (gun).
Nduhttkilu, 3, n.(Jrom luhuka, to
go out), used in ph. ditnku
dia n. wa LuminKU, meaning
Monday.
Ndnndu, 3, n.y india-rubber, caout-
chouc, croquet ball.
Ndunga, 3, n., a kind of European
cloth.
Ne, conj.j and, also, beside, along
with, with, by means of. There
is ojten a prepositional idea.
In Direct Discourse construc-
tions ne has the force of thai.
§ 4S5 (ft) (2).
di ne, to have, own, possess, con-
tain.
hehi ne, near to.
ku . . . to ne ku, from ... to
or till or until.
ne . . . ne, both . . . and,
whether ... or.
See § 426, Rem. 3.
Nema, vi.y to be heavy or weighty,
grow or get worse in health
(with dlsama as suhj.).
n. with mucima as suhj., to hesi-
tate, be uncertain about, falter,
be fickle, vacillate.
Nemeka, vt., to honor, adore>
praise, esteem, hallow, pay
homage to, magnify, do obei-
sance to, regard, respect, re-
vere, reverence, venerate, glo-
rify* give salutation or re-
spects or greeting to a chief,
salute or greet a superior.
neg. of n., to disobey, be dis-
obedient to, dishonor, be dis-
respectful to.
Nemekela, vt.^ see nemeka.
Nemenena, vi,, see nema.
Nemexa, vt., used with mucima as
obj, meaning to discourage,
dishearten.
Nenga, vi.y to elapse, intervene,
expire, become long.
Nfldl mukulu, n., God. See note
under God. Class I.
Nfindu, 3, n., a species of black
monkey.
Nflnina, 3, n., a bow knot. Com-
pare with finuka.
Nflnu, 3, n.y see nflnina.
Nfuanka, 3', n.y tobacco.
Nfuele, 3, n.y flag.
Nfukete, 3, n., ramrod.
Nfttlanka, 3, ».(French), franc.
Nfumu, I, n., chief, king, lord,
master, nobleman, governor,
prince, ruler.
muana wa n., prince.
n. wa, owner, possessor, pro-
prietor.
See mukelenge.
Nga, adj.y another, other, else, more,
some one or something else,
several, part (some).
n. . . . n., the one . . . the
other, some . . . others, sever-
al .. . several.
n. with locatives prefixed, else-
where, somewhere else. § 370.
Nga ? interrog. adj. {with Secondary
Prefixes, § 178), how many?
how much ? what quantity ?
Ngabu, 3, n.y shield.
Ng&ia, 3, n.(Bukuba), salt.
Ngandu, 3, n., crocodile.
Nganyi? interrog. pro,, who?
whom?
-a n.? whose ?
dlna diebi n.? what is your
name?
Ngena, 3, »., hell. From Greek
Ngenda, i, n.(Jrom enda), used in
ph. n. wa muxing^a meaning
trader, merchant.
Ngl, adj.y many, a great deal of,
much, abundant, divers, nu-
merous, plentiful, plenty of,
several, vast number of.
Ngia-ngi, adj.y see ngi.
Nglas, 3, «.(Eng.), glass, tumbler. .
Ngoma, 3, n.y drum made with
rawhide.
Ngombe, 3, w., ox, cow.
muana wa n., calf.
NGOMBE— NKOYl.
385
Nffombe (continued).
munyinyi wa n., beef.
n. mukjixi or mukAxi'a n., cow.
n. mulumi or mulumi'a n., bull.
Ngondo, 3, n., moon, month.
n. bungi munyi ? what age ?
how old? how long?
n. kl ? when ? what month ?
n. ya bungi, long time, long
while.
n. as subj, of lua clb&lu or
tentama, to be full moon.
n. as subj. of b&la, the coming or
appearing of the new moon.
n. walua, next month. § 306 (c) ,
Rem. I.
Ngonga, 3, »., large European bell.
Ngongo, 3, n.y a small rodent.
Ngula, pi. of 3 or 4, »., strength,
might, force, energy, ability,
power, vigor, violence, health.
-a n., healthy, strong, vigorous.
ena ne n., to be delicate, be not
strong.
hita or tamba vnlh n., to qon-
quer, be victorious, beat, de-
feat, excel, win, prevail, re-
pulse, subjugate, subject, van-
quish, master, overthrow, over-
come, quell, subdue.
Sometimes pronounced ngudu.
Ngulube, 3, »., hog, swine, wild
boar. -
miuw'a n., pig.
mlayl a n., lard.
mnkftxi'a n., sow.
mulumi'a n., boar.
munyinyi wa n., bacon.
Ngulunge, 3, »., lean meat.
Ngulungn, 3, n., a species of ante-
lope.
Nguvu, 3, n., hippopotamus.
NI, card, num., four. Takes Sec-
ondary Prefixes.
Nine, adj., large, inmiense, big,
great, enormous, vast, mighty,
broad, wide, thick, stout,
famous, distinguished, far-
famed, glorious, honorable,
illustrious, important, noble,
Nine {continued).
influential, extraordinary, re-
markable, renowned, eminent,
prominent.
di(5) dinlne, low, bass voice or
tone.
ml manlne, sea, ocean.
NJeku, 3, w., dwarfed or under-
sized or deformed person, lame
or paralyzed person, runt,
paralytic. Muena generally
precedes this word.
-a n., runty, dwarfish, under-
sized, stunted.
Nkaka, 3, n., manis, scaly ant-
eater.
Nkala, 3, n., crab. Some say
lukala.
Nkalafa, 3, n., table fork.
Nkanktt, i, »., the younger or
junior of twins.
Nkata, 3, »., pad for the head in
carrying load.
Nkaxama, 3, »., leopard.
Nkenyu, pi. of 4, «., a skin disease
in which the pigment of the
hands becomes white.
Nkftse, 3, n., porcupine.
Nketel, 3, ».(Eng.), kettle.
Nkima, 3, »., the conunon gray-
greenish monkey.
Sometimes pronounced ncima.
Nkixiabendi, 3, »., after birth, pla-
centa. Perhaps should he
spelled nkixl'a bende.
Nkl(y)-, compound disjunctive pers.
pro. {joined insep. with poss.
pro.)y alone, by one's self, only,
sole, solitary. See §§ 108, 109.
Nkobo, 3, »., small basket with top.
Nkoka, 3, «., ditch, rut, gully.
Nkose, 3, »., a small rodent.
Nkoyi, 3, w., arrow with blunt
wooden point for killing birds
or small game.
Nkoyi, 3, »., fit, spasm, convulsion
or unconsciousness or insensi-
bility caused by fit. This
word is used only of children.
3^6
NKOYI— NSUBU.
Nkoyi {continued).
fua or haluka with m., to have
a fit ^ spasm or convulsion.
Nkuasa, 3, n., chair, seat, stool.
n. wa bttkelenge, throne.
Nkttba, 3, n.f flash of lightning.
See note under lightning.
Nkudimba, 3, n.j dove, pigeon.
Nkudu, 3, n., terrapin, tortoise,
turtle. Sometimes spelled
nknva.
Nkuietu, 3, w., vest, waistcoat.
Nkumba, 3, »., a barren or sterile
or childless woman or female of
animal, perhaps also unfruitful
tree.
Nkumbikumbi, 3, n., hawk.
Nkunyi, 3, w., ugliness. This is a
slang word.
-a n., ugly.
NkAsa, 3, n.y used for dikftsa(foot)
in the ph. muan'a n., toe.
clana cia n. or muan'a n.
munlne, great toe.
Nkusu, 3, «., louse (in the head).
Nkusu, 3, »., parrot.
Nkutu, 3, n.j spoon.
Novemba, w.(Eng.), November.
Nowa, vt.y to gather or harvest or
reap the ripe millet.
Nsabanga, 3, n.(Jrom Portuguese),
soap.
Ns&fu, 3, «., mango. This word
has been introduced from the
Lower Congo and is there ap-
plied to a native fruit which is
not found in the upper Kasai
regions.
Ns&hi, 3, n.{from Portuguese), lock,
padlock. Often used for the
key and the latch.
dlsu dia n., keyhole.
muan'a n., key.
xlbika or ela with n., to lock,
fasten with a lock.
Nsatao, 3, n.y wasp nest made of
Wood paste.
Ns&ho, 3, w., satchel, large open
bag, scrip.
Nsahola, 3, «., onion.
Ns&la, pi. of 3 or 4> «., hunger,
appetite, starvation.
dl ne or ufua or unva Tjuith n.,
or suma or sama with n. as
suhj. and the pers. as obj.^ to be
hungry, have an appetite.
fua n., or n. as suhj. of xlha and
the pers. as obj.y to be faint from
hunger, be famished, be
starved.
May be spelled nz&la.
Nsalata, 3, n., salad. From Portu-
guese.
Nsambn, pi. of 3 or 4, »., used in
phrases kala n. and kosa n.
meaning to settle or decide a
dispute or disagreemen|:, judge,
pronoimce judgment.
Nsampu, 3, n., leaves of the pea
vine used as greens.
Ns&mu,. pi. of 4, w., the state of
invisibility.
buanga bua n., medicine or
charm for making one in-
visible.
Nse, pi. of 3 or 4, w., sweetness,
flavor, good taste (food).
-a n., sweet, pleasant or agree-
able to taste, tasty, savory.
ena ne n., to be unsavory, be
unpalatable.
Nseke, pi. of 4, »., sif tings of com.
Nsekididi, 3, »., el^ra amount
given to conclude trade, gift,
present, "dash," interest, rent.
tentekela n., to pay interest.
Nsenda, 3, n., blacksmith.
Nsoko, 3, »., a brownish-gray
monkey.
Nsolo, 3, »., fowl, chicken. May
be spelled nsolo.
had! hasoma n., cockcrowing,
early morning.
Nsubu, 3, n.y house, home, resi-
dence, mansion, edifice, build-
ing, room, chamber.
buexa mu n. wa mazika, to
imprison.
mukelenge or mul&mi with wa
n. wa maxika, jailor.
NSUBU— NVUNDE.
387
Nsnbu (contintied).
mnnttt wa ma n. wa maxika, a
prisoner.
mtt or ku with n., at home.
n. wa bintu, store, factory.
n. wa cllttltt, tent.
n. wa maxlka, jail, prison.
n. with p.p. passive of handu-
Inla, room, chamber; as,
nsubu ual muhandulula
nsnbu is&tu, the house has
three rooms.
Nsugidi, 3, n.(Jrom Portuguese),
sugar.
Nsuku, 3, n.y howl of pipe.
Nsumixa, 3, r^-(Jrom French), shirt-
Nsunga, 3, n,, odor, smell, flavor,
fragrance, scent. This word
seem:: generally to have the idea
of good smell.
-a n., fragrant.
Nsupu, 3, «.(Eng.), soup, broth.
Ntambangoma, 3, n., a large beetle.
Ntambue, 3, n., lion.
Ntande, 3, n., spider.
Ntanta, 3, w., measure or dimen-
sion, extension, extent, length,
distance. May be long or
short.
n. muihl, breadth, width.
n. mule, length.
Ntendu, 3, w., sharpness (as of
knife).
Ntentekedi, 3, n., see nsekididi.
Nteula, 3, w., razor.
Nti, 3, «.(Eng.), tea.
Ntoka, 3, »., a species of poisonous
snake.
Ntombolo, 3, »., a species of
monkey.
Ntotonji, 3, »., a species of wasp
(making nests of mud).
Ntuixa, pi. of 4, n.{from tuixa),
the state of being invulner-
able, invulnerability.
Ntundu, 3, n., a species of ante-
lope.
Nua, v., to drink, imbibe, smoke.
n. ciala, to consult or divine or
Nua (continued),
enchant by putting a small
piece of iron into the eye.
neg. habitual tense of n. followed
by maluTU, to be temperate.
Muenu, pers. pro., you{pl.), § 105.
Nuixa, vt., to give to drink.
Nungana, vi.y to whisper, grumble,
murmur, mutter, speak or talk
in undertone.
Nunka, v»., to smell, give forth or
emit smell or odor or scent.
n. with muhuya mubi or ka-
hambu or mukuhu or lusu,
to emit bad smell, be fetid,
stink, smell bad.
Nunkila, v., to smell or scent In
order to detect odor.
Nunku, adv., thus, in this manner
or way or fashion or method,
likewise, similarly, so, in such
a way.
Also pronounced nenkn or
nanku.
Nunu, adj., old, aged, ancient.
Generally refers only to persons*
Nuona, vt., to grind, sharpen, whet,
put an edge on.
dibue dia. kunuona, grindstone.
Nvinike, 3, «.(Eng.), vinegar.
Nvlta, 3, «., fight, battle, war.
bena n., army.
elangana n., to fight, wage war.
niiiena n., soldier, warrior.
kosexa or xikixa with n., to quell
or quiet or stop a fight.
May be spelled nflta.
Nvula, 3, w., rain. The pi. means
the rainy season, summer.
dibue dia n., hailstone.
mukenyi or muhenyi or muele
followed by wa n., a flash of
lightning.
n. as subj. of kuma with diku-
bakuba as obj., to thunder.
n. as subj. of tangadika or tan-
galdka, to cease raining, clear
up.
Nvunde, 3, »., whirlwind.
388
NXI— NYINGU.
Nxl, «., orphanhood.
muan'a n., orphan. PI. is bana
ba nxi.
Nxidila(?), v/., to shut out or shut
in. Perhaps from nxlla, road.
Nxila, 3, n.y path, way, road, route,
street. May be spelled njila.
mu n., along the path.
n. munlne, a highway.
n. wa dikmnbl dia bnlobo, rail-
way track.
n. wa ku, way to.
Nxima, pi. of 3 or 4, n., bread, food,
nourishment.
See bidia.
Nxlngu, 3, «., neck.
flekela n., to choke, throttle,
strangle by squeezing.
Nxlti, 3, w.(Eng.), sheet.
Nyacl, 3, «., a sneeze.
ela n., to sneeze.
Nyamuka, i/i.y to run rapidly.
Nyana, vi.y to be emaciated,
thin, grow thin, waste away,
be haggard or lean, decrease,
diminish, reduce, wane (moon).
Nyan(a), i, «., friend, companion,
mate. The final a is elided
when the poss. pro. enclitic
forms are added. § 138.
Nyanga, vt.f see ona.
Nyanguka, vi., see on oka.
Nya-nya, adj., small, little, mi-
nute, diminutive, thin, narrow,
few,, scarce, fine. § 76.
See kise.
Nyanyixa, v/., to emaciate, abbre-
viate, abridge, reduce, dimin-
ish, decrease.
Nyema, vi.y to flee, run away,
escape, take refuge, retreat,
run.
Nyemenena, vt.y to compress, press
or push or shove or squeeze
down on, cram together.
Nyemexa, vt., to put to flight.
Nyenga, vi. or vt., to twist, screw,
turn around, squirm, wriggle,
wring, the aching or griping or
hurting of the stomach or
Nyensa (continued).
bowels, be constipated or cos-
tive.
n. mp&la, to frown, knit the
brows, scowl.
Nyensa, vt., to rob, take or seize
by force.
Nyengabala, vi., to be pliant, be
bendable, be flexible, be sup-
ple, be pUable, be tough or
elastic.
Nyengab&xa, vt,, to wring off or
twist off.
Nyengela, vt., to encircle, surround,
bind up, wrap up, roll up,
wind around, twine around,
coil, gird up, enclose, inclose.
Nyima, 3, n., back, hind part.
-a with ha n. (w ku n., external,
hindermost, the last one, next
one behind, y unger or junior.
ela n., to turn one's back on one.
ha or ku with n., at the ex-
terior, at the outside, at the
posterior, at the rear, at the
stern.
ku n., across, after, around, be-
hind, beyond, outside.
ya ku n., to go after, follow.
Nyina, vt., to evacuate the bowels,
go to stool, have an action.
Nylii(a), I, n., mother. The final
a is elided when the poss. pro.
enclitic is added. § 138.
Nylngabala, vi., to fret, be fretful,
be peevish, be cross, be irri-
table, be petulant.
Nylngala, vi., used with muoyo or
mucima as suhj., to be grieved,
be sorry, be penitent, be de-
pressed, despond, be despond-
ent, be morbid, be melancholy,
be sad, be sorrowful, pine,
regret, repent, be solemn or
solicitous or anxious,^ used also
of the waning moon about to
disappear.
Nylngu, 3, n., pot, frying-pan,
vessel.
NYINK— OMBA.
389
Nylnk(a), i, »., grandparent, an-
cestor, progenitor, forefather.
The final a is elided when the
f^ss. pro. enclitic is added.
n. mukAxl, grandmother.
n. mulumi, grandfather.
Nylsu, I, «., father. This word
always has poss. pro. enclitic.
§'38.
Nyixl, 3, »., electric fish.
Nyoka, vt.^ to renounce, denounce,
censure, disown, neglect, con-
demn, deny, not to praise.
Nyoka, 3, »., snake, serpent.
nyoka'a bundu, a large green
worm (edible).
Nyoku, I, »., mother.
Nyongangandu, 3, n., gall.
Nyonsanyonga, adv., slowly, slug-
gishly, lazily.
Nyongo, 3, n., shell of snail.
nyongo'a dicu, drum of ear.
tUfl tua nyongo'a dicu, wax of
ear.
Nyongoboka, vi., to be crooked or
bent or curved or zigzag.
Nyongoboxa, v/., to bend, curve,
make zigzag.
Nytkka, v/., to cast or throw away
as useless.
Nyuknla, vt., to shake.
Nyuma, n., Holy Spirit, Holy
Ghost. From Greek nvevfua.
Nyjima, 3, »., animal, beast, brute.
n. wa ku bula, domestic animal.
n. wa multu, wild animal.
Nyunga, vi. or vt.y to shake, move,
move back and forth, sift.
Nynngakana, w., to stagger, reel,
totter,be unstable,be unsteady.
Nynngixa, v/., to shake, move or
wave back and forth, turn (as
wheel).
Nyunguluka, vi.^ to go around, go
around in a circle, inclose, en-
close, encircle, go round about,
turn round and round. This
word is generally followed by
ph. ku nyima.
Nyungulttla, vt.y to encircle, sur-
round, enclose, inclose, turn
round and round.
Nyunguluxa, i//., to turn (as
wheel).
Nyunyu, 3, »., bird.
mputtt n., tame pigeon.
n. wa mudinga, crane.
Nzaji, 3, n.f flash of lightning. See
note under lightning.
Nzambi, i, n., God. See note
under God.
amba bualu bua N., to preach.
-a N., divine.
bantn ba N., the church (mem-
bers of).
bldla bla N., communion. Lord's
Supper.
bualu bua N., Christianity, the
Gospel, the Christian religion.
ml a N., communion wine.
muambl wa bualu bua N.,
priest, preacher, minister, mis-
sionary.
mukanda wa N., Bible, Scrip-
tures.
mukeienge wa bambl ba bualu
bua N., high priest.
muntu wa N., Christian, mem-
ber of church, convert.
musoko wa n., -heaven.
Nzevu, 3, n., elephant.
Okotoba, ».(Eng.), October (the
month).
Olola, v/., to bend straight, straight-
en, stretch out or extend or
hold out or reach out or put
out (as hand), open out,
spread out, smooth out, un-
bend, unfold.
Also spelled ololola.
Ololoka, vi., to open out, unfold or
unbend itselif, stretch out, be
straight or straightened.
Omba, v/., to smelt. Doubtless has
reference only to the blowing
of the bellows.
390
OMBELA— SABILA.
Ombela, vt., to swim (as person).
Ona, vt.j to cause to go bad, spoil,
waste, wear out, injure, mar,
defile, profane, damage, de-
• mt)lish, impair, destroy, pol-
lute, desecrate, devastate, dis-
cipline, punish, afflict, be cruel
to, ill-treat, torture, oppress,
persecute, be unkind to, abuse,
tyrannize over, corrupt, close
(the path), spend or exhaust or
expend recklessly or prodi-
gally or extravagantly, squan-
der, lose (in trading).
Ondaha, v/., to cure, heal, restore
to health, treat (disease).
Used only of persons^ not of the
medicine.
Ondela, v.j see tonkena.
Ongoloka, w., to escape, run away
(generally with idea of secret-
ly), take refuge, get away.
Ongolola, vt., sUp away a thing
secretly, smuggle away.
Onguela, vi., to do anything
stealthily or slyly or slowly or
softly, sneak.
Onoka, vi.y to go bad, spoil, be-
come useless or worthless, be
corrupt, deteriorate, go to
waste, be worn out, be im-
paired, be marred, be ex-
hausted or spent or expended
carelessly, be lost in trading.
Sometimes this word is pronounced
oneka.
Onona, v., to snore. The noun
biono(^/.) is generally used as
ohj. There is a secondary
meaning of to roar (as falls,
wind).
Onso, adj. (taking Secondary Pre-
fhces)j all, any, each, entire,
every, intact, whole, total,
perfect, any one, whichever,
whichsoever, whoever, what-
ever.
bantu bonso, everybody, any
body.
Onso (continued).
blntu bionso, everything, any-
thing.
o. combined insep. with, mu and
ku and ha, everywhere, any-
where, wheresoever. § 371.
Osa, vt., to do, accomplish, act,
commit, effect, form, shape,
make, perform, prepare, pro-
duce, construct.
See enza.
Ota, V. When used with mun-
ya(2) as ohj. it means to bask
or warm one's self in the sun-
shine. When used with
kahia(8) as ohj., it means to
warm one's self by the fire.
O-umue, adj., alike, the same,
identical, correct, like, of same
or similar kind or sort or char-
acter or quality or species or
variety, mate, match, equal.
§ 77 W> 96.
di 0., to resemble, agree.
ena 0., to be dissimilar, be un-
like, be incorrect, be unequal,
be uneven, differ, vary.
Sometimes it seems to he spe'led
o-mue.
Owa, v/., to hang a person, kill by
hanging.
Owa, v., to bathe, wash one's self.
Can he used only with refer-
ence to the hody.
Owela, vi., to swim.
Owexa, vt.y to bathe or wash one,
cleanse.
Oxa, v., to ache, smart, bum, pain,
hurt, roast, set on fire, con-
sume, ignite.
o. mil uTiun, to bake.
S.
S&ba, vi.y to play, sport, boil or
ferment or effervesce,
s. ne, to amuse, play with, have
fun with.
S&bila, vt.y to play with, amuse,
have fun with.
SABIXA— SANGAKANA.
39^
S&bixa, vt.y to amuse, play with,
joke, jest with, have fun with,
tease.
Sabnka, w., to go across (water),
come or go over, cross, ferry
one's self across, ford, pass
over.
Sabula, v/., to put or carry or ferry
one across a stream.
S&bula, vt.y to boil, stew.
Sakula, vL, to attend a market, go
marketing.
Sala, v/. (Lower Congo), this v. has
the equivalent of enza, to do.
It is sometimes used by those
who have been in the Lower
Congo. For lack of a better
word it is often used for set the
table.
Sala, vt. or vi., to mix, mingle,
intermingle, move, stir, shake,
wriggle, wiggle, squirm.
Salakana, vt, or vi., to mix, min
gle, intermingle, move, shake,
wriggle, wiggle, squirm.
Salakanya, vt., to ^ake, move,
stir.
Salala, vi., to itch.
Sama, v., to lay the head down on
a pillow.
Sama, v., to be sick, be ill, be
unwell, ache, hurt, pain, suffer.
s. with mucima or muoyo, to
be sorry, be penitent, repent,
regret.
s. wtth ns&la as subj. and the
person as obj., to be hungry,
have an appetite.
mutu musame, headache.
Generally the part affected is said
to make sick the person; asj
mutu udi unsama, my head
aches. Bui the person is often
spoken of as being sick in the
part affected; aSy ndi nsama
mutu, I am sick as to my head.
Sama, vi.y to crow.
hadl hasama nsolo, cockcrow-
ing, dawn, early morning.
S&ma, vi.y to become invisible (as
warrior in battle).
Samba, vt.y to cheer, console, com-
fort, show mercy to, be merci-
ful to, pity, sooflie, solace.
Sambakana, vi.y to assemble, come
together, congregate, combine,
gather together, flow together
(as streams), join, meet, con-
verge, unite, mingle, inter-
• mingle, be mixed.
Sambakanya, vt.y to assemble,
collect, combine, gather to-
gether, put to'gether, mix to-
gether, mingle, intermingle,
cause to join, unite, stir to-
gether.
SambakAza, vt.y see sambakanya.
Sambombo, card, num., six. Takes
Secondary Prefixes.
SambHka, vi.y to go or step across
or over (as log, path, etc.),
exceed, overabound.
Sambula, vt.y to put or take any-
thing across or .over (as over
a log or path).
Sambulukila, vi., to scatter or
spread (as contagious dis-
ease).
Sambuluxangana, vt,y to throw
back and forth.
Samina, vt., to scold, reprove, re-
proach, rebuke, admonish,
correct, control, discipline,
manage, govern, restrain.
Samina, vt.y with muoyo or muci-
ma a^ subj. this word means to
covet, long for, yearn for.
Sampila, vi.y to bud, sprout, shoot
out leaves or new branches,
put out leaves.
Samuna, vt.y to comb the hair.
Sanda, vt.y to commit fornication
or adultery with.
Sanga, vt. and vi.y to assemble,
collect, put together, gather
together, mingle, mix together,
intermingle, combme, unite.
Sangakana, vt.y to assemble, come
together, congregate, combine,
39*
SANGAKANA— SEKEXA.
Songakana (continued).
gather together, join, meet,
converge, unite, mingle, inter-
mingle, be mixed, be disar-
ranged, be in disorder, be de-
ranged, be out of order.
Sangakanya, vt., to assemble, col-
lect, combine, gather together,
put together, mix, mingle, in-
termingle, cause to join, unite,
stir together, disarrange, put
in disorder, derange, put out
of order.
SangakAza, vL, see sangakanya.
Sang&la, vi., to amend, be better,
convalesce, get well, improve
in health, recover, be resusci-
tated or revived.
Sangana, vL, to meet up with, find.
Sangila, vt. or vt.y to put together,
combine, assemble, collect,
gather together, flow or meet
together, converge, unite.
Sangixa, vt.y collect, combine, as-
semble, add up, gather to-
gether, mix together, unite,
have in common, put together,
intermingle, mingle, stir to-
gether.
Sanguka, vi.y to change into some-
thing else, the act of transmi-
gration or metempsychosis, be
born again. The same word is
used of the reverstble pic-
tures in the magic lantern,
Sanguluka, vi.^ to scatter (as
clouds after a rain), hence to
clear up, to amend, get well or
better, convalesce, improve in
health, recover, be resusci-
tated or revived.
Sanguluxa, vt., to resuscitate, re-
vive, bring to, i.e., to scatter
the sickness.
Sanka, vi., to be happy, be blessed,
be glad, be joyful, be content,
be in good humor, be pleased,
be delighted, be merry, exult,
rejoice; there is a secondary
meaning of to be proud, be
Sanka {continued),
haughty, be vain, be pompous,
vaunt one's self.
The neg. means to be unhappy,
etc.
Generally used wUh mncima or
muoyo as subj.
Sankixa, vt., to bless, make happy
or joyful, cheer, gladden,
please, delight.
Generally used with muoyo or
micima as sub'j,
Santa Klfts, n., Santa Claus.
Sanxila, v., to sprinkle.
Sasa, vi.f to be sour, be acid.
Sasakana, vi., to itch.
Sasakata, vi., to be impatient, be
in a hurry, be restless, be im-
easy, be nervous, be fidgety.
Sasula, vt., to demolish (as a
house), tear down, pull down,
destroy, wreck.*
Satana, i, n., Satan, devil, demon.
Introduced from Hebrew,
mul&m&ci wa satana, demon or
devil (in Biblical sense).
S&tu, card, num., three. Takes
Secondary Prefixes.
Saunde, £ng., a word used on the
steamers meaning to sound.
Sante, n.(£ng.), south. Regarded
as belonging to class III.
Saxa, vt., to shake, move, stir.
Saya, vt., see seya.
Seja, see sexa.
S£ka, vi. or vt., to laugh or laugh
at, be amused at, deride, make
fun or sport of, scoff at, taunt.
S$ka-muabi, n.(the last part only
is inflected according to class
II), albino.
Sekelela, vt., to give salutation or
respects or greeting to a chief,
salute or greet a chief, con-
gratulate, hallow, do incanta-
tions, be grateful to, be thank-
ful to, thank.
SSkexa, vt., to amuse, make to
laugh, have fun with, provoke
laughter, be rediculous or
SEKEXA— SOMBA.
393
S#kexa {continued),
ludicrous or laughable or funny
or amusing.
Sekldlla, vL, to add something
extra to conclude the trade,
"dash."
Si^kila, vt.f to push, shove, press or
thrust against.
Sela, vi.j to move along sidewise,
sidle.
Sela, vt.f to pay the dowry for a
wife — given to parents of bride
by the groom.
Selemuka, vi.y to slip, slide.
Selo, inter jec.(Eng.)y sail ho!
Sembakena, vt.j to meet and pass
on the way.
Semena, vi.j to move along side-
wise, sidle.
Semexa, vt., to make to move along
sidewi '»c, push or shove against,
press ( r thrust against.
Sendama, m.j to lean, incline or
slant or slope out of the per-
pendicular.
Sendeka, vt.y to cause to incline,
lean, slant.
Sendemexa, vt.y see sendeka.
Senena, vi.y to be sleek, be smooth,
be soft.
Senga, vt.y to shake, move, sift (as
flcur).
Sengela, vt.y to implore, beseech,
persuade, plead with, invoke,
supplicate, coax, entreat,
"please do." There is usually
implied the idea of caressing.
Sengelela, vt.y see sengela.
Sengula, vt., to cut away brush,
clear a field.
Sentedi, i, «.(Eng. or French),
sentry, sentinel, watchman.
Sepetemba, n. (Eng.), September.
Sesa, vi.y to make a detour.
See sesuka.
Sesnka, vi.y to make a detour, turn
out of the way or aside in
order to pass or to permit
another to pass, go round an
Sesuka (continued).
object in the way, move or
get out of the way, glance oflF.
Sexa, vt.{Causaiive o) sela), to
push or press or thrust against,
shove. The idea is that of
sideiyise. Sometimes spelled
seja.
Seya, vt.y to carve or cut up meat,
dissect.
Sitacl, n.(Eng.), starch. Regarded
as belonging to class III.
Sodia, v.y to click the throat in order
to express anger or disapproval,
abuse or insult one in this way,
grumble, offend, show scorn or
vexation.
Sotaa, vt.y to stir up together, mix,
mingle.
Sotaela, v. (Eng.), to spell.
Sotaoka, vi.y the accidental or unin-
tentional firing off of a gun or
springing of a trap.
Sometimes spelled suhuka.
Sokoka, vt.y to conceal, hide, se-
crete,
s. musokoko, to keep a secret.
Sokola, vt.y to confess, own up,
unhide, reveal, acknowledge,
disclose, divulge.
Sokolola, vt.y to betray or reveal or
tell a secret, (fivulge, find
something hidden, confess, own
up, acknowledge, unhide, dis-
close.
Sokoma, vt.y to conceal or hide or
secrete one's self, be concealed,
be hidden.
Sola, vt.y to clear off a field, cut
away large trees.
Soloka, vi.y to hop or jump (as
frog).
Soma, vt.y to load or ram a gun.
Somba, vt.y to borrow with inten-
tion of returning equivalent in
value or kind. Contrast with
lianza.
Somba, v.y to converse together,
have conversation, speak of
talk together.
394
SOMBAKUXA— SUNGILA.
Sombakikxa, vt., to exchange,
change, trade.
Sombexa, vt.^ to lend, loan, let out.
The tdea is that of not returmng
the same article but the same in
kind.
Sompoka, vi,, to stick through (as
needle through cloth).
Sompola, vt.j to pass through (as
bullet).
Songa, v/., to carve (as wood), cut,
file the teeth, form or shape or
make by cutting or carving,
sharpen to a point.
Songrakikxi, i, n., girl, maiden, lass,
maid, young woman, damsel,
virgin.
Songalumi, i, n., boy, lad, youth,
young man.
Songfuela, vt,, to accuse one before
another, betray, complain of
to another, backbite, defame,
slander, tell on, traduce, be
traitor to, be treacherous
toward, vilify, talk or speak
against one, calumniate.
Sonsola, vt,, to stir up or poke the
fire.
Sua, vt., to love, desire, esteem,
fancy, care for, fain, like,
prefer, want, wish.
8. bakikxi, to be lascivious, be
lecherous, be lewd, be licen-
tious, be lustful. Used of men.
8. baluml, to be lascivious, be
lecherous, be lewd, be licen-
tious, be lustful. Used of
women,
neg. of 8., to despise, detest, hate.
The infin, kusua is used as noun
to express affection, love.
Suanga, t^/., to hull, husk, shuck.
Sulka, vt.y to tie, bind, fasten, tie
a knot.
Stkka, vt.f to shrug the shoulders.
Sikka, vt.y to put an instrument in
tune, harmonize, attune.
SOklla, vt.y to harmonize (as two
instruments), tune instruments
to each other, attune.
Stkkixa, vt.y to sharpen by hammer-
ing (as blacksmith).
Some say sekexa.
Stkkuka, vi.y to be out of tune or
harmony, not to harmonize, be
discordant.
Sikkula, vt., to put out of tune or
harmony, cause not to har-
monize.
Sukula, v/. (Lower Congo), to wash,
cleanse, purge, purify, clean
with water.
Sukula, vi.j to urinate, make
water.
Sukulu, ».(Eng.), school. Re-
garded as belonging to class III.
Sukunya, vi.y to urinate, make
water.
Suluka, vi.y to get or become free
or loose or untied or undone or
unfastened.
Sulula, vt.y to loosen, set free, let
go, liberate, disentangle, ex-
tricate, let loose, give freedom
or liberty, untie a knot, unbind,
undo, unfasten, unloose.
Suma, vt.y to bite, sting, hurt (as in
pain).
8. with ns&la as subj. and the
person as obj.y to be hungry,
have an appetite.
Sumba, vt.y to buy, purchase, bar-
ter.
Sumbula, vt.y to cast or throw away
as useless.
Sumlka, vt.y to bleed a person by
cupping, cup.
Suna, vt.y to bring or carry or fetch
or draw water from a spring
or stream.
Sunga, vt.y to separate or part those
in a quarrel, pacify, reconcile,
conciliate, mediate, intervene.
Sungidlla, vt.y to defend, deliver,
mediate in behalf of, save,
rescue, succor.
Sun^lla, vt.y to defend, save, de-
liver, mediate in behalf of,
rescue, succor.
«tt
^t.
?^6:
^^^^^,
e<|y
Ot//
a^e.
^o
®l*J
^*<ia
*' z//.
*'*«»4i^'^^^
-c^'^S!'^''-
»ai^
^' to
ibe ^.^/.
'^.f^S^tSSs?^
.««)
I'c-t
idi °«? -^ "«&v.S
^^>^
<^t.
S?'5^?>
'•5;^-^^,
'V?«ew,
"^^O:
'M.
bh
to
^^tn^ r Perl
^a
o^
toth
^USc
•.^a;>
.^SSF^^f^
6e >'.i'! ^r/'^'A^^.fWi
'"si.
,'^t,
^-Cf'M»:
^-^SS^JS^S^
f«'«fi:*?'«
^lij
*^aA
'^'^
^^v
^o/Jf,
e/,f
^SS'J'SI'Ss-
iy.
^t
e^l
^^su
Of
^-i-4-
Tamba, v., to pass on ahead of or
by, go on before, come or go
past, be beyond, be first, go
over or through or by, surpass,
exceed.
t. buimpe, to be better, be su-
perior.
t. with bukftle or ngnilu, to beat,
excel, conquer, win, defeat,
overcome, master, overthrow,
prevail, quell, repulse, subdue,
subject, subjugate, vanquish,
be victorious.
In Comparative constructions
there is often the idea of very,
too, excessively, exceedingly,
extremely, farther, too much
for, more, most, quite, so.
In the Comparative Degree with
this verb we have the construc-
tion for the Eng. than. § 89.
When used with proper adj. or
verb this word expresses the idea
of infinite.
Tambakana, vi., to go back and
forth, go backwards and for-
wards, pace to and fro.
Tamblxa, v/., to throw over or past
or through, let one pass by.
Tambuka, vi., to go out, come out.
From Buk.
Tambula, v/., to cast out or drive
out or throw out or chase out.
From Buk.
Tampakana, vi.y to spread, scatter.
Tanda, v/., to abuse, argue with,
quarrel with, fall out with,
maltreat, ill-treat, revile, talk
angrily, bicker.
Tanda, vi.^ to change into some-
thing else, the act of transmi-
gration or metempsychosis, be
born again. The same word is
used of the reversible pictures
in the magic lantern.
Tandabala, vi.y to be stiff, be in-
flexible, be unbending, be
rigid.
Tandangana, v.y to abuse each
other, argue, quarrel, wrangle,
Tandansana (continued).
fall out with each other, mal-
treat each other, ill-treat each
other, talk angrily, bicker.
Tandlxa, vt.y to revile.
Tanduka, vi.y to fade (in color).
Tanfunya, v., to make an ui.stemly
noise with the mouth \^hile
chewing or masticating food.
Tangadlka, vi.y to scatter, clear
away as mist, be deranged or
disarranged, be in disorder or
confusion, be out of order, be
confused, disperse, be cast
about, fall to pieces, he ex-
hausted or spent or expended.
Tangadlxa, vt.y to scatter, strew,
demolish, derange, d.sarrange,
put in disorder or confusion,
disperse, put out of order, cast
about, confuse, exhaust or
spend or expend recklessly or
prodigally or extravagantly,
waste or squander.
TangalAka, vi., see tangadika.
Tangal&xa, vt.y see tangadlxa.
Tangldixa, vt.y to cause to see,
show to, indicate to, point out
to.
Tangiia, vt.y to see, behold, look
at, observe, notice, regard,
view, witness, examine by
looking at, find, inspect, over-
look, oversee, superintend,
perceive, watch after.
t. talala, to look at steadfastly,
gaze at, stare at.
Tangixangana, vt.y used with
mp&ia meaning to face each
other, be opposite.
Tankakana, vi.y to rock or roll (as
boat).
Tankak&xa, vt.y to rock or roll (a
(boat).
Tantamana, vi.y to be stiff, be in-
flexible, be unbending, be
rigid, be taut or tight, strain as
in travail.
Tantamika, vi.y to swell, distend,
expand, spread out, rise as
TANTAMIKA— TEMEXA.
Tantamika (cofUinued).
dough, be taut or tight, in-
flate one's self.
Tantamlxa, vt., to inflate, expand,
swell, spread out, distend,
tighten.
Tanu, card, num., five. Takes Sec-
ondary Prefixes.
Tata, vi.j to be worried, be an-
noyed, be troubled, be pro-
voked, be bothered, be ag-
gravated, be vexed, be perse-
cuted.
Tatakana, vi., to hesitate about,
be uncertain, falter, be fickle,
vacillate.
Tata, I, n., father, used as title of
respect in addressing chief or
master or elder.
t. muakunyi, uncle (paternal and
younger than the father).
t. mukulu, uncle (paternal and
older than the •father).
t. mukilxi, aunt (on father's
side).
Tatu-muenu, i, n.{pl. ts batatu-
muenu), father-in-law. Thts
word ts used both by the hus-
band and the wife. § 42, Note 3.
T&ya, v.(Buk.), tell, speak, say.
Taya, vt., to crack, burst, shell or
hull out, hatch (as fowl).
Some seem to say toya.
Tayika, w., to burst, split, explode,
pop, scream or squall or shriek
in terror.
Tayixa, vt., to burst, split, explode.
Tebuka, vi., to halt, limp, be lame.
enda utebuka, to walk lame.
Teka, vt., to put, place, set down,
set away, put by or lay by, save
up, store away.
t. with dlkima or bukitu, to be
brave, be fearless, be daring, be
courageous, be bold, be vali-
ant.
t. with diyoyo or mutS.yo, to
disturb, make trouble or dis-
turbance or tumult.
t. mu mulonso, to put in line.
Tekela, vt., to pi
for, set apart
consecrate.
Tekemena, vt., t
trust, have f
have confide
neg. of t., to d:
The tnfin. ma
noun hope.
Teketa, vi., to
hausted, be
be feeble, l
be fatigued
potent, be 1
mit, give up
surrender.
t. ku bianz:
smooth or i
Tekete, aij,, w
frail, infirn
slack (not
palm wine'
-a mucima
modest, pe
muanda mu
mubldi mut
tekete ku
sleek or sc
Tekexa, vt., 1
haust, enf
loose, loc
price or v
humiliate,
t. muxings
bring do
lower the
Tela, vt., to c;
one's bac
talk abo
pheme.
ally folia
Tela, vt., to i
Teiexa, vt.,
attend t
tion.
Tema, w., to
Temena, iH.
gleam, j
Temexa, vt..
the fire
398
TEMPA— TOHEXA.
Tempa, v.y to consult a medicine
man, divine, enchant, conjure.
Tempela, vi.y to send out or shoot
out leaves, bud, sprout.
Tempexa, v., to consult a medicine
man, divine, enchant, conjure.
Tendeiela, vt.y to bless or praise or
glorify (God), perform incan-
tations before a charm or
fetish or medicine, do obeisance
before, adore, pray to, honor,
hallow, pay homage to, in-
voke, worship, extol, magnify,
' revere, reverence, suppUcate,
venerate. This word has spe-
cial reference to incantations
done before a charm.
Tensula, vt., to circumcise.
di mutengula {p.p. passtve), to
be circumcised.
ena mutengula (p.p. passive) ^
to be uncircumcised.
Tenkakana, vi., to stagger, reel,
totter, be unsteady, be un-
stable.
Tentama, vt.^ to lie on top, be piled
up or heaped up on top, be
full (moon).
Tente, indeclinable adj.y full. § 78.
This is derived from the verb
tentama.
. Tenteka, vt., to lay or put or place
on top of, pile or heap one
on top of the other, mend or
patch (as clothes).
Tentekanya, vt,, to pile or heap
or lay up one on top of the
other.
Tentekela, vt.y to give or add an
extra amount to conclude the
trade, "dash."
t. kasombelu, to pay interest.
Tentekela, v.y to eavesdrop, spy,
reconnoitre, watch (as thief for
a chance to steal).
TentekAxa, vt., to pile or heap or
lay or place one on top of the
other, mend or patch (as
cloth).
Tentemexa, vt.^ to cohabit with,
copulate, lie with, have sexual
intercourse with.
Tentula, vt., to transplant, set out
or plant out.
Tentulula, 7;/., to take off from,
relieve of.
t. muxinga, to lower the price,
i.e., to drop off the fingers in
counting down the price.
Teta, vt.y to attempt, strive, try,
test, make an effort or tri^,
endeavor.
t. munda, to tempt or test or
make trial of one (as of Abra-
ham's faith).
Some say tenta.
Teta, vt.y to look for, search for,
seek, hunt for.
Teya, vt.y to ensnare, entrap, trap,
entice by leaving some&ing to
test, lure, allure, catch in trap
or snare, snare, tempt, in-
veigle.
t. ndende, to set a trap or snare.
Teya, vt.y to listen. Generally with
macu, ears, understood.
To, adv.y this word expresses the
idea of a long distance or a
long time or continuity through-
out, ceaselessly, constancy,
continually, eternally, ever,
forever, incessantly, perpet-
ually.
diba to ne dilolo, all day long.
dinda to ne ku munda munya,
from early morning till noon,
all the forenoon.
ku . . . to ne ku, from ... to
or till or until.
butuku to ne with lunkelu or
dinda, all night long.
Tobela, vt.y to creep or move or
sneak stealthily or slyly or
softly.
Toha, vi.y to be damp, be wet, be
moist, be soaked.
Tohexa, vt.y to dampen, wet,
moisten, soak.
TOKA— TUA.
Toka, vi.f to be or become white,
be light in color or light from
moon or fire, shine, give light,
be pure, be spotless, be un-
spotted.
Toke, adj.{p.p, of toka), white,
transparent, clean, fair (skin),
light, spotless, unspotted, pure
(water).
Tokela, v/., to excuse, pardon, for-
give, absolve.
See note under pardon.
Tokexa, vt., to whiten, clean,
bleach, sanctify, ordain, con-
secrate, purge, purify.
t. wUh mucima or munda, to
apologize, reconcile, atone for,
pardon, forgive, absolve, ex-
cuse.
See note under pardon.
Tokexila, vt., to forgive, pardon,
excuse, absolve. Generally
followed by mucima or munda.
See note under pardon.
Tokoka, vi.y to fall over, upset,
turn over.
Tokola, v/., to upset, turn over, lay
down, overturn, push or shove
over, put <?r place down. Some
say tonkolo.
Tokoloka, v*., to be whitish or
gray.
Tokoloke, adj. {p. p. from toko-
loka), whitish, gray.
Toloka, vi.y to sprout, bud.
Tomboka, vi.y see buluka.
Tomboke, adj.{p.p. of tomboka),
see buluke.
Tompakana, vi.y to change, alter-
nate.
Tompakanya, vt.y to change, alter-
nate.
TompakCkxa, vt.y see tompakanya.
Tonda, v., abhor, despise, detest,
dislike, loathe, hate, to lose
taste for, be tired of, be weary
of, be disgusted with. Note
that the person loathing or
hating becomes the obj. of the
V. rather than the subp) asy
Tonda {continuei
bidia bid! b
the bread.
Tonda, v., to (
acknowledge
Tonda, v., used
oj subj. with
meaning to
be near to 'i
be the same
be weary of,
Tonkena, v.y use
disu meanin,\
of the eye
lower lid ar
insult.
Tonta, vt.y to b(
Tontolola, v.y t
grumble, gr« i
ter, cavil, b :
contented, ] i
Tontomona, v.
mur, growl,
Tonya, vt.y to b
t. minu, to cl
Tonyiuna, vi.y
bent or cur
Totobula, vt.y i
Toy a, vt.y see ts i
Tu, vi.y to be.
Tua, vt.y to bail :
Tua, vt.y to hit
strike, thr i
crush or n i
in or sticl
down, thr; i
with burnt :
t. binu ham .
t. cik£ma, tc :
by gruntin ,
amazed, w :
t. with cisi
strike or Y.
t. with dih
smack, sp; i
t. with diki I
kick.
t. lukonyi,
knuckles.
Tua {continued),
t. wUh luaftdi or lus&la or luala,
to pinch, scratch.
t. mlmuemue, to grin, smile.
t. muinu, to peck (as fowl).
t. muk^ma, to grunt or groan or
moan in pain.
t. mas£ba hanxi, to stamp,
tramp or tread heavily.
t. muxinga, to drive a bargain,
talk a trade.
Tua, w., to be sharp, have an edge.
Tua, v., to lose taste for, be tired
of, be weary of, be disgusted
with, loathe. See note under
tomda, to abhor, etc.
Tua, v., to taste, have the taste of,
savor of. The infin, kutua
is used as a noun meaning
taste, savor.
-a kutua kuimpe, tasty, savory,
of good taste.
ena ne kutua kulmpe, unsavory,
unpalatable.
Tua, vi., to extend to, reach to; aSy
cilulu ciandi cidi citua ku
maktisa, his cloth reaches
down to his feet.
Tuadila, vt., to carry for, relieve of.
Tuadixa, vi.y to begin again, com-
mence again, recommence, re-
peat, start over.
Tuala, vt., to bear, carry, fetch,
transport, bring, take.
Tuansana, vi.y to border on or
touch each other, be next to,
join, unite, flow together as two
streams, be near together, be
side by side, be adjacent, be
contiguous.
t. mlxuku, to kiss.
Tuansanya, vt.y see tuansrAxa.
Tuangtixa, vt.y to put or place side
by side, unite, join on to, mend
(as cloth).
Tuanya, vt.y to tear, rend, rip.
Tuanyakanya, vt.y to tear to pieces.
Tuanyangana, vt.y see tuanya-
kanya.
Tuanylka, vi.y to be torn, be rent.
Tubuka, vi.y to have a hole pierced
through or punched through.
t. with disoso or dikela or mu-
tanta, to spring a leak.
Tubula, vt.y to pierce, penetrate,
pimch through or tear through,
stick hole through, perforate,
pick out (as jigger).
t. disoso, to bore a hole, pierce.
Tucila, vi.ijrom tuta, to come
back), to come back, turn back,
return, go back, retire.
Tucixa, vt.(jrom tuta, to come
back), to bring back, send back,
return, fetch or take back,
recall, restore.
Tudika, vi.y to pop (as com in
parching).
Tue, adj. {p. p. of tua, to be sharp),
sharp, fine (point).
Tuetu, pers. pro,y we. § 105.
TAfl, pi. of 8, «., excrement, dirt,
filth, dung, manure.
t. tua nyonso'a dieu, wax of
ear.
This word is sometimes pro-
nounced tuinvi. There are
dimin. forms in sing, kufl and
kinvi.
Tufina, pi. of 8, n., pus, matter.
Tuhakana, vi.y to be bewildered or
confused or confounded or dis-
concerted, be entangled in
speech, be in disorder, be de-
ranged or disarranged, be out
of order, blunder, make a mis-
take, be perplexed, be mixed
up.
Tuhakanya, vt.y see tuhakikxa.
Tuhakfixa, vt.y to confuse, be-
wilder, perplex, confound, mix
up, entangle' in speech, de-
range, put in disorder, dis-
arrange, put out of order.
Tuhftla, vi.y to be dull (as knife).
Tuhika, vi.y to hop, jump, leap,
bound, rebound, spring.
Tuhikila, vt,y to pounce upon,
seize.
TUHU— TUMIKILA
Tuhu, adj., blank, empty, vacant,
void.
The locatives may be prefixed
insep, to this word-, as, mu
mulondo mudi mutuhu, the
bottle is empty. § 79.
Tahuka, v»., to take flight or rise
in fiUght (as bird), fly.
Tnh&xa, vt., to dull, make dull.
From tuhftla.
Tulla, v.{from tua), used in ph. t.
mu mesa, to dazzle.
t. lute, to spit, expectorate.
Taiza^ vt,, to have a dispute or
argument or disagreement
semed or decided.
Taiza, vt., to be invulnerable.
This word seems to be Causa-
tive of tuya, to glance off.
Tuka, vi., to come out of its place,
get free or loose, escape (out
of trap or when tied), come to
pieces, shed (as tears, feathers,
hairs), stick out, protrude, be
broken (as string).
mutoto mutuke, meteor.
t. with eisululu or luanga, to
perspire, sweat.
t. maxl, to bleed.
Tuka, vt.y to abuse, curse, insult,
offend, maltreat, ill-treat, re-
vile, swear at.
Tukula, vt., to pick off or pluck off
(as feathers).
Tula, vt., to draw out, pull out or
up, extract, take to pieces,
undo, break off as string, pick
off or pluck off as feathers,
tear off.
Tula, vt., to forcr^, beat out iron,
shape or make by hammering.
Tula, vt., used with difu or muana
meaning to abort, miscarry.
Tula, vt., to let down or put down
or take down (as basket from
the head).
Tulakana, vi., to come to pieces.
Tulakanya, vt., to take to pieces,
undo, pull to pieces.
Tuloka, vt., to i
flea).
Tulu, pi. of 8,
slumber.
bunsat., todos
nap.
lala t., to be ai
ber.
t. as subj, of k
obj., to be si 1
The dimin. stni
Tuluka, vi., tc
down, desce:
Tulula, vt., to ta
put down.
Tuma, vt., to lej
Tuma, vt., to se 1
Tuma, vt., to se 1
Tumba, vi., to
fame, be di: I
famed, be !
be honorab :
important, '
mighty, be
be eminent
Tumbe, adj.{p :
mous, d I
famed, glo
able, illusti 1
fluential, 1
nowned, ei
Tumblxa, vt.y
bless, glor 1
pay homa}
worship,
respect, re ;
erate, mal
famous.
neg. of t., t( :
dient to,
dishonor.
Tumika, vi.,
able, min
neg. of t.,
heedless,
lectful, b
able, be 1
controUa
Tumikila, v
be docile '
402
TUMIKILA— UFUA.
Tumikila {continued):
be faithful to, heed, hearken to,
observe the word of, obey,
mind, be meek or tractable
toward.
neg. of t., to disobey, be diso-
bedient or obstinant toward, be
neglectful or negUgent of, be
unruly or untractable or un-
manageable toward, be heed-
less to.
Tumina, vt., to send to.
t- <**(5)> to send word to, com-
mand, order.
Tuminu, pi. of 8, n., mucus from
the nose.
Tampa, vt.y to boil, stew.
Tunduka, vi., to rise to the surface,
arise.
Tunduia, vL, to pick out as jigger.
Tunsa, vt.y to sew.
Tunsula, vt.y to castrate, cut.
Tungfula, vt., to shell com.
Tungrulungu, pi. of 8, n., convul-
sion, fit, epileptic fit, spasm,
unconsciousness or insensi-
bility due to convulsion, etc.
fua or haluka wUh t., to faint,
have a fit or convulsion or
spasm, swoon, be unconscious
or insensible.
See note under cifuidixe.
Tunta, vt., to dip up water.
TuQtiimuka, vi., to swell, distend,
expand, inflate one's self,
spread out, rise (as dough).
t. with ml as subj., to be a flood.
Tuntumuxa, vt., to distend, ex-
pand, swell, inflate, spread
out, tighten (cause to swell),
swell, loosen (so as not to be
tight).
Tuta, vt., to beat, chastize, thrash,
chasten, whip, scourge, flog,
hit, pound, knock, lash with
switch, switch, punish, dis-
cipline, strike, crush down.
t.. cibubu, to clap the hands
crosswise (in regret).
Tuta {continued).
t. cixondu, to snap the finger (in
regret).
t. luktlxi, to clap the hands.
t. with dlhi or luhi, to slap,
smack, spank.
Tuta, vi.y to come back, turn back,
return, go back, retire.
Tuta, v., used with mukuekue
meaning to cackle.
Tutakana, vi., to assemble, come
together, congregate, com-
bine, gather together, meet, be
mixed together, mingle, inter-
mingle.
Tutakanya, vt,, see tutakikxa.
Tutaktkxa, vt., to collect, put to-
gether, combine, assemble,
gather together, mix together,
mingle, intermingle, stir to-
gether.
Tutangana, v., to collide, strike
each other.
Tutuka, vi., to fade.
Tutula, vt., to beat out (as dust
from mat), dust, shake out.
Tuya, vi., to be half cooked.
Tuya, vi,, to glance off, recover or
be resuscitated or be revived
(with name of sickness as
subj.).
Tuyixa, vt,, to cause to glance off;
hence, in case of sickness to
resuscitate, revive, bring to.
Ubula, vt,, to peel off, bark, strip
off, skim.
Udixa, vt.ijrom ula, to buy), to
sell to.
Ufua, v., to hear, listen, attend
(pay attention), feel, perceive,
be conscious of, detect (odor
or smell), understand, dis-
cover, comprehend, heed, take
heed, obey, mind, observe the
word of, be obedient, hearken
to.
404
UMUXA— WEWE.
Umuxa, vLy to drive out, cast out,
send away, eject, put out,
empty, chase out, clear out or
away, unload, discharge cargo,
exclude, move away, bring out,
remove, subtract, thrust out,
turn out, take away, depose,
discharge or turn off from ser-
vice, expel, dimiss from employ,
excommunicate.
Unva, v.y see ufua.
Unvangana, v., to understand or
hear each other.
Unsuluka, vi., to be ajar or open.
Unsalula, vt.y to open a door, put
ajar.
Uvua, vt., to wash, cleanse, purify,
purge, clean.
Uvula, v/., to husk or shuck (as
com).
Uvum, 3, n.(Eng.), oven, stove.
oxa mu u., to bake.
Uxa, vt.{from ula, to be full), to
fiU, inflate, cause to expand
or swell or distend.
Vangala, vi,, to sit tailor-fashion.
Vila, v., to deny a charge.
Tiaga, vt.y to crunch or rub up in
the hands, make fire by friction,
mash between the hands.
Vlnyo, 3, n.Qrom Portuguese), im-
ported wine.
budimi bua mioxi ya vinyo,
vineyard.
mamoma a kuensa n*A v.,
grapes.
muoxl wa mamoma a kuensa
n»A v., grape-vine.
Tuadlka, vt.{from vuala), to dress,
clothe, adorn.
Vuala, vt.y to dress one's self, wear,
put on clothes,
v. bllensa, to be adorned, be
dressed up.
Tuanduluka, v*., to be mixed or
mingled or stirred together, be
muddy.
Yuandulula, z//., to mix together,
stir together, mingle together,
muddy.
Tudlxa, vt,y to make full amount,
make full or complete measure,
make exact, fill up, increase.
Tula, vi.y to be full amount or
quantity or measure, be com-
plete, be enough or adequate
or sufficient or exact, suffice, be
filled, increase in number or
quantity.
neg. of v., to be insufficient, be
inadequate, be short of.
Tula, v/., to take oflf clothes, un-
dress, to strip off or pull off
or put off clothes.
Vulangana, vi.^ to be a flood. MI
is used as subj.
Vuluka, vi.y to remember, call to
mind or memory, come to
mind, recall, recollect.
Tulula, vt.y to call to one's mind, re-
mind, bring to one's memory,
cause to remember, put in
mi id of.
VuluxA, vt.y see vulula.
Vundixa, vt.^ to magnify (as mi-
croscope).
Vundula, v/., to stir or beat or mix
up together.
Vunsa, vt.y to fold, bind up, wrap
around, coil, roll up, wind
around, gird, surround, en-
circle, enclose, entwine.
Vungila, vL, see vunga.
Vunguluka, vi.^ to open out,
spread out, unfold, unroll, un-
wind, unwrap, wriggle, bloom,
flower.
Vungulula, vt.y to open out, unfoH,
spread out, stretch out, unbind,
unroll, unwrap, unwind, dis-
entangle, extricate.
W.
Weslta, 3, «.(Eng.), west.
Wewe, pers. pro.y thou, you {pi.)
4o6
XIKIKA— XUKULA,
Xiklka, vt.(Jrom xikama, to sit
down), to cause to sit down,
set down, seat.
Xlkila, vi., to come to end of (as
path), stop.
Xikixa, vLy to finish, complete,
terminate, bring to end, per-
fect, conclude, fulfill, have
done.
X. with dlyoyo or mutftyo or
muaku or nvita, to quiet,
hush, quell, still.
Xila, adj.y used with num, to ex-
press exact or perfect or com-
plete number; as, clnunu
cixila, an exact thousand.
Xila, vi., to be burnt or scorched.
Xima, adj.j all, entire, intact, whole,
perfect, total.
Xima, vt.y to tell a falsehood or
untruth, lie, deceive, entice,
beguile, trick, bear false wit-
ness, fabricate, be false.
Ximbuka, vt.^ to fall down (as
tree).
Ximbula, vi.j to throw down in
sense of push over, overthrow,
blow down.
Ximika, vt.^ to transplant, plant,
set out, set into.
Ximinyina, z//., to tell a falsehood
or lie on, accuse falsely, bear
false witness against.
Ximixa, v., to feign, pretend, pro-
fess.
Xinda, v., to throw down one in
wrestling. When used with the
reflexive sigfty the word has
rejerence to a person tripping
up and falling.
dixinda bualam , to fall back-
wards.
Xindama, vi., to be fixed, stand
firm or immovable or steady,
be steadfast, be solid.
Xindamina, vi.y to walk with a
staff, i.e., to steady one's self.
Xindika, v/., to fix firmly in, to
make firm or immovable, pack
or be^t down, press or push or
Xindika (continued).
shove down, compress, squeeze
or cram down.
Xindikixa, v/., to accompany or
conduct or attend or escort one
a short distance on the path
in order to bid farewell.
Xinta, vt.y to change, exchange,
trade, substitute one for an-
other.
Xintakana, vt., to exchange, trade,
alternate, change, substitute
one for another.
Xintakanya, vt.y see xintakana.
Xintaktkxa, vt.y see xintakana.
Xitakaha, ^i., to be dense or
thick (as forest).
Xixa, vi.y to be last or behind or
behindhand in doing, be the
hindermost, be late, be in the
rear.
Xixa, vt.y used in phrases mu bu-
hele and mu bulanda, mean-
ing to impoverish.
Xixamuka, vi.ijrom xixa, to be
last), to be slow, do or move
slowly or sluggishly, walk or
work lazily, be dilatory, lag,
procrastinate.
X*-muenu, i, n.{pl. is bax'-
muenu), father-in-law. The
poss. pro. enclitic is used after
the x». §§ 42, Note 2, 138.
Xoboka, vi.y to be bendable, be
pliant, be pliable, be flexible,
be supple.
Xomuna, vt., to pull up, take up.
Xoxa, vt.y to see, view, witness,
behold, examine by looking,
find, look at, inspect, observe,
notice, regard, overlook, over-
see, superintend, watch after,
perceive.
X. talala, to look at steadfastly,
gaze at, stare at.
Xuhula, vt.y to hull or husk or
shuck (as peas by beating).
Xukula, vt.y to nod a3sentf
READING EXERCISES.
L A CONVERSATION.
Bikila Kasonso, Call Kasongo,
Kasonso udLkudi kunyi? Where is Kasongo?
Lua kunoko, Come here.
Ta ubikile batuadi ba bintu, Go and call the carriers {of the things),
Ndi musue kuya ku IbanJ lelu, / want to go to Ibanj to-day,
Ndi nkSba bantu makmni abidi baye n'Inyi, / am looking for
twenty people to go with me,
Buonso buetu tudlku, We are all here,
Imtknl mu mulongo, Stand in a line,
Kabuya, wakuangata bintu bla kndia mu nxila? Kabuya^ did you
get the things for eating on the road ?
E, nakuangata btdia ne mlnyl a ngulnbe ne mlnyi a ngombe
ne luhanza lua munyinyi ne Ineho, Yes, I have gotten some bread and
some lard and some butter and a tin of meat and some salt,
Liua ne cifulu cllnyi ne eikowela ne bisab&ta. Bring my hat and
coat and shoes,
Tuye lubilu, Let us go in a hurry.
Nakuhanga, ndi musue kubuela mu buanda, / ha?ve become tired,
I want to get in the hammock.
Tuakuflka mu dltu dinlne, We have arrived in the big forest.
Monl mpumba, itu yasuma bantu, See the driver ants, they bite.
Ditu diakuxftla ku nylmaj tudi ha mpata katataka, The forest
remains behind, we are now on the plain,
Musulu udi ha buihi, tusuasua ml a kunua, A stream is near, we
want some water to drink.
Nakukftla kabidl, nengende hanxt, I am strong again, I will walk
(on the ground),
£u musoko kl? What village is this ?
408
rvXi/VL^xi'MV^ si,j\jijr.\^±orjO.
II. PARAPHRASES FROM SOME OF THE PARABLES OF
CHRIST.
LUSXTMUINn LUA MUANA WAEADI MUJIMINE.
Bantu ba bungi bakalua kudi Jlsus, bakalua kdnva bualu buakam-
beye. Jisus wakamba lusumuinu ne: Muntu mulumi wakadiku.
Wakadi ne bana balumi babdi. Muana muakunyi wakulua kudi ta-
tu'andi wakuamba ne, "Ntahaluila biuma biebi." Tatu'abo wakuba-
tS.haluila biuma biandi. Muana muakunyi wakuangata bintu biandi
bionso, wakuya n'abi kule ku musoko mukuabo.
Hakufikeye ku musoko, wakuenza biandi malu mabi, wakutangaltlxa
bintu biandi hatuhu. Hakuhua bintu biandi bionso, dole ciakulua
ku musoko; muana muakunyi kakadi ne da ktila bia kudia. Wakaya
biandi kudi muena musoko, wakuangata mukanda wa mudimu. Muena
musoko wakumutuma ne, "Ya ku budimi buinyi, udixe ngulube yin^d
bia kudia." Wakaya, wakadi ne ns&la ya bungi, kuakadi muntu
wakumuha bia kudia; wakubanga kudia bihusu bia nkonde, biakadi
ngulube idia. Wakuelangana mexi ne, "Bahika ba tatu'inyi badi ne
bintu bia bungi bia kudia, aha ndi nfuila ns&la cin3ri? nembike, nenye
kudi tatu'm)ri, nentonde bualu ne, 'Tatu'inyi, nakuenzela Nzambi
malu mabi ne wewe kabidi. Ndi muntu mubi, dena muan'ebi. Ndi
nkfiba mukanda wa mudimu bu bahika bebi bakuabo.*" Yeye wakue-
langana mexi nunku. Wakabika, wakalua kudi tatu'andi. Hakadiye
mulue mu nxila kuakua, tatu'andi wakumumona, wakumusua, makuen-
da luktisa, wakumusangana mu nxila, wakumuakidila.
Muana wakuambila tatu'andi ne, "Tatu'injri, nakuenzela Nzamb
malu mabi ne wewe kabidi, dena muntu muimpe bu muan'ebi kabidi.*'
Tatu'andi wakubikila muntu wandi ne, "Ya wangate bilulu bimpe,
imiuhe, aluate; wele kakana ku munu, umubuexe bisabita. Ya
umu^dhele kana ka ngombe, tudie, muoyo wetu wakusanka. Muan'inyi
wakadi mufue, udi ne muoyo kabidi; wakadi mujimine, wakumueneka
kabidi.»»
LU S UMUINU LUA LAZALUSA NE MUNTU MUBAXI.
Kale muntu mubXxi wakadiku. Wakadi uluata bilulu bimpe.
Muntu muhele wakadaku, da diandi Lazalusa. Lazalusa wakidi
ulala ku mbelu kua muntu mubS-xia, wakadi ulomba muntu mubaxi
nkototo ya kudia. Lazalusa wakadi ne mputa hani'bidi handi honso;
mbua yakalua kultika.
412
READING EXERCISES.
wakuya ku musoko mukuabo, wakuya kubiika mukiixi. Hakadiye
ulua butuku ne muktixi'andi, mixikankunde dikumi yakuya mu nxila,
yakuya kumuakidila. Mixikankunde itanu yakadi ne mexi, mikuabo
itanu ydkadi mihote. Yakadi ne mexi yakaya ne minyi a bungi a kueia
mu mpanza ya kahia. Yakadi mihote yakaya ne minyi manyamanya.
Buonso buai yakuya mu nxila. Hakuxikamai kukala kua nxila to,
tulu tuakubueia mu mesu, yakulala tulu. Mundankulu bakuela bila
ne, " Mubdki wa muktixi ulualua, tuyi kumuakidila."
Mixikankunde yakadi ne mexi yakubika, yakuamba kuya kumua-
kidila. Mixikankunde mihote yakubika, yakuk^ma ne, ''Minyi etu
akuhua.'' Yakaya kudi mikuabo yakadi ne mexi ne, "Nutuhe bietu
minyi, etii akuhua/' Yakadi ne mexi yakuamba ne, "Naxa, katua-
kunuluila ne minyi, yi bienu kdla minyi kudi bantu bakuabo." Hakayai
kdla minyi, mubtiki wa muktixi wakulua. Wakubuela mu nsubu
wandl ne bantu bonso bakadi n'andi, ne mixikankunde yakadi ne
mexi. Yeye wakunxila cibi.
Hakalua mixikankunde mihote, yakusangana dbi cinxila. Yakuela
di ne, "Mukelenge, unsulula cibi." Yeye wakuamba ne, "Naxa,
iena munumiinye."
414
INDEX.
Compound predicate, 446.
Comp)ound sentence, 452.
Comp)ound subject, 441 (/) (i) and
(2).
Comp)ound tenses, 194, 125, 165
Rem. 2, 320 Rem. 2, 321 Rem.
4, 443 W Rem. 4.
Concord, 58-69.
Condnional clauses, 459, 560.
Conjunctions, 430-436, coordi-
nate and correlative, 431-43S;
ne, 432; naxa . . . naxa, 433;
ley I, 434; tadi and kadi, 435;
subordinate, 436.
Consonants, 3-15 i double con-
sonants, 1 3-1 5; euphonic changes
of, 29-34,
Defective nouns, 42; joined with
poss. pro., 42 Notes i and 2.
Demonstrative pro., 143-163; in-
dicating near opjects, 149-15 1;
indicating remote objects, 152-
155; indicating objects near the
person. sDoken to, 156-158; em-
phatic demonstratives, 159-162;
with loc., 163 and Notes.
Derivative verbs and nouns, 322,
etc.
Diminutives, 50; in pi. to express
bulk, 50 Rem.
Diphthongs, 16-18; last letter of,
determining suffix, 329 (e) and
(/). 334 (e) and (/).
Direct discourse, 455 (b) (2).
Elision, of vowels, 23; between
words, 24 and (a)-{d).
Enclitic forms of poss. pro., 138,
42 and Notes.
Euphony, 22-34.
Expensive or reversive form of
verb, 345-
Factitive pred., 449 {d).
First pres. actual tense indie, 262-
264.
Forms of v., see applied, causa-
tive, INTENSIVE, etc., 328-346.
Future indie, 293-295, 113 Rem.
2; in rel. clauses, 172 and Rem.
Future imminent tense indie, 296-
298.
Gender, 38, 56 (a) (6), 105 Rem.
4.
Hortative iir.perative, 237 (c) (i)-
(5)-
Imperative mood, 234-236, 191;
peculiar constructions, 237 (a)-
(d); a simp»e sentence, 439
Rem. I.
Indefinite pronouns, 181-189; -a
bungi, ngla-ngi, ngl, 181;
onso, 182; nya-nya, 183; ha-
tuhti, b$, clnana, 184; kuabo,
nga, 185; ha bu-, 186; each
other, one another^ they, one^ etc.,
188, 189.
Indicative mood, 181, 255-302. See
TENSES.
Indirect object, 449 (c); pro. suflSx
used as, 124 (c); pro. infix used
as, 127 (c) Note; pcsition of
direct and indirect cbjs., 450.
Indirect question, 169, 470-472.
Infinitive mood, 191,238-241; uses
of, 239 (a)-(tf); infin. andpurpor-
tive moods contrasted, 240, 462
and Rem.
Inseparable loc. and noun words,
423 (2) {h).
Intensive form of v., 339, 374.
Interjections, 437.
Internal obj., 449 {g).
Interrogative pronouns, 173-179;
position of, 173 Rems.; ngan-
yl7 174; cinganyl? 175 and
Rem. 3; cinyl? 175 Rem. i;
cl7 175 Rem. 2; kl7 176;
munyi? blxi? 177, 173 Rem. i;
nga? 178.
Interrogative sentences, direct, 468,
469, 443 (c); indirect, 470-472;
direct interrog. a simple sentence,
439 Rem. 2.
4IC)
INDEX.
Plural, 39, 40; sing, and pi. in
di£ferent dasses, 51; pi. of
muaii*a bute, etc., 57; pi. o|
x*-inuenu, mbl-clna, tatu-
muenu, ,ina*-muenu, 42 Notes
2 and 3.
Position, of adj., 72 and Rems.;
of subj., 443; of pred. modifiers,
448; of pro. infixes and suf-
fixes, 127; of interrog. pro., 173
and Rems.; of direct and indi-
rect obj., 450.
Possessive case, 87 (a) and Rems.,
105 Rem. 7, 167.
Possessive pronouns, 128-142; as
enclitic with defective nouns, 42
Notes I and 2, 138 and Rems.;
pers.' pro. instead of poss., 137;
with loc, 139-142; with buonso,
182 Rem.; with ha bu-, 186.
Predicate, 444-451; with n, 445.
Prefixes, 40, 59, 60, 113, 114, 128,
164; primary and uses, 60-65,
249, 251; secondary and uses,
66-68, 114 Rem. 3, 121, 130.
Prepositions, 422-429; locatives,
423, 424; -», 425; ne» 426;
kudi, 427; bu, buina, 428; mis-
cellaneous, 429.
Present habitual indie, 268-271.
Present imminent indie, 299-302.
Present perf. progressive indie,
259-361.
Present progressive indie, 256-258.
Present purportive, 310-312.
Present repetitive indie, 287-289.
Present subjunctive, 304-306.
Primary prefixes, see prefixes.
Pronominal infixes, 11 6-1 19, 127.
Pronominal prefixes, 113, 114, 244.
Pronominal suffixes, 120-126, 127.
Pronouns, 101-189. SeePERSONAL,
POSSESSIVE, REMONSTRATIVE,
RELATIVE, INTERROGATIVE, IN-
DEFINITE.
Protasis, of pres. general conditions,
306 (a), 459 (a); of future con-
ditions, 306 (ft), 459 (^); of past
conditions, 459 (c); when neg.,
460.
Purportive mood, 191, 310-312,
461; use as imperative, 237 (6)
2Uid {c) (3)-(5); contrast infin.
and purportive, 240; for English
infin., 455 (b) (2) Rem. 2.
Purpose, clauses of, 461, 462.
Reciprocal form of v., 340.
Reflexive form of v., 118.
Relative pronoims, 164-172; as
subj., 164; as obj., 165 and
Rems.; with loc, 168 (a) and (6);
with ne, 168 (c); neg. in rei.
clauses, 171; fut. tense in rel.
clauses, 172 and Rem.; in-
verted position with, 443(ft)
Rem. 5 (i); introducing adj.
clause, 454.
Repetitive form of v., 346.
Result, clauses of, 463.
Secondary prefixes, see prefixes.
Second pres. actual indie, 265-267.
Sentence, the, 438; simple, 439-
451; compound, 452; complex,
453-472; interrog., 467, etc.
Simple sentence, 439-451.
Syigular, 39, 40; sing, and pi. in
different dasses, 51.
Spelling, I Note 5.
Subject, 440-443, 126; pro. suf-
fixes as, 124 (a); rel. pro. as, 164;
infin. as, 239 (a) ; position of, 443;
substantive clause as, 455 (a).
Subjunctive mood, 191, 303-309;
use as imperative, 237 {d). See
TENSES.
Substantive clauses, 455; inverted
position with, 443 (b) Rem. 5(2).
Suffixes, pronominal, 120-126; with
poss. pro., 128, 130 and Rems.
I, 2.
Syllables, i9-«i; when diph-
thongs, 18.
Syntax, 438, etc.
Temporal clauses, 458
Tenses, simple, 193; compound.
TVNews
OpenLibrary